ANGLO-AMERICAN
CATALOGUING RULES
Second Edition
2002 Revision
2005 Update
JOINT STEERING COMMITTEE FOR REVISION OF AACR
Chair
Sally Strutt (2004- )
Matthew Beacom (2003-2004)
Ann Huthwaite (1999-2003)
Ralph W. Manning (1996-1999)
Pat Oddy (1992-1996)
Ben R.Tucker (1989-1992)
Jean Weihs (1984-1989)
Frances Hinton (1981-1983)
Peter R. Lewis (1974-1980)
Secretary
Nathalie Schulz (2001- )
Jacqueline Norfolk (1999-2001)
Margaret Stewart (1996-1999)
Sally Strutt (1992-1996)
Avie Stein (1984-1992)
Marjorie Jelinek (1983)
Ann Hobart (1980-1983)
Michael Yelland (1979)
Carol R.Kelm (1974-1978)
AMERICAN LIBRARY ASSOCIATION
Representative
Jennifer Bowen (2004- )
Matthew Beacom (2001-2004)
Brian E.C. Schottlaender (1995-2001)
Janet Swan Hill (1989-1995)
Helen F. Schmierer (1984-1989)
Frances Hinton (1979-1983; deputy, 1974-1978)
John D. Byrum (1974-1978)
BRITISH LIBRARY
Representative
Sally Strutt (1996- )
Nick Eden (Substitute, 1997)
Pat Oddy (1989-1996)
John Byford (1986-1989)
Joyce Butcher (1981-1985)
Joel C. Downing (1978-1980; deputy, 1974-1978)
Peter R. Lewis (1974-1978)
CILIP: CHARTERED INSTITUTE OF LIBRARY
AND INFORMATION PROFESSIONALS
Representative
Hugh Taylor (2004- )
Robert Atkinson (2002-2004)
Susan Brown (1996-2002)
Rodney Brunt (1989-3995)
Alan Jeffreys (1986-1989)
Eric Hunter (1980-1985)
Peter R. Lewis (1978-1979)
G.E. Hamilton (deputy, 1974-1978)
Phillip K. Escreet (1974-1978)
AUSTRALIAN COMMITTEE ON CATALOGUING
Representative
Deirdre Kiorgaard (2003- )
Ann Huthwaite (1994-2003)
Diana Dack (1989-1994)
Elaine Hail (1984-1989)
Jan Fuller-ton (1981-1983)
CANADIAN COMMITTEE ON CATALOGUING
Representative
Margaret Stewart (1999- )
Ralph W. Manning (1986-2999)
Jean Weihs (1981-1986)
Ronald Hagler (1979-1980; deputy, 1974-1978)
Edwin Buchinski (1975-1978)
Jean Lunn (1974-1975)
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS
Representative
Barbara B. Tillett (1994- )
Sarah E. Thomas (1992-1994)
Ben R. Tucker (1976-1992)
Robert M, Hiatt (deputy, 1975-1978)
Elizabeth Tate (1974-1976)
C. Sumner Spalding (1974)
Second edition, 1978, edited by Michael Gorman and Paul W. Winkler
Joint Steering Committee for Revision of AACR Web site: http://www.collectionscanada.ca/jsc/index.html
ANGLO-AMERICAN
CATALOGUING
RULES
Second Edition
2002 Revision
2005 Update
Prepared under the direction of
THE JOINT STEERING COMMITTEE FOR REVISION OF AACR
a committee of:
The American Library Association
The Australian Committee on Cataloguing
The British Library
The Canadian Committee on Cataloguing
The Chartered Institute of Library and Information Professionals
The Library of Congress
AMERICAN LIBRARY ASSOCIATION / Chicago
CANADIAN LIBRARY ASSOCIATION / Ottawa
CHARTERED INSTITUTE OF LIBRARY AND INFORMATION PROFESSIONALS / London
Published 2005 by
AMERICAN LIBRARY ASSOCIATION
50 East Huron Street, Chicago, Illinois 60611
ISBN 0-8389-3555-9 (full text with update)
ISBN 0-8389-3556-7 (full text with update and binder)
ISBN 0-8389-3557-5 (update pages only)
CANADIAN LIBRARY ASSOCIATION
328 Frank Street, Ottawa, Ontario K2P OX8
ISBN 0-88802-314-6 (full text with update)
ISBN 0-88802-313-8 (full text with update and binder)
ISBN 0-88802-315-4 (update pages only)
Facet Publishing for
CHARTERED INSTITUTE OF LIBRARY AND INFORMATION PROFESSIONALS
7 Ridgmount Street, London WC1E 7AE
ISBN 1-85604-570-6 (full text with update)
ISBN 1-85604-571-4 (full text with update and binder)
ISBN 1-85604-569-2 (update pages only)
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Anglo- American cataloguing rules / prepared under the direction of the Joint
Steering Committee for Revision of AACR, a committee of the American
Library Association ... [et al.]. — 2nd ed., 2002 revision.
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 0-8389-3529-X (loose-ieaf with binder) — ISBN 0-8389-3530-3
(loose-leaf without binder) — ISBN 0-8389-3531-1 (binder only)
1. Descriptive cataloging — Rules. I. Joint Steering Committee for
Revision of AACR. II. American Library Association.
Z694.15.A56 A53 2002
025.3'2— dc21 2002073596
Library and Archives Canada Cataloguing in Publication
Anglo-American cataloguing rules / prepared under the direction of the Joint
Steering Committee for Revision of AACR, a committee of the American
Library Association ... [et al.]. — 2nd ed., 2002 revision.
Co-published by: Chartered Institute of Library and Information
Professionals, American Library Association.
Includes bibliographical references and index.
ISBN 0-88802-299-9 (text only). — ISBN 0-88802-300-6 (text with binder).
1. Descriptive cataloging — Rules. I. Joint Steering Committee for
Revision of AACR II, Canadian Library Association III. Chartered
Institute of Library and Information Professionals IV. American Library
Association
Z694.15.A56A53 2002 025.3'2 C2002-903551-1
British Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data
A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library
Copyright © 2005, American Library Association, Canadian Library Association,
and the Chartered Institute of Library and Information Professionals
CONTENTS
COMMITTEES vii
PREFACE TO THE 2002 REVISION xv
SUMMARY OF RULE REVISIONS SINCE AACR Second Edition
(1998 Revision) xvii
GENERAL INTRODUCTION i
Part I
Description
Introduction Part 1-1
1 General Rules for Description 1-1
2 Books, Pamphlets, and Printed Sheets 2-1
3 Cartographic Materials 3-1
4 Manuscripts (Including Manuscript Collections) 4-1
5 Music 5-1
6 Sound Recordings 6-1
7 Motion Pictures and Videorecordings 7-1
S Graphic Materials 8-1
9 Electronic Resources 9-1
10 Three-Dimensionai Artefacts and Realia 10-1
11 Microforms 1 1-1
12 Continuing Resources 12-1
13 Analysis 13-1
Part II
Headings, Uniform Titles, and References
Introduction Part II- 1
21 Choice of Access Points 21-1
22 Headings for Persons 22- 1
23 Geographic Names 23- 1
24 Headings for Corporate Bodies 24- 1
25 Uniform Titles 25-1
26 References 26-1
APPENDICES
A Capitalization A-l
B Abbreviations B-l
C Numerals C-l
□ Glossary D-l
E Initial Articles E-l
INDEX Index-1
AACR2 Revision 2002
COMMITTEES
The following lists, in alphabetical order by country, show committee
membership and liaisons as of February 2005.
AUSTRALIA
Australian Committee on Cataloguing
Chair
Ebe Kartus (2003- )
Peter Haddad (2001-2003)
Pam Dunlop (1995-2001)
Andrew Welis (1993-1994)
David Toll (1992)
Simon McMillan (1988-1991)
Anthony Ketley (1986-5987)
Jeffrey Scrivener (1984-1986)
Warwick Cathro (1982-1983)
Allan Horton (1981-1982)
Olivia Abbay (1984-1989)
Judith Baskin(1981)
Stan Bastow (1981-1985)
Louise Burmester (1992)
Warwick Cathro (1981-1983)
Diana Dack (1986-1994)
Pam Dunlop (1994-2001)
Warwick Dunstan (1988-1989)
Maggie Exon (1989-1991)
Jan Fullerton (1981-1987)
Pam Gatenby (1989-1990)
Gaye Gericke (1991)
Eugenie Greig (1981-1982)
Peter Haddad (198 1-1982; 1985-1987;
1998-2003)
Elaine Hall (1983-1989)
Twila Herr{1986; 1990-1992)
Philip Hider (2004- )
Helen Hoffmann (1981-1988; 1991-2004)
Ann Huthwaite (1992- )
Fontaine Ip (1988-1990)
Ebe Kartus (2002- )
Anthony Ketley (1983-1986)
Deirdre Kiorgaard (2001- )
Robert Langker (1983-1984)
Giles Martin (1990-1999)
Simon McMillan (1986-1988; 1993)
Susanne Moir (1995-2002)
Margareta Nicholas (1990-1995)
Jeanette Rosengren (1988-1990)
Jeffrey Scrivener (1982-1986)
Chris Taylor (1996-2001)
John Thompson (1988-1991)
Janet Thorp (1993-1999)
Julia Trainor (1993-2003)
Rob Wails (2003- )
Andrew Wells (1992-1994)
Julie Whiting (2003- )
CANADA
Canadian Committee on Cataloguing
Comhe Canadien de Catalogage
Chair
Christine Oliver (1999- )
Ralph W. Manning (1986-1998)
Jean Weihs (1981-1986)
Ronald Hagler (1979-1980)
Edwin Buchinski (1975-1978)
Jean Lunn (1974-1975)
AACR2 Revision 2002: 20O5 Update
COMMITTEES
Edwin Buchinski (1975-1980)
Jack Cain (1974-1978)
Clarisse Cardin (Secretary, 1975-1983)
Joseph Cox (1996-2001)
Thomas Delsey (1979-1983)
Pierre Deslauriers (1974-1981)
Charlotte Dionne (1988-1991)
Mary Dykstra (1986-1995)
Benoit Ferland (2001-2005)
Louise Filbn (1994-2001)
Gaston Founder (1991-2001)
Derek R. Francis (1981-1983)
Robert Giroux (1979-1986)
Daniel Godon {2005- )
Ronald Hagler (1974-1980)
Lynne C. Howarth (2001- )
Lise Lavigne (1982-1994)
Jean Lunn (1974-1975)
Elizabeth McKeen (1998- )
Deb MacLean (1993-1997)
Ralph W. Manning (1984-1998)
Pierre Manseau (1986-1988)
Wendy Moriarity (1984-1986)
Christine Oliver (1997- )
Andre Paul (1981-1996)
Paule Roiland-Thomas (1974-1979)
Hlib Sirko (1974-1979)
Donna Slater (Secretary, 1984-1985)
Margaret Stewart (1998- )
Jane Thacker (Secretary, 1986- )
Jean Weihs (1979-1986)
Nancy Williamson (1986-1993)
Resource Groups
Association of Canadian Map Libraries and Archives (formerly Association of Canadian Map Libraries):
Vivien Cartmell (1979-1984); Velma Parker (1984- )
Canadian Association for Graduate Education in Library, Archival, and Information Studies (formerly
Canadian Association of Library Schools): Nancy Williamson (1980-1986); Donald Cook (1987-1989);
John Leide (1989-1995)
Canadian Association for Information Science: Donna Duncan (1980-1983); David LaFranchise
(1985-1991); Pat Johnston (1991-1997); Mary Nash (1997-1998); Michele Hudon (1998-2001); Grant
Campbell (2001- )
Canadian Association of Law Libraries: Shih-Sheng Hu (1979-1983); Dana Dvorak (1983-1987); Humayun
Rashid (1987-1989); Lenore Rapkin (1989- )
Canadian Association of Music Libraries: Gerald Parker (1979-1982); Joan Colcjuhoun (1983-1987); Alison
Hall (1987-1989); Vivien Taylor (1989-1993); Lisa Emberson (1993-1996); Brenda Muir (1996-2003);
Daniel Paradis (2003- )
Canadian Association of Research Libraries: Yvon Richer (1979-1989); Earle Ferguson (1989-1992); Mary
Curran(1992- )
Canadian Council of Archives (formerly Bureau of Canadian Archivists): Kent Haworth (1990-1996);
Mireille Miniggio (1996-2001); Lucie Page (2001-2002); Gerald Stone (2002- )
Canadian Council of Library Schools: Michele Hudon (1996-2001); Grant Campbell (2001- )
Special Libraries Association, Eastern Canada Chapter: Anne M. Galler (1980-1983); John Leide (1984- )
Special Libraries Association, Toronto Chapter: Mary-Lois Williams (1979-1982); Pamela Stoksik
(1983-1985); Linda Reid (1986-1988)
UNITED KINGDOM
CILIP/Bmtish Library Committee on AACR2
Chair
Sally Strutt (2004- )
Susan Brown (19S9-2003)
Alan Jeffreys (1980-1988)
Geoffrey Hamilton (1974-1978)
Robert Atkinson (2002-2004)
Philip Beresford (1988-1989)
John Bowman (2003- )
Susan Brown (1987-2003)
Rodney Brunt (1987-2003)
Kate Bunting (Secretary, 2001-2003)
Joyce Butcher (1974-1986; 1990-1994)
Roger Butcher (1983-1986)
John Byford (1981-1989)
Richard Carpenter (Secretary, 1980-1981)
James Caudwell (2005- )
Ann Chapman (2004- )
Catherine Charnley (1996-1998)
Richard Christophers (1974-1987; Secretary,
1974-1978)
Robina Clayphan (2005- )
Joel C, Downing (1974-1981)
Gordon Dunsire (2003- )
Nick Eden (1996-2003)
James Elliot (1994-1996)
Phillip K. Escreet (1974-1978)
Lucy Evans (1997-1998; 2004- )
Lesley Firth (Secretary, 1997-2000)
Robert Fulford (1974-1978)
Jasia Glowczewska (Secretary, 1993-1997)
Isobel Gordon (Secretary, 1990)
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
COMMITTEES
Katharine Gryspeerdt (Secretary, 2004- )
Tony Hall (1980-1981)
Geoffrey Hamilton (1974-1978)
Michael Hoey (1988-1990)
Jennifer Hunt {Secretary, 1986-1989)
Stuart Hunt (1999- )
Eric Hunter (1975-1985)
Duncan Irvine (1986)
Alan Jeffreys (1974-1990)
Mary Jesper (1974-1978)
Peter R. Lewis (1974-1978)
Anthony Long (1987)
Andrew MacEwan (1999-2004)
Anne Mellor (2003- )
Wilma Minty (1992-1998)
Janet Mitchell (1986-1995)
Neil Nicholson (2003- )
Pat Oddy (Secretary, 1981-1986; 1987-1997)
Lis Pheian (1980-1986)
Geraint Philp (Minute Secretary, 1998-2000)
Christopher Ravilious (1976-1978)
Heather Rosie {1997- )
Jane Savidge (1999-2003)
Malcolm Shifrin (1974-1978)
Sally Strutt (1994- )
Hugh Taylor (2003- )
John Thomas (1982-1985)
Elizabeth Traynor (Secretary, 1989)
Robert Vickers {Secretary, 1991-1993)
Janice Wrench (1990-1994)
UNITED STATES (through 1978)
American Library Association
Resources and Technical Services Division
Catalog Code Revision Committee
Chair
John D. Byrum
Li2beth Bishoff
Winifred Duncan
Neal L. Edgar
Barbara Gates (1977-1978)
Doralyn J. Hickey
Frances Hinton
Carol Ishimoto (1974-1976)
Paul Kebabian (1974-1976)
Ake Koel
Joan Marshall (1977-1978)
Marian Sanner (1974)
Helen Schmierer (1976-1978)
Edith Scott
Gordon Stevenson (1974-1976)
Resource person
C. Sumner Spalding (1975-1977)
Recording secretary
Marilyn Jones {1977-1978)
Ann Murphy (1974-1976)
Subcommittee on Rules for Cataloging Machine-Readable Data Files
Chair
Elizabeth Herman
Laurence W,S. Auld
Geraldine Dobbin (1974-1976)
Walter J. Fraser
Carolyn Kacena
Judith Rowe
Hetiriette Avram
Sharon Chappie Henry (1975-1978)
Consultants
AACR Revision Study Committee, Resources and Technical Services Division, ALA, Judith Cannan
(1975-1978)
American Association of Law Librarians, Cecilia Kwan (1975-1978)
American Association of School Librarians, Robert Little
American Library History Round Table, ALA, Constance Rinehart
American Library Trustee Association, ALA, Lee Brawner (1974)
American National Standards Institute (1975-1976)
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
COMMITTEES
American Theological Library Association, Lydia Lo (1975-1978)
Art Libraries Society of North America, Nancy John
Association for Asian Studies (1975-1978)
Association for Educational Communications and Technology, Alma Tillin (1975-1976); William Quinly
(1976-1978)
Association of American Library Schools, Constance Rinehart (1975-1978)
Association of College and Research Libraries, ALA, LeRoy D. Ortopan
Audiovisual Committee, ALA, Evelyn G. Clement (1975)
Catholic Library Association, Arnold M. Rzepecki (1975); Rev, Thomas Pater (1975-1978)
Children's Services Division, ALA, Annette Shockey (1974-1976)
Church and Synagogue Library Association ( 1975)
Committee on Computer Filing, Resources and Technical Services Division, ALA, Joseph Rosenthal
(1975-1976)
Council on Library Resources (1975-1978)
Educational Media Council, Carolyn Whitenack (1975-1976)
Federal Librarians Round Table, ALA, Mary Sauer
Government Documents Round Table, ALA, Bemadine Hoduski
Health and Rehabilitative Library Sendees Division, ALA, Dallas R. Shawkey (1974); Marilyn Jones
(1975-1978)
Information Science and Automation Division, ALA, Barbara Gates
Intellectual Freedom Round Table, Sanford Bennan (1974); James R. Dwyer (1974-1978)
Joint Advisory Committee on Nonbook Materials, Margaret Chisholm (1975); Suzanne Massonneau
(1975-1978)
Library Administration Division, ALA, Morris Schertz (1974-1976)
Library Research Round Table, ALA, Lawrence Leonard (1974); Helen Schmierer (1975-1978)
Medical Library Association, Emilie Wiggins (1975-1978)
Middle East Librarians Association, John A. Eilts (1975-1978)
Music Library Association, Katherine Skrobela ( 1975-1978)
National Federation of Abstracting and Indexing Services (1975-1978)
Reference and Adult Services Division, ALA, Concetta Sacco (1974-1976); David P. Kohl (1976-1978)
Representation in Machine- Readable Form of Bibliographic Information Committee, ALA, Ruth Tighe
(1975); John Knapp (1975-1977)
Social Responsibilities Round Table, Sanford Berman (1974-1975); Joan Marshall (1975-1978)
Society of American Archivists (1975-1978)
Special Libraries Association (1975-1978)
Young Adult Services Division, ALA, Mary K. Chelton (1974)
Descriptive Cataloging Committee
Chair
Michael J. Fitzgerald (from 1976)
Carolyn J. McMillen (to 1976)
Allen Cohen (1977-1978)
ArleneT. Dowell (1977-1978)
Oliver T. Field (1974-1978)
Eugene R. Hanson (1973-1977)
Frances R. Ladd (1975-1978)
Shirley Lewis (1975-1977)
Frances R.L. Needleman (1974-1976)
Leila Payne (1976-1978)
Carolyn A. Small (1975-1978)
Gordon Stevenson (to 1975)
Donald E. Talkington (to 1975)
Alma Tillin (to 1975)
X
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
COMMITTEES
UNITED STATES (from 1979)
American Library Association
Association for Library Collections & Technical Services
(Formerly Resources and Technical Services Division)
Cataloging and Classification Section
Committee on Cataloging: Description and Access
Chair
Mary L. Larsgaard (2003- )
Kristin Lindlan (200 1-2003 J
Adam L. Setoff (2000-2001)
Daniel W. Kinney (1997-2000)
Joan Swanekamp (1995-1997)
Frank E. Sadowski, Jr. (1993-3995)
Brian E.C. Schottlaender (1992-1993)
Edward Swanson (1990-1992)
Vema Urbanski (1988-1990)
Richard P. Smiraglia (1986-1988)
Dorothy McGarry (1985-1986)
Olivia M.A. Madison (1984-1985)
Patricia M. Thomas (1983-1984)
Nancy R. John (1980-1983)
Allen Cohen (1979-1980)
Frances Ladd (1979)
Members
Steven R. Arakawa (2000-2004)
John Attig (1986-1990; 2001-2003; 2004- )
Elizabeth Ruth Baughman (1984-1986)
Matthew Beacom (1996-2000)
Pamela P. Brown (1987-199 1 )
Jo Lynne Byrd (1995-1997)
Michael Carpenter (1988-1992)
Michael A. Chopey (2001- }
Allen Cohen (1979-1981)
Eleanor R. Crary (1979-1980)
Nancy Davey (1991-1995)
Nancy E. Douglas (1985-1989)
Arlene T. Dowell (1979-1981)
John K. Duke (1989-1993)
Bradford L. Eden (2000-2002)
Ann Fiegen (1993-1997)
Peter Vincent Fletcher (2001- )
Cheri A. Folkner (2004- )
Kate Harcourt (2000-2004)
Susan M. Hayes (1999-2002)
Elizabeth Herman (1983-1987)
Doralyn J. Hickey (1979-1981)
Carol Hixson (1997-2001)
Christa F.B. Hoffmann (1979-1983)
Lynne C. Howarth (1993-1997)
Laurel Jizba (1989-1993)
Nancy R. John (1980-1984)
Bruce Chr. Johnson (1990-1994)
Wayne Jones (1998-2000)
Sherry Kelley (1996-2000)
Daniel W. Kinney (1997-2001)
Frances Ladd (1979)
Jay H. Lambrecht (1986-1990)
Mary L. Larsgaard (1997-2001; 2003- )
Lee W. Leighton (1990-1994)
Shirley J. Lincicum (1999-2001)
Kristin LindJan (2001- )
Olivia M.A. Madison (1981-1985)
Elizabeth Mangan (2004- )
Marilyn Jones McCIaskey (1979-1982)
Dorothy McGarry (1982-1986; 2001- )
Ingrid Mifflin (1991-1995)
Monty L. Montee (1985-1989)
Patricia G, Oyler (1983-1987)
Janet G. Padway (1988-1990)
Carien M. Ruschoff (1984-1988)
Frank E. Sadowski, Jr. (1992-1996)
Adam L. Setoff (1997-2001)
Kim M. Schmidt (1979-1980)
Brian E.C. Schottlaender (1989-1993)
Judith C. Singleton (1979-1981)
Richard P. Smiraglia (1984-1988)
Christopher L. Sugnet (1985-1989)
Janet Swan Hill (1980-1984)
Joan Swanekamp (1993-1997)
Edward Swanson (1979-1983; 1990-1992)
Patricia M. Thomas (1980-1984)
Karen A. Trainer (1981-1985)
Mitch L. Turitz (1995-1999)
Verna Urbanski (1987-1991)
Sherry L. Vellucci (1998-1999)
Arnold Wajenberg (1981 -1985)
Mark R. Watson (1992-1996)
Jay Weitz (2002- )
Matthew Wise (2002-2004)
Martha Yee (1994-1998)
J. Bradford Young (1994-1998)
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
xi
COMMITTEES
Interns
Jo Lynne Byrd (1993-1995)
Michael A. Chopey (1999-2001)
Ann Fiegen (1992-1993)
Lynnette M. Fields (2001-2004)
Cheri A. Folkner (2001-2004)
Susan M. Hayes (1997-1999)
Carol Hixson (1995-1997)
Shirley J. Lincicum (1997-1999)
John A. Richardson (1995-1997)
Laura Smart (2004- )
Patrick J. Stevens (1993-1995)
Patricia Thurston (2004- )
Patricia S. Vanderberg (1988-1990)
Mark R. Watson (1991-1992)
Tamara Weintraub (1992-1993)
Philip Youngholm (1990-1992)
Kristin Lindlan (1999-2001)
Ex Officio: ALA Representative to the Joint Steering Committee for Revision of AACR, Frances Hinton
(1979-1983); Helen F. Schmierer (1983-1989); Janet Swan Hill (1989-1995); Brian B.C. Schottlaender
(1995-2001); Matthew Beacom (2001-2004); Jennifer Bowen (2004- ). Association for Library Collec-
tions & Technical Services, William I. Bunnell (1979-1987); Karen Muller {1987- 2001); Charles Wilt
(2001- ). Library of Congress, Ben R, Tucker (1979-1992); Sarah E.Thomas (1992-1994); Barbara B.
Tillett (1994- ). OCLC, Inc., Glenn E. Patton (1982- ). Research Libraries Group, Inc., Charles Stewart
(1979-1980); Ed Glazier (1981- ).
Representatives to the Committee
From the American Library Association
Association for Library Collections & Technical Services (formerly Resources and Technical Services
Division)
ALCTS/LITA/RUSA Representation in Machine -Readable Form of Bibliographic Information Committee
(MARBI), John Attig (1982-1986); Anne Highsmith (1986-1990); Sherman Clarke (1990-1994);
Catherine Gerhart (1995-1998); Mark R. Watson (1998-2002); Everett Allgood (2002- )
Acquisition of Library Materials Section (formerly Resources Section), Susan Vita (1979-1981); Miriam W,
Paim (1981-1985); Ceres Birkhead (1985-1988); D. Whitney Coe (1988-1991); Beth Jacoby
(1992-1993); Jean Hudgins (1994-1996); Margo Smith (1998-2002); Louise Sevold (2002-2004);
Stephen J. Smith (2004- )
Cataloging and Classification Section, Committee on Cataloging; Asian and African Materials, Michael J.
Fitzgerald (1984-1986); Dona S. Straley (1986-1988); Gertrude Koh (1988-1989); Dorothy Niekamp
(1990-1991); Karl K. Kahler (1992-1994); James Maccafeni (1995-1996); David Reynolds (1996);
James Gentner (1997); Clare Dunkle (1997); Wen Ling Liu (1997-1998); Sarah Su-erh Elman
(1998-2001); Roberta L. Dougherty (2001); Chalermsee Olson (2001-2002); Shi Deng (2002-2003);
Keiko Suzuki (2003- )
Cataloging and Classification Section, Committee on Cataloging; Children's Materials, Robert E. Boyer
(1983-1984); Laura Colberg (1984-1985); Patricia M. Thomas (1985-1988); Doris C. Dale (1988-1991);
Dorothy M. Shields (1992-1994); Jianrorig Wang (1996-1998); Gabriele I. Kupitz (1998-2002); Kay E.
Lowell (2002-2004); Patricia Ratkovjch (2004- )
Collection Management and Development Section, Matthew W. Wise (1992-1996); Betsy Simpson
(1996-1998); Sheryl Nichin-Keith (1999-2004); Helen F. Schmierer (2005- )
Media Resources Committee (formerly Audiovisual Committee), Sheila S. Intner (1983-1985); Martha Yee
(1985-1986); Bruce Chr. Johnson (1986-1990); Marilyn L. Kercher (1990-1991); Joan Swanekamp
(1991-1993); Eric Childress (1993-1995); Mary Beth Fecko (1995-1996); Marlyn Hackett (1997-1999),
Lowell Ashley (1999-2002); Katha Massey (2002-2004)
Networked Resources and Metadata Interest Group (formerly Digital Resources Committee), Ann Sandberg-
Fox (1997-2002); Mary Woodley (2002- )
Preservation and Reformatting Section, Cecilia S. Sercan (1995-2002)
Preservation of Library Materials Section, G. David Anderson (1984-1986); Paul J. Weiss (1986-1991);
Willy Cromwell (1992-1994)
Reproduction of Library Materials Section, Charles Willard (1979-1983); Colleen Hystop (1984-1986);
Laurel Jizba (1986-1990); Crystal Graham (1990-1992); Cecilia S. Sercan (1992-1994)
Serials Section, Judith Kuhagen (1979-1982); Dea Szatkowski (1982-1983); Jim Cole (1983-1985); Crystal
Graham (1985-1988); Patrick Callahan (1988-1990); Mitch L. Turitz (1990-1992); Jean P. Altschuler
(1992-1995); Marguerite E. Horn (1995-1997); Carolynne Myall (1997-2001); Mary C. Grenci
(2001-2002); David Van Hoy (2002-2004); Kevin M. Randall (2004- )
Technical Services Costs Committee, Michael Shelley (1985-1988); Peri Irish Switzer (1988-1991); Cliff
Glaviano (1992-1993)
Technical Services Measurements Committee, Cliff Glaviano (1993-1995); Victoria Mills (1995-1996)
Association for Library Services to Children, Doris Clack (1984-1986)
Divisions
xii
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
COMMITTEES
Association of College and Research Libraries, LeRoy D. Ortopan (1979-1983); Jennifer Younger
(1983-1984); Ellen Waite (1984-1989); Frank D'Andmia (1988-1990); Colby Mariva Riggs
(1990-1992); Norma H. Martin (1993); Marie Morgan (1995-1997); Robert L. Maxwell (2000- )
Association of Specialized and Cooperative Library Agencies, Elizabeth A. Breedlove (1979-1980)
Library and Information Technology Association, Karen Bendorf (1979—1982); Pamela S. Cenzer
(1982-1983); Carol White (1983-1984); Jeff Rehbach (1984-1985); Peter R. Young (1985-1989);
V, Louise Saylor (1989-1991); Judith Hopkins (1992-1994); Brad Eden (1995-1998); David Williamson
(1998-2001); Shelby E Harken (2001- )
Public Library Association, Jerome Pennington (3979-1982); Gail Shurgot (1982-1983); Susan Nesbitt
(1983-1985); Sheryl Nichin (1985-1988); Donna Cranmer (1988-1990); Judith H. Rossoff (1990-1993);
Margaret Shen (1995-2002); Dawn M. Grattino (2002-2003); Robert C.W. Hall (2003- )
Reference and User Services Association (formerly Reference and Adult Services Division), Sandy Whiteley
(1979-1982); Joseph R. Matthews (1982-1984); Joan Kuklinski (1984-1988); Sally Wayman Kalin
(1988-1989); Noelle Van Pulis (1990- )
Round Tables
American Library History Round Table, Francis L. Miksa, Jr. (1979-1983)
Federal Librarians Round Table, Sue Ellen Sloca (1979-1983); David Brunell (1984); Hollis Landrun
(1985); Mary Stew art -Taylor (1986-1987)
Government Documents Round Table, Bernadine Hoduski (1979-1983); Judy Meyers (1985-1986); David J,
Hardgrove (1986-1988); Gary Cornwell (1988-1990); Mary A. Martin (1991); Rhonda Marker
(1992-1998); Aimee Quinn (1998-2002); Rebecca Culbcrtson (2002- )
Intellectual Freedom Round Table, Karen Tallman (1984); Beth Rile (1985-1988)
International Relations Round Table, Elizabeth A. Widenmann (1988-1992); Laurel Jizba (1993- )
Map and Geography Round Table, Robert Karrow (1979-1980, 3981-1983); Alice Hudson (1980-1981);
Janet Swan Hill (1984-1985); Mary Anne Waltz (1985-1988); Ellen Caplan (1988-1989); Nancy J.
Edstrom (1989-1991); Elizabeth Mangan (1991- )
New Members Round Table (formerly Junior Members Round Table), Joseph R. Edelen, Jr. (1979-1981);
John B. Graves (1981-1982); Donna Cranmer (1982-1984); Antonia Snee (1984-1986); Josephine
Crawford (1986-1988); David Fiste (1988-1989); Mark R. Watson (1989-1991); Kathryn Sorury
(1992-1993); Karen Cook (1993-1995); Jimmie Lundgren (1995-1997); Gerald Langford (1997-1998);
Lori Barnes (1999); Gene Kinnaiy (1999-2001); Kevin A. Furniss (2001-2004); Anna M. Ferris (2004- )
Social Responsibilities Round Table, Joan K. Marshall (1979-1982); Patricia A. Young (1982-1983); Gary
L. Strawn (1983-1990); Sherry Kelley (1990-1996); Larry Heiman (1997-2002); Cynthia Whitacre
(2002- )
From Organizations outside the American Library Association
African Studies Association, Gail Junion (1981-1983)
American Association of Law Libraries, Phyllis Marion (1979-1985); Lee W. Leighton (1985-1989); Regina
Wailen (1990-1993); Ann Sitkin (1993-1999); William Benemann (1999-2002); Kathy Winzer (2002- )
American Theological Library Association, Elvire Hilgert (1983-1984); Joyce L. Farris (1984-1992); Sally
B. Berlowitz (1993-1996); Chris Schone (1997); Judy Knop (1998- )
Art Libraries Society of North America, Nancy R. John (1979-1980); Bethany R. Metidenhall (1980-1982);
Karen Muller (1982-1985); Sherman Clarke (1985-1991); Karen L. Meizner (1992-1994); Daniel Starr
( 1 995-2000); Anne Champagne (2000-2003); Daniel Starr (2003- )
Association for Asian Studies, Committee on East Asian Libraries, Thomas H. Lee (1981-1983)
Association for Recorded Sound Collections, Charles W. Simpson (1979-1987); Daniel W. Kinney
(1987-1997); Laurel Jizba (1998- )
Association of American Library Schools, Martha Mannheimer (1979-1983)
Association of Jewish Libraries, Ellen S. Kovacic (1985-1986); Mischa F. Oppenheim (1986-1988);
Rosalie E. Katchen (1988-1990); Yael Herbsman (1991-1992); Rita Lifton (1992-1993); Ruth A. Rin
(1993-1995); Rachel Simon (1995-1999); Heidi G. Lerner (1999- )
Association of Research Libraries, Carol Mandel (1979-1982); George Gibbs (1982-1983)
Catholic Library' Association, Rev. Thomas Pater (1981-1984); Tina-Karen Forman (1984-1997); Gertrude
Koh(1997- )
Chinese American Librarians Association, Roy Tmg-Kwo Chang (1979-1981); Sally C. Tseng (1981-1983)
Church and Synagogue Library Association, Ruth Sawyer (1979-1983)
Council of National Library and Information Associations, Donald Seibert (1979-1982); Margaret Maes
Axtmann (1982-1983) '
International Association for Social Science Information Services and Technology, Sue A. Dodd
(1979-1988); Elizabeth Stephenson (1988-1989); Patricia S. Vanderberg (1990-2000)
AACR2 Revision 2002; 20O5 Update
xiii
COMMITTEES
Medical Library Association, James E. Raper, Jr. (1979-1983); Sally Sinn (1984-1988); Laurie L,
Thompson (1988-1991); Steve Squires (1991-1997); Valerie St. Pierre Gordon (1997-2000); Robert
McDonald (2000-2003); Karleen Darr (2003- )
Middle East Librarians Association, Frances Morton (1979-1982)
Music Library Association, Katherine C. Skrobela (1979-1980); Richard P. Smiraglia (1980-1983); Joan
Swanekamp (1983-1988); Jennifer B. Bowen (1988-1991); Philip Scbreur (1992-1997); Matthew W.
Wise (1997-2001); Nancy E. Lorimer (2001-2004); Kathy Gleiman {2004- )
Online Audiovisual Catalogers, Nancy B. Olson (1981-1983); Greta de Groat (2004- )
Program for Cooperative Cataloging, Joan Schuitema (1998-2000); Ann Caldwell (2000-2003); Paul J.
Weiss (2003- )
Society of American Archivists, Miriam I. Crawford (1979-1983); John Lancaster (1983-1985); Lauren
Brown (1985-1986); Saundra Taylor (1986-1988); Michael Fox (1988-1990); Jackie M, Dooley
(1990-1992); Marion Matters (1993-1995); Michael Fox (1996-2000); Susan Hamburger (2000-2004);
Mary Lacy (2004- )
Southwestern Library Association, Margaret F, Maxwell (1979-1983)
Special Libraries Association, Marguerite C. Soroka (1979-1981); Mary L. Larsgaard (1982-1983); Claire
Tozier (1984-1985); Chris Grabenstatter (1985-1986); Dorothy McGarry (1986-1988); Ronda E.
Breitbard (1988-1991); Dorothy L. Malcolm (1992); Dorothy McGarry (1992-1993); Adam L. Schiff
(1993-1997); Cynthia M. Whitacre (1997-2001); Sandra Mclntyre (2001- )
Consultants
John Attig (2000-2001), John Duke, Ann Fox, Judith Hopkins, Lynne C. Howarth (1998-2000), Thomas
Jedele, Sherry Kelley (2000-2001), Julie Nilson, Martha Yee (1998-2000)
Web Site Coordinator
John Attig (1997- )
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
PREFACE TO THE 2002 REVISION
The printed version of the 2002 revision of the second edition of the Anglo-American Cata-
loguing Rules (AACR) represents a milestone in the publishing history of the code. It is
being issued as an integrating resource, in loose-leaf format for updating. Updates to the rules
will be released annually. This is in recognition of the fact that changes to the rules are occur-
ring more frequently than in the past and are often substantial.
This revision incorporates the two sets of revisions published as Amendments 1999 and
Amendments 2001. It also includes revisions approved through 2001 and finalized in 2002.
Substantial changes have been made to three chapters: chapter 3 (Cartographic Materials),
chapter 9 (Electronic Resources), and chapter 12 (Continuing Resources). An outline of the
changes made within these chapters and in other parts of the rules may be found in the sum-
mary following this preface. A revised index has been compiled to reflect the changes and to
correct errors in the 1998 revision.
The environment in which the code operates has undergone significant change since the
second edition of the rules was published in 1978. The rise of the Internet and the increasing
use and exchange of electronic resources have had a profound impact. User needs and expec-
tations are also evolving rapidly. In response to the challenges presented in this new environ-
ment, the Joint Steering Committee for Revision of AACR (JSC) has embarked on an ambi-
tious program of investigation and reform, beginning with the International Conference on
the Principles and Future Development of AACR, held in Toronto in 1997. JSC has met regu-
larly in order to meet the deadlines of an increasingly demanding program of work. Six meet-
ings have been held since the International Conference in the following locations: Leeds,
England (November 1998); Brisbane, Australia (October 1999); San Diego, United States
(March 2000); London, England (September 2000); Washington, United States (April 2001);
and, Ottawa, Canada (October 2001).
JSC would not be able to meet these increasing demands without the support of the dedi-
cated and hard-working community of the Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules. The consulta-
tive nature of the rule revision process ensures that informed decisions are made and that
there is a sound mandate for action. In addition to the considerable contribution made by the
JSC members and members of the constituent bodies, certain individuals also make outstand-
ing contributions to the development of the code. Since the International Conference, notable
contributions have been made by Tom Delsey, in his work on modelling AACR, and Jean
Hirons, in her work on accommodating seriality in the rules.
I am confident that JSC, in conjunction with the Committee of Principals for AACR, will
continue to take a strategic approach to planning the evolution of the code, and that as a
result it will remain a viable standard for bibliographic description and access into the future.
Ann Huthwaite, Chair
Joint Steering Committee for Revision
of AACR
AACR2 Revision 2002
XV
SUMMARY OF RULE REVISIONS SINCE
AACR SECOND EDITION 1998 REVISION
This summary is not a detailed list of changes, but a list of the most significant changes in
the 2002 amendments, the 2001 amendments, and the 1999 amendments incorporated into the
current 2002 revision.
AMENDMENTS 2002
Deletion of ruie 1.4D4
Rule 1.4D4 has been deleted. This rule instructed that the name of the publisher, distributor,
etc., appearing in a recognizable form in the title and statement of responsibility area, should
be given in the shortest possible form in the publication, distribution, etc., area. The rule was
judged to be unnecessary and inflexible, and to limit the use of the area for search and
retrieval purposes by automated systems. Examples throughout AACR have been revised to
reflect the deletion of the rule.
Chapter 3 (Cartographic Materials)
The changes to chapter 3 are of three major types:
• additional rules or additions to existing rules for the description of cartographic materi-
als in electronic form;
• miscellaneous changes to existing rules to bring them into line with current practice;
• editorial changes.
The first category is the most substantial, involving changes to the mathematical and other
material specific details area (formerly: Mathematical data area). Three new rules were added:
rule 3.3E (Type and extent of resource); rule 3.3F (Digital graphic representation); and, rule
3.3G (Numbering related to serials). The overall goal is to enable more accurate description
of cartographic materials that are electronic resources and/or continuing resources. Rule 3.3D
(Statement of coordinates and equinox) has been changed to allow the recording of coordi-
nates in decimal degrees as well as in degrees, minutes, and seconds. Additional examples
have been added to rule 3.7B8 (Mathematical and other material specific details) to reflect the
addition of rule 3.3F and the changes to rule 3.3D.
Changes in the second category include: the changing of "map section" to "section," and
"relief model" to "model" in rule 3.5B1; and, the addition of "layout," "production
method," and "medium" as other physical details in rule 3.5C1.
Editorial changes have been made as necessary to match new terminology and to reflect
changes made in other chapters.
AACR2 Revision 2002
xvii
SUMMARY OF RULE REVISIONS
Chapter 12 {Continuing Resources) and other related rules
The scope of chapter 12, now called "Continuing Resources" instead of "Serials," has been
expanded to include resources that have either not been covered in the rules or not adequately
covered. Chapter 12 now encompasses:
• successively issued resources (i.e., serials);
• ongoing integrating resources (e.g., updating loose-leafs, updating Web sites);
• some categories of finite resources (i.e., reprints of serials, resources with characteristics
of serials but whose duration is limited, and finite integrating resources).
Because of the differences in treatment of the various types of continuing resources, the rules
have been expanded to include separate provisions for serials and integrating resources or in
some cases other subcategories of continuing resources such as printed resources, electronic
resources, and updating loose-ieafs. Additionally, separate rules addressing changes in spe-
cific data elements have been included.
Rules in other chapters affected by the changes in chapter 12 have also been revised.
Examples of changes in part I include; the expansion of ruie 1 ,4F8 to cover serials and inte-
grating resources as weil as multipart items; and, changes to rules in chapters 2 and 9 to
reflect the coverage of integrating resources in chapter 12. Examples of changes in part II
include; the revision of rale 21.2A and its division into two subrules to cover major and
minor changes in titles proper; the revision of rules 21.2C and 21.3B and their division into
subruies to cover serials and integrating resources; and, the revision of rule 21.30J and its
division into two subrules to cover added entries for titles proper and for variant titles.
New definitions were added to the glossary for: "bibliographic resource," "continuing
resource," "integrating resource," "iteration," and "updating loose-leaf." Definitions were
revised for: "key-titHe," "monograph," "multipart item," "section," and "serial."
One of the goals of the revision of chapter 12 was the harmonization of AACR with the
International Standard Bibliographic Description for Serials (ISBD(S)) (to be published as
ISBD(CR)) and ISSN guidelines, both of which were also being revised. A number of
changes were made to align the three standards, including: the revision of rule 12.1B2,
requiring the choice of the full form as the title proper when both an initialism/acronym
appear on the chief source of information; and, the revision of rule 21.2 to reflect the three-
way agreement on what constitutes major/minor title changes. In addition, agreement was
reached on definitions in the glossary.
AMENDMENTS 2001
Rule 0.24
Rule 0.24 was reworded to stress the importance of bringing out all the aspects of the item
being described. This revision is considered to be a first step in moving forward on "content
vs. carrier" issues.
General material designation for cartographic materials
The general material designations "globe" and "map" in list 2 in rule 1.1C1 have been
replaced with the single general material designation "cartographic material."
xviii
AACR2 Revision 2002
SUMMARY OF RULE REVISIONS
Chapter 9 (Electronic Resources) and other related rules
The revisions to chapter 9, now called "Electronic Resources," fall into two categories:
• changes to align with the International Standard Bibliographic Description for Elec-
tronic Resources (ISBD(ER));
• changes to accommodate the particular nature of electronic resources.
Changes failing into the first category include: the clarification of the scope of chapter 9 and
the provision of a distinction between direct access and remote access electronic resources;
the addition of an instruction at new rule 9.4B2 to consider all remote access electronic
resources as published; and, changing the name of the file characteristics area (9,3) to "Type
and extent of resource area."
Changes in the second category include: the changing of the chief source of information
from the title screen to the resource itself and the removal of the preference given to internal
sources; the addition of an option at rule 9.5 Bl to allow for the use of conventional terminol-
ogy to describe a physical carrier, e.g., "1 CD-ROM" instead of "1 computer optical disc";
and, the addition of rule 9.7B22 (Item described) to instruct the cataloguer to always give the
date viewed when describing remote access electronic resources. In addition, more current
examples of electronic resources have been included and the glossary has been updated with
new and revised definitions.
The general material designation in list 1 and list 2 of rule MCI has been changed from
"computer file" to "electronic resource,"
Works that report the collective activity of a conference, etc.
The provision that a conference, expedition or event must be prominently named has been
removed from rule 21.1B2(d). The concept of "prominence" is not used in any other cate-
gory of atle21.1B2.
British terms of honour
Rule 22.12B, which prescribed the inclusion of British terms of honour in headings for which
surnames are the entry element, has been deleted. The requirement for terms of address to
precede the forename had proved to be an obstacle to MARC format alignment and record
exchange between the libraries and bibliographic agencies using AACR. In addition, the
terms had small value for identification in such headings and even less for filing purposes.
Where required to distinguish between identical names, terms of honour may still be added
under the rule at 22.19B1.
Terms of address of married women
Because of filing problems associated with the placement of the term of address of married
women (e.g., Mrs.) before the husband's forename, rule 22.15B1 has been revised so that the
term of address follows the husband's forename.
Subordinate conference headings
Rule 24.7A1 was expanded to make it explicit that information indicating the number, fre-
quency, or year(s) of convocation of a conference should also be omitted from headings for
subordinate conferences.
AACR2 Revision 2002
xix
SUMMARY OF RULE REVISIONS
"Work" in music uniform titles
Changes have been made in chapter 25 to clarify the use of the term "work" in the rules for
music uniform titles, including moving the definition in the glossary for "musical work" to a
footnote to rule 25.25A.
Appendix B.5. Other Parts of the Catalogue Entry
Rule B.5 was changed to allow for the replacement of one form of abbreviation with the pre-
scribed abbreviation in the edition statement and with numbering in the series statement. Pre-
viously only full forms of terms could be abbreviated.
Appendix E. Initial Articles
The new appendix contains a list of initial articles from languages most frequently encoun-
tered by cataloguers, and is intended to assist in the application of the rules that call for the
omission of initial articles.
AMENDMENTS 1999
Numbering grammatically integrated with series title
Rule 1.6B1 was expanded to include instructions for cases where numbering is an integral
part of the title proper of the series.
Chronological designation in series numbering
Rule 1 .6G3 was changed to indicate that a chronological designation may be given after a
numeric and/or alphabetic designation. Rule 1 .6A1 and the corresponding rales in other chap-
ters were expanded to include an instruction to enclose a date following a numeric and/or
alphabetic designation in parentheses.
Subscries
Additions were made to rule ].6H to cover more subseries situations. Rule 1.6A1 and the
corresponding rules in other chapters were expanded to include instructions for the punctua-
tion preceding the designation for a subseries.
Numbering
A definition for "Numbering" was added to the glossary.
xx
AACR2 Revision 2002
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
0.1. These rules are designed for use in the construction of catalogues and other lists in gen-
eral libraries of all sizes. They are not specifically intended for specialist and archival librar-
ies, but such libraries are recommended to use the rules as the basis of their cataloguing and
to augment their provisions as necessary. The rules cover the description of, and the provi-
sion of access points for, all library materials commonly collected at the present time. The
integrated structure of the text makes the general rules usable as a basis for cataloguing
uncommonly collected materials of all kinds and library materials yet unknown.
0.2. The second edition of the rules is based on a reconciliation of the British and North
American texts of the 1967 edition. This extends to style, which is generally in accordance
with the Chicago Manual of Style, 1 and to spellings, which are those of Webster's A^iv
national Dictionary. 2 Where Webster's gives as a permitted alternative a British spelling
(e.g., catalogue, centre), it has been used in the rules; where the American usage is the only
one specified (e.g., capitalize), it has been used in the rules. Agreement on terminology has
similarly resulted sometimes in the use of an American term {e.g., membership in) and some-
times in a British term (e.g., full stop).
STRUCTURE OF THE RULES
0,3. The rules follow the sequence of cataloguers' operations in most present-day libraries
and bibliographic agencies. Part I deals with the provision of information describing the item
being catalogued and part II deals with the determination and establishment of headings
(access points) under which the descriptive information is to be presented to catalogue users,
and with the making of references to those headings. The introductions to parts I and II begin
on Part 1-1 and Part II-I respectively.
0.4. In both parts the rules proceed from the general to the specific. In part I the specificity
relates to the physical medium of the item being catalogued, to the level of detail required for
each element of the description, and to the analysis of an item containing separate parts.
1. The Chicago Manual of Style : for Authors, Editors, and Copywriters, — 13th ed., rev. and expanded. —
Chicago ; London : University of Chicago Press, 1982.
2. Webster's Third New International Dictionary of the English Language, Unabridged I editor in chief, Philip Babcock
Gove and the Merrt am -Webster editorial staff. — ■ Springfield, Mass. : Merri am- Webster ; Harlow, Essex : Distributed by
Longman Group, c!986.
AACR2 Revision 2002
1
0.5
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
MAIN ENTRY AND ALTERNATIVE HEADINGS
0.5, In part II the rules are based on the proposition that one main entry is made for each
item described, and that this is supplemented by added entries. The question of the use of
alternative heading entries (i.e., sets of equal entries for each item described) was discussed
but not embodied in the rules. It is recognized, however, that many libraries do not distin-
guish between the main entry and other entries. It is recommended that such libraries use
chapter 21 as guidance in determining all the entries required in particular instances. It will
be necessary, however, for all libraries to distinguish the main entry from the others when:
a) making a single entry listing
or b) making a single citation for a work (as required for entries for related works and
for some subject entries).
In addition, the concept of main entry is considered to be useful in assigning uniform titles
and in promoting the standardization of bibliographic citation.
STRUCTURE OF ENTRIES
0.6. Distinguish a name heading and/or uniform title assigned to a description from the
descriptive data:
either a) by giving them on separate lines above the description
or b) by separating them from the description by a full stop and two spaces.
If an entry begins with a title proper (i.e., the first element of the description):
either a) repeat the title proper on a separate line above the description
or b) give the description alone.
ALTERNATIVES AND OPTIONS
0.7. Some rules are designated as alternative rules or as optional additions, and some other
rules or parts of rules are introduced by optionally. These provisions arise from the recogni-
tion that different solutions to a problem and differing levels of detail and specificity are
appropriate in different contexts. Decide some alternatives and options as a matter of cata-
loguing policy for a particular catalogue or bibliographic agency and, therefore, exercise them
either always or never. Exercise other alternatives and options case by case. All cataloguing
agencies should distinguish between these two types of option and keep a record of their pol-
icy decisions and of the circumstances in which a particular option may be applied.
0.8. The word prominently (used in such phrases as prominently named and stated promi-
nently) means that a statement to which it applies must be a formal statement found in one of
the prescribed sources of information (see 1.0A) for areas 1 and 2 for the class of material to
which the item being catalogued belongs.
0.9. These rules recognize the necessity for judgement and interpretation by the cataloguer.
Such judgement and interpretation may be based on the requirements of a particular catalogue
or upon the use of the items being catalogued. The need for judgement is indicated in these
rules by words and phrases such as if appropriate, important, and if necessary. Such words
and phrases indicate recognition of the fact that uniform legislation for all types and sizes of
2
AACR2 Revision 2002
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
0.14
catalogue is neither possible nor desirable, and encourage the application of individual judge-
ment based on specific local knowledge. This statement in no way contradicts the value of
standardization. Apply such judgements consistently within a particular context and record
the cataloguing agency's policy.
APPENDICES
0.10. Matters of general application (abbreviations, capitalization, the treatment of numerals,
and initial articles) are dealt with in appendices. The instructions given in those appendices
are rules and must be applied consistently, A glossary is also inciuded,
STYLE
0.11, In matters of style not covered by the rules and appendices (e.g., matters of punctuation
other than prescribed punctuation), follow the Chicago Manual of Style.
LANGUAGE PREFERENCES
0.12. The rules contain some instances in which a decision is made on the basis of language
and in which English is preferred. Users of the rules who do not use English as their working
language should replace the specified preference for English by a preference for their working
language. Authorized translations will do the same.
0.13. The ALA/LC romanization tables 3 are used in examples in which romanization occurs.
This usage is based on the recognition that these tables are used by the overwhelming major-
ity of libraries in Australia, Canada, the United Kingdom, and the United States. Authorized
translations will, in examples, substitute romanizations derived from the standard romaniza-
tion tables prevailing in libraries in the countries or areas for which the translation is
intended.
EXAMPLES
0.14. The examples used throughout these rules are illustrative and not prescriptive. That is,
they illuminate the provisions of the rule to which they are attached, rather than extend those
provisions. Do not take the examples or the form in which they are presented as instructions
unless specifically told to do so by the accompanying text.
Examples often have explanatory notes in italics added to diem. Do not confuse them with
notes to be added to the description by the cataloguer (see 1.7). In part I of the rules, a note
to be added to the description is indicated in the examples by Note. Do not add this word to
the actual description.
Two marks of omission are used in examples. One indicates that the mark is to form a part
of the actual catalogue entry. Its appearance is shown in the next line:
by Thomas Smith ... [et al.]
3. ALA-LC Romanization Tablet .* Transliteration Schemes for Non-Roman Scripts. — 1997 ed. — Washington : Library
of Congress, Cataloging Distribution Service, 1997.
AACR2 Revision 2002
3
0.14
GENERAL INTRODUCTION
The other indicates the incompleteness of the example itself. Where it appears, the
required wording (governed by a rule other than the one at which it appears) is to take its
place in the actual catalogue entry. Its appearance is shown in the next line:
London : Walt Disney Productions .... — (Disney story
teller)
4
AACR2 Revision 2002
DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION
to21. This part of the rules contains instructions on the formulation of descriptions of library
materials. Those descriptions need (in most instances) headings and/or uniform titles added to
them before they are usable as catalogue entries. For instructions on the formulation of such
access points, see part II,
0.22. The rules for description are based on the general framework for the description of
library materials, the General International Standard Bibliographic Description (ISBD(G) 1 )
agreed between the International Federation of Library Associations and Institutions (IFLA)
and the Joint Steering Committee for Revision of AACR. They follow that framework
exactly in the order of elements and their prescribed punctuation. It was agreed with IFLA
that it is not necessary for codes of rules to follow the terminology of the ISBD(G) exactly.
IFLA has developed, and is developing, specialized ISBDs for specific types of material,
also on the basis of the ISBD(G). Close correspondence will therefore exist between chapters
in part I and the corresponding ISBD,
STRUCTURE OF PART I
0.23. The basic rules for the description of all library materials are to be found in chapter I,
which sets out all the rules that are of general applicability. Then follow rules for specific
types of material (chapters 2-10} and rules of partial generality {chapters 1 1-13). There are
no chapters numbered 14-20; part II begins with chapter 21, the paragraphs of the Introduc-
tion to part II being numbered 20.1, 20.2, etc.
Chapter 1 is a general chapter containing those rules that apply to all library materials. For
example, rule 1.4C deals with the place of publication, distribution, etc., and subsequent
chapters in part I refer the user to that rule for guidance on that topic. Where types of mate-
rial demand specific treatment of a certain element, the general chapter contains only brief
guidance and the user of the rules will find specific guidance in the appropriate specific chap-
ter. For example, rule 1 .5 contains an indication of the type of information found in the
physical description area; and detailed guidance on the physical description of sound record-
ings will be found in rule 6.5, on the physical description of motion pictures and videorecord-
ings in rule 7.5, and so on. Use the chapters in part I alone or in combination as the specific
problem demands. For example, a difficult problem in describing a serial sound recording
might lead the user to consult chapters 1, 6, and 12. The majority of problems, however, can
be solved, once the rules have been studied comprehensively, by a single reference to a single
rule.
I. ISBD(G) : General International Standard Bibliographic Description : Annotated Text I prepared by the Working Group
on the General International Standard Bibliographic Description set up by the IFLA Committee on Cataloguing. — London :
IFLA International Office for UBC, 1977.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Part 1-1
0.24
INTRODUCTION
Within the chapters the rule numbering has a mnemonic structure. For example, rule 1.4C
is concerned with the place of publication, etc., for all materials, rule 2.4C is concerned with
the place of publication, etc., for printed monographs, rule 3.4C is concerned with the place
of publication, etc., for cartographic materials, and so on. If a particular rule appearing in
chapter 1 is not applicable to the material treated in a subsequent chapter, the rule is omitted
from that chapter. For example, there is no rule numbered 5.7B17 because rule 1.7B17 is not
applicable to music.
METHODS OF PROCEDURE
0,24. It is important to bring out all aspects of the item being described, including its content,
its carrier, its type of publication, its bibliographic relationships, and whether it is published
or unpublished. In any given area of the description, all relevant aspects should be described.
As a rule of thumb, the cataloguer should follow the more specific rules applying to the item
being catalogued, whenever they differ from the general rules.
0.25. The ISBD(G) contains an area for details that are special to a particular class of mate-
rial or type of publication. This third area is used in these rules for cartographic materials
(chapter 3), music (chapter 5), continuing resources (chapter 12), and, in some circumstances,
microforms (chapter 11). Do not use this area for any other materials treated in these rules.
Where it is applicable and appropriate, repeat this area. For example, in describing a serial
cartographic item, give details relating to the cartographic material and those relating to its
seriality (in that order).
OPTIONS AND OMISSIONS
0.26. Although the rules for description are based upon a standard (the ISBD(G)), it is recog-
nized that certain materials do not require every element of that standard. For this reason
there are differences between the treatment of some materials and some others. For example,
the extent of item element is called "number of volumes and/or pagination" in the chapter on
books, pamphlets, and printed sheets (chapter 2). Again, the place of publication, etc., and the
name of publisher, etc., elements are not used for manuscripts, some art originals, and some
three-dimensional objects and artefacts.
0.27. All notes described in the chapters of part I are optional (unless a note is specifically
stated to be mandatory) in that their inclusion in the entry depends on the nature of the item
described and the purpose of the entry concerned. In addition, the wording of notes in the
examples is not prescriptive (i.e., if desired, choose another wording provided that it meets
the general requirements of brevity and clarity).
0.28. Not all measurements prescribed in part I for library materials are metric. They are the
normal measurements used at this time in libraries in Australia, Canada, the United Kingdom,
and the United States. Where no predominant system of measurement exists, metric measure-
ments have been used. Substitute metric measurements for nonmetric measurements when:
either a) in the course of time a metric measurement becomes the normal measurement for
the materials in question
or b) the rules are being used in a country where only metric measurements are used.
Part 1-2
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
INTRODUCTION
0.29
0.29. Rule 1.0D contains a specification of three levels of description. Consider each of these
levels as a minimum. When appropriate, add further information to the required set of data.
The three levels of description allow libraries flexibility in their cataloguing policy, because
they prescribe an entry that is in conformity with bibliographic standards and yet allow some
materials to be described in more detail than others. Use the three levels of description:
either a) by choosing a level of description for all items catalogued in the library
or b) by drawing up guidelines for the use of all three levels in one catalogue depend-
ing on the type of item being described.
This standardization at three levels of description will help in achieving uniformity of cata-
loguing, and it is recommended that each machine-readable record carry an indication of the
level at which the item has been described.
AACR2 Revision 2002
Part 1-3
CHAPTER
19
El
JL
General Rules for Description
Contents
1.0 GENERAL RULES
1 .OA Sources of information
L0A2 Basis of the description
1 .0A3 Chief source of information
1 .0A4 Prescribed sources of information
i .OB Organization of the description
1.0C Punctuation
1.0D Levels of detail in the description
1.0E Language and script of the description
1.0F Inaccuracies
LOG Accents and other diacritical marks
LI TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
L1A Preliminary rule
L1A1 Punctuation
1.1A2 Sources of information
LIB Title proper
L1C General material designation
LID Parallel titles
LIE Other title information
LIF Statements of responsibility
L1G Items without a collective title
1.2 EDITION AREA
] ,2A Preliminary rule
L2A1 Punctuation
1 ,2A2 Sources of information
1 ,2B Edition statement
3 ,2C Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
1.2D Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
1.2E Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
1 .3 MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
1 .4 PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
1 ,4A Preliminary rule
Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.4A1 Punctuation
1.4A2 Sources of information
1.4B General rule
1 AC Place of publication, distribution, etc.
1.4D Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
1 .4E Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
1 ,4F Date of publication, distribution, etc.
1.4G Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
1 .5 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
1.5 A Preliminary rule
1,5 A 1 Punctuation
1.5A2 Sources of information
1.5B Extent of item (including specific material designation)
1.5C Other physical details
1.5D Dimensions
1.5E Accompanying material
1.6 SERIES AREA
1.6A Preliminary rule
I.6AI Punctuation
1.6A2 Sources of information
1 .6B Title proper of series
1.6C Parallel titles of series
1.6D Other title information of series
1.6E Statements of responsibility relating to series
1.6F ISSN of series
1.6G Numbering within series
1 .6H Subseries
1.6J More than one series statement
1.7 NOTE AREA
1.7 A Preliminary rule
1.7AI Punctuation
I.7A2 Sources of information
1 ,7A3 Form of notes
1.7A4 Notes citing other editions and works
1.7B Notes
1.8 STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
1 .8 A Preliminary rule
1.8A1 Punctuation
1.8A2 Sources of information
1.8B Standard number
1.8C Key -title
1 ,8D Terms of availability
1.8E Qualification
1 .9 SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
1-2
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.0A2
1.10 ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
3.11 FACSIMILES, PHOTOCOPIES, AND OTHER REPRODUCTIONS
1.0. GENERAL RULES
1.0A, Sources of information
1.0A1. The source(s) of information for a bibliographic description of a resource is dependent
on the aspect of the resource being described. A bibliographic resource may or may not be
part of a larger resource. When it is part of a larger resource, determine what aspect is being
described: the larger resource or that part of the larger resource (see chapter 13), A collection
of materials not published, distributed, or produced together but assembled by a cataloguing
agency, a previous owner, a dealer, etc., may also be considered to be a bibliographic
resource to be described as a whole.
1.0A2. Basis of the description
a) Single part. Base the description of a single -part bibliographic resource on the resource
as a whole.
b) Multiple parts. When a resource is or will be in more than one part, issue, or iteration,
determine the basis of description as follows:
i) Multipart monographs. Base the description on the first part or, lacking this, on
the earliest available part. For numbered multipart monographs, the first part is
the lowest numbered part. For unnumbered multipart monographs, the first part
is the part with the earliest publication, distribution, etc., date. Generally, give
notes for changes on later parts when considered to be important.
AREA BASIS OF DESCRIPTION
Title and statement of First or earliest part
responsibility
Edition First or earliest part
Publication, distribution, etc.
Place and publisher, First or earliest part
distributor, etc.
Place and manufacturer First or earliest part
Dates First and/or last parts
Physical description All parts
Series All parts
Note All parts and any other source
Standard number and terms All parts and any other source
of availability
ii) Serials. Base the description on the first issue or part or, lacking this, on the
earliest available issue or part. For numbered serials, the first issue or part is the
lowest numbered issue or part. For unnumbered serials, the first issue or part is
the issue or part with the earliest publication, distribution, etc., date. Generally,
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-3
1.0 A3
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
give notes for changes on later issues or parts when considered to be important
(see 12.1B8, 12.ID3, I2.IE2, etc.).
AREA
Title and statement of
responsibility
Edition
Numbering
Publication, distribution, etc.
Place and publisher,
distributor, etc.
Place and manufacturer
Dates
Physical description
Series
Note
Standard number and terms
of availability
iii)
iv)
BASIS OF DESCRIPTION
First or earliest issue or part
First or earliest issue or part
First and/or last issues or parts for each
system or sequence
First or earliest issue or part
First or earliest issue or part
First and/or last issues or parts
All issues or parts
AH issues or parts
All issues or parts and any other source
All issues or parts and any other source
Integrating resources. Base the description, except the beginning date of
publication, on the current iteration. Update the description and, generally, give
notes about changes from earlier iterations when considered to be important (see
12.1B8, 12.ID3, 12.1E2, etc.).
AREA
Title and statement of
responsibility
Edition
Publication, distribution, etc.
Place and publisher,
distributor, etc.
Place and manufacturer
Dates
Physical description
Series
Note
Standard number and terms
of availability
BASIS OF DESCRIPTION
Current iteration
Current iteration
Current iteration
Current iteration
First and/or last iterations
Current iteration
Current iteration
All iterations and any other source
All iterations and any other source
Assembled collections. Base the description on the collection as a whole. Update
the description and, generally, give notes about later additions when considered
to be important.
1.0 A3. Chief source of information. The chief source of information is the source of biblio-
graphic data to be given preference as the source from which a bibliographic description (or
portion thereof) is prepared. Each chapter in part I contains a specification of the chief source
of information for the bibliographic resources covered by that chapter. The chief source of
information may be unitary in nature {e.g., a title page) or may be collective (e.g., the entire
cartographic resource).
For situations other than a single-part bibliographic resource with only one chief source of
information, apply the following guidelines when the bibliographic resource is:
1-4
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.0 A3
a) In one physical part with more than one possible chief source of information. Use the
first occurring source of information as the chief source of information unless one of
the following applies:
i) If the sources of information present the bibliographic resource in different
aspects (e.g., as a single-part monograph and as part of a monographic series),
prefer the source that corresponds to the aspect being described (see i.OAl).
ii) If the bibliographic resource contains written, spoken, or sung words for which
there are sources of information in more than one language or script, prefer (in
this order):
(a) the source in the language or script of the written, spoken, or sung
words if there is only one such language or script or only one
predominant language or script
(b) the source in the original language or script of the resource if the words
are in more than one language or script, unless translation is known to
be the purpose, in which case use the source in the language of the
translation
(c) the source in the language or script that occurs first in the following
list: English, French, German, Spanish, Latin, any other language using
the roman alphabet, Greek, Russian, any other language using the
Cyrillic alphabet, Hebrew, any other language using the Hebrew
alphabet, any other language.
iii) If the sources of information bear different dates of publication, distribution, etc.,
prefer the source with the later date.
iv) If the information traditionally given on the title page is not complete on one
source (e.g., facing pages or pages on successive leaves), treat the sources as if
they were a single source.
v) If the bibliographic resource contains different works each with its own chief
source of information but does not have a source of information for the resource
as a whole, treat the chief sources of information for the different works as if
they were a single source.
b) In more than one physical part. Use the chief source of information of the first or
earliest part as the chief source of information for the bibliographic resource as a
whole. When the concept of order of parts is not appropriate (e.g., kits), apply the
following guidelines:
i) If the chief source of information on one of the parts gives more information,
prefer that chief source of information.
ii) If one part is a unifying element for the bibliographic resource, prefer the chief
source of information of that part.
iii) If the container is a unifying element for the bibliographic resource, prefer the
container as the chief source of information.
iv) If one part is the main resource and the other parts are accompanying or related
dependent supplements, prefer the chief source of information of the main
resource.
c) Lacking a chief source of information. If no part of the bibliographic resource has a
title, supply a title based on any available source (e.g., a reference work, the content of
the resource being described). Give in a note the reason for and/or source of the
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update 1-5
1.0A4
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
supplied title proper. For an assembled collection lacking a comprehensive title for the
collection as a whole, supply a title,
L0A4. Prescribed sources of information. Each chapter in part I contains a listing of pre-
scribed sources for the areas of the description (see LOB) for the bibliographic resources cov-
ered by that chapter. Enclose in square brackets information taken from outside the prescribed
source(s). Generally, prefer information found in the chief source of information to informa-
tion found elsewhere. When the other sources of information are placed in a ranking order by
specific chapters, follow that order.
1.0B. Organization of the description
1.0B1. The description is divided into the following areas:
Title and statement of responsibility
Edition
Material (or type of publication) specific details
Publication, distribution, etc.
Physical description
Series
Note
Standard number and terms of availability
Each of these areas is divided into a number of elements as set out in the rules in this and in
following chapters.
1.0C Punctuation
1.0CL Precede each area, other than the first area, or each occurrence of a note or standard
number, etc., area, by a full stop, space, dash, space (. — ) unless the area begins a new
paragraph.
Precede or enclose each occurrence of an element of an area with standard punctuation
prescribed at the head of each section of this chapter.
Precede each mark of prescribed punctuation by a space and follow it by a space, except
for the comma, full stop, hyphen (see 12.3A2), and opening and closing parentheses and
square brackets. The comma, full stop, hyphen, and closing parenthesis and square bracket
are not preceded by a space; the hyphen and the opening parenthesis and square bracket are
not followed by a space.
Precede the first element of each area, other than the first element of the first area or the
first element of an area beginning a new paragraph, by a full stop, space, dash, space. When
that element is not present in a description, precede the first element that is present by a full
stop, space, dash, space instead of the prescribed preceding punctuation for that element.
Indicate an interpolation (i.e., data taken from outside the prescribed source(s) of informa-
tion) by enclosing it in square brackets. Indicate a conjectural interpolation by adding a ques-
tion mark within the square brackets. Indicate the omission of part of an element by the mark
of omission ( ... ). Precede and follow the mark of omission by a space. Omit any area or
element that does not apply in describing an individual item; also omit its prescribed preced-
ing or enclosing punctuation. Do not indicate the omission of an area or element by the mark
of omission.
When adjacent elements within one area are to be enclosed in square brackets, enclose
them in one set of square brackets unless one of the elements is a general material designa-
tion, which is always enclosed in its own set of square brackets.
1-6
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.0D2
Skaterdater f gmdj / [produced by) Marshal Backlar
but [London : Phipps, 1870]
When adjacent elements are in different areas, enclose each element in a set of square
brackets.
[2nd ed,]. — [London] : Thomsons, 1973
When an element ends with an abbreviation followed by a full stop or ends with the mark
of omission and the punctuation following that element either is or begins with a full stop,
omit the full stop that constitutes or begins the prescribed punctuation.
261 p. ; 24 cm. — (Canadian Ethnic Studies Association
series ; v . 4)
not 261 p. ; 24 cm. . — {Canadian Ethnic Studies Association
series ; v . 4 )
When punctuation occurring within or at the end of an element is retained, give it with
normal spacing. Prescribed punctuation is always added, even though double punctuation
may result.
Quo vadis? : a narrative from the time of Nero
1.0D. Levels of detail in the description
The elements of description provided in the rules in this and in following chapters consti-
tute a maximum set of information. This rule sets out three recommended levels of descrip-
tion each containing those elements that must be given as a minimum by libraries and other
cataloguing agencies choosing that level of description. Base the choice of a level of descrip-
tion on the purpose of the catalogue or catalogues for which the entry is constructed. Include
this minimum set of elements for all items catalogued at the chosen level when the elements
are applicable to the item being described and when, in the case of optional additions, the
library has chosen to include an optional element. If the rules in part I specify other pieces of
information in place of any of the elements set out below, include those other pieces of infor-
mation. Consult individual rules in this chapter and in those following for the content of ele-
ments to be included. See also 0.29.
1.0D1. First level of description. For the first level of description, include at least the ele-
ments set out in this schematic illustration:
Title proper / first statement of responsibility, if different from main entry
heading in form or number or if there is no main entry heading. — Edition
statement. — Material (or type of publication) specific details. — First publisher,
etc., date of publication, etc. — Extent of item. — Note(s). — Standard number
See LIB, UF, 1.2B, 1.3, L4D, 1.4F, 1.5B, 1.7, and 1.8B.
1.0D2. Second level of description. For the second level of description, include at least the
elements set out in this schematic illustration:
Title proper [general material designation] = Parallel title : other title
information / first statement of responsibility ; each subsequent statement of
responsibility, — Edition statement / first statement of responsibility relating to the
edition. — Material (or type of publication) specific details. — First place of
publication, etc. : first publisher, etc., date of publication, etc. — Extent of item :
other physical details ; dimensions. — (Title proper of series / statement of
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update 1- 7
1.0D3
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
responsibility relating to series, ISSN of series ; numbering within the series. Title
of subseries, ISSN of subseries ; numbering within subseries). — Note(s). - —
Standard number
1.0D3. Third level of description. For the third level of description, include all elements set
out in the following rules that are applicable to the item being described.
1.0E. Language and script of the description
1.0E1. In the following areas, give information transcribed from the item itself in the lan-
guage and script (wherever practicable) in which it appears there:
Title and statement of responsibility
Edition
Publication, distribution, etc.
Series
For details given in the material (or type of publication) specific details area, follow the
instructions in the relevant rules of the following chapters.
Replace symbols or other matter that cannot be reproduced by the facilities available with
a cataloguer's description in square brackets. Make an explanatory note if necessary. (See
also I.1B1, UF9, and 1.2B2.)
In general, give interpolations into these areas in the language and script of the other data
in the area. Exceptions to this are:
a) prescribed interpolations and abbreviations
b) general material designations (see 1.1C)
c) supplied forms of the place of publication (see 1.4C2, 1.4C3, and 1.4C6)
d) statements of function of the publisher, distributor, etc, (see 1.4E).
If the other data are romanized, give interpolations according to the same romanization.
Give all elements in the other areas {other than the key-title (see 1.8C) and titles and quo-
tations in notes) in the language and script of the cataloguing agency.
1.0F. Inaccuracies
1.0FL In an area where transcription from the item is required, transcribe an inaccuracy or a
misspelled word as it appears in the item. Follow such an inaccuracy either by [sic] or by i.e.
and the correction within square brackets. Supply a missing letter or letters in square
brackets.
LOG. Accents and other diacritical marks
1.6G1. Add accents and other diacritical marks that are not present in the data found in the
source of information in accordance with the usage of the language used in the context.
1.1. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
Contents:
1.1A. Preliminary rule
LIB. Title proper
1.1C. General material designation
LID. Parallel titles
1-8
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.1B1
1 . 1 E. Other title information
I. IF. Statements of responsibility
1.1G. Items without a collective title
LlA. Preliminary rule
1.1A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see I .OC.
Precede the title of a supplement or section (see 1.1B9) by a full stop.
Enclose the general material designation in square brackets.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede each unit of other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
For the punctuation of this area for items without a collective title, see 1.1 G3.
For the use of the equals sign to precede parallel statements, see the appropriate rules
following.
1.1A2. Sources of information. Take information recorded in this area from the chief source
of information for the material to which the item being described belongs. Enclose informa-
tion supplied from any other source in square brackets.
Give the elements of data in the order of the sequence of the following rules, even if this
means transposing data. Transcribe the data as found, however, if case endings are affected, if
the grammatical construction of the data would be disturbed, or if one element is inseparably
linked to another.
1.1B. Title proper
1.1BL Transcribe the title proper exactly as to wording, order, and spelling, but not necessar-
ily as to punctuation and capitalization. Give accentuation and other diacritical marks that are
present in the chief source of information (see also 1 ,0G). For inaccuracies in the title proper
of a serial or an integrating resource in any area except the series area, see 12.1B1. Capitalize
according to appendix A.
Speedball technique charts
Les miserables
(Diacritic supplied)
The materials of architecture
Supplement to The conquest of Peru and Mexico
The 1919/20 Breasted Expedition to the Near East
X-calculus and computer theory
Fourteen hours
IV informe de gobierno
The wolrd [sic] of television
A nev [i.e. new] mechanism for transnational media
complaints
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-9
1.1B2
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
Do not transcribe words that serve as an introduction and are not intended to be part of the
title. Give the title including these words in a note (see 1.7B4).
Sleeping Beauty
Note: Title appears on item as: Disney presents Sleeping
Beauty
NASA quest
Note: Title appears on item as: Welcome to NASA quest
An alternative title is part of the title proper (see Glossary, appendix D). Precede and fol-
low the word or (or its equivalent in another language) introducing an alternative title by a
comma. Capitalize the first word of the alternative title.
Marcel Marceau, ou, L' art du mime
If the title proper as given in the chief source of information includes the punctuation
marks ... or [ ], replace them by — and ( ), respectively.
If elected—
(Source of information reads: If elected . . . )
If the title proper as given in the chief source of information includes symbols that cannot
be reproduced by the facilities available, replace them with a cataloguer's description in
square brackets. Make an explanatory note if necessary.
Tables of the error function and its derivative,
[reproduction of equations for the functions]
If the title proper is not taken from the chief source of information, give the source of the
title in a note (see 1 ,7B3).
1.162. If the title proper includes a statement of responsibility or the name of a publisher,
distributor, etc., and the statement or name is an integral part of the title proper (i.e., con-
nected by a case ending or other grammatical construction), transcribe it as part of the title
proper.
Marlowe's plays
Eileen Ford' s a more beautiful you in 21 days
Ernst Gunther laser Balzac
La route Shell
1.1B3. If the title proper consists solely of the name of a person or body responsible for the
item, transcribe such a name as the title proper.
Georges Brassens
Conference on Industrial Development in the Arab Countries
1.1B4. Abridge a long title proper only if this can be done without loss of essential informa-
tion. Never omit any of the first five words of the title proper (excluding the alternative title).
Indicate omissions by the mark of omission.
1-10
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.1B10
1.1B5. If a letter or word appears only once but the design of the chief source of information
makes it clear that it is intended to be read more than once, repeat the letter or word without
the use of square brackets,
Canadian bibliographies = Bibliographies canadiennes
(Source of information reads: Canadian BIBLIOGRAPHIES canadiennes)
If the first level of description is used (see I.0D1), the transcription of such a title is:
Canadian bibliographies
1.1B6, If a title proper includes separate letters or initials without full stops between them,
transcribe such letters without spaces between them.
ALA rules for filing catalog cards
If such letters or initials have Ml stops between them, transcribe them with full stops and
omit any internal spaces.
T. U.E.I, occasional papers in industrial relations
The most of S.J. Perelman
1.1B7. Supply a title proper for an item lacking a chief source of information from the rest of
the item, or a reference source, or elsewhere. If no title can be found in any source, devise a
brief descriptive title. Enclose such a supplied or devised title in square brackets.
[Carte de la lune ]
[Photograph of Theodore Roosevelt]
1.1B8. If the chief source of information bears titles in two or more languages or scripts,
transcribe as the title proper the one in the language or script of the main written, spoken, or
sung content of the item. If this criterion is not applicable, choose the title proper by refer-
ence to the order of titles on, or the layout of, the chief source of information. Record the
other titles as parallel titles (see LID).
1.1B9. If the title proper for an item that is supplementary to, or a section of, another item
appears in two or more parts not grammatically linked, give the title of the main work first,
followed by the title(s) of the supplementary item(s) or section(s) in order of their depen-
dence. Separate the parts of the title proper by full stops.
Journal of biosocial science. Supplement
(Title appears on item as:
JOURNAL OF BIOSOCIAL SCIENCE
Supplement . . . )
Faust. Part one
1.1B10. If the chief source of information bears both a collective title and the titles of indi-
vidual works, give the collective title as the title proper and give the titles of the individual
works in a contents note (see 1.7B18).
Three notable stories
Note: Contents: Love and peril / the Marquis of Lome — To
be or not to be / Mrs. Alexander — The melancholy hussar /
Thomas Hardy
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
1-11
1.1C
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
Six Renoir drawings
Note: Contents: La danse a la campagne — Les deux
baigneuses — Pierre Renoir — Enfants jouant a la balle —
Baigneuse assise — Etude d'une enfant
1.1C. Optional addition. General material designation
1.1C1. Choose one of the lists of general material designations given below and use terms
from the chosen list in all descriptions for which general material designations are desired. 1
If general material designations are to be used in cataloguing, British agencies should use
terms from list 1 and agencies in Australia, Canada, and the United States should use terms
from list 2. 2
LIST 1
LIST 2
braille
activity card
cartographic material
art original
electronic resource
art reproduction
graphic
braille
manuscript
cartographic material
microform
chart
motion picture
diorama
multimedia
electronic resource
music
filmstrip
object
flash card
sound recording
game
text
kit
videorecording
manuscript
microform
microscope slide
model
motion picture
music
picture
realia
slide
sound recording
technical drawing
text
toy
transparency
videorecording
1 . In alt subsequent examples, other than those illustrating general material designations directly, the designation is indi-
cated by iGMBj. The use of icmdi in examples does not imply that a designation is required.
2, The following rules apply to list 2:
1) Use cartographic material, not chart, for cartographic charts.
2) Use cartographic material, not model, for cartographic models.
3) For material treated in chapter 8, use picture for any item not subsumed under one of the other terms in list 2.
4) Use technical drawing for any item fitting the definition of this term in the Glossary, appendix D; for
architectural renderings, however, use art original, art reproduction, or picture, not technical drawing.
5) Use kit for any item fitting the definition of this term in the Glossary, appendix D; note that this term may apply
to certain categories of textual material.
1-12
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.1D2
For materials for the visually impaired, add (large print) or (tactile), when appropriate, to
any term in list 2. Add (braille), when appropriate, to any term in list 2 other than braille or
text.
... [cartographic material (tactile)]
... [music (braille)]
... [text (large print)]
I.1C2. If an item consists of material falling within one category in the list chosen, give the
appropriate designation immediately following the title proper (or the last part of the title
proper (see I.1B9)).
How the poor view their health [electronic resource]
British masters of the albumen print [microform]
Divina commedia. Inferno [text]
In the case of an item having no collective title, give the appropriate designation immedi-
ately following the first title (inclusive of part titles (see I.1B9) and alternative titles (see
LIB I), but exclusive of parallel titles (see l.ID) and other title information (see LIE)).
The art of the fugue [sound recording] = Die Kunst der
Fuge = I/art de la fugue : BMV 1080 (Contrapunctus 1-9) /
Johann Sebastian Bach. Suites for harpsichord = Cembalo =
Clavecin / Georg Friedrich Haendel
1.1C3. If the item is a reproduction in one material of a work originally presented in another
material (e.g., a text as microform; a map on a slide), give the general material designation
appropriate to the material being described (e.g., in the case of a map on a slide, give the
designation appropriate to the slide).
1.1C4. If an item contains parts belonging to materials falling into two or more categories in
the list chosen and if none of these is the predominant constituent of the item, give multi-
media or kit (see 1.1C1 and 1 .10C 1).
Changing Africa [multimedia]
or Changing Africa [kit]
l.ID. Parallel titles
1.1D1. Transcribe parallel titles in the order indicated by their sequence on, or by the layout
of, the chief source of information.
1.1D2. In preparing a second-level description (see I.0D2), give the first parallel title. Give
any subsequent parallel title that is in English.
Wood Cree ;gmd] = Les Cris des forets
Einfuhrung in die Blutmorphologie [gmd] = Introduction to
the morphology of blood
Strassenkarte der Schweiz [GMD] = Carte routiere de la
Suisse = Road map of Swi tzerland
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-13
1.1D3
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
If, in preparing a second-level description, ail of the following conditions apply:
a) the title proper is in a nonroman script
b) the first parallel title recorded in accordance with the instructions in the preceding
paragraph is in a nonroman script
c) no title is in English
give as the second parallel title the one that is (in order of preference) in French, German,
Spanish, Latin, any other roman alphabet language.
In preparing a third-level description (see 1.0D3), transcribe all parallel titles appearing in
the chief source of information according to the instructions in ! , IB.
Wood Cree [gmd] = Les Cris des forets
Einfuhrung in die Blutmorphologie ;gmd] = Introduction to
the morphology of blood = BBefleHHe b MOptjiojiornio KpOBH
Strassenkarte der Schweiz [gmd] = Carte routiere de la
Suisse = Carta stradale della Svizzera = Road map of
Switzerland
1.1D3. Transcribe an original title in a language different from that of the title proper appear-
ing in the chief source of information as a parallel title if the item contains all or some of the
text in the original language, or if the original title appears before the title proper in the chief
source of information. Transcribe as other title information an original title in the same lan-
guage as the title proper (see LIE). In all other cases give the original title in a note.
Twenty love poems and a song of despair ;gmd] = 20 poemas
de amor y una cancion desesperada
(Contains parallel Spanish text and English translation)
1.1D4. Give parallel titles appearing outside the chief source of information in a note (see
L7B5).
LIE. Other title information
1.1EL Transcribe all other title information appearing in the chief source of information
according to the instructions in LIB.
Edgar Wallace [gmd] : the man who made his name
Winterthur [gmd] : an adventure in the past
SPSS primer [gkd] : statistical package for the social
sciences primer
HE2. Transcribe other title information in the order indicated by the sequence on, or the
layout of, the chief source of information.
Distribution of the principal kinds of soil [GKD] : orders,
suborders, and great groups : National Soil Survey
classification of 1967
L1E3. Lengthy other title information. If the other title information is lengthy, either give
it in a note (see 1.7B5) or abridge it.
Abridge other title information only if this can be done without loss of essential informa-
tion. Never omit any of the first five words of the other title information. Indicate omissions
by the mark of omission.
1-14
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.IF1
1.1E4. If a statement of responsibility or the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., is an inte-
gral part of the other title information, transcribe it as such.
The devil's dictionary ;gmdj : a selection of the bitter
definitions of Ambrose Bierce
Robert Owen's American legacy ;gmd; : proceedings of the
Robert Owen Bicentennial Conference, Thrall Opera House, Hew
Harmony, Indiana, October 15 and 16, 1971
LIES. Transcribe other title information following the whole or part of the title proper or the
parallel title to which it pertains.
On tour [Gi<r>] : 10 British jewellers in Germany and
Australia = Auf Tournee : zehn britische Goldschmiede in
Deutschland und Australien
Recreation information : opportunities for people with
intellectual disability. News sheet ;gkd;
If there are no parailel titles and if other title information appears in more than one lan-
guage or script, give the other title information that is in the language or script of the title
proper. If this criterion does not apply, give the other title information that appears first.
Optionally, give the other title information in other languages. Precede each parallel state-
ment by an equals sign.
Variations on a Czech love song ;gmd: : for piano solo and
woodwind choir = pour piano soliste et ensemble de bois
1.1E6. If the title proper needs explanation, supply a brief addition as other title information,
in the language of the title proper.
Longfellow <gxd] : [selections]
Conference on Industrial Development in the Arab Countries
[gmdj : [proceedings]
1.1F. Statements of responsibility
1.1F1. Transcribe statements of responsibility appearing prominently in the item in the form
in which they appear there. If a statement of responsibility is taken from a source other than
the chief source of information, enclose it in square brackets.
What your child really wants to know about sex, and why
■gkd] / by Will[i]am A. Block
All that jazz [ghd\ / Fats Waller
Stereogram book of fossils [GMD] : photographs of
invertebrate fossils in 3 dimensions / by Philip A. Sandberg
Obiter dicta ;gkd] / [A. Birrell]
{Statement appears on spine and cover only )
Handley Cross \<i*At>\ : a sporting tale / by the Author of
Jorrocks' jaunts and jollities
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-15
1.1F2
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
George Gissing and H.G. Wells lgmd] : their friendship and
correspondence / edited, with an introduction, by Royal A.
Gettmann
Map catalogue [GKDj / Ordnance Survey
Common service book of the Lutheran church ^gkd] /
authorized by the United Lutheran Church of America
1.1F2. If no statement of responsibility appears prominently in the item, neither construct one
nor extract one from the content of the item. Give the relevant information in a note (see
1.7B6).
Do not include in the title and statement of responsibility area statements of responsibility
that do not appear prominently in the item. If such a statement is necessary, give it in a note.
L1F3. If a statement of responsibility precedes the title proper in the chief source of informa-
tion, transpose it to its required position unless it is an integral part of the title proper (see
1.1A2 and I.1B2).
1.1F4. Transcribe a single statement of responsibility as such whether the two or more per-
sons or corporate bodies named in it perform the same function or different functions.
Thinking and reasoning [skdj : selected readings / edited
by P.C. Wason and P.N. Johnson-Laird
Puzzled people ; gmd j : a study in popular attitudes to
religion, ethics, progress, and politics in a London borough
/ prepared for the Ethical Union by Mass-Observation
1.1F5. If a single statement of responsibility names more than three persons or corporate bod-
ies performing the same function, or with the same degree of responsibility, omit all but the
first of each group of such persons or bodies. Indicate the omission by the mark of omission
( ... ) and add et at. (or its equivalent in a nonroman script) in square brackets.
America's radical right :gmd; / Raymond Wolfinger ...
[et al . ]
Dickens 1970 ;gmdj : centenary essays / by Walter Allen ...
[et al.] ; edited by Michael Slater
A short-title catalogue of books printed in England,
Scotland 6 Ireland ... 1475-1640 [gkd] / compiled by A.W.
Pollard £ G.R. Redgrave with the help of G.F. Barwick ...
[et al . ]
Proceedings of the Workshop on Solar Collectors for
Heating and Cooling of Buildings, Mew York City, November
21-23, 1974 [gkd] / sponsored by the National Science
Foundation, RANN— Research Applied to National Needs ;
coordinated by University of Maryland ... [et al.]
1.1F6. If there is more than one statement of responsibility, transcribe them in the order indi-
cated by their sequence on, or the layout of, the chief source of information. If the sequence
and layout are ambiguous or insufficient to determine the order, transcribe the statements in
the order that makes the most sense. If statements of responsibility appear in sources other
than the chief source, transcribe them in the order that makes the most sense.
1-16
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.1F8
Bits of paradise igkd; : twenty-one uncollected stories /
by F. Scott and Zelda Fitzgerald ; selected by Scottie
Fitzgerald Smith and Matthew J. Eruccoli ; with a foreword
by Scottie Fitzgerald Smith
A saint in Philadelphia :gmd] : John Neumann / Raymond C.
Kammerer and Carl R. Steinbecker ; made by Creative Sights &
Sounds
Exploration of the solar system [gkdj / prepared by members
of the AIAA Technical Commi ttees on Space Systems and Space
Atmospheric Physics ; edited by Arthur Henderson, Jr., and
Jerry Grey
1.1F7. Include titles and abbreviations of titles of nobility, address, honour, and distinction,
initials of societies, qualifications, date(s) of founding, mottoes, etc., in statements of respon-
sibility if:
a) such data are necessary grammatically
... / ... ; prologo del Excmo. Sr. D. Manuel Fraga
Iribarne
b) the omission would leave only a person's given name or surname
... /by Miss Jane
... /by Miss Read
... / by Dr. Johnson
... /by the Baroness Orczy
c) the title is necessary to identify a person
... /by Mrs. Charles H. Gibson
d) the title is a title of nobility, or is a British term of honour (Sir, Dame, Lord, or Lady).
... / Anne Finch, Countess of Winchilsea
... /by Sir Richard Acland
Otherwise, omit all such data from statements of responsibility. Do not use the mark of
omission.
... /by Harry Smith
(Source of information reads: by Dr. Harry Smith)
... / sponsored by the Library Association
(Source of information reads: sponsored by the Library Association (founded
1877))
... / by T .A . Rennard
(Source of information reads: by the late T.A. Rennard)
1.1F8. Add a word or short phrase to the statement of responsibility if the relationship
between the title of the item and the person(s) or body (bodies) named in the statement is not
clear.
Baijun ballads ;gkd] / [collected by] Chet Williams
Piers Plowman [gmd] / [edited by] Elizabeth Salter
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-17
1.1F9
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
but
Bleak House [gmd] / Charles Dickens
Brief guide \cm\ / National Gallery of Art
Beggars banquet [GKD] / the Rolling Stones
L1F9. Replace symbols or other matter that cannot be reproduced by the facilities available
with the cataloguer's description in square brackets. Make an explanatory note if necessary.
Over the border [GKB] : Acadia, the home of "Evangeline" /
by [E.B.C.]
Note: Author's initials represented by musical notes on
title page
1.1F10. If an item has parallel titles bat a statement(s) of responsibility in only one language
or script, transcribe the statement of responsibility after all the parallel titles or other title
information.
Jeux de cartes pour enfants [gmd; = Children's playing
cards / par Giovanni Belgrado et Bruno Munari
If an item has parallel titles and a statement or statements of responsibility in more than
one language or script, transcribe each statement after the title proper, parallel title, or other
title information to which it relates.
Familias nor te-americanas ;gkd; : los De Stef ano /
colaborador de educacion, Beryl L . Bailey = American
families : the De Stef ano s / educational collaborator,
Beryl L. Bailey
If it is not practicable to give the statements of responsibility after the titles to which they
relate, transcribe the statement of responsibility in the language or script of the title proper
and omit the others.
Concerto in c-Moll fur Cembalo (Klavier) und Streicher
{ gmd] = Concerto in C minor for harpsichord (piano) and
strings / Carl Philipp Emanuel Bach ; herausgegeben von
GySrgy Balla
(Statement about editor appears in German and English)
1.1F11. If there are no parallel titles and a statement of responsibility appears in more than
one language or script, transcribe the statement in the language or script of the title proper. If
this criterion does not apply, transcribe the statement that appears first.
Tin statistics [gmd] / International Tin Council
Optionally, transcribe the parallel statements, each preceded by an equals sign.
Tin statistics [gkd; / International Tin Council = Conseil
international de 1'etain = Consejo Internacional del Estafio
1.1F12. Treat a noun phrase occurring in conjunction with a statement of responsibility as
other title information if it is indicative of the nature of the work.
Characters from Dickens [gmd] : dramatised adaptations / by
Barry Campbell
1-18
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.1G2
If the noun or noun phrase is indicative of the role of the person(s) or body (bodies)
named in the statement of responsibility rather than of the nature of the work, treat it as part
of the statement of responsibility.
Roman Britain [gkd] / research and text by Colin Barham
In case of doubt, treat the noun or noun phrase as part of the statement of responsibility.
1.1F13. When a name associated with responsibility for the item is transcribed as part of the
title proper (see 1.1B2) or other title information (see 1.1E4), do not make any further state-
ment relating to that name unless such a statement is required for clarity, or unless a separate
statement of responsibility including or consisting of that name appears in the chief source of
information.
but
Goethes Stucke ;Gmd;
Feminism and Vivian Gornick [gkd] / Vivian Gornick
(Name of author appears separately in the chief source of information as well as
in the title proper)
Malo' s complete guide to canoeing and canoe -camping ;gmd; /
by John Malo
The John Franklin Bardin omnibus igmd] / John Franklin
Bardin
(Name of author appears separately in the chief source of information as well as
in the title proper)
1.1F14. Transcribe a statement of responsibility even if no person or body is named in that
statement.
Korean phrases [gkd] / by a group of students with a Korean
resource person
Call of love [gkd] / translated from the Danish
... / with a spoken commentary by the artist
A statement of responsibility may include words or phrases that are neither names nor
linking words.
... / written by Jobe Hill in 1812
1.1F15. Omit statements found in the chief source of information that neither constitute other
title information nor form part of statements of responsibility.
1.1G. Items without a collective title
1.1 Gl. If, in an item lacking a collective title, one work is the predominant part, treat the title
of that work as the title proper and name the other work(s) in a contents note (see 1 .7B 1 8).
1.1 G2. If, in an item lacking a collective title, no one work predominates, either describe the
item as a unit (see 1.1 G3) or make a separate description for each separately titled work,
linking the separate descriptions with notes (see 1.7B21).
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-19
1.1G3
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.1G3. If describing the item as a unit, transcribe the titles of the individually titled works in
the order in which they appear in the chief source of information or, if there is no single chief
source of information, in the order in which they appear in the item, treating multiple sources
of information as if they were one source (see 1.0A3),
Separate the titles of the works by semicolons if the works are all by the same person(s) or
emanate from the same body (bodies), even if the titles are linked by a connecting word or
phrase. Follow the title of each work by its parallel titte(s) and other title information.
Clock symphony ;gmdj : no. 101 ; Surprise symphony : no. 94
/ Haydn
Lord Macaulay' s essays [gmd] ; and, Lays of ancient Rome
If the individual works are by different persons or emanate from different bodies, or in
case of doubt, follow the title of each work by its parallel title(s), other title isiformation, and
staternent(s) of responsibility. Separate the groups of data with a full stop followed by two
spaces.
Saudades do Brasil ;gkd; : suite de danses pour orchestre /
Darius Milhaud. Symphonie concertante pour trompette et
orchestre / Henry Barraud
Le prince egmdj / Machiavel. Suivi de L' anti-Machiavel de
Frederic II
{Title page reads: Machiavel. Le prince, suivi de L'anti-Machiavel de Frederic II)
1.1G4, If, in an item lacking a collective title, more than one (but not all) of the separately
titled works predominate, treat the predominating works as instructed in 1.1G3, and name the
other work(s) in contents notes {see 1.7B18).
1.2. EDITION AREA
Contents:
1.2A. Preliminary rule
1.2B. Edition statement
1.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
1 .2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
1 .2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
1.2A. Preliminary rule
1.2A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a statement relating to a named revision of an edition by a comma.
Precede the first statement of responsibility following an edition statement by a diagonal
slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
For the use of the equals sign to precede parallel statements, see the appropriate rules
following.
1-20
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.2B6
1.2A2. Sources of information. Give in this area information taken from the chief source of
information or from any other source prescribed for this area in the following chapters.
Enclose information supplied from any other source in square brackets.
1.2B. Edition statement
L2BI. Transcribe the edition statement as found on the item. Use abbreviations as instructed
in appendix B and numerals as instructed in appendix C.
Ny udg.
(Source of information reads: Ny udgave)
2nd ed.
(Source of information reads: Second edition)
1.2B2. If the edition statement consists solely or chiefly of characters that are neither numeric
nor alphabetic, give the statement in words in the language and script of the title proper and
enclose them in square brackets.
[Three asterisks] ed.
If the edition statement consists of a letter or letters and/or a number or numbers without
accompanying words, add an appropriate word or abbreviation.
3 e [ed.]
[State] B
1.2B3. In case of doubt about whether a statement is an edition statement, take the presence
of such words as edition, issue, or version (or their equivalents in other languages) as evi-
dence that such a statement is an edition statement, and transcribe it as such.
South-west gazette [gmdj . — Somerset ed.
Subbuteo table soccer [gkd] . — World Cup ed .
1.2B4, Optional addition. If an item lacks an edition statement but is known to contain sig-
nificant changes from other editions, supply a suitable brief statement in the language and
script of the title proper and enclose it in square brackets.
[New ed.]
[3 s ed.]
[2nd ed., partly rev.]
1.2B5. If an edition statement appears in more than one language or script, transcribe the
statement in the language or script of the title proper. If this criterion does not apply, tran-
scribe the statement that appears first.
Optionally, transcribe the parallel statement(s), each preceded by an equals sign.
Rev. 1980 = Revision 1980
2' ed. = 2 a ed. = 2. Aufl.
2de herziene en verb, uitg, = 2 e ed., rev. et corr.
1.2B6. If an item lacking a collective title contains one or more works with an associated
edition statement(s), transcribe each edition statement following the title and statement(s) of
responsibility to which it relates, separated from them by a full stop.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-21
1.2C
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
Le western [gkd] / textes rassembles et presentes par
Henri Agel . Nouv . ed . Evolution et renouveau du western
(1967-1968) / par Jean A. Gili
1.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
1.2C1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more editions, but not to all
editions, of a given work following the edition statement if there is one. Follow the instruc-
tions in 1. IF for the transcription and punctuation of such statements.
The nether world [gmd] : a novel / George Gissing. — [New
ed., repr.] / edited, with an introduction, by John Goode
Shachiapang [gmd] : a modern revolutionary Peking opera. —
t-Jay 1970 script / revised collectively by the Peking Opera
Troupe of Peking
1.2C2. In case of doubt about whether a statement of responsibility applies to all editions or
only to some, or if there is no edition statement, give such a statement in the title and state-
ment of responsibility area.
The prelude, 1798-1799 [gkd; / by William Wordsworth ;
edited by Stephen Parrish
When describing the first edition, give al) statements of responsibility in the title and state-
ment of responsibility area (see 1 . IF).
1.2C3. If an item has parallel edition statements that have been recorded (see 1.2B5) and a
statement of responsibility relating to the edition in only one language or script, give the
statement of responsibiiity after ail the parallel edition statements.
3rd ed. = 3, uppl. / B. Larsen
1.2C4. Optional addition. If an item has both an edition statement and a statement of respon-
sibility relating to the edition in more than one language or script, give each statement of
responsibility after the edition statement to which it relates.
2nd ed. / edited by Larry C. Lewis = 2 s ed. / redige par
Larry C. Lewis
I.2C5. If an item has an edition statement in only one language or script and a statement of
responsibility relating to the edition in more than one language or script, give the statement
of responsibility in the language or script of the title proper. If this criterion does not apply,
give the statement that appears first.
2. opl. / reviderade og udvidet af David Hohnen
Optionally, transcribe the parallel statements of responsibility after the edition statement,
each preceded by an equals sign.
2. opl. / reviderade og udvidet af David Hohnen = revised
and enlarged by David Hohnen
1-22
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
13A
1.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
1.2D1. If an Hem is a revision of an edition (a named reissue of a particular edition contain-
ing changes from that edition), transcribe the statement reiating to that revision following the
edition statement and its statements of responsibility.
The pocket Oxford dictionary of current English ;gkd"; /
compiled by F.G. Fowler & H.W. Fowler. — 4th ed. / revised
by H . G . Le Mesur ier and E . Mcintosh, Reprin ted wi th
corrections
The natural history of Selborne in the county of
Southampton :gkd; / by Gilbert White. — World's classics ed . ,
New ed., rev., reset, and illustrated
1.2D2. If the statement relating to the revision appears in more than one language or script,
follow the instructions in 1.2B5.
2nd ed., 3rd corr. impression
or 2nd ed., 3rd corr, impress ion = 2" ed . , 3 e reimpr . corr .
1.2D3. Do not record statements relating to a reissue of an edition that contains no changes
unless the item is considered to be of particular importance to the cataloguing agency.
1.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
1.2E1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more named revisions of an
edition (but not to all such revisions) following the statement reiating to the revision(s). Fol-
low the instructions in I. IF for the transcription and punctuation of such statements of
responsibility.
The elements of style :gmd; / by William Strunk, Jr. — Rev,
ed. / with revisions, an introduction, and a chapter on
writing by E.B, White, 2nd ed. / with the assistance of
Eleanor Gould Packard
1.2E2. If an item has parallel statements relating to the revision of an edition thai have been
recorded (see 1.2D2) and a statement of responsibility relating to that revision in only one
language or script, give the statement of responsibility following all the parallel statements
relating to the revision.
I.2E3. Optional addition. If the statement of responsibility referred to in 1.2E1 appears in
more than one language or script, give each statement as instructed in I.2C4 and 1.2C5.
2nd ed., 3rd revision / by N. Schmidt = 2. uppl., 3. utg.
/ af N. Schmidt
13. MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
1.3A. Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
This area is used in the description of cartographic materials {chapter 3), music (chapter 5),
continuing resources (chapter 12), and, in some circumstances, microforms (chapter 1 1). See
those chapters for the contents of this area and its internal prescribed punctuation.
4th ed.,
Corr .
= 4' 1 ed. ,
Corr. / G.A. Phelan
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
U23
1.4
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.4. PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
Contents:
1.4A. Preliminary rule
I.4B. General rule
1 AC. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
1 .4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
1.4E. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
I.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
1.4G. Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
1.4A. Preliminary rule
1.4A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a second or subsequently named place of publication, distribution, etc., by a
semicolon.
Precede the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., by a colon.
Enclose a supplied statement of function of a publisher, distributor, etc., in square brackets.
Precede the date of publication, distribution, etc., by a comma.
Enclose the details of manufacture (place, name, date) in parentheses.
Precede the name of a manufacturer by a colon.
Precede the date of manufacture by a comma.
For the use of the equals sign to precede parallel statements, see the appropriate rules
following.
1.4A2. Sources of information. Give in this area information taken from the chief source of
information or from any other source prescribed for this area in the following chapters.
Enclose in square brackets information supplied from a source other than those prescribed.
1.4B. Genera] rule
1.4B1, In this area, record information about the place, name, and date of all types of pub-
lishing, distributing, releasing, and issuing activities. For unpublished materials, see 1.4C8,
1.4D8, and 1.4F9-1.4F10.
1.4B2. Record information relating to the manufacture of the item in this area.
1.4B3. When more than one place, name, or date is recorded in this area, give them in the
order that is appropriate to the item being described.
1.4B4. Give names of places, persons, or bodies as they appear, omitting accompanying prep-
ositions unless case endings would be affected. Use abbreviations as instructed in appendix B.
Berolini
... : Im Deutschen Verlag
but
Paris
not A Paris
... : University of Leeds, Dept. of Spanish
not ... : University of Leeds, Department of Spanish
1-24
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.4C3
1.4B5. If the original publication details are covered by a label containing publication details
relating to a reproduction, reissue, etc., give the publication details of the later publication in
this area. Give the publication details of the original in a note {see 1.7B9) if they can be
ascertained readily.
1.4B6. If an item is known to have fictitious publication, distribution, etc., details, give them
in the conventional order. Supply the real publication, distribution, etc., details as a correction
if they are known.
Belfast [i.e. Dublin : s.n.], 1982
Paris : Impr . Vincent, 17 98 [i.e. Bruxelles : Moens, 1883]
1.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
1.4C1. Transcribe a place of publication, etc., in the form and the grammatical case in which
it appears.
Koln
Lugduni Ba tavorum
Den Haag
If the name of a place appears in more than one language or script, give the form in the
language or script of the title proper. If this criterion does not apply, give the form that
appears first.
1.4C2, Supply another form of the name of a place if such an addition is considered desirable
as an aid to identifying the place, using the English form of name if there is one.
Lerpwl [Liverpool ]
Chris tiania [Oslo]
1.4C3. If the name of the country, state, province, etc., appears in the source of information,
transcribe it after the name of the place if it is considered necessary for identification, or if it
is considered necessary to distinguish the place from others of the same name. Supply the
name of the country, state, province, etc., if it does not appear in the source of information
but is considered necessary for identification or distinction, using the English form of name if
there is one. Use abbreviations (see B.I4).
City and country, etc., appear in prescribed source of information
Tol worth, England
Carbondale, 111.
City alone appears in prescribed source of information
Waco [Tex.]
London [Ont . ]
Santiago [Chile]
Renens [Switzerland]
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-2$
1.4C4
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.4C4. If a place name is found only in an abbreviated form in the item, transcribe it as
found, and add the full form or complete the name.
Mpls [i.e. Minneapolis]
Rio [de Janeiro]
1.4C5. If two or more places in which a publisher, distributor, etc., has offices are named in
the item, give the first named place. Give any subsequently named place that is given promi-
nence by the layout or typography of the source of information. If the first named place and
any place given prominence are not in the home country of the cataloguing agency, give also
the first of any subsequently named places that is in the home country. Omit all other places.
Toronto
(Source of information reads: Toronto, Buffalo, London, Cataloguing agency in
Canada )
Montreal ; Toronto
(Toronto given prominence by typography )
London ; New York
(Cataloguing agency in the United States)
Toronto ; London
(Source of information reads: Toronto, Buffalo, London. Cataloguing agency in
the United Kingdom )
New York ; London ; Sydney
(London given prominence by typography. Cataloguing agency in Australia )
For items with two or more places of publication, distribution, etc, relating to two or more
publishers, distributors, etc., see L4D4,
1.4C6. If the place of publication, distribution, etc., is uncertain, supply the probable place in
the English form of name if there is one, followed by a question mark.
[Munich?]
If no probable place can be given, supply if possible the name of the country, state, prov-
ince, etc. If, in such a case, the country, slate, province, etc., is not certain, follow it by a
question mark.
[ Canada]
[Spain?]
If no place or probable place can be given, give s.L (sine loco), or its equivalent in a non-
roman script.
ts.i.i
1.4C7. Optionally, give the full address of a publisher, distributor, etc., after the name of the
place. Enclose the full address in parentheses. Do not give the full address for major trade
publishers.
London (108 Gloucester Ave., London, NW1 8HX)
1-26
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.4D3
1.4C8. Do not record a place of publication, distribution, etc., for unpublished items (e.g.,
manuscripts, art originals, naturally occurring objects that have not been packaged for com-
mercial distribution, unedited or unpublished film or video materials, stock shots, nonpro-
cessed sound recordings, unpublished electronic resources). Do not record a place of publica-
tion, distribution, etc., for unpublished collections {including those containing published items
but not published as collections). Do not give s.L in either case,
I.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
1.4D1. Give the name of the publisher, distributor, etc, following the place{s) to which it
relates.
London : Macmil lan
Toronto : University of Toronto Press
New York ; London : McGraw-Hill
Montreal ; London : Grolier
London : Sussex Tapes ; Wakefield : Educational
Productions
New York ; London ; Sydney : Oxford University Press
1.4D2. Give the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., in the shortest form in which it can be
understood and identified internationally.
: Penguin
(Source of information reads: Penguin Books)
: W.H. Allen not : Allen
(Avoids confusion with other publishers called Allen )
: Da Capo
(Source of information reads: Da Capo Press, Inc., a subsidiary of Plenum
Publ is hing C orporati on )
If the shortest form of the name of the publisher, distributor, etc., is in more than one lan-
guage or script, give the form that is in the language or script of the title proper. If this crite-
rion does not apply, give the shortest form in the language or script that appears first.
Optionally, give the shortest form in each language or script. Precede each parallel state-
ment by an equals sign. If the shortest form is the same in all languages or scripts, give it
only once.
: Editions du peuple = Commoner's Pub.
but : H0St
not : H0st & S0ns Forlag = H0st & Son Publisher
14D3. In giving the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., retain:
a) words or phrases indicating the function (other than solely publishing) performed by
the person or body
: Printed for the CLA by the Morriss Prin t . Co .
: Distributed by New York Graphic Society
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-27
1.4D4
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
: In Kommission bei 0. Harrassowitz
: Allen & Unwin
(Source of information reads: Published by Allen & Unwin)
b) parts of the name required to differentiate between publishers, distributors, etc., or to
identify subsidiary companies.
: Longmans, Green
but : Longmans Educational not : Longmans
1.4D4, If an item has two or more publishers, distributors, etc., describe it in terms of the first
named and the corresponding place{s). In the following cases, add subsequently named pub-
fishers, distributors, etc., and their corresponding places (if they are different from the
place(s) already named):
a) when the first and subsequently named entities are linked in a single statement
London : Macmillan for the University of York
b) when the first named entity is a distributor, reieasing agency, etc., and a publisher is
named subsequently
c) when a subsequently named entity is clearly distinguished as the principal publisher,
distributor, etc., by layout or typography
Toronto : McClelland and Stewart : World Crafts Council
(Second publisher given prominence by typography)
d) when the subsequently named publisher, distributor, etc., is in the home country of the
cataloguing agency and the first named publisher, distributor, etc., is not.
Paris : Gauthier-Villars ; Chicago : University of Chicago
Press
(Cataloguing agency in the United States)
New York : Dutton ; Toronto : Clarke, Irwin
(Cataloguing agency in Canada)
1.4D5. Optionally, give the name and, when appropriate, the place of a distributor when the
first named entity is a publisher.
Stockholm : Grammofon AB BIS ; New York : Distributed by
Qualiton Imports
1.4D6. If the name of the publisher, distributor, etc., is unknown, give s.n. (sine nomine) or
its equivalent in a nonroman script.
Paris : [s.n.]
1.4D7. In case of doubt about whether a named agency is a publisher or a manufacturer, treat
it as a publisher.
1-28
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.4F2
1.4D8. Do not record the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., for unpublished items (e.g.,
manuscripts, art originals, naturaily occurring objects that have not been packaged for com-
mercial distribution, unedited or unpublished film or video materials, stock shots, nonpro-
cessed sound recordings, unpublished electronic resources). Do not record the name of a pub-
lisher, distributor, etc., for unpublished collections {including those containing published
items but not published as collections). Do not give s.n. in either case.
1.4E. Optional addition. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
I.4EL Add to the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., a term that clarifies the function of
the publisher, distributor, etc, unless:
a) the phrase naming the publisher, distributor, etc., includes words that indicate the
function performed by the person(s) or body (bodies) named
or b) the function of the publishing, distributing, etc., agency is clear from the context.
Montreal : National Film Board of Canada ; London : Guild
Sound and Vision [distributor]
London : Macmillan : Educational Service [distributor]
but
New York : Released by Beaux Arts
Oliver Twist ;gmd; / Charles Dickens. — London : Chapman
and Hall
1.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
1.4F1. For published items, give the date (i.e., year) of publication, distribution, etc., of the
edition, revision, etc., named in the edition area. If there is no edition statement, give the date
of the first publication of the edition to which the item belongs. Give dates in Western-style
arabic numerals. If the date found in the item is not of the Gregorian or Julian calendar, give
the date as found and follow it with the year(s) of the Gregorian or Julian calendar.
, 1975
, 4308 [1975]
, [4308 i.e. 1975]
, 5730 [1969 or 1970]
, anno 18 [1939] not , anno XVIII
, 197 6 not Mvl
For unpublished items, see I.4F9. For unpublished collections, see 1.4FI0.
1.4F2. Give the date as found in the item even if it is known to be incorrect. If a date is
known to be incorrect, add the correct date.
, 1697 [i.e. 1967]
If necessary, explain any discrepancy in a note.
, 1963 [i.e. 1971)
Note: Originally issued as a sound disc in 1963; issued as
a cassette in 1971
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-29
1.4F3
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.4F3. Give the date of a named revision of an edition as the date of publication only if the
revision is specified in the edition area (see 1.2D). In this case, give only the date of the
named revision.
1.4F4. If the publication date differs from the date of distribution, add the date of distribution
if it is considered to be significant by the cataloguing agency. If the publisher and distributor
are different, give the date(s) after the name(s) to which they apply.
London : Kacmillan, 1971, [distributed 1973]
London : Educational Records, 1973 ; New York : Edcorp
[distributor] , 1975
Toronto : Royal Ontario Museum, 1971 ; Beckenham [England]
: Edward Patterson [distributor]
{Distribution date known to be different but not recorded)
If the publication and distribution dates are the same, give the date after the last named
publisher, distributor, etc.
Mew York : American Broadcasting Co. [production company]
: Released by Xerox Films, 1973
1.4F5. Optional addition. Give the latest date of copyright following the publication, distribu-
tion, etc., date if the copyright date is different.
, 1967, C1965
, [1981], pl975
1.4F6. If the dates of publication, distribution, etc., are unknown, give the copyright date or,
in its absence, the date of manufacture (indicated as such) in its place.
, C1967
, 1967 printing
, pl983
, 1979 pressing
1.4F7. If no date of publication, distribution, etc., copyright date, or date of manufacture
appears in an item, supply an approximate date of publication.
[1971 or 1972] one year or the other
[19 69?] probable date
[between 1906 and 1912] use only for dates fewer than 20 years
apart
[ca. 1960] approximate date
[ 1 9 7 - ] decade certain
[197-?] probable decade
[18 — ] century certain
[18--?] probable century
1-30
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.4F8
Optionally, give an approximate date of publication if it differs significantly from the
date(s) specified in 1.4F6.
, [1982?], cl949
1.4F8. Dates for serials, integrating resources, and multipart items. If the first published
issue, iteration, or part is available, give the beginning date followed by a hyphen. If the
resource has ceased or is complete and the last published issue, iteration, or part is available,
give the ending date, preceded by a hyphen. If the first and last published issues, iterations, or
parts are available, give the beginning and ending publication dates, separated by a hyphen. If
the publication date is the same for all issues, iterations, or parts, give only that date as the
single date. For an updating loose-leaf, supply the date of the last update if considered
important.
, 1988-
(First published issue available; resource still being published)
, -1997
(First published part not available)
, 1968-1973
(First and last published parts available )
, 1997
(All issues published in same year)
, 1995-1998 [updated 1999]
(First and last published iterations of an updating loose-leaf available; date of
last update known)
If the first and/or last published issue, iteration, or part is not available, do not give the
beginning and/or ending date; give information about the beginning and/or ending date in a
note if it can be readily ascertained (see I.7B9, 12.7B11.1).
Washington, D.C. : Smithsonian Institution
Note; Began in 1996
(First published issue not available but information about beginning date is
known; resource still being published)
, 1996-
Note: Completed publication in 2000
(Last published part not available but information about ending date known )
Stockholm r Nordic Association for Research on Latin
America
Note: Began in 1988; ceased in 1991
(First and last published issues not available but information about beginning and
ending dates known )
Optionally, supply the beginning and/or ending publication date in the publication, distri-
bution, etc., area if it can be readily ascertained.
Vancouver : University of British Columbia, [1998]-
(Earliest issue available: v. 1, no. 3, July 1998)
, 1997-[2000]
(Last published part not available but information about ending date known )
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-31
1.4F9
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
[1988-1991]
(First and last published issues not available but information about beginning and
ending dates known)
1.4F9. Do not record a date for naturally occurring objects that have not been packaged for
commercial distribution. For other unpublished items (e.g., manuscripts, art originals, uned-
ited or unpublished film or video materials, stock shots, nonprocessed sound recordings,
unpublished electronic resources), give the date of production (creation, inscription, manufac-
ture, recording, etc.).
1.4F10. Give the date or inclusive dates of unpublished collections (including those contain-
ing published items but not published as collections).
1.4G. Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
1.4GL If the name of the publisher is unknown and the place and name of the manufacturer
are found in the item, give the place and name of the manufacturer.
[S.l. : s.n.], 1970 (London : High Fidelity Sound Studios)
1.4G2. In recording the place and name of the manufacturer, follow the instructions in I.4B-
1.4D.
1.4G3. If the date of manufacture is given in place of an unknown date of publication, distri-
bution, etc. (see 1.4F6), do not repeat it here.
1.4G4. Optional addition. Give the place, name of manufacturer, and/or date of manufacture
if they are found in the item and differ from the place, name of publisher, distributor, etc.,
and date of publication, distribution, etc., and are considered important by the cataloguing
agency.
London : Arts Council of Great Britain, 1976 (Twickenham :
CTD Printers, 1974)
Harmondsworth : Penguin, 1949 (1963 printing)
1.5. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
Contents:
1.5 A. Preliminary rule
1.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
1.5C. Other physical details
1.5D. Dimensions
1.5E. Accompanying material
1.5A. Preliminary rule
1.5A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see LOC
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede other physical details (i.e., other than extent or dimensions) by a colon.
Precede dimensions by a semicolon.
Precede each statement of accompanying material by a plus sign.
Enclose physical details of accompanying material in parentheses.
1-32
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.SB4
I.5A2. Sources of information. Take information for this area from any source. Take explic-
itly or implicitly stated information from the item itself. Enclose information in square brack-
ets only when specifically instructed by the following chapters.
1.5A3. If an item is available in different formats (e.g., as text and microfilm; as sound disc
and sound tape reel), give the physical description of the format in hand. Optionally, make a
note describing other formats in which it is available (see f .7B 16).
1.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
1.5BI. Record the extent of the item by giving the number of physical units in arabic numer-
als and the specific material designation as instructed in subrule .5B in the chapter dealing
with the type of material to which the item belongs,
3 microscope slides
1 jigsaw puzzle
3 v.
1 hand puppet
If the units of the item are identical, add identical before the specific material designation.
25 identical maps
50 identical sets of 10 slides
1.5B2. Describe a single-part printed text item as instructed in 2.5B,
327 p.
310 leaves of braille
I.5B3. Specify the number of components as instructed in the following chapters.
1 microfiche (150 fr.)
3 v. (1397 p.)
1.5B4. If the item being described has a playing time, give that playing time as follows.
a) If the playing time is stated on the item, give the playing time as stated.
1 sound cassette (40 min . )
1 film loop (3 min., 23 sec.)
2 sound discs (1 nr., 30 min . )
b) If the playing time is not stated on the item but is readily ascertainable, give it.
1 videoreel (30 min.)
c) Optionally, if the playing time is neither stated on the item nor readily ascertainable,
give an approximate time.
1 piano roll (ca. 7 min.)
2 film reels (ca. 90 min.)
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-33
1.5BS
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCREPTION
d) Optionally, if the parts of a multipart item have a stated uniform playing time or an
approximate uniform playing time, give the playing time of each part followed by each.
Otherwise, give the total duration.
31 sound cassettes (60 min. each)
1 1 sound cassettes (ca. 30 min. each)
2 videoreels (50 min.)
1.5B5. In describing a multipart item that is not yet complete, give the specific material des-
ignation alone.
microscope slides
v .
Optionally, when the item is complete, add the number of physical units.
1.5 C. Other physical details
1.5C1. Give physical data (other than extent or dimensions) about an item as instructed in the
following chapters.
1 films trip (70 f r . ) : bSvi
321 p. : ill. (some col.)
5 microscope slides : stained
1 sound disc (20 min.) : analog, 33Vi rpm, mono.
1 model (4 pieces) : polystyrene
1.5D. Dimensions
1.5D1. Give the dimensions of an item as instructed in the following chapters.
1 wall chart : col. ; 24 X 48 cm.
321 p. : ill. (some col.) ; 23 cm.
6 microfilm reels ; 35 mm.
1 sound disc (56 min.) : digital, stereo. ; 4 3 /i in.
2 sound discs (1 hr., 15 min.) : analog, 33 Vs rpm,
stereo. ; 10-12 in.
1.5D2. Optionally, if the item is in a container, name the container and give its dimensions
either after the dimensions of the item or as the only dimensions. Separate the dimensions by
a comma.
12 paperweights : glass ; 12 cm. each in diam., in hoy, 40
X 50 X 8 cm.
1 stone : malachite in box 12 X 9 X 18 cm.
1-34
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.6
1.5E. Accompanying material
1.5E1. Give details of accompanying material (see Glossary, appendix D) in one of the fol-
lowing ways:
a) make a separate entry
or b) make a multilevel description {see 13.6)
or c) make a note (see 1 .7B 1 1 )
Accompanied by: A demographic atlas of north-west Ireland.
39 p. : col. maps ; 36 cm. Previously published separately
in 1956
Teacher ' s guide / by Robert Garry Shirts. 2 4 p.
Accompanied by filmstrip entitled: Mexico and Central
America
or d) give the number of physical units in arabic numerals and the name of the
accompanying material (using, when appropriate, a specific material designation)
at the end of the physical description.
387 p. : ill, ; 27 cm. + 1 set of teacher's notes
32 p. : col. ill. ; 28 cm. + 7 maps
200 p. : ill. ; 25 cm. + 2 computer disks
271 p, : ill. ; 21 cm. + 1 atlas
1 stereograph reel (12 pairs of fr.) : col. + 1 pamphlet
1 score (32 p.) ; 26 cm. + 3 sound cassettes
1 computer disk ; 5 l A in, + 1 demonstration disk + 1 set
of user' s notes
Optional addition. If method d) is used and if more detail is desired, give the physical
description of the accompanying material as instructed in the following chapters.
1 stereograph reel (12 pairs of fr.) : col. + 1 v. (12 p.
: ill. ; 18 cm.)
1 filmstrip (70 fr.) : col. ; 35 mm. + 1 v. (39 p. ; 22
cm. )
271 p. : ill. ; 21 cm. + 1 atlas (95 p. : 85 col. maps ;
32 cm.)
1.6. SERIES AREA
Contents:
1 .6A. Preliminary rule
I.6B. Title proper of series
1.6C. Parallel titles of series
1.6D. Other title information of series
1.6E. Statements of responsibility relating to series
1.6F. ISSN of series
1.6G. Numbering within series
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-35
1.6A
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.6H. Subseries
1.6J. More than one series statement
1.6A. Preliminary rule
1.6A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see l.OC.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Enclose each series statement (see 1.6J) in parentheses.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
Precede the ISSN of a series or subseries by a comma.
Precede the numbering within a series or subseries by a semicolon.
Enclose a date following a numeric and/or alphabetic designation in parentheses.
Precede the title of a subseries, or the designation for a subseries, by a full stop.
Precede the title of a subseries following a designation for the subseries by a comma.
For the use of the equals sign to precede parallel statements, see the appropriate rules.
1.6A2. Sources of information. Take information recorded in this area from the chief source
of information or from any other source prescribed for this area in the following chapters.
Enclose any information supplied from other sources in square brackets, within the parenthe-
ses enclosing each series statement.
1.6B. Title proper of series
1.6B1. If an item is issued in a series, transcribe the title proper of the series as instructed in
1.1B.
Virago modern classics
Great newspapers reprinted
If the title proper includes numbering as an integral part of the title proper of the series,
transcribe the numbering as part of the title proper (see also 1.6G).
Publication #122 of the Social Science Education
Consortium
The twenty-sixth L. Ray Buckendale lecture
Cuaderno numero G del instituto
1.6B2. If different forms of the title of the series (other than parallel titles) appear, choose the
title given in the first of the prescribed sources for the series area as the title proper of the
series. Give the other form(s) in the note area if of value in identifying the item.
If the title of the series does not appear in the first of the prescribed sources of information
and different forms appear elsewhere in the item, choose the title given in the other pre-
scribed sources in the order of preference for the sources (e.g., if different forms appear in
the second and third sources, choose the one appearing in the second source).
1-36
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.6G1
1.6C. Parallel titles of series
1.6C1. Follow the instructions in LID (second level of description) when transcribing the
parallel titles of a series.
Jeux visuels = Visual games
1.6D. Other title information of series
1,6D1. Give other title information of a series only if it provides valuable information identi-
fying the series. Follow the instructions in 1 . IE when transcribing other title information of a
series.
English linguistics, 1500-1750 : a collection of facsimile
reprints
Words : their origin, use, and spelling
1.6E. Statements of responsibility relating to series
1.6EI. Transcribe statements of responsibility appearing in conjunction with the series title
only if they are considered to be necessary for identification of the series. Follow the instruc-
tions in I. IF when transcribing a statement of responsibility relating to a series.
Map supplement / Association of American Geographers
Technical memorandum / Beach Erosion Board
Research monographs / Institute of Economic Affairs
Samtliche Werke / Thomas Mann
1.6F. ISSN of series
1.6F1. Give the International Standard Serial Number (ISSN) of a series if it appears in the
item being described (see also 1 ,6H7). Give the ISSN in the standard manner (i.e., ISSN fol-
lowed by a space and two groups of four digits separated by a hyphen).
Western Canada series report, ISSN 0317-3127
1.6G. Numbering within series
1.6G1. Give the numbering of the item within the series in the terms given in the item. Use
abbreviations as instructed in appendix B and numerals as instructed in appendix C.
Historic instruments at the Victoria and Albert Museum ; 4
Beatrix Potter jigsaw puzzles ; no. 1
Environment science research ; v. 6
Russian titles for the specialist, ISSN 0305-3741 ; no. 78
Recent scientific research ; Jan. 1996
Geopolitical statistical data ; CD1
Classic philosophers series ; A
(Items in this series are numbered A, B, C, D, etc. )
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-37
1.6G2
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
When the numbering is grammatically integrated with the series title, see 1.6B1.
If the numbering that appears on the item is known to be incorrect, transcribe it as found
and add the correct numbering in square brackets.
Kieler historische Studien ; Bd. 24 [i.e. 25]
Optionally, give designations from alternative systems of numbering (see 12. 3E).
Quellen und Forschungen zur Literatur- und
Kulturgeschichte ; 1 = 235
(When series changed title, publisher began a new system with I and continued
the system from the earlier title with 235)
If a new sequence of numbering is accompanied by wording to differentiate the sequence,
such as new series, include this wording. If a new sequence of numbering with the same sys-
tem as before is not accompanied by wording such as new series, supply [new ser. j or
another appropriate term (or its equivalent in the language of the title proper of the series).
See also 12.3G.
UCLA symposia on molecular and cellular biology ; new
ser . , v. 3
Cambridge studies in medieval li f e and thought ; 4 th ser . ,
30
Research monographs ; [new ser.], no. 1
Chemie und Fortschritt ; [n.F.], Heft 1
1.6G2. If the parts of a multipart item are separately numbered within a series, give the first
and the last numbers if the numbering is continuous. Otherwise, give all the numbers. For
numbering of a periodical series, see 12. 6B.
; v. 11-15
; v. 131, 145, 152
1.6G3. Optionally, if an item has both a numeric and/or alphabetic designation and a chrono-
logical designation, give the chronologicai designation after the numeric and/or alphabetic
designation. A date of publication, distribution, etc., is not a chronological designation.
; v. 3, no. 2 (Sept. 1981)
1.6H. Subseries
1.6H1. If an item is one of a subseries (see Glossary, appendix D) and both the series and the
subseries are named in the item, give the details of the main series (see 1.6A-1.6G) first and
follow them with the name of the subseries and the details of that subseries.
Biblioteca del lavoro . Serie professionals
Geological Survey professional paper ; 683-D.
Contributions to palaeontology
1-38
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.6J1
1.6I-I2. If the main series and subseries titles appear in more than one language or script,
choose as the tide proper for the series area the main series and subseries titles in the lan-
guage (or the clearly predominant language) of the particular item being catalogued. If this
criterion is not applicable, choose the first main series and subseries titles that are in the same
language as each other.
1.6H3. If a phrase such as "new series," "second series," etc., appears with an unnumbered
series, transcribe such a phrase as a subseries title. If it appears with a numbered series, tran-
scribe the phrase as part of the numbering of the series as instructed in 1.6G1 (see also
12.3G).
Cambridge studies in international and comparative law.
New series
Marian Library studies ; new ser. , v. 12
1.6H4. In case of doubt about whether one of the titles is a subseries or a second series, treat
it as a second series (see I.6J).
1.6H5. If the subseries has an alphabetic or numeric designation and no title, give the desig-
nation. If such a subseries has a title as weil as a designation, give the title after the
designation.
Music for today. Series 2 ; no. 8
Viewmaster science series. 4, Physics
1.6H6. Give parallel titles, other title information, and statements of responsibility relating to
subseries as instructed in 1.6C, I.6D, and 1.6E.
World films. France today = La France d' au j ourd' hui
Papers and documents of the I.C.I. Series C,
Bibliographies = Travaux et documents de 1' I.C.I. Serie C,
Bibliographies
1.6H7. Give the ISSN of a subseries if it appears in the item being described; in such a case,
omit the ISSN of the main series.
Janua linguarum. Series maior, ISSN 0075-3114
not Janua linguarum, ISSN 0446-4796. Series maior, ISSN 0075-
3114
1.6H8. Give the numbering within a subseries as instructed in I.6G.
Sciences. Physics ; TSP 1
Biblioteca de arte hispanico ; 8 , Artes aplicadas ; 1
1.6J. More than one series statement
1.6J1. The information relating to one series, or series and subseries, constitutes one series
statement. If an item belongs to two or more series and/or two or more series and subseries,
give separate series statements and enclose each statement in parentheses. Follow the instruc-
tions in I.6A-1.6H in recording each series statement.
(Video marvels ; no. 33} {Educational progress series ;
no. 3)
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-39
1.7
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
If parts of an item belong to different series and this relationship cannot be stated clearly
in the series area, give details of the series in a note (see 1 ,7B12).
1.7. NOTE AREA
Contents:
1.7A. Preliminary rule
1.7B. Notes
1.7A. Preliminary rule
1.7A1. Punctuation
Precede each note by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph for each.
Separate introductory wording from the main content of a note by a colon followed but not
preceded by a space,
1.7A2. Sources of information. Take data recorded in notes from any suitable source. Use
square brackets only for interpolations within quoted material. See also 1.0E.
1.7A3. Form of notes
Order of information. If data in a note correspond to data found in the title and statement of
responsibility, edition, material (or type of publication) specific details, publication, etc.,
physical description, and series areas, give the elements of the data in the order in which they
appear in those areas. In such a case, use prescribed punctuation, except substitute a full stop
for a full stop, space, dash, space.
Adaptation of: Germinie Lacerteux / Edmond et Jules ds
Goncourt
Originally published: London : Gray, 1871
Revision of: 3rd ed. London : Kacmillan, 1953
When giving names or titles originally in nonroman scripts, use the original script
whenever possible rather than a romanization (see 1.0E).
Based on: EpaTM KapaMa30Bbi / *.M. ^octocbckhh
Quotations. Give quotations from the item or from other sources in quotation marks. Follow
the quotation by an indication of its source, unless that source is the chief source of
information. Do not use prescribed punctuation within quotations.
"Published for the Royal Institute of Public
Administration"
"A textbook for 6th form students"— Pref .
"Generally considered to be by William Langland"— Oxford
companion to English literature
1-40
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.7B
References. Refer to passages in the item, or in other sources, if these either support the
cataloguer's own assertions or save repetition in the catalogue entry of information readily
available from other sources.
In trod . (p . xxix ) refutes attribution to John Bodenham
Detailed description in: Supplement to Hain's Repertorium
bibliographicum / w.A. Copinger
Formal notes. Use formal notes employing an invariable introductory word or phrase or a
standard form of words when uniformity of presentation assists in the recognition of the type
of information being presented or when their use provides economy of space without loss of
clarity.
Informal notes. When making informal notes, use statements that present the information as
briefly as clarity, understand ability, and grammar permit,
1.7 A4. Notes citing other editions and works
Other editions. In citing another edition of the same work, give enough information to iden-
tify the edition cited.
Revision of: 2nd ed., 1973
Other works and other manifestations of the same work. In citing other works and other
manifestations of the same work (other than different editions with the same title), always
give the title and (when applicable) the statement(s) of responsibility. Give the citation in the
form: main entry heading, title proper; or in the form: title proper / statement of responsibil-
ity. When necessary, add the edition and/or date of publication of the work cited.
Continues: Poetry in London. 1931-1947
Translation of: Le deuxieme sexe
Previously published as: Mike. 1909
Adaptation of: Wells, H.G. Kipps
or Adaptation of: Kipps / by H.G. Wells
Notes relating to items reproduced. In describing an item that is a reproduction of another
(e.g., a text reproduced in microform; a manuscript reproduced in book form; a set of maps
reproduced as slides), give the notes relating to the reproduction and then the notes relating to
the original. Combine the notes relating to the original in one note, giving the details in the
order of the areas to which they relate.
1.7A5. Notes contain useful descriptive information that cannot be fitted into other areas of
the description. A general outline of notes is given in 1.7B. Specific applications of I.7B are
provided in other chapters in part I. When appropriate, combine two or more notes to make
one note.
1.7B. Notes
Give notes in the order in which they are listed here. However, give a particular note first
when it has been decided that note is of primary importance.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-41
1.7B1
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.7B1. Nature, scope, or artistic form
Comedy in two acts
Documentary
L7B2, Language of the item and/or translation or adaptation
Commentary in English
Spanish version of : Brushing away tooth decay
1.7B3. Source of title proper
Title from container
Title from descriptive insert
1.7B4. Variations in title. Make notes on titles by which a bibliographic resource is com-
monly known or on titles borne by the resource other than the title proper if considered to be
important.
Cover title: Giovanni da Firenze
Original title: 1/ education sentimentale
Commonly known as : LCIB
UBS. Parallel titles and other title information
Title on container: The four seasons
Subtitle: An enquiry into the present state of medicine
including several recommendations as to how it may be
improved and a discussion of the merits of the proposals of
other persons
1,7B6. Statements of responsibility
Attributed to Thomas Dekker
Based on the novel by Thomas Hardy
Inspired by themes from the music of George Butterworth
I.7B7. Edition and history
Formerly available as: CAS 675
Continues: Monthly Scottish news bulletin
Rev. ed- of: The portable Dorothy Parker
1.7B8. Material (or type of publication) specific details
Scale of original: ca. 1:6,000
Military grid
File size varies
Vol. numbering irregular
Numbering begins each year with no. 1
1-42
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.7B13
1.7B9. Publication, distribution, etc.
Distributed in the U,K. by: EAV Ltd.
Published in London or Manchester, 1807-1899
Began in 1991
Completed publication with v, 6
Completed publication in 1998
Began publication in 1984; ceased in 1993
1.7B10. Physical description
Printed area measures 30 X 4 6 cm .
Consists of head and torso made of clear plastic, Ve life
size
Magnetic sound track
1.7BU. Accompanying material and supplements
Set includes booklet: New mathematics guide. 16 p.
Every 3rd issue includes supplement: EEC facts and
statistics
Slides with every 7th issue
1.7B12. Series
Originally issued in the series: Our world of today
Pts . 1 and 2 in series: African perspective. Pts. 3 and 4
in series: Third World series. Pt. 5 in both series
1.7B13. Dissertations. If the item being described is a dissertation or thesis presented as part
of the requirements for an academic degree, give Thesis followed by a brief statement of the
degree for which the author was a candidate (e.g., (MA.) or (Ph.D.), or, for theses to which
conventional abbreviations do not apply, (doctoral) or (master's)), the name of the institution
or faculty to which the thesis was presented, and the year in which the degree was granted.
Thesis (Ph . D , ) —University of Toronto, 1974
Thesis (M. A. ) — Universi ty College, London, 1969
Thesis (doctoral) — Freie Universitat, Berlin, 1973
If the publication is a revision or abridgement of a thesis, state this.
Abstract of thesis (Ph.D. )— University of Illinois at
Urbana -Champaign, 1974
If the thesis is a text by someone else edited by the candidate, give the candidate's name in
the note.
Karl Schmidt's thesis (doctoral ) — Munchen, 1965
If the publication lacks a formal thesis statement, give a bibliographic history note.
Originally presented as the author's thesis (doctoral-
Heidelberg) under the title: ...
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
1-43
1.7B14
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.7E14. Audience
Intended audience : Elementary grades
For children aged 7-9
Intended audience: Clinical students and postgraduate
house officers
1.7B15. Reference to published descriptions
References: HR6471; GW9101; Goff D-403
1.7B16. Other formats. Give the details of other formats in which the content of the item
has been issued.
Issued also on cassette and cartridge tapes
Issued also in 16 mm. format
For detaiSs of other formats available in the library, see 1.7B20.
1.7B17. Summary
Summary: Pictures the highlights of the play Julius Caesar
using photographs of an actual production
1.7B18. Contents
Partial contents: Introduction / Howard H. Brinton —
William I. Hull : a biographical sketch / Janet Whitney —
George Fox as a man / Frank Aydelotte
Contents: v. 1, Plain tales from the hills — v. 2-3.
Soldiers three and military tales — v. 4. In black and white
— v. 5. The phantom 'rickshaw and other stories — v. 6.
Under the deodars. The story of the Gadsbys . Wee Willie
Winkie
1.7B19. Numbers associated with the item (other than those covered in 1.8)
Supt. of Docs, no.: I 19.16:818
Warner Bros.: K56151
1.7B20. Copy being described, library's holdings, and restrictions on use. Give important
descriptive details of the particular copy being described.
Ms. notes by author on endpapers
Lacks last 15 min . of recording
Give details of the library's holdings of a multipart item if those holdings are incomplete.
Library set lacks slides 7-9
Library has v. 1, 3-5, and 7
Indicate any restrictions on the use of the item.
Accessible after 2010
For graduate students only
1-44
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
I.8A2
1.7B21. "With" notes. If the title and statement of responsibility area contains a title that
applies to only a part of an item lacking a collective title and, therefore, more than one
description is made (see 1.1G2), make a note beginning With: and listing the other separately
titled works in the item in the order in which they appear.
With: Candles at night / Alexandra Napier
With: Sonata in G, op. 1, no. 5 / Carlo Francesco Chabran —
Sonata no. 1 in B flat / Pietro Nardini
1.7B22. Combined notes relating to the original. In making a note relating to an original,
combine the data into a single note (see I.7A4, i.lIF,and I1.7B22).
Facsim. of: A classification and subject index for
cataloguing and arranging the books and pamphlets of a
library. Amherst, Mass. ; [s.n.], 1876 (Hartford, Conn. :
Case, Lockwood 6 Brainard) . 44 p. ; 25 cm.
L7B23. Item described. For seriate, integrating resources, and multipart items, if the descrip-
tion is not based on the first issue, part, or iteration, identify the issue, part, or iteration used
as the basis of the description (see also 12.7B23).
Description based on: Pt. 2, published 1998
Description based on: Vol, 1, no. 3 {Aug, 1999)
Latest issue consulted: 1999/10
For remote access resources, always give the date on which the resource was viewed for
description.
1.8. STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
Contents:
1.8A, Preliminary rule
1.8B. Standard number
l.SC. Key-title
1.8D. Terms of availability
1.8E. Qualification
I.8A. Preliminary rule
1.8A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede each repetition of this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a key-title by an equals sign.
Precede terms of availability by a colon.
Enclose a qualification to the standard number or terms of availability in parentheses.
1.8A2. Sources of information. Take information included in this area from any source. Do
not enclose any information in brackets.
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
1-45
1.8B
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.8B. Standard number
1.SB1. Give the Internationa] Standard Book Number (ISBN), or International Standard Serial
Number (ISSN), or any other international ly agreed standard number for the item being
described. Give such numbers with the agreed abbreviation and with the standard spacing or
hyphenation.
ISBN 0-552-67587-3
ISSN 0002-9769
1.8B2. If an item bears two or more such numbers, give the one that applies to the item being
described.
Optionally, give more than one number and add a qualification as prescribed in 1.8E. Give
a number for a complete set before the number(s) for the part(s). Give numbers for parts in
the order of the parts. Give a number for accompanying material last.
ISBN 0-379-00550-6 (set). - ISBN 0-37 9-00551-4 (v. 1)
1.8B3. Give any number of an item other than an International Standard Number in a note
(see 1.7B19).
1.8B4. If a number is known to be incorrectly printed in the item, give the correct number if
it can be readily ascertained and add (corrected) to it.
ISBN 0-340-16427-1 (corrected)
1.8C. Key-title
I-8C1. Give the key-title of a resource, if it is found on the item or is otherwise readily avail-
able, after the International Standard Serial Number (ISSN). Give the key-title even if it is
identical with the title proper. If no ISSN is given, do not record the key-title.
ISSN 0340-0352 = I FLA journal
1.8D. Optional addition. Terms of availability
1.8D1. Give the terms on which the item is available. These terms consist of the price (given
in numerals with standard symbols) if the item is for sale, or a brief statement of other terms
if the item is not for sale.
£2.50
Free to students of the college
For hire
1.8E. Qualification
1.SE1. Give, after the standard number, a brief qualification when a resource bears two or
more standard numbers. If a resource has only one standard number, add the type of binding
if considered to be important.
ISBN
0
-435-91660
-2
(cased)
. - ISBN 0-435-91661
-0 (pbk.)
ISBN
0
-387-08266
-2
(U.S. } .
- ISBN 3-540-08266-
2 (Germany)
ISBN
0
-684-14258
-9
(bound)
: $12.50. ~ ISBN 0-
684-14257-0
(pbk. )
$6.95
ISBN
0
-7225-0344
-X
(pbk.)
: £8.75
1-46
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.10A
Optionally, when the terms of availability (see I.8D) need qualification, give one briefly.
£1.00 (£0.50 to members)
$12.00 ($6.00 to students)
1.8E2. If there is no standard number, give the terms of availability before any qualification.
$10.00 (pbk.)
1.9. SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
Contents:
1.9A. Supplementary items described independently
1 .9B. Supplementary items described dependency
1.9A. Supplementary items described independently
1.9AI, Describe supplementary (including accompanying and related) items that are to be
catalogued separately {see 21,28) as separate items. For instructions on the recording of the
title proper of supplementary items, the titles proper of which consist of two or more parts,
see 1.1 B9.
1.9B. Supplementary items described dependency
L9BI. Choose one of the following methods of describing supplementary {including accom-
panying and related) items described dependently:
a) record the item as accompanying material as instructed in 1.5Eld
48 photos. : bsw ; 20 X 16 cm. + 1 v.
5 v. : ill., facsims., ports ; 32 cm. + 1 atlas (135 p. ;
32 cm.)
or b) record minor supplementary items in a note (see 1 .7B 1 1)
Accompanied by supplement (37 p.) issued in 1971
or c) use the multilevel description {see 13.6).
The Nonesuch Dickens / published under the editorial
direction of Arthur Waugh ... [et al , ] . — Eloomsbury [England]
: Nonesuch, 1937-1938. - 23 v. : ill. ; 26 cm.
The Wonesuch Dickens. Retrospectus and prospectus. ■■■ 1937.
— 130 p. : ill., facsims. — Contains facsim. pages from
previous eds . of The Pickwick papers.
1.10. ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
1.10A. This rule applies to items that are made up of two or more components, two or more
of which belong to distinct material types (e.g., a sound recording and a printed text).
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-47
1.10B GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.1GB. If an item has one predominant component, describe it in terms of that component and
give details of the subsidiary component(s) as accompanying material following the physical
description (see 1.5E) or in a note (see 1.7B11).
47 slides : col. ; 5 X 5 cm . + 1 sound cassette
3 v. : ill. ; 30 cm.
Note: Sound disc (12 man, : analog, 45 rpm, mono. ; 7 in.)
in pocket at end of v. 3
1.10C. If an item has no predominant component, apply the following in addition to other
relevant rules in this chapter and in the appropriate following chapters.
1.10C1. General material designation. If a general material designation is used (see 1.1C):
a) for an item without a collective title, give the appropriate designation after each title as
instructed in L1C2
Life in the time of Charles Dickens [filmstrip] / editor,
Albert Ammerman. The time, the life, the works of Charles
Dickens, and excerpts from Dickens on America [sound
recording] / read by Ian Brett and Peter Howell
b) for an item with a collective title, follow the instructions in 1.1C4.
[kit]
or ... [multimedia]
L10C2. Physical description. Apply whichever of the following three methods is appropri-
ate to the item being described:
a) Give the extent of each part or group of parts belonging to each distinct class of
materia! as the first element of the physical description {do this if no further physical
description of each item is desired). Optionally, if the parts are in a container, name the
container and give its dimensions.
400 lesson cards, 40 answer key booklets, 1 student
record, 1 teacher' s handbook, 1 placement test ; in
container 18 X 25 X 19 cm.
12 slides, 1 sound cassette, 1 booklet, 1 map ; in box 16
X 30 X 20 cm.
b) Give a separate physical description for each part or group of parts belonging to each
distinct class of material (do this if a further physical description of each item is
desired). Give each physical description on a separate line. Optionally, if the parts are
in a container, name the container after the last physical description and give its
dimensions.
Beyond the reading list [gkd] : guidelines for research in
the humanities / CP. Ravilious ; University of Sussex
Library. — Brighton [England] : University of Sussex
Library, Audio-Visual Materials Room [distributor], 1975
4 6 slides : col .
1 sound cassette (15 rain . ) : analog, mono .
1-48
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.11A
Summary: The bibliographic control of the humanities, with
special reference to li tera ture . A typical research pro j ect
is followed through. — Intended audience: Postgraduates and
research students
Hot deserts ;gkd] / Ruth Way. — London ; Toronto : Visual
Publications, [1975?]
1 filmstrip (39 fr.) : col. ; 35 mm.
1 sound cassette (ca. 18 min.) : analog, mono .
4 study prints : col. ; 29 X 88 cm., folded to 29 X 44
cm.
1 v. (15 p. ) ; 22 cm.
1 folded sheet (4 p.) ; 22 cm.
All in container 33 X 47 X 5 cm.
(The Earth & man. The Earth without man ; 4). — Pictures
on filmstrip and study prints identical. — Cassette has
automatic and manual advance signals
c) For items with a large number of heterogeneous materials, give a genera] term as the
extent. Give the number of such pieces unless it cannot be ascertained. Optionally, if
the pieces are in a container, name the container and give its dimensions.
L10C3. Notes. Give notes on particular parts of the item together following the series area or
following the physical description(s) if no series area is present.
Tape cassette also issued as disc. — Slides photographed
in Death Valley, Calif.
1.10D. Multilevel description
1.10D1. Optionally, in describing a single part of a multimedia item, follow the instructions
in 13.6.
1.11. FACSIMILES, PHOTOCOPIES, AND OTHER REPRODUCTIONS
1.11A, In describing a facsimile, photocopy, or other reproduction of printed texts, maps,
manuscripts, printed music, and graphic items, give the data relating to the facsimile, etc., in
ail areas except the note area.
Give data relating to the original in the note area (but give numbering of serials in the
material (or type of publication) specific details area).
If a facsimile, etc, is in a form of material different from that of the original (e.g., a manu-
script reproduced as a book), use the chapter on the form of the facsimile, etc., in determin-
ing the sources of information (e.g., for a manuscript reproduced as a book, use 2.0B), In
addition to instructions given in the relevant chapters, follow the instructions in this rule.
various pieces
27 various pieces
42 various pieces
in box 20 X 12 X 6 cm.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
1-49
1.11B
GENERAL RULES FOR DESCRIPTION
1.11B. If the facsimile, etc., has a title different from the original, give the title of the facsim-
ile, etc., as the title proper. Give the original title as other title information if it appears on the
chief source of information of the facsimile, etc. (see LtD3). Otherwise, give the title of the
original in the note area (see 1.1 IF).
1.11C. If the facsimile, etc., has the edition statement, publication details, or series data of
the original as well as those of the facsimile, etc., give those of the facsimile, etc., in the
edition, publication, distribution, etc., and series areas. Give the details of the original in the
note area {see 1.1 IF).
1.11D. Give the physical description of the facsimile, etc., in the physical description area.
Give the physical description of the original in the note area (see 1.1 IF).
1.11E. If the facsimile, etc., has a standard number, give it in the standard number and terms
of availability area, together with the key-title and terms of availability of the facsimile, etc.
Give the standard number and key-title of the original in the note area (see 1 . 1 1 F).
1.11F. Give all the details of the original of a facsimile, etc., in a single note (see also
1.7A4). Give the details of the original in the order of the areas of the description.
The baby's bouquet [gkd] : a fresh bunch of old rhymes and
tunes / arranged and decorated by Walter Crane ; the tunes
collected and arranged by L.C. — London : Pan, 1974
56 p. : col. ill. ; 16 X 17 cm. - (A Piccolo book)
Facsim. of: 2nd ed., rev. London : Routledge, 1877
ISBN 0-330-24089-7 : £0.60
Alice's adventures under ground :gkd] / by Lewis Carroll ;
with a new introduction by Martin Gardner. — Mew York :
Dover, 1965
xiii, 91, [17] p. : ill., f acsims . ; 22 cm.
Contents: Complete facsimile of the British Museum
manuscript of Alice's adventures under ground — Front matter
of the Macmillan 1886 edition - Back matter of the Macmillan
1886 edition
Pre-Raphaelite drawings ;gmd] / by Dante Gabriel Rossetti ;
[selected and introduced by] Andrea Rose. — Chicago :
University of Chicago Press, 1977
3 microfiches (251 fr.) : all ill. ; 10 X 15 cm. + 1
booklet
Reproductions of 251 drawings from Birmingham City Museums
1-50
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CHAPTER
2
Books, Pamphlets, and Printed Sheets
Contents
2.0 GENERAL RULES
2.0A Scope
2. OB Sources of information
2.0C Punctuation
2.0D Levels of detail in the description
2.0E Language and script of the description
2. OF Inaccuracies
2.0G Accents and other diacritical marks
2, OH Items with several title pages
2.1 TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
2.1A Preliminary rule
2.1A1 Punctuation
2. IB Title proper
2.1C General material designation
2. ID Parallel titles
2. IE Other title information
2, IF Statements of responsibility
2. 1G Items without a collective title
2.2 EDITION AREA
2.2A Preliminary rule
2.2A1 Punctuation
2.2B Edition statement
2,2C Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
2. 2D Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
2.2E Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
2.3 MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
2.4 PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
2.4A Preliminary rule
2.4 A 1 Punctuation
2.4B General rule
2.4C Piace of publication, distribution, etc.
2.4D Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
AACR2 Revision 2002
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.4E Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
2.4F Date of publication, distribution, etc.
2.4G Place of printing, name of printer, date of printing
2.5 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
2.5A Preliminary rule
2.5AI Punctuation
2.5B Number of volumes and/or pagination
2.5B 1 Single volumes
2.5B16 Publications in more than one volume
2.5B22 Braille or other tactile systems
2.5B23 Large print
2.5C Illustrative matter
2.5D Dimensions
2.5E Accompanying material
2.6 SERIES AREA
2.6A Preliminary rule
2.6A I Punctuation
2.6B Series statements
2.7 NOTE AREA
2.7A Preliminary rule
2.7A1 Punctuation
2.7B Notes
2.8 STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
2.8A Preliminary rule
2.8AI Punctuation
2.8B International Standard Boole Number (ISBN)
2.8C Terms of availability
2.8D Qualification
2.9 SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
2.10 ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
2. 1 1 FACSIMILES, PHOTOCOPIES, AND OTHER REPRODUCTIONS
Early Printed Monographs
2.12 SCOPE
2.13 CHIEF SOURCE OF INFORMATION
2.14 TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
2.15 EDITION AREA
2. 16 PUBLICATION, ETC., AREA
2.17 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
2.18 NOTE AREA
2-2
AACR2 Revision 2002
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.0B2
2.0. GENERAL RULES
2.0 A, Scope
2.0A1. The rules in this chapter cover the description of separately published monographic
printed items other than cartographic items {see chapter 3) and printed music {see chapter 5).
These are referred to hereafter in this chapter as printed monographs and comprise books,
pamphlets, and single sheets. For microform reproductions of printed texts, see chapter i 1,
For serials and updating loose-leafs, see also chapter 12.
2.0B. Sources of information
2.0B1. Chief source of information. The chief source of information for printed monographs
is the title page or, if there is no title page, the source from within the publication that is used
as a substitute for it. For printed monographs published without a title page, or without a title
page applying to the whole work {as in the case of some editions of the Bible and some
bilingual dictionaries), use the part of the item supplying the most complete information,
whether this be the cover {excluding a separate book jacket), caption, colophon, running title,
or other part. Specify the part used as a title page substitute in a note (see 2.7B3). If no part
of the item supplies data that can be used as the basis of the description, take the necessary
information from any available source. If the information traditionally given on the title page
is given on facing pages or on pages on successive leaves, with or without repetition, treat
those pages as the title page.
Use the colophon as the chief source of information for an oriental nonroman script publi-
cation if the colophon contains full bibliographic information and the following conditions
apply:
a) the page standing in the position of a title page bears only the title proper
or b) the title page bears only a calligraphic version of the title proper
or c) the title page bears only a western-language version of the title and other biblio-
graphic information.
2.0B2. Prescribed sources of information. The prescribed source(s) of information for each
area of the description of printed monographs is set out below. Enclose information taken
from outside the prescribed source(s) in square brackets.
AREA PRESCRIBED SOURCES OF INFORMATION
Title and statement of Title page 1
responsibility
Edition Title page, other preliminaries, colophon
Publication, distribution, etc. Title page, other preliminaries, colophon
Physical description The whole publication
Series Series title page, monograph title page, cover,
rest of the publication
Note Any source
Standard number and terms of Any source
availability
l. Hereafter in this chapter, title page includes any substitute (including, for oriental publications, a colophon specified in
2. OBI as a title page substitute).
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
2-3
2.0C
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.0C. Punctuation
For the punctuation of the description as a whole, see 1 .OC.
For the prescribed punctuation of elements, see the following rules.
2.0D. Levels of detail in the description
See 1.0D.
2.0E. Language and script of the description
See 1.0E.
2.0F. Inaccuracies
See 1.0F.
2.0G. Accents and other diacritical marks
See LOG.
2.0H. Items with several title pages
See L0A3.
2.1. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
Contents:
2.IA. Preliminary rule
2. IB. Title proper
2.1C. General materia] designation
2.1D. Parallel titles
2.1E. Other title information
2. IF. Statements of responsibility
2. 1G. Items without a collective title
2.1A, Preliminary rule
2.1 At. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see l.OC.
Precede the title of a supplement or section (see 1.1 B9) by a full stop.
Enclose the general material designation in square brackets.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede each unit of other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
For the punctuation of this area for items without a collective title, see 1.1G.
2.1B. Title proper
2.1B1. Transcribe the title proper as instructed in LIB.
The articulate mammal
2-4
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
BOOKS. PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.1E1
VJhy a ducit?
Classification dec imaie de Dewey e t i ndex
Memoirs of the life of the late John My t ton, Esq.
The ballroom of romance and other stories
The f ir s r. Rex S t.ou t omni bus
The most of P . G . Kodehouse
Kariowe' s plays
Linda Goodman's sun signs
Larousse' s French-Eng .1. ish dictionary
Harriet, said-
(Title page reads: Harriet said .„ )
Under the hill, or, The story of Venus and Tannhauser
4.50 from Paddington
Advanced calculus. Student handbook
(Title proper consists of title of main work and title of handbook. See 1.1H9)
Instructor' s guide and key for The American economy
Bank officer's handbook of commercial banking lav/, fourth
edition, by Frederick K. Eentei. 1975 supplement
(Title proper consists of title, statement of responsibility, and edition statement of
main work and designation of supplement )
Specify the part used as a title page substitute in a note (see 2.7B3).
2.1C. Optional addition. General material designation
2.IC1. Give immediately following the title proper the appropriate general material designa-
tion as instructed in 1.1C.
2.1C2. If an item contains parts belonging to materials falling into two or more categories,
and if none of these is the predominant constituent of the item, give either multimedia or kit
as the designation (see 1.1C1 and 1.10C1).
2.1D. Parallel titles
2.ID1. Transcribe parallel titles as instructed in 1. 3D.
Tyres and wheels = Pneus et roues = Reifen und Rader
Thumbeiina = Tommelise
2.1E. Other title information
2.1E1. Transcribe other title information as instructed in l.tE.
A Laodicean
a story of to-day
The age of neo-clas sicism : the fourteenth exhibition of
the Council of Europe
AACR2 Revision 2002
2~5
2.1F
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
Private eyeballs : a golden treasury of bad taste
Letters to an intimate stranger : a year in the life of Jack
Trevor Story
2.1F. Statements of responsibility
2.1F1. Transcribe statements of responsibility relating to persons or bodies as instructed in
1.1 F.
Shut up in Paris / by Nathan Sheppard
Great Britain : handbook for travellers / by Karl Baedeker
Le pere Goriot / Honore de Balzac
Statistics of homelessness / Home Office
Tynan right & left : plays, films, people, places, and
events / Kenneth Tynan
Vas-y, Charlie Brown / par Charles M. Schulz
Dan Russel the fox : an episode in the life of Miss Rowan /
by E.CE. Somerville and Martin Ross
The world of the lion / by Samuel Devend ... [et al . ]
Eventyr og historier / H.C. Andersen
A modern herbal / by Mrs, M. Grieve ; edited and introduced
by Mrs . C . F. Leyel
(Lengthy other title information given in note area )
Eldorado : a story of the Scarlet Pimpernel / by the
Baroness Orczy
Letters from AE / selected and edited by Alan Denson ;
with a foreword by Monk Gibbon
A French and English dictionary / compiled from the best
authorities of both languages by Professors De Lolme and
Wallace r and Henry Bridgeman
The diary of a country parson, 1758-1802 / by James
Woodforde ; passages selected and edited by John Beresford
Hadrian the Seventh / Fr. Rolfe (Frederick, Baron Corvo)
Underwater acoustics : a report / by the Natural
Environment Research Council Working Group on Underwater
Acoustics
Proceedings / International Symposium on the Cataloguing,
Coding, and Statistics of Audio- Visual Materials ; organised
by ISO/TC46 Documentation in collaboration with IFLA and
IFTC, 7-9 January 1976 in Strasbourg
American Ballet Theatre : thirty-six years of scenic and
costume design, 1940-1976 / presented by Ballet Theatre
Foundation, Inc., and the International Exhibitions
Foundation
2-6
AACR2 Revision 2002
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.1G1
Scientific policy, research, and development in Canada : a
bibliography / prepared by the National Science Library =
La politique des sciences, la recherche et le developpernent
au Canada : bibliographic / etablie par la Bibliotheque
nationale des sciences
Ramsay Traquair and his successors : guide to the archive /
Canadian Architecture Collection, Blackader-Lauterman
Library of Architecture and Art, McGill University ; Irena
Murray, general editor = Ramsay Traquair et ses successeurs
: guide du fonds / Collection d' architecture canadienne,
Blackader-Lauterman Library of Architecture and Art, McGill
University ,- Irena Murray, directrice
Teach yourself Irish / Myles Dillon, Donncha 0 Croinin
Swedenborgs korrespondenslara / av Inge Jonsson ; with a
summary in English
Book of bores / drawings by Michael Heath
Sanditon / Jane Austen and another lady
2.1F2. Add a word or short phrase to the statement of responsibility if the relationship
between the title and the person(s) or body (bodies) named in the statement is not clear.
Morte Arthure / [edited by] John Finlayson
The great ideas of Plato / [selected by] Eugene Freeman
and David Appel
Research in human geography / by Michael Chisholm ,- [for
the] Social Science Research Council
Palava Parrot / [illustrations by] Tamasin Cole ; story by
James Cressey
Antologija hrvatske poezije dvadesetog stoljeca od
Kranjcevica do danas / [sastavili] Slavko Mihalic, Josip
Pupafiic, Anton Soljan
2.1G. Items without a collective title
2.1G1. If a printed monograph lacks a collective title, transcribe the titles of the individual
parts as instructed in 1.1G.
The listing attic ; The unstrung harp / by Edward Gorey
Flash and filigree ; and, The magic Christian / by Terry
Southern
Henry Esmond : a novel / by Thackeray. Bleak House : a
novel / by Dickens
Human ismens krise / af H.C. Branner. Eneren og mas sen /
af Martin A. Hansen
AACR2 Revision 2002
2-7
2.1G2
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.1G2. Make the relationship between statements of responsibility and the parts of an item
lacking a collective title clear by additions as instructed in 2. 1F2.
Man Friday : a play ; Mind your head : a return trip with
songs / Adrian Mitchell ; music [for Man Friday] by Mike
We s tbrook ; music [for Mind your head] by Andy Roberts
2.2. EDITION AREA
Contents:
2.2A. Preliminary rule
2.2B. Edition statement
2.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
2. 2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
2.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
2.2A. Preliminary rule
2.2AI. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see i.OC.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a statement relating to a named revision of an edition by a comma.
Precede the first statement of responsibility following an edition statement by a diagonal
slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
2.2B. Edition statement
2.2B1. Transcribe a statement relating to an edition of a work that contains differences from
other editions of that work, or to a named reissue of a work, as instructed in 1.2B,
2nd ed.
Hew ed., rev, and enl.
1st American ed.
1st illustrated ed.
Household ed .
6. Aufl.
Draft
Facsim. ed.
Mew Wessex ed.
[3rd ed. ]
[Mew ed . ]
3 J ed.
2.2B2. In case of doubt about whether a statement is an edition statement, follow the instruc-
tions in 1.2B3.
2-8
AACR2 Revision 2002
BOOKS. PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.2E1
2.2B3. Optional addition. If an item lacks an edition statement but is known to contain sig-
nificant changes from other editions, supply a suitable brief statement in the language and
script of the title proper and enclose it in square brackets.
[ New ed . ]
ed . ]
2.2B4. If an edition statement appears in more than one language or script, transcribe the
statement that is in the language or script of the title proper. If this criterion does not apply,
transcribe the statement that appears first. Optionally, transcribe the parallel statemcnt(s),
each preceded by an equals sign,
2.2B5. If an item lacking a collective title contains one or more works with an associated
edition statement, transcribe such statements following the titles and statements of responsi-
bility to which they relate, separated from them by a full stop.
2.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
2.2C1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more editions, but not to all
editions, of a work as instructed in 1.2C and 2. IF.
Economic history of England : a study in social
development / by H.O. Meredith. - 5th ed. / by C. Ellin
The well -beloved : a sketch of a temper anient / Thomas
Hardy . •■■ l!ew We s sex ed . / in traduction by J . Hil li s Ki lie r ;
notes by Edward Kende I son
A French and English dictionary / compiled from the best,
authorities of both languages by Professors De Lolme and
Wallace , and Henry Er i dgeman . — [Kew ed . ] / revised,
corrected, and considerably enlarged by E. Roubaud
A short history of the Catholic Church / by Philip Hughes.
- 8th ed. / with a final chapter (1966-1974) by E.E.Y. Hales
22D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
2.2D1. If an item is a named revision of an edition, transcribe the statement relating to that
revision as instructed in 1,2D.
Selected poems / D.H, Lawrence. -■ [l'e\-/ ed. ] / edited, with
an introduction, by Ke ith Saga r- , P.epr . with minor revisions
Ireland / edited by L. Russel Mu irhead. - 3rd ed . , 2nd
( cor r . ) impression
Do not record statements relating to an impression or printing that contains no changes
unless the item is considered to be of particular importance to the cataloguing agency.
22E, Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
2.2E1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more named revisions of an
edition (but not to all such revisions) as instructed in 1.2E and 2. IF.
AACR2 Revision 2002
2-9
2.3
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.3. MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
2.3A. This area is not used for printed monographs.
2.4. PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
Contents:
2.4A. Preliminary rule
2.4B. General rule
2.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
2.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc,
2.4E. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
2.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
2.4G. Place of printing, name of printer, date of printing
2.4A. Preliminary rule
2.4A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a second or subsequently named place of publication, distribution, etc., by a
semicolon.
Precede the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., by a colon.
Enclose a supplied statement of function of a publisher, distributor, etc., in square brackets.
Precede the date of publication, distribution, etc., by a comma.
Enclose the details of printing (place, name, date) in parentheses.
Precede the name of a printer by a colon.
Precede the date of printing by a comma.
2.4B. General rule
2.4B1. Record information about the place, name, and date of all types of publishing, distrib-
uting, etc., activities as instructed in 1.4B.
2.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
2.4C1, Give the place of publication, distribution, etc., as instructed in 1.4C.
2.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
2.4D1. Give the name of the publisher, etc., and optionally the name of the distributor, as
instructed in 1.4D.
London : Macmil lan
Mew York : Dell
London : H.M.S.O.
Tucson : University of Arizona Press
Taunton, Somerset : Barnicotts
London : Society of African Missions : Sold by Longman
2-10
AACR2 Revision 2002
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.4G2
London : Oxford University Press
London : John Lane, the Bodley Head
Geneva : World Health Organization
[Hove, England] : Fox
Gottingen : Vandenhceck s P.uprecht
London : Benn ; Ch icago : Rand McNal ly
(Cataloguing agency in the United States)
Freiburg : Baedeker ; London : Allen & Unwin
{Cataloguing agency in the United Kingdom)
New York : Dutton ; Toronto : Clarke, Irwin
{Cataloguing agency in Canada )
London : T. Wall and Sons
(Title page reads: Published in celebration of life's minor pleasures by T. Wall and
Sons (ice-Cream) Ltd.)
2.4E. Optional addition. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
2.4EI. Add to the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., a statement of function as instructed
in 1.4E.
Hew York : Dover ; London : Constable [distributor]
2.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
2.4F1. Give the date of publication, distribution, etc., as instructed in 1.4E
London : Gollancz, l9bl
Hew York : Dover, 1970 ; London : Constable [distributor],
1972
Mew York : Dell, [1985], cl983
2.4G. Place of printing, name of printer, date of printing
2.4G1. If the name of the publisher is unknown and the place and name of the printer are
found in the item, give that place and name as instructed in 1.4G,
London •. [s.n.j, 1971 (London : HiTimes Press)
[S.l. : s.n.J, 1971 (London : Wiggs)
2.4G2. Optional addition. Give the place, name of printer, and/or date of printing if they are
found in the item and differ from the place, name of publisher, etc., and date of publication,
etc., and are considered important by the cataloguing agency.
London : Society of Bookmen, 1971 (London : Ploughshare
Press)
London ; J. Lane, 1902 (1907 printing)
AACR2 Revision 2002
2-U
2.5
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.5. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
Contents:
2.5A. Preliminary mie
2.5B. Number of volumes and/or pagination
2.5C. Illustrative matter
2.5D. Dimensions
2.5E. Accompanying material
2.5A. Preliminary rule
2.5A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede details of illustrations by a colon.
Precede dimensions by a semicolon.
Precede each statement of accompanying material by a plus sign.
Enclose physical details of accompanying material in parentheses.
2.5B. Number of volumes and/or pagination
Single volumes
2.5B1. Give the number of pages or leaves in a publication in accordance with the terminol-
ogy suggested by the volume. That is, describe a volume with leaves printed on both sides in
terms of pages; describe a volume with leaves printed on only one side in terms of leaves;
and describe a volume that has more than one column to a page and is numbered in columns
in terms of columns.
If a publication contains sequences of leaves and pages, or pages and numbered columns,
or leaves and numbered columns, record each sequence. 2 Describe a volume printed without
numbering in terms of leaves or pages, but not of both. For the treatment of plates, see
2.5B9. Describe a broadside as such. Describe a single sheet (folded or not) as sheet.
Describe a case or portfolio as such.
2.5B2. Give the number of pages, leaves, or columns in terms of the numbered or lettered
sequences in the volume. Give the last numbered page, leaf, or column in each sequence 2 and
follow it with the appropriate term or abbreviation.
327 p.
321 leaves
381 columns
xvii, 323 p.
27 p., 300 leaves
1 broadside
2, A sequence of pages or leaves is: ( I) a separately numbered group of pages, leaves, etc.; (2) an unnumbered group of
pages, etc., that stands apart from other groups in the publication; or (3) a number of pages or leaves of plates distributed
throughout the publication.
2-12
AACR2 Revision 2002
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.5B7
1 sheet
1 portfolio
Give pages, etc., that are lettered inclusively in the form A-K p., a-d leaves, etc. Give
pages, etc., that are numbered in words or characters other than arabic or roman in arabic
figures.
A-Z p.
{Pages lettered: A-Z)
32 p.
(Pages numbered in words)
2.5B3. Disregard unnumbered sequences, unless such a sequence constitutes the whole (see
2.5B7) or a substantial part (see also 2.5B8) of the publication, or unless an unnumbered
sequence includes pages, etc., that are referred to in a note. When recording the number of
unnumbered pages, etc., either give the estimated number preceded by ca., without square
brackets, or enclose the exact number in square brackets.
8, vii, ca. 300, 73 p.
33, [31] leaves
[8], 155 p.
Note: Bibliography: 6th prelim, page
Disregard unnumbered sequences of inessential matter (advertising, blank pages, etc.).
2.5B4. If the number printed on the last page or leaf of a sequence does not represent the
total number of pages or leaves in that sequence, let it stand uncorrected unless it gives a
completely false impression of the extent of the item, as, for instance, when only alternate
pages are numbered or when the number on the last page or leaf of the sequence is mis-
printed. Supply corrections in such cases in square brackets.
48 [i.e. 96] p.
329 [i.e. 392] p.
2.5B5. If the numbering within a sequence changes (e.g., from roman to arabic numerals),
ignore the numbering of the first part of the sequence.
176 p.
(Pages numbered: i-xii, 13-176)
2.5B6. If the pages, etc., are numbered as part of a larger sequence (e.g., one volume of a
multivolume publication) or if the item appears to be incomplete {see also 2.5B15), give the
first and last numbers of the pages or leaves, preceded by the appropriate term or
abbreviation.
leaves 81-149
p. 713-797
2.5B7. If the pages or leaves of a volume are unnumbered and the number of pages or leaves
is readily ascertainable, give the number in square brackets. If the number is not readily
ascertainable, estimate the number of pages or leaves and give that estimated number without
square brackets and preceded by ca.
[93] p.
AACR2 Revision 2002
2-13
2.5B8
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
[55] leaves
ca. 600 p.
ca. 300 leaves
2.5B8. If the volume has complicated or irregular paging, give the pagination using one of
the following methods:
a) Give the total number of pages or leaves (excluding those which are blank or contain
advertising or other inessential matter) followed by in various pagings or in various
foliations.
1000 p. in various pagings
256 leaves in various foliations
b) Give the number of pages or leaves in the main sequences of the pagination and add
the total number, in square brackets, of the remaining variously paged sequences.
22S, [44] p.
366, 98, [99] p.
c) Give / v. (various pagings), I case, or / portfolio, as appropriate.
2.5B9. Leaves or pages of plates. Give the number of leaves or pages of plates (see Glos-
sary, appendix D) at the end of the sequence(s) of pagination, whether the plates are found
together or distributed throughout the publication, or even if there is only one plate. If the
numbering of the leaves or pages of plates is complex or irregular, follow the instructions in
2.5B8.
246 p., 32 p. of plates
xvi, 249 p., [12] leaves of plates
x, 32, 73 p., [1] leaf of plates
y.ii, 24 p., 212, [43] leaves of plates
If the volume contains both leaves and pages of plates, give the number in terms of which-
ever is predominant.
323 p. , [19] p. of plates
(Contains 16 pages and 3 leaves of plates)
2.5B10, Describe folded leaves as such.
122 folded leaves
230 p., 25 leaves of plates (some folded)
25 folded leaves of plates
2.5B11. If numbered pages or leaves are printed on a double leaf (e.g., books in the tradi-
tional oriental format), give them as pages or leaves according to their numbering. If they are
unnumbered, count each double leaf as two pages.
2-14
AACR2 Revision 2002
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.5B18
2.5B12. If the paging is duplicated, as is sometimes the case with books having parallel texts,
give both pagings and make an explanatory note (see 2.7B10).
xii, 35, 35 p.
Note: Qppos i ? e pages be; a r dupl i ca te numbe r i ng
2.5B13. If a volume has a pagination of its own and also bears the pagination of a larger
work of which it is a part, give the paging of the individual volume in this area and give the
continuous paging in a note (see 2.7B10).
328 p.
Note: Pages also numbered bOl-B^fj
2.5B14. If the volume has groups of pages numbered in opposite directions, as is sometimes
the case with books having texts in two languages, give the pagings of the various sections in
order, starting from the title page selected for cataloguing.
i x , 155, 127, x p.
2.5B15. If the last part of a publication is missing and the paging of a. complete copy cannot
be ascertained, give the number of the last numbered page followed by + p. Make a note of
the imperfection (see 2.7B20).
xziv, 179 + p.
Note: Library's "opy imperfect : all after p . 179 wan t.i ng
Publications in more than one volume
2.5B16, Give the number of volumes of a printed monograph in more than one physical
volume.
3 v.
2.5B17. If volume is not appropriate for a multipart item, use one of the following terms.
Parts. Use for bibliographic units intended to be bound several to a volume, especially if
so designated by the publisher.
Pamphlets. Use for collections of pamphlets bound together or assembled in a portfolio for
cataloguing as a collection.
Pieces. Use for items of varying character (e.g., pamphlets, broadsides, clippings, maps)
published, or assembled for cataloguing, as a collection.
Case(s). Use for either boxes containing bound or unbound material or containers of
fascicles.
Portfolio(s). Use for containers holding loose papers, illustrative materials, etc, A portfolio
usually consists of two covers joined together at the back and tied at the front, top, and/or
bottom.
2.5B18. If the number of bibliographic volumes differs from the number of physical volumes,
give the number of bibliographic volumes followed by in and the number of physical
volumes.
8 v. in 5
AACR2 Revision 2002
2-/5
2.5B19
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.5B19. If a set of volumes is continuously paged, give the pagination in parentheses after the
number of volumes. Ignore separately paged sequences of preliminary matter in volumes
other than the first.
2 v. (xxxxi, 959 p. )
3 v. (-ax, 800 p. )
{Pages numbered: xx, 1-201; xx T 202-513; xxi, 514-800)
2.5B20. Optional addition. If the volumes in a multivolurne set are individually paged, give
the pagination of each volume in parentheses after the number of volumes.
2 v. (xvi, 329; xx, 412 p. )
2.5B21. If a publication was planned to be in more than one volume, but not all have been
published and it appears that publication will not be continued, describe the incomplete set as
appropriate (i.e., give paging for a single volume or number of volumes for multiple vol-
umes}. Make a note (see 2.7BI0) to the effect that no more volumes have been published.
2.5B22, Braille or other tactile systems. If an item consists of leaves or pages of braille or
another tactile system, add an appropriate term (e.g., of braille, of Moon type, of jumbo
braille, of press braille, of computer braille, of solid dot braille) to the statement of the num-
ber of volumes, leaves, or pages.
310 leaves of braille
12 5 leaves of Moon type
4 v. of jumbo braille
320 leaves of computer braille
300 p. of press braille
40 leaves of solid dot braille
If an item consists of eye-readable print and braille or another tactile writing system, or of
two or more tactile writing systems, use a concise description of the combination {e.g., of
print and braille, of braille and Nemeth code).
300 p. of print and braille
20 5 leaves of braille and Nemeth code
If an item is a thermoform copy, add (thermoform).
64 leaves of braille (thermoform)
For braille cassette items, see 10.5B1.
2.5B23. Large print. If an item is in large print intended for use by the visually impaired,
add, to the statement of the number of volumes, leaves, or pages, (large print).
3 v. (large print)
342 p. (large print)
Optionally, if a general material designation (see 1.1C1) including large print is used, omit
this addition.
2-16
AACR2 Revision 2002
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.5C6
2.5C. Illustrative matter
2.5C1. Give ill. for an illustrated printed monograph, Tables containing only words and/or
numbers are not illustrations. Disregard illustrated title pages and minor illustrations.
327 p. : ill.
2.5C2. Optionally, if the illustrations are all of one or more of the following types, and are
considered to be important, give the appropriate term(s) or abbreviation(s) in alphabetical
order: coats of arms, facsimiles, forms, genealogical tables, maps, music, plans, portraits (use
for both single and group portraits), samples. If none of these terms adequately describes the
illustrations, use another term as appropriate.
333 p. : maps
256 p. : coats of arms, facsims., ports.
147 p. : computer drawings
If only some of the illustrations are of types considered to be important, give ill. followed by
the appropriate term(s) or abbreviation(s) in alphabetical order.
2 30 p . : ill., maps , music, ports .
199 p. : ill., cross sections, forms
2.5C3. Describe coloured illustrations as such if considered to be important.
: col. ill.
: ill., col. maps, ports, (some col.)
: ill. (some col.), maps, plans
: ill. (chiefly col.), plans
2.5C4. Give the number of illustrations if their number can be ascertained readily (e.g., when
the illustrations are listed and their numbers stated),
: 48 ill.
: ill., 12 maps
: ill., 3 forms, 1 map
2.5C5. If the publication consists wholly or predominantly of illustrations, give all ill. or
chiefly ill., as appropriate. Optionally, if those illustrations are all of one type, give all [name
of type] or chiefly [name of type],
: all ill.
; chiefly maps
2.5C6. Describe illustrative matter issued in a pocket inside the cover of an item in the physi-
cal description. Specify the number of such items and their location in a note (see 2.7BI0 and
2.7B11).
: ill . , col . maps
Note: Four maps on 2 folded leaves in pocket
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
2-17
2,5D
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.5D. Dimensions
2.5D1. Give the height of the item in centimetres, to the next whole centimetre up (e.g., if an
item measures 17.2 centimetres, give 18 cm.). Measure the height of the binding if the vol-
ume is bound. Otherwise, measure the height of the item itself. If the item measures less than
10 centimetres, give the height in millimetres.
2.5D2. If the width of the volume is either less than half the height or greater than the height,
give the height X width.
; 2 0 X 8 cm.
; 20 X 32 cm.
2.5D3. If the volumes in a multipart item differ in size, give the smallest or smaller and the
largest or larger size, separated by a hyphen.
; 24-28 cm.
2.5D4. Give the height and the width of a single sheet. If such a sheet is designed to be
folded when issued, add the dimensions of the sheet when folded, separating the dimensions
by a comma.
; 48 X 30 cm., folded to 24 X 15 cm.
If the sheet is designed to be read in pages when folded, describe it as 1 folded sheet and
give the number of imposed pages and the height of the sheet when folded.
1 folded sheet (8 p.) ; 18 cm.
2.5D5. If the item consists of separate physical units of varying height bound together, give
the height of the binding only.
2.5E. Accompanying material
2.5E1. Give the details of accompanying material as instructed in L5E.
271 p. : ill, ; 21 cm. + 1 answer book
271 p. ; ill. ; 21 cm. + 1 v. (37 p., 19 leaves : col.
maps ; 37 cm. )
271 p. : ill, ; 21 cm, + 1 sound disc (25 min. : analog,
33 L /3 rpm, mono, ; 12 in.)
2.5E2. If the accompanying material is issued in a pocket inside the cover of the publication,
give its location in a note (see 2.5C6, 2.7B10, and 2.7B11).
2,6. SERIES AREA
Contents:
2.6A. Preliminary rule
2.6B. Series statements
2.6A. Preliminary rule
2.6A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 ,0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
2-18 AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.7
Enclose each series statement (see 1.6J) in parentheses.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
Precede the ISSN of a series or subseries by a comma.
Precede the numbering within a series or subseries by a semicolon.
Enclose a date following a numeric and/or alphabetic designation in parentheses.
Precede the title of a subseries, or the designation for a subseries, by a full stop.
Precede the title of a subseries following a designation for the subseries by a comma.
2.6B. Series statements
2.6B1. Record each series statement as instructed in 1.6.
(Typophile chap books ; 7)
(Britain advances ; 10)
(The king penguin books)
(Special paper / Geological Society of America)
(Publicacibn / Universidad de Chile, Departamento de
Geologia ; no. 28)
(Occasional papers / University of Sussex Centre for
Continuing Education, ISSN 0306-1108 ; no. 4)
(Department of State publication ; 8583. East Asian and
Pacific series ; 199)
(Olympia Press traveller's companion series ; no. 105)
(Acta Universitatis Stockholmiensis . Stockholm studies in
the history of literature ; 10)
(Acta Universitatis Stockholmiensis. Studia Hungarica
Stockholmiensia ; 6)
(Treaty series ; no. 66 (1976)) (Cmnd. ; 6580)
{Numbering of firs! series transcribed from the item )
( Graeco-Roman memoirs, ISSN 0306-9222 ; no. 62)
(Scribhinni Gaeilge na mBrathar Mionur ; imleabhar 11)
(Works / Charles Dickens ; v. 12)
2.7. NOTE AREA
Contents:
2.7A.
2.7B.
Preliminary rule
Notes
AACR2 Revision 2002
2-19
2.7A
BOOKS. PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.1 A, Preliminary rule
2,7AL Punctuation
Precede each note by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph for each.
Separate introductory wording from the main content of a note by a colon followed but not
preceded by a space.
2.7A2. In making notes, follow the instructions in 1.7 A.
2.7B. Notes
Make notes as set out in the following subrules and in the order given there. However,
give a particular note first when it has been decided that note is of primary importance.
2.7B1. Nature, scope, or artistic form. Make notes on these matters uniess they are apparent
from the rest of the description.
"Collection of essays on economic subjects"
Arabic reader
Play in 3 acts
Scenario of film
2.7B2. Language of item and/or translation or adaptation. Make notes on the language(s)
of the item, or on the fact that it is a translation or adaptation, unless this is apparent from the
rest of the description.
Translation of : La rnuerte de Artemio Cruz
Author' s adaptation of his Russian text
Latin text, parallel English translation
Adaptation of: The taming of the shrew / William
Shakespeare
2.7B3. Source of title proper. Make notes on the source of the title proper if the chief source
of information is a title page substitute.
Caption title
Title from spine
2.7B4. Variations in title. Make notes on titles borne by the item other than the title proper.
Optionally, give a romanization of the title proper.
Added t.p. in Russian
Previously published as: Enter Psmith
Cover title: The fair American
2-20
AACR2 Revision 2002
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.7B10
2.7B5. Parallel titles and other title information. Give the title in another language and
other title information not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility area if they are
considered to be important.
Subtitle: The medicinal, culinary, cosmetic and economic
properties, cultivation, and folklore of herbs, grasses,
fungi, shrubs, and trees, with ail their modern scientific
uses
Title on added t.p, : Les rats
2.7B6. Statements of responsibility. Make notes on variant names of persons or bodies
named in statements of responsibility if these are considered to be important for identifica-
tion. Give statements of responsibility not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility
area. Make notes on persons or bodies connected with a work, or significant persons or bod-
ies connected with previous editions and not already named in the description.
At head of ti tie : [Name not used in the main entry heading and with
indeterminate responsibility for the work}
"Also attributed to .Jonathan Swif t"-Introd.
"Begun by Jane Austen in 1817 ... completed, some 160 years
later, by another lady"- Cover
2.7B7. Edition and history. Make notes relating to the edition being described or to the bib-
liographic history of the work.
"This issue is founded on the second edition, printed by
Rudolf Ackermann .in the year 1837 (with considerable
additions) from The new sporting magaz i ne" -T.p. verso
Previ ous ed . : Ha rmonds worth : Penguin , 1950
Sequel to: Kemoires d' an medecin
2.7B9. Publication, distribution, etc. Make notes on publication, distribution, etc, details
that are not included in the publication, distribution, etc., area and are considered to be
important.
Imprint under label roads : Humanitas-Verlag Zurich
"Privately printed"
Published simultaneously in Canada
2.7B10. Physical description. Make notes on important physical details that are not included
in the physical description area. Make notes on braille or other tactile books.
C ap t i o n s on verso of plates
Printed on ve.l ium
Limited ed. of GO signed and numbered copies
Alternate pages blank
Ho more published
Two charts on folded leaves in pocket
Tables on 4 leaves in pocket
AACR2 Revision 2002
2-21
2.7BI1
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
Grade 3 braille
Alternate leaves of print and braille
Coloured map of Australia on endpapers
2.7B11. Accompanying material. Make notes on the location of accompanying material if
appropriate. Give details of accompanying material neither mentioned in the physical descrip-
tion area nor given a separate description {see 1.5E).
Slides in pocket
"Tables I, II, and III omitted by error from report"
published as supplement {5 p.) and inserted at end
Accompanied by: A demographic atlas of north-west Ireland.
39 p. : col . maps ; 3 6 cm. Previously published separately
in 1956
Accompanying CD-ROM contains complete text in PDF format
System requirements for accompanying disc: IBM compatible
PC; Windows 3.1 or higher, Unix, or 0S2; Adobe Acrobat
Reader 3.0 with search software (included on disc); CD-ROM
drive
2.7B12. Series. Make notes on series data that cannot be given in the series area.
Series title romanized: Kin hady al-Islam
Also issued without series statement
Originally issued in series: Environmental science series
(For another edition )
2.7B13. Dissertations. If the item being described is a dissertation, make a note as instructed
in 1.7B13.
2.7B14. Audience, Make a brief note of the intended audience for, or intellectual level of, an
item if this information is stated in the item.
For 9-12 year olds
Undergraduate text
Intended audience: Preschool children
2.7B16. Other formats. Give the details of other formats in which the content of the item
has been issued.
Issued also on CD-ROM
Also issued electronically via World Wide Web in PDF
format
2.7B17. Summary. Give a brief objective summary of the content of an item unless another
part of the description provides enough information.
Summary: Kate and Ben follow their rabbit into a haunted
house and discover the source of the house's ghostly sound
2.7BI8. Contents. List the contents of an item, either selectively or fully, if it is considered
necessary to show the presence of material not implied by the rest of the description; to stress
2-22
AACR2 Revision 2002
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.8
items of particular importance; or to list the contents of a collection or of a multipart item.
When recording titles formally, take them from the source in the item being catalogued that
provides the best identification.
Bibliography: p. 855-910
Includes bibliographies
Includes index
Statistical tables cover periods between 1849 and 1960
Contents: Love and peril / the Marquis of Lome — To be or
not to be / Mrs. Alexander — The melancholy hussar / Thomas
Hardy
Partial contents: Recent economic growth in historical
perspective / by K . Ohkawa and H. Rosovsky — The place of
Japan ... in world trade / by P.H. Tresize
Contents: How these records were discovered — A short
sketch of the Talmuds - Constantine' s letter
2.7B19. Numbers. Give important numbers associated with the item other than ISBNs (see
2.8B).
Supt. of Docs, no.: HE20. 8216:11
2.7B20. Copy being described, library's holdings, and restrictions on use. Make these
notes as instructed in 1.7B20.
Library's copy lacks appendices, p. 245-260
Library has v. 1, 3-5, and 7 only
Library' s copy signed and with marginalia by the author
2.7B21, "With" notes. If the title and statement of responsibility area contains a title that
applies to only a part of an item lacking a collective title and, therefore, more than one entry
is made, make a note beginning With: and listing the other separately titled works in the item
in the order in which they appear there.
With; The reformed school / John Dury. London : Printed
for R. Wadnothe, [1650]
With: Out of the depths / Mary Ryan. [New York? ; s.n.,
1945?] - Label your luggage / Robert Hash. [New York? :
s.n., 1945?]
With: Of the sister arts / H. Jacob. Mew York : [s.n.],
1970
2.8. STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
Contents:
2.8A. Preliminary rule
2.8B. International Standard Book Number
2.8C. Terms of availability
2.8D. Qualification
AACR2 Revision 2002
2-23
2.8A
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.8A. Preliminary rule
2.8A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 ,0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede each repetition of this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede terms of availability by a colon.
Enclose a qualification to the International Standard Book Number (ISBN) or terms of
availability in parentheses.
2.8B. International Standard Book Number (ISBN)
2.8B1. Give ISBNs as instructed in 1.8B.
ISBN 0-904576-17-5
ISBN 0-8352-0875-3 (corrected)
2.8B2. Give any other number in a note (see 2.7B39).
2.8C. Optional addition. Terms of availability
2.8C1, Give the price or other terms on which the item is available. Give the price in sym-
bols and numbers, and other terms as concisely as possible.
ISBN 0-85435-332-1 : £.0.60
ISBK 0-902573-45-4 : Subscribers only
ISBN 0-7043-3100-4 : $1.95
2.8D. Qualification
2.8D1, Add qualifications {including the type of binding) to the ISBN and/or terms of avail-
ability as instructed in 1.8E. Additionally, if volumes in a set have different ISBNs, follow
each ISBN with the designation of the volume to which it applies.
ISBK 0-901212-04-0 (v. 38)
ISBK 0-15-212192-8 {cased). - ISBN 0-19-2 8112 3-1 (pbk.)
ISBN 0-08-019857-0 (set) . - ISBN 0-08-0198 56-2 (v. 1 :
pbk. )
ISBN 0-900002-92-1 (limited ed.) : £35.00 (£30.00 to
members of the association)
ISBK 0-7225-0344-X (pbk.) : £8.75
2.9. SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
2.9A. Describe supplementary items as instructed in 1.9.
2.10. ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
2.10A. Describe items made up of several types of material as instructed in 1. 10.
2-24
AACR2 Revision 2002
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.14B
2.11. FACSIMILES, PHOTOCOPIES, AND OTHER REPRODUCTIONS
2.11A. Describe facsimiles, photocopies, and other reproductions as instructed in 1.1 1.
Early Printed Monographs
2.12. SCOPE
2.12A. The following rules {2.13-2.18} are extra rules for the description of early books,
pamphlets, and broadsides (for the most part, pre-nineteenth -century publications). In general,
follow the instructions in chapter 1 and in 2.1-2.1 1 for describing those materials and use the
additional and modifying rules given beiow only when the conditions they state apply to the
early book, etc., or when, as in 2.16, they contain instructions different from the previous
rales. Consult specialized reference materials for more detailed treatment of early printed
books, etc.
2.13. CHIEF SOURCE OF INFORMATION
2.13A. If the early book, etc., has a title page, use it as the chief source of information. If it
has no title page, use the following sources (in this order of preference):
caption
colophon
cover
running title
incipit or explicit
privilege or imprimatur
other sources
If the item has no title page, make a note indicating the source used (see 2.18B).
2.14. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
2.14A. If the item has no title page and if no other source furnishes a title proper, transcribe
as the title proper as many of the opening words of the text as are sufficient to identify the
item uniquely.
2.14B. In abridging a long title proper (see I.1B4), omit first any alternative title and the
connecting word (e.g., or), then omit inessential words or groups of words. Indicate
omissions by the mark of omission.
Title appears as:
Revelation examined with candour. Or a fair enquiry into
the sense and use of the several revelations expressly
declared or sufficiently implied to be given to mankind from
the Creation as they are found in the Bible
Title proper recorded as:
Revelation examined with candour ...
AACR2 Revision 2002
2-25
2.14C
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.14C. Omit mottoes, quotations, dedications, statements, etc., appearing on the title page that
are separate from the title proper.
2.14D. Treat additions to the title, even if they are linked to it by a preposition, conjunction,
prepositional phrase, etc., as other title information, not as part of the title proper.
The English Parliament represented in a vision : with an
afterthought upon the speech delivered to His Most Christian
Majesty by the deputies of the states of Britany on the 29th
day of February last ... : to which is added at large the
memorable representation of the House of Commons to the
Queen in the year 1711/12 ...
2.14E. Transcription of certain letters
2.14E1. Transcribe capitals that are to be converted to lowercase according to the usage of
the text. If the usage of the text is in doubt or if it is inconsistent, transcribe
I as i
J as i
U as u (but as v when it is the first letter of the word)
V as u (but as v when it is the first letter of the word)
VV as uu (but as vv when it is the first letter of the word)
Transcribe gothic capitals in the form of J and U as I and V.
2.14F, Abridge lengthy other title information and statements of responsibility by omitting
inessential words or groups of words. Include as many words of a statement of responsibility
as are necessary to identify the person(s) concerned.
2.15. EDITION AREA
2.15A. In general, give an edition statement as it is found in the item. Otherwise, give stan-
dard abbreviations and arabic numerals in place of words as instructed in 1 .2B.
Nunc primum in lucem aedita
Editio secunda auctior et correctior
Cinquieme edition or 5'" ed.
2.15B. If the edition statement is an integral part of the title proper, other title information, or
statement of responsibility, or if it is grammatically linked to any of these, give it as such and
do not make a further edition statement.
Chirurgia / nunc iterum non mediocri studio atque
diligentia a pluribus mendis purgata
2.16. PUBLICATION, ETC., AREA
2.16A. A publisher statement may refer to one or more publishers, distributors, booksellers,
or printers.
2-26
AACR2 Revision 2002
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.16F
2.16B. Transcribe the place of publication, etc., as it is found in the item. It may include the
name(s) of publishers, printers, etc. Supply the modern name of the place if it is considered
necessary for identification.
Augustae Treverorum [Trie* ]
2.16C. If more than one place of publication, etc., is found in the item, transcribe the first,
and optionally, the others in the order in which they appear. If second or subsequent places
are omitted, add [etc.].
London [etc . ]
or Londr es ; et se tr ou ve a Paris
2.16D. Give the rest of the details relating to the publisher, etc., as they are given in the item.
Separate the parts of a complex publisher, etc., statement only if they are presented separately
in the item. If the publisher, etc., statement includes the name of a printer, give it here. Omit
words in the publisher, etc., statement that do not aid in the identification of the item and do
not indicate the role of the publisher, etc. Indicate omissions by the mark of omission.
London : R . Ear ke r
London : Printed tor the author and sold by J. Roberts
London : Iirtpressi pe r me Wi 1 tie I mum de Machlinia .in
opulenti ssima civif.ate Londonarium iuxta pontem qui.
vulgar iter dicitur F'iete Brigge
London : Impr i nted ... by Robt . Ear ker ... and by the ass i gns
of John Bill
Enprynted at Westrnystor in Caxt.ons hous : By me Wynken the
Viorde
Birmingham : Printed by John Baskerville for R. and
J. Dodsley ...
Paris : Chez Tes tu, imprimeur-l ibraire
Paris : Ex offic.ina Ascensiana : Impendio Joannis Parvi
2.16E. If there is more than one statement relating to publishers, etc., give the first statement,
and optionally, the other statements in the order in which they appear. If subsequent state-
ments are omitted, add [etc. J.
London : Printed for the author and sold by J. Parsons
[etc . ]
2.16F. Give the date of publication or printing, including the day and month, as found in the
item and add any necessary correction. Add the day and/or month in modern terms. Change
roman numerals indicating the year to arabic numerals unless they are misprinted, in which
case give the roman numerals and add a correction. Add the date in the modern chronology if
this is considered to be necessary,
1716
iv Ian 1^97
AACR2 Revision 2002
2-27
2.16G
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
xii Kal. Sept. [21 Aug.] 1473
In vigilia 5. Laurentii Martyris [9 Aug.] 1492
iii Mar. 1483 [i.e. 1484]
1733
(Date in book; MDCCXXXIII)
DMLII [i.e. 1552]
Optionally, formalize (he date if the statement appearing in the item is very long.
18 May 1507
(Date in book: Anno gratiae millesimo quingentesimo septimo die vero
decimoctavo Maij)
2.16G. If the item is undated and the date of publication is unknown, give an approximate
date.
[1492?]
[not after Aug. 21, 1492]
[between 1711 and 1719]
2.16H. If the printer is named separately in the item and the printer can clearly be distin-
guished from the publisher or bookseller, give the place of printing and the name of the
printer as instructed in 1.4G.
2.17. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
2.17A. Extent
2.17A1. In recording the pagination of single volume or multivolume {see 2.5B) early books,
etc., give each sequence of leaves, pages, or columns in the terms and form presented in the
item. If the volume is printed in pages bat numbered as leaves, give the numbering as leaves.
If required, give more precise information about pagination, blank leaves, or other aspects of
collation, by either expanding the statement of extent {if this can be done succinctly) or mak-
ing a note.
xi , 31 p .
XII, 120 leaves
x, 32 p., 90 leaves
xi, [79] leaves
[160] p.
40 leaves, [8] p.
Describe broadsides as such and other single sheets as sheets.
1 broadside
1 sheet
2-28
AACR2 Revision 2002
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRENTED SHEETS
2.18B1
[2] sheets
VIII shee ts
2.17B. Iliustrations
2.17B1. Describe an illustrated item as instructed in 2.5C. Optionally, add woodcuts, metal
cuts, etc., as appropriate.
: ill. (woodcuts)
: 30 ill. (cuts)
: ill . (woodcuts, some col . )
: ill. (woodcuts), ports,
: ports, (woodcuts)
: ports, (engravings)
If the item is illustrated by hand or if the illustrations are hand coloured, make a note (see
2.18E).
2.17C. Dimensions
2.17CI. Give the dimensions of the item as instructed in 2.5D. Add the format to the dimen-
sions of a volume in an abbreviated form (e.g., 4to, 8vo, 12mo).
; 23 cm. (<Sto)
; 20 cm. (8vo)
; 33 cm. (fol.)
; 2 3 cm. (4 to)
1 sheet ; 48 X 27 cm.
2.18. NOTE AREA
2.18A. Make notes as instructed in 2.7 and follow the instructions given below. Always make
the notes below for incunabula.
If the formalized description of the areas preceding the note area does not identify the edi-
tion or issue being catalogued clearly, make notes to identify the item unambiguously. When
appropriate, refer to a detailed description in a standard catalogue or bibliography (see
2.18C).
2.18B. Source of title proper
2.18B1. Give the source of the title proper if it is not the title page.
Title from colophon
Title from: Incipit leaf [2]"
AACR2 Revision 2002
2-29
2.18C
BOOKS, PAMPHLETS, AND PRINTED SHEETS
2.1SC. Bibliographic references
2.18C1. For incunabula, and optionally for other early books, etc., cite briefly descriptions in
standard lists in accordance with standard practice.
Reference: HR 6471
or Reference: Hain-Reichiing 6471
References: EMC (XV cent.) II, p. 346 (IB. 5874); Schramm,
v. 4, p. 10, 50, and ill.
2.18D. Signatures
2.18D1. If desired, make a note giving details of the signatures.
Signatures .* a-v~, x'
2.18E. Physical description
2.18E1. If desired, give the number of columns or lines and the type measurements. Give
fuller details of the illustrations if considered necessary. Make a note on colour printing.
24 lines; type 24G
Woodcuts on leaves B2" and C5'' signed: b
Woodcuts : ill . , initials, publisher' s and printer' s
devices
Title and headings printed in red
2.18F. Copy being described
2.18F1. Make notes on special features of the copy in hand. These include rubrication, illu-
mination and other hand colouring, manuscript additions, binding (if noteworthy), prove-
nance, and imperfections.
Leaves 15-6 incorrectly bound between h3 and h4
Imperfect: wanting leaves 12 and 13 (b6 and cl); also the
blank last leaf (38)
On vellum. Illustrations and part of borders hand
coloured. With illuminated initials. Rubricated in red and
blue
Contemporary does kin over boards ; clasp . S tamp : Chateau de
La Roche Guyon, Bibliotheque
Blind stamped pigskin binding (1644) with initials
C.S .A.C .
Inscription on inside of front cover: Theodorinis ab
Engelsberg
Signed: Alex, Pope
2-30
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHAPTER
Cartographic Materials
Contents
3.0 GENERAL RULES
3,0A Scope
3. OB Sources of information
3.0C Punctuation
3.0D Levels of detail in the description
3.0E Language and script of the description
3. OF Inaccuracies
3.0G Accents and other diacritical marks
3. OH Items with several chief sources of information
3.0J Description of whole or part
3. 1 TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
3.1 A Preliminary rule
3.1A1 Punctuation
3. IB Title proper
3.1C General material designation
3.1D Parallel titles
3. IE Other title information
3. IF Statements of responsibility
3.1G Items without a collective title
3.2 EDITION AREA
3.2A Preliminary rule
3.2A1 Punctuation
3.2B Edition statement
3.2C Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
3. 2D Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
3.2E Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
3.3 MATHEMATICAL AND OTHER MATERIAL SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
3.3A Preliminary rule
3.3A1 Punctuation
3.3B Statement of scale
3.3C Statement of projection
3. 3D Statement of coordinates and equinox
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.3E Digital graphic representation
3.3F Numbering related to serials
3.4 PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
3.4A Preliminary rule
3.4A1 Punctuation
3.4B General rule
3.4B2 Early cartographic items
3.4C Piace of publication, distribution, etc.
3.4D Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
3.4E Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
3.4F Date of publication, distribution, etc.
3.4G Place of printing, etc., name of printer, etc., date of printing, etc.
3.5 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
3.5A Preliminary rule
3.5AI Punctuation
3.5B Extent of item (including specific material designation)
3.5C Other physical details
3.5C2 Layout
3.5C3 Production method
3.5C4 Number of maps, etc., in an atlas
3.5C5 Colour
3.5C6 Medium
3.5C7 Material
3.5C8 Mounting
3.5D Dimensions
3.5D1 Maps, plans, etc.
3.5D2 Atlases
3.5D3 Models
3.5D4 Globes
3.5D5 Containers
3.5E Accompanying material
3.6 SERIES AREA
3.6A Preliminary rule
3.6A1 Punctuation
3.6B Series statements
3.7 NOTE AREA
3. 7 A Preliminary rule
3.7 A 1 Punctuation
3.7B Notes
3.8 STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
3.8A Preliminary rule
3.8 A 1 Punctuation
3.8B Standard number
3.8C Key-title
3-2
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.0B3
3.8D Terms of availability
3.8E Qualification
3.9 SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
3.10 ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
3. 1 1 FACSIMILES, PHOTOCOPIES, AND OTHER REPRODUCTIONS
3.0. GENERAL RULES
3. OA. Scope
3.QA1. The rules in this chapter cover the description of cartographic materials of ail kinds.
Cartographic materials include all materials that represent the whole or part of the Earth or
any celestial body. These include two- and three-dimensional maps and plans (including maps
of imaginary places); aeronautical, nautical, and celestial charts; atlases; globes; block dia-
grams; sections; aerial photographs with a cartographic purpose; bird's-eye views (map
views); etc. They do not cover in detail the description of early or manuscript cartographic
materials, though the use of an additional term in the physical description (see 3,5B) and/or
the use of the specific instructions in chapter 4 will furnish a sufficiently detailed description
for the general library catalogue. For items falling within the scope of other chapters but pre-
senting cartographic information (e.g., some wall charts, some playing cards), consult the
rules in this chapter in conjunction with those of the chapter appropriate to the item.
3.0B. Sources of information
3.0B1. For sources of information for a printed atlas, see 2.0B.
3.0B2. Chief source of information. The chief source of information for other than a printed
atlas (in order of preference) is:
a) the cartographic item itself; when an item is in a number of physical parts, treat all the
parts (including a title sheet) as the cartographic item itself
b) container (e.g., portfolio, cover, envelope) or case, the cradle and stand of a globe, etc.
If information is not available from the chief source, take it from any accompanying
printed material (e.g., pamphlets, brochures).
3.0B3. Prescribed sources of information. The prescribed source(s) of information for each
area of the description of cartographic materials is set out below. Enclose information taken
from outside the prescribed source(s) in square brackets.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
3-3
3.0C
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
AREA
Title and statement of
responsibility
Edition
Mathematical and other
material specific details
Publication, distribution, etc.
Physical description
Series
Note
Standard number and terms
of availability
PRESCRIBED SOURCES OF INFORMATION
Chief source of information
Chief source of information, accompanying
printed material
Chief source of information, accompanying
printed material
Chief source of information, accompanying
printed material
Any source
Chief source of information, accompanying
printed material
Any source
Any source
3.0C. Punctuation
For the punctuation of the description as a whole, see l.OC.
For the prescribed punctuation of elements, see the following rules.
3.0D. Levels of detail in the description
Follow the instructions in 1.0D. Additionally, in a first-level description include the scale
and, for an electronic resource, the data type (see 3.3E) in the mathematical and other mate-
rial specific details area and, in a second-level description, include the mathematical data and
other material specific details specified in 3.3A-3.3F.
3.0E. Language and script of the description
See 1.0E.
3.0F. Inaccuracies
See 1.0F.
3.0G. Accents and other diacritical marks
See LOG.
3.0H. Items with several chief sources of information
See 1.0A3.
3.0J. Description of whole or part
3.0J1. In describing a collection of maps, describe the collection as a whole or describe each
map (giving the name of the collection as the series), according to the needs of the catalogu-
ing agency. If the collection is catalogued as a whole and descriptions of the individual parts
3-4
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.1
are considered desirable, see chapter 13. If in doubt whether to describe the collection as a
whole or to describe each part separately, describe the collection as a whole.
Description of ihe collection as a whole
Ordnance Survey of Great Britain one inch to one mile map
; -"ii-Tr: : : seventh series. — Scale 1:63, 360, — Chessington :
Ordnance Survey, 1952-1974. - 190 maps : col. ; 71 X 64 cm.
[Plans of the Rideau Canal from Kingston Bay to Ottawa]
: ;gmu* / [signed by] John By ... [et al.]. - Scales differ. -
1827-1828. - 28 ms . maps : col. ; 74 X 234 cm. or smaller. -
Provenance stamps: Board of Ordnance, Inspector General of
Fortifications; sheets AA3-6, 9-11, 13-32
Description of one map — separate description
Banbury [.'smii; / Ordnance Survey. — [Ed.] B, — Scale
1:63,360. ■■ ■ Southampton : Ordnance Survey, 1968. — 1 map :
col. ,- 71 X 64 cm, — (Ordnance Survey of Great Britain one
inch to one mile map : seventh series ; sheet 145). — "Fully
revised 1965-66"
Locks and dams at Merrick Mills, sect. no. 5 ;gmd; /
[signed by] John By. - Scale [1:1,050]. - 1827 Oct. 25. - 1
ms . map : col. ; 65 X 75 cm. — ([Plans of the Rideau Canal
from Kingston Bay to Ottawa / signed by] John By ... [et al.]
; sheet AA29) . — Provenance stamps: Board of Ordnance,
Inspector General of Fortifications
Description of one map — mult ilevel description
Ordnance Survey of Great Britain one inch to one mile map
;gmd; : seventh series. — Scale 1:63,360. — Chessington ;
Ordnance Survey, 1952-1974. ~ 190 maps : col. ; 71 X 64 cm.
Sheet 145: Banbury. ■■■ [Ed.] B. - Southampton, 1968. -
1 map : col. ; 71 X 64 cm. - "Fully revised 1965-66"
[Plans of the Rideau Canal from Kingston Bay to Ottawa]
;gmdj / [signed by] John By ... [et al.]. — Scales differ. —
1827-1828. - 28 ms. maps : col. ; 74 X 234 cm. or smaller
Sheet AA29: Locks and dams at Merrick Mills, sect. no. 5. —
Scale [1:1,050]. - 1827 Oct. 25. - 1 ms . map : col. ; 65 X
75 cm. — Provenance stamps: Board of Ordnance, Inspector
General of Fortifications
3.1. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
Contents:
3.1A. Preliminary rule
3. IB. Title proper
3.1C. General material designation
3.1D. Parallel titles
3. IE. Other title information
3. IF, Statements of responsibility
3.1G. Items without a collective title
AACR2 Revision 2002
3-5
3.1A
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.1 A. Preliminary rule
3,1 Al. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede the title of a supplement or section (see 1 . 1 B9) by a full stop.
Enclose the general material designation in square brackets.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede each unit of other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
For the punctuation of this area for items without a collective title, see 1.1G.
3. IB. Title proper
3.1B1. Transcribe the title proper as instructed in 1 . IB,
Historical north England
A map of the county of Essex
Road map of 50 miles around London
England & Wales
The Edinburgh world atlas, or, Advanced atlas of modern
geography
Bouguer gravity anomaly map of Tennessee
Frantiskovy Lazne orientacni plan
British maps of the American Revolution
The Faber atlas
Map of Middle Earth
Geographia marketing and sales maps of Europe
If the title proper is not taken from the chief source of information, give the source of the
title in a note (see 3.7B3).
3.1B2. If the title proper includes a statement of the scale, include that statement in the
transcription.
Topographic 1:500,000 low flying chart
New half-inch cycling road maps of England and Wales
3.1B3. If the chief source of information bears more than one title, choose the title proper as
instructed in 1.1B8 if the titles are in two or more languages or scripts. Record the other titles
as parallel titles. If both or all of the titles are in the same language and script, choose the
title proper on the basis of the sequence or layout of the titles. If these are insufficient to
enable the choice to be made or are ambiguous, choose the most comprehensive title. Record
the other titles in a note if considered to be important (see 3.7B4).
Give the source of the title proper in a note if considered to be important (see 3.7B3).
3-6
AACR2 Revision 2002
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.1E2
3.1B4. If the item lacks a title, supply one as instructed in 1.1B7. Always include in the sup-
plied title the name of the area covered.
[Map of Ontario]
[Lunar globe]
[Gravity anomaly map of Canada]
[Relief model of California showing vegetation]
[Nautical chart of the coast of Maine from Cape Elizabeth
to Monhegan Island]
3JC. Optional addition. General material designation
3.1C1. Give immediately following the title proper the appropriate general material designa-
tion as instructed in I.1C.
Central Europe [Gkd]
Camden's Britannia, 1695 :gnd]
Decca aeronautical plotting chart :gmd]
3.1C2. If an item contains parts belonging to materials falling into two or more categories,
and if none of these is the predominant constituent of the item, give either multimedia or kit
as the designation (see I.1C1 and I.10C1).
3.1D. Parallel titles
3.1D1. Transcribe parallel titles as instructed in 1. ID.
Suomi jgkd] = Finland
International map of natural gas fields in Europe [gkd] =
Carte Internationale des champs de gaz naturel en Europe
Mobil street map of Durban ;gmd; = Straatkaart van Durban
3.1E. Other title information
3.1E1. Transcribe other title information as instructed in LIE.
Canada ;gmd] : a pictorial & historical map
Ethelreda' s Isle sgkd] : a pictorial map of the Isle of Ely
to commemorate the 1300th anniversary of the founding of
Ely's conventual church
Motor road map of south-east England [gmdj : showing trunk
and other classified roads
Kaunispaa-Kopsusjarvi [gkd] : ulkoilukartta
3.1E2. If the title proper does not include an indication of the geographic area covered by the
item and if the other title information does not include such an indication or if there is no
other title information, supply, as other title information, a word or brief phrase indicating the
area covered.
Vegetation :gkd; : [in Botswana]
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
3-7
3.1F
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.1F. Statements of responsibility
3.1F1. Transcribe statements of responsibility relating to persons or bodies as instructed in
UK
Football history map of England and Wales ;gmd: : showing
on the map the colours and locations of all the clubs in the
Football League ... / compiled by John Carvasso
The English pilot, the fifth book ;gkd] / J. Seller &
C. Price
A map book of West Germany ;gkd; / A.J.B. Tussler, A.J.L.
Alden
Road atlas Europe [ghd] I Bartholomew
World atlas [gmd] / compiled by Rand McNally International
The Wills south coast yachting guide ;gkds / edited by The
daily express
Flugbild Schweiz ;gmd> = Vue aerienne Suisse = Air view
Switzerland / Swissair Photo + Vermessungen AG
Maps & plans of the operations, movements, battles &
sieges of the British Army, during the campaigns in Spain,
Portugal, and the south of France, from 1808 to 1814 [Gkd; /
compiled by Lieut. Godwin ; engraved by Jas. Wyld
Glacial map of Tasmania :gkd] / compiled by E. Derbyshire ...
[et al. ]
(Pocket terrestrial globe] [ge-id; / J. Moxon
Mondmapo [gmd; / lau la decidoj de Internacia Komisiono por
Ordigo de Geografiaj Nomoj ; redaktis, Tibor Sekelj
Wheaton' s atlas of British and world history :gmd; / by
T.A. Rennard ; editors, H.E.L. Mellersh and B.S. Trinder ;
maps prepared by David A. Hoxley
3.1F2. Add a word or short phrase to the statement of responsibility if the relationship
between the title and the person(s) or body (bodies) named in the statement is not clear.
Maps of the Mid-west [gmd: / [compiled by] D.M. Bagley
3.1G. Items without a collective title
3.1G1. If a cartographic item lacks a collective title, either describe the item as a unit (see
3.1G2 and 3.1G3), or make a separate description for each separately titled part (see 3.1G4),
or (in certain circumstances) supply a collective title (see 3.1G5).
3.1G2. In describing as a unit a cartographic item lacking a collective title, transcribe the
titles of the individual parts as instructed in 1.1G3.
Grand Teton [gmd] ; Yellowstone National Park
(Both maps produced by the same body)
3-8
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.2B1
Dai i y rnai 1 jt= Mr r cj6 i map rjf Lena an snd twelve mi les round
: OKI:-; . Kctc r read map of south -eat; t England
(Maps produced by different bodies }
3.1G3. Make the relationship between statements of responsibility and the parts of an item
lacking a collective title and described as a unit clear by additions as instructed in 3. 1 F2,
France ;■*'.[.■] ; Germany / drawn by L. Scott [France] &
F . McComb [Germany]
3.1G4. Optionally, make a separate description for each separately titled part of an item lack-
ing a collective title. Link the separate descriptions with notes (see 3.7B21).
3.1G5. ff a cartographic item lacking a collective title consists of a large number of physi-
cally separate parts, supply a collective title as instructed in 3.1B4.
•Maps of Denmark]
[Collection of tourist maps of Thailand published by
various authorities]
[Ontario county and district maps colour series]
3.2. EDITION AREA
Contents:
3.2A. Preliminary rule
3.2B. Edition statement
3.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
3.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
3.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
3.2A. Preliminary rule
3.2A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a statement relating to a named revision of an edition by a comma.
Precede the first statement of responsibility following an edition statement by a diagonal
slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
3.2B. Edition statement
3.2B1. Transcribe a statement relating to an edition of a work that contains differences from
other editions of that work, or to a named reissue of a work, as instructed in 1.2B.
2nd ed,
1974 new ed.
Rev. et corr.
Facsim. ed.
2" ed.
AACR2 Revision 2002
3-9
3.2B2
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.2B2. In case of doubt about whether a statement is an edition statement, follow the instruc-
tions in 1.2B3.
3.2B3. Optional addition. If an item lacks an edition statement but is known to contain sig-
nificant changes from other editions, supply a suitable brief statement in the language and
script of the title proper and enclose it in square brackets.
[5th ed.]
[Kouv. ed. ]
3.2B4. If an edition statement appears in more than one language or script, transcribe the
statement that is in the language or script of the title proper. If this criterion does not apply,
transcribe the statement that appears first.
Carte geologique international de l'Europe [gmd] =
International geological map of Europe . — 3" ed.
Optionally, transcribe the parallel statement(s), each preceded by an equals sign.
3.2B5. If an item lacking a collective title and described as a unit contains one or more works
with an associated edition statement, transcribe such statements following the titles and state-
ments of responsibility to which they relate, separated from them by a full stop.
3.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
3.2C1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more editions, but not to all
editions, of a cartographic item as instructed in 1.2C and 3. IF.
3rd ed. / with maps redrawn by N, Manley
3.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
3.2D1. If an item is a named revision of an edition, transcribe the statement relating to that
revision as instructed in 1.2D.
9th ed. , Repr. with summary of the 1961 census and suppl .
of additional names arid amendments
4 th ed . , Roads rev .
[Ed.] A, [Three bars, one star]
(Appears on item as: A = -k)
Do not record statements relating to a reissue that contains no changes unless the item is
considered to be of particular importance to the cataloguing agency.
3.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
3.2E1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more named revisions of an
edition (but not to all such revisions) as instructed in I.2E and 3, IF.
3-10
AACR2 Revision 2002
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.3B1
3.3. MATHEMATICAL AND OTHER MATERIAL SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
Contents:
3.3A. Preliminary rule
3.3B. Statement of scale
3.3C. Statement of projection
3. 3D. Statement of coordinates and equinox
3.3E. Digital graphic representation
3.3F, Numbering related to serials
33A. Preliminary rule
3.3AL Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see I .OC.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede each repetition of this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede the projection statement by a semicolon.
Enclose the statement of coordinates and equinox in one pair of parentheses.
If both coordinates and equinox are given, precede the statement of equinox by a
semicolon.
Precede the statement of epoch by a comma.
Precede the object type by a space, colon, space.
Enclose each statement on the number of objects in parentheses after the object type.
Precede the format name by a space, semicolon, space.
3.3A2. Use English words and abbreviations in this area.
3 3 A3. If more than one material specific details area is required, give them in the following
order: mathematical data; digital graphic representation; and numbering related to serials.
Scale 1:250,000 ; universal transverse Mercator proj .
(E 138.00°-E 153.92VS 9.00°-S 29.83°). - Raster : pixel.
1996-
33B. Statement of scale
3.3BI. Give the scale of a cartographic item (except as noted below) as a representative frac-
tion expressed as a ratio (I: ). Precede the ratio by Scale. Give the scale even if it is
already recorded as part of the title proper or other title information.
Scale ca. 1:36,000,000
(Scale as it appears on the item )
Bartholomew one inch map of the Lake District [ckd] , — Rev.
- Scale 1:63, 360
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
3-11
3.3B2 CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
If a scale statement found in the chief source of information or accompanying material is
not expressed as a representative fraction, give it as a representative fraction in square
brackets.
Scale [1:253,440]
(Scale statement reads: 1 inch to 4 miles)
If a representative fraction or other scale statement is found in a source other than the chief
source of information or accompanying material (e.g., on a container or case not used as the
chief source), give the scale as a representative fraction in square brackets.
Scale [1:63,360]
If no scale statement is found in the chief source of information or accompanying material
or on the item's container or case, estimate a representative fraction from a bar scale or grid.
Give in square brackets the representative fraction preceded by ca.
Scale [ca. 1:63,360]
If no scale can be determined by any of the above means, give Scale not given.
Optionally, estimate a scale by comparison with a cartographic item of known scale and
give in square brackets the estimated scale preceded by ca. If no scale can be determined by
comparison, give the statement Scale not given.
For electronic resources, give the scale if the resource has a scale statement or if the scale
is already recorded as part of the title proper or other title information. Otherwise, give Scale
not given.
Scale 1:3,000,000
(Scale appears in title: ArcWorld 1;3M)
3~3B2. Optional addition. Give additional scale information that is found on the item {such as
a statement of comparative measures or limitation of the scale to particular parts of the item).
Use standard abbreviations and numerals in place of words. Precede such additional informa-
tion by a full stop.
Scale 1:250,000. 1 in. to 3.95 miles. 1 cm. to 2.5 km.
Quote the additional scale information if:
a) the statement presents unusual information that cannot be verified by the
cataloguer
b) a direct quotation is more precise than a statement in conventional form
c) the statement on the item is in error or contains errors.
Scale 1:59,403,960. "Along meridians only, 1 inch = 936
statute miles"
Scale [ca. 1:90,000] not "1 inch to the mile"
3.3B3. If the scale within one item varies and the outside values are known, give both scales
connected by a hyphen.
Scale 1:15,000-1:25,000
If the values are not known, give Scale varies.
3.3B4. In describing a cartographic item in which the main maps, etc., are of more than one
scale, give Scales differ.
or
or
3-12
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.3C1
Optionally:
a) If the description is of a cartographic item with two or more scales, and the projec-
tions and/or coordinates are also different for each main item, give each scaie in a
separate scale statement. If there is more than one title, give the scale statements in
the same order in which the titles are given. If there is only a collective title, give
the largest or larger scale first.
Scale 1:50, 000 <W 94°42'4"-W 93°00'00"/N 49°00'00"~
N 48°31'00">. - Scale 1:250, 000 (W 94M3-W 92°00'/
N 49°00'-N 48°13')
b) If the description is of a cartographic item with two or more scales, and the
projection and coordinates are the same for each main item, give the scales in one
scale statement. If there is more than one title, give the scales in the same order in
which the titles are given. If there is only a collective title, give the largest or larger
scale first.
Scale 1:7,819,000 and [ca. 1:15,000,000] (E 66°-E 138°/
N 5 4°-N 18°)
Optionally, give each scale with its associated mathematical data in separate scale
statements.
Scale 1 :7, 819, 000 (E 66°-E 138° /N 54°-N 18°). - Scale [ca.
1 :15, 000, 000] (E 66°-E 138°/N 54°-N 18°)
3.3B5. If an item is not drawn to scale, give Not drawn to scale. Do not estimate a scale.
3.3B6. Give a statement of scale for a cartographic item with a nonlinear scaie (e.g., celestial
charts; some maps of imaginary places) only if the information appears on the item. If no
scale statement is found on the item, give Scale not given. Do not estimate a scale.
Scale 1' per 2 cm.
3.3B7. In describing a relief model, other three-dimensional item, or a two-dimensional repre-
sentation of a three-dimensional item (e.g., block diagram, profile), give the vertical scale
(specified as such) after the horizontal scale if the vertical scale can be ascertained.
Scale 1:1,744,080. 1 in. to ca. 28 miles. Vertical scale
ca. 1:96,000
Scale 1:250,000. Vertical exaggeration 1:5
3.3C. Statement of projection
3.3C1. Give the statement of projection if it is found on the item, its container or case, or
accompanying printed material. Use abbreviations as instructed in appendix B and numerals
as instructed in appendix C.
; conic equidistant proj .
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
3-13
3.3C2
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.3C2. Optional addition. Give phrases associated with the projection statement that concern
meridians and/or parallels. Information about ellipsoids may be given in a note {see 3.7B8).
; transverse Mercator proj . , central meridian 35°13'30"E
; azimuthal equidistant proj . centered on Nicosia,
N 35°10', E 33°22 r
3.3D. Optional addition. Statement of coordinates and equinox
3.3D1. For terrestrial maps, etc., give the coordinates in the following order:
westernmost extent of area covered by item (longitude)
easternmost extent of area covered by item (longitude)
northernmost extent of area covered by item (latitude)
southernmost extent of area covered by item (latitude)
Express the coordinates in degrees (°), minutes ('), and seconds (") of the sexagesimal sys-
tem (360° circle) taken from the Greenwich prime meridian. Precede each coordinate by W,
E, N, or S, as appropriate. Separate the two sets of longitude and latitude by a diagonal slash,
neither preceded nor followed by a space. Separate each longitude or latitude from its coun-
terpart by a dash, neither preceded nor followed by a space.
(E 79°-E 8 6°/M 20°-N 12°)
(E 15°00'00"-E 17°30'45"/N 1°30'12"-S 2°30'35")
(W 74°50'-W 74°40'/N 45°5'-N 45°00')
Optionally, record coordinates as decimal degrees. Coordinates given in decimal degrees
for locations east of Greenwich and north of the equator are expressed as positive numbers
and may be preceded by a plus sign. Locations west of Greenwich and south of the equator
are expressed as negative numbers and are preceded by a minus sign. Do not include the plus
or minus sign, but precede each coordinate by W, E, N, or S, as appropriate.
(W 95.15°-W 74.35°/N 56.85°-N 41.73°)
Optional addition. In situations where a more precise indication of geographic coverage is
desired, describe each closed polygon using a string of coordinate pairs, in which each pair
represents a vertex of the polygon.
List coordinate pairs in clockwise order, starting with the southeasternmost vertex of the
polygon. In each coordinate pair, give longitude, followed by latitude, and express each in
degrees, minutes, and seconds as appropriate to the size of the area being described.
Enclose each coordinate pair string in parentheses; separate longitude from latitude in any
one pair with a diagonal slash, and separate coordinate pairs within a string with space, semi-
colon, space.
Polygons have non-intersecting boundaries. The first and last coordinate pairs are the
same.
(W 114°/N 32° ; W 117°/N 33° ; W 121°/N 35° ; W 1257N 43° ;
W 1207N 42° ; W 120°/M 39° / W 1157N 34° ; W 114°/N 32°)
3-14
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3302
For situations in which an area or areas within a given polygon are excluded, list the coor-
dinate pairs for any excluded area as given above, but in counterclockwise order.
(W 115°407N 33°15' ; W 115°35'/N 33°20' ; W 115°557N 33°32'
; W 116°57N 33°32' ; W 116°107N 33°30' ; W 115 o 50'/N 33°20' ;
W 115°407M 33° 15')
Optionally, give other meridians found on the item in the note area (see 3.7B8).
3.3D2. For celestial charts, give as coordinates the right ascension of the item, or the right
ascensions of the western and eastern limits of its collective coverage, and the declination of
the centre of the item, or the northern and southern limits of its collective coverage.
Designate the right ascension by RA, followed by the hours and, when necessary, minutes
and seconds of the twenty-four-hour clock.
Designate the declination by Dec!., followed by the degrees (°) and, when necessary, min-
utes ( ' } and seconds (") of the sexagesimal system (360° circle), using a plus sign ( + ) for
the northern celestial hemisphere and a minus sign { — ) for the southern celestial hemisphere.
Separate right ascensions and declinations from each other by a diagonal slash, neither pre-
ceded nor followed by a space. When two right ascensions are found, give both separated by
to. When two decimations are found, give both separated by to.
When coordinates are given, give also the statement of equinox. Express the equinox as a
year preceded by a semicolon and eq. Give also a statement of the epoch when it is known to
differ from the equinox. Separate it from the statement of the equinox by a comma, and pre-
cede it by epoch.
(RA 16 hr. 30 min. to 19 hr. 30 rriin . /Decl . -16° to -49° ;
eq. 1950, epoch 1948.5)
(RA 16 hr./Decl. -23° ; eq. 1950)
(RA 2 hr./Decl. +30° ; eq. 1950)
(RA 2 hr. 00 min. to 2 hr . 30 min./Decl. -30° to -45° ;
eq. 1950)
For charts centered on a pole, give the declination limit.
For atlases or collections of charts arranged in declination zones, give the declination lim-
its of each zone, but omit the statement of right ascension. If the zones are numerous, give
the declination limits of the first few zones followed by the mark of omission and the decli-
nation limit of the last zone.
(Centered at South Pole/Decl . limit -60°)
(Zones +90° to +81°,
+ 81° to +63°, +63° to +45° ;
eq.
1950)
(Zones +90° to +81°, +81° to +63°,
-81° to -90°
eq.
1950)
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
3-15
3.3E
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.3E. Digital graphic representation
3.3E1. For an electronic resource, if the information is readily available, give the data type
(e.g., raster, vector, point), the object type (e.g., point, line, polygon, pixel), the number of
objects used to represent spatial information, and the format name {e.g., digital transfer infor-
mation). More detailed information such as topology level (e.g., VPF) and compression may
be given in a note {see 3.7B8).
Point : point ; ASCII
Raster : pixel {5,000 X 5,000) ; TIFF
Vector ; Shape
Vector : points, lines and polygons E00
Vector : network chains
Vector : point (13671), string (20171), GT-polygon
composed of chains (13672) ; ARC/ INFO export
Vector ; MID/KIF
3.3F. Numbering related to serials
3.3F1. Give the numbering for the item as instructed in 12.3.
Scale 1:3, 000, 000 at 45° N ; polar stereographic proj .
(W 140°-W 52°/N 78°-N 41°). - 1st ed. (1976)-
Scale 1:3,000,000 at 45° N ; polar stereographic proj.
(W 140°-W 52°/N 7 8°-N 41°). - 1st ed. (1976) -3rd ed. (1978)
Scales differ. - Feb. 28-Mar. 6, 1983-Nov. 12-18, 1984
3.4. PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
Contents:
3.4A. Preliminary rule
3.4B, General rule
3.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
3.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
3.4E. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
3.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
3.4G. Place of printing, etc., name of printer, etc., date of printing, etc.
3.4A. Preliminary rule
3.4A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a second or subsequently named place of publication, distribution, etc., by a
semicolon.
Precede the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., by a colon.
Enclose a supplied statement of function of a publisher, distributor, etc., in square brackets.
Precede the date of publication, distribution, etc., by a comma.
3-16
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.4E1
Enclose the details of printing, etc., (place, name, date) in parentheses.
Precede the name of a printer, etc., by a colon.
Precede the date of printing, etc., by a comma.
3.4B. General rule
3.4BI. Record information about the place, name, and date of all types of publishing, distrib-
uting, etc., activities as instructed in 1.4B.
3.4B2. Early cartographic items. Give the publication, etc., details of early cartographic
items as instructed in 2.16.
3.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
3.4C1. Give the place of publication, distribution, etc., of a published item as instructed in
1.4C.
3.4C2. Do not record a place of publication, distribution, etc., for an unpublished carto-
graphic item. Do not record s.L in such a case.
3.4D. Name of pubfisher, distributor, etc,
3.4D1. Give the name of the publisher, etc., and optionally the distributor, as instructed in
i.4D.
Southampton : Ordnance Survey
Point Reyes, Calif. : Drake Navigators Guild
Paris : Institut geographique Internationale
[London] : Royal Geographical Society
Montreal : Editions FM
[Chicago] : Chicago Area Transportation Study
Amsterdam ; London : Worth-Holland Pub , Co .
(Cataloguing agency in the United Kingdom)
London : Royal Geographical Society ; Lympne Castle, Kent
: H , Kargary
(Second publisher given prominence by layout )
Southampton : Ordnance Survey for the Institute of
Geological Sciences
Tananarive : Service geographique de Madagascar
3.4D2. Do not record the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., for an unpublished carto-
graphic item. Do not record s.n. in such a case,
3.4E. Optional addition. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
3.4E1, Add to the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., a statement of function as instructed
in 1.4E.
K0benhavn : Geodatisk Ins ti tut ; [London ] : Stanford
[distributor]
AACR2 Revision 2002
3.4F
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
3.4F1. Give the date of publication, distribution, etc., of a published cartographic item as
instructed in 1.4E
Washington, D.C. : Secretariat General de la Organization
de Iqs Estados Americanos, 1969
Sevenoaks , K&n '". : Geographer s ' Map Co . , [1973]
Zurich : Orel! Fussli, cI973
Helsinki : Maanmittaushall itus , 1965-1967
3.4F2. Give the date of a map manuscript as instructed in 4.4B1.
3.4G. Place of printing, etc., name of printer, etc., date of printing, etc.
3.4G1. If the name of the publisher is unknown and the place and name of the printer or
manufacturer are found in the item, give that place and name as instructed in 1.4G.
Paris : [ s . n , , ca . 1S9S ] (Paris : LeErun)
3.4G2. Optional addition. Give the place, name of printer, etc., and/or date of printing, etc, if
they are found on the item or its container or case or accompanying printed material and
differ from the place, name of publisher, etc., and date of publication, etc., and are considered
important by the cataloguing agency,
London : Laurie f. Whittle, 1804 (1810 printing)
3.5. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
Contents:
3.5A. Preliminary rule
3,5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
3.5C. Other physical details
3.5D. Dimensions
3.5E. Accompanying material
3.5A. Preliminary rule
3.5 Al. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede other physical details by a colon.
Precede dimensions by a semicolon.
Precede each statement of accompanying material by a plus sign.
Enclose physical details of accompanying material in parentheses.
3.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
3.5BI. Give the extent of a cartographic item. In the case of atlases and globes, give the
number of physical units. In the case of other cartographic items, give the number of maps,
3-18
AACR2 Revision 2002
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.5B2
etc. Use arabic numerals and one of the following terms, If the item is a manuscript, precede
the term by ms.
atlas
diagram
globe
map
mode!
profile
remote-sensing image
section
view
1 globe
1 map
1 ms . map
3 diagrams
10 identical maps
If a cartographic item is not comprehended by one of the above terms, use an appropriate
term preferably taken from subrule .5B of one of the chapters of part I.
7 wall charts
52 playing cards
If the sheets or parts of an item are very numerous and the exact number cannot be readily
ascertained, give an approximate number.
ca. 800 maps
If a cartographic item contains, or consists of, tactile data, follow the instructions in 3.5B4.
3.5B2. If there is more than one map, etc., on one or more sheets, specify the number of
maps, etc,, and the number of sheets.
6 maps on 1 sheet
8 sections on 3 sheets
If the maps, etc., are printed in two or more segments designed to fit together to form one
or more maps, etc., give the number of complete maps, etc., and:
a) the number of segments if all the segments are on a single sheet
1 section in 4 segments
2 views in 6 segments
b) the number of sheets if the segments are on separate sheets.
1 map on 4 sheets
Optionally, omit the specification of the number of sheets or segments from the specific
material designation and, if desired, give such information in a note {see 3.7B10).
6 maps
Nole: Maps on one sheet
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
3-19
3.SB3
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
2 views
Note: Each view in 3 segments
If an item consists of a number of sheets each of which is a complete map, etc., treat it as
a collection and describe it as instructed in 3.5B1.
3.5B3. Add, to the statement of extent for an atlas, the pagination or number of volumes as
instructed in 2.5B.
1 atlas (3 v . )
1 atlas (xvii, 37 p., 74 leaves of plates)
1 atlas (1 v. (various pagings) )
3.5B4. If a cartographic item contains visual data and tactile data (i.e., braille letters or other
tactile systems intended for the visually impaired), add a concise term (e.g., print and tactile)
to the extent of item (see 3.5B1-3.5B3).
1 map (print and tactile)
1 atlas (print and tactile)
1 map in A segments (print, braille, and tactile)
1 globe (print and tactile)
If a cartographic item contains only tactile data, add, to the statement of extent (see 3.5B1-
3.5B3), braille, press braille, solid dot braille, tactile, etc., as appropriate.
1 map (braille and tactile)
1 map (tactile)
1 globe (tactile)
1 atlas (3 v., tactile)
1 atlas (100 p., braille and tactile)
Optionally, if general material designations are used (see 1.1C1) and the general material
designation indicates the tactile nature of the item, omit the addition.
If the item is a thermoform copy, add thermoform to the parenthetic addition, preceded by
a comma. If there is no parenthetic addition (see option above), add thermoform in
parentheses.
1 map (braille, thermoform)
or 1 map (thermoform)
1 map {print and braille, thermoform)
3.5C. Other physical details
3.5C1. Give the following details, as appropriate, in the order set out here:
layout
production method
number of maps, etc., in an atlas
colour
medium
material
mounting
3-20
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.5C7
3.5C2. Layout, Describe any unusual layout of the map(s), etc., on the sheet(s). Use both
sides if the item is continued at the same scale on the other side of the sheet(s), or, if collec-
tively describing multiple map(s), etc., that are on both sides of the sheet{s). However, if the
same map, etc., is represented in more than one language on each side of the sheet, use back
to back.
1 map : both sides, col .
3 maps on 1 sheet : both sides, col.
2 maps on 1 sheet : back to back, col .
3.5C3. Production method. Give the method of production (other than printing), or repro-
duction, if considered significant. For photomechanical reproductions, either use a general
term (photocopy), or give the generic name of the process (e.g., blueprint, bluel'me, white
print).
1 map : photocopy
1 map : blueline
1 map : computer printout, col .
68 maps ; 6 blueprints, some col,
3.5C4. Number of maps, etc., in an atias. Give the number of maps, etc., in an atlas as
instructed in 2.5C.
1 atlas (330 p.) : 100 col. maps (some folded)
1 atlas (207 p.) : ca. 190 maps
3.5C5. Colour. If the item is coloured or partly coloured, indicate this. Disregard coloured
matter outside a map, etc., border.
1 map : col.
4 maps : 2 col,
1 globe : col.
1 ms . map : col ,
10 maps : some col.
1 map : hand col .
1 atlas (xvi, 97, 100 p.) : 35 col. maps
3.5C6. Medium. Optionally, give the medium (e.g., pencil, ink) used to draw and colour a
manuscript cartographic item. If a printed work is hand coloured, the medium may be
recorded after the indication of colour.
54 ms . maps : col . , ink on Mylar
1 map : hand col. in pencil
3.5C7. Material. Give the material of which the item is made if it is considered to be signifi-
cant (e.g., if a map is printed on a substance other than paper).
1 map : col., plastic
1 map : col . , silk
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
3-21
3.5C8
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
1 globe : col . , wood
1 ms . map : col., vellum
3.5C8. Mounting. If a map, etc., is mounted, indicate this. Indicate the mounting of a globe.
1 map : col., mounted on linen
1 globe : col . , wood, on brass stand
1 globe : plastic, on metal stand
3.5D. Dimensions
3.5D1. Maps, plans, etc. Give the height X width in centimetres, to the next whole centime-
tre up, of a two-dimensional cartographic item (e.g., if a measurement is 37. 1 centimetres,
record it as 38 cm.). Optionally, for early and manuscript cartographic items, give the dimen-
sions to the nearest millimetre expressed in tenths of a centimetre. Give the measurements of
the face of the map, etc., measured within the neat line. Give the diameter of a circular map,
etc., and specify it as such. If a map, etc., is irregularly shaped, or if it has no neat line, or if
it bleeds off the edge, give the greater or greatest dimensions of the map itself. If it is diffi-
cult to determine the points for measuring the height and the width of the map, etc. (e.g.,
when the shape is extremely irregular, or when it was printed without one or more of its
borders), give the height X width of the sheet specified as such.
1 map : col. ; 25 X 3 5 cm.
1 wall chart ; 40 X 23 cm.
1 ms. map ; 123.5 X 152.4 cm.
1 map : col. ; 45 cm. in diam.
1 map : col. ; on sheet 45 X 33 cm.
If a map, etc., is on sheets of two sizes, give both sets of dimensions. If the sheets are of
more than two sizes, give the greatest height of any of them followed by the greatest width of
any of them and or smaller.
1 map on 2 sheets ; sheets 25 X 35 cm. and 30 X 35 cm.
1 map on 4 sheets ; sheets 30 X 40 cm. or smaller
If a map, etc., is on one or more sheets in two or more segments designed to fit together to
form one map, etc., give the dimensions of the complete map, etc., followed by the dimen-
sions of the sheet(s). Separate the dimensions by a comma and precede the sheet dimension
with on unless the number of sheets is given in the extent of the item. If such a map, etc., is
mounted, give the dimensions of the whole map, etc., alone.
1 map in 4 segments ; 10 X 60 cm., on sheet 25 X 35 cm,
1 map on 9 sheets ; 264 X 375 cm., sheets 96 X 142 cm.
1 map ; 120 X 276 cm.
(Mounted map created from several segments )
3-22
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.5D5
If it is difficult to determine the points for measuring the height and width of a complete
map, etc., that is in segments, or if it is difficult to assemble the map, etc., for measuring,
give only the height and width of the sheet(s) specified as such.
1 map on 3 sheets ; sheets 30 X 40 era,
2 maps on 6 sheets ; sheets 60 X 60 cm. or smaller
If the size of either dimension of a map, etc., is less than half the same dimension of the
sheet on which it is printed or if there is substantial additional information on the sheet (e.g.,
text), give the size of the map, etc., followed by the sheet size. Separate the dimensions by a
comma and precede the sheet size with on.
1 map ; 20 X 31 cm., on sheet 42 X 50 cm.
If a map, etc., is printed with an outer cover within which it is intended to be folded or if
the sheet itself contains a panel or section designed to appear on the outside when the sheet is
folded, give the size of the map, etc., and add the sheet size in folded form, preceded by a
comma.
1 map ; 80 X 57 cm., folded to 21 X 10 cm.
1 map : col. ; 9 X 20 cm., on sheet 40 X 60 cm., folded
to 21 X 10 cm.
If a map, etc., is printed on both sides of a sheet at a consistent scale, give the dimensions
of the map, etc., as a whole, and give the sheet size, separated by a comma and preceded by
on. If it is difficult to measure such a map, etc., give the sheet size alone.
1 map ; both sides 45 X 80 cm., on sheet 50 X 44 cm.
(Printed on both sides of sheet with line for joining indicated)
1 map : both sides ; on sheet 45 X 30 cm.
(Printed on both sides of sheet)
If the maps, etc., in a collection are of two sizes, give both. If they are of more than two
sizes, give the greatest height of any of them foIJowed by the greatest width of any of them
and or smaller.
60 maps ; 44 X 55 cm. and 48 X 75 cm.
60 maps ; 60 X 90 cm, or smaller
3.5D2. Atlases. Give the dimensions of an atlas as instructed in 2.5D,
1 atlas (xii, 100, 32 p.) : 100 col. maps ; 29 cm.
3.5D3. Models. Give the height X width of a model in centimetres as instructed in 3.5D1.
Optionally, add the depth.
1 model : col,, plastic ; 45 X 35 X 2 cm.
3.5D4. Globes. Give the diameter of a globe, specified as such.
1 globe : col,, wood, on metal stand ; 12 cm. in diam.
3.5D5, Optional addition. Containers. Add the description of a container and its dimensions
to the dimensions of the item. Separate the dimensions by a comma.
1 globe : col., plastic, on metal stand ; 20 cm. in diam.,
in box 40 X 12 X 12 cm.
1 map : col. ; 200 X 350 cm., folded to 20 X 15 cm., in
plastic case 25 X 20 cm.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
3-23
3.5E
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.5E. Accompanying material
3.5E1. Give the details of accompanying material as instructed in 1.5E,
17 maps ; 90 X 96 cm. + 1 v. (xvii, 272 p. ; 25 cm.)
3.6. SERIES AREA
Contents:
3.6A. Preliminary rule
3.6B. Series statements
3.6A. Preliminary rale
3.6A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C,
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Enclose each series statement (see 1.6J) in parentheses.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
Precede the ISSN of a series or subseries by a comma.
Precede the numbering within a series or subseries by a semicolon.
Enclose a date following a numeric and/or alphabetic designation in parentheses.
Precede the title of a subseries, or the designation for a subseries, by a full stop.
Precede the title of a subseries following a designation for the subseries by a comma.
3.6B. Series statements
3.6B1. Record each series statement as instructed in 1.6.
(Climatological studies ; no. 8)
(Al street atlas series)
(Carte geographique de l'Angleterrs ; no 16)
(Deutscher Planungsatl as ; Bd. 8)
(Bartholomew world travel series)
(Nouvelle collection / Maurice Le Lannou)
(Communications of the Dublin Institute for Advanced
Studies. Series D, Geophysical bulletin ; no. 29)
(Series of atlases in facsimile / Theatrum Orbis Terrarum.
6th series ; v. 1)
(Saggi e memorie di storia dell' arte ; v. 7)
(Graeco-Roman memoirs, ISSN 0306-9992 ; no. 93)
([Geological Survey of Canada A series] ; 1245A)
3-24
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.7B2
(Military city map : series A902 1:25,000 = Carte
militaire de la ville : serie A902 1:25,000 / Mapping and
Charting Establishment, Department of National Defence ; MCE
325)
3.7. NOTE AREA
Contents:
3.7A. Preliminary rule
3.7B. Notes
3.7A. Preliminary rule
3.7 AI. Punctuation
Precede each note by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph for each.
Separate introductory wording from the main content of a note by a colon followed but not
preceded by a space.
3.7 A2. In making notes, follow the instructions in 1.7A.
3.7B. Notes
Make notes as set out in the following subrules and in the order given there. However,
give a particular note first when it has been decided that note is of primary importance.
3.7B1. Nature and scope of the item. Make notes on the nature or scope of a cartographic
item unless it is apparent from the rest of the description. Also make a note on unusual or
unexpected features of the item.
Shows all of western Europe and some of eastern Europe
(Item entitled: Germany)
Maps dissected and pasted onto the sides of 42 wooden
blocks to form an educational game
Shows the routes of Amundsen , Byrd, and Gould
Shows southernmost extent of the midnight sun
Shows the main battles of 1944-1945
(Item entitled: The Asian struggle)
Free ball globe in transparent plastic cradle with
graduated horizon circle and "geometer"
Shows dioceses
"Contour interval 2 0 feet"
Relief shown by contours, hachures, and spot heights
Eased on 1981 statistics
3.7B2. Language. Give the language(s) of captions, etc., and text, unless this is apparent
from the rest of the description.
In Esperanto
AACR2 Revision 2002
3-25
3.7B3
cartographic materials
Includes text in Finnish, Swedish, English, and German
Place names in Italian
Legend in English and Afrikaans
In English, except for title arid "La mer du Nord"
3.7B3. Source of title proper. Make notes on the source of the title proper if it is other than
the chief source of information or if considered important.
Title from container
Title from separate -wrapper
Title from: A list of maps of America / P.L. Phillips,
p. 502
Title from panel
3.7B4. Variations in title. Make notes on titles borne by the item other than the title proper.
Optionally, give a romanization of the title proper.
Panel title: Welcome to big Wyoming
Title in left margin: Ville de Aix- les-Bains , Savoie
Romanized title: Koskovska i a oblast'
3.7BS. Parallel titles and other title information. Give the title in another language and
other title information not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility area if they are
considered to be important.
Added title in Spanish
Subtitle on wrapper: Showing population changes 1951-60
3.7B6. Statements of responsibility. Make notes on variant names of persons or bodies
named in statements of responsibility if these are considered to be important for identifica-
tion. Give statements of responsibility not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility
area. Make notes on persons or bodies connected with a work, or significant persons or bod-
ies connected with previous editions and not already named in the description.
Engraved by T.J. Kewman
"Ch. Smith sculp . "—Cover
"Plotted ... by G. Petrie and D.P. Wicol, University of
Glasgow, 1965. Field reconnaissance, 1962, and geomorpho-
logical interpretation by R.J. Price as part of project no.
1469 of the Institute of Polar Studies, the Ohio State
University"
Attributed to Blaeu in: Atlantes Weerlandici / C. Koeman
3.7B7. Edition and history. Make notes relating to the edition being described or to the his-
tory of the cartographic item.
First ed. published 1954
Sheets of various eds .
3-26
AACR2 Revision 2002
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.7B8
A later state of the map first published in 1715 and later
in 1745. This state has the additions of "King's roads" and
an advertisement for Overton' s large map of the British
Isles, dated 1746
Facsim. of: "The 52 countries [i.e. counties] of England
and Wales described in a pack of cards. Sold by Robert
Morton ... [et al . ] in 1676"
Copied from;
Based on -,
Red overprinting on the author's Greater Germany,
administrative divisions 1 July 1944 (no. 3817-R&A, OSS)
"Roads and railways fully revised, 1971"— Wrapper
A later state of the map first published in 1772
From: Atlas elementaire de geographie physique et
politique / E. Men telle et P.G. Chanlaire. [1798]
First ed. published as: Atlas of comparative geography for
junior classes / edited by George Philip. 1903
3.7B8. Mathematical and other material specific details. Make notes on the magnitude of
celestial charts.
Limiting magnitude 3 . 5
Give mathematical data not already included in the mathematical and other material spe-
cific details area for remote-sensing images.
"f5.944, alt. 12,000 ft."
Give other mathematical and cartographic data additional to, or elaborating on, that given
in the mathematical and other material specific details area.
Scale of original; ca. 1:1,300
Oriented with north to right
Prime meridians : Ferro and Paris
Scale departure graph: "Statute miles, Mercator
projection"
Military grid
Clarke 1886 ellipsoid
If the information is readily available, give the horizontal coordinate system (geographic
system or map projection or grid coordinate system) and the name of the geodetic datum,
and, if applicable, the vertical coordinate system (e.g., for digital elevation models). Enclose
each set of projection or ellipsoid parameters in parentheses; separate the multiple parameters
AACR2 Revision 2002
3-27
3.7B9
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
by a space, semicolon, space; and precede the secondary /related reference method by a colon,
space.
Altitude datum name: national Geodetic Vertical Datum of
1929 ; altitude resolution: not given ; units of
measurement : feet ; ver tical encoding method : explici t
elevation coordinate included with horizontal coordinates
Geographic system: coordinates ; longitude resolution:
0.0004 ; latitude resolution: 0.0004 ; unit of measure:
decimal degrees
Projection: Lambert conformal conic (standard parallels:
38.3 ; 39.4 ; longitude of central meridian: -77 ; latitude
of projection origin: 37.8333 ; false easting: 800000 ;
false northing 0)
Horizontal da turn name : North American datum of 192 7 ;
ellipsoid name : Clarke 1866 ( semi -ma j or axis: 6378206.4 ;
flattening ratio: 294.98)
Give digital graphic representation data not already included in the mathematical and other
material specific details area for electronic resources.
Distributed as a Zip file
Topology level 2
If the scales differ (see 3.3B4) and if one or more of the scales is readily discernible and
can be expressed concisely, give the scale(s).
Scale of third and fourth maps: 1:540,000
Scales: 1:230, 000, 1:200, 000, 1:150, 000
Predominant scale: 1:250,000
3.7B9. Publication, distribution, etc. Make notes on publication, distribution, etc., details
that are not included in the publication, distribution, etc., area and are considered to be
important.
All previous eds. published by:
Maps dated between 1780 and 1813
The imprint of Gerard Valck has been substituted for the
erased imprint of Joan. Blaeu, who probably first published
the map ca. 1672
Imprint of W. s, S. Jones pasted onto the terrestrial and
celestial globe gores
3.7B10. Physical description. Make notes on important physical details that are not included
in the physical description area, especially if these affect the use of the item. If the item is a
photoreproduction and the general term (photocopy) is used in the physical description area
(see 3.5C3), give the generic name of the process, if it is likely to affect the use of the item
(e.g., when it is a blueline print).
Irregularly shaped
Hand coloured
3-28
AACR2 Revision 2002
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.7B18
Blueprint
Watermark: C. S I. Honig
In wooden case bearing, on its inner faces,
representations of the celestial hemispheres
Bound in vellum
Legends in braille
County boundaries tactile
Mounted map created from several segments
3.7B11. Accompanying material. Make notes on the location of accompanying material if
appropriate. Give details of accompanying materia! neither mentioned in the physical descrip-
tion area nor given a separate description (see 1.5E).
Accompanied by filmstrip entitled: Mexico and Central
America
Accompanied by the same maps in sheet form first published
in: Geographie generale / H.J.C. Barbie Du Bocage. 1842
Each sheet accompanied by a sheet of geological sections
3.7B12. Series. Make notes on series data that cannot be given in the series area.
Some sheets have series designation: Direct route map
3.7B13. Dissertations. If the item being described is a dissertation, make a note as instructed
in I.7BI3.
3.7B14. Audience. Make a brief note of the intended audience for, or intellectual level of, an
item if this information is stated in the item.
Intended audience: Primary schools
3.7B16, Other formats. Give the details of other formats in which the content of the item
has been issued.
Also issued as a set of wall charts
Also issued on microfiche
3.7B18. Contents, if a collection of maps is described as a unit (see 3.0J), make notes on the
state of the collection at the time of description and indicate the composition of the complete
collection if possible. Give variations between sheets in the collection. Complete this note
when the collection is complete.
Complete in 174 sheets. Set includes various editions of
some sheets including some reissued by the U.S. Army Map
Service. Some sheets, prepared under the direction of the
Chief of Engineers, U.S. Army, have series designation
"Provisional G.S.G-S. 41-35"
List the contents of an item, either selectively or fully, including 1 , insets; maps, etc., printed
on the verso of a map, etc., sheet; illustrations, etc. Make notes on maps, insets, etc., on the
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
3-29
3.7B19
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
recto before those on the verso of a sheet. Give the scale of insets, etc., if it is consistent. If
the insets, etc., are numerous and/or minor, make a note in general terms.
Includes index
Includes "Glossary"
Includes key to 14 0 place names
With two additional unnumbered parts: The stars in six
maps. 1830 — The terrestrial globe in six maps. 1831
Includes an index and illustrations of the Wangapeka Track
Maps, text, and col. ill. on verso
Insets: Connaught Place — Chanakyapuri — Delhi & New Delhi
City. Scale [ca. 1:23,000]
Insets: Political and economic alliances — Air distances
from London — Membership of international organisations
On verso: Mew map of South Hadley, Mass. Scale [ca.
1:15, 000]
On verso: Indiana — Iowa — Missouri. Scale 1:600,000
Insets: Harrow — Wembley - Ruislip. On verso: Map of N.W.
London
Includes 7 insets
Contents: The world in 3000 B.C. - The world in 1500 B.C. -
The world in 500 B.C. - The world in A.D. 1
Contents: Ancient Orient before the rise of the Greeks.
Scale 1:4,752,000 - Palestine about 860 B.C. Scale 1:506,880
Contents: Colonial organization of the world 1937 —
Achievement of independence 1958-1966
3.7B19. Numbers. Give important numbers associated with the item other than ISBNs or
ISSNs (see 3.8B).
Publisher's no.: LB 3721-9
3.7B20. Copy being described, library's holdings, and restrictions on use. Make these
notes as instructed in 1.7B20.
Library's copy annotated in red ink to show land owners
Originally published on 4 sheets
Library's copy imperfect: Upper left corner missing
Library's set lacks sheets 9-13 and sheet 27
3.7B21. "With" notes. If the title and statement of responsibility area contains a title that
applies to only a part of an item lacking a collective title and, therefore, more than one entry
is made, make a note beginning With: and listing the other separately titled works in the item
in the order in which they appear there.
With a separa te map on same sheet : Queen Maud Range
3-30
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS
3.8E1
With (on verso) : Motor road map of south-east England
Mounted on a wooden stand to form a pair with: Bale's new
celestial globe. 1845
With: Atlas de France. Paris : Desnos, 1775
3.8. STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
Contents:
3.8A. Preliminary rule
3.8B. Standard number
3, SC. Key-title
3.8D. Terms of availability
3.8E. Qualification
3.8A. Preliminary rule
3.8A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede each repetition of this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a key-title by an equals sign.
Precede terms of availability by a colon.
Enclose a qualification to the standard number or terms of availability in parentheses.
3.8B. Standard number
3.8B1. Give the International Standard Book Number (ISBN) or International Standard Serial
Number (ISSN) assigned to an item as instructed in 1.8B.
ISBN 0-85152-392-7
ISSN 0085-4859
3.8B2. Give any other number in a note (see 3.7B19).
3.8C. Key-title
3.8CL Give the key-title of a resource as instructed in 1.8C.
3.SD. Optional addition. Terms of availability
3.8D1. Give the terms on which the item is available as instructed in 1.8D.
£4.40 (complete collection). - £0.55 (individual sheets)
3.8E. Qualification
3.8E1, Add qualifications to the standard number and/or terms of availability as instructed in
1.8E.
AACR2 Revision 2002
3-31
3.9
cartographic materials
3.9. SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
3.9A. Describe supplementary items as instructed in 1.9.
3.10. ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
3.1AA. Describe items made up of several types of material as instructed in 1. 10.
3.11. FACSIMILES, PHOTOCOPIES, AND OTHER REPRODUCTIONS
3.11A. Describe facsimiles, photocopies, and other reproductions as instructed in 1.11.
3-32
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHAPTER
Manuscripts (Including Manuscript
Collections)
Contents
4.0 GENERAL RULES
4.0A
Scope
4.0B
Sources of information
4.0C
Punctuation
4.0D
Levels of detail in the description
4.0E
Language and script of the description
4.0F
Inaccuracies
4.0G
Accents and other diacritical marks
TITLE
AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
4.1 A
Preliminary rule
4.IA1
Punctuation
4.1B
Title proper
4.1C
General material designation
4. ID
Parallel titles
4.1E
Other title information
4.1F
Statements of responsibility
4.IG
Items without a collective titie
4.2 EDITION AREA
4.2A Preliminary rule
4.2A2 Punctuation
4.2B Edition statement
4.2C Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
4.3 MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
4.4 DATE AREA
4.4A Preliminary rule
4.4A1 Punctuation
4.4B Date of the manuscript
4.5 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
4.5A Preliminary rule
4.5A I Punctuation
4.5B Extent of item
AACR2 Revision 2002
4-1
4.0
MANUSCRIPTS (INCLUDING MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS)
4.5B 1 Single manuscripts
4.5B2 Collections of manuscripts
4.5C Other physical details
4.5D Dimensions
4.5D1 Single manuscripts
4.5D2 Collections ot manuscripts
4.6 SERIES AREA
4.7 NOTE AREA
4.7A Preliminary rule
4.7 A 1 Punctuation
4.7B Notes;
4.8 STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
4.0. GENERAL RULES
4.0A. Scope
4.0A1. The rules in this chapter cover the description of manuscript (including typescript or
printout) materials of all kinds, including manuscript books, dissertations, letters, speeches,
etc., legal papers (including printed forms completed in manuscript), and collections of such
manuscripts. For reproductions of manuscripts published in multiple copies, see chapter 2 or
chapter 1 1, as appropriate. For manuscript cartographic items, see also chapter 3. For manu-
script music, see also chapter 5.
4.0B. Sources of information
4.0B1. Chief source of information. The chief source of information for manuscripts is the
manuscript itself. Within manuscripts, use {in this order of preference) information from the:
title page
colophon
caption, heading, etc.
content of the manuscript
However, prefer a source that is part of the original manuscript to sources that have been
supplied iater. If information is not available from the chief source, take it from the following
sources (in this order of preference):
another manuscript copy of the item
a published edition of the item
reference sources
other sources
For collections of manuscripts, treat the whole collection as the chief source.
4-2
AACR2 Revision 2002
MANUSCRIPTS (INCLUDING MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS)
4.1A1
4.0B2. Prescribed sources of information. The prescribed source(s) of information for each
area of the description of manuscripts is set out below. Enclose information taken from out-
side the prescribed source(s) in square brackets.
AREA
Title and statement of
responsibility
Edition
Date
Physical description
Note
PRESCRIBED SOURCES OF INFORMATION
Chief source of information, published copies of
manuscript
Chief source of information, published copies of
manuscript
Chief source of information, published copies of
manuscript
Any source
Any source
4.0C. Punctuation
For the punctuation of the description as a whole, see 1 ,0C.
For the prescribed punctuation of elements, see the following rules.
4.0D. Levels of detail in the description
See 1.0D.
4.0E. Language and script of the description
See 1.0E.
4.0F. Inaccuracies
See 1.0F.
4.0G. Accents and other diacritical marks
See LOG.
4.1. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
Contents:
4.1 A.
Preliminary rule
4.1B.
Title proper
4.1C.
General material designation
4.1D.
Parallel titles
4. IE.
Other title information
4. IF.
Statements of responsibility
4.1G.
Items without a collective tJ tie
4.1A. Preliminary ruie
4.1A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 .OC.
Enclose the general material designation in square brackets.
AACR2 Revision 2002
4-3
4.1B
MANUSCRIPTS (INCLUDING MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS)
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede each unit of other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
For the punctuation of this area for items without a collective title, see 1.1G.
4.1B. Title proper
4.1B1. Transcribe the title proper as instructed in LIB.
Life of Romney
A Declaration of the Representatives of the United States
of America in Congress Assembled
The waste land
Death in Leamington Spa
If the title proper is not taken from the chief source of information, give the source of the
title in a note (see 4.7B3).
4.1B2. If a manuscript or manuscript collection lacks a title, supply one as instructed below.
Give the source of a supplied title (other than one composed by the cataloguer) in the note
area (see 4.7B3).
Manuscript volumes and similar material. Supply a brief title indicating the nature of the
material for literary manuscripts, diaries, journals, memorandum books, account books, etc.
For manuscripts of subsequently published texts, give the title by which the work is known.
[Diary]
[Seventeen poems]
Ancient, medieval, and Renaissance manuscripts and oriental manuscripts lacking a title
page. 1 Follow, when appropriate, the provisions for early printed monographs (see 2.14). If
those rules do not appiy, supply a title by which the work is known or a title indicating the
nature of the material.
[De re militari]
[Treatise on arithmetic]
Single letters, postcards, telegrams, radiograms, etc. Supply a title consisting of Letter {or
Postcard, Telegram, etc.), the date of writing (expressed as year, month, day), the place of
writing, the name of the addressee, and place to which addressed. Enclose any details not
taken from the letter, etc., its envelope, or enclosures, in square brackets.
[Letter, ca. 1898 Jan. 1] Worcester Park, Surrey [to]
George Gissing, Rome
[Postcard] 1898 March 1, Rome [to] H.G. Wells, Worcester
Park, Surrey
1. This rule is intended for general guidance only.
4-4
AACR2 Revision 2002
MANUSCRIPTS (INCLUDING MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS)
4.1D1
[Telegram] 1889 Feb. 8, London [to] James McNeill
Whistler, Chelsea, London
Speeches, sermons, etc. Supply a title consisting of an appropriate word (e.g., Speech,
Address) followed by the place and/or the occasion of the delivery,
[Lecture, Royal College of Medicine, London]
[Address, before Goucher College, Baltimore, Md., in the
First Methodist Episcopal Church]
Legal documents (wills, deeds, mortgages, leases, warrants, commissions, etc.). Supply a
title consisting of a word or brief phrase characterizing the document, the date of signing
(expressed as year, month, day), the name(s) of persons concerned other than those
responsible for the document, and the occasion for the document if it can be expressed
concisely. Enclose any details not taken from the document in square brackets.
[Mill] 1943 Feb. 8
[Commission, ca. 1851 Apr. 9] appointing J.E. Bradshaw to
command the Peshawar Battalion
[Lease, 1S37 Oct. 17, of shop in Bridge St., Harrow,
Middlesex]
Collections of manuscript materials formed by or around a person, family, corporate
body, or subject. The materials may be in their original form or reproductions, and may
include photographs and printed materials. Give the title by which the collection is known, or
supply a title indicating the nature of the collection. Unless more specific terms are used, use
Letters for letters by an individual, Correspondence for letters between persons or to a person
or persons, Papers for miscellaneous personal or family material, and Records for materials
relating to a corporate body.
[Letters]
[Records]
[Mercantile records]
[Indian papers]
[ Li terary remains ]
Miscellaneous single manuscripts. For a manuscript not covered by the above sections, give
the title by which it is known, or supply a title indicating the nature of the material.
[Chart for Tender is the night]
4.1C. Optional addition. General material designation
4.1C1. Give immediately following the title proper the appropriate general material designa-
tion as instructed in 1.1C.
Gondal poems [gmd]
4.1D. Parallel titles
4.1D1, Transcribe parallel titles as instructed in 1.1D.
AACR2 Revision 2002
4-5
4.1E
MANUSCRIPTS (INCLUDING MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS)
4. IE. Other title information
4.1E1. Transcribe other title information as instructed in 1.1E.
The need of redirected rural schools iSMb] : address ,
before the Iowa State Teachers' Association, [Des Moines] ,
Oct. 4, 1910
4.1E2. If a letter, etc., speech, sermon, etc., or legal document has a title lacking some infor-
mation specified for supplied titles for those documents (see 4.1B2), add that information as
other title information.
Why no Baal ? ;gmd] : [ se rmon, Westminster Cathedral]
In place of uncertainty ;gmd; : a speech [to the Peace
Pledge Union and Society of Friends, Friends Hall, London]
4.IF. Statements of responsibility
4.1F1. Transcribe statements of responsibility relating to persons or bodies appearing on the
manuscript as instructed in 1.1F.
Ezil ;gmd] / St . - J . Perse
[Letter] 1899 Jan. 3, Dorking, Surrey [to] H.G. Wells,
Worcester Park, Surrey [gmc; / George Gissing
Three sonnets of Shakespeare [gmij] / written in the italic
hand by Pamela Thomson
4.1F2. Optional addition. If the name appended to, or the signature on, a manuscript is
incomplete, complete the name.
[Letter] 1929 Feb. 8, Hew York to F. Scott Fitzgerald,
Wilmington, Del. [gmd] / Zelda [Fitzgerald]
[Letter] 1898 July 19, Dorking, Surrey [to] H.G. Wells,
Worcester Park, Surrey ; gmcj ] / G.G. [George Gissing]
4.1F3. If a manuscript lacks a signature or statement of responsibility, supply the name(s) of
the person(s) responsible for it, if known.
Speech, Trafalgar Square, London [gmd; / [William Morris]
The waste land ;gmd] / T.S. Eliot ; [with ms . amendments by
Ezra Pound]
4.1G. Items without a collective title
4.1G1. If a single manuscript lacks a collective title, transcribe the titles of the individual
parts as instructed in 1.1G.
Gold shoes [gmd] ; The other world / J.M. Morgan
Speculum regum [gkd] / Godef ridus Viterbiensis. Tractatus
de occul tatione vitiorum sub specie virtu turn
4-6
AACR2 Revision 2002
MANUSCRIPTS (INCLUDING MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS)
4.2C1
4.2, EDITION AREA
Contents:
4.2A. Preliminary rule
4.2B. Edition statement
4.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
4.2A. Preliminary rule
4.2A1. Scope. Use this area to give statements relating to versions of manuscript works exist-
ing in two or more versions or stales in single or multiple copies. Examples are different
manuscript drafts of a work and filmscripts existing in various versions.
4.2A2. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before or after prescribed punctuation, see 1 .OC.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede the first statement of responsibility following an edition statement by a diagonal
slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
4.2B. Edition statement
4.2B1. Transcribe a statement relating to a version of a manuscript that is different from other
versions, or that is a named revision, as instructed in i.2B.
Prelim, draft
3rd script
2nd draft continuity
Estimating script
4.2B2. In case of doubt about whether a statement is an edition statement, do not treat it as
such.
4.2B3. Optional addition. If an item lacks an edition statement but is known to contain sig-
nificant changes from other versions, supply a suitable brief statement in the language and
script of the title proper and enclose it in square brackets.
[2nd draft]
[3. Konzept]
[Continui ty ]
[Mar. 1970 draft]
[Rev . screenpl ay ]
4.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
4.2C1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to an edition as instructed in 1.2C and
4. IF.
Continuity / written by Waldemar Young
3rd draft / edited by Paul Watson
AACR2 Revision 2002
4-7
4.3
MANUSCRIPTS (INCLUDING MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS)
4.3. MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
4.3A. This area is not used for manuscripts.
4.4. DATE AREA
Contents:
4.4A. Preliminary rule
4.4B. Date of the manuscript
4.4A. Preliminary rule
4.4A1. Punctuation
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
4.4B. Date of the manuscript
4.4B1. Give the date or inclusive dates of the manuscript or manuscript collection unless it is
already included tn the title (as with letters and legal documents). Give the year or years of
the manuscript(s), and optionally the month and day (in the case of single manuscripts), in
that order. For the dating of a collection, see 1.4F8.
Exil [GMD] / St. -J. Perse. - 1941
Correspondence [GMD] / William Allen. — 1821-1879
Records [gmd] / American Colonization Society. - 1816-1908
Alice's adventures under ground [gmd] : a Christmas gift to
a dear child in memory of a summer day / [Lewis Carroll
(Rev. C.L. Dodgson) ] . - 1864
Sonnet, To Genevra [gmdi / [Lord Byron], — 1813 Dec. 17
4.4B2. If the date of delivery of a speech, sermon, etc., differs from the date of the manu-
script, give the date of delivery in a note unless this date is part of the title information.
[Speech] Glasgow Labour Club [gmd] / James Maxton. — 1928
Jan. 13
Note: Delivered Feb. 8, 1928
4.5. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
Contents:
4.5A. Preliminary rule
4.5B. Extent of item
4.5C. Other physical details
4.5D. Dimensions
4.5A. Preliminary rule
4.5A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
4-8
AACR2 Revision 2002
MANUSCRIPTS (INCLUDING MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS)
4.5B2
Precede other physical details by a colon.
Precede dimensions by a semicolon.
4.5B. Extent of item
4.5B1, Single manuscripts. Give the number of leaves or pages as instructed in 2.5B.
23 leaves
iv, 103 leaves
[63] leaves
[4] p.
[4], 103 p.
leaves 51-71
If the manuscript has been bound, add bound at the end of the statement of extent,
[70] leaves, bound
4, [20] , 30 p . , bound
Add, to the pagination, etc., of ancient, medieval, and Renaissance manuscripts, the num-
ber of columns (if more than one) and the average number of lines to the page.
[208] leaves (41 lines)
[26] leaves (2 columns, 45-47 lines)
Optional addition. If a pagination is given, add the number of leaves.
[ 2 ] p . on 1 leaf
[5] p. on 3 leaves
4.5B2. Collections of manuscripts. If a collection occupies one linear foot or less of shelf
space, give the extent in terms of the number or approximate number of items 2 (the number
of bound and unbound items separately expressed), or the number of containers or volumes.
Optionally, if the number of volumes or containers is given, add the number or approximate
number of items.
123 items
ca. 400 items
6 v.
3 v. (183 items)
If the collection occupies more than one linear foot of shelf space, give the extent in terms
of the number of linear feet occupied. Optionally, add the number or approximate number of
containers or volumes and/or items.
40 ft.
3 ft, (ca. 2250 items)
2. hem here means a separate manuscript. For example, a letter with several leaves and an enclosure is counted as one
item.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update 4-9
4.5B3
MANUSCRIPTS (INCLUDING MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS)
6 ft. (75 v.)
5 f t . (30 items bound, 37 items unbound)
2 ft. (ca. 70 items, 12 bound)
10 ft. (12 boxes)
15 ft. (12 boxes, ca . 1000 items)
4.5B3. If a manuscript consists of leaves or pages of braille or another tactile system, add of
braille, etc., as appropriate (see also 2.5B22).
12 leaves of braille
Optionally, if general material designations are used (see 1.1C1) and the general material
designation indicates the tactile nature of the item, omit the addition.
4.5C. Other physical details
4.5C1. Name the material on which the item being described is written if it is other than
paper.
[1] leaf : parchment
[20] leaves : vellum
4.5C2. If a manuscript is illustrated or if a collection of manuscripts includes illustrated
items, give an illustration statement as instructed in 2.5C.
30 p. : ill.
[3], 20 leaves : vellum, ill., maps
30 p. : col. ill.
6 v. : ill.
3 v. {183 items) : ill. (some col.)
If a manuscript or collection of manuscripts consists of illustrations, follow the instructions
in 8.5C.
4.5D. Dimensions
4.5D1. Single manuscripts. Give the height of an unbound manuscript in centimetres to the
next whole centimetre up. Add the width if it is less than half the height or greater than the
height. If the manuscript is kept folded, add the dimensions when folded, separating the
dimensions by a comma.
6 p. ; 2 4 cm.
[7] p. ; 24 X 30 cm.
12 leaves : ill. ; 20 cm., folded to 10 X 12 cm.
[1] leaf : parchment ; 35 X 66 cm., folded to 10 X 19
cm.
Give the dimensions of a bound volume as instructed in 2.5D.
131 leaves, bound ; 26 cm.
4-10
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
MANUSCRIPTS {INCLUDING MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS)
4.7B1
4.5D2. Collections of manuscripts. If the size of the items, containers, or volumes (depend-
ing on the terms of the first statement of extent) is uniform, give that size as instructed in
4.5D1, or, in the case of containers, give the height, width, and depth.
20 items ; 20 X 30 cm.
6 v. ; 30 cm.
12 boxes ; 27 X 40 X 50 cm.
6 v. ; 24-30 cm.
4.6. SERIES AREA
4.6A. This area is not used for manuscripts,
4.7. NOTE AREA
Contents:
4.7A. Preliminary rule
4.7B. Notes
4.7A, Preliminary rule
4.7A1. Punctuation
Precede each note by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph for each.
Separate introductory wording from the main content of a note by a colon followed but not
preceded by a space.
4.7 A2. In making notes, follow the instructions in 1.7A.
4.7B. Notes
Make notes as set out in the following subrules and in the order given there. However,
give a particular note first when it has been decided that note is of primary importance. For
additional notes on ancient, medieval, and Renaissance manuscripts, see 4.7B23.
4.7B1. Nature, scope, or form. Make notes on the nature of a manuscript or a collection of
manuscripts unless it is apparent from the rest of the description. Use one of the following
terms, as appropriate:
holographys) (for manuscripts handwritten by the person(s)
responsible for the work(s) contained therein)
ms. (for all other handwritten manuscripts)
mss. (for all other collections of handwritten manuscripts)
printout(s)
typescript(s)
Holograph
Ms.
Typescripts
AACR2 Revision 2002
4-11
4.7B1
MANUSCRIPTS (INCLUDING MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS)
If the item is signed, add signed.
Holograph, signed
If the item or collection being described is a copy or consists of copies, add (carbon copy),
(photocopy), or (transcript), or the plural of one of these. If a photocopy is negative, add
negative. Add handwritten, typewritten, or printout to transcript(s).
Holograph (carbon copy)
Ms. (photocopy, negative)
Ms . , signed (photocopy)
Mss. (transcripts, handwritten)
Typescript (photocopy)
If the items in a collection are not all of the same nature, word the qualification to indicate
this.
Mss . (some photocopies)
Mss. (transcripts, handwritten, and photocopies)
Mss . (photocopies, some negative )
If the item is a copy, add the location of the original if this can be readily ascertained.
Ms. (photocopy) of original in the British Library
Humanities and Social Sciences
Holograph, signed (photocopy) , original in possession of
W.S. Merwin
Indicate the scope or form of a manuscript item if it is not apparent from the rest of the
description.
Poem
Journal and account book
Typescript of sound recording
Printout of catalog
In describing a collection of manuscripts, name the types of papers, etc., constituting the
collection and mention any other features that characterize it. If the collection is of personal
papers, give enough data to identify the person, either as a brief initial statement or as part of
the summary of the nature of the collection. If necessary, give the contents {see 4.7B18) as
part of that summary.
Paleontologist and educator. Correspondence, reports,
notes, articles, maps, printed matter, and other papers,
mainly relating to the Carnegie Institution, the National
Academy of Sciences, the National Research Council, and
national parks
Papers covering (in the main) Allen's service as U.S.
senator, 1837-1848, and as governor of Ohio, 1873-1874.
Includes some of his speeches, drafts of his letters, and
letters from various correspondents on political matters in
Ohio
4-12
AACR2 Revision 2002
MANUSCRIPTS (INCLUDING MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS)
4.7B7
Includes records of the Banking Board, 1911-1939, and
those of the Bureau of Insurance, 1897-1943
Writer. Personal papers, letters, etc., drafts of some
poems, including the complete text of the verse drama "The
pierrot of the minute"
4.7B2. Language. Make notes on the language(s) of the item, or on the fact that it is a trans-
lation or adaptation, unless this is apparent from the rest of the description.
In Swedish
Latin with English marginalia
Some items in English, some in French
English with typewritten French translation
4.7B3. Source of title proper. Make notes on the source of the title proper if it is other than
the chief source of information.
Title from cover
Title from: Guide to manuscript collections in the
William L, Clements Library / compiled by H.H. Peckham. 1942
4.7B4, Variations in title. Make notes on titles borne by the item other than the title proper.
Optionally, give a romanization of the title proper.
Also known as: The Thynne papers
4.7B5. Parallel titles and other title information. Give the title in another language and
other title information not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility area if they are
considered to be important.
4.7B6. Statements of responsibility. Make notes on variant names of persons or bodies
named in statements of responsibility if these are considered to be important for identifica-
tion. Give statements of responsibility not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility
area. Make notes on persons or bodies connected with a work or the manuscript and not
already named in the description.
Original, signed by John Hancock
Marginalia by Robert Graves
Collection made by P.M. Townshend
Dictated to Clare Wheeler
4.7B7. Donor, source, etc., and previous owner(s). Make notes on the donor or source of a
manuscript or manuscript collection, and on previous owners if readily ascertainable. Add the
year or years of accession to the name of the donor or source, and add the years of ownership
to the name of a previous owner.
Gift of Worthington C. Ford, 1907
Purchase, 1951-1968
Purchased from the Del Monte collection, 1901
AACR2 Revision 2002
4-13
4.7B8
MANUSCRIPTS (INCLUDING MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS)
Gift of Mr. Wright, 1938-1954
Previously owned by L. McGarry, 1951-1963
4.7B8. Place of writing. Give the name of the place in which a manuscript was written if it
is found in the item and is not given elsewhere in the description. Give the source of the
information.
At end: Long Beach Island
On t.p..* London-Zagreb-Trieste
4.7E9. Published versions. If the work contained in a manuscript or the content of a collec-
tion of manuscripts has been, or is being, published, give the publication details.
Published as: The life of George Romney. London :
T. Payne, 1809
Published in: Poetry : a magazine of verse. Vol. 59
(1942) . p. 295-308
Entire collection, with Jefferson papers from the Library
of Congress and elsewhere, is being published in: The papers
of Thomas Jefferson / edited by J. P. Boyd and Charles
Cullen. 1950-
4.7B10. Physical description. Make notes on important physical details that are not given
elsewhere in the description.
Paper water marked : KS and a crown
Two seals, pendant
Ms. torn in half and rejoined
Lacks top right corner
Some papers stained by water
Red ink on yellow paper
In case 20 X 24 cm.
4.7B11. Accompanying material. Give details of materials accompanying a manuscript or
manuscript collection, especially (for letters) envelopes, enclosures, and endorsements; (for
legal documents) accompanying papers and endorsements; and (for collections) unpublished
guides.
Accompanied by autobiographical sketch (2 p., holograph)
Accompanied by slip containing emendations
In envelope, with enclosure (4 p. on 2 leaves, holograph,
signed)
Endorsement: Thomas Kitchen to Ellen Montgomery Jones
Accompanied by photocopies of documents relating to the
probate of the will
Unpublished guide in the library
Indexed in the library' s catalogue
4-14
AACR2 Revision 2002
MANUSCRIPTS (INCLUDING MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS)
4.7B23
4.7B13. Dissertations. If the item being described is a dissertation, make a note as instructed
in I.7BI3.
Presented as the author's thesis ( Ph . D . ) —University of
Chicago
4.7B14. Access and literary rights. Give, as specifically as possible, all restrictions on
access to a manuscript or collection of manuscripts.
Accessible after 2008
Open to researchers under library restrictions
If the literary rights in a collection have been reserved for a specified period or are dedi-
cated to the public and a document stating this is available, give Information on literary
rights available.
4.7B15. Reference to published descriptions- Make notes on the best or fullest published
descriptions of a manuscript or a collection of manuscripts and on published indexes or
calendars.
Calendar: Spanish manuscripts concerning Peru, 1531-1651,
Washington, D.C. : Library of Congress, 1932
Described in; Virginia Woolf : a list of manuscripts.
London : Spencer, 1986
4.7B17. Summary. Give a brief objective summary of the content of an item unless another
part of the description provides enough information.
4.7B18. Contents. List the contents of an item, either selectively or fully, if it is considered
necessary to show the presence of material not implied by the rest of the description; to stress
items of particular importance; or to list the contents of a collection. When recording titles
formally, take them from the head of the part to which they refer rather than from contents
lists, etc.
Includes petition to the King from the citizens of London,
1783, in scroll form
Also contains two short prose pieces dated 1937
Contains letters to Mrs. Wells and Gabrielle Gissing
4.7B23. Ancient, medieval, and Renaissance manuscripts. In addition to the notes specified
above, give the following notes for ancient, medieval, and Renaissance manuscripts and col-
lections of such manuscripts.
Style of writing. Give the script used in a manuscript or the predominant script in a
collection.
Textura script with marginal corrections in roman script
Illustrative matter. Give ornamentation, rabrication, illumination, etc., and important details
of other illustrative matter.
Rubricated
Headings in red, with sepia drawings
Col . drawing of Jacob' s dream on leaf [23 ] a
AACR2 Revision 2002
4-15
4.8
MANUSCRIPTS (INCLUDING MANUSCRIPT COLLECTIONS)
Collation. Give the number of gatherings with mention of blank, damaged, or missing leaves,
and any earlier foliation.
Signatures (with catchwords at the end of each) : [ 4 ]
leaves (on vellum), [a] 1 '', b i; + ' (1st and last leaves on
vellum), c-f l:; , g L - : + i , h-p 1J , q-'" ? (2nd and 11th leaves on
vellum), r-t 1Li , v* (the last 2 leaves blank)
Other physical details. Give details of owner's annotations, the binding, and any other
important physical details.
Annotated by previous owner, signed M.B.
Bound in calf, gold stamped, with Bellini arms on spine
Opening words. If the manuscript is given a supplied title, quote as many of the opening
words of the main part of the text as will enable the item to be identified.
Tractatus begins (on leaf [17] J ) : Est via que videt 1 " homl
rcta nouissima ...
4.8. STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
4.8A. This area is not used for manuscripts.
4-16
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHAPTER
Music
Contents
5.0 GENERAL RULES
5. OA Scope
5. OB Sources of information
5.0C Punctuation
5.0D Levels of detail in the description
5.0E Language and script of die description
5. OF Inaccuracies
5.0G Accents and other diacritical marks
5.0H Items with several chief sources of information
5.1 TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
5.1A Preliminary rule
5.1AI Punctuation
5. IB Title proper
5.1C General material designation
5.1D Parallel titles
5. IE Other title information
5. IF Statements of responsibility
5.1G Items without a collective title
5.2 EDITION AREA
5.2A Preliminary rule
5.2A1 Punctuation
5.2B Edition statement
5.2C Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
5. 2D Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
5.2E Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
5.3 MUSICAL PRESENTATION STATEMENT AREA
5.4 PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
5.4A Preliminary rule
5.4A1 Punctuation
5.4B General rule
5.4B2 Early printed music
5.4C Place of publication, distribution, etc.
AACR2 Revision 2002
5-1
5.0
MUSIC
5.4D Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
5.4E Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
5.4F Date of publication, distribution, etc.
5.4G Place of printing, name of printer, date of printing
5.5 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
5.5A Preliminary rule
5.5A1 Punctuation
5.5B Extent of item (including specific material designation)
5.5C Illustrative matter
5.5D Dimensions
5.5E Accompanying material
5.6 SERIES AREA
5.6A Preliminary rule
5.6AI Punctuation
5.6B Series statements
5.7 NOTE AREA
5.7A Preliminary rule
5.7A1 Punctuation
5.7B Notes
5.8 STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
5.8A Preliminary rule
5.8AI Punctuation
5.8B Standard number
5.8C Key-title
5.8D Terms of availability
5.8E Qualification
5.9 SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
5. 10 ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
5.1 1 FACSIMILES, PHOTOCOPIES, AND OTHER REPRODUCTIONS
5.0. GENERAL RULES
5.0A. Scope
5.0AI. The rules in this chapter cover the description of published music. They do not cover
manuscript or other unpublished music in detail, though the use of an additional term in the
physical description (see 5.5B) and the use of the specific provisions of chapter 4 will furnish
a sufficiently detailed description for the general library catalogue. For the description of
recorded music, see chapter 6. For microform reproductions of music, see chapter 1 1 ,
5-2
AACR2 Revision 2002
MUSIC
5.0F
5.0B. Sources of information
5.0BI. Chief source of information. If the title page consists of a list of titles including the
title of the item being catalogued, use as the chief source of information whichever of the
"list" title page, the cover, or the caption furnishes the fullest information. In all other cases,
use the title page or title page substitute (see 2.0B1) as the chief source of information.
If information is not available from the chief source, take it from the following sources (in
this order of preference):
caption
cover
colophon
other preliminaries
other sources
5.0B2. Prescribed sources of information. The prescribed source{s) of information for each
area of the description of published music is set out below. Enclose information taken from
outside the prescribed source(s) in square brackets.
AREA
Title and statement of
responsibility
Edition
Musical presentation
Publication, distribution, etc.
Physical description
Series
Note
Standard number and terms
of availability
PRESCRIBED SOURCES OF INFORMATION
Chief source of information
Chief source of information, caption, cover,
colophon, other preliminaries
Chief source of information
Chief source of information, caption, cover,
colophon, other preliminaries, first page of
music
Any source
Series title page, title page, caption, cover,
colophon, other preliminaries
Any source
Any source
5.0C Punctuation
For the punctuation of the description as a whole, see 1.0C.
For the prescribed punctuation of elements, see the following rules.
5.0D. Levels of detail in the description
See i ,0D.
5.0E. Language and script of the description
See 1.0E.
5.0F. Inaccuracies
See 1.0F.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
5-3
5.0G
MUSIC
5.0G. Accents and other diacritical marks
See LOG.
5.0H. Items with several chief sources of information
See 1.0A3.
5.1. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
Contents:
5.1A. Preliminary rule
5. IB. Title proper
5.1C. General material designation
5. ID. Parallel titles
5. IE. Other title information
5. IF. Statements of responsibility
5.1G. Items without a collective title
5.1 A. Preliminary rule
5.1 Al. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see I .OC.
Precede the title of a supplement or section (see 1.1B9) by a full stop.
Enclose the general material designation in square brackets.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede each unit of other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
For the punctuation of this area for items without a collective title, see I.IG.
5.1B. Title proper
5.1B1. Transcribe the title proper as instructed in LIB. If a title consists of the name(s) of
one or more type(s) of composition, or one or more type(s) of composition and one or more
of the following:
medium of performance
key
date of composition
number
treat type of composition, medium of performance, etc., as the title proper.
Rhapsody
Songs & folk music
Violin-Sonaten 1, 2, 3
String quartet 5
Sonate en re majeur, opus 3, pour violon
Scherzo for two pianos, four hands
5-4
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
MUSIC
5.1 CI
Symphony no, 3, A major, opus 56
String quintet no. 1, A major, op. 18
Zwei Praeludien und Fugen fur Orgel, op. posth. 7
Musik ftir Saiteninst rumen te, Schlagzeug, und Celeste
Doua piese pentru orchestra
Prelude and fugue in A minor
Sinfonia I (1970)
VIII. Symphonie c-Moll
In all other cases, if one or more statements of medium of performance, key, date of
composition, and/or number are found in the source of information, treat those elements as
other title information (see 5. IE).
Die Meis ter singer von Number g
Sinfonia mazedonia
Little suite
Easter fresco
Georgia moon
Gigi
3 D.H. Lawrence love poems
Hymne a la j oie
Charles Aznavour present© ses plus grands succes
The vocal score and libretto of The merry widow
The Beatles song book
1952 electronic tape music
In case of doubt, treat statements of medium of performance, key, date of composition, and
number as part of the title proper.
If the title proper is not taken from the chief source of information, give the source of the
title in a note (see 5.7B3).
5.1B2. In a supplied title proper (see 1.IB7), give all of the elements prescribed for uniform
titles for music in the order prescribed in 25.25-25.35.
[Trios, piano, strings, no. 2, op. 66, C minor]
5.1C. Optional addition. General material designation
5.1C1. Give immediately following the title proper the appropriate general material designa-
tion as instructed in l.IC.
Sonata for viola and piano, op. 147 [ghdi
Fugue for 6 cellos on themes by Beethoven [gmd]
Sechs Partiten fiir Flote [gmd]
Sunday morning coming down jgmd]
AACR2 Revision 2002
5-5
5.1C2
MUSIC
5JC2. If an item contains parts belonging to materials falling into two or more categories,
and if none of these is the predominant constituent of the item, give either multimedia or kit
as the designation (see 1.1C1 and 1.I0C1).
5.1 D. Parallel titles
5.1D1. Transcribe parallel titles as instructed in 1.1D.
Gold und Silber [GMD] = L'pr et 1' argent = Gold and
silver
Album for the young -gmd; = Album fur die Jugend
Concerto, D-Dur, fur Horn und Orchester [gmd] = Concerto,
D major, for horn and orchestra = Concerto, re majeur, pour
cor et orchestre
If the chief source includes statements of medium of performance, key, date of composi-
tion, and/or number that are treated as part of the title proper (see 5.1B1) in two or more
languages or scripts, transcribe such information in the order in which it appears in the chief
source of information. Precede each set of parallel statements by an equals sign.
Konzert Mr. 1 fur Klarinette und Orchester, Es-Dur ;gmd) =
E \> -ma j or — mi ^ -ma j eur
Sonate a 3, en mi mineur, pour 2 violons ou hautbois
(flutes) et basse continue ■ gmd; = e-Moll, fur 2 Violinen
oder Oboen (Floten) und Generalbass = in E minor, for 2
violins or oboes (flutes) and thorough-bass
5.1E. Other title information
5.1E1. Transcribe other title information as instructed in LIE.
Angelo mio [gmd; : valse
6 succes d'Elvis Presley igmd] : album : piano, chant et
guitare
Fugue on Hey diddle diddle [gmdi : for SATB unaccompanied
Kleine Meditationen ;gmd] : fur Streichtrio und Harfe =
Short meditations : for string trio and harp
Officium pastorum [gmd] = The shepherds at the manger : an
acting version of a 13th-century liturgical music drama :
for six soloists (three sopranos and three basses, or two
sopranos, one tenor, and three basses) and treble (or
soprano) chorus wi th suggested accompaniment for chamber
organ and chime bells
5.1F. Statements of responsibility
5.1F1. Transcribe statements of responsibility relating to persons or bodies as instructed in
1.1F.
Traces [gmd] : pour violoncelle seul / Jacgues Lenot
Overture from La sultane suite [gmd] / by Francois Couperin
5-6
AACR2 Revision 2002
MUSIC
5.
La vie parisienne jgmdj : operetta in three acts / Jacques
Offenbach ; music adapted and arranged by Ronald Hanmer ;
new book and lyrics by Phil Park
Door number three [gmd] / Steve Goodman, Jimmy Buffett
The liber usualis [gmd] : with introduction and rubrics in
English / edited by the Benedictines of Solesmes
Song to the Virgin Mary ;gmd] : for mixed chorus a capella
or 6 solo voices / by Andrzej Panufnik ; words anonymous
Three songs for America [gmd] : bass voice and instruments
(woodwind quintet and string quintet) / David Amram ; piano
reduction by the composer ; words by John F. Kennedy, Martin
Luther King, and Robert F. Kennedy
5.1F2. Add a word or short phrase to the statement of responsibility if the relationship
between the title and the person{s) or body (bodies) named in the statement is not clear.
A collection of ancient piobaireachd or Highland pipe
music [gmd] / [collected] by Angus Mackay
Der Prozess [gmdi / [Musik von] Gottfried von Einem ; [Text
von] Boris Blacher und Heinz von Cramer
SAG. Items without a collective title
5.1G1. If an item lacks a collective title, transcribe the titles of the individual parts as
instructed in 1.1G.
Four small dances [gmd] ; and, Six Hungarian folksongs /
Bela Bartok ; arranged for junior string orchestra by Gabor
Darvas
Her silver will [gmd] ; Looking back at Sposalizio : medium
voice / Gordon Binkerd ; poems by Emily Dickinson
Neosa [gmd] : march / Phil B. Catelinet. The wonder of
Christmas ; suite / Leslie Condon. I come to thee :
meditation / Stuart Johnson. Rejoicing every day /
selection by Neville McFarlane
5.1G2. Make the relationship between statements of responsibility and the parts of an item
lacking a collective title clear by additions as instructed in 5.1F2.
5.2. EDITION AREA
Contents:
5.2A. Preliminary rule
5.2E. Edition statement
5.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
5.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
5.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
AACR2 Revision 2002
5-
5.2A
MUSIC
5.2A. Preliminary rule
5.2A1. Punctuation
For instructions an the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see l.OC.
Precede this area by a full slop, space, dash, space.
Precede a statement relating to a named revision of an edition by a comma.
Precede die first statement of responsibility following an edition statement by a diagonal
slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
5.2 A2. Manuscript music. For manuscript music existing in different versions, see 4.2.
5.2B, Edition statement
5.2B1. Transcribe a statement relating to an edition of a work that contains differences from
other editions of that work, or to a named reissue of a work, as instructed in 1.2B.
2nd ed.
2" ed. du recueil note
6 . udg .
Urtextausg .
5.2B2. In case of doubt about whether a statement is an edition statement, follow the instruc-
tions in 1.2B3.
5.2B3. Optional addition. If an item lacks an edition statement but is known to contain sig-
nificant changes from other editions, supply a suitable brief statement in the language and
script of the title proper and enclose it in square brackets.
[3rd ed. ]
[Nouv. ed. augm. des Lectures chantees, parue en 1968)
5.2B4. If an edition statement appears in more than one language or script, transcribe the
statement that is in the language or script of the title proper. If this criterion does not apply,
transcribe the statement that appears first. Optionally, transcribe the parallel statements),
each preceded by an equals sign.
5.2B5. If an item lacking a collective title contains one or more works with an associated
edition statement, transcribe such statements following the titles and statements of responsi-
bility to which they relate, separated from them by a full stop.
5.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
5.2C1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more editions, but not to all
editions, of a work as instructed in 1.2C and 5. IF.
Nolo mortem peccatoris LGMD] / Thomas Mo r ley ; edited by
Sylvia Townsend Warner. — Rev. ed. / by John Morehen
Piano concerto, A major, K. 414 [gmd] / Wolfgang Amadeus
Mozart. — Rev. ed. / foreword by Paul Badura-Skoda
5-8
AACR2 Revision 2002
MUSIC
5.3B2
5.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
5.2D1. If an item is a named revision of an edition, transcribe the statement relating to that
revision as instructed in 1. 2D.
Do not record statements relating to an impression or printing that contains no changes
unless the item is considered to be of particular importance to the cataloguing agency.
5.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
5.2E1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more named revisions of an
edition (but not to all such revisions) as instructed in 1.2E and 5. IF,
5.3. Optional area. MUSICAL PRESENTATION STATEMENT AREA
Contents:
5.3A. Preliminary rule
5.3B. Musical presentation statement
5.3A. Preliminary rule
5.3A1. Punctuation
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
5.3B. Musical presentation statement
5.3B1. Transcribe a statement found in the chief source of information indicating the physical
presentation of the music.
Orchester-Partitur
Score and set of parts
Miniature score
Playing score
If the statement appears in two or more languages or scripts, transcribe the one that is in
the language or script of the title proper. If this criterion does not apply, transcribe the one
that appears first.
Optionally, transcribe the parallel statements, each preceded by an equals sign.
Partitura = Partition
Jatszopartitura = Playing score
In case of doubt about whether a statement is a musical presentation statement (as, for
example, when it is associated with a statement of responsibility), do not treat it as one,
. .. ; full score reconstructed by Julian Woodruff from the
manuscript parts
S.3B2. If a musical presentation statement is an inseparable part of another area and is
recorded as such, do not repeat it here.
AACR2 Revision 2002
S-9
5.4
MUSIC
5.4. PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
Contents:
5.4A. Preliminary rule
5.4B. General rule
5.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
5.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
5.4E. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
5.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
SAG. Place of printing, name of printer, date of printing
5.4A. Preliminary rule
S.4A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a second or subsequently named place of publication, distribution, etc., by a
semicolon.
Precede the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., by a colon.
Enclose a supplied statement of function of a publisher, distributor, etc., in square brackets.
Precede the date of publication, distribution, etc., by a comma.
Enclose the details of printing (place, name, date) in parentheses.
Precede the name of a printer by a colon.
Precede the date of printing by a comma.
5.4B. General rule
5.4B1. Record information about the place, name, and date of all types of publishing, distrib-
uting, etc., activities as instructed in 1.4B.
5.4B2. Early printed music. Give the publication, etc., details of items published before
1821 as instructed in 2.16.
5.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
5.4C1. Give the place of publication, distribution, etc., as instructed in 1.4C.
5.4C2. Do not record a place of publication, distribution, etc., for an unpublished item. Do
not record s.l in such a case.
5.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
5.4D1. Give the name of the publisher, etc., and optionally the distributor, as instructed in
1.4D.
London : Faber Music
Leipzig : Breitkopf & Hartel
Mainz ; London : Schott
5.4D2. Do not record the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., for an unpublished item. Do
not record s.n. in such a case.
5-10
AACR2 Revision 2002
MUSSC
5.5A1
5.4D3, Publisher's numbers and plate numbers. Give publisher's numbers and plate num-
bers in the note area (see 5.7B19),
5.4E. Optional addition. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
5.4E1. Add to the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., a statement of function as instructed
in 1.4E.
New York : Warner ; [London] : Blossom [distributor]
5.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
5.4F1. Give the date of publication, distribution, etc., of a published music item as instructed
in 1 .4R If the copyright date is found only on the first page of the music, do not enclose it in
square brackets.
Hew York ; London : Peters, 1975
Leipzig : Peters, cl971
5.4F2. Give the date of a music manuscript as instructed in 4.4B1.
5.4G. Place of printing, name of printer, date of printing
5.4G1. If the name of the publisher is unknown and the place and name of the printer are
found in the item, give that place and name as instructed in 1.4G.
[London? ; s.n.], 1871 (London : Lord's Press)
5.4G2. Optional addition. Give the place, name of printer, and/or date of printing if they are
found in the item and differ from the place, name of publisher, etc., and date of publication,
etc., and are considered important by the cataloguing agency.
Madrid : Real Academia de Bellas Artes de San Fernando,
[1890] (Madrid : Tip. de las Huerfanos)
5.5. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
Contents:
5.5A. Preliminary rule
5.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
5.5C. Illustrative matter
5.5D. Dimensions
5.5E. Accompanying material
5.5A. Preliminary rule
5.5AI. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see I.OC.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede details of illustrations by a colon.
Precede dimensions by a semicolon.
Precede each statement of accompanying material by a plus sign.
Enclose physical details of accompanying material in parentheses.
AACR2 Revision 2002
5-11
5.5B
MUSIC
5.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
5.5B1. Record the number of physical units of an item by giving the number of scores or
parts in arabic numerals and one of the following terms as appropriate:
score
condensed score
close score
miniature score 1
piano [violin, etc. ] conductor part
vocal score
piano score
chorus score
part
1 score
1 vocal score
4 parts
For special types of music, use an appropriate specific term (e.g., choir book, table book).
1 choir book
If none of the terms above is appropriate, use v. of music, p. of music, or leaves of music.
If a general material designation (see 1.JC1) is used, optionally omit of music.
xx p . , 55 p . of mus ic
If the item is a manuscript, precede die term by ms.
1 ms. score
5.5B2. Give the number of scores and/or parts issued by the publisher.
1 score and part
Note: Part printed on p. 5 of the score
If the item consists of different types of score, or a score and parts separately, or different
types of score and parts, give the details of each in the order of the list in 5,5B 1 , separated
from each other by a space, plus sign, space.
Add the pagination or number of volumes as instructed in 2.5B.
1 score (vi, 27 p . )
1 score (2 v . )
2 scores (20 p. each)
1 miniature score (3 v. )
1 score (viii, 278 p.) +24 parts
1 score (23 p.) + 1 piano conductor part (8 p.) + 16
parts
1 score (2 sheets)
1. Use for scores reduced in size and not intended primarily for performance.
5-12
AACR2 Revision 2002
MUSIC
5.5E1
5.5B3. If the item is in braille or another tactile format, add (braille), (press braille), (tactile),
etc., to the appropriate term.
1 score (2 v., braille)
1 v, of music {press braille)
23 leaves of music (braille)
Optionally, if general material designations are used (see 1.1C1) and the general material
designation indicates the tactile nature of the item, omit the addition.
If the item is a thermoform copy, add thermoform to the parenthetic addition, preceded by
a comma.
1 score (30 p., braille, thermoform)
or 1 score (30 p., thermoform)
If there is no parenthetic addition (see option above), add thermoform in parentheses.
If the item is in large print intended for use by the visually impaired, add (large print) to
the appropriate term.
1 vocal score (xvii f 378 p., large print)
Optionally, if a general material designation (see 1.1C1) including large print is used, omit
this addition.
5.5C. Illustrative matter
5.5C1. Give details of illustrative matter as instructed in 2.5C.
1 score (vi, 27 p. ) ; ill .
1 score (23 p.) : port.
1 score (23 p.) : ill. + 16 parts
5.5D. Dimensions
5.5D1. Give the dimensions of the item as instructed in 2.5D. If the item consists of score(s)
and part(s), give the dimensions after all the details of the score(s) and part(s). If the dimen-
sions of the score(s) and part(s) differ, give the dimensions of each after the details to which
they apply.
1 miniature score (34 p.) : ill. ; 18 cm.
1 score (20 p.) +1 part ; 28 cm.
4 parts ; 25-27 cm.
1 score (vi f 63 p.) ; 20 cm. + 16 parts ; 32 cm.
5.5E. Accompanying material
5.5E1. Give the details of accompanying material as instructed in 1.5E.
1 score (32 p.) +5 parts ; 26 cm. + 1 sound tape reel
1 score (vii, 32 p.) ; 28 cm, + 1 sound tape reel (60
min. : analog, lV-z ips, mono. ; 7 in., Vz in, tape)
1 score {30 p.) +4 parts ; 24 cm, + 1 booklet
AACR2 Revision 2002
5-13
5.6
MUSIC
5.6. SERIES AREA
Contents:
5.6A. PreHminary rule
5.6B. Series statements
5.6A. Preliminary rule
5.6A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Enclose each series statement (see 1.6J) in parentheses.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
Precede the ISSN of a series or subseries by a comma.
Precede the numbering within a series or subseries by a semicolon.
Enclose a date following a numeric and/or alphabetic designation in parentheses.
Precede the title of a subseries, or the designation for a subseries, by a full stop.
Precede the title of a subseries following a designation for the subseries by a comma.
5.6B. Series statements
5.6BL Record each series statement as instructed in 1.6.
(Master choruses for Lent and Easter)
(Early English church music ; no, 7)
(Music for today. Series 2 ; no. 8)
(The Salvation Army brass band journal. General series ;
no. 1565-1568)
(Ashdown vocal duets ; no, 384)
(Yesterday's music, ISSN 4344-1277 ; no, 56)
5.7. NOTE AREA
Contents:
5,7A. Preliminary rule
5.7B. Notes
5.7A. Preliminary rule
5.7A1. Punctuation
Precede each note by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph for each.
Separate introductory wording from the main content of a note by a colon followed but not
preceded by a space.
5-14
AACR2 Revision 2002
MUSIC
5.7B1
5.7A2. In making notes, follow the instructions in 1.7A.
5.7B. Notes
Make notes as set out in the following subrules and in the order given there. However,
give a particular note first when it has been decided that note is of primary importance.
5.7B1. Form of composition and medium of performance. If the musical form of a work is
not apparent from the rest of the description, give the form in a word or brief phrase.
Carol
Opera in two acts
Name the medium of performance for which a musical work is intended unless it is named
in the rest of the description in English or in foreign language terms that can be readily
understood. Name voices before instruments. Name the voices and then the instruments in the
order in which they are listed in the item being described. Name a voice or instrument in
English unless there is no satisfactory English equivalent.
If the work is for solo instruments, name them all if no more than eleven would be named.
If the work is for an orchestra, band, etc., do not list the instruments involved. In describing
ensemble vocal music, add to the appropriate term a parenthetical statement of the component
voice parts, using S (soprano), Mz (mezzo-soprano), A (alto), T (tenor), Bar (baritone), and B
(bass). Repeat an abbreviation, if necessary, to indicate the number of parts.
For organ
For unacc. child's voice
For voice and piano
For voice, 2 violins, and violoncello
Arr. for guitar
Electronic music
For alto saxophone and piano
For soprano and electronic tape
Reduction for clarinet and piano
For piano, 4 hands
For soprano and piano
For voice and sitar
For solo voices (SATB) , chorus { SSATB) , and orchestra
For 2 treble recorders, 2 oboes, 2 violins, and basso
continuo
For superius, contratenor, teno.r, and bassus
If the information relating to the medium of performance given in the rest of the descrip-
tion is ambiguous or insufficient, record supplementary information here.
Part for piano only
AACR2 Revision 2002
5-15
5.7B2
MUSIC
Score for violoncello and piano, part for clarinet
(Tide page reads: For violoncello or clarinet or viola, and piano)
5.7B2. Language. Give the language(s) of the textual content of the work unless this is
apparent from the rest of the description. Indicate vocal texts published with part of the
music.
French and English words
Latin words
Russian, German, and English words
Words in Hebrew ( romani zed)
Arbitrary syllables as text
Original text with English translation
Macaronic text (Latin and German)
French words, English translation on p. v-xxii
English words, includes principal melodies
5.7B3. Source of title proper. Make notes on the source of the title proper if it is other than
the chief source of information.
Title from publisher's catalogue
5.7B4. Variations in title. Make notes on titles borne by the item other than the title proper.
Optionally, give a romanization of the title proper.
Title on cover: Love songs of Lennon & McCartney
S.7B5. Paraliel titles and other title information. Give the title in another language and
other title information not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility area if they are
considered to be important.
5.7B6. Statements of responsibility. Make notes on variant names of persons or bodies
named in statements of responsibility if these are considered to be important for identifica-
tion. Give statements of responsibility not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility
area. Make notes on persons or bodies connected with a work, or significant persons or bod-
ies connected with previous editions and not already named in the description.
Arr. by Charles Graveney
Previously attributed to Handel
"Based on themes in the poems of Thomas Hardy"— T. p. verso
Transcriptions of recordings made by Alan Lomax
Libretto by Arrigo Boito, based on Victor Hugo's Angelo
5.7B7. Edition and history. Make notes relating to the edition being described or to the bib-
liographic history of the work.
Reprinted from the 1712 ed.
5-16
AACR2 Revision 2002
MUSIC
5.7B13
Reprint in reduced format of the full score: Berlin :
Harmonie, 1910
Rev. ed. of: Complete organ works. London : Schott, 1958
Facsim. reprint. Originally published: London : I . Walsh,
[ca. 1734]
5.7BS. Notation. Give the notation used in an item if it is not the notation normally found in
that type of item.
Lute tablature and staff notation on opposite pages
Plainsong notation
Modern staff notation
(Use to describe a work that would normally be in plainsong notation )
Tonic sol-fa notation
Graphic notation
Melody in both staff and tonic sol-fa notation
5.7B9. Publication, distribution, etc. Make notes on publication, distribution, etc., detaiis
that are not included in the publication, distribution, etc., area and are considered to be
important.
Distributed by: London ; Peters
5.7B10. Duration of performance and physical description. Give the duration of perfor-
mance if it is stated in the item. Give the duration in English and in abbreviated form.
Duration: 18 min.
Duration: about 1 hr . , l 0 min.
Make notes on important physical details that are not included in the physical description
area.
Each copy signed by the composer and numbered
5.7B11. Accompanying material. Make notes on the location of accompanying material if
appropriate. Give details of accompanying material neither mentioned in the physical descrip-
tion area nor given a separate description (see 1 .5E),
Three photos, of first performance in pocket inside each
cover
5.7B12. Series. Make notes on series data that cannot be given in the series area.
Also issued without series statement
5.7B13. Dissertations. If the item being described is a dissertation, make a note as instructed
in 1.7B13.
Thesis (M. Mus .) —University of Western Ontario, 1972
Thesis (M.M.A. ) — McGill University, 1971
AACR2 Revision 2002
5-17
5.7B14
MUSIC
5.7B14. Audience. Make a brief note of the intended audience for, or intellectual level of, an
item if this information is stated in the item.
For 7-9 year olds
Intended audience : First- year undergraduate students
5.7B16. Other formats. Give the details of other formats in which the content of the item
has been issued.
Issued also on microfilm
5.7B18. Contents. List the separately titled works contained in an item. Add to the titles opus
numbers (if they are necessary to identify the works named) and statements of responsibility
not already included in the title and statement of responsibility area. If the works in a collec-
tion are all in the same musical form and that form is named in the title proper of the item,
do not repeat the musical form in the titles in the contents note.
Contents: Sailing homeward — People call me the Pied Piper
— The piper ' s theme
Contents: The matron cat's song / words by Ruth Fitter —
My cat Jeffry / words by Christopher Smart — The song of the
Jellicles / words by T.S. Eliot
Contents: Komm Heiliger Geist, Herre Gott = Come, 0 Holy
Ghost, God and Lord / by Lucas Osiander ; text by Lucas
Osiander — Psalm 121 / by Heinrich Schritz ; freely
translated by Cornelius Becker
Contents: Sonata in D ma j or , op . 6 — Three marches , op , 45
— Variations in C major, op. 23 — Variations in C major, op.
34
Contents: v, 1. Ho. 1 (op. 1, no. lb) E minor. Wo. 2 (op.
1, no. 2) G minor. No. 3 (op. 1, no. 5) G major. No. 4 (op.
1 , no . 7 ) c ma j or — v. 2. No . 5 (op. 1, no. 11) F ma j or . No .
6 (op . 1, no. 9) B minor. No . 7 (op . 1, no. 4) A minor. No.
8, A minor
Make notes on additional or partial contents when appropriate.
Includes a song by George Harrison
5.7B19. Publishers' numbers and plate numbers. Give publishers' numbers and/or plate
numbers that appear on the item. Precede the numbers by Publisher's no.: or PL no.:, as
appropriate. If a number is preceded by an abbreviation, word, or phrase designating a pub-
lisher, give that abbreviation, word, or phrase as part of the number.
In describing an item in several volumes, give inclusive numbers if the numbering is con-
secutive; otherwise give individual numbers or, if there are more than three of these, the first
number and the last number separated by a diagonal slash. Give letters preceding a number
before the first number, letters following a number after the last number, but letters preceding
and following numbers in conjunction with each number,
PI. no. : S. SB. 4081
Publisher's no.: 6139
PI. no. : B. s H . 8797-8806
5-18
AACR2 Revision 2002
MUSIC
5.8A1
PI. no.: B. M. Co. 10162, 10261, 10311
Publisher's no.: 6201/9935
{The complete set of numbers is 6201, 6654, 7006, 7212, 7635, 7788, 8847, 9158,
9664, 9935)
Pi. no. : 9674-9676 H.L.
PI. no.: R. 10150E.-R. 10155E.
In describing a reprint, give the piate or publisher's number(s) together with the statement
that the item is a reprint (see 5.7B7).
Reissued from Brandus plates. PI. no.: B. et Cie 4520
5.7B20. Copy being described, library's holdings, and restrictions on use. Make these
notes as instructed in 1.7B20.
Library has 6 parts
Library's copy signed by the composer
Library has 3 copies of each score, 2 copies of each part
5.7B2L "With" notes. If the title and statement of responsibility area contains a title that
applies to only a part of an item lacking a collective title and, therefore, more than one entry
is made, make a note beginning With: and listing the other separately titled works in the item
in the order in which they appear there.
With: Die Mittagshexe ; and, Das goldene Spinnrad /
Antonin Dvorak
5.8. STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
Contents:
5.8A. Preliminary rule
5.8B. Standard number
5.8C. Key-title
5.8D. Terms of availability
5.8E. Qualification
5.SA. Preliminary rule
5.8A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede each repetition of this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a key-title by an equals sign.
Precede terms of availability by a colon.
Enclose a qualification to the standard number or terms of availability in parentheses.
AACR2 Revision 2002
5-19
5,8B
MUSIC
5.8B. Standard number
5.8B1. Give the Internationai Standard Book Number (ISBN) or Internationa! Standard Serial
Number (ISSN) assigned to an item as instructed in 1.8B.
I SEN 0-19-341508-9
5.8B2. Give any other number in a note {see 5.7B19).
5.8C. Key-title
5.8C1. Give the key-title of a resource as instructed in 1.8C.
5.8D. Optional addition. Terms of availability
5.8D1. Give the terms on which the item is available as instructed in 1.8D.
I SEN 0-333-17848-3 : £4.50
Free to students arid members of the association
5.8E. Qualification
5.8E1. Add qualifications to the standard number and/or terms of availability as instructed in
1.8E and 2.8D.
ISBN 0-573-08042-9 (pbk.)
5.9. SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
5.9A. Describe supplementary items as instructed in 1.9.
5.10. ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
5.10A. Describe items made up of several types of material as instructed in 1.10.
5.11. FACSIMILES, PHOTOCOPIES, AND OTHER REPRODUCTIONS
5.11A. Describe facsimiles, photocopies, and other reproductions as instructed in 1.11.
5-20
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHAPTER
6
Sound Recordings
Contents
6.0 GENERAL RULES
6.0A Scope
6.0B Sources of information
6.0C Punctuation
6,0D Levels of detail in the description
6.0E Language and script of ihe description
6. OF Inaccuracies
6.0G Accents and other diacritical marks
6.0H Items with several chief sources of information
6. 1 TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
6.1A Preliminary rule
6.1 Al Punctuation
6. IB Title proper
6.1C Genera] material designation
6.1D Parallel titles
6. IE Other title information
6. IF Statements of responsibility
6.1G Items without a collective title
6.2 EDITION AREA
6.2A Preliminary rule
6.2A1 Punctuation
6.2B Edition statement
6.2C Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
6. 2D Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
6.2E Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
6.3 MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
6.4 PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
6.4A Preliminary rule
6.4 A I Punctuation
6.4B General rule
6.4C Place of publication, distribution, etc.
6.4D Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
AACR2 Revision 2002
6-1
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.4E Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
6.4F Date of publication, distribution, etc,
6.4G Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
6.5 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
6.5A Preliminary rule
6.5 A 1 Punctuation
6.5B Extent of item (including specific materia! designation)
6.5C Other physical details
6.5C2 Type of recording
6.5C3 Playing speed
6.5C4 Groove characteristic
6.5C5 Track configuration
6.5C6 Number of tracks
6.5C7 Number of sound channels
6.5C8 Recording and reproduction characteristics
6.5D Dimensions
6.5D2 Sound discs
6.5D3 Sound track films
6.5D4 Sound cartridges
6.5D5 Sound cassettes
6.5D6 Sound tape reels
6.5D7 Rolls
6.5E Accompanying material
6.6 SERIES AREA
6.6A Preliminary rule
6.6A1 Punctuation
6.6B Series statements
6.7 NOTE AREA
6.7A Preliminary rule
6.7A1 Punctuation
6.7B Notes
6.8 STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
6.8A Preliminary rule
6.8A1 Punctuation
6.8B Standard number
6.8C Key-title
6.8D Terms of availability
6.8E Qualification
6.9 SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
6.10 ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
6-2
AACR2 Revision 2002
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.0B2
6.0. GENERAL RULES
6.0A. Scope
6.0A1. The rules in this chapter cover the description of sound recordings in all media, i.e.,
discs, tapes (open reel-to-ree], cartridges, cassettes), piano rolls (and other rolls), and sound
recordings on film (other than those intended to accompany visual images, for which see
chapter 7). They do not cover specifically recordings in other forms (e.g., wires, cylinders) or
in various experimental media, though the use of appropriate specifications in the physical
description (see 6.5) and special notes will furnish a sufficiently detailed description for such
items.
6.0B. Sources of information
6.0B1. Chief source of information. The chief source of information for each major type of
sound recording is set out here.
TYPE CHIEF SOURCE
Disc Disc and label 1
Tape (open reel-to-reel) Reel and label
Tape cassette Cassette and label
Tape cartridge Cartridge and label
Roll Label
Sound recording on film Container and label
If there are two or more chief sources of information as defined above (e.g., two labels on
a disc), treat these as a single chief source.
Treat accompanying textual material or a container as the chief source of information if it
furnishes a collective title and the parts themselves and their labels do not. In this case, make
a note (see 6.7B3) indicating the source of information.
If information is not available from the chief source, take it from the following sources (in
this order of preference):
accompanying textual material
container (e.g., sleeve, box)
other sources
Prefer textual data to sound data. For example, if a sound disc has a label and also infor-
mation presented in sound form on the disc, prefer the label information.
6.0B2. Prescribed sources of information. The prescribed source(s) of information for each
area of the description of sound recordings is set out below. Enclose information taken from
outside the prescribed source(s) in square brackets.
1. Label means any permanently affixed paper, plastic, etc., label as opposed to the container itself, which may have data
embossed or printed on it.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
6-3
6.0C
SOUND RECORDINGS
PRESCRIBED SOURCES OF INFORMATION
Chief source of information
Chief source of information, accompanying
textual material, container
Chief source of information, accompanying
textual material, container
Any source
Chief source of information, accompanying
textual material, container
Any source
Any source
AREA
Title and statement of
responsibility
Edition
PubHcation, distribution, etc.
Physical description
Series
Note
Standard number and terms
of availability
6.6C. Punctuation
For the punctuation of the description as a whole, see 1 .OC.
For the prescribed punctuation of elements, see the following rules.
6.0D. Levels of detail in the description
See I.OD.
6.0E. Language and script of the description
See 1.0E.
6.0F. Inaccuracies
See l.OF.
6.0G. Accents and other diacritical marks
See LOG.
6.0H. Items with several chief sources of information
See 1.0A3.
6.1. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
Contents:
6.1 A.
Preliminary rule
6.1B.
Title proper
6.1C.
General material designation
6.1D.
Parallel titles
6. IE.
Other title information
6. IF.
Statements of responsibility
6.IG.
Items without a collective title
6-4
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.1C1
6.1A. Preliminary rule
6.1 Al. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see l.OC.
Precede the title of a supplement or section (see 1.1B9) by a full stop.
Enclose the general material designation in square brackets.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede each unit of other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
For the punctuation of this area for items without a collective title, see L1G.
6.1B. Title proper
6.1B1. Transcribe the title proper as instructed in LIB. For data to be included in titles
proper for musical items, see 5. IB.
Music from Fiddler on the roof
Greatest hits
The little match girl and other tales
Living and dying in 3/4 time
Symphony no. 3, A major, op. 56
The very best of Melanie
Braverman's condensed cream of Beatles
Antoine de Saint-Exupery
The Beatles
Institute on International Standards as Related to
Universal Bibliographic Control
[Address to high school students, discussing good writing]
[Recording of W.B. Yeats reading The lake isle of
Innisf ree]
[Sonatas, piano, no. 17, op. 31, no. 2, D minor]
If the title proper is not taken from the chief source of information or if it is taken from a
container that is a unifying element, give the source of the title in a note (see 6.7B3).
6.1C. Optional addition. General material designation
6.1C1. Give immediately following the title proper the appropriate general material designa-
tion as instructed in 1.1C.
Faustus [gmd]
Music for flute and tape [GMD]
Elite Hotel -gmdi
Woody Guthrie [gmd]
AACR2 Revision 2002
6-5
6.1C2
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.1C2. If an item contains parts belonging to materials falling into two or more categories,
and if none of these is the predominant constituent of the item, give either multimedia or kit
as the designation (see 1.1C1 and l.lOCi).
6.1D. Parallel titles
6.1D1. Transcribe parallel titles as instructed in l.ID and 5. ID.
Quattro concerti per l'organo ed altri stromenti igmd] =
Vier Orgelkonzerte = Four organ concertos = Quatre
concertos pour orgue
PycCKne Hapozmue necHH [gmd] = Russian folk songs
6.1E. Other title information
6.1E1. Transcribe other title information as instructed in t . IE.
Hello Dolly! [gmd] : original motion picture soundtrack
Valedictory [gmd] : for computer and soprano
6.1F. Statements of responsibility
6.1F1. Transcribe statements of responsibility relating to those persons or bodies credited
with a major role in creating the intellectual content of the sound recording (e.g., as writers of
spoken words, composers of performed music, collectors of field material, producers having
artistic and/or intellectual responsibility) as instructed in 1.1F. If the participation of the per-
son{s) or body (bodies) named in a statement found in the chief source of information goes
beyond that of performance, execution, or interpretation of a work (as is commonly the case
with "popular," rock, and jazz music), give such a statement as a statement of responsibility.
If, however, the participation is confined to performance, execution, or interpretation (as is
commonly the case with "serious" or classical music and recorded speech), give the statement
in the note area (see 6.7B6).
Prometheus bound [gmd J : a play for radio / Robert Lowell
Famous overtures [gmd] / Offenbach
Melville [gmd] / written and narrated by Thomas S. Klise
Texas country [gmd] / Willie Nelson ... [et al.]
Bury my heart at Wounded Knee [GMD) / by Dee Brown
Note: "Dramatically presented by Harry Madden and Manu
Tupon"— Accompanying leaflet
Subterranean homesick blues [gmd] / Bob Dylan
Piano rags [gmd] / Scott Joplin
Note: Piano: Joshua Rifkin
The Afro-American's quest for education [gmd] : a Black
odyssey / produced by Peps i -Cola Co. ; script writer, Norman
McRae
Natty dread ;gmdi / Bob Marley and the Wailers
Beach Boys greatest hits [gmd] / Beach Boys
6-6
AACR2 Revision 2002
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.1G4
Thriller igmd) / produced by Quincy Jones ; co-produced by
Michael Jackson
6.1F2. If the members of a group, ensemble, company, etc., are named in the chief source of
information as well as the name of the group, etc., give them in the note area (see 6.7B6) if
they are considered important. Otherwise omit them.
Quartet in F major ;gmD) / Ravel
Note: Budapest String Quartet (J. Roisman and A. Schneider,
violins; B. Kroyt, viola; M. Schneider, cello)
6.1F3. Add a word or short phrase to the statement of responsibility if the relationship
between the title and the person(s) or body (bodies) named in the statement is not clear.
Born to run [gmd] / [written and performed by] Bruce
Springsteen
6.1G. Items without a collective title
6.1G1. If a sound recording lacks a collective title, either describe the item as a unit (see
6.1G2 and 6.1G3) or make a separate description for each separately titled part (see 6.1G4).
6.1G2. In describing as a unit a sound recording lacking a collective title, transcribe the titles
of the individual works as instructed in 1.IG3.
La mer [gmdj ; Khamma ; Rhapsody for clarinet and orchestra
/ Claude Debussy
How come? [gmd] ; Tell everyone ; Done this one before /
Ronnie Lane ; accompanied by the band Slim Chance
Prelude, the afternoon of a faun [gmd] / Claude Debussy.
Peer Gynt (Suite) no. 1-2 / Edvard Grieg. Till
Eulenspiegels lustige Streiche / Richard Strauss
Dreamboat [gmd] / Linzer ; [performed by] Limmie & Family
Cookin' . Made in heaven / Levine, Russell Brown ;
[performed by] Limmie & Family Cookin'
Label side A: Dreamboat
(Linzer)
Limmie & Family Cookin'
Label side B: Made in heaven
(Levine-Russell Brown)
Limmie & Family Cookin*
6.1G3. Make the relationship between statements of responsibility and the parts of an item
lacking a collective title and described as a unit clear by additions as instructed in 6.IF3.
6.1G4. Optionally, make a separate description for each separately titled work on a sound
recording. For the statement of the extent in each of these descriptions, see 6.5B3. Link the
separate descriptions with notes (see 6.7B21). For instructions on sources of information, see
6.0B,
AACR2 Revision 2002
6-7
6.2
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.2. EDITION AREA
Contents:
6.2A. Preliminary rule
6.2B. Edition statement
6.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
6.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
6.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
6.2A. Preliminary rule
6.2A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a statement relating to a named revision of an edition by a comma.
Precede the first statement of responsibility following an edition statement by a diagonal
slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
6.2B. Edition statement
6.2B1. Transcribe a statement relating to an edition of a sound recording that contains differ-
ences from other editions, or to a named reissue of a recording, as instructed in 1.2B.
6.2B2. In case of doubt about whether a statement is an edition statement, follow the instruc-
tions in 1.2B3.
Viens vers le Pere [G'ad] / Office catechistique provincial
dij Quebec. — Ed. speciale
6.2B3. Optional addition. If an item lacks an edition statement but is known to contain sig-
nificant changes from other editions, supply a suitable brief statement in the language and
script of the title proper and enclose it in square brackets.
6.2B4. If an edition statement appears in more than one language or script, transcribe the
statement that is in the language or script of the title proper. If this criterion does not apply,
transcribe the statement that appears first. Optionally, transcribe the parallel statement(s),
each preceded by an equals sign.
6.2B5. If an item lacking a collective title and described as a unit contains one or more works
with an associated edition statement, transcribe such statements following the titles and state-
ments of responsibility to which they relate, separated from them by a full stop.
6.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
6.2C1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more editions, but not to all
editions, of a sound recording as instructed in 1.2C and 6.1F.
6.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
6.2D1. If an item is a named revision of an edition, transcribe the statement relating to that
revision as instructed in 1. 2D.
Do not record statements relating to a reissue that contains no changes unless the item is
considered to be of particular importance to the cataloguing agency.
6-8
AACR2 Revision 2002
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.4C2
6.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
6.2EL Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more named revisions of an
edition (but not to all such revisions) as instructed in 1.2E and 6. IF.
6.3. MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
6.3A. This area is not used for sound recordings,
6.4. PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
Contents:
6.4A. Preliminary rule
6.4B. General rule
6.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
6.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
6,4E. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
6.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
6.4G. Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
6.4A. Preliminary rule
6.4A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 .OC.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a second or subsequently named place of publication, distribution, etc., by a
semicolon.
Precede the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., by a colon.
Enclose a supplied statement of function of a publisher, distributor, etc., in square brackets.
Precede the date of publication, distribution, etc., by a comma.
Enclose the details of manufacture (place, name, date) in parentheses.
Precede the name of a manufacturer by a colon.
Precede the date of manufacture by a comma.
6.4B. General rule
6.4B1, Record information about the place, name, and date of all types of publishing, distrib-
uting, etc., activities as instructed in 1.4B.
6.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
6.4C1. Give the place of publication, distribution, etc., of a published sound recording as
instructed in 1.4C.
6.4C2. Do not record a place of publication, distribution, etc., for a nonprocessed sound
recording. 2 Do not record s.L in such a case.
2, A nonprocessed sound recording is a noncommercial recording thai generally exists in a unique copy.
AACR2 Revision 2002
6-9
6.4D
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
6.4D1. Give the name of the publisher, etc., and optionally the distributor, as instructed in
1.4D.
[London] : Warner
New York : RCA Victor
London : Gandaif Records : Distributed by Middle Earth Co.
6.4D2. If a sound recording bears both the name of the publishing company and the name of
a subdivision of that company or a trade name or brand name used by that company, give the
name of the subdivision or the trade name or brand name as the name of the publisher.
[London] : Ace of Diamonds
(Source of information reads: Decxa Record Company. Ace of Diamonds)
6.4D3. If, however, a trade name appears to be the name of a series rather than of a publish-
ing subdivision, give it as a series title (see 6.6). In case of doubt, treat the name as a series
title.
London : Walt Disney Productions ... . — (Disney
storyteller)
{Source of information reads: Disney Storyteller. Walt Disney Productions)
6.4D4. Do not give the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., for a nonprocessed sound
recording. Do not record s.n. in such a case.
6.4E. Optional addition. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc,
6.4E1. Add to the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., a statement of function as instructed
in 1.4E.
New York : Sunflower ; [London] : Virgin Records
[distributor]
6.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
6.4F1. Give the date of publication, distribution, etc., of a published sound recording as
instructed in 1 .4F,
[Los Angeles] : CREDR Corp., cl976
Chicago : Mercury, 1973
New York : Polydor, pl979
6.4F2. If the date of recording appears on a published sound recording, give it in a note (see
6.7B7).
[New York] : Music Guild, 1971
Note: Recorded in 1961
6.4F3. Give the date of recording of a nonprocessed sound recording.
6-10
AACR2 Revision 2002
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.5B1
6.4G. Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
6.4G1. If the name of the publisher is unknown and the place and name of the manufacturer
are found in the item, give that place and name as instructed in 1.4G.
[S.l. : s.n.], 1970 (London : High Fidelity Sound Studios)
6.4G2. Optional addition. Give the place, name of manufacturer, and/or date of manufacture
if they are found in the item and differ from the place, name of publisher, etc., and date of
publication, etc., and are considered important by the cataloguing agency.
6.5. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
Contents:
6.5A. Preliminary rule
6.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
6.5C. Other physical details
6.5D. Dimensions
6.5E. Accompanying material
6.5A. Preliminary rule
6.5A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede other physical details by a colon.
Precede dimensions by a semicolon.
Precede each statement of accompanying material by a plus sign.
Enclose physical details of accompanying material in parentheses.
6.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
6.5B1. Record the number of physical units of a sound recording by giving the number of
parts in arabic numerals and one of the following terms as appropriate'.
sound cartridge
sound cassette
sound disc
sound tape reel
sound track film
1 sound cartridge
2 sound cassettes
Add reel, cassette, etc., as appropriate, to sound track film.
1 sound track film reel
Use [name of instrument] roll, as appropriate, for rolls.
2 piano rolls
If none of these terms is appropriate, give the specific name of the item as concisely as
possible.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
6-11
6.5B2
SOUND RECORDINGS
Optionally, use a term in common usage to record the specific format of the physical
carrier.
1 DVD-audio
Optionally, if general material designations are used (see 1.1 CI), omit sound from the spe-
cific material designation unless it is needed to make the designation understandable (as with
sound track film).
6.5B2. Give the playing time of a sound recording as instructed in I.5B4.
1 sound disc (50 min . )
1 sound tape reel (ca. 90 min.)
3 sound cassettes (40 min. each)
6.5B3. If the description is of a separately titled part of a sound recording lacking a collective
title (see 6.1G4), express the fractional extent in the form on side 3 of 2 sound discs, on reel
3 of 4 sound tape reels, etc. (if the parts are numbered or lettered in a single sequence) or on
1 side of 2 sound discs, on J reel of 3 sound tape reels, etc. (if there is no sequential number-
ing). Add the duration of the part to such a statement.
on 1 side of 1 sound disc (13 min . )
on cassettes 3-4 of 4 sound cassettes (67 min.)
on 1 side of 2 sound discs (ca. 25 min.)
6.5C. Other physical details
6.5C1. Give the following details, as appropriate, in the order set out here:
type of recording
playing speed
groove characteristic (analog discs)
track configuration (sound track films)
number of tracks (tapes)
number of sound channels
recording and reproduction characteristics
6.5C2. Type of recording. Give, for a disc or tape, the type of recording (i.e., the way in
which the sound is encoded on the item).
1 sound disc (45 min.) : analog
1 sound disc (56 min.) : digital
1 sound cassette (90 min . ) : analog
1 sound cassette (60 min.) : digital
Give, for a sound track film, the type of recording (e.g., optical, magnetic).
1 sound track film reel (10 min.) : magnetic
6.5C3. Playing speed. Give the playing speed of an analog disc in revolutions per minute
(rpm).
1 sound disc (45 min.) : analog, 33 L /a rpm
Give the playing speed of a digital disc in metres per second (m, per sec).
Give the playing speed of an analog tape in inches per second (ips).
1 sound tape reel (16 min.) : analog, 7Vz ips
6-12 AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.5D2
1 sound cassette (120 min.) : analog, lVi& ips
Give the playing speed of a sound track film in frames per second (fps).
1 sound track film reel {10 min.) : magnetic, 24 fps
Do not give the playing speed if it is standard for the type of item (e.g., 1% inches per
second for an analog tape cassette; 1,4 metres per second for a digital disc).
6.5C4. Groove characteristic. Give the groove characteristic of an analog disc if it is not
standard for the type of disc.
1 sound disc (7 min.) : analog, 78 rpm, microgroove
6.5C5. Track configuration. For sound track films, give the track configuration (e.g., centre
track, edge track).
1 sound track film reel (10 min.) : magnetic, 25 fps,
centre track
6.5C6. Number of tracks. For tape cartridges, cassettes, and reels, give the number of tracks,
unless the number of tracks is standard for the item (e.g., the standard number of tracks for a
cartridge is 8 and for an analog cassette 4).
6.5C7. Number of sound channels. Give the number of sound channels, if the information is
readily available, using one or more of the following terras as appropriate;
mono,
stereo,
quad.
1 sound disc (56 min.) : digital, stereo.
1 sound tape reel (ca. 60 min.) : analog, 7 V? ips, 2
track, mono.
2 sound discs (66 min.) : analog, 33 '/* rpm, mono . , stereo .
6.5C8. Optional addition. Recording and reproduction characteristics. Give the recording
and reproduction characteristics (e.g., Dolby processed, NAB standard).
1 sound cassette (60 min.) : analog, stereo., Dolby
processed
6.5D. Dimensions
6.5D1. Give the dimensions of a sound recording as set out in the following rules.
If the sound recordings in a multipart item differ in size, give the smallest or smaller and
the largest or larger size, separated by a hyphen.
6.5D2. Sound discs. Give the diameter of a disc in inches.
1 sound disc (20 min.) : analog, 33 L /a rpm, stereo. ; 12
in .
1 sound disc (56 min.) : digital, stereo, ; 4 3 A in.
5 sound discs : analog, 33V^ rpm, stereo. ; 10-12 in.
AACR2 Revision 2002
6-13
6.5D3
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.5D3. Sound track films. Give the gauge (width) of a film in millimetres.
1 sound track film reel (10 min.) : magnetic, 25 fps,
centre track ; 16 mm .
6.5D4. Sound cartridges* Give the dimensions of a cartridge in inches if other than the stan-
dard dimensions {5Va X Vk in.). Give the width of the tape in fractions of an inch if other
than the standard width CA in.).
6.5D5. Sound cassettes. Give the dimensions of a cassette if other than the standard dimen-
sions (e.g., the standard dimensions of an analog cassette are 3% X 2V2 in.). Give the width
of a tape if other than the standard width (e.g., the standard width of an analog tape is '/s in.).
1 sound cassette (85 min.) : analog, mono. ; iVi X 3V2
in , , '/■; in . tape
6.5D6. Sound tape reels. Give the diameter of a reel in inches. Give the width of a tape in
fractions of an inch if other than the standard width ( l A in.).
1 sound tape reel (60 min.) : analog, l l A ips , 2 tracks,
mono. ; 7 in., l A- in. tape
3 sound tape reels (ca. 60 min. each) : analog, IV2 ips, 4
tracks , s tereo . ; 5-7 in . , '/.- in . tape
6.5D7. Rolls. Do not give any dimensions.
6.5E. Accompanying material
6.SE1. Give the details of accompanying material as instructed in 1.5E.
1 sound disc (50 min.) : analog, 33 : /j rpm, stereo. ; 12
in . + 1 pamphlet (11 p. : col. ill. ,- 32 cm . )
6.6. SERIES AREA
Contents:
6.6A. Preliminary rule
6.6B. Series statements
6.6A. Preliminary rule
6.6A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 .OC.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Enclose each series statement (see 1.6J) in parentheses.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
Precede the ISSN of a series or subseiies by a comma.
Precede the numbering within a series or subseries by a semicolon.
Enclose a date following a numeric and/or alphabetic designation in parentheses.
6-14
AACR2 Revision 2002
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.7B1
Precede the title of a subseries, or the designation for a subseries, by a full stop.
Precede the title of a subseries following a designation for the subseries by a comma,
6.6B. Series statements
6.6B1. Record each series statement as instructed in 1.6.
(Historic instruments at the Victoria and Albert
Museum ; 2)
(Standard radio super sound effects. Trains)
(Audio-cassette library for professional librarians ;
L-510)
( [ Developmen t digest. Premi er series ] )
(Disney storyteller)
(Sounds of the eighties, ISSH 7981-5137 ; no. 54)
6.7. NOTE AREA
Contents:
6.7A. Preliminary rule
6.7B. Notes
6.7A. Preliminary rule
6.7A1. Punctuation
Precede each note by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph for each.
Separate introductory wording from the main content of a note by a colon followed but not
preceded by a space.
6.7 A2. In making notes, follow the instructions in 1.7A.
6.7B. Notes
Make notes as set out in the following subrules and in the order given there. However,
give a particular note first when it has been decided that note is of primary importance.
6.7B1. Nature or artistic form and medium of performance. Make notes on the form of a
literary work or the type of musical or other work unless it is apparent from the rest of the
description.
Play for child actors
Opera in two acts
Field recording of birdsong
Name the medium of performance when necessary, as instructed in 5.7B1.
Singer, bass, 2 electric guitars, drums
AACR2 Revision 2002
6-15
6.7B2
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.7B2. Language. Give the language(s) of the spoken or sung content of a recording unless
this is apparent from the rest of the description.
Sung in French
In French, introduced in English
6.7B3. Source of title proper. Make notes on the source of the title proper if it is other than
the chief source of information or if it is a container or accompanying textual material (see
6.0B1).
Title from container
Title from accompanying typewritten notes (4 p.)
6.7B4. Variations in title. Make notes on titles borne by the item other than the title proper.
Optionally, give a romanization of the title proper.
Title on container: The four seasons
6.7B5. Parallel titles and other title information. Give the title in another language and
other title information not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility area if they are
considered to be important.
Subtitle: Songs of redemption
6.7B6. Statements of responsibility. Make notes on variant names of persons or bodies
named in statements of responsibility if these are considered to be important for identifica-
tion. Give the names of performers and the medium in which they perform if they have not
been named in the statements of responsibility and if they are judged necessary. Make notes
relating to any other persons or bodies connected with a work that are not named in the state-
ments of responsibility.
Based on music by Franz Schubert
Genevieve Warner, Lois Hunt, Genevieve Rowe, sopranos;
Elizabeth Brown, Virginia Paris, contraltos; Frank Rogier,
baritone; Columbia Chamber Orchestra, Leon Engel, conductor
Backing by Coral Reefer Band
Recordings by Willie Nelson (side 1), Bob Wills and His
Texas Playboys (side 2), Asleep at the Wheel (side 3), and
Freddy Fender (side 4}
Piano: Joshua Rifkin
Incorporate the names of performers into the contents note if appropriate (see 6.7B18).
6.7B7. Edition and history. Make notes relating to the edition being described, to the edition
of the work performed, or to the history of the recording.
Reissue of: Caedmon TC 1125 (1952)
Ed. recorded: New York : Farrar, 1937
Recorded in Vienna in 1961, previously released as
Westminster WST 17035
6-16
AACR2 Revision 2002
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.7B10
"The twenty-four songs on these two discs are drawn from
sessions that took place between June and October 1967 in
the basement of Big Pink, West Saugherties, Hew York"
—Container notes
An abridgement of : Bury my heart at Wounded Knee / by Dee
Brown . Text originally published : New York : Holt, Rinehart
& Winston, 1971
For a nonprocessed sound recording, give the available details of the event.
Recording of speech given at the University of Kentucky
Academic Library Institute, Lexington, Ky., May 24, 1984
6.7B9. Publication, distribution, etc. Make notes on publication, distribution, etc., details
that are not included in the publication, distribution, etc., area and are considered to be
important.
Distributed in the U.K. by: Hobbit s Son
6.7B10. Physical description. Make notes on important physical details that are not included
in the physical description area, especially if these affect the use of the item. Do not give any
physical details that are standard to the item being described (e.g., assume that all analog
discs are electrically recorded, laterally cut, and designed for playing from the outside
inward).
Discs
In 2 containers
Acous tic recording
Impressed on rectangular surface 20 X 20 cm.
Vertically cut from inside outward
Compact disc
Analog recording
(For a digital disc made from an analog original)
Digital recording
(For an analog disc made from a digital original)
Rolls
For 65-note player piano
Tape
Paper tape
Recording made with stacked heads
Recorded on both sides
Digital recording
(For an analog tape made from a digital original)
Give the duration of each part contained in an item without a collective title and described
as a unit {see 6.1G2 and 6.1G3; see also 6.7B18).
Durations: 17 min. ; 23 min. ; 9 min.
AACR2 Revision 2002
6-/7
6.7B11
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.7B11. Accompanying material. Make notes on the location of accompanying material if
appropriate. Give details of accompanying material neither mentioned in the physical descrip-
tion area nor given a separate description (see 1.5E).
Lyrics on sheets in container
6.7B12. Series. Make notes on series data that cannot be given in the series area.
Originally issued in the series: Sound effects
6.7B13. Dissertations. If the item being described is a dissertation, make a note as instructed
in 1.7B13.
6.7B14. Audience. Make a brief note of the intended audience for, or intellectual level of, a
sound recording if this information is stated in the item, its container, or accompanying tex-
tual material.
Intended audience: First year undergraduates
Intended audience: G.C.E. "A" level students
6.7B16. Other formats. Give the details of other formats in which the content of the item
has been issued.
Issued also as cassette and as cartridge
6.7B17, Summary. Give a brief objective summary of the content of a sound recording
(other than one that consists entirely or predominantly of music) unless another pan of the
description provides enough information.
Summary: Episodes from the novel, read by Ed Begley
Summary: A brief historical account up to the introduction
of wave mechanics
6.7B18. Contents. List the titles of individual works contained on a sound recording. Add to
each title statements of responsibility not included in the title and statement of responsibility
area and the duration of the piece (see 1.5B4).
Contents: The golden age of rock'n'roll — Born late 58 —
Trudi's song — Pearl'n'Roy — Roll away the stone —
Marionette — Alice — Crash Street kids — Through the looking
glass
Contents: The fourth millennium / Henry Brant (9 min.) —
Music for brass quintet (14 min.)
Contents: Louise. Depuis le jour / G. Charpentier (Mary
Garden, soprano, with orchestra) — Tosca , Vissi d'arte /
Puccini (Maria Jeritza, soprano, with piano)
Make notes on additional or partial contents when appropriate.
With musical extracts from the works of the composer
6.7B19. Publishers' numbers. Give the publisher's stock number (usually an alphabetic and/
or numeric symbol) as found on the item. Precede each number by the brand or trade name
associated with it on the label or container (see 6.4D2) and a colon.
Tamla Motown: STMA 8007
Island: ILPS 9281
6-18
AACR2 Revision 2002
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.8C1
If the item has two or more numbers, give the principal number if one can be ascertained,
otherwise give both or all. If one of the numbers applies to the set as a whoJe, give it first and
designate it as such.
If the item consists of separately numbered units, give inclusive numbers if the numbering
is consecutive; otherwise give individual numbers or, if there are more than three of these,
the first number and the last number separated by a diagonal slash.
6.7B20. Copy being described, library's holdings, and restrictions on use. Make these
notes as instructed in I.7B20.
Library' s copy scratched but playable
6.7B21. "With" notes. If the title and statement of responsibility area contains a title that
applies to only a part of an item lacking a collective title and, therefore, more than one entry
is made, make a note beginning With: and listing the other separately titled works in the item
in the order in which they appear there. If the individual works are not titled, supply titles as
instructed in 6.1BI.
With: Peer Gynt (Suits) no, 1-2 / Edvard Grieg - Till
Eulenspiegels lustige Streiche / Richard Strauss
6.8. STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
Contents;
6.8A. Preliminary rule
6.SB, Standard number
6.8C. Key-title
6.8D. Terms of availability
6.8E. Qualification
6.8A. Preliminary rule
6.8A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 ,0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede each repetition of this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a key-title by an equals sign.
Precede terms of availability by a colon.
Enclose a qualification to the standard number or terms of availability in parentheses.
6.8B. Standard number
6.8B1. Give the International Standard Book Number (ISBN) or International Standard Serial
Number (ISSN) assigned to an item as instructed in 1 .8B.
6.8B2. Give any other number in a note (see 6.7B 19).
6.8C. Key-title
6.8C1. Give the key- title of a resource as instructed in 1 .8C.
AACR2 Revision 2002
6-19
6.8D
SOUND RECORDINGS
6.8D. Optional addition. Terms of availability
6.8D1. Give the terms on which the item is available as instructed in 1.8D.
$14 . 00
Free to members of the Association
6.8E. Qualification
6.8E1. Add qualifications to the standard number and/or terms of availability as instructed in
1.8E.
6.9. SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
6.9A. Describe supplementary items as instructed in i.9.
6.10. ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
6.10 A. Describe items made up of several types of material as instructed in 1.10.
6-20
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHAPTER
Motion Pictures and Videorecordinj
Contents
7.0 GENERAL RULES
7.0A Scope
7, OB Sources of information
7.0C Punctuation
7.0D Levels of detail in the description
7.0E Language and script of the description
7. OF Inaccuracies
7.0G Accents and other diacritical marks
7. OH Items with several chief sources of information
7.2
TITLE
AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
7.1A
Preliminary rule
7.1A1
Punctuation
7.1B
Title proper
7.1C
General materia! designation
7. ID
Parallel titles
7. IE
Other title information
7.1F
Statements of responsibility
7.1G
Items without a collective title
EDITION AREA
7.2A
Preliminary rule
7.2A1
Punctuation
7.2B
Edition statement
7.2C
Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
7. 2D Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
7.2E Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
7.3 MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
7.4 PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
7.4A Preliminary rule
7.4A1 Punctuation
7.4B General rule
7.4C Place of publication, distribution, etc.
7.4D Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
AACR2 Revision 2002
7.0
MOTION PICTURES AND VIDEORECORDINGS
7.4E Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
7.4F Date of publication, distribution, etc.
7,4G Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
7.5 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
7.5A Preliminary rule
7.5 A 1 Punctuation
7.5B B\tent of item (including specific material designation)
7.5C Other physical details
7.5C2 Aspect ratio and special projection characteristics
7.5C3 Sound characteristics
7.5C4 Colour
7.5C5 Projection speed
7.5D Dimensions
7.5E Accompanying material
7.6 SERIES AREA
7.6A Preliminary rule
7.6AI Punctuation
7.6B Series statements
7.7 NOTE AREA
7.7A Preliminary rule
7.7A1 Punctuation
7.7B Notes
7.8 STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
7.8A Preliminary rule
7.8A1 Punctuation
7.8B Standard number
7.8C Key-title
7.8D Terms of availability
7.8E Qualification
7.9 SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
7. 10 ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
7.0. GENERAL RULES
7.0A. Scope
7.0A1. The rales in this chapter cover the description of motion pictures and videorecordings
of all kinds, including complete films and programmes, compilations, trailers, newscasts and
newsfilms, stock shots, and unedited material. For other visual material, see chapter 8. For
sound track film not accompanied by visual material, see chapter 6.
7-2
AACR2 Revision 2002
MOTION PICTURES AND VIDEORECORDINGS
7.0F
7.0B. Sources of information
7.0BI. Chief source of information. The chief source of information for motion pictures and
videorecordings is {in this order of preference):
a) the item itself (e.g., the title frames)
b) its container (and container label) if the container is an integral part of the piece (e.g., a
cassette).
If the information is not available from the chief source, take it from the following sources
(in this order of preference):
accompanying textual material (e.g., scripts, shot lists, publicity
material)
container {if not an integral part of the piece)
other sources
7.GB2. Prescribed sources of information. The prescribed source(s) of information for each
area of the description of motion pictures and videorecordings is set out below. Enclose infor-
mation taken from outside the prescribed source(s) in square brackets.
AREA PRESCRIBED SOURCES OF INFORMATION
Title and statement of Chief source of information
responsibility
Edition Chief source of information, accompanying
material, container
Publication, distribution, etc. Chief source of information, accompanying
material, container
Physical description Any source
Series Chief source of information, accompanying
material, container
Note Any source
Standard number and terms Any source
of availabiiity
7.0C. Punctuation
For the punctuation of the description as a whole, see 1.0C.
For the prescribed punctuation of elements, see the following rules.
7.0D. Levels of detail in the description
See 1.0D.
7.0E. Language and script of the description
See LOE.
7.0F. Inaccuracies
See 1.0F.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update 7-3
7.0G
MOTION PICTURES AND V 1 DEOREC ORD INGS
7.0G- Accents and other diacritical marks
See LOG.
7.6H. Items with several chief sources of information
See 1.0A3.
7.1. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
Contents:
7.1A.
Preliminary rale
7. IB.
Title proper
7.1C.
General material designation
7. ID.
Parallel titles
7. IE,
Other title information
7. IF.
Statements of responsibility
7.1G.
Items without a collective title
7.1A. Preliminary rule
7.1A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede the title of a supplement or section (see 1.IB9) by a full stop.
Enclose the general material designation in square brackets.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede each unit of other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
For the punctuation of this area for items without a collective title, see 1.1G.
7.1B. Title proper
7.1B1. Transcribe the title proper as instructed m 1.1B.
Jules et Jim
How to steal a diamond in four uneasy lessons
Pulse generator basics
Lost by a hare on my terra pin pin
Gullible' s travails, or, How the meter met her match
Little Roquefort in Good mousekeeping
Walt Whitman's Civil War
If the title proper is not taken from the chief source of information, give the source of the
title in a note {see 7.7B3).
7.1B2. If an item lacks a title, supply one as instructed in 1.1B7 and also follow these partic-
ular instructions.
7-4
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
MOTION PICTURES AND VIDEORECORDINGS
7.1E2
Commercials. Supply for a short advertising film a title consisting of the name of the prod-
uct, service, etc, advertised, and the word advertisement.
[Manikin cigar advertisement]
[Road safety campaign advertisement]
Unedited material and newsfilm. Include in a supplied title for unedited material, stock
shots, and newsfilm all the major elements present in the picture in order of their occurrence
(e.g., place, dale of event, date of shooting (if different), personalities, and subjects).
[Phantom jet landing at. R.A.F. Leiichars, July 1971]
Optionally, give a description of the action and length of each shot in a note {see 7.7B18).
7.1C. Optional addition. General materia! designation
7.1C1- Give immediately following the title proper the appropriate general material designa-
tion as instructed in 1 . 1C.
The Pickwick papers
The administration of justice ;c;hd;
7.1C2. If an item contains parts belonging to materials falling into two or more categories,
and if none of these is the predominant constituent of the item, give either multimedia or kit
as the designation (see 1.1C1 and 1.10C1).
Treat a sound track (recorded sound physically integrated or synchronized with the item
and intended to be played with it) as an integral part of the motion picture or videorecording,
and give the general material designation appropriate to the motion picture or videorecording
alone. See also 7.5C3 and 7.7B10a.
7.1D. Parallel titles
7.1D1. Transcribe parallel titles as instructed in 1 . ID.
Clima de la caile [-..;Mrj] = Climate in the streets
7.1D2. Transcribe an original title in another language appearing in the chief source of infor-
mation as a parallel title.
Breathless [gmdj = A bout de souffle
7 .IE. Other title information
7.1E1. Transcribe other title information as instructed in 1.1E.
Jury and juror i SMii] : function and responsibility
Le tambou [GMij] : drum of" Haiti
7.1E2. If the item is a trailer containing extracts from a larger film, add {trailer} as other title
information.
Annie Hall :ghd] : [trailer)
AACR2 Revision 2002
7-5
7.1F
MOTION PICTURES AND VIDEORECORDINGS
7.1F. Statements of responsibility
7.1F1. Transcribe statements of responsibility relating to those persons or bodies credited in
the chief source of information with a major role in creating a film (e.g., as producer, direc-
tor, animator) as instructed in 1. IF. Give all other statements of responsibility (including
those relating to performance) in notes.
Flowering and fruiting of papaya [gmd] / produced by the
Department of Botany, Iowa State University
Classroom control [gmdj / University of London Audio Visual
Centre ; produced, directed, and edited by N.C. Collins
Food [GMD] : green grow the profits / ABC News ; producer
and writer, James Benjamin ; director, Al Niggemeyer
Square pegs, round holes [gmd] / director, Dan Bessie ;
writer , Phyllis Harvey ; animation, B . Davis ; editor,
I . Dryer
7.1F2. Add a word or short phrase to the statement of responsibility if the relationship
between the title and the person(s) or body (bodies) named in the statement is not clear.
Skaterdater [gmd] / [produced by] Marshal Backlar
7.1F3. If a statement of responsibility names both the agency responsible for the production
of a motion picture or videorecording and the agency for which it is produced, give the state-
ment as found.
Mew readers begin here [gmd] / University of Salford
Audiovisual Media for University of Salford Library
7.1G. Items without a collective title
7.1G1. If a motion picture or videorecording lacks a collective title, either describe the item
as a unit (see 7.1G2 and 7.IG3) or make a separate description for each separately titled part
(see7.1G4).
7.1G2. In describing as a unit a motion picture or videorecording lacking a collective title,
transcribe the titles of the individual parts as instructed in 1.1G3.
Infancy egmd] ; Childhood / [written by] J, Thornton Wilder
The Truman story [gmd] . They're in the army now
7.1G3. Make the relationship between statements of responsibility and the parts of an item
lacking a collective title and described as a unit clear by additions as instructed in 7.1F2.
7.1G4. Optionally, make a separate description for each separately titled work on a motion
picture or videorecording. For the statement of the extent in each of these descriptions, see
7.5B3. Link the separate descriptions with notes (see 7.7B21).
7-6
AACR2 Revision 2002
MOTION PICTURES AND VIDEORECORDINGS
7.2D1
7.2. EDITION AREA
Contents:
7.2A. Preliminary rule
7.2B. Edition statement
7.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
7.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
7.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
7.2A. Preliminary rule
7.2AI. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a statement relating to a named revision of an edition by a comma.
Precede the first statement of responsibility following an edition statement by a diagonal
slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
7.2B. Edition statement
7.2B1. Transcribe a statement relating to an edition of a motion picture or videorecording that
contains differences from other editions of that film, etc., or to a named reissue of a film, etc.,
as instructed in 1.2B.
2nd ed.
Re-edited version
7.2B2. In case of doubt about whether a statement is an edition statement, follow the instruc-
tions in 1.2B3.
7.2B3. Optional addition. If a motion picture or videorecording lacks an edition statement but
is known to contain significant changes from other editions, supply a suitable brief statement
in the language and script of the title proper and enclose it in square brackets,
7.2B4. If an edition statement appears in more than one language or script, transcribe the
statement that is in the language or script of the title proper. If this criterion does not apply,
transcribe the statement that appears first. Optionally, transcribe the parallel statement(s),
each preceded by an equals sign.
7.2B5. If an item lacking a collective title and described as a unit contains one or more works
with an associated edition statement, transcribe such statements following the titles and state-
ments of responsibility to which they relate, separated from them by a full stop.
7.2C, Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
7.2C1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more editions, but not to all
editions, of a motion picture or videorecording as instructed in 1 .2C and 7.1F.
7 .2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
7.2D1. If an item is a named revision of an edition, transcribe the statement relating to that
revision as instructed in 1.2D,
AACR2 Revision 2002
7-7
7.2E
MOTION PICTURES AND VI DEO RECORDINGS
Do not record statements relating to a reissue that contains no changes unless the item is
considered to be of particular importance to the cataloguing agency.
7,2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
7.2E1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more named revisions of an
edition (but not to all such revisions) as instructed in 1.2E and 7. IF.
7.3. MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
7.3A. This area is not used for motion pictures and videorecordings.
7.4. PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
Contents:
7.4A. Preliminary rule
7.4B. General rule
7.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
7.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
7.4E. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
7.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
7.4G. Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
7.4A. Preliminary rule
7.4A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a second or subsequently named place of publication, distribution, etc., by a
semicolon.
Precede the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., by a colon.
Enclose a supplied statement of function of a publisher, distributor, etc., in square brackets.
Precede the date of publication, distribution, etc., by a comma.
Enclose the details of manufacture (place, name, date) in parentheses.
Precede the name of a manufacturer by a colon.
Precede the date of manufacture by a comma.
7.4B. General rule
7.4B1. Record information about the place, name, and date of all types of publishing, distrib-
uting, etc., activities as instructed in 1.4B,
7.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
7.4C1. Give the place of publication, distribution, etc., of a published item as instructed in
1.4C.
7.4C2. Do not record a place of publication, distribution, etc., for an unpublished item. Do
not record s.l. in such a case.
7-8
AACR2 Revision 2002
MOTION PICTURES AND VIDEORECORDINGS
7.5
7.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
7.4D1. Give the name of the publisher, etc., and optionally the name of the distributor, releas-
ing agency, etc., as instructed in 1.4D.
New York : National Society for the Prevention of
Blindness
Rochester, N.Y. : Modern Learning Aids
7.4D2. Do not record the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., for an unpublished item. Do
not record s.n. in such a case.
7.4E. Optional addition. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
7.4E1. Add to the name of a publisher, distributor, releasing agency, etc., a statement of func-
tion as instructed in 1 .4E.
Manchester : University of Manchester, Dept. of Medical
Biochemistry [distributor]
7.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
7.4F1. Give the date of publication, distribution, release, etc., of a published item as
instructed in 1 4F.
Santa Ana, Calif. : Doubleday Multimedia, 1973
Big Spring, Tex. : Creative Visuals, [197-?]
7.4F2. Optionally, give a date of original production differing from the date of publication,
distribution, etc., of a published item in the note area (see 7.7B9).
Santa Monica [Calif.] : Pyramid Films [distributor], 1971
Note: Made in 1934
7.4F3. Give the date of creation of unedited or unpublished film or video material and of
stock shots.
7.4G. Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
7.4G1. If the name of the publisher is unknown and the place and name of the manufacturer
are found in the item, give that place and name as instructed in 1.4G.
7.4G2. Optional addition. Give the place, name of manufacturer, and/or date of manufacture
if they are found in the item and differ from the place, name of publisher, etc., and date of
publication, etc., and are considered important by the cataloguing agency.
7.5. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
Contents:
7.5A, Preliminary rule
7.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
7.5C. Other physical details
7.5D, Dimensions
7.5E. Accompanying material
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
7-9
7.5A
MOTION PICTURES AND VI DEO RECORDINGS
7.5A. Preliminary rule
7.5A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see l.OC.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede other physical details by a colon.
Precede dimensions by a semicolon.
Precede each statement of accompanying material by a plus sign.
Enclose physical details of accompanying material in parentheses.
7.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
7.5B1. Record the number of physical units of a motion picture or videorecording by giving
the number of parts in arabic numerals and one of the following terms as appropriate:
film cartridge
film cassette
film loop
film reel
videocartridge
videocassette
videodisc
videoreel
1 film cassette
3 film reels
1 videoreel
2 videodiscs
If none of these terms is appropriate, give the specific name of the item as concisely as
possible.
Optionally, use a term in common usage to record the specific format of the physical
carrier.
1 DVD- video
Optionally, if general material designations are used (see 1.1C1), and the general material
designation indicates that the item is a motion picture or videorecording, omit film or video
from the specific material designation.
1 reel
1 disc
Give a trade name or other similar specification in a note (see 7.7B10).
7.5B2. Give the playing time of a motion picture or videorecording (other than a videodisc,
see below) as instructed in 1.5B4.
1 film loop (4 min., 30 sec.)
2 film cassettes (25 min. each)
1 videoreel (ca. 75 min.)
Give the playing time of a videodisc as set out in the following subrules:
Videodiscs consisting of moving images. Give the playing time as instructed in L5B4.
1 videodisc (ca. 50 min.)
7-10
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
MOTION PICTURES AND VIDEORECORDINGS
7.5C4
Videodiscs consisting of frames of still images. If the playing time is stated on the item,
give it as stated.
1 videodisc (BO man.)
If the playing time is not stated on the item, do not give a playing time. Optionally, give
the number of frames if that number is readily ascertainable.
1 videodisc (45,876 fr.)
Videodiscs consisting of both moving images and still images. If the playing time is stated
on the item, give it as stated. Optionally, whether the playing time is stated on the item or
not, give in a note the number of frames of still images and the duration of the moving
images (see 7.7BI0j).
7.5B3. If the description is of a separately titled part of a motion picture or videorecording
lacking a collective title {see 7.1G4), express the fractional extent in the form on reel 3 of 4
film reels (if the parts are numbered or lettered in a single sequence) or on J cassette of 3
videocassettes (if there is no sequential numbering). Add the duration of the part to such a
statement.
on reel 1 of 2 film reels (13 min.)
on 2 cassettes of 4 videocassettes (50 min.)
7.5C. Other physical details
7.5C1. Give the following details, as appropriate, in the order set out here:
aspect ratio and special projection characteristics (motion
pictures)
sound characteristics
colour
projection speed (motion pictures)
7.5C2, Aspect ratio and special projection characteristics. If a film has special projection
requirements, give them as succinctly as possible (e.g., Cinerama, Panavision, multiprojector;
and whether anamorphic, techniscope, stereoscopic, or multiscreen).
14 film reels (157 min.) : Panavision
7.5C3. Sound characteristics. Give sd. (sound) or si. (silent) to indicate the presence or
absence of a sound track. If a silent film is known to be photographed at the speed of sound
film, give ii. at sd. speed.
1 videoreel (15 min.) : sd.
7.5C4. Colour. Give col. or b&w to indicate whether an item is in colour or black and white.
Give b&w for a sepia print (see also 7.7B 1 0).
1 film reel (10 min.) : sd., col.
Give a succinct statement to indicate that an item is in a combination of colour and black
and white.
1 film reel (30 min.) : sd . , col. with b&w sequences
AACR2 Revision 2002
7-11
7.5C5
MOTION PICTURES AND VI DEO RECORDINGS
1 videocassette (24 min.) : sd., b&w with col.
introductory sequence
7.5C5. Projection speed. Give the projection speed of a film in frames per second (fps), if
this information is considered important.
1 film reel (1 min., 17 sec.) : si., col., 25 fps
Do not give the projection speed if it is standard for the item (24 fps for a sound film; 16
fps for a silent film).
7.50. Dimensions
7.5D1. Give the dimensions of a motion picture or videorecording as set out in the following
rules.
If the motion pictures or videorecordings in a multipart item differ in size, give the small-
est or smaller and the largest or larger size, separated by a hyphen,
7.5D2. Give the gauge (width) of a motion picture in millimetres. If 8 mm., state whether
single, standard, super, or Maurer,
1 film reel (12 min.) : sd., b6w ; 16 mm,
1 film cassette (21 min.) : sd., col. ; standard 8 mm.
2 film reels (ca. 30 min. each) : b&w ; 16-35 mm.
7.5D3. Give the gauge (width) of a videotape in inches or millimetres,
1 videoreel (30 min . ) : sd . , b&w ; V2 in .
7.5D4. Give the diameter of a videodisc in inches.
1 videodisc (ca. 20 min.) : sd., bSw ; 8 in.
1 videodisc (38 min.) : sd., col. ; 12 in.
7.5E. Accompanying material
7.5E1. Give the details of accompanying material as instructed in 1.5E.
1 film cassette (21 min.) : sd., col. ; standard 8 mm. +
1 teacher' s guide
or 1 film cassette (21 min.) : sd., col. ; standard 8 mm. +
1 v. (28 p. : ill. ; 22 cm.)
2 film cassettes (30 min. each) : sd,, col. ; standard 8
mm. + Iv. (35 p. ; 24 cm.)
7.6. SERIES AREA
Contents:
7.6A. Preliminary rule
7.6B. Series statements
7-12
AACR2 Revision 2002
MOTION PICTURES AND VIDEORECORDINGS
7.7A2
7.6A. Preliminary rule
7.6A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 ,0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Enclose each series statement (see 1.6J) in parentheses.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
Precede the ISSN of a series or subseries by a comma.
Precede the numbering within a series or subseries by a semicolon.
Enclose a date following a numeric and/or alphabetic designation in parentheses.
Precede the title of a subseries, or the designation for a subseries, by a full stop.
Precede the title of a subseries following a designation for the subseries by a comma.
7.6B. Series statements
7.6BI. Record each series statement as instructed in 1.6.
(Allstate simulation film library)
(Ecology : communities in nature)
(Automotive damage correction series. Set 5)
(Mathematics for elementary school students. Whole
numbers ; no. 10)
(Fant anthology of literature in Ameslan)
(Welding series. Gas metal arc (mig) welding)
(Images of the seventies, ISSN 7745-2251 ; no. 22)
(Visual media from the American Folklife Center ; no. 1)
7.7. NOTE AREA
Contents:
7.7A. Preliminary rule
7.7B. Notes
7.7A. Preliminary rule
7.7A1. Punctuation
Precede each note by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph for each.
Separate introductory wording from the main content of a note by a colon followed but not
preceded by a space.
1.1 kl. In making notes, follow the instructions in 1.7A.
AACR2 Revision 2002
7-13
7.7B
MOTION PICTURES AND VIDEORECORDfNGS
7.7B. Notes
Make notes as set out in the following subrules and in the order given there. However,
give a particular note first when it has been decided that note is of primary importance.
7.7B1. Nature or form. Make notes on the nature or form of a motion picture or videore-
cording unless it is apparent from the rest of the description.
Documentary
TV play
7.7B2, Language. Give the language(s) of the spoken, sung, or written content of a motion
picture or videorecording unless this is apparent from the rest of the description. Indicate cap-
tioning or signing.
In French
French dialogue, English subtitles
Dubbed into English
Closed- captioned
7.7B3. Source of title proper. Make notes on the source of the title proper if it is other than
the chief source of information.
Title from script
7.7B4. Variations in title. Make notes on titles borne by the item other than the title proper.
Optionally, give a romanization of the title proper.
Title on container: Papaya and guava
Title in English on title frame: 400 blows
Title on containers of parts 3, 5-6 varies slightly
7.7B5. Parallel titles and other title information. Give the title in another language and
other title information not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility area if they are
considered to be important.
Subtitle: Les fleurs anglaises
7.7B6. Statements of responsibility
Cast. List featured players, performers, narrators, and/or presenters.
Presenter: Jackie Glanville
Cast : Laurence Harvey, Mia Farrow, Lionel Stander , Harry
Andrews
Cast: Giiles Behat (Charles IV), Jean Deschamps {Charles
de Valois) , Helens Due (Mahaut d'Artois)
Incorporate names of the cast into the contents note if appropriate (see 7.7B18).
Credits, List persons (other than the cast) who have contributed to the artistic and/or
technical production of a motion picture or videorecording and who are not named in the
statements of responsibility (see 7. IF). Do not include the names of assistants, associates,
7-14
AACR2 Revision 2002
MOTION PICTURES AND VIDEORECORDINGS
7.7B10
etc., or any other persons making only a minor contribution. Preface each name or group of
names with a statement of function.
Credits: Screenplay, Harold Pinter; music, John Dankworth;
camera, Gerry Fisher; editor, Reginald Beck
Credits: Script, John Taylor; calligraphy and design, Alan
Haigh; commentator, Derek G. Holroyde
7.7B7. Edition and history. Make notes relating to the edition being described or to the his-
tory of the motion picture or videorecording.
Shorter version of the 1969 motion picture of the same
name
Censored vers ion . 3 rnin . sequence missing on reel 3.
Censorship certificate C-132, May A, 1946, of the U.S. Dept.
of the Army
Spanish version of the 1956 motion picture entitled:
Jenny's birthday book. Based on: Jenny's birthday book / by
Esther Averill
Remake of the 1933 motion picture of the same name
Based on the novel by Nicolas Mosley
7.7B9. Publication, distribution, etc., and date. Make notes on publication, distribution,
etc., details that are not included in the publication, distribution, etc., area and are considered
to be important.
Distributed in the U.S. by: Stamford, Conn. : Educational
Dimensions
Give a date of original production differing from the date of publication, distribution, etc.
Made in 1927
Give the country of original release if it is not stated or implied elsewhere in the
description.
First released in Yugoslavia
7.7B10. Physical description. Make the following notes on the physical description when
appropriate and if this level of detail is desired:
a) Sound characteristics. Give any special characteristics of the sound component of a
motion picture or videorecording (e.g., optical or magnetic, whether the sound track is
physically integrated with the film or the sound is separate on a synchronized
recording).
Magnetic sound track
Dolby stereo., mono, compatible
b) Length of film or tape. Give the length in feet of a motion picture (from first frame to
last) or videotape (from first programme signal to last).
Film: 14, 139 ft.
AACR2 Revision 2002
7-15
7.7B11
MOTION PICTURES AND VIDEORE COR DINGS
c) Colour. Give the process or colour recording system of a motion picture or
videorecording, or any other details of the colour.
Technicolor
Colour recording system: SECAM
Sepia print
d) Form of print. Give the form of print of a film (e.g., negative, positive, reversal,
reversal intemegative, internegative, interpositive, colour separation, duplicate, fine
grain duplicating positive, fine grain duplicating negative). For master material held in
checkerboard cutting form, state if A, B, C, etc., roll.
e) Film base. Give the film base (i.e., nitrate, acetate, or polyester).
f) Videorecording system. Give the system(s) used for a videorecording.
Beta
Laser optical CAV
VHS Hi-fi
LaserVision CAV
For videotape, give the number of lines and fields, followed by the modulation
frequency (e.g., high band, low band).
Standard: 405 lines, 50 field, high band
g) Generation of copy. For videotapes, give the generation of the copy and either master
copy or show copy.
Second generation, show copy
h) Special projection requirements. Give special projection requirements not given in the
physical description area (see 7.5C2),
Three-dimensional film
j) Videodiscs: duration and number of frames. Give the duration of the moving images
and the number of frames of still images for videodiscs that contain both.
Eighty min. of moving images and 2400 fr. of still images
k) Other. Give any other physical details that are important to the use or storage of the
motion picture or videorecording.
One side CAV, one side CLV
7.7B11. Accompanying material. Make notes on the location of accompanying material if
appropriate. Give details of accompanying material neither mentioned in the physical descrip-
tion area nor given a separate description (.see 1.5E).
Cast list and credits on box
With shot list
With instruction manual
7-16
AACR2 Revision 2002
MOTION PICTURES AND VIDEORECORD1NGS
7.7B2I
7.7B12. Series. Make notes on series data that cannof be given in the series area.
Originally issued in the series: Disney classics
7.7BI3. Dissertations. If the item being described is a dissertation, make a note as instructed
in 1.7B13.
7.7B14. Audience. Make a brief note of the intended audience for, or intellectual level of, an
item if this information is stated in the item, its container, or accompanying textual material.
Intended audience: Elementary grades
7.7B16. Other formats. Give the details of other formats in which the content of the item
has been issued.
Issued also as cassette (VHS or Sony U-Matic)
7.7B17. Summary. Give a brief objective summary of the content of an item unless another
part of the description provides enough information.
Summary: Presents several brief sketches showing
communication problems in a family, in a business, and in
school in order to analyse and correct failures in
interpersonal relations
7.7B18. Contents. List the titles of individual works contained in, or the parts of, a motion
picture or videorecording. Add to each title any statements of responsibility not included in
the title and statement of responsibility area, and the duration if known.
Contents: pt. 1. The cause of liberty (24 min.) —
pt , 2. The impossible war (25 min.)
Make notes on additional or partial contents when appropriate.
Also contains newsfiim on the Trooping of" the Colour
Unedited material and newsfiim. Give a description, using standard abbreviations, of the
action and length of each shot of unedited material, newsfiim, or stock shots.
Shots : LS through heat haze of jet landing towards camera
(20 ft.). CU front view of jet as it taxis towards camera
(40 ft. ) . CU fuselage turning right to left through picture
(30 ft.). CU braking parachute as it is discarded (52 ft.).
CU nose and engines (57 ft.)
7.7B19. Numbers. Give important numbers associated with the item other than ISBNs or
ISSNs {see 7.8B).
7.7B20. Copy being described, library's holdings, and restrictions on use. Make these
notes as instructed in 1.7B20.
Library's set lacks third reel
7.7B21. "With" notes. If the title and statement of responsibility area contains a title that
applies to only a part of an item lacking a collective title and, therefore, more than one entry
is made, make a note beginning With: and listing the other separately titled works in the item
in the order in which they appear there.
With: The Truman story
AACR2 Revision 2002
7-17
7.8
MOTION PICTURES AND VIDEO RECORDINGS
With: Frilly follies - The shy mouse - The night hawk - No
more cheese!
7.8. STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
Contents:
7.8A. Preliminary rule
7.8B. Standard number
7.8C. Key-title
7.8D. Terms of availability
7.8E. Qualification
7.8A. Preliminary rule
7.8A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede each repetition of this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a key-title by an equals sign.
Precede terms of availability by a colon.
Enclose a qualification to the standard number or terms of availability in parentheses.
7.SB. Standard number
7.8B1. Give the International Standard Book Number (ISBN) or International Standard Serial
Number (ISSN) assigned to an item as instructed in 1.8B.
7.8B2. Give any other number in a note {see 7.7B19).
7.8C. Key-title
7.8C1. Give the key-title of a resource as instructed in 1.8C.
7.8D. Optional addition. Terms of availability
7.8D1. Give the terms on which the item is available as instructed in 1.8D.
For hire or sale (£15.00)
Free to universities and colleges
7.8E. Qualification
7.8E1. Add qualifications to the standard number and/or terms of availability as instructed in
1.8E.
7-18
AACR2 Revision 2002
MOTION PICTURES AND VIDEORECORDINGS
7.1 OA
7.9. SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
7.9A. Describe supplementary items as instructed in 1.9.
7.10. ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
7.10A. Describe items made up of several types of material as instructed in 1.10.
AACR2 Revision 2002
7-19
CHAPTER
8
Graphic Materials
Contents
8.0 GENERAL RULES
8. OA Scope
8. OB Sources of information
8.0C Punctuation
8.0D Levels of detail in the description
8.0E Language and script of the description
8. OF Inaccuracies
8.0G Accents and other diacritical marks
8. OH Items with several chief sources of information
TITLE
AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
8.1 A
Preiiminary rule
8.1A1
Punctuation
8.1B
Title proper
8.1C
General material designation
8. ID
Parallel titles
8. IE
Other title information
8. IF
Statements of responsibility
8.1G
Items without a collective title
8.2 EDITION AREA
8.2A Preliminary rule
8.2 A 1 Punctuation
8.2B Edition statement
8.2C Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
8. 2D Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
8.2E Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
8.3 MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
8.4 PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
8.4A Preliminary rule
8.4A1 Punctuation
8.4B General rule
8.4C Place of publication, distribution, etc.
8.4D Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
AACR2 Revision 2002
8-1
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.4E Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
8.4F Date of publication, distribution, etc.
8.4G Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
8.5 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
8.5A Preliminary rule
8.5A1 Punctuation
8.5B Extent of item (including specific material designation)
8.5C Other physical details
8.5C1 Medium-specific details
8.5C2 Colour
8.5D Dimensions
8.5D2 Filmstrips and fiimslips
8.5D3 Stereographs
8.5D4 Art originals, art prints, art reproductions, and transparencies
8.5D5 Slides
8.5D6 Technical drawings and wall charts
8.5E Accompanying material
8.6 SERIES AREA
8.6A Preliminary rule
8.6 A I Punctuation
8.6B Series statements
8.7 NOTE AREA
8.7A Preliminary rule
8.7AI Punctuation
8.7B Notes
8.8 STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
8.8A Preliminary rule
8.8A1 Punctuation
8.8B Standard number
8.8C Key-title
8.8D Terms of availability
8.8E Qualification
8.9 SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
8.10 ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
8. 1 1 FACSIMILES, PHOTOCOPIES, AND OTHER REPRODUCTIONS
8-2
AACR2 Revision 2002
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.0C
8.0. GENERAL RULES
S.0A. Scope
8.0A1. The rules in this chapter cover the description of graphic materials of all kinds,
whether opaque (e.g., two-dimensional art originals and reproductions, charts, photographs,
technical drawings) or intended to be projected or viewed (e.g., filmstrips, radiographs,
slides), and collections of such graphic materials. For unpublished graphic materials, see also
the instructions in chapter 4. For visual material recorded on film and intended to be pro-
jected so as to create the illusion of movement, see chapter 7. For microforms, see chapter
1 1 . For maps, etc., see chapter 3. For microscope slides, see chapter 10.
8.0B. Sources of information
8.0B1. Chief source of information. The chief source of information for graphic materials is
the item itself including any labels, etc., that are permanently affixed to the item or a con-
tainer that is an integral part of the item. If the item being described consists of two or more
separate physical parts (e.g., a slide set), treat a container that is the unifying element as the
chief source of information if it furnishes a collective title and the items themselves and their
labels do not. In this case, make a note (see 8.7B3) indicating the source of information. If
information is not available from the chief source, take it from the following sources (in this
order of preference):
In describing a collection of graphic materials as a unit, treat the whole collection as the
chief source.
8.0B2. Prescribed sources of information. The prescribed source(s) of information for each
area of the description of graphic materials is set out below. Enclose information taken from
outside the prescribed source(s) in square brackets.
container (e.g., box, frame)
accompanying textual material (e.g., manuals, leaflets)
other sources
AREA
PRESCRIBED SOURCES OF INFORMATION
Title and statement of
responsibility
Edition
Chief source of information
Chief source of information, container,
Publication, distribution, etc
accompanying material
Chief source of information, container,
Physical description
Series
accompanying material
Any source
Chief source of information, container,
Note
Standard number and terms
of availability
accompanying material
Any source
Any source
8.0C. Punctuation
For the punctuation of the description as a whole, see 1.0C.
For the prescribed punctuation of elements, see the following rules.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
8-3
8.0D
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.0D. Levels of detail in the description
See 1.0D.
8.0E. Language and script of the description
See 1.0E.
8.0F. Inaccuracies
See 1.0F.
8.0G. Accents and other diacritical marks
See LOG.
8.0H. Items with several chief sources of information
See I.0A3.
8.1. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
Contents:
8.1A.
Preliminary rule
8.1B.
Title proper
8.1C.
General material designation
8.1D.
Parallel titles
8.1E.
Other title information
8. IE
Statements of responsibility
8.1G.
Items without a collective title
8.1A. Preliminary rule
8.1 A 1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see I .OC.
Precede the title of a supplement or section (see 1.1B9) by a full stop.
Enclose the general material designation in square brackets.
Precede each parallel tide by an equals sign.
Precede each unit of other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
For the punctuation of this area for items without a collective title, see I.I G.
8.1B. Title proper
8.1B1. Transcribe the title proper as instructed in I. IB.
Searching British patent literature
Ancient Greek coins
Napoleon
19th century developments in art
8-4
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.IF1
Walt Disney's Disneyland
Advanced diagnostic ultrasound (two-dimensional
ultrasonography)
If the title proper is taken from a container that is a unifying element, or if it is not taken
from the chief source of information, give the source of the title in a note (see 8.7B3).
8.1B2. If a single graphic item lacks a tide, supply one as instructed in I.1B7.
[Birds of Jamaica]
[Photograph of Alice Liddell]
8,1B3. If a collection of graphic items lacks a title, supply a titie by which the collection is
known or a title indicating the nature of the collection.
8.1C. Optional addition. General material designation
S.1C1. Give immediately following the title proper the appropriate general material designa-
tion as instructed in 1.1C.
8.IC2. If a graphic item contains parts belonging to materials falling into two or more cate-
gories, and if none of these is the predominant constituent of the item, give either multimedia
or kit as the designation (see 1.1C1 and 1.10C1).
8.1D. Parallel titles
8.1D1. Transcribe parallel titles as instructed in l.ID.
French colonies in America [gmd] = Colonies frangaises
d' Amerique
8.1E. Other title information
8.1E1. Transcribe other title information as instructed in LIE,
Basic principles in chemistry— stoichiome try -gmd} : atomic
weights, molecular weights, and the mole concept
8.1F. Statements of responsibility
8.1F1. Transcribe statements of responsibility relating to persons or bodies credited with a
major role in creating or participating in the creation or production of a graphic item (e.g.,
directors, producers, artists, designers, developers, sponsors) as instructed in I. IF. Give all
other statements of responsibility in notes.
[Dance posters ]
Bulgaria ;gmd; : my country
Personal communication [gmdj
body English
gestures, expressions, and
The beach [gmd] / Walt Smith
Searching British patent literature [GMdj / British Library
Science Reference and Information Service
AACR2 Revision 2002
8-5
8.1 F2
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
The histomap of religion [gmd] : the story of man' s search
for spiritual unity / John B. Sparks
A picture study of the settlement of the West [gkdj /
prepared by Historical Services and Consultants under the
direction of John T. Saywell and John C. Richer
Two dancers on a stage [gmdj / Degas
A girl with a broom ;gmc] / Rembrandt ; National Gallery of
Art
Introduction to printmaking [GMd; / Crystal Productions ;
writer, Corry Hubbard
Soil, the growth medium [GMij] / Prentice-Hall Media ;
produced by the Sun Group ; producer and director, Arthur
Custer ; writer, Roger Scott
Childcare shapes the future ;gmd> : anti-racist strategies /
developed by the Council on Interracial Books for Children,
Inc., and the Mul ticultural Project for Communication and
Education, Inc. ; produced by the Council on Interracial
Books for Children, Inc.
8.1F2. Add a word or short phrase to the statement of responsibility if the relationship
between the title and the person(s) or body (bodies) named in the statement is not clear.
8.1G. Items without a collective title
8.1G1. If a graphic item lacks a collective title, transcribe the titles of the individual parts as
instructed in 1.1G.
The great big enormous turnip [SMO] / Alexei Tolstoy ; with
pictures by Helen Oxenbury. The three poor tailors / Victor
G. Ambrus
(Afilmstrip based on two children's books')
8.1G2. Make the relationship between statements of responsibility and the parts of an item
lacking a collective title clear by additions as instructed in 8.1F2.
8.2. EDITION AREA
Contents:
8.2A. Preliminary rule
8.2B. Edition statement
8.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
8.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
8.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
8.2A. Preliminary rule
8.2A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
8-6
AACR2 Revision 2002
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.2D1
Precede a statement relating to a named revision of an edition by a comma.
Precede the first statement of responsibility following an edition statement by a diagonal
slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
8.2A2. Unpublished graphic items. For unpublished graphic items existing in different ver-
sions, see 4.2.
8.2B. Edition statement
8.2B1. Transcribe a statement relating to an edition of a graphic item that contains differences
from other editions of that item, or to a named reissue of an item, as instructed in 1.2B.
Britain' s government at work [gmdj / by John A. Hawgood. —
3rd ed.
8.2B2. In case of doubt about whether a statement is an edition statement, follow the instruc-
tions in 1.2E3-
8.2B3. Optional, addition. If a graphic item lacks an edition statement but is known to contain
significant changes from other editions, supply a suitable brief statement in the language and
script of the title proper and enclose it in square brackets.
Wooded landscape with church, cow, and figure [ gmd j /
T. Gainsborough fecit aqua forte ; J. Wood perfecit. — [3rd
state]
The story of the Pied Piper [gmd] / Encyclopaedia
Britannica Educational Corporation. — [New ed.]
8.2B4, If an edition statement appears in more than one language or script, transcribe the
statement that is in the language or script of the title proper. If this criterion does not apply,
transcribe the statement that appears first. Optionally, transcribe the parallel statement(s),
each preceded by an equals sign.
8.2B5, If an item lacking a collective title contains one or more works with an associated
edition statement, transcribe such statements following the titles and statements of responsi-
bility to which they relate, separated from them by a full stop.
8.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
8.2C1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more editions, but not to all
editions, of a graphic item as instructed in 1 .2C and 8. IF.
Precambrian and older Palaeozoic eras (gmd) / by Knud
Dreyer Jorgenson. — [New issue] / re-edited in Great Britain
by D.E. Owen
8.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
8.2D1. If an item is a named revision of an edition, transcribe the statement relating to that
revision as instructed in 1.2D,
Do not record statements relating to a reissue that contains no changes unless the item is
considered to be of particular importance to the cataloguing agency.
AACR2 Revision 2002
S-7
8.2E
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
8.2E1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more named revisions of an
edition (but not to all such revisions) as instructed in 1.2E and 8.1F.
8.3. MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
8.3A. This area is not used for graphic materials.
8.4. PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
Contents;
8.4A. Preliminary rule
8.4B. General rule
8.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
8.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
8.4E. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc,
8.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
8.4G. Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
8.4A. Preliminary rule
8.4A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 .OC.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a second or subsequently named place of publication, distribution, etc., by a
semicolon.
Precede the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., by a colon.
Enclose a supplied statement of function of a publisher, distributor, etc., in square brackets.
Precede the date of publication, distribution, etc., by a comma.
Enclose the details of manufacture (place, name, date) in parentheses.
Precede the name of a manufacturer by a colon.
Precede the date of manufacture by a comma,
8.4B. General rule
8.4B1. Record information about the place, name, and date of all types of publishing, distrib-
uting, etc., activities as instructed in 1.4B,
8.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
8.4C1. Give the place of publication, distribution, etc., of a published graphic item as
instructed in 1 .4C.
8.4C2. Do not record a place of publication, distribution, etc., for an unpublished graphic
item, or for an unpublished collection of graphic items (including those containing published
items but not published as collections). Do not record s.l in either case.
AACR2 Revision 2002
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.4G2
8.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
8.4DL Give the name of the publisher, etc., and optionally the distributor, of a published
graphic item as instructed in 1.4D.
Trowbridge, Wiltshire : Micro Colour (International)
[Fullerton, Calif.] r Ruhle and Associates
[Leeds] : University of Leeds, Dept. of Spanish
8.4D2. Do not record the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., for an unpublished graphic
item, or for an unpublished collection of graphic items {including those containing published
items but not published as collections). Do not record s.n. in either case.
8«4E. Optional addition. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
8.4E1. Add to the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., a statement of function as instructed
in 1.4E.
London •. Rickett Encyclopedia of Slides [publisher] :
Voluntary Committee on Overseas Aid & Development
[distributor]
8.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
8.4F1, Give the date of publication, distribution, etc., of a published graphic item as
instructed in 1 .4F.
Melbourne : University of Melbourne ; London : EFVA
[distributor] , 1966
Toronto : Royal Ontario Museum, [197-]
New York : Personality Posters, cl966
8.4F2, Give the date of creation of an art original, unpublished photograph, or other unpub-
lished graphic item.
Fair Rosamund [gmd] / E. Burne-Jones. — 1863
(Dated gouache J
Portrait of Charles Dickens [gmd] . - [1861?]
(Undated photograph )
8.4F3. Give the inclusive dates of a collection of graphic materials.
[ Pen drawings of birds and flowers of Dorset] !Gmd] . —
[1910- 1937]
8.4G. Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
8.4G1. If the name of the publisher is unknown and the place and name of the manufacturer
are found in the item, give that place and name as instructed in 1 ,4G.
[S.l. : s.n. f 1966?] (London : Curwen Press)
8.4G2. Optional addition. Give the place, name of manufacturer, and/or date of manufacture
if they are found on the item and differ from the place, name of publisher, etc., and date of
publication, etc., and are considered important by the cataloguing agency.
AACR2 Revision 2002
8-9
8.5
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.5. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
Contents:
8.5A. Preliminary rule
8.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
8.5C. Other physical details
8.5D. Dimensions
8.5E. Accompanying material
8.5A. Preliminary rule
8.5A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede other physical details by a colon.
Precede dimensions by a semicolon.
Precede each statement of accompanying material by a plus sign.
Enclose physical details of accompanying material in parentheses.
8.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
8.5B1. Record the number of physical units of a graphic item by giving the number of parts
in arabic numerals and one of the following terms as appropriate:
activity card
art Original
art print
art reproduction
chart
filmslip
filmstrip
flash card
flip chart
photograph
picture
postcard
poster
radiograph
slide
stereograph
study print
technical drawing
transparency
wall chart
1 wall chart
3 wall charts
100 slides
12 transparencies
8-10
AACR2 Revision 2002
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.5B5
Add cartridge or reel to filmstrip and stereograph when appropriate.
1 filmstrip cartridge
3 stereograph reels
Optionally, add a more specific term to one of those listed above.
50 identical sets of 10 slides
If none of the terms listed above is appropriate, give the specific name of the item as con-
cisely as possible.
7 flannel board pieces
If the parts of the item are very numerous and the exact number cannot be readily ascer-
tained, give an approximate number.
ca. 1,000 photographs
8.5B2. Add, to the designation for a filmslip or filmstrip, the number of frames or double
frames.
1 filmstrip (36 fr.)
1 filmstrip (10 double fr.)
Add, to the designation for a stereograph, the number of pairs of frames.
1 stereograph reel (7 pairs of fr.)
If the frames are unnumbered and their number cannot be readily ascertained, give an
approximate number.
1 filmstrip {ca. 100 fr.)
If the title frames are separately numbered, give the number of title frames after the num-
ber of other frames.
1 filmstrip {41 fr., 4 title fr.)
8.5B3. Add, to the designation for flip charts, the number or approximate number of sheets.
1 flip chart (8 sheets)
8.5B4. Add, to the designation for transparencies, the number or approximate number of
overlays, if any. If the overlays are attached, indicate this.
1 transparency { 5 overlays )
1 transparency (5 attached overlays)
8.5B5. If the parts of a multipart filmslip, filmstrip, stereograph, flip chart, or transparency
have the same number of components (e.g., frames, sheets) or approximately the same num-
ber of components, use the form 3 filmstrips (50 fr. each) or 3 transparencies (ca. 10 overlays
each), etc. Otherwise, give the total number of components if they are consecutively num-
bered or omit the statement of the number of components.
4 filmstrips (50 double fr. each)
2 transparencies (20 overlays)
4 flip charts
AACR2 Revision 2002
8-11
8.5B6
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.5B6. If the item is in a raised image format, add (tactile) to the statement of extent (see
8.5B1-8.5B5).
1 chart (tactile)
Optionally, if general material designations are used {see 1.1C1) and the general material
designation indicates the tactile nature of the item, omit the addition.
If the item is a thermoform copy, add thermoform to the parenthetic addition, preceded
by a comma. If there is no parenthetic addition (see option above), add thermoform in
parentheses.
1 chart (tactile, thermoform)
or 1 chart (thermoform)
8.5C. Other physical details
8.5C1. Medium-specific details. Give, for each of the media listed below, the details
specified.
a) Art originals. Give the medium (e.g., chalk, oil, pastel) and the base (e.g., board,
canvas, fabric).
1 art original : oil on canvas
b) Art prints. Give the process in general terms (e.g., engraving, lithograph) or specific
terms (e.g., copper engraving, chromolithograph).
2 art prints : engraving
1 art print : sugar lift aquatint
c) Art reproductions. Give the method of reproduction {e.g., photogravure, collotype).
1 art reproduction : photogravure
d) Charts and flip charts. If the charts are double sided, indicate this.
1 flip chart (8 sheets) : double sided
e) Filmsirips and filmslips. Give sd. if the sound is integral. If the sound is not integral,
describe the accompanying sound as accompanying material (see 8.5E).
1 filmstrip (41 fr., 4 title fr.) : sd.
f) Flash cards. Give sd. if the sound is integral. If the sound is not integral, describe the
accompanying sound as accompanying material (see 8.5E).
2 00 flash cards : sd.
g) Photographs. If the photograph is a transparency not designed for projection or a
negative print, indicate this. Optionally, give the process used.
3 photographs : negative
1 photograph : glass photonegative
h) Slides. Give sd. if the sound is integral. If the sound is not integral, describe the
accompanying sound as accompanying material (see 8.5E).
12 slides : sd.
8-12
AACR2 Revision 2002
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.5D2
j) Technical drawings. Give the method of reproduction (e.g., blueprint, photocopy), if
appropriate.
1 technical drawing : blueprint
8.SC2. Colour. Give an indication of colour (e.g., coi, b&w, sepia) for ail graphic media
other than art originals, radiographs, and technical drawings.
1 art print : engraving, tinted
3 filmslips : col.
16 flash cards : col.
1 photograph : sepia
1 picture : col.
4 postcards : tinted
7 posters : blue and white
14 slides : b&w and col.
1 stereograph reel (7 pairs of fr.) : col.
1 study print : col.
3 transparencies (5 overlays each) : col,
8.5D, Dimensions
8.5D1. Give the height X width in centimetres, to the next whole centimetre up, for all
graphic materials except filmstrips, filmslips, and stereographs. For these latter, see 8.5D2 and
8.5D3. For additional instructions on the dimensions of art works, slides, technical drawings,
transparencies, and wall charts, see 8.5D4-8.5D6.
16 flash cards : col. ; 28 X 10 cm.
1 flip chart (8 sheets) : double sided, col. ; 23 X 18
cm.
24 photographs : b&w ; 13 X 8 cm.
1 picture : b&w ; 20 X 25 cm.
1 radiograph ; 38 X 38 cm.
1 study print : col. ; 34 X 47 cm.
1 technical drawing : blueprint ; 87 X 87 cm.
If the graphic materials in a multipart item differ in size, give the smallest or smaller and
the largest or larger size, separated by a hyphen.
8.5D2. Filmstrips and filmslips. Give the gauge (width) of the film in millimetres.
1 filmstrip (50 fr.) : col. ; 35 mm.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
8-13
8.5D3
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.5D3. Stereographs. Do not give the dimensions.
8.5D4. Art originals, art prints, art reproductions, and transparencies. Give the height X
width of the item, excluding any frame or mount (see also 8.7B10).
1 art print : lithograph, col. ; 28 X 36 cm.
3 transparencies (15 overlays) : bSw ; 26 X 22 cm.
2 art originals : oil on canvas ; 28 X 40 cm. -30 X
45 cm.
8.5D5. Slides. Do not give the dimensions if they are 5 X 5 cm. (2X2 in.).
1 slide : col.
1 slide : bsw ; 7 X 7 cm.
8.5D6. Technical drawings and wall charts. Give the height X width when extended and
(when appropriate) folded, separating the dimensions by a comma.
1 wall chart : col. ; 244 X 26 cm., folded to 30 X 26 cm.
3 technical drawings : blueprint ; 100 X 40 cm. -120 X
60 cm.
8.5E. Accompanying material
8.5E1. Give the details of accompanying material as instructed in 1.5E.
1 stereograph reel (12 pairs of fr.) : col. + 1 booklet
40 slides : col. + 1 sound disc (30 min. : analog, 33 '/3
rpm, mono. ; 12 in.)
1 filmstrip (70 fr.) : sd., col. ; 35 mm. + 1 set of
teacher' s notes
Give details of integral sound systems as part of "other physical details" (see 8.5C1).
8.6. SERIES AREA
Contents:
8.6A. Preliminary rule
8.6B. Series statements
8.6A. Preliminary rule
8.6A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 ,0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Enclose each series statement (see 1.6J) in parentheses.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
Precede the ISSN of a series or subseries by a comma.
8-14
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.7B2
Precede the numbering within a series or subseries by a semicolon.
Enclose a date following a numeric and/or alphabetic designation in parentheses.
Precede the title of a subseries, or the designation for a subseries, by a full stop.
Precede the title of a subseries following a designation for the subseries by a comma.
8.6B. Series statements
8.6B1. Record each series statement as instructed in 1.6.
(Listening, looking, and feeling)
(At-a-flash time line cards ; set 1)
(Ward's solo-learn system)
(The sciences, Man and his environment ; TSB 3)
( Viewmaster science series. 4, Physics)
{ How the health are you? ; no. 3)
(Environmental studies, ISSN 8372-7639 ; v. 32)
8.7. NOTE AREA
Contents:
8.7A. Preliminary rule
8.7B, Notes
8.7A. Preliminary rule
8.7A1. Punctuation
Precede each note by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph for each.
Separate introductory wording from the main content of a note by a colon followed but not
preceded by a space.
8.7A2. In making notes, foliow the instructions in I.7A,
8.7B. Notes
Make notes as set out in the following subrules and in the order given there. However,
give a particular note first when it has been decided that note is of primary importance,
8.7B1. Nature or artistic form. Make notes on the nature or artistic form of a graphic item
unless it is apparent from the rest of the description.
Cross-cultural survey
8.7B2. Language. Give the language(s) of the spoken or written content of a graphic item
and its accompanying sound unless this is apparent from the rest of the description.
Captions in Spanish
Sound tape in Span ish and English
AACR2 Revision 2002
8-15
8.7B3
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.7B3. Source of title proper. Make notes on the source of the title proper if it is a container
or if it is other than the chief source of information (see 8.0B1).
Title from manufacturer's catalogue
8.7B4. Variations in title. Make notes on titles borne by the item other than the title proper.
Optionally, give a romanization of the title proper.
Also known as; The blue boy
Title on container: Japan
8.7B5. Parailel titles and other title information. Give the title in another language and
other title information not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility area if they are
considered to be important.
Subtitle; Cereals of the world
8.7B6, Statements of responsibility. Make notes on variant names of persons or bodies
named in statements of responsibility if these are considered to be important for identifica-
tion. Give statements of responsibility not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility
area. Make notes on persons or bodies connected with a work, or significant persons or bod-
ies connected with previous editions and not already named in the description.
Narrator : Rod Serling
Teacher's guide / by 14. McComb
Variously attributed to Mathew B. Brady, to Dan Adams, and
to Anthony, Edwards £ Co .
Donor, source, etc., and previous owner(s). Make notes on the donor or source of an
original graphic item and on previous owners if they can be easily ascertained. Add the year
or years of accession to the name of the donor or source, and the year or years of ownership
to the name of a previous owner.
8.7B7. Edition and history. Make notes relating to the edition being described or to the his-
tory of the item.
Originally released in 1965 with sound disc
Spanish version of: Your mouth speaking
Eased on the fairy tale by H . C . Andersen
8.7B9, Publication, distribution, etc. Make notes on publication, distribution, etc., details
that are not included in the publication, distribution, etc., area and are considered to be
important.
First released in 1969
8.7B10. Physical description. Make notes on important physical details that are not included
in the physical description area, especially if these affect the use of the item.
Scales vary
Composite photo.
Collage of wood, fabric, and paper
Filmslip mounted in rigid format for use with Phono-viewer
8-16
AACR2 Revision 2002
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.7B18
Images placed in frame both horizontally and vertically
Text on verso
Unmounted
Size when framed : 4 0 X 35 cm .
8.7B11. Accompanying material. Make notes on the location of accompanying material if
appropriate. Give details of accompanying material neither mentioned in the physical descrip-
tion area nor given a separate description (see 1.5E).
With 2 exhibition catalogues: 19th century America :
furniture and other decorative arts / by Marilynn Johnson,
Marvin D, Schwartz, and Suzanne Boorsch — 19th century
America : paintings and sculpture / by John K, Howat and
others
8.7B12. Series. Make notes on series data that cannot be given in the series area.
Originally issued in the series;
Series title on container:
(Container bears a variant form of the series title )
8.7B13. Dissertations. If the item being described is a dissertation, make a note as instructed
in 1.7BI3.
8.7B14. Audience. Make a brief note of the intended audience for, or intellectual level of, a
graphic item if this information is stated in the item, its container, or accompanying material.
Intended audience: Elementary grades
For remedial reading programmes
8.7B16. Other formats. Give the details of other formats in which the content of the item
has been issued.
Issued also with sound
Issued also with double frames
8.7B17. Summary. Give a brief objective summary of the content of an item unless another
part of the description provides enough information.
Aerial view of Champaign-Urbana, 111 .
Summary: Uses the children' s tale of Goldilocks and the
three bears in a programme of Spanish language instruction
Summary: A reading exercise which presents some little-
known facts about gopher snakes, crocodiles, and sea turtles
8.7B18. Contents. List the titles of individually named parts of a graphic item. Add to each
title any statements of responsibility not included in the title and statement of responsibility
area, and the number of cards, frames, slides, etc., when appropriate.
Contents : Penny, nickel , dime, quarter — Nickel , dime,
quarter, half-dollar — Dollar — Use of cent and dollar
notation — Addition and subtraction — Making change — Story
problems
AACR2 Revision 2002
8-17
8.7B19
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
Contents: Getting ahead of the game (81 fr.) - Decisions,
decisions (55 fr.) — Your money (72 f r . ) — How to be a loser
(65 fr.) — The law and your pocketbook (70 fr.) - The ail-
American consumer (63 fr. )
Make notes on additional or partial contents when appropriate.
End frames reproduce 5 famous Spanish paintings
8.7B19. Numbers. Give important numbers associated with the item other than ISBNs or
ISSNs (see 8.8B).
8.7B20. Copy being described, library's holdings, and restrictions on use. Make these
notes as instructed in 1.7B20.
Print (no. 45) signed by artist
8.7B2L "With" notes. If the title and statement of responsibility area contains a title that
applies to only a part of an item lacking a collective title and, therefore, more than one entry
is made, make a note beginning With: and listing the other separately titled works in the item
in the order in which they appear there.
With: The doom fulfilled — Ariadne
8.7B22. Note relating to the original. Make a note relating to the original of a reproduced
art work as instructed in 1.7B22,
Reproduction of: Femme nue en plein air. 1876. 1 art
original : oil on canvas, col . ; 7 9 X 64 cm. In Louvre
Museum, Paris
8.8. STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
Contents:
8.8A. Preliminary rule
8.8B. Standard number
8.8C. Key-title
8.8D. Terms of availability
8.8E. Qualification
8.8A. Preliminary rule
8.8A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede each repetition of this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a key-title by an equals sign.
Precede terms of availability by a colon.
Enclose a qualification to the standard number or terms of availability in parentheses.
8.8B. Standard number
8.8B1. Give the International Standard Book Number (ISBN) or International Standard Serial
Number (ISSN) assigned to an item as instructed in 1,8B.
8-18
AACR2 Revision 2002
GRAPHIC MATERIALS
8.11A
8.8B2. Give any other number in a note (see 8.7BI9).
8.8C. Key-title
8.8C1. Give the key-title of a resource as instructed in L8C.
8.8D. Optional addition. Terms of availability
8.8D1. Give the terms on which the item is available as instructed in L8D.
Free loan to students
For rent or sale ($10.00)
8.8E. Qualification
8.8E1. Add qualifications to the standard number and/or terms of availability as instructed in
1.8E.
8.9. SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
8.9A. Describe supplementary items as instructed in 1 .9.
8.10. ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
8.10A. Describe items made up of severai types of material as instructed in 1.10.
8.11. FACSIMILES, PHOTOCOPIES, AND OTHER REPRODUCTIONS
8.1 1A. Describe facsimiles, photocopies, and other reproductions as instructed in 1.1 1.
AACR2 Revision 2002
8-19
CHAPTER
9
Electronic Resources
Contents
9.0 GENERAL RULES
9.0A Scope
9. OB Sources of information
9.0C Punctuation
9.0D Levels of detail in the description
9.0E Language and script of the description
9.0F Inaccuracies
9.0G Accents and other diacritical marks
9.0H Items with several chief sources of information
9.1 TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
9. 1 A Preliminary rule
9. 1A1 Punctuation
9. IB Title proper
9.1C General material designation
9. ID Parallel titles
9. IE Other title information
9. IF Statements of responsibility
9.1G Items without a collective title
9.2 EDITION AREA
9.2A Preliminary rule
9.2 A! Punctuation
9.2B Edition statement
9.2C Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
9. 2D Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
9.2E Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
9.3 MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
9.4 PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
9.4A Preliminary rule
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
9.0
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.4 A 1 Punctuation
9.4B General rule
9.4C Place of publication, distribution, etc.
9.4D Name of publisher, distributor, etc,
9.4E Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
9.4F Date of publication, distribution, etc.
9.4G Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
9.5 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
9.5A Preliminary rule
9.5A1 Applicability
9.5A2 Punctuation
9.5B Extent of item (including specific material designation)
9.5C Other physical details
9.5D Dimensions
9.5E Accompanying material
9.6 SERIES AREA
9.6A Preliminary rule
9.6A1 Punctuation
9.6B Series statements
9.7 NOTE AREA
9.7A Preliminary rule
9.7A1 Punctuation
9.7B Notes
9.8 STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
9.8A Preliminary rule
9.8 A 1 Punctuation
9.8B Standard number
9.8C Key-title
9.8D Terms of availability
9, SB Qualification
9.9 SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
9.10 ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
9.0. GENERAL RULES
9.0A. Scope
9.0AI. The rules in this chapter cover the description of electronic resources. Electronic
resources consist of data (information representing numbers, text, graphics, images, maps,
moving images, music, sounds, etc.), programs (instructions, etc., that process the data for
use), or combinations of data and programs. Electronic resources often include components
with characteristics found in multiple classes of materials so there will frequently be a need
9-2
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.0B2
to consult other chapters. For example, in describing a serially-issued cartographic electronic
resource, use chapters 3, 9, and 12.
For cataloguing purposes, electronic resources may be treated in one of two ways depend-
ing on whether access is direct (local) or remote (networked). Direct access is understood to
mean that a physical carrier can be described. Such a carrier (e.g., disc/disk, cassette, car-
tridge) must be inserted into a computerized device or into a peripheral attached to a comput-
erized device. Remote access is understood to mean that no physical carrier can be handled.
Remote access can only be provided by use of an input-output device (e.g., a terminal), either
connected to a computer system (e.g., a resource in a network), or by use of resources stored
in a hard disk or other storage device.
9.0B. Sources of information
9 .OBI. Chief source of information. The chief source of information for electronic resources
is the resource itself.
Take the information from formally presented evidence (e.g., title screen(s), main menus,
program statements, initial display(s) of information, home page(s), the file header(s) includ-
ing "Subject:" lines, encoded metadata (e.g., TEI headers, HTML/XML meta tags), and the
physical carrier or its labels 1 )' including information that has been uncompressed, printed out,
or otherwise processed for use. If the information in these sources varies in degree of full-
ness, prefer the source that provides the most complete information.
If the information required is not available from the resource itself, take it from the follow-
ing sources (in this order of preference):
printed or online documentation or other accompanying material
(e.g., publisher's letter, "about" file, publisher's Web page
about an electronic resource)
information printed on a container issued by the publisher,
distributor, etc.
If the item being described consists of two or more separate physical parts, treat a con-
tainer or its permanently affixed label that is the unifying element as the chief source of infor-
mation if it furnishes a collective title and the formally presented information in, or the labels
on, the parts themselves do not.
If the information required is not available from the chief source or the sources listed
above, take it from the following sources (in this order of preference):
other published descriptions of the resource
other sources (e.g., metadata records)
9.0B2. Prescribed sources of information. The prescribed source(s) of information for each
area of the description of electronic resources is set out below. Enclose information taken
from outside the prescribed source(s) in square brackets.
1 , Label refers to any paper, plastic, etc., label permanently affixed to a physical carrier, or information printed or
embossed directly onto the physical earner by the publisher, creator, etc., of the resource, as opposed to those on the
container or to any label added locally.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
9-3
9.0C
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
AREA
PRESCRIBED SOURCES OF INFORMATION
Title and statement of
responsibility
Chief source of information, information
issued by the publisher, creator, etc.,
container
Chief source of information, information
issued by the publisher, creator, etc.,
container
Any source
Chief source of information, information
issued by the publisher, creator, etc.,
container
Any source
Chief source of information, information
issued by the publisher, creator, etc.,
container
Any source
Any source
Edition
Type and extent of resource
Publication, distribution, etc
Physical description
Series
Note
Standard number and terms
of availability
9,0C. Punctuation
For the punctuation of the description as a whole, see 1 .OC.
For the prescribed punctuation of elements, see the following rules.
9.0D. Levels of detail in the description
See 1.0D.
9.0E. Language and script of the description
See 1.0E.
9.0F. Inaccuracies
See 1.0F.
9.6G. Accents and other diacritical marks
See LOG.
9.0H. Items with several chief sources of information
See L0A3.
9.1. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
Contents:
9.1A. Preliminary rule
9. IB. Title proper
9.1C. General material designation
9-4
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.1C2
9.1D. Parallel titles
9. IE. Other title information
9. IF. Statements of responsibility
9.IG. Items without a collective title
9.1A. Preliminary rule
9.1A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 .OC.
Precede the title of a supplement or section (see 1.1B9) by a full stop.
Enclose the general material designation in square brackets.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede each unit of other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
For the punctuation of this area for items without a collective title, see 1.1G.
9. IB. Title proper
9.1B1. Transcribe the title proper as instructed in LIB.
WordStar
Practicalc II
Demon attack
The CPS 1974 American national election survey
Krell' s logo
Visitrend + visiplot
9.1B2. Always give the source of the title proper in a note {see 9.7B3). If the title has been
supplied (see 1.1B7), give the source of the supplied title in a note (see 9.7B3).
9.1B3. Do not record a file name or a data set name as the title proper unless it is the only
name given in the chief source. If desired, give a file name or data set name not used as the
title proper in a note (see 9.VB4).
9.1C. Optional addition. General material designation
9.1C1. Give immediately following the title proper the appropriate general material designa-
tion as instructed in l.IC.
Gertrude's puzzles [gmd]
9.1C2. If an electronic resource contains parts belonging to materials falling into two or more
categories, and if none of these is the predominant component, give either multimedia or kit
as the designation {see 1.1C1 and 1.10C1).
AACR2 Revision 2002
9-5
9.1D
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.1D. Parallel titles
9.1D1. Transcribe parallel titles as instructed in 1.1D.
Citizen participation in non-work-time activities [gmd] =
Participation des citoyens aux activites hors des heures de
travail
El asistente del instructor [gmd] = Teaching assistant
9.1E. Other title information
9.IE1. Transcribe other title information as instructed in LIE.
Vuf ile [gmd] : an information retrieval system for use with
files, lists, and data bases of all kinds
A.C.E. [gmd] : Applesoft command editor
9.1F. Statements of responsibility
9.1F1. Transcribe statements of responsibility relating to those persons or bodies credited
with a major role in creating the content of the resource as instructed in 1 .IK
Database [gmd] / Paul Fellows
The China study [gmd] / principal investigator, Angus
Campbell
Memory castle [gmd] / designed by Donna Stanger ;
programmed by Lon Koenig
Class records system [gmd] / by Que reus
Moby Dick [gmd] / by Herman Melville ; compiled and
produced by Princeton University Computer Center under the
direction of Robert Knight
Give all other statements of responsibility in notes (see 9.7B6).
9.1F2. Add a word or short phrase to the statement of responsibility if the relationship
between the title and the person(s) or body (bodies) named in the statement is not clear.
A reconstruction of Oliver Benson' s Simple diplomatic game
[GMD] / [developed by] Jeff Krend
Redistricting program [GMD] / [prepared by] Stuart Nagel
[for the] Inter-University Consortium for Political Research
9.1G. Items without a collective title
9.1G1. If an electronic resource lacks a collective title, either describe the item as a unit (see
9.1G2 and 9.IG3) or make a separate description for each separately titled part {see 9.1G4).
9.1G2. In describing as a unit an electronic resource lacking a collective title, transcribe the
titles of the individual parts as instructed in 1.1G3.
Personal bibliographic system [gmd] / by Victor Rosenberg.
Data transfer system / written by Cyrus Galambor and Peter
Rycus
9-6
AACR2 Revision 2002
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.2B1
Let' s go to a beer bust ;gmd] / written by Sue Beall and
Wayne Wyllie ; programmed by Kathy Kothmann . Time out /
writ ten by Ruth Cady ; programmed by Kathy Kothmann . Blood
alcohol content / by Robert S. Gold
9.1G3. Make the relationship between statements of responsibility and the parts of an item
lacking a collective title and described as a unit clear by additions as instructed in 9.1F2.
9.1G4. Optionally, make a separate description for each separately titled part of an item lack-
ing a collective title. For the statement of die extent in each of these descriptions, see 9.5B2.
Link the separate descriptions with notes {see 9.7B21). For instructions on sources of infor-
mation, see 9.0B.
92. EDITION AREA
Contents:
9.2A. Preliminary rule
9.2B. Edition statement
9.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
9.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
9.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
9.2A. Preliminary rule
9.2A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 ,0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a statement relating to a named revision of an edition by a comma.
Precede the first statement of responsibility following an edition statement by a diagonal
slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
9.2B. Edition statement
9.2B1. Transcribe a statement relating to an edition of an electronic resource that contains
differences from other editions of that resource, or to a named reissue of a resource, as
instructed in 1.2B.
Rev. ed.
MORC test ed.
Level 3.4
Rev. ed. 10/2/82
3rd update
Version 5.20
[Version] 1 . 1
Prelim, release 0 . 5
Interactive version
AACR2 Revision 2002
9-7
9.2B2
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
Give the source of the edition statement in a note (see 9.7B7) if it is different from the
source of the title proper.
9.2B2. In case of doubt about whether a statement is an edition statement, take the presence
of words such as edition, issue, version, release, level, update (or their equivaients in other
languages) as evidence that the statement is an edition statement, and transcribe it as such.
9.2B3. Optional addition. If an electronic resource lacks an edition statement but is known to
contain significant changes from other editions (e.g., changes in the data involving content,
standardized coding, etc.; changes in the programming including changes in the program
statements, programming language, and programming routines and operations; the addition of
sound or graphics; improvement of graphics), supply a suitable brief statement in the lan-
guage and script of the title proper and enclose it in square brackets.
[Version 7, Rev. version]
[Windows 95 ed. ]
9.2B4. Do not treat an issue of a resource that incorporates minor changes as a new edition.
Such minor changes include corrections of misspellings of data, changes in the arrangement
of the contents, changes in the output format or the display medium, and changes in the
physical characteristics (e.g., blocking factors, recording density). If desired, give the details
of such changes in a note (see 9.7B7).
9.2B5. If an item consists of multiple physical carriers, including accompanying material, and
there are multiple edition statements relating to the whole as well as to parts of the resource,
transcribe only the edition statement(s) relating to the whole resource in the edition area. Edi-
tion statements relating to parts may be given in a note (see 9.7B7).
9.2B6. If an edition statement appears in more than one language or script, transcribe the
statement that is in the language or script of the title proper. If this criterion does not apply,
transcribe the statement that appears first. Optionally, transcribe the parallel statement(s),
each preceded by an equals sign.
9.2B7. If an item lacking a collective title and described as a unit contains one or more works
with an associated edition statement, transcribe such statements following the titles and state-
ments of responsibility to which they relate, separated from them by a full stop.
9.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
9.2C1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more editions, but not to all
editions, of a resource as instructed in 1.2C and 9. IF. If desired, transcribe other statements
of responsibility relating to the edition in a note (see 9.7B7).
Rev. ed. / program has been converted from BASIC to
FORTRAN IV by Allen P. Smith
9.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
9.2D1. If an item is a named revision of an edition, transcribe the statement relating to that
revision as instructed in 1.2D.
ICPSR ed., OSIRIS IV version
Do not record statements relating to a named revision of an edition when the changes are
of a minor nature {see 9.2B4).
9-S
AACR2 Revision 2002
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.4C1
Do not record statements relating to a reissue that contains no changes unless the item is
considered to be of particular importance to the cataloguing agency,
9.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
9.2E1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more named revisions of an
edition {but not to all such revisions) as instructed in 1.2E and 9. IF.
3rd ed.. Version 1.2 / programmed by W.G. Toepfer
9.3. MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
9.3A. This area is not used for electronic resources.
9.4. PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
Contents:
9.4A. Preliminary rule
9.4B. General rule
9.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc,
9.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
9.4E. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
9.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
9.4G. Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
9.4A. Preliminary rule
9.4A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see l.OC.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space,
Precede a second or subsequently named place of publication, distribution, etc., by a
semicolon.
Precede the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., by a colon.
Enclose a supplied statement of function of a publisher, distributor, etc., in square brackets.
Precede the date of publication, distribution, etc, by a comma.
Enclose the details of manufacture (place, name, date) in parentheses.
Precede the name of a manufacturer by a colon.
Precede the date of manufacture by a comma.
9.4B. General rule
9.4B1. Record information about the place, name, and date of all types of publishing, distrib-
uting, etc., activities as instructed in I.4B.
9.4B2. Consider all remote access electronic resources to be published.
9.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
9.4C1. Give the place of publication, distribution, etc., of a published electronic resource as
instructed in 1.4C,
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
9-9
9.4C2
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.4C2. Do not record a place of publication, distribution, etc., for an unpublished electronic
resource. Do not record 5./. in such a case.
9.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
9.4D1. Give the name of the publisher, etc., and optionally the distributor, of a published
electronic resource as instructed in 1 ,4D.
London : Psion
Newton Upper Falls, Mass. ; Ipswich : Practicorp
(Cataloguing agency in the United Kingdom)
Prague : [s . n . ]
[S.I.] : Bruce & James Program Publishers ; [New York :
Distributed by Simon & Schuster]
Bellevue, Wash, : Temporal Acuity Products ; Owatonna,
Minn. : Distributed exclusively by Musictronic
[Honolulu? ] : M. R. Ogden
(A personal home page)
9.4D2. Do not record the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., for an unpublished electronic
resource. Do not record s.n. in such a case.
9.4E. Optional addition. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
9.4E1. Add to the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., a statement of function as instructed
in 1.4E.
Chicago : National Opinion Research Center ; Storrs, Conn.
: Roper Public Opinion Research Center [distributor]
9.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
9.4F1. Give the date of publication, distribution, etc., of a published electronic resource as
instructed in 1.4F.
Ann Arbor ; University of Michigan, Institute for Social
Research, 1968
Chicago : University of Chicago, 1961-1952
Richmond, Va . : Rhiannon Software, cl985
[United States : s.n., 198-]
[Jamestown, N.D.] : Northern Prairie Science Center,
[1995?] -
9.4F2. Give the date of creation of an unpublished electronic resource.
9.4F3. Give any other useful dates (e.g., dates of collection of data) in a note (see 9.7B7 and
9.7B9).
9-10
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.5BI
9.4F4. If there is no publication, distribution, etc., date which applies to the item as a whole,
and the item has multiple copyright dates which apply to various aspects of the production
(e.g., programming, sound production, graphics, documentation), transcribe only the latest
copyright date.
Optionally, transcribe the other dates in a note (see 9.7B7) or in a contents note (see
9.7B18).
9.4G. Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
9.4G1. If the name of the publisher is unknown and the place and name of the manufacturer
are found in the item, give that place and name as instructed in L4G.
[S.l. : s.n.], 1986 (Cleveland, Ohio : CD Wonderworks)
9.4G2. Optional addition. Give the place, name of manufacturer, and/or date of manufacture
if they are found in the item and differ from the place, name of publisher, etc., and date of
publication, etc., and are considered important by the cataloguing agency.
9.5. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
Contents:
9.5A. Preliminary rule
9.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
9.5C. Other physical details
9.5D. Dimensions
9.5E. Accompanying material
9.5A. Preliminary rule
9.5A1. Applicability
a) Direct access electronic resources. Give a physical description as instructed in 9.5B-
9.5E.
b) Remote access electronic resources. Do not give a physical description for an
electronic resource that is available only by remote access unless the option at 9.5B3 is
applied. See 9.7Blc, 9.7B8, and 9.7B10.
9.5A2. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 .OC.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede other physical details by a colon.
Precede dimensions by a semicolon.
Precede each statement of accompanying material by a plus sign.
Enclose physical details of accompanying material in parentheses,
9.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
9.5B1. For direct access electronic resources, record the number of physical units of the car-
rier by giving the number of them in arabic numerals and one of the following terms as
appropriate:
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
9-11
9.5B2
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
computer chip cartridge
computer disk
computer optica) disc
computer tape cartridge
computer tape cassette
computer tape reel
1 computer disk
2 computer tape cassettes
1 computer tape reel
1 computer optical disc
When new physical carriers are developed for which none of these terms is appropriate,
give the specific name of the physical carrier as concisely as possible, preferably qualified by
computer.
1 computer card
1 computer optical card
Optionally, use a term in common usage to record the specific format of the physical
carrier.
1 CD-ROM
2 Photo CDs
1 DVD-ROM
Optionally, give, in addition to the physical carrier, an appropriate term preferably taken
from subrule .5B of one of the chapters of part I if considered to be important.
184 remote -sens ing images on 1 CD-ROM
450 maps on 3 CD-ROMs
Give a trade name or other similar specification in a note (see 9.7Blb).
9.5B2. If the description is of a separately titled part of an item lacking a collective title (see
9.1G4), express the fractional extent in the form on reel 2, on 3 of 5 disks, on 1 disk, etc.
9.5B3. Optionally, record the extent of an electronic resource that is available only by remote
access. Use an appropriate term preferably taken from subrule .5B of one of the chapters of
part I or a term in common usage. See also 9.5C3.
1 photograph
6 remote-sensing images
1 sound file
Web site
1 electronic text
9-12
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.5C3
9.5B4. Give the number or approximate number of files that make up the content (use file or
files preceded by an arabic numeral) and/or the number or approximate number of records
(use records), statements (use statements), or bytes (give the term in either abbreviated or full
form), if readily available and considered to be important. Enclose additions in parentheses.
1 CD-ROM (1 file : 240,000 bytes)
1 computer disk (3 files : 100, 460, 550 records)
1 zip disk {96 irtb)
1 photograph (14,995 bytes)
If such characteristics cannot be given succinctly, give them in a note (see 9.7B8).
9.5C. Other physical details
9.5C1. If the resource is specified to have sound or is known to produce sound, give sd. If it
is specified or known to display in two or more colours, give col.
1 computer chip cartridge : sd .
1 computer disk : col .
1 computer disk cartridge : sd,, col.
Give details of the requirements for the production of sound or the display of colour in a
note (see 9.7Blb).
9.5C2. Optionally, give other physical characteristics (e.g., recording density, sectoring), if
readily available and if they are considered to be important.
1 computer disk : sd., col., single sided, single density,
soft sectored
2 computer tape reels : 6,250 bpi
If such characteristics cannot be given succinctly, give them in a note (see 9.7B10).
9.5C3. When recording the extent of an electronic resource that is available only by remote
access, give other details about the resource (e.g., file types) if readily available and consid-
ered to be important.
1 photograph : digital, TIFF file
69 p. : digital, PDF file
3 sound files : digital, mp3 file
1 electronic text : HTML file
If such characteristics cannot be given succinctly, give them in a note (see 9.7B10).
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
9-13
9.5D
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.5D. Dimensions
9.5D1. Give the dimensions of the physical carrier as instructed below,
a) Discs/Disks. Give the diameter of the disc or disk in inches, to the next l A inch up.
1 computer disk : col. ; 5% in.
1 computer optical disc : col. ; 4 3 /i in.
b) Cartridges. Give, in inches to the next 'A inch up, the length of the side of the cartridge
that is to be inserted into the machine.
1 computer chip cartridge ; 3 l A in.
c) Cassettes. Give the length and height of the face of the cassette in inches, to the next '/s
inch up.
1 computer tape cassette ; 3 7 /s X 7}/i in.
Optionally, give the dimensions of the physical carriers described in a)-c) in centimetres to
the next whole centimetre up.
d) Reels. Do not give dimensions for reels.
e) Other carriers. Give the appropriate dimensions of other physical carriers in inches or
in centimetres, rounding up as appropriate.
1 computer card ; 9 X 6 cm.
9.5D2. If the item consists of more than one physical carrier and they differ in size, give the
smallest or smaller and the largest or larger size, separated by a hyphen.
3 computer disks ; 3 L /2-5% in.
or 3 computer disks ; 9-14 cm.
9.5E. Accompanying material
9.5EI. Give the details of accompanying material as instructed in 1.5E.
1 computer disk ; 5 l A in, + 1 user's guide
1 computer disk : col. ; 3 L /2 in. + 1 v. (51 p. : ill. ;
20 cm.)
1 computer disk ; 5% in. + 1 user manual and addendum
(Accompanying material has title: User manual and addendum)
1 computer tape cassette : col. ; 3% X 2V2 in. + 1 sound
cassette (20 min. : analog, stereo.)
1 computer disk ; 3V2 in . + 1 demonstration disk + 1
codebook
2 identical computer disks ; 5% in.
1 computer tape cassette ; 3 7 /s X 2V2 in. +7 maps
9.5E2. If no physical description is given (see 9.5A1), give details of any accompanying
material in a note (see 9.7B 1 1 ).
9-14
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.7A2
9.6. SERIES AREA
Contents:
9.6A. Preliminary rule
9.6B. Series statements
9.6A. Preliminary rule
9.6A1, Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Enclose each series statement (see 1.6J) in parentheses.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
Precede the ISSN of a series or subseries by a comma.
Precede the numbering within a series or subseries by a semicolon.
Enclose a date following a numeric and/or alphabetic designation in parentheses.
Precede the title of a subseries, or the designation for a subseries, by a full stop.
Precede the title of a subseries following a designation for the subseries by a comma.
9.6B. Series statements
9.6BL Record each series statement as instructed in 1.6.
(Practicorp no-nonsense software)
{American national election study series ; no, 13)
(Series C. Machine-readable texts of Greek authors)
9.7. NOTE AREA
Contents:
9.7A. Preliminary rule
9.7B. Notes
9.7A. Preliminary rule
9.7A1, Punctuation
Precede each note by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph for each.
Separate introductory wording from the main content of a note by a colon followed but not
preceded by a space.
9.7A2. In making notes, follow the instructions in 1.7A.
AACR2 Revision 2002
9-15
9.7B
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.7B. Notes
Make notes as set out in the following submies and in the order given there. However,
give a particular note first when it has been decided that note is of primary importance.
9.7B1. Nature and scope, system requirements, and mode of access
a) Nature and scope. Make notes on the nature or scope of the resource unless it is appar-
ent from the rest of the description.
Game
Word processor
Combined time series analysis and graph plotting system
Spreadsheet, with word processing and graphic capabilities
b) System requirements. Make a note on the system requirements of the resource if the
information is readily available. Begin the note with System requirements:. Give the
following characteristics in the order in which they are listed below. Precede each
characteristic, other than the first, by a semicolon.
the make and model of the computer(s) on which the resource is
designed to run
the amount of memory required
the name of the operating system
the software requirements (including the programming language)
the kind and characteristics of any required or recommended
peripherals
the type of any required or recommended hardware modifications
System requirements: 48K RAM; Apple Disk II with
controller; col. monitor
(Resource requires colour monitor for display )
System requirements: IBM PC; 64K; colour card; 2 disk
drives
System requirements: Apple II, II+, or lie; 48K; DOS 3.3;
Applesoft in ROM
System requirements: IBM PC or 1002 compatible; 128K;
DOS 1.1 to DOS 2.1
System requirements: RTI Series 500 CD-ROM DataDrive
System requirements: IBM PC AT or XT; CD-ROM player and
drive
System requirements: 486/33MHZ PC, Macintosh, or Power
Macintosh; 8MB RAM; Windows 3.1 (or higher) or System 7.0.1
{or higher); Java-capable Web browser; VGA Monitor
(May also be given as separate system requirement statements for each make and
model of the computer)
c) Mode of access. If a resource is available only by remote access, always specify the
mode of access. Begin the note with Mode of access:.
Mode of access: AUSINET
9-16
AACR2 Revision 2002
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.7B5
Mode of access: Electronic mail using ARPA
Mode of access: World Wide Web
Mode of access: Internet via ftp
9.7B2. Language and script. Give the language(s) and/or script(s) of the spoken or written
content of a resource unless this is apparent from the rest of the description.
In German
Greek language transcribed in medieval manuscript
tradition
Screen text and audio in English and French
Record the programming language as part of the system requirements note (see 9.7Blb).
9.7B3. Source of title proper. Always give the source of the title proper.
Title from title screen
Title from "catalogue record" provided by the producer
Title from codebook
Title supplied in correspondence by creator of the
resource
Title supplied by cataloguer
Title from Web page (viewed on May 29, 1999)
(Source of title note combined with item described note )
9.7B4. Variations in title. Make notes on titles borne by the item other than the title proper.
Optionally, give a romanization of the title proper.
Title on manual: Compu-math decimals
Also known as: MAXLIK
Title in HTML header: American Birding Association home
page
Second title screen: Personal finances and other
applications
Optionally, transcribe a file name or data set name if it differs from the title proper. For a
locally assigned file name or data set name, see 9.7B20.
File name: CC. RIDER
9.7B5. Parallel titles and other title information. Give the title in another language and
other title information not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility area if they are
considered to be important.
Subtitle on container: Life & work of explorer Thor
Heyerdahl
Parallel title in HTML header: Legende et realite : les
heros historiques et legendaires du Canada
AACR2 Revision 2002
9-17
9.7B6
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.7B6. Statements of responsibility. Make notes on variant names of persons or bodies
named in statements of responsibility if they are considered to be important for identification.
Give statements of responsibility not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility area.
Make notes on persons or bodies connected with a work, or significant persons or bodies con-
nected with previous editions and not already named in the description.
Data collected in collaboration with Christiane Klapisch,
Ecole pratique des hautes etudes, Paris
Additional contributors to program: Eric Rosenfeld, Debra
Spencer
Simulation rev . and reprogrammed by John Smi th for use in
an online time-sharing environment
Systems designer, Henry Letow ; sound, LF Acoustics
User' s guide by John Unger Zussman
Program initially developed by Richard Strauss, Jean Foss,
and Mable Kinzie and ported to HTML by Bill Looney, Jason
Mitchell, and Mable Kinzie
Web site hosted by the University of Edinburgh Dept. of
Geography
9.7B7. Edition and history. Give the source of the edition statement if it is different from
the source of the title proper.
Ed. statement from container label
Make notes relating to the edition being described or to the history of the item.
Updated version of 1982 program
Program first issued in 1981
Re-published on the Internet, Nov, 1997
I s sued in part in print as: Protected areas of the world :
a review of national systems . Gland, Switzerland : IUCN,
cl991-cl992; and as latest ed. of: United Nations list of
national parks and protected areas
Originally published in print: Pierre, SD : South Dakota
Dept. of Game, Fish & Parks, Wildlife Division, cl991.
(Report / South Dakota Division of Wildlife ; no. 91-04)
Give details of minor changes such as those listed in 9.2B4 if they are considered to be
important.
Mnemonic tags substituted for numeric tags
Monochrome version recoded for colour
Cite other works upon which the item depends for its content.
Based on: Historiae / Thucydides ; edited by H.S, Jones
and J.E. Powell. Oxford : Clarendon Press, 1967-1970
Give the following dates and details about them if they are considered to be important to
the understanding of the content, use, or nature of the resource:
9-18
AACR2 Revision 2002
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.7B11
the date(s) covered by the content of a resource
the date(s) when data were collected
the date(s) of accompanying material not described separately if
they differ from those of the resource being described
New England sermons, 1790-1900
Data collected May-Aug. 1981
Manual dated 1983
Includes supplementary file dated 1981
9.7B8. Type and extent of resource. Give information relating to the type and extent of the
resource if it is considered to be important and not found elsewhere in the description.
Electronic data (2 files : 800, 1250 records) and programs
(3 files : 7260, 3490, 5076 bytes)
Hierarchical file structure
Number of variables : 9 60
Number of routines: 102
File size: 520, 300, 280, 400, 320, 400, 500 records
File size varies
File size unknown
ASCII character set
Blocked BCDs, 40 records per block, 90 characters per
record
9.7B9. Publication, distribution, etc. Make notes on publication, distribution, etc., details
that are not included in the publication, distribution, etc., area and are considered to be
important.
Solely distributed by the Laboratory
User's manual distributed by the American Political
Science Association, Washington, D.C.
9.7B10. Physical description. Make notes on important physical details that are not included
in the physical description area, especially if these affect the use of the item.
Stereo, sd.
Displays in red, yellow, and blue
Not copy-protected
9.7B11. Accompanying material. Make notes on the location of accompanying material if
appropriate. Give details of accompanying material neither mentioned in the physical descrip-
tion area nor given a separate description (see 1 ,5E).
Accompanied by a series of 5 programs in PL/1, with
assembler subroutines
Accompanied by documentation: 1980 census user's guide.
Pts. 1-2. Washington, D.C. : Supt. of Docs., 1982
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
9-19
9.7B12
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
Set accompanied by one teacher's and parents' guide,
ti tied : Using primary sources / by James A. Peroco ; and one
user' s guide . A teacher' s guide accompanies each disc
Accompanied by 1 tutorial, 1 installation and performance
guide, 1 AutoLISP programmer's reference, 1 IGES interface
specifications, 1 addendum, 1 plastic template
9.7B12. Series. Make notes on series data that cannot be given in the series area.
Originally issued in series: European Community study
series
9.7B13. Dissertations. If the item being described is a dissertation, make a note as instructed
in 1.7B13.
Thesis (M. A. ) —University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign,
1984
9.7B14. Audience. Make a brief note of the intended audience for, or intellectual level of, a
resource if this information is stated in or on the item, its container, or accompanying
material.
For ages 7-10
Intended audience: High school students
For use by qualified medical practitioners only
Designed for those with a professional interest in
analyzing spatial data (e.g., geographers, planners,
meteorologists)
9.7B16. Other formats. Give the details of other formats in which the content of the
resource has been issued.
Data issued also in printed form and in microform
Issued also for IBM PC and PC-compatible hardware
Database also on CD-ROM; included in: Arctic and Antarctic
regions (National Information Services Corp.)
Database and other associated documentation available in a
Mac version and in four PC-compatible formats: tab-delimited
ASCII file; SPSS portable file; Excel file; SAS formatted
file
9.7BI7. Summary. Give a brief objective summary of the purpose and content of an item
unless another part of the description provides enough information.
Summary: Can be used to manipulate, weigh, and aggregate
raw data in any manner desired. By assigning values to the
coordinate locations of data points or data zones, the user
may produce three types of map : contour, proximal, or
conformant
Summary: Responses of New York City adults to Harris study
questionnaire used during Apr. and May 1969
Summary: Eight versions of a video game for 1-2 players.
To survive, players use laser cannons to destroy flying
demons
9-20 AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.7B22
Summary: A simulation of Operation Barbarossa, the German
invasion of Russia during World War II
Summary: Utility program, featuring a screen saver with
video clips from the TV show, wallpaper, and sound effects
9.7B18. Contents. List the parts of a resource.
Contents: 1. Idaho — 2. Montana - 3. Oregon —
4 . Washington
Contents: Moby Dick — Last of the Mohicans — Huckleberry
Finn — Scarlet letter
Make notes on additional or partial contents when appropriate.
Contains information on all 50 states
Each record contains selected fields from the records
with fewer than 2049 characters issued on LC MARC tape v. 6,
no . 5
9.7B19. Numbers. Give important numbers associated with the item other than ISBNs or
ISSNs (see 9.8B).
APX-10050
9.7B20. Copy being described, library's holdings, and restrictions on use. Make these
notes as instructed in 1 .7B20. If desired, give a locally assigned file or data set name. If
desired, give the date when the content of the resource was copied from, or transferred to,
another source.
Local data set name: RBBIT.l
Library' s set lacks disk 7
Copied June 1983
Restricted to scholarly use
Resource copied Apr. 1999 from local area network
Restricted to users at subscribing institutions
9.7B21. "With" notes. If the title and statement of responsibility area contains a title that
applies to only a part of an item lacking a collective title and, therefore, more than one entry
is made, make a note beginning With: and listing the other separately titled works in the item
in the order in which they appear there.
With: Uncle Sam's jigsaw — U.S. Constitution tutor —
Scramble
9.7B22. Item described. For remote access resources, always give the date on which the
resource was viewed for description.
Description based on contents viewed Sept. 16, 1998
AACR2 Revision 2002
9-21
9.8
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.8. STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
Contents:
9.SA. Preliminary rule
9.8B. Standard number
9.SC. Key-title
9.8D. Terms of availability
9.8E. Qualification
9.8A, Preliminary rule
9.8A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see l.OC.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede each repetition of this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a key-title by an equals sign.
Precede terms of availability by a colon.
Enclose a qualification to the standard number or terms of availability in parentheses.
9.8B. Standard number
9.8B1. Give the International Standard Book Number (ISBN) or International Standard Serial
Number (ISSN) assigned to a resource as instructed in I. SB.
ISBN 0-89138-111-2 (codebook)
9.8B2. Give any other number assigned to a resource in a note (see 9.7B19).
9.8C. Key-title
9.8C1. Give the key-title of a resource as instructed in 1.8C.
9.8D. Optional addition. Terms of availability
9.8D1. Give the terms on which the item is available as instructed in 1.8D.
$800 .00
ISBN 0-87085-315-5 : $99,95
Free to universities and colleges, for hire to others
9.8E. Qualification
9.8E1. Add qualifications to the standard number and/or terms of availability as instructed in
1.8E.
ISBN 0-87490-399-8 : $49.00 ($19.00 for students)
9-22
AACR2 Revision 2002
ELECTRONIC RESOURCES
9.10A
9.9. SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
9.9A. Describe supplementary items as instructed in 1.9.
9.10. ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
9.10A. Describe items made up of several types of material as instructed in 1.10.
AACR2 Revision 2002
9-23
CHAPTER
10
Three-Dimensional Artefacts
and Realia
Contents
10.0 GENERAL RULES
10.0A Scope
10-OB Sources of information
10.0C Punctuation
10.0D Levels of detail in the description
10. OE Language and script of the description
10-OF Inaccuracies
iO.OG Accents and other diacritical marks
30.0H Items with several chief sources of information
10.1 TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
10. 1A Preliminary rule
10.1 Al Punctuation
10. IB Title proper
10.1C General material designation
10.1D Parallel titles
10-1E Other title information
10-1F Statements of responsibility
10-tG Items without a collective title
10.2 EDITION AREA
10. 2A Preliminary rule
10.2A1 Punctuation
10. 2B Edition statement
30.2C Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
10.2D Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
10.2E Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
10.3 MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
10.4 PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
I0.4A Preliminary rule
10.4A1 Punctuation
10. 4B General rule
10.4C Place of publication, distribution, etc.
10.4D Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
AACR2 Revision 2002
10-1
10.0
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ARTEFACTS AND REAL I A
10.4E Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
10.4F Date of publication, distribution, etc.
10.4G Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
1 0.5 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
10. 5A Preliminary rule
10,5 A 1 Punctuation
10.5B Extent of item (including specific material designation)
10. 5C Other physical details
10.5C1 Material
10.5C2 Colour
10.5D Dimensions
10.5E Accompanying material
10.6 SERIES AREA
10, 6A Preliminary rule
10.6A1 Punctuation
10. 6B Series statements
10.7 NOTE AREA
10. 7A Preliminary rule
10.7A1 Punctuation
10.7B Notes
10.8 STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
10. 8A Preliminary rule
10.8A1 Punctuation
10.8B Standard number
10.8C Key-title
10.8D Terms of availability
10.SE Qualification
10.9 SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
10.10 ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
10.0. GENERAL RULES
10.0A. Scope
10.0A1. The rules in this chapter cover the description of three-dimensional objects of all
kinds (other than those covered in previous chapters), including models, dioramas, games
(including puzzles and simulations), braille cassettes, sculptures and other three-dimensional
art works, exhibits, machines, and clothing. They also cover the description of naturally
occurring objects, including microscope specimens (or representations of them) and other
specimens mounted for viewing. For the description of three-dimensional cartographic mate-
rials (e.g., relief models, globes), see chapter 3.
10-2
AACR2 Revision 2002
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ARTEFACTS AND REALIA
10.0H3
10.0B. Sources of information
10.0B1. Chief source of information. The chief source of information for the materials cov-
ered in this chapter is the object itself together with any accompanying textual material and
container issued by the publisher or manufacturer of the item. Prefer information found on
the object itself (including any permanently affixed labels) to information found in the
accompanying textual material or on a container.
10.0B2. Prescribed sources of information. The prescribed source(s) of information for
each area of the description of these materials is set out below. Enclose information taken
from outside the prescribed source(s) in square brackets.
AREA
Title and statement of
responsibility
Edition
Publication, distribution, etc.
Physical description
Series
Note
Standard number and terms
of availability
PRESCRIBED SOURCES OF INFORMATION
Chief source of information
Chief source of information
Chief source of information
Any source
Chief source of information
Any source
Any source
10.0C. Punctuation
For the punctuation of the description as a whole, see 1 .OC.
For the prescribed punctuation of elements, see the following rules.
10.0D. Levels of detail in the description
See i.OD.
10.0E. Language and script of the description
See 1.0E.
10.0F. Inaccuracies
See 1.0F.
10.0G. Accents and other diacritical marks
See 1 .OG.
10.0H. Items with several chief sources of information
10.0H1. Multipart items with a container that is a unifying element. Prefer information
found on a container that is the unifying element of a multipart item to information found on
the objects.
10.0H2. Multipart items without a container that is a unifying element. See 1.0A3.
10.0H3. Single part items. See 1.0A3.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
10-3
10.1
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ARTEFACTS AND RE A LI A
10.1. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
Contents:
1 0.1 A. Preliminary rale
10.1B. Title proper
10. 1C. General material designation
10.1D. Parallel titles
10. IE. Other title information
10.1F. Statements of responsibility
10.1G. Items without a collective title
10.1A, Preliminary rule
10.1A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Enclose the general material designation in square brackets.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede each unit of other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
For the punctuation of this area for items without a collective title, see 1.1G.
10.1B. Title proper
10.1B1. Transcribe the title proper as instructed in 1. IB.
Human development models
Solar system simulator
Muscular dynamism, or, Unique forms of continuity in space
1787
Adventure with sea-shells
[Woman' s dress]
Tooth development
[United States silver dollar]
Pet rock
If the title proper is not taken from the chief source of information, give the source of the
title in a note (see 10.7B3).
10.1C. Optional addition. General material designation
10.1C1. Give immediately following the title proper the appropriate general material designa-
tion as instructed in 1.1C.
10.1C2. If an item contains parts belonging to materials falling into two or more categories,
and if none of these is the predominant constituent of the item, give either multimedia or kit
as the designation (see 1.1C1 and 1.10C1).
10-4
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ARTEFACTS AND RE A LI A
10.2A1
10.10. Parallel titles
10.1D1. Transcribe parallel titles as instructed in l.ID.
Tarot cards [gmd] = L'ancien tarot
10.1E. Other title information
10.1E1. Transcribe other title information as instructed in LIE.
The language arts box ;gmd] : 150 games, activities,
manipulatives
10.1F. Statements of responsibility
10.1F1. Transcribe statements relating to persons or bodies responsible for the creation of the
item, or for its display or selection, as instructed in LIE
Hang-up [gmd] / developed by W,J. Gordon and T. Poze
Rosetta Stone unit [gmd] / consultant, Edward L.B. Terrace
A trip to the zoo [GMDi / created by the fourth grade class
of Washington Elementary School, Berkeley, CA
10.1F2. Add a word or short phrase to the statement of responsibility if the relationship
between the title and the person(s) or body (bodies) named in the statement is not clear.
10.1G. Items without a collective title
10.1G1. If an item lacks a collective title, transcribe the titles of the individual parts as
instructed in 1.1G.
10.1G2. Make the relationship between statements of responsibility and the parts of an item
lacking a collective title clear by additions as instructed in 10.1F2.
10.2. EDITION AREA
Contents:
10.2A. Preliminary rule
10.2B. Edition statement
10.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
I0.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
I0.2E, Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
10.2A. Preliminary rule
10.2A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see LOG.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a statement relating to a named revision of an edition by a comma.
Precede the first statement of responsibility following an edition statement by a diagonal
slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
AACR2 Revision 2002
10-5
10.2B
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ARTEFACTS AND REAL 1 A
10.2B. Edition statement
10.2B1. Transcribe a statement relating to an edition of an artefact that contains differences
from other editions of that artefact, or to a named reissue of an artefact, as instructed in 1.2B.
The fable game [gmdj = II gioco delle favole / Enzo Mari. —
2nd ed. / with cards re-drawn in colour
Subbuteo table soccer [gkd] . — World Cup ed.
10.2B2. In case of doubt about whether a statement is an edition statement, follow the
instructions in 1.2B3.
10.2B3. Optional addition. If an item lacks an edition statement but is known to contain sig-
nificant changes from other editions, supply a suitable brief statement in the language and
script of the title proper and enclose it in square brackets.
[t-Jew ed. ]
[ 5" ed . ]
10.2B4. If an edition statement appears in more than one language or script, transcribe the
statement that is in the language or script of the title pauper. If this criterion does not apply,
transcribe the statement that appears first. Optionally, transcribe the parallel statement(s),
each preceded by an equals sign.
10.2B5. If an item lacking a collective title contains one or more works with an associated
edition statement, transcribe such statements following the titles and statements of responsi-
bility to which they relate, separated from them by a full stop.
10.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
10.2C1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more editions, but not to
all editions, of an artefact as instructed in 1.2C and 10.IF.
10.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
10.2D1. If an item is a named revision of an edition, transcribe the statement relating to that
revision as instructed in 1.2D.
Do not record statements relating to a reissue that contains no changes unless the item is
considered to be of particular importance to the cataloguing agency.
10.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
10.2E1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more named revisions of
an edition (but not to all such revisions) as instructed in 1.2E and 10.1F.
10.3. MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
10.3A. This area is not used for three-dimensional artefacts and realia.
10-6
AACR2 Revision 2002
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ARTEFACTS AND REALIA
10.4D2
10.4. PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
Contents:
10.4A. Preliminary rule
10.4B. General rule
10.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
10.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
10.4E. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
10.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
10.4G. Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
10.4A. Preliminary rule
10.4A1. Punctuation
For instructions on trie use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 .0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a second or subsequently named place of publication, distribution, etc., by a
semicolon.
Precede the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., by a colon.
Enclose a supplied statement of function of a publisher, distributor, etc., in square brackets.
Precede the date of publication, distribution, etc., by a comma.
Enclose the details of manufacture (place, name, date) in parentheses.
Precede the name of a manufacturer by a colon.
Precede the date of manufacture by a comma.
10.4B. General rule
10.4B1. Record information about the place, name, and date of all types of publishing, dis-
tributing, etc., activities as instructed in 1 .4B.
10.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
10.4C1. Give the place of publication, distribution, etc., of a published artefact as instructed
in 1.4C.
10.4C2. Do not record a place of publication, distribution, etc., for a naturally occurring
object (other than one mounted for viewing or packaged for presentation) or for an artefact
not intended primarily for communication. Do not record s.l. in such a case.
10.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
10.4D1. Give the name of the publisher, etc., and optionally the distributor, as instructed in
1.4D.
Philadelphia : DC A Educational Products
Circle Pines, Minn. : American Guidance Service
10.4D2. Do not record the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., for a naturally occurring
object (other than one mounted for viewing or packaged for presentation) or for an artefact
not intended primarily for communication. Do not record s.n. in such a case.
AACR2 Revision 2002
10-7
10.4E
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ARTEFACTS AND RE ALIA
10.4E. Optional addition. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
10.4E1. Add to the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., a statement of function as instructed
in 1.4E.
10.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
10.4F1. Give the date of publication, distribution, etc., as instructed in 1.4F.
Chicago : Science Research Associates, 1971
Cambridge, Mass. : Synetics Education Systems, cl969
10.4F2. In the case of naturally occurring objects (other than those mounted for viewing or
packaged for presentation), do not give a date. In the case of artefacts not intended primarily
for communication, give the date of manufacture.
[English Victorian costume] [gmdj , - [186-?]
[United States silver dollar] (Gmd] . - 1931
10.4G. Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
10.4G1. If the name of the publisher is unknown or if there is no publisher {see 10.4C2 and
10.4D2), and the place and the name of the manufacturer are known, give that place and
name as instructed in 1 .4G.
[Wooden chair] [gmd] . — 1881 (Chiswick : Morris & Co.)
[Millefiori paperweight] [gmd] . - [1890?] (Paris : Reynaud
f reres )
10.4G2. If the person or body responsible for the manufacture of the object has been named
in a statement of responsibility (see 10. IF), do not repeat the place and name here.
[Applique quilt, album style, Baltimore, Md.] !GMD] / Anna
Putney Farrington. — 1857
(Quill is signed and dated)
10.4G3. Optional addition. Give the place, name of manufacturer, and/or date of manufacture
if they are found on the item or in accompanying textual material or on a container and differ
from the place, name of publisher, etc., and date of publication, etc., and are considered
important by the cataloguing agency.
London : Her Majesty's Stationery Office, 1976 (London :
UDO (Litho) )
10.5. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
Contents:
1 0.5 A. Preliminary rule
10.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
10.5C. Other physical details
10.5D. Dimensions
10.5E. Accompanying material
10-S
AACR2 Revision 2002
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ARTEFACTS AND REALIA
I0.5B1
10.5A. Preliminary rule
10.5A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede other physical details by a colon.
Precede dimensions by a semicolon.
Precede each statement of accompanying material by a plus sign.
Enclose physical details of accompanying material in parentheses.
10.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
10.5B1, Record the number of physical units of a three-dimensional artefact or object by giv-
ing the number of parts in arabic numerals and one of the terms listed below, as appropriate.
art original
art reproduction
braille cassette
diorama
exhibit
game
microscope slide
mock-up
model
1 game
2 dioramas
1 microscope slide
2 braille cassettes
6 microscope slides
If none of these terms is appropriate, give the specific name of the item or the names of the
parts of the item as concisely as possible.
1 clockwork toy train
2 jigsaw puzzles
3 hand puppets
2 feather headbands, 1 pair beaded moccasins
3 quilts
Optionally, if general material designations are used (see I.1C1) and the general material
designation consists of one of the above listed terms, omit that term and give a description of
the components alone (see 10.5B2).
1 board, 32 pieces, 2 poker dice
AACR2 Revision 2002
10-9
10.5B2
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ARTEFACTS AND REAL I A
10.5B2. Add Lo the designation, when appropriate, the number and the name(s) of the compo-
nent pieces.
1 jigsaw puzzle (1,000 pieces)
1 game (1 board, 50 cards, 5 role cards, 2 dice)
If the pieces cannot be named concisely or if their number cannot be readily ascertained,
add (various pieces) and optionally give the details of the pieces in a note (see 10.7B10).
2 games (various pieces )
1 diorama (various pieces)
Note: Contains 1 small stage, 5 foreground transparencies,
2 backgrounds, 5 story sheets, and 1 easel
10.5C. Other physical details
10.5C1. Material. When appropriate, give the material(s) of which the object is made. If the
materials) cannot be named concisely, either omit the statement or give it in a note. Give the
material of which a microscope slide is made if it is other than glass.
2 models (various pieces) : polystyrene
1 diorama (various pieces) : plywood and papier mache
1 statue : marble
2 paperweights : glass
1 quilt : cotton
1 j igsaw puzzle : wood
1 microscope slide : plastic
10.5C2. Colour. When appropriate, give col. for multicoloured objects, or name the colour(s)
of the object if it is in one or two colours, or give b&w for black and white objects. If a
microscope slide is stained, state this.
1 bowl : porcelain, blue and white
1 model : wood, blue
1 paperweight : glass, col,
1 model : balsa wood and paper, b&w
1 microscope slide : stained
10.5D. Dimensions
10.5D1. When appropriate, give the dimensions of the object Give them in centimetres, to
the next whole centimetre up. If necessary, add a word to indicate which dimension is being
given. If multiple dimensions are given, give them as height X width X depth (for micro-
scope slides, height X width).
1 sculpture
polished bronze
110 cm. high
6 microscope slides
stained
3X8 cm.
10-10
AACR2 Revision 2002
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ARTEFACTS AND REALIA
10.6A1
10.5D2. If the object is in a container, name the container and give its dimensions either after
the dimensions of the object or as the only dimensions, separating the dimensions by a
comma when appropriate.
1 model (10 pieces) : col. ; 16 X 32 X 3 cm., in case
17 X 34 X 6 cm.
1 diorama (various pieces) : col. ; in box 30 X 25 X
13 cm.
1 jigsaw puzzle : wood, col. ; in box 25 X 32 X 5 cm.
10.5D3. If, in a multipart item, the objects and/or their containers differ in size, give the
smallest or smaller and the largest or larger size, separated by a hyphen.
3 sculptures : marble ; 150-210 cm. high
2 jigsaw puzzles : cardboard, col, ; in boxes 20 X 30
X 5 cm. -26 X 35 X 6 cm.
10.5E. Accompanying materia)
10.5EI. Give the details of accompanying material as instructed in I.5E.
5 models : col. ; in box 20 X 20 X 12 cm. + 1 teacher's
guide (3 v. ; 30 cm.)
1 hand puppet : red and blue ; 20 cm. long + 1 sound disc
(20 min, : analog, 33'/j rpm, mono. ; 12 in.)
10.6. SERIES AREA
Contents:
I0.6A. Preliminary rule
10.6B. Series statements
I0.6A. Preliminary rule
10.6A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see I.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Enclose each series statement (see 1.6J) in parentheses.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
Precede the ISSN of a series or subseries by a comma.
Precede the numbering within a series or subseries by a semicolon.
Enclose a date following a numeric and/or alphabetic designation in parentheses.
Precede the title of a subseries, or the designation for a subseries, by a full stop.
Precede the title of a subseries following a designation for the subseries by a comma.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
10-11
10.6B
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ARTEFACTS AND REALIA
10.6B. Series statements
10.6B1. Record each series statement as instructed in 1.6.
(Dioramas of American history ; 7)
(Beatrix Potter jigsaw puzzles ; no . 3 )
10.7. NOTE AREA
Contents:
10.7A. Preliminary rule
10.7B. Notes
10.7A. Preliminary rule
10.7AL Punctuation
Precede each note by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph for each.
Separate introductory wording from the main content of a note by a colon followed but not
preceded by a space.
10.7 A2. In making notes, follow the instructions in 1.7A.
10.7B. Notes
Make notes as set out in the following subrules and in the order given there. However,
give a particular note first when it has been decided that note is of primary importance.
10.7B1. Nature of the item. Give the nature of the item unless it is apparent from the rest of
the description.
Study of a figure in motion
Section of fetal pig mandible
10.7B3. Source of title proper. Make notes on the source of the title proper if it is other than
the chief source of information.
Title supplied by cataloguer
Title taken from sales catalogue
10.7B4. Variations in title. Make notes on titles borne by the item other than the title proper.
Optionally, give a romanization of the title proper.
Title on container: DNA-RNA protein synthesis model kit
10.7B5. Parallel titles and other title information. Give the title in another language and
other title information not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility area if they are
considered to be important.
Subtitle on container: Elementary dental model
10.7B6. Statements of responsibility. Make notes on variant names of persons or bodies
named in statements of responsibility if these are considered to be important for identifica-
tion. Give statements of responsibility not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility
10-12
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ARTEFACTS AND RE ALIA
10.7B14
area. Make notes on persons or bodies connected with a work, or significant persons or bod-
ies connected with previous editions and not already named in the description.
"Developed by Frederick A. Rasmussen of E [ ducational ]
R[esearch] C[ouncil of America]"
10.7B7. Edition and history- Make notes relating to the edition being described or to the
history of the item. Cite other works upon which the item depends for its intellectual or artis-
tic content.
Recast in bronze from artist's plaster original of 1903
Game based on : Lateral thinking / by M. Freedman
10.7B9. Publication, distribution, etc. Make notes on publication, distribution, etc., details
that are not included in the publication, distribution, etc., area and are considered to be
important.
10.7BI0. Physical description. Make notes on important physical details that are not
included in the physical description area, especially if these affect the use of the item. If the
physical description includes various pieces and a description of the pieces is considered to
be useful, give such a description.
Four times actual size. — The parts of the ear are painted
to show anatomical structure
Includes headdress, beaded shirt, trousers, and moccasins
Pattern: Pennsylvania wild goose
Contains 1 small stage, 5 foreground transparencies, 2
backgrounds, 5 story sheets, and 1 easel
10.7B1I. Accompanying material. Make notes on the location of accompanying material if
appropriate. Give details of accompanying material neither mentioned in the physical descrip-
tion area nor given a separate description (see 1.5E),
Teacher's guide / by Robert Garry Shirts. 24 p.
With instructor and student guides, 16 taped lectures,
cassette recorder, and course guide {4 v.)
Book (in container) entitled: The adventure book of shells
/ by Eva Knox Evans
10.7B12. Series. Make notes on series data that cannot be given in the series area.
10.7B13. Dissertations. If the item being described is a dissertation, make a note as
instructed in 1.7B13.
Thesis (M . I . D . ) —Rhode Island School of Design, 1990
I0.7B14. Audience. Make a brief note of the intended audience for, or intellectual level of,
an item if this information is stated in the item.
For medical students
Intended audience: Junior high and up
AACR2 Revision 2002
10-13
10.7B17
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ARTEFACTS AND REALIA
10.7B17. Summary. Give a brief objective summary of the content of an item unless another
part of the description provides enough information.
Summary : Illustrations of animals and background scenery,
with stands, which may be rearranged to create various
scenes of animals at the zoo
Summary; Puppets from a set designed to dramatize real-
life situations
10.7B18. Contents. List the individually named parts of an object. Make notes on additional
or partial contents when appropriate.
Contents: Colony — Frontier — Reconstruction — Promotion —
Intervention — Development
Contents: Sperm cell in uterus — 2-week embryo — 7- to 8-
week fetus — 13-week fetus — 18- to 20-week fetus
Includes a simpl i f ied vers ion of the game
10.7B19. Numbers. Give important numbers associated with the item other than ISBNs or
ISSNs (see 10.8B).
10.7B2O. Copy being described, library's holdings, and restrictions on use. Make these
notes as instructed in 1.7B20.
Set lacks 2 puppets
10.7B21. "With" notes. If the title and statement of responsibility area contains a title that
applies to only a part of an item lacking a collective title and, therefore, more than one entry
is made, make a note beginning With: and listing the other separately titled works in the item
in the order in which they appear there.
Wi th : Backgammon — Checkers
10.8. STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
Contents:
10.8A. Preliminary rule
10.8B. Standard number
10.8C. Key-title
10.8D. Terms of availability
10.8E. Qualification
10.8A. Preliminary rule
10.8A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see l.OC.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede each repetition of this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a key-title by an equals sign.
Precede terms of availability by a colon.
Enclose a qualification to the standard number or terms of availability in parentheses.
10-14
AACR2 Revision 2002
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ARTEFACTS AND RE ALIA
I0.10A
10.8B. Standard number
10.SB1. Give the International Standard Book Number (ISBN) or International Standard
Serial Number (ISSN) assigned to an item as instructed in 1.8B.
10.8B2. Give any other number in a note (see 10.7BI9).
10.8C. Key-title
10,8C1. Give the key-title of a resource as instructed in 1.8C.
10.8D. Optional addition. Terms of availability
10.8DL Give the terms on which the item is available as instructed in 1.8D.
Free loan to medical students
$9.00 (medical students only)
10.8E. Qualification
10.8E1. Add qualifications to the standard number and/or terms of availability as instructed
in 1.8E.
10.9. SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
10.9A. Describe supplementary items as instructed in 1.9.
10.10. ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
10.10A. Describe items made up of several types of material as instructed in 1,10.
AACR2 Revision 2002
10-15
CHAPTER
11
Microforms
Contents
11.0 GENERAL RULES
11. OA Scope
1 1 .OB Sources of information
1 1.0C Punctuation
1 1.0D Levels of detail in the description
1 1 .OE Language and script of the description
11. OF Inaccuracies
1 1 .OG Accents and other diacritical marks
1 1 .OH Items with several chief sources of information
1 1.1 TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
1 1 .1 A Preliminary rule
1 i.lAI Punctuation
31.1B Title proper
tl.lC General material designation
11. ID Parallel titles
11. IE Other title information
11. IF Statements of responsibility
1 1.1G Items without a collective title
1 1 .2 EDITION AREA
1 1.2A Preliminary rule
11.2A1 Punctuation
11. 2B Edition statement
1 1 .2C Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
1 1.2D Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
1 1 .2E Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
11.3 SPECIAL DATA FOR CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS, MUSIC, AND SERIALS
1 1 .3 A Cartographic materials
13.3B Music
11. 3C Serials
11.4 PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
1 1 .4A Preliminary rule
AACR2 Revision 2002
11-1
11.0
MICROFORMS
1 1.4A1 Punctuation
1 1.4B General rule
1 1.4C Place of publication, distribution, etc.
1 1.4D Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
1 1 ,4E Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
1 1 .4F Date of publication, distribution, etc.
1 1.5 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
1 1.5A Preliminary rule
1 1.5A1 Punctuation
1 1 .5B Extent of item (including specific material designation)
1 1 .5C Other physical details
11. 5D Dimensions
1 1.5D2 Aperture cards
1 1.5D3 Microfiches
1 1.5D4 Microfilms
1 1.5D5 Microopaques
1 1.5E Accompanying material
11.6 SERIES AREA
1 1 .6A Preliminary rule
1 1.6A1 Punctuation
1 1 .6B Scries statements
11.7 NOTE AREA
1 1.7A Preliminary rule
1 1.7A1 Punctuation
11. 7B Notes
1 1 .8 STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
1 1 .8A Preliminary rule
1 1.8 A 1 Punctuation
1 1 .SB Standard number
1 1 .8C Key-title
1 1 ,8D Terms of availability
11. 8E Qualification
11.9 SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
11.10 ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
11.0. GENERAL RULES
11. OA. Scope
H.OAI. The rules in this chapter cover the description of all kinds of material in microform.
Microforms include microfilms, microfiches, microopaques, and aperture cards. Microforms
11-2
AACR2 Revision 2002
MICROFORMS
11. oc
may be reproductions of existing textual or graphic materials or they may be original
publications.
11.0B. Sources of information
11.0B1. Chief source of information. The chief source of information for microfilms is the
title frame (i.e., a frame, usually at the beginning of the item, bearing the full title and, nor-
mally, publication details of the item). The chief source of information for aperture cards is,
in the case of a set of cards, the title card, or, in the case of a single card, the card itself. The
chief source of information for microfiches and microopaques is the title frame. If there is no
such information or if the information is insufficient, treat the eye-readable data printed at the
top of the fiche or opaque as the chief source of information. If, however, the title appears in
a shortened form on the "header" and appears in a fuller form on the accompanying eye-
readable materials or the container, treat the accompanying eye-readable materials or the con-
tainer as the chief source of information and make a note (see 1 1.7B3) giving the source of
the title proper. If information normally presented on the title frame or title card is presented
on successive frames or cards, treat these frames or cards as the chief source of information.
If information is not available from the chief source, take it from the following sources (in
this order of preference):
11.0B2. Prescribed sources of information. The prescribed source(s) of information for
each area of the description of microforms is set out below. Enclose information taken from
outside the prescribed source(s) in square brackets.
the rest of the item (including a container that is an integral part
of the item)
container
accompanying eye-readable material
any other source
AREA
PRESCRIBED SOURCES OF INFORMATION
Title and statement of
responsibility
Edition
Chief source
container
Chief source
container
Chief source
container
Any source
Chief source
container
Any source
Any source
Chief source
of information
of information, rest of the item,
Special data
of information, rest of the item,
Publication, distribution, etc.
of information, rest of the item,
Physical description
Series
of information, rest of the item,
Note
Standard number and terms
of availability
11.0C. Punctuation
For the punctuation of the description as a whole, see 1.0C.
For the prescribed punctuation of elements, see the following rules.
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
11-3
ii.od
MICROFORMS
ll.OD. Levels of detail in the description
See 1.0D.
ll.OE. Language and script of the description
See 1.0E.
11.0F. Inaccuracies
See I. OF.
11.0G. Accents and other diacritical marks
See LOG.
11.011. Items with several chief sources of information
See 1.0 A3.
11.1. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
Contents:
ILIA. Preliminary rule
1MB. Title proper
1 1 . 1C. General material designation
11. ID. Parallel titles
11. IE. Other title information
1 1. 1 E Statements of responsibility
1 1. 1 G. Items without a collective title
ILIA. Preliminary rule
1L1AI. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see LOC.
Precede the title of a supplement or section (see L1B9) by a full stop.
Enclose the general material designation in square brackets.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede each unit of other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
For the punctuation of this area for items without a collective title, see 1.1G.
11.1B. Title proper
1L1BL Transcribe the title proper as instructed in LIB.
Early narratives of the Northwest
Grimm's fairy tales
Library resources & technical services
Records of the Socialist Labor Party of America
11-4
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
MICROFORMS
11.1G1
Index to Sussex parish registers and bishops transcripts
Beethoven' s symphonies
British masters of the albumen print
If the title proper is not taken from the chief source of information, or if the chief source
of information is a container or eye-readable matter, give the source of the title in a note (see
11.7B3).
11. 1C. Optional addition. General materia! designation
11.1C1. Give immediately following the title proper the appropriate general material designa-
tion as instructed in l.iC.
A history of Dalhousie University Main Library, 1867-1931
[GMD]
11.1C2. If an item contains parts belonging to materials falling into two or more categories,
and if none of these is the predominant constituent of the item, give either multimedia or kit
as the designation {see 1.1C1 and 1.10C1).
11. ID. Parallel titles
11.1D1. Transcribe parallel titles as instructed in 1 ,1D.
Deutschland [gmd] = Allemagne = Germany
11.1E. Other title information
11.1E1. Transcribe other title information as instructed in LIE.
The gentleman of Venice {gmd] : a tragi-comedie presented
at the private house in Salisbury Court by Her Majesties
servants
A collection in the making (gmd] : works from the Phillipps
Collection
11.1F. Statements of responsibility
11.1F1. Transcribe statements of responsibility relating to persons or bodies as instructed in
I. 1 F.
The principles of psychology [gmdj / William James
Books in English [gmd] / British Library Bibliographic
Services
Selections from the permanent collection [gmd] / Whitney
Museum of American Art
II. 1F2. Add a word or short phrase to the statement of responsibility if the relationship
between the title and the person(s) or body (bodies) named in the statement is not clear.
11.1G. Items without a collective title
11.1G1. If a microform lacks a collective title, either describe the item as a unit (see 11.1G2
and 11.1 G3) or make a separate description for each separately titled part (see 11,1 G4).
AACR2 Revision 2002
11-5
11.1G2
MICROFORMS
11.1G2. In describing as a unit a microform lacking a collective title, transcribe the titles of
the individual parts as instructed in 1.1G3.
Don Juan [gmd] ; and, Childe Harold / Lord Byron
Analysis of the results of the general population census
1964 ;gmdj ; The supply of labour in Libya / Libya, Ministry
of Economy and Commerce, Census and Statistical Department
The Wilson papers -gmd] . The Cole-Hatt papers
11.1G3. Make the relationship between statements of responsibility and the parts of an item
lacking a collective title and described as a unit clear by additions as instructed in 11.1F2.
11.1G4. Optionally, make a separate description for each separately titled work on a micro-
form. For the description of the extent in each of these descriptions, see 1 3 .5B3. Link the
separate descriptions with notes (see 1 1.7B21).
11.2. EDITION AREA
Contents:
I1.2A. Preliminary rule
11.2B. Edition statement
11.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
1 1 .2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
1 1.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
11. 2 A. Preliminary rule
11.2A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 ,0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a statement relating to a named revision of an edition by a comma.
Precede the first statement of responsibility following an edition statement by a diagonal
slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
11.2B. Edition statement
11.2B1. Transcribe a statement relating to an edition of a microform that contains differences
from other editions of that microform, or to a named reissue of a microform, as instructed in
I. 2B.
2nd ed.
New ed.
Memorial ed.
Micro ed.
II. 2B2. In case of doubt about whether a statement is an edition statement, follow the
instructions in 1.2B3.
11-6
AACR2 Revision 2002
MICROFORMS
11.3B1
1L2B3. Optional addition. If a microform lacks an edition statement but is known to contain
significant changes from other editions, supply a suitable brief statement in the language and
script of the title proper and enclose it in square brackets.
[New ed. ]
[3rd ed. ]
11.2B4. If an edition statement appears in more than one language or script, transcribe the
statement that is in the language or script of the title proper. If this criterion does not apply,
transcribe the statement that appears first. Optionally, transcribe the parallel statement(s),
each preceded by an equals sign.
11.2B5, If an item lacking a collective title and described as a unit contains one or more
works with an associated edition statement, transcribe such statements following the titles and
statements of responsibility to which they relate, separated from them by a full stop.
Finnegans wake [gmd] . 2nd ed. ; Ulysses / James Joyce
11.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
11.2C1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more editions, but not to
all editions, of a microform as instructed in J ,2C and 1 1 . IF.
3rd ed. / with an introduction by Tom Barbellion
11. 2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
1L2D1. If the item is a named revision of an edition, transcribe the statement relating to that
revision as instructed in 1.2D,
3rd ed. , Corr .
Do not record statements relating to a reissue that contains no changes unless the item is
considered to be of particular importance to the cataloguing agency,
11.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
11.2E1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more named revisions of
an edition (but not to all such revisions) as instructed in 1.2E and 11. IF.
1L3. SPECIAL DATA FOR CARTOGRAPHIC MATERIALS, MUSIC, AND SERIALS
11.3A. Cartographic materials
11.3A1. Give the mathematical data of a cartographic item in microform as instructed in 3.3.
11.3B. Music
11.3B1. Give the physical presentation of music in microform as instructed in 5.3.
AACR2 Revision 2002
/i-7
11. 3C
MICROFORMS
11.3C. Serials
11.3C1. Give the numbering of a serial microform or a serial reproduced in microform as
instructed in 12.3.
Library resources & technical services [GMD] . — Vol. 16,
no. 1 (winter 1972)-
The yellow book [gmd] : an illustrated quarterly. — Vol. 1
(Apr. 1894)-v. 13 (Apr/ 1897)
U.4. PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
Contents:
11.4A. Preliminary rule
1 1.4B. General rule
1 1.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
1 1.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
1 1 .4E. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc,
11. 4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
11.4A. Preliminary rule
11.4A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 ,0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a second or subsequently named place of publication, distribution, etc., by a
semicolon.
Precede the name of a pubiisher, distributor, etc., by a colon.
Enclose a supplied statement of function of a pubiisher, distributor, etc., in square brackets.
Precede the date of publication, distribution, etc., by a comma.
11.4B. General rule
11.4B1. Record information about the place, name, and date of all types of publishing, dis-
tributing, etc., activities as instructed in 1.4B.
11.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
11.4C1. Give the place of publication, distribution, etc., of a published microform as
instructed in 1.4C.
11.4C2. Do not record a place of publication, distribution, etc., for an unpublished micro-
form. Do not record s.L in such a case.
11.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc,
11.4D1. Give the name of the publisher of a published microform, and optionally the distrib-
utor, as instructed in 1.4D.
Los Angeles : University of Southern California
London : Grossman
11-8
AACR2 Revision 2002
MICROFORMS
11.5A1
New York : Readex Microprint
Ann Arbor, Mich, : Xerox University Microfilms
(Cataloguing agency in the United States )
Ann Arbor, Mich. ; Tylers Green, Buckinghamshire : Xerox
University Microfilms
{Cataloguing agency in the United Kingdom)
11.4D2. Do not record the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., for an unpublished micro-
form. Do not record s.n. in such a case,
H.4E. Optional addition. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
11.4E1. Add to the name of a publisher, distributor, etc, a statement of function as instructed
in 1.4E.
New York : Charles & Brown ; London : Salemis
[ distributor]
11.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
11.4F1. Give the date of publication, distribution, etc., of a published microform as instructed
in 1.4R
New York : Readex Microprint, 1953
London : Challon, 1969
Ann Arbor, Mich . : Xerox University Microfilms , 1973-
Chicago : Library Resources, cl970
11.4F2. Give the date of creation of an unpublished microform, if readily available. Do not
record a date if none is readily available,
[Victorian literary letters from the Morgan-Krane
Collection] [gmd] . - 1971
(Title frame contains: Filmed in 1971)
11.5. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
Contents:
H.5A. Preliminary rule
1 1 ,5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
I1.5C. Other physical details
11. 5D. Dimensions
11.5E. Accompanying materia}
11.5A. Preliminary rule
11.5A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1 ,0C.
Precede this 'area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede other physical details by a colon.
Precede dimensions by a semicolon.
AACR2 Revision 2002
11-9
11.5B
MICROFORMS
Precede each statement, of accompanying material by a plus sign.
Enclose physical details of accompanying material in parentheses.
11.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
H.SB1. Record the number of physical units of a microform item by giving the number of
them in arabic numerals and one of the following terms as appropriate:
aperture card
microfiche
microfilm
microopaque
Add cartridge, cassette, or reel, as appropriate, to microfilm. Add cassette if appropriate, to
microfiche.
25 aperture cards
1 microfilm cassette
2 microfilm reels
3 microfiches
10 microopaques
Optionally, if general material designations are used (see 1.1C1), omit micro from the spe-
cific material designation.
11.5B2. Add the number of frames of a microfiche or microfiche set if that number can be
readily ascertained.
2 microfiches (147 fr.)
1 microfiche (120 fr.)
3 microfiches (ca. 120 fr. each)
11.5B3. If the description is of a separately titled part of a microform lacking a collective
title {see 3 1,1 G4), express the fractional extent in the form on reel 2 of 3 microfilm reels, on
no. 4 of 5 microfiches, etc. {if the parts are numbered or lettered in a single sequence) or on 1
reel of 3 microfilm reels, on 1 of 5 microfiches, etc. (if there is no sequential numbering).
on no. 3 of 4 microfilm cassettes
on 3 of 5 microopaques
11.5C Other physical details
11.5C1. If a microform is negative, indicate this.
1 microfilm reel : negative
11.5C2. If a microform contains, or consists of, illustrations, indicate this as instructed in
2.5C.
1 microfilm cassette : ill.
1 microfiche : all ill.
1 microfiche : ill., music
11-10
AACR2 Revision 2002
MICROFORMS
11.6
1 microfiche : chiefly music
1 microfilm reel : negative, ill.
11.5C3. If a microform is wholly or partly coloured, indicate this by giving col. (for a col-
oured microform without illustrations), or col. & ill. (for a coloured microform with illustra-
tions), or col. ill., etc. (for a microform on which only the illustrations are coloured).
1 microfilm reel : col.
1 microfilm reel : col. & ill.
1 microfilm reel : col. ill., col. maps
11.5D. Dimensions
11.5DL Give the dimensions of a microform as set out in the following rules. Give a fraction
of a centimetre as the next whole centimetre up.
If the microforms in a multipart item differ in size, give the smallest or smaller and the
largest or larger size, separated by a hyphen.
11.5D2. Aperture cards. Give the height X width of an aperture card mount in centimetres.
20 aperture cards ; 9 X 19 cm.
11.5D3. Microfiches, If the dimensions of a microfiche are other than 10.5 X 14.8 cm., give
the height X width in centimetres.
1 microfiche ; 12 X 17 cm.
2 microfiches ; 11 X 15 cm. -12 X 17 cm.
11.5D4. Microfilms. Give the width of a microfilm in millimetres.
1 microfilm reel ; 16 mm.
1 microfilm cartridge ; 35 mm.
11.5D5. Microopaques. Give the height X width of a microopaque in centimetres.
5 microopaques ; 8 X 13 cm.
11.5E. Accompanying material
I1.5E1. Give the details of accompanying material as instructed in 1.5E.
1 microfilm reel ; 16 mm. + 1 manual
1 microfilm reel ; 16 mm. + 1 v. <30 p. : ill. ; 22 cm.)
11.6. SERIES AREA
Contents:
1 1 .6A, Preliminary rule
11.6B. Series statements
AACR2 Revision 2002
11-11
11.6A
MICROFORMS
11.6A. Preliminary rule
11.6A1. Punctuation
For instmctions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Enclose each series statement (see 1 ,6J) in parentheses.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
Precede the ISSN of a series or subseries by a comma.
Precede the numbering within a series or subseries by a semicolon.
Enclose a date following a numeric and/or alphabetic designation in parentheses.
Precede the title of a subseries, or the designation for a subseries, by a full stop.
Precede the title of a subseries following a designation for the subseries by a comma.
11.6B. Series statements
11.6B1. Record each series statement relating to a microform as instructed in 1.6. If the origi-
nal was published in a series, record it in a note (see 1 1 ,7B 1 2).
(Bibliotheca Asiatics ; v. 9)
(PCMI collection)
{AIP-DRP ; 63-2)
(Three centuries of drama. English, 1642-1700)
(Wright American fiction ; reel A-4)
11.7. NOTE AREA
Contents;
11. 7A. Preliminary rule
11.7B. Notes
11.7 A. Preliminary rule
H.7A1. Punctuation
Precede each note by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph for each.
Separate introductory wording from the main content of a note by a colon followed but not
preceded by a space.
11.7A2. In making notes, follow the instructions in 1.7A.
11.7B. Notes
Make notes as set out in the following subrules and in the order given there. However,
give a particular note first when it has been decided that note is of primary importance. If the
item being described is a reproduction of an original in another form, make one note on the
original, giving the details in the order of the areas to which they relate (see 1 1.7B22).
11-12
AACR2 Revision 2002
MICROFORMS
11.7B10
11.7B1. Nature, scope, or artistic or other form of an item. Make notes on these matters
unless they are apparent from the rest of the description.
Collection of 18th cent. mss.
11.7B2. Language. Make notes on the tanguage(s) of the item, unless this is apparent from
the rest of the description.
Latin, with English translations
11.7B3. Source of title proper. Make notes on the source of the title proper if it is other than
the chief source of information, or when the chief source of information is a container or eye-
readable matter (see 1 I.OB 3).
Title from container
11.7B4. Variations in title. Make notes on titles borne by the item other than the title proper.
Optionally, give a romanization of the title proper.
Also known as: NICEM index to educational slides
11.7B5. Parallel titles and other title information. Give the title in another language and
other title information not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility area if they are
considered to be important.
Subtitle: An analysis of world trends
11.7B6. Statements of responsibility. Make notes on variant names of persons or bodies
named in statements of responsibility if these are considered to be important for identifica-
tion. Give statements of responsibility not recorded in the title and statement of responsibility
area. Make notes on persons or bodies connected with a work, or significant persons or bod-
ies connected with previous editions and not already named in the description.
"Edited ... by T.N. Jackson"-Pref .
11.7B7. Edition and history. Make notes on other microform editions of the item being
described.
Previous microfiche ed. : 1971
11.7B9. Publication, distribution, etc. Make notes on publication, distribution, etc., details
that are not included in the publication, distribution, etc., area and are considered to be
important.
Distributed in the U.K. by: MicroFilm Imports
H.7BI0. Physical description. Make the following physical description notes.
Reduction ratio. Give the reduction ratio if it is outside the I6X-30X range. Use one of the
following terms:
low reduction {for less than 16 X)
high reduction (for 31 X-60 X )
very high reduction (for 6 1 X -90 X )
ultra high reduction (for over 90 X ; for ultra high reduction give
also the specific ratio (e.g., Ultra high reduction, J 50 X ))
reduction ratio varies
AACR2 Revision 2002
11-13
11.7B11
MICROFORMS
Reader. Give the name of the reader on which a cassette or cartridge microfilm is to be used
if it affects the use of the item.
For Information Design reader
Film. Give details of the nature of the film.
Silver based film
Other physical details. Make notes on other important physical details that are not included
in the physical description area.
Image printed on thin paper
11.7B11. Accompanying material. Make notes on the location of accompanying material if
appropriate. Give details of accompanying material neither mentioned in the physical descrip-
tion area nor given a separate description {see 1.5E).
With brief notes (3 p.)
In container with facsirn. reproductions of p. 1-8 of
original
11.7B12, Series. Make notes on any microform series in which the microform has also been
issued.
Originally issued in the series: The Afro-American
experience
(Microform previously issued as such in a series)
11.7B13. Dissertations. If the item being described is a dissertation, make a note as
instructed in 1.7B13.
Thesis (M. A. ) —University of Mew Brunswick, 1975
11.7B14. Audience. Make a brief note of the intended audience for, or intellectual level of, a
microform if this information is stated on the item, its container, or accompanying eye-
readable material.
Intended audience: High school students
11.7B16. Other formats. Give the details of other formats in which the content of the item
has also been issued. For a reproduction of previously existing material, see 1 1 .7B22.
Issued also on 16 mm. microfilm
11.7B17, Summary. Give a brief objective summary of the content of an item unless another
part of the description provides enough information.
Summary: Lists the serial holdings of 27 college libraries
in Iowa as of 1981
11.7B18. Contents. List the contents of an item, either selectively or fully, if it is considered
necessary to show the presence of material not implied by the rest of the description; to stress
items of particular importance; or to list the contents of a collection. When recording titles
formally, take them from the head of the part to which they refer rather than from contents
lists, etc.
Includes bibliography
Contents: Surrey - Kent - Middlesex - Essex
Annual reports for 1 957-1971
11-14 AACR2 Revision 2002
MICROFORMS
11.8A1
11.7B19. Numbers. Give important numbers associated with the item other than ISBNs or
ISSNs (see I1.8B).
11.7B20. Copy being described, library's holdings, and restrictions on use. Make these
notes as instructed in L7B20.
Available only to researchers with written permission from
the copyright holder
Also available as an electronic resource
11.7B21. "With" notes. If the title and statement of responsibility area contains a title that
applies to only a part of an item lacking a collective title and, therefore, more than one entry
is made, make a note beginning With: and listing the other separately titled works in the item
in the order in which they appear there.
With: General Sherman / M. Force — Life and campaigns of
Major-General J.E.B. Stuart / H . McClennan — General Butler
in Hew Orleans / J. Parton — Life and public services of
Ambrose E , Burns ide / B. Poo re — Life of General George
G. Meade / R. Bache
11.7B22. Note relating to the original. Make a note relating to an original as instructed in
1.7 A4 and 1.1 IF.
Reproduction of : Endymion / by the Author of Lothair .
London : Longmans, Green, 1880. 3 v. ; 20 cm.
Reproduction of: 2nd ed. London : Royal Geographic
Society,. 1924, 1 atlas (5 v.) ; 450 maps ; 31 cm. (Atlases
of the Western world ; no. 17)
Reproduction of: Vol. 3, no. 58 (Apr. 21, 1841)-v. 4, no.
146 (Sept. 26, 1843) . Manchester, Lancashire : Printed and
published by John Gadsby, 1841-1843. 93 no. ; ill., map,
music ; 3 8-50 cm . Frequency varies . Continues : An ti -Corn
Law circular. Continued by: The league
Reproduction of: London : Printed for the editor, [1798-
1807]. 1 score (3 v.) ; 32 cm.
11.8. STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
Contents:
11. 8A, Preliminary rule
11. 8B. Standard number
11. 8C. Key-title
1 1 .8D. Terms of availability
11. SE. Qualification
11.8A. Preliminary rule
11.8A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
AACR2 Revision 2002
11-15
11.8B
MICROFORMS
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede each repetition of this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a key-title by an equals sign.
Precede terms of availability by a colon.
Enclose a qualification to the standard number or terms of availability in parentheses.
1L8B. Standard number
11.8B1. Give the International Standard Book Number (ISBN) or International Standard
Serial Number (ISSN) assigned to an item as instructed in 1.8B.
11.8B2. Give any other number in a note (see 11.7B19).
11.8C. Key-title
11.SC1. Give the key-title of a resource as instructed in l.SC.
11.8D. Optional addition. Terms of availability
11.8D1. Give the terms on which the item is available as instructed in 1.8D.
11. 8E. Qualification
11.8E1. Add qualifications to the standard number and/or terms of availability as instructed
in 1.8E.
11.9. SUPPLEMENTARY ITEMS
11.9A. Describe supplementary items as instructed in 1.9.
11.10. ITEMS MADE UP OF SEVERAL TYPES OF MATERIAL
1L10A. Describe items made up of several types of material as instructed in 1.10.
U~16
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHAPTER
Continuing Resources
Contents
12,0 GENERAL RULES
12.0A Scope
12. OB Sources of information
12. OBJ Basis of the description
12.0B2 Chief source of information
I2.0B3 Prescribed sources of information
12.0C Punctuation
12.0D Levels of detail in the description
1 2,0E Language and script of the description
1 2. OF Inaccuracies
12.0G Accents and other diacritical marks
12.0H Items with several chief sources of information
12.1 TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
12. 1A Preliminary rule
12.1A1 Punctuation
12.1B Title proper
1 2. IBS Change in title proper
12. 1C General material designation
12.ID Parallel titles
I2.1D3 Change in parallel title
12. IE Other title information
12. 1E2 Change in other title information
12. IF Statements of responsibility
12.1F5 Change in statements of responsibility
12. 1G Items without a collective title
EDITION
AREA
12.2A
Preliminary rule
12.2A1
Punctuation
12.2B
Edition statement
32.2C
Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
12.2D
Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
12.2E
Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
12.2F
Change in edition information
AACR2 Revision 2002
12-1
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.3 NUMBERING AREA
12.3A
Preliminary rule
12.3A1
Applicability
12.3A2
Punctuation
12.3B
Numeric and/or alphabetic designation
12.3C
Chronological designation
12.3D
No designation on first issue or part
12.3E
Alternative numbering systems
12.3F
Ceased serials
12.3G
Change in numbering
PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
12.4A
Preliminary rule
12.4A1
Punctuation
12.4B
General rule
12.4C
Place of publication, distribution, etc.
12.4C2
Change in place of publication, distribution, etc.
12.4D
Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
12.4D2
Change in name of publisher, distibutor, etc.
12.4E
Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
12.4F
Date of publication, distribution, etc.
12.4G
Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
12.4G2
Change in place and/or name of manufacturer
PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
12.5A
Preliminary rule
J 2.5 A!
Punctuation
12.5B
Extent of item {including specific material designation)
12.5C
Other physical details
12.5C2
Change in other physical details
12.5D
Dimensions
12.5D2
Change in dimensions
12.5E
Accompanying material
SERIES AREA
12.6A
Preliminary rule
12.6A1
Punctuation
12.6B
Series statements
12.6B2
Change in series statement
NOTE AREA
12.7A
Preliminary rule
12.7A1
Punctuation
I2.7B
Notes
STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
12. 8 A
Preliminary rule
12.8A1
Punctuation
12.8B
Standard number
12.8C
Key-title
12-2
AACR2 Revision 2002
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.0B1
12.8D
12.8E
Terms of availability
Qualification
12.9 SUPPLEMENTS
12.10 SECTIONS
12.0- GENERAL RULES
12.0A. Scope
12.0A1. The rules in this chapter cover the description of continuing resources, whether suc-
cessively issued (i.e., serials) or integrating (e.g., updating loose-leafs, updating Web sites).
These rules also cover the description of the following categories of finite resources (i.e.,
those with a predetermined conclusion): resources that exhibit characteristics of serials, such
as successive issues, numbering, and frequency, but whose duration is limited (e.g., newslet-
ters of events); reprints of serials; and finite integrating resources. The ruies in this chapter do
not apply to the description of multipart items.
These rules focus on the continuing nature of serials and integrating resources and are
applied in conjunction with ruies in other chapters of part I. For example, in describing an
electronic journal, consult chapter 9 for rules specifically applying to the electronic aspects of
the journal and chapter 12 for the continuing aspects.
If a rule does not apply to all continuing resources, the scope of that rule is indicated.
See chapter 21 for guidelines to determine if a change on subsequent issues or parts of a
serial or on subsequent iterations of an integrating resource requires a new description. If a
new description is not made, see the rules regarding changes in this chapter (e.g., I2.1B8,
I2.1D3, 12.IE2) for instructions.
12.0B. Sources of information
12.0B1. Basis of the description
a) Serials. Base the description of a serial on the first issue or part or, lacking this, on the
earliest available issue or part. For numbered serials, the first issue or part is the lowest
numbered issue or part. For unnumbered serials, the first issue or part is the issue or
part with the earliest publication, distribution, etc., date. Generally prefer the first (or
earliest) issue or part over a source associated with the whole serial or with a range of
more than one issue or part.
AREA
BASIS OF DESCRIPTION
Title and statement of
First or earliest issue or part
responsibility
Edition
Numbering
First or earliest issue or part
First and/or last issues or parts for each
system or sequence
Publication, distribution, etc.
Place and publisher,
First or earliest issue or part
distributor, etc.
Place and manufacturer
Dates
First or earliest issue or part
First and/or last issues or parts
(continued)
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
12-3
12.0B2
CONTINUING RESOURCES
AREA
Physical description
Series
Note
Standard number and terms
of availability
BASIS OF DESCRIPTION
All issues or parts
All issues or parts
All issues or parts and any other source
All issues or parts and any other source
b) Integrating resources. Base the description of an integrating resource, except the
beginning date of publication, on the current iteration of that resource.
BASIS OF DESCRIPTION
Current iteration
Current iteration
Current iteration
Current iteration
First and/or last iterations
Current iteration
Current iteration
All iterations and any other source
All iterations and any other source
AREA
Title and statement of
responsibility
Edition
Publication, distribution, etc.
Place and publisher,
distributor, etc.
Place and manufacturer
Dates
Physical description
Series
Note
Standard number and terms
of availability
12.0B2. Chief source of information
a) Printed resources. The chief source of information is the titie page 1 or the title page
substitute. The titie page substitute for an item lacking a title page is (in this order of
preference) the analytical title page, cover, caption, masthead, editorial pages, colo-
phon, other pages. Specify the source used as the title page substitute in a note (see
12.7B3). If information traditionally given on the title page is given on facing pages,
with or without repetition, treat the two pages as the title page.
Use the colophon as the chief source of information for an oriental nonroman script
resource if the colophon contains full bibliographic information and the following con-
ditions apply:
i) the page standing in the position of a title page bears only the title proper
or ii) the title page bears only a calligraphic version of the title proper
or iii) the title page bears only a western-language version of the title and other biblio-
graphic information.
b) Nonprint resources. For direct access electronic serials, prefer the physical carrier or
its labels as the chief source of information. For other nonprint resources, follow the
instructions in subrule .OB in the relevant chapter for the resource in question in deter-
mining the chief source of information. For example, to determine the chief source of
information for a serial sound recording, see 6.0B 1.
1 . Hereafter in this chapter title page includes any substitute (including, for oriental publications, a colophon specified in
12.0B2 as a title page substitute).
12-4
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12. OH
12.0B3. Prescribed sources of information
a) Printed resources. The prescribed source(s) of information for each area of the descrip-
tion is set out below. Enclose information taken from outside the prescribed source(s)
in square brackets.
AREA PRESCRIBED SOURCES OF INFORMATION
Title and statement of Title page
responsibility
Edition Title page, other preliminaries, colophon
Numbering The whole resource
Publication, distribution, etc. The whole resource
Physical description The whole resource
Series Series title page, analytical title page, cover,
caption, masthead, editorial pages, colophon,
rest of the resource
Note Any source
Standard number and terms Any source
of availability
b) Nonprint resources. Follow the instructions in subrule ,0B in the relevant chapter in
part I (e.g., for sources of information for a serial sound recording, see 6.0B; for an
electronic journal, see 9.0B).
12.0C Punctuation
For the punctuation of the description as a whole, see 1.0C.
For the prescribed punctuation of elements, see the following rules.
12.0D. Levels of detail in the description
See 1.0D.
I2.0E. Language and script of the description
See 1.0E.
12.0F. Inaccuracies
For inaccuracies in the title proper, see 12.1B1, For other inaccuracies, see l.OF.
12.0G. Accents and other diacritical marks
See 1 .OG.
12.0H. Items with several chief sources of information
See 1.0A3.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
12-5
12.1
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.1. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
Contents:
12.1A. Preliminary rule
12. IB. Title proper
12.1C. General material designation
12.1D. Parallel titles
12. IE. Other title information
12. IF. Statements of responsibility
12.1G. Items without a collective title
12.1A. Preliminary rule
12.1A1, Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede the title of a supplement or section (see I.1B9), or the designation for a supple-
ment or section, by a full stop.
Precede the title of a supplement or section following a designation for the supplement or
section by a comma.
Enclose the general material designation in square brackets.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede each unit of other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
12.1B. Title proper
12.1B1. Transcribe the title proper as instructed in LIB.
Gallia
Bulletin
Le monde
Boston evening transcript
Champaign -Urbana news -gazette
Transactions for the year
Catalogue s index
T
Milling's press guide
IAVRI bulletin
Bulletin of the Malaysia-Singapore Commercial Association
(Inc.)
941.1
The audio lawyer
Thesis theological cassettes
12-6
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.1B4
Supplement to The journal of physics and chemistry of
solids
Amazon . com
Britannica online
The electronic journal of analytic philosophy
Patient teaching loose-leaf library
Correct obvious typographic errors when transcribing the title proper and give the tide as it
appears on the resource in a note. In case of doubt about whether the spelling of a word is
incorrect, transcribe the spelling as found.
Housing starts
Note: Title appears on v. 1, no, 1 as: Housing sarts
If the title proper includes any statement that mentions an earlier title, title absorbed, etc.,
that may or may not be grammatically linked to the rest of the title, do not transcribe such a
statement as part of the title. Do not give the mark of omission. Give relationships with other
bibliographic resources in a note (see 12.7B8).
International gas report
Note: Absorbed: World gas report
(Title appears as: International gas report, including World gas report)
For omissions from the title proper for dates, names, numbers, etc., that can be expected to
vary, see I2.1B7.
Give the source of title proper in a note as instructed in 12.7B3.
12.1B2. When the title appears in full and in the form of an acronym or initialism in the chief
source of information, choose the full form as the title proper.
Linguistics and language behavior abstracts
(Title appears in full and as LLBA in the chief source)
12.1B3. In case of doubt about whether a corporate body's name or an abbreviation of that
name is part of the title proper, treat the name as such only if it is consistently so presented in
various locations in the resource and/or as found in indexes, abstracts, or other sources.
12.1B4. If a resource is a separately published section of, or supplement to, another resource
and its title proper as presented in the chief source of information consists of
a) the title common to all sections (or the title of the main resource)
and b) the title of the section or supplement
and if these two parts are grammatically independent of each other, give the common title
followed by the section or supplement title. In such a case disregard the order in which the
parts of the title proper are presented in the chief source of information.
Acta Universitatis Carolinae. Philologica
Key abstracts. Industrial power and control systems
Journal of the American Leather Chemists' Association.
Supplement
AACR2 Revision 2002*. 2004 Update
12-7
12.1B5
CONTINUING RESOURCES
Etudes et documents tchadiens.
Serie B
Art of advocacy . Structured settlements
12.1E5. If the title of such a section or supplement {see 12.1B4) is preceded by an enumera-
tion or alphabetic designation, give the common title, followed by the designation, and the
section or supplement title.
12.IB6. If the title of such a section or supplement is presented in the chief source of infor-
mation without the title that is common to all sections, give the title of the section or supple-
ment as the title proper. In the case of a section, give the title that is common to all sections
as the title proper of the series (see I2.6B). In the case of a supplement, give the title of the
main resource in a note (see 12.7B8g).
British journal of applied physics .... — (Journal of
physics ; D)
(Section title only presented in chief source of information. Common title given as
series)
12.1B7. For serials, if the title includes a date, name, number, etc., that varies from issue to
issue, omit this date, name, number, etc., and replace it by the mark of omission, unless it
occurs at the beginning of the title, in which case do not give the mark of omission.
Report on the ... Conference on Development Objectives and
Strategy
Supply estimates for the year ending ...
Frommer' s Washington, D.C. on $ ... a day
(Title appears as: Frommer's Washington, D.C. on $35 a day)
The annual report of Governor ...
(Title appears as: The annual report of Governor Rhodes. The name of the
governor changes with each specific term of office)
Annual report not ... Annual report
12.1B8. Change in title proper
a) Serials. If a major change in the title proper occurs, make a new description (see
21. 2C). If a minor change occurs in the title proper on a subsequent issue or part, in
general, give the later title in a note (see 12.7B4.2).
b) Integrating resources. If any change in the title proper occurs on a subsequent itera-
tion, change the title and statement of responsibility area to reflect the current iteration
(see 21. 2B) and, in general, give the earlier title in a note (see 12.7B4.2).
12.1C. Optional addition. General material designation
12.1C1. Give immediately following the title proper the appropriate general material designa-
tion as instructed in 1.1C.
Yoga for health [GMD]
Journal of polymer science . Part A, General papers
Progress in nuclear energy. Series II, Reactors
Pathe pictorial ;gmd]
Audio arts [gmd]
12-8
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CONTINUING RESOURCES 12.1E1
12.1D. Parallel titles
12.1D1. Transcribe parallel titles as instructed in I. ID.
Bank of Canada review [gkd] = Revue de la Banque du Canada
Internationale volkskundliche Bibliographie [gmd; =
International folklore bibliography = Bibliographie
internationale des arts et traditions populaires
Bulletin of the Association of African Universities [gkd]
= Bulletin de 1' Association des universites africaines
12.1D2. If, in the case of a resource with a title proper made up of a title common to a num-
ber of sections and a section title, the common title has a parallel title and the section title has
a parallel title, give the common title and the section title that make up the title proper fol-
lowed by the parallel common title and the parallel section title (see 12.1B4).
Trade of Canada. Exports by commodities [gkd] = Commerce
du Canada. Exportations par marchandises
12.1D3. Change in parallel title
a) Serials. If a parallel title is added, deleted, or changed on a subsequent issue or part,
make a note if the change is considered to be important (see 12.7B5.2).
b) Integrating resources. If a parallel title is added, deleted, or changed on a subsequent
iteration, change the title and statement of responsibility area to reflect the current itera-
tion and give any earlier parallel title in a note if considered to be important (see
12.7B5.2).
12.1E. Other title information
12.1E1. Transcribe other title information as instructed in 1.1E if considered to be important.
Legislagao estudantil ;gmd] : coletanea de leis, decretos,
resolucoes e pareceres
Home health nutrition [GKDj ■. patient education manual
A century of lawmaking for a new nation [gkd] : U.S.
Congressional documents and debates, 1774-1873
Aakrosh ;gmd] : Asian journal on terrorism and internal
conflicts
9-1-1 [GKD] : hotline to contemporary culture
Intensidad & altura IGmu] : revista de rmisica en el Peru
The independence igmd] : Canadian independent labour news
Always transcribe or supply other title information if it falls within one of the categories
below,
a) If an acronym or initialism of the title appears in the chief source of information with
the full form of the title, transcribe the acronym or initialism as other title information.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
12-9
12.1E2
CONTINUING RESOURCES
Twin Cities ;gmd] : TC
Review of environmental educational developments [gkd] :
REED
Gaceta de cooperacion inforraativa regional [gkd] : GACIRE
Online dictionary of library and information science ;gmd;
: ODLIS
b) If a statement of responsibility or the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., is an inte-
gral part of the other title information, transcribe it as such (see 1.1E4).
The greenwood tree ;gkd; : newsletter of the Somerset and
Dorset Family History Society
941.1 ; gkd] : newsletter of AAL. in Scotland
Colorado chess informant ;gnd] : the official Web site of the
Colorado State Chess Association
Ceramic forum international IGXD] : CFI : Berichte der DKG
c) If the title proper consists solely of the name of a corporate body, conference, etc., sup-
ply a brief addition in the language of the title proper as other title information to
explain the title (see 1.1E6).
Hawaii Institute of Physics ;gmd] : [report]
Bibliotheque nationale de France [gkd] : [page d'accueil]
Los Angeles County Museum of Art [gkd] : LACMA : [home
page]
Do not transcribe other title information that consists solely of words relating to the cur-
rency of the contents or the frequency of updating.
Texas rules of civil procedure [gkd]
not Texas rules of civil procedure [GKD] : including amendments
through order of December 5, 1983, effective April 1, 1984
Architecture & building news headlines ;gmd;
not Architecture & building news headlines ;gmd; : updated daily
If other title information has not been transcribed in the title and statement of responsibil-
ity area, give it in a note (see 1 2.7B6.1) or ignore it.
12.1E2, Change in other title information
a) Serials. If other title information has been recorded in the title and statement of respon-
sibility area and that information changes on a subsequent issue or part, make a note if
the change is considered to be important {see 12.7B6.2).
b) Integrating resources. If other title information is recorded in the tide and statement of
responsibility area and that information changes on a subsequent iteration, change the
title and statement of responsibility area to reflect the current iteration and make a note
if the change is considered to be important (see 12.7B6.2).
12.1F. Statements of responsibility
12.1F1. Transcribe statements of responsibility relating to persons or bodies as instructed in
I. IF.
12-10 AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.1F4
Quarterly review ;gmd] / Soil Association
Sussex essays in anthropology ;gkd) I Anthropology Society
of Sussex
Serie de culturas mesoamericanas ;gmd; / Universidad
Nacional Aut6noma de Mexico, Instituto de Investigaciones
Hist6ricas
Bieler Jahrbuch [gkd] = Annales biennoises / Herausgeber,
Bibliotheksverein Biel
Moot ;gmd] / Eunice Wilson
Statistics of energy [GMD] / Organisation for Economic Co-
operation and Development = Statistiques de l'energie /
Organisation de cooperation et de developpement economiques
Application statistics 'gmd] / [prepared by] the Research
Division of the Council of Ontario Universities and the
Ontario Universities' Application Centre
12.IF2. If a statement of responsibility is transcribed, in full or in abbreviated form, as part
of the title proper or other title information, do not give a further statement of responsibility
unless such a statement appears separately in the chief source of information.
British Library news ' ; gkd;
ARC research review igxv]
Ethnic minorities and employment [gmd; : quarterly journal
of the Employment Section, Community Relations Commission
but
League review ;gkd] / League of St. George
EmPHASis [gmd] / Public Health Advisory Service
The K-H newsletter service ;gmd] / Stephen King-Hall
12.1F3. Editors
a) Serials. Do not record as statements of responsibility statements relating to persons
who are editors. If a statement relating to an editor is considered necessary by the cata-
loguing agency, give it in a note (see 12.7B7.I).
La cause du peuple [gmd;
Note: Founded, edited, and published by Jean-Paul Sartre
R.L.C.'s museum gazette ;gmd;
Note: Compiled and edited by Richard L. Coulton with the
assistance of voluntary aid
b) Integrating resources. Record statements relating to persons who are editors as state-
ments of responsibility if considered to be important.
/ edited by Cyril H. Wecht
... / [edited by] John C. Minahan, Jr. ; adapted from
M . Wagner, Minnesota legal forms
12.1F4. In the case of a resource with a title proper made up of a title common to a number
of sections and a section or suppiement title, give a statement of responsibility after the part
of the title proper to which it refers. In case of doubt, give the statements of responsibility at
the end of the title proper.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update 12-11
12.1F5
CONTINUING RESOURCES
Landerkurzberichte . Thailand :gmd] / Statistisches
Bundesamt
12.1F5. Change in statements of responsibility
a) Serials. If a person or body recorded in a statement of responsibility is added or deleted
on a subsequent issue or part and this change does not require a new description (see
21. 3B), give the name of the later person or body in a note or make a note of the dele-
tion (see 12.7B7.2). If the change is only in the presentation of the name of the person
or body, make a note if the change is considered to be important.
b) Integrating resources. If the statement of responsibility is added, deleted, or changed
on a subsequent iteration, change the title and statement of responsibility area to reflect
the current iteration and make a note if the change is considered to be important {see
I2.7B7.2).
12.1G. Items without a collective title
12.1G1. For resources that lack a collective title, see 1.1G.
1Z2. EDITION AREA
Contents:
12.2A. Preliminary rule
12.2B, Edition statement
I2.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
12.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
12.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
12.2F. Change in edition information
12.2A. Preliminary rule
12.2A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a statement relating to a named revision of an edition by a comma.
Precede the first statement of responsibility following an edition statement by a diagonal
slash.
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
12.2B. Edition statement
12.2E1.
a) Serials. If an edition statement belongs to one of the types below, transcribe it as
instructed in 1.2E. (See also I2.2B2.)
i) local edition statements
Northern ed.
ii) special interest edition statements
Ed . pour le rnedecin
12-12
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.2E1
iii) special format or physical presentation statements
Airmail ed.
Braille ed.
Library ed.
Microform ed .
iv) language edition statements
English ed.
Ed. francaise
v) reprint or reissue statements indicating a reissue or revision of the serial as a
whole.
Reprint ed.
2nd ed.
b) Integrating resources. Transcribe an edition statement as instructed in 1 .2B if consid-
ered to be important.
12.2B2. Give statements indicating regular revision or frequent updating (e.g., Rev. ed. issued
every 6 months, Frequently updated) as frequency in the note area (see 12.7B1).
For serials, give statements indicating numbering (e.g., 1st ed., 1916 ed.) in the numbering
area (see 12,3).
12.2B3. If an edition statement appears in more than one language or script, transcribe the
statement that is in the language or script of the title proper. If this criterion does not apply,
transcribe the statement that appears first. Optionally, transcribe the parallel statement(s),
each preceded by an equals sign.
Canadian ed. = Ed. canadienne
12.2C. Statements of responsibility relating to the edition
12.2C1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more editions, but not to
all editions, of a resource as instructed in 1.2C and 12.1F.
12.2D. Statement relating to a named revision of an edition
12.2D1. If the item is a named revision of an edition, transcribe the statement relating to that
revision as instructed in 1.2D.
English ed., 2nd ed.
Do not record statements relating to a reissue that contains no changes unless the item is
considered to be of particular importance to the cataloguing agency.
12.2E. Statements of responsibility relating to a named revision of an edition
12.2E1. Transcribe a statement of responsibility relating to one or more named revisions of
an edition (but not to all sucii revisions) as instructed in 1 .2E and 12. IF.
AACR2 Revision 2002
12-13
12.2F
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.2F. Change in edition information
12.2F1.
a) Serials. If edition information is added, deleted, or changed on a subsequent issue or
part and this change does not require a new description, make a note if the change is
considered to be important (see 12.7B9.2).
b) Integrating resources. If edition information is added, deleted, or changed on a subse-
quent iteration and this change does not require a new description, change the edition
area to reflect the current iteration and make a note if the change is considered to be
important (see 12.7B9.2).
12.3. NUMBERING AREA
Contents:
12. 3A. Preliminary rule
12.3B. Numeric and/or alphabetic designation
12.3C. Chronological designation
12.3D. No designation on first issue or part
12. 3E. Alternative numbering systems
12.3F Ceased serials
12.3G. Change in numbering
12.3A. Preliminary rule
12.3AL Applicability
a) Serials. Give this area for serials (with the exception of unnumbered monographic
series) if cataloguing from the first and/or last issue or part.
b) Integrating resources. This area is not generally applicable,
12.3A2. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see l.OC.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Follow the numbering of the first issue or part of a serial by a hyphen.
Precede the numbering by a hyphen when only the numbering of the last issue or part of a
serial is given.
Enclose a date following a numeric and/or alphabetic designation in parentheses.
Precede an alternative numbering system by an equals sign when more than one system of
designation is used.
Precede a new sequence of numbering by a semicolon.
12.3B. Numeric and/or alphabetic designation
12.3B1. Give the numeric and/or alphabetic designation of the first and/or last issue or part of
a serial in the same terms, but not necessarily with the same punctuation, used in that issue or
part. Use abbreviations as instructed in appendix B and numerals as instructed in appendix C.
12-14
AACR2 Revision 2002
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.3 C2
In describing a facsimile or other reprint, give the numeric and/or alphabetic designation of
the original. For serials that have ceased publication, see I2.3F.
Population trends [Gmd] . — 1-
Papers on formal linguistics [gmd] , — No. 1-
Policy publications review [gmd]. — Vol. 1, no. 1-
Poetry North-east [gmd] , — Issue no. 1-
Magic touch ;gmd] . — Pt. 1-
Miscellaneous reports on biodiversity [gmd] , — -no. 10
If the sequence of numbering is continued from a previous serial, give the numbering of
the first issue or part of the serial represented by the new description.
Word processing report [gmd]. — International ed. — Vol. 1,
no. 6-
(Designatiori appears on last issue of previous serial as: vol. 1, no. 5)
12.3B2. If a numeric and/or alphabetic designation appears in more than one language or
script, give the designation that is in the language or script of the title proper. If this criterion
does not apply, give the designation that appears first.
12.3C. Chronological designation
12.3C1. If the first and/or last issue or part of a serial is identified by a chronological desig-
nation, give it in the same terms, but not necessarily with the same punctuation, used in that
issue or part. Use abbreviations as instructed in appendix B and numerals as instructed in
appendix C. For serials that have ceased publication, see 12.3F.
Annual report on consumer policy in OECD member countries
[gmd] / Organisation for Economic Co-operation and
Development. — 1975-
Buck Jones annual {gmdj . — 1957-
Prince Edward Island tourist exit survey igmO) . — 1967-
Commonwealth immigration [gmd; . — Jan. /Feb. 1964-
International commercial television rate and data book
[GMD] . - 1961/2-
(Designatiott appears on issue as: 1961-2)
Landerberichte . Ecuador [gmd] / Statistisches Bundesamt, —
1965-
Biennial report ;gmd; . - 1999/2000-
(Designation appeals on issue as: 1999-2000)
Daily mirror ;gmd] . — -Dec. 31, 1999
12.3C2. If the chronological designation includes dates not of the Gregorian or Julian calen-
dar, add the corresponding dates of the Gregorian or Julian calendar in square brackets.
-([1975 ^J^J] 1395 v*-;> 1 ^tV*-' 1 - - [GMD] s^jVlj oUaiSVl «JU*
AACR2 Revision 2002
12-15
12.3C3
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.3C3. If a chronological designation appears in more than one language or script, give the
designation that is in the language or script of the title proper. If this criterion does not apply,
give the designation that appears first.
12.3C4. If the first and/or last issue or part of a serial is identified by both a numeric and/or
alphabetic designation and a chronological designation, give the numeric and/or alphabetic
designation before the chronological designation.
Selected publications in European languages [GMd; : SPEL. —
Ho. 1 {Feb. 1973) -
New locations [G!-«j] . — Ho. 1 (Apr. /May 1973)-
Renewable energy bulletin ;gmd; . — Vol. 1, no. 1 {Jan. /Mar.
1974) -
The musical mainstream ;gmD] / Division for the Elind and
Physically Handicapped, Library of Congress. — Vol. 1, no. 1
(Jan. -Feb. 1977) -
IEEE transactions on acoustics, speech, and signal
processing [smd] . - Vol. ASSP-22, no. 1 (Feb. 1974)-
However, if the designation consists of a year and a number that is a division of the year,
give the year before the number.
12.3D. No designation on first issue or part
12.3D1, If the first issue or part of a serial lacks any numbering, but subsequent issues or
parts define a designation pattern, supply numbering for the first issue or part based on that
pattern. If information about designations of subsequent issues or parts is not available, give
[No. I ]- (or its equivalent in the language of the title proper) or a chronological designation
for the first issue or part, as appropriate.
[Pt. 1]-
(Subsequent issues numbered: Part 2, Part 3, etc.)
[No. 1]-
[1998] -
(An annual report for which the chronological designation is more appropriate)
12.3E. Alternative numbering systems
12.3E1. If a serial has more than one separate system of designation, give the systems in the
order in which they are presented.
Vol. 3, no. 7- = no. 31-
May 1977-
not
May 1977 = Mai 1977-
97/1-
(Designation appears on part as: 1-97)
1998-1-
(Designation appears on issue as: 1-1998)
12-16
AACR2 Revision 2002
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.4
12.3F. Ceased serials
12.3F1. In describing a serial that has ceased publication, give the designation of the first
issue or part followed by the designation of the last issue or part. If information about the
first issue or part is not available, give only the designation of the last issue or part.
Vol. 3, no. 6 (Aug. /Sept. 1970}-v. 5, no. 3 (Mar. 1972)
-v. 10, no. 12 (Dec. 1995)
12.3G. Change in numbering
12.3G1. If the numbering starts a new sequence with a different system, give the designation
of the first and/or last issues or parts under the old system, followed by the designation of the
first issue or part under the new system.
Vol. 1, no. 1 (Nov. l943)-v. 10, no. 12 (June 1953) ; no.
1 (July 1974) -
Vol. 1, no. 1 (Jan. 1995)-v. 4, no. 12 (Dec. 1998) ; Jan.
1999-
If a new sequence is accompanied by wording to differentiate the sequence, such as new
series, include this wording. Distinguish such wording from that of a section title that is to be
placed after a common title (see 12.1B4— 12.1B6).
Vol. 1, no. 1 (June l986)-v. 8, no. 12 (Dec. 1993) ; new
ser., v. 1, no. 1 (Jan. 1994)-
If a new sequence with the same system as before is not accompanied by wording such as
new series, supply [new ser. ] or another appropriate term (or its equivalent in the language of
the title proper).
No. 1-no. 6 ; [new ser.], no. 1-
Mo . 1-no . 6 ; [ nev; ser.], no. 1-no. 3 ; [3rd ser . ] , no . 1-
Vol. 1, no. 1 (Jan. l992)-v. 4, no. 3 (Mar. 1995) ; [new
ser.], v. 1, no. 1 (Jan. 1996)-
Mo. 1-no. 6 ; [2nd ser.], no. 1- ; -3rd ser,, no. 104 ;
4 th ser., no . 1 -
Give a note for other variations in designations that do not constitute a new sequence if the
change is considered to be important (see 12.7B10.2),
12.4. PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
Contents:
12.4A. Preliminary rule
12.4B. General rule
12.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
12.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
12.4E. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
12.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
12.4G. Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
AACR2 Revision 2002
12-17
12.4A
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.4A. Preliminary rule
I2.4A1, Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see l.OC.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a second or subsequently named place of publication, distribution, etc., by a
semicolon.
Precede the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., by a colon.
Enclose a supplied statement of function of a publisher, distributor, etc., in square brackets.
Precede the date of publication, distribution, etc., by a comma.
Enclose the details of manufacture (place, name, date) in parentheses.
Precede the name of a manufacturer by a colon.
Precede the date of manufacture by a comma.
12.4B. General rule
12.4B1. Record information about the place, name, and date of all types of publishing, dis-
tributing, etc., activities as instructed in 1.4B.
12.4C. Place of publication, distribution, etc.
12.4C1. Give the place of publication, distribution, etc., as instructed in 1.4C.
12.4C2. Change in place of publication, distribution, etc.
a) Serials. If the place of publication, distribution, etc., changes on a subsequent issue or
part, give the later place in a note if considered to be important (see 12.7B11.2).
b) Integrating resources. If the place of publication, distribution, etc., changes on a subse-
quent iteration, change the publication, distribution, etc., area to reflect the current iter-
ation and give the earlier place in a note if considered to be important (see I2.7B11.2).
12.4D. Name of publisher, distributor, etc.
12.4D1. Give the name of the publisher, etc., and optionally the distributor, as instructed in
I.4D.
London : On Target Publications
Edinburgh : Palingenesis Press
London : [s ,n. ]
Ottawa : Canadian Oral History Association
London : Iron and Steel Board : British Iron and Steel
Federation
12.4D2. Change in name of publisher, distributor, etc.
a) Serials. If the name of the publisher, distributor, etc., changes on a subsequent issue or
part and this change does not require a new description, give the later name in a note if
considered to be important (see 12.7B11.2). If the change is only in the presentation of
the name, make a note if the change is considered to be important.
b) Integrating resources. If the name of the publisher, distributor, etc., changes on a sub-
sequent iteration, change the publication, distribution, etc., area to reflect the current
12-18
AACR2 Revision 2002
CONTINUING RESOURCES 12.4G1
iteration and give the earlier name in a note if considered to be important (see
12.7B11.2).
12.4E. Optional addition. Statement of function of publisher, distributor, etc.
12.4E1. Add to the name of a publisher, distributor, etc., a statement of function as instructed
in 1.4E.
New York : Wiley ; Oxford : Pergamon [distributor]
12.4F. Date of publication, distribution, etc.
12.4F1. Beginning date of publication, distribution, etc. Give the beginning date of publi-
cation, distribution, etc., as instructed in 1.4F,
Windsor, Berkshire : Wax s Wane, 1975-
Chicago : University of Chicago Press
(Description not based on first issue or part)
Washington, D . C . : Brookings Institute, [ 1998?] -
{Description not based on first issue or part; probable beginning date supplied
according to option in 1.4FS)
12.4F2. Ending date of publication, distribution, etc.
a) Serials. In describing a serial that has ceased publication, give the date(s) of publica-
tion as instructed in 1.4F.
Montreal : Canadian Association of Geographers, 1968-1969
Washington, D.C. : American Psychiatric Association
Note: Ceased publication in 199 9
(Description not based on either first or last issue or part; ending publication date
known)
Cambridge, Mass. : Harvard University Press
Note: Began in Mar. 1982; ceased in Sept- 1996
(Description not based on either first or last issue or part; beginning and ending
dates of publication known)
Berkeley : Auditor's Office, -[1997]
(Description not based on either first or last issue or part; ending publication date
supplied according to option in 1.4F8)
b) Integrating resources. In describing an integrating resource that is complete, give the
date(s) of publication as instructed in 1 .4F.
, 1996
, 1992-1998
, 1990-1995 [last updated 1996]
12.4G. Place of manufacture, name of manufacturer, date of manufacture
12.4G1. If the name of the publisher is unknown and the place and name of the manufacturer
are found in the resource, give that place and name as instructed in 1.4G.
AACR2 Revision 2002
12-19
12.4G2
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.4G2. Change in place and/or name of manufacturer
a) Serials. If the place and/or name of the manufacturer changes on a subsequent issue or
part and the name of the publisher continues to be unknown, give the later place and/or
name of the manufacturer in a note if considered to be important (see 12.7B1 1.2).
b) Integrating resources. If the place and/or name of the manufacturer changes on a sub-
sequent iteration and the name of the publisher continues to be unknown, change the
publication, distribution, etc., area to reflect the current iteration and give the earlier
place and/or name of the manufacturer in a note if considered to be important (see
12.7B11.2).
12.4G3. Optional addition. Give the place, name of manufacturer, and/or date of manufacture
if they are found in the resource and differ from the place, name of publisher, etc., and date
of publication, etc., and are considered important by the cataloguing agency. Make a note of
changes as instructed in 12.4G2 if the place and/or name of the manufacturer changes on a
subsequent issue, part, or iteration.
12.5. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
Contents:
12. 5 A. Preliminary rule
12.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
12.5C. Other physical details
12.5D. Dimensions
12.5E. Accompanying material
12.5A. Preliminary rule
12.5A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede other physical details by a colon.
Precede dimensions by a semicolon.
Precede each statement of accompanying material by a plus sign.
Enclose physical details of accompanying material in parentheses.
12.5B. Extent of item (including specific material designation)
12.5B1. For a resource that is still in progress, give the relevant specific material designation
(taken from subrute ,5B in the chapter dealing with the type of material to which the resource
belongs, e.g., ! 1 ,5B for microform resources). For printed resources, use the specific material
designation v. For updating loose-leafs, add the qualifier (loose-leaf).
v. (loose-leaf)
wall charts
f ilmstrips
microfiches
12-20
AACR2 Revision 2002
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.5D1
CD-ROMs
computer disks
12.5B2. For a ceased or completed resource, precede the appropriate specific material desig-
nation by the number of parts in arabic numerals.
27 posters
16 microfilm reels
103 v.
2 v, (loose-leaf)
(Updating loose-leaf issued in two hinders)
12.5B3. If a resource consists of, or contains, braille or another tactile system, make additions
to the statement of extent as indicated in subrule ,5B in the chapter dealing with the type of
material to which the resource belongs.
v, of braille
12 v, of music (braille)
2 v. of braille (loose-leaf)
12.5C. Other physical details
12.5C1. Give the other physical details appropriate to the item being described as instructed
in subrule .5C in the chapter dealing with the type of material to which the resource belongs
(e.g., 6.5C for serial sound recordings).
v. : ill. (some col.)
slides : sd. , col .
posters : bsw
sound cassettes : mono.
12.SC2. Change in other physical details
a) Serials. If other physical details are added on a subsequent issue or part, change the
physical description area to reflect all the issues or parts as instructed in 12.5CL If
other physical details are omitted or changed on a subsequent issue or part, make a note
if the change is considered to be important {see 12.7B12.2).
b) Integrating resources. If other physical details are added, omitted, or changed on a
subsequent iteration, change the physical description area to reflect the current iteration
and make a note if the change is considered to be important (see 12.7BI2.2).
12.SD. Dimensions
12.5D1, Give the dimensions of the resource as instructed in subrule ,5D in the chapter deal-
ing with the type of material to which the resource belongs (e.g., 2.5D for printed serials).
23 v. : ill. ; 25 cm.
filmstrips : col. ; 35 mm.
1 6 film cassettes : sd,, col. ; standard 8 mm .
AACR2 Revision 2002
12-21
12.5D2
CONTINUING RESOURCES
1 v. (loose-leaf) ; 28 cm.
computer optical discs : col . ; 4 S A in .
sound discs ; A'A in,
12.5D2, Change in dimensions. If the dimensions of a resource change, or multiple parts
differ in size, give the dimensions from smallest or smaller to largest or larger separated by a
hyphen unless otherwise instructed in subrule ,5D in the chapter dealing with the type of
material to which the resource belongs.
v. : ill. ; 27-32 cm.
v. (loose-leaf) ; 26-29 cm.
models : col., plastic ; 45 X 60 X 4 cm. or smaller
(Item described is a cartographic resource)
12.5E. Accompanying material
12.5E1.
a) Serials. Give, as instructed in i.5E, the details of accompanying material that is
intended to be issued regularly. Make a note on the frequency of accompanying mate-
rial (see 12.7B13). If accompanying material is issued irregularly or is issued only
once, describe it in a note or ignore it.
v , : ill . ; 21 cm . + slides
filmstrips : col. ; 35 mm. + booklets
108 v. : ill. ; 25 cm. + 18 maps (col. ; 65 X 90 cm. or
smal ler )
(Serial has ceased publication)
b) Integrating resources. Give, as instructed in 1.5E, the details of accompanying material
if considered to be important.
v. (loose-leaf) : forms ; 25 cm. + 2 computer disks
(3Vz in.)
12.6. SERIES AREA
Contents:
12.6A. Preliminary rule
12.6B. Series statements
12.6A. Preliminary rule
12.6A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Enclose each series statement (see 1.6J) in parentheses.
Precede each parallel title by an equals sign.
Precede other title information by a colon.
Precede the first statement of responsibility by a diagonal slash.
12-22
AACR2 Revision 2002
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.7A2
Precede each subsequent statement of responsibility by a semicolon.
Precede the ISSN of a series or subseries by a comma.
Precede the numbering within a series or subseries by a semicolon.
Enclose a date following a numeric and/or alphabetic designation in parentheses.
Precede the title of a subseries, or the designation for a subseries, by a full stop.
Precede the title of a subseries following a designation for the subseries by a comma.
12.6B. Series statements
12.6B1. Record each series statement as instructed in 1.6. For serials, do not give series num-
bering if each issue or part is separately numbered within the series.
(Acta Universitatis Stockholmiensis)
(H.C. )
(Quellenwerke der Schweiz = Statistiques de la Suisse)
(Public Health Service publication ; no. 1124)
(Bulletin of the Iowa Highway Research Board) (Iowa State
University bulletin)
(West Virginia University bulletin. Engineering Experiment
Station bulletin, ISSN 0083-8640)
12.6B2. Change in series statement
a) Serials. If a series is added, deleted, or changed on a subsequent issue or part and this
change cannot be stated clearly in the series area, make a note if the change is consid-
ered to be important {see 12.7B14.2).
b) Integrating resources. If a series is added, deleted, or changed on a subsequent itera-
tion, change the series area to reflect the current iteration and make a note if the change
is considered to be important (see 12.7B14.2).
12.7. NOTE AREA
Contents:
12.7 A, Preliminary rule
12.7B. Notes
12.7A. Preliminary rule
12.7A1. Punctuation
Precede each note by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph for each.
Separate introductory wording from the main content of a note by a colon followed but not
preceded by a space.
12.7A2. In making notes, follow the instructions in 1.7A.
In referring to another bibliographic resource, use the title or name-title under which that
resource is entered or would be entered (see chapter 21). If this is not possible, use the title
proper and statement of responsibility of the resource.
If it is known that the note does not apply to all issues or parts of a serial or to all itera-
tions of an integrating resource, add appropriate numbering or publication dates.
AACR2 Revision 2002
12-23
12.7B
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.7B. Notes
Make notes as set out in the following subrules and in the order given there. However,
give a particular note first if it has been decided that note is of primary importance. Notes
may include information not appropriate to other areas of the description or reflect changes in
the resource over time.
If the resource being described is a reproduction, give also details of the original (see
1.7A4, 1.1 IF, and 11.7B22).
12.7B1. Frequency. Make notes on the frequency of the serial or the frequency of updates to
the integrating resource uniess it is apparent from the content of the title and statement of
responsibility area or is unknown. Also make notes on changes in frequency.
Annual
Monthly (except Aug.)
Monthly (during school year)
Several times a week
Issued twice a month
Six issues yearly
Irregular
Bimonthly, Nov. /Dec. 1 98 O-Mar . /Apr . 1992; monthly, May
1992-
Rev . ed . issued every 4 months
Updated quarterly
Continually updated
Frequency varies
12.7B2. Language. Make notes on the language(s) of the resource unless this is apparent
from the rest of the description.
Text in French and English
In Swedish, English summaries
English and French , French text on inverted pages
User may select language of search interface
12.7B3. Source of title proper. For printed resources, make a note on the source of the title
proper if it is taken from a title page substitute. For nonprint resources, follow the instruc-
tions in subrule .7B3 in the chapter dealing with the type of material to which the resource
belongs.
Title from cover
Title from caption
Title from binder
Title from CD-ROM label
Title from title screen (viewed on Jan. 20, 2000)
(Source of title proper note combined with item described note)
12-24
AACR2 Revision 2002
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.784.2
Title from home page (viewed on Dec, 18, 1999)
(Source of title proper note combined with item described note)
12.7B4. Titles
12.7B4.1. Make notes on titles other than the title proper borne by the resource, and changes
to such titles, if considered to be important.
Cover title: Proceedings of the ... Annual Glass Symposium,
1989-1995; Proceedings of the Glass Symposium, 1996-
Title on added t.p.: Bulletin / Societe canadienne
d'histoire orale & sonore
Title bar title: Antarctic Meteorology Research Center
home page
Vols, for 1994-1998 have added t.p. in Uzbek
Make notes on titles by which the resource is commonly known if considered to be
important.
Commonly known as: LCIB
Optionally, give a romanization of the title proper,
12.7B4.2. Change in title proper
a) Serials. Make notes on minor changes in title proper that occur after the first/earliest
issue or part (see 12.1B8), If scattered issues or parts have a different title proper, make
a general note.
Issues for 1999- have title: Annual report on pipeline
safety
(Title proper recorded in title and statement of responsibility area: Annua] report
of pipeline safety)
Issues for Jan. 1928-July 1952 have title: The magazine
antiques; issues for Aug. 1952-Feb. 1971 have title:
Antiques; issues for Mar. 1971- have title: The magazine
antiques
(Title proper recorded in title and statement of responsibility area: Antiques)
Title varies slightly
Some issues have title: SLIS newsletter
b) Integrating resources. Make notes on earlier titles proper (see I2.1B8).
Title history: Australian industrial safety, health &
welfare, 1979-Mar. 1996
Title history: Securities law, fraud— SEC rule 10b-5, 1967-
Oct.? 1979; Securities fraud and commodities fraud, 1979-
Dec. 1986
Former title; Washington newspapers database (viewed on
Oct. 6, 1999)
AACR2 Revision 2002
12-25
12.7B5
CONTINUING RESOURCES
Former titles: Euroinfo international (viewed on May 10,
1998); Telephone directories international (viewed on Sept.
9, 1999)
Title varies slightly
12.7B5. Parallel titles
12.7B5.1. Make notes on titles in another language and/or script not recorded in the title and
statement of responsibility area if considered to be important.
Title appears in French on cover: Rapport du Conseil
(Title proper: Report of the Council)
Titles also in the organization's other official languages
12.7B5.2. Change in parallel title
a) Serials. Make notes on changes in parallel titles that occur after the first/earliest issue
or part if considered to be important (see 12.1D3). If the changes have been numerous,
a general statement may be made.
English title varies : Inter- American review of bibliography,
1952-
Title in French not present on issues after 1998
Order of titles varies
b) Integrating resources. Make notes on parallel titles no longer present on the current
iteration, or that appeared in a different form on earlier iterations, if considered to be
important (see 12.1D3). If the changes have been numerous, a general statement may
be made.
12.7B6. Other title information
12.7B6.1. Make notes on other title information not recorded in the title and statement of
responsibility area if considered to be important.
Subtitle: Lesbian newsletter
12.7B6.2. Change in other title information
a) Serials. Make notes on changes in other title information that occur after the first/earli-
est issue or part if considered to be important (see 12.1E2). If the changes have been
numerous, a general statement may be made.
Subtitle: A journal of feminism and film theory (varies
slightly)
Vol. 1, no. 3- has subtitle: Studies in educational
administration
Subtitle varies
b) Integrating resources. Make notes on other title information no longer present on the
current iteration, or that appeared in a different form on earlier iterations, if considered
to be important (see 12.1E2). If the changes have been numerous, a general statement
may be made.
12-26
AACR2 Revision 2002
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.7B8
12.7B7. Statements of responsibility
12.7B7.1. Make notes on statements of responsibility that do not appear in the title and state-
ment of responsibility area if considered to be important.
Official journal of: Concrete Products Association, Oct.
1920-Apr. 1930
Give a fuller form of name of a person or body that appears only in abbreviated form in
the rest of the description if the fuller form is considered to be necessary.
Full name of the institute: Professional Institute of the
Public Service of Canada
(Title proper: Journal of the Professional Institute)
Issued by: Abortion Law Reform Association
{Title and statement of responsibility: Occasional newsletter [GMD] / Alra)
Give the name of any editor considered to be an important means of identifying the serial
(e.g., if a particular person edited the serial for all or most of its existence; if the person's
name is likely to be better known than the title of the serial).
Editor: Wyndham Lewis
Founded, edited, and published by Jean-Paul Sartre
12.7B7.2. Change in statements of responsibility
a) Serials. Make notes on changes in statements of responsibility that occur after the first/
earliest issue or part if considered to be important (see 12.IF5). If the changes have
been numerous, a general statement may be made.
Issued by: Dept. of Health and Welfare, Bureau of Vital
Statistics, 1964-1977; by: Dept. of Health and Human
Services, Bureau of Vital Records, 1978-
Editors: 1975-1984, Howard Johnson; 1985- , G.L. Jones
b) Integrating resources. Make notes on statements of responsibility no longer present on
the current iteration, or that appeared in a different form on earlier iterations, if
considered to be important (see 12. 1F5). If the changes have been numerous, a general
statement may be made.
Compiled and edited by: Dan Hill and Malcolm Evans, 1977-
July 1980
Editor varies
12.7B8. Bibliographic history and relationships with other resources. Make notes on the
bibliographic history and on important relationships between the resource being described
and the immediately preceding, immediately succeeding, or simultaneously issued resources.
a) Continuation. If a resource continues a previously published resource, give the name of
the preceding resource. (See also 21.2B, 21, 2C, and 21.3B.)
Continues: Monthly Scottish news bulletin
Continues the monograph : Total baseball
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
12-27
12.7B8
CONTINUING RESOURCES
Rev. ed. of: Canadian regulation of international trade
and investment. 1986
Rev. ed. of: Mental capacity : medical and legal aspects
of the aging. 1977
If a resource is continued by a subsequently published resource, give the name of the
succeeding resource, and optionally the date of the change. (See also 21.2B, 21.2C, and
2I.3B.)
Continued by: Regina
Continued by a section in: Canadian Association of
Geographers' newsletter
Continued by: Shoestyle, 2000
b) Merger. If a resource is the result of the merger of two or more other resources, give
the names of the resources that were merged.
Merger of: British abstracts. Bl, Chemical engineering,
fuels metallurgy, applied electrochemistry, and industrial
inorganic chemi stry ; and: British abstracts. B2, Industrial
organic chemistry
Rev, ed. of: US MARC format for bibliographic data. 1994
ed. cl994; and: Canadian MARC communication format for
bibliographic data. 1994
If a resource is merged with one or more other resources to form a resource with a new
title, give the name(s) of the resource(s) with which it has merged and the name of the
new resource.
Merged with: journal / British Ceramic Society, to become:
Transactions and journal of the British Ceramic Society
c) Split. If a resource is the result of the split of a previous resource into two or more
resources, give the name of the resource that has been split, and optionally the name(s)
of the other resource(s) resulting from the split.
Continues in part: Proceedings / the Institution of
Mechanical Engineers
If a resource splits into two or more separate resources, give the names of the resources
resulting from the split.
Split into: Report on research and development /
Department of Energy; and: Report on research and
development / Department of Industry
Split into: Journal of environmental science and health.
Part A, Environmental science & engineering; and: Journal of
environmental science and health. Part B, Pesticides, food
contaminants, and agricultural wastes; and: Journal of
environmental science and health. Part C, Environmental
health sciences
12-28
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.7B8
If a resource has separated from another resource, give the name of the resource of
which it was once a part.
Separated from: Farm journal and country gentleman
d) Absorption. If a resource absorbs another resource, give the name of the resource
absorbed, and optionally the date of absorption.
Absorbed: The morning post
Absorbed: The worker's friend, 1936
Absorbed*. Metals technology; and, in part: Mining and
metallurgy
If a resource is absorbed by another resource, give the name of the absorbing resource.
Absorbed by. Quarterly review of marketing
e) Translation. If a resource is a translation of a previously published resource (as
opposed to a different language edition of a resource, for which see 12.2B1), give the
name of the original.
Translation of: Ble dans le monde
If a resource is translated, give the name of the translation.
Translated as: Plant physiology
(Resource is in Russian)
If the name of the other resource is not readily available, make a general note.
Translation of the German edition
f ) Simultaneous edition. If a resource is one of two or more editions differing in partial
content and/or in language, give the name of the other edition(s).
English ed . of: Bulletin critique du livre frangais
If the name of the other edition is not readily available, make a general note.
Issued also in Sanskrit
If a resource is published in more editions than can be named conveniently, make a
general note.
Numerous editions
g) Supplement. If a resource is a supplement to another resource, give the name of the
main resource.
Supplement to: Philosophical magazine
If a resource has supplement(s) that are described separately, make notes identifying the
supplement(s).
Has supplement: Journal of the Royal Numismatic Society
Make brief general notes on irregular, informal, numerous, or unimportant supplements
that are not described separately.
Supplements accompany some numbers
Numerous supplements
AACR2 Revision 2002
12-29
12.7B9
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.7B9. Edition statement
12.7B9.1. For electronic resources, make notes on the source of the edition statement if it is
different from the source of the title proper.
Ed. statement from container label
12.7B9.2. Change in edition information
a) Serials. Make notes on changes in edition information that occur after the first/earliest
issue or part if considered to be important (see 12.2F). If the changes have been numer-
ous, a general statement may be made.
Ed, statement varies: International ed., 1998-
{Edition statement prior to 1998: International ed. in English)
b) Integrating resources. Make notes on edition information no longer present on the
current iteration, or on edition information that appeared in a different form on earlier
iterations, if considered to be important {see 12.2F). If the changes have been
numerous, a general statement may be made.
Replacement title pages carry successive edition statements,
e.g., replacement title page received with June 1985
supplementation carries the statement "1985 edition"
12.7B10. Numbering and issuing peculiarities
12.7B10.1. If the period covered by a voltime, issue, etc., of an annual or less frequent serial
is other than a calendar year, give the period covered.
Report year ends June 30
Report year varies
Each issue covers: Apr. 1-Mar. 31
Each issue covers : Every two years since 1961-1962
12.7B10.2. Change in numbering. Make notes on complex or irregular numbering not
already specified in the numbering area if considered to be important (see I2.3G). Make
notes on issuing peculiarities if considered to be important.
Issues for Aug. 1973-Dec. 1974 also called v. 1, no. 7-
v. 2, no. 12
Vol. numbering irregular: Vols. 15-18 omitted, v. 20-21
repeated
Numbering begins each year with v. 1
Numbering irregular
Some no. issued in combined form
Successive articles are uniquely identified by a
manuscript number and date
Issues for 1996 are only available as individual articles,
organized topically
Articles are continually added to each annual volume
12-30
AACR2 Revision 2002
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.7B12.1
12.7B11. Publication, distribution, etc.
12.7B11X If a resource suspends publication with the intention of resuming at a later date,
give this fact. If publication is resumed, give the dates or designation of the period of
suspension.
Suspended with v, 11
No updates issued from 1999 to 2001
Make notes on beginning and/or ending dates of publication not recorded in the publica-
tion, distribution, etc., area (see 1.4F8).
Began in 1984
Ceased in 1991
Ceased with no. 25 in 1987
Completed publication in 2000?
Began in 1967; ceased in 1998
No more published after 1993
12.7B11.2. Change iti publication, distribution, etc.
a) Serials. Make notes on changes in the place and/or name of publisher and/or manufac-
turer that occur after the first/earliest issue or part if considered to be important (see
12.4C2, 12.4D2, 12.4G2). If the changes have been numerous, a general statement may
be made.
Published: Denver, 1995-1997; Boston, 1998-
(Pitblication, distribution, etc., area: Dallas : Association for Kinetic Art, 1991- ;
association still the publisher)
Imprint varies
b) Integrating resources. Make notes on places and/or names of publishers and/or
manufacturers no longer present on the current iteration, or that appeared in a different
form on earlier iterations, if considered to be important (see 12.4C2, 12.4D2, 12.4G2).
If the changes have been numerous, a general statement may be made.
Published by Architext Software, 1994-1997
(Publication, distribution, etc., area: Portland, Or. : Excite, Inc., cl994- ; Excite,
Inc., became publisher in 1998)
Published: Hew York : McGraw-Hill, 1974-1975; South
Hackensack, K.J. : F.B. Rothman, 1975-1978
(Publication, distribution, etc., area: Colorado Springs, Colo. : Shepard's of
Colorado Springs, 1974- ; Shepard's of Colorado Springs became publisher in
1979)
Imprint varies
12.7B12. Physical description
12.7B12.1. Make notes on important physical details that are not included in the physical
description area.
Printed on hand-made paper
AACR2 Revision 2002
12-31
12.7B12.2
CONTINUING RESOURCES
Alternate leaves of print and braille
In container (28 cm.) with abstracts of contents
Some issues on CD-ROM
Issues for Mar. 1999- consist of multiple CD-ROMs
12.7B12.2. Change in physical description
a) Serials. If other physical details are deleted or changed on a subsequent issue or part,
make notes if considered to be important (see 12.5C2). If the changes have been
numerous, a general statement may be made.
b) Integrating resources. Make notes on physical details no longer present on the current
iteration if considered to be important (see 12.5C2). If the changes have been numer-
ous, a general statement may be made.
12.7B13. Accompanying material. Make notes on the location of accompanying material if
appropriate. Give details of accompanying material neither mentioned in the physical descrip-
tion area nor given a separate description (see 1 ,5E). Give the frequency of accompanying
materials that are a regular feature of the resource.
Slides in pocket
Sound disc with last issue of each year
Accompanied by user manual
Vol. 7, no. 6 contains wall chart (col. ; 26 X 40 cm.)
Slides with every 7th issue
Some volumes accompanied by diskettes
Accompanied by CD-ROM, no. 19-
Some issues accompanied by VHS videocassette
Each issue accompanied by a CD-ROM containing full text
journal, graphics, animations, color photographs, and sound
and movie clips
12.7B14. Series
12.7B14.1. Give details of the numbering within a series if the numbering varies from issue
to issue and is considered to be important.
Each issue numbered 10, 20, 30, etc., in the series
12.7B14.2. Change in series
a) Serials. Make notes on changes in series statements that occur after the first/earliest
issue or part if considered to be important {see 12.6B2). If the changes have been
numerous, a general statement may be made.
Subtitle of series varies
b) Integrating resources. Make notes on series statements no longer present on the
current iteration if considered to be important (see 12.6B2). If an iteration has a series
12-32
AACR2 Revision 2002
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.7B17
not present earlier, make a note about the publication date of that iteration. If the
changes have been numerous, a general statement may be made.
Series title, 1991-1996: Client representation workbooks
(Current iteration has series title: Special tax topics workbooks)
Series title began 1997
(Resource began in 1995 without a series title)
12.7B15. Audience. Make a brief note of the intended audience for, or intellectual level of, a
resource if this information is stated in the resource.
Presents articles, crafts, puzzles, games, and other items
for readers living on farms and ranches or interested in
agriculture and rural life
12.7B16. Other formats. Give the details of other formats in which the content or partial
content of the resource is, or has been, issued.
Issued also as an electronic journal
Vols , 1-4 issued also on microfiche
Also issued online and on CD-ROM
Latest tables of contents and other information about the
j ournal available online
Also issued in printed form, 1997-1999
12.7B17. Indexes
a) Serials. Make notes on the presence of cumulative indexes. If possible, give the type of
index, the volumes, etc., of the serial indexed, the dates of the serial indexed, and the
location of the index in the set or the numbering of the index if it is issued separately.
Make a note also on separately published indexes.
Includes indexes
Indexes: Vols. 1 (1927)-25 (1951) in v. 26, no. 1
Indexes: Vols. 10-17 issued as v. 18, no. 3
Index published separately every Dec.
Indexes: Subject index, v. 1-11 in v. 13. Author-title
index, v. 1-11 in v. 14
Each third volume is an index to all preceding volumes
Indexes covering every 5 v. (beginning with v. 71 and
excluding financial volumes) issued with title: Consolidated
index-digest of reports of the Interstate Commerce
Commission involving motor carrier operating rights
b) Integrating resources. Make notes on the presence and nature of indexes if considered
to be important.
Includes unnumbered chronology volume
Includes indexes
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2003 Update
12-33
12.7B18
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.7B18. Summary. Give a brief objective summary of the content of a resource unless
another part of the description provides enough information.
Summary: Contains text of Canadian federal, provincial,
and territorial environmental and occupational safety and
health laws and implementing regulations; also contains
guidelines, objectives, and codes of practice
"This set of pages is a collection of links to sites on
the Internet dealing especially with English and American
literature, excluding most single electronic texts, and is
limited to collections of information useful to academics"
(Statement appears on chief source of information)
Summary: Distributes weekly programming, including news
and information, comedy and variety, music, and specials and
documentaries, with emphasis on developing new talents and
program concepts, and on serving diverse audiences. Also
provides links to other public radio organizations and
industry- re la ted information
Summary: Home page of the British Columbia Archives,
located in Victoria, B.C. Includes information about using
the archives and its collections. Provides access to digital
archival resources, including visual images and textual,
genealogical, and cartographic materials
12.7B19. Contents. Make notes on contents as instructed in subrute .7B18 in the chapter
dealing with the type of material to which the resource belongs (e.g., 3.7B18 for cartographic
resources).
For serials, make notes on inserts, other serials included in the serial, and important spe-
cial items with specific titles. Do not give contents notes for monographic series.
Includes : Bibliography of Northwest materials
Issues for 1922-1931 include: The woman voter : official
organ of the League of Women Voters
12.7B20. Numbers. Give numbers associated with the resource other than those given in the
standard number and terms of availability area if considered to be important (see 12.8B).
Supt. of Docs, no.: HE 20.3047:
12.7B21. Copy being described, library's holdings, and restrictions on use. Make these
notes as instructed in 1.7B20.
Library lacks: Vol. 12, v. 16
Vol. 17 lacks 3 illustrations
Restricted to institutions with a print subscription and a
site/user ID and password
Restricted to association members
12-34
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2O03 Update
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.7B23
12.7B22. "Issued with" notes. If the description is of a resource issued with one or more
other resources, make a note beginning Issued with: and listing the other resource(s).
Issued with : Journal of envi ronmental science and heal th .
Part B, Pesticides, food contaminants, and agricultural
wastes; and: Journal of environmental science and health.
Part C, Environmental health sciences
Issued with: Who's where in Manitoba
12.7B23. Item described. If the description is not based on the first issue or part or on the
first iteration, make a note.
a) Serials
i) Numbered serials. Make a note of the issue or part upon which the description
is based. If more than one issue or part has been consulted, make a note of the
latest issue or part consulted in making the description. Combine information
about earliest and latest issues or parts consulted in a single note if both are
appropriate. Do not make a note of earliest and/or latest issues or parts recorded
in the numbering area.
Description based on: Vol. 1, no. 3 (Aug. 1999); title
from cover
(Item described note combined with source of title proper note)
Description based on: Ho. 8 (Jan. /June 1997); latest
issue consulted: no. 12 {Jan. /June 1999)
Latest issue consul ted : 2 001/3
(Description based on 199 1/1, the first issue)
ii) Unnumbered serials. Make a note of the earliest issue or part consulted (refer-
ring to it as instructed in I2.7A2) and its date of publication. If other issues or
parts have also been consulted and the latest issue or part can be identified, also
give the latest issue or part consulted and its date.
Description based on: Labor and economic reforms in
Latin America and the Caribbean, 1995
Description based on: The wood demon / by Anton
Pavlovich Chekhov ; translated by Nicholas Saunders and
Frank Dwyer, 1993; latest issue consulted; Ibsen : four
major plays / translated by Rick Davis and Brian Johnson,
1995
b) Integrating resources. Make a note of the latest iteration consulted in making the
description.
Description based on: 1994 ed. through update 10
Description based on version consulted: Oct. 26, 2000
For remote access resources, always give the date on which the resource was viewed for
description.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2003 Update
12-35
12.8
CONTINUING RESOURCES
Description based on contents viewed on Oct. 21, 1999
Title from title bar (viewed on Jan. 13, 2000)
(Item described note combined with source of title proper note)
12.8. STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
Contents:
12.8A. Preliminary rule
12.8B. Standard number
12.8C. Key-title
12. 8D. Terms of availability
12. 8E. Qualification
12.8A. Preliminary rule
12.8A1. Punctuation
For instructions on the use of spaces before and after prescribed punctuation, see 1.0C.
Precede this area by a full stop, space, dash, space or start a new paragraph.
Precede each repetition of this area by a full stop, space, dash, space.
Precede a key-title by an equals sign.
Precede terms of availability by a colon.
Enclose a qualification to the standard number or terms of availability in parentheses.
12.8B. Standard number
12.8B1. Give the International Standard Serial Number (ISSN) or International Standard
Book Number (ISBN) assigned to a resource as instructed in 1.8B.
(Item described is an integrating resource)
ISSN 0027-7495 (corrected)
12.8B2. Give any other number in a note (see 12.7B20).
118C. Key-title
12.8C1. Give the key-title, if it is found on the resource or is otherwise readily available,
after the International Standard Serial Number (ISSN). Give the key-title even if it is identical
to the title proper. If no ISSN is given, do not record the key-title.
ISSN 0075-2363
ISSN 0046-225X
ISBN 0-79132-699-3
ISSN 0479-7469
Volunteer (Washington)
ISSN 0268-9707
newsletter
British Library Bibliographic Services
ISSN 0319-3012
Image (Niagara ed.)
12-36
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2003 Update
CONTINUING RESOURCES
12.10A
12.8D. Optional addition. Terms of availability
12.8D1, Give the terms on which the resource is available as instructed in 1 .8D.
£0 . 50 per issue
$6,45 per year
12.8E. Qualification
12.8E1. Add qualifications to the standard number and/or terms of availability as instructed
in 1.8E.
$30.00 per year ($25,00 to association members)
£3.00 to individuals (£8.40 to libraries)
12.8E2. For updating loose-leafs, add the qualification (loose-leaf) to the ISBN.
ISBN 0-86325-016-5 (loose-leaf)
12.9. SUPPLEMENTS
12.9A. Describe supplements as instructed in 1 .9.
12.10. SECTIONS
12.10A. Do not use the "multilevel" structure (see chapter 13) for the description of sections
of a resource. Describe such sections as separate resources (see 12.1B4-12.1B6).
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2003 Update
12-37
CHAPTER
In*
Analysis
Contents
13.1 SCOPE
J3.2 ANALYTICAL ADDED ENTRIES
13.3 ANALYSIS OF MONOGRAPHIC SERIES AND MULTIPART MONOGRAPHS
13.4 NOTE AREA
13.5 "IN" ANALYTICS
13.6 MULTILEVEL DESCRIPTION
13.1. SCOPE
13.1A. Analysis is the process of preparing a bibliographic record that describes a part or
parts of an item for which a comprehensive entry might be made. The rules in this chapter
offer various ways of achieving analysis. Some of these methods of analysis are related to
provisions found in other chapters, but all the methods are collected here with general guide-
lines to assist in the selection of one of the means of analysis. Cataloguing agencies have
their own policies affecting analysis; in particular, a policy predetermining the creation of
separate bibliographic records may override any other consideration.
Although the rules in this chapter are stated as instructions, apply them according to the
policy of the cataloguing agency.
13.2. ANALYTICAL ADDED ENTRIES
13.2A. If, in a comprehensive entry for a larger work, a part is named either in the title and
statement of responsibility area or in the note area, make an added entry for that part. The
heading for the added entry consists of the main entry heading (which may include or consist
of a uniform title) or title proper of the part (see 21.30M). This method is appropriate when
direct access to the part is wanted without creating an additional bibliographic record for the
part.
AACR2 Revision 2002
13-1
13.3
ANALYSIS
13.3. ANALYSIS OF MONOGRAPHIC SERIES AND MULTIPART MONOGRAPHS
I3.3A. If the item is a part of a monographic series or a multipart monograph and has a title
not dependent on that of the comprehensive item, prepare an analytical entry consisting of a
complete bibliographic description of the part. Give details of the comprehensive item in the
series area (see 1.6).
English history, 1914-1945 [gkd] / A. J. P. Taylor, - Oxford
: Clarendon Press, 1965. - xxvii, 709 p., [1] folded leaf of
plates : ill., maps ; 23 cm. - (The Oxford history of
England ; v. 15). — Bibliography: p. 602-639
13.4. NOTE AREA
13.4A. In making a comprehensive entry for a larger work, list the parts in a contents note.
This technique is the simplest means of analysis; the bibliographic description of the part is
usually limited to a citation of title or name and title.
The art of Van Gogh [gmd]
Note: Contents: v. 1. Plates - v. 2. Text
The English Bible :gmd; : essays / by various writers
Note: Contents: The noblest monument of English prose / by
John Livingston Lowes - The English Bible / by VS. Macneile
Dixon - The English Eible / by A. Clutton-Brock - On reading
the Eible / by Arthur Quil ler-Couch
13.5. "IN" ANALYTICS
13.5A. If more bibliographic description is needed for the part than can be obtained by dis-
playing it in the note area, make an "In" analytic entry.
The descriptive part of an "In" analytic entry consists of a description of the part analyzed
followed by a short citation of the whole item in which the part occurs.
Make a description of the part analyzed consisting of those of the following elements that
apply to the part:
title proper, other title information, statement(s) of responsibility
edition
numbering (in the case of a serial)
publication, distribution, etc., details
extent and specific material designation (when appropriate, in
terms of its physical position within the whole item)
other physical details
dimensions
notes
Begin the citation of the whole item with In (italicized, underlined, or otherwise empha-
sized). Follow In by:
name and/or uniform title heading (see part II) of the whole item,
if appropriate
title proper
13-2
AACR2 Revision 2002
ANALYSIS
13.5B1
statements) of responsibility when necessary for identification
edition statement
numbering {of a serial) or publication details (of a monographic
item)
Miss Mapp [GMD] / E.F. Benson. - 310 p. ; 23 cm.
In [Heading], All about Lucia. — New York : Sun Dial
Press, 1940
The moving toyshop [gmd] : a detective story / by Edmund
Crispin. - p. 210-450 ; 30 cm.
In The Gollancz detective omnibus . — London ; Gollancz,
1951
The loved one [Gmd] / by Evelyn Waugh, — p. 78-159 ; 17 cm.
In Horizon. - Vol. 17, no. 98 (Feb. 1948)
Index numbers of road traffic and inland goods transport
[gmd] . - Feb. 1960-
In Monthly digest of statistics / British Central
Statistical Office. - Mo. 170 (Feb. 1960)-
A view of Hampstead from the footway next the Great Road,
Pond Street [GMD] = Vue de Hampstead de la chaussee pres du
Grand Chemin, rue du Bassin. — 1 art reproduction : b&w ; 30
X 35 cm. — Reprint of engraving originally published:
London : Robert Sayer, 1745
In Twelve views of Camden, 1733-1875. — London : London
Borough of Camden, Libraries and Arts Dept., 1971
Bob Wills and his Texas Playboys [gkd] . — side 4 of 2 sound
discs (ca. 17 min.) : analog, 33 1 /* rpm, stereo. ; 12 in.
In Texas country. — Los Angeles : United Artists, pl976
Nonbook materials (MBM) [gmd] / Ronald Hagler. — on side B
of tape 2 of 3 sound cassettes : analog, mono.
In [Heading] . Institute on International Standards as
Related to Universal Bibliographic Control. — [Los Angeles]
: Development Digest, cl976
13.5B. Parts of "In" analytics
13.5B1. In making an "In" analytic entry for a part of an item that is itself catalogued by
means of an "In" analytic entry, make an "In" analytic note containing information about the
whole item and about the part containing the part being analyzed. Give information about the
smaller item first, and then information about the comprehensive item in the form of a series
statement.
The Tao teh king, or, The Tao and its characteristics
[GMD] . - p. [45] -124 ; 23 cm.
In The texts of Taoism / translated by James Legge. Part
1. — Oxford : Clarendon Press, 1891. — (The sacred books of
the East. The sacred books of China ; v. 39)
AACR2 Revision 2002
13-3
13.6
ANALYSIS
13.6. MULTILEVEL DESCRIPTION
13.6A. Multilevel description is normally used by national bibliographies and those catalogu-
ing agencies that prepare entries needing complete identification of both part and comprehen-
sive whole in a single record that shows as its primary element the description of the whole.
Use it as an alternative to "In" analytic entries.
Divide the descriptive information into two or more levels. Give at the first level only
information relating to the item as a whole. Give at the second level information relating to a
group of parts or to the individual part being described. If information at the second level
relates to a group of parts, give information relating to the individual part at a third level.
Make the levels distinct by layout and/or other means.
The sacred books of the East [gkd] / translated by various
oriental scholars and edited by F. Max Miiller. — Oxford :
Clarendon Press, 1879-1910. - 50 v. ,• 23 cm.
Vols. 39-40: The texts of Taoism / translated by James
Legge. — 1891, - (The sacred books of China)
Pt. 1: The Tao teh king. The writings of Kwang-tsze, books
I-XVII . - xxii, 396 p.
American folklore :gmd; / co-ordinated for the Voice of
America by Tristram Coffin. — Washington : United States
Information Agency, 1967. — 28 sound tape reels : analog,
I 1 /,- ips, mono. ; 7 in. — (Forum series)
8: The American traditional ballad / G.M. Laws. — 1 sound
tape reel (35 min,). — Includes illustrative excerpts
Remembrance of things past ;gmd] / Marcel Proust ;
translated by C.K. Scott [Jloncrieff, — London : Chatto £
Windus, 1957. - 12 v. ; 19 cm. - Translation of: A la
recherche du temps perdu
Vols. 1-2: Swann's way / illustrated by Philippe Jullian. -
Translation of; Du cote de chez Swann. — This translation
originally published in 1922
Pt. 1: 1957 (1973 printing). - 303 p., 4 leaves of plates
: ill. - I SEN 0-7011-1048-1
When all the parts are received, complete any element left open.
13-4
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS,
UNIFORM TITLES,
AND REFERENCES
INTRODUCTION
20.1. When a standard description for an item has been established according to the rules in
part I, add headings and/or uniform titles to that description to create catalogue entries. The
only exception is when an entry is made under title proper, in which case the entry may be
made under the first words of the description. In this connection, see also 0.6.
The rules in part II deal with the choice of access points for main and added entries (chap-
ter 21), with the form of name headings and uniform titles (chapters 22-25), and with refer-
ences (chapter 26). In each chapter, general rules precede special rules. Where no specific
rule exists for a specific problem, apply the more general rule(s).
The rules in part II apply to works and not to physical manifestations of those works,
though the characteristics of an individual item are taken into account in some instances.
The rules in part II apply to ail library materials.
20.2. Chapter 23 deals with geographic names. Though often used as part of corporate head-
ings, these names pose a separate problem. Distinguish between the problem of establishing
geographic names in a standard form and the related but separate problem of establishing
corporate headings involving such names.
20.3. In chapters 22, 23, and 24, there are rules for additions to names used as headings (see
22.17-22.19, 23.4, and 24.4C). Always make such additions in cases of need to distinguish
otherwise identical names in a catalogue, and in other cases called for by the mies. In addi-
tion, for the optional rules in chapter 22, optionally add these elements to all headings, in
anticipation of future conflicts. In automated catalogues, such optional additions will always
be recorded in the machine-readable record, but they need not necessarily form part of head-
ings in printed entries derived from those records.
EXAMPLES
20.4. As with the examples in part I, those in part II are illustrative and not prescriptive.
Moreover, they illustrate only the solutions to the problems dealt with in the rule to which
they are appended. Other added entries (in chapter 21) or references (in chapters 22-25) may
be necessary in the actual instances cited.
When an example prescribes main (or added) entry under title, interpret title as meaning
title proper or uniform title as appropriate in the particular case. When a rule or example
prescribes a name-title added entry, make an additional added entry under the title concerned,
if appropriate.
The presentation of the examples (their layout and typography) is only intended to help in
the use of the rules. Do not take it as implying a prescribed layout or typography for head-
ings and uniform titles.
AACR2 Revision 2002
Part II-l
20.4
INTRODUCTION
In chapters 22-25, x is used to indicate the necessity for a see reference and xx the neces-
sity for a see also reference.
The elements of bibliographic description included in the examples in this part (principally
in chapters 21 and 25) are set out according to the provisions of part I. These never constitute
a complete description. The elements shown are only those that bear on the choice and/or
form of the access point(s).
Part II-2
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHAPTER
21
Choice of Access Points
Contents
21.0 INTRODUCTORY RULES
21. OA Main and added entries
21. OB Sources for determining access points
2 1 .OC Form of examples
21, 0D Designations of function
21.1 GENERAL RULE
21
.1A
Works of personal authorship
21
.IA1
Definition
21.
,1A2
Genera] rule
21.
.IB
Entry under corporate body
21
IB 1
Definition
21
,1B2
General rule
21
.3C
Entry under title
21.2 CHANGES IN TITLES PROPER
21. 2A Multipart monographs
2 1 .2B Integrating resources
21.2C Serials
213 CHANGES OF PERSONS OR BODIES RESPONSIBLE FOR A WORK
21. 3A Monographs
2! ,3B Serials and integrating resources
21 .4 WORKS FOR WHICH A SINGLE PERSON OR CORPORATE BODY IS
RESPONSIBLE
21. 4A Works of single personal authorship
21. 4B Works emanating from a single corporate body
21.4C Works erroneously or fictitiously attributed to a person or corporate body
21.4D Works by heads of state, other high government officials, popes, and other
high ecclesiastical officials
21.4D1 Official communications
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
21-1
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.4D2 Other works
21.4D3 Collections of official communications and other works
21 .5 WORKS OF UNKNOWN OR UNCERTAIN AUTHORSHIP OR BY UNNAMED
GROUPS
21.6 WORKS OF SHARED RESPONSIBILITY
21.6A Scope
21.6B Principal responsibility indicated
21 .6C Principal responsibility not indicated
21 .6D Shared pseudonyms
2 1 .7 COLLECTIONS OF WORKS BY DIFFERENT PERSONS OR BODIES
2 1.7 A Scope
21.7B With collective title
21.7C Without collective title
Works of Mixed Responsibility
23 .8 WORKS OF MIXED RESPONSIBILITY
2I.SA Scope
Works That Are Modifications of Other Works
21.9 GENERAL RULE
Modifications of Texts
21.10 ADAPTATIONS OF TEXTS
21.11 ILLUSTRATED TEXTS
21.31A General rule
21.1 IB Illustrations published separately
21.12 REVISIONS OF TEXTS
21.12A Original author considered responsible
21.12B Original author no longer considered responsible
21.13 TEXTS PUBLISHED WITH COMMENTARY
21.13A Scope
21.13B Commentary emphasized
2I.13C Edition of the work emphasized
21.1 3D Chief source of information ambiguous
21.14 TRANSLATIONS
21.15 TEXTS PUBLISHED WITH BIOGRAPHICAL/CRITICAL MATERIAL
21-2
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
Art Works
21.16 ADAPTATIONS OF ART WORKS
21.17 REPRODUCTIONS OF TWO OR MORE ART WORKS
21.17A Without text
21.17B With text
Musical Works
21.18 GENERAL RULE
21.I8A Scope
21.18B Arrangements, transcriptions, etc.
21.18C Adaptations
21.19 MUSICAL WORKS THAT INCLUDE WORDS
21.I9A General rule
2I.I9B Pasticcios, ballad operas, etc.
23.19C Writer's works set by several composers
21.20 MUSICAL SETTINGS FOR BALLETS, ETC.
21.21 ADDED ACCOMPANIMENTS, ETC.
21.22 LITURGICAL MUSIC
Sound Recordings
2 1 .23 SOUND RECORDINGS
21.23A One work
21.23B Two or more works by the same person(s) or body (bodies)
21.23C Works by different persons or bodies. Collective title
21.23D Works by different persons or bodies. No collective title
Mixed Responsibility in New Works
21.24 COLLABORATION BETWEEN ARTIST AND WRITER
21.25 REPORTS OF INTERVIEWS OR EXCHANGES
21 .26 SPIRIT COMMUNICATIONS
21.27 ACADEMIC DISPUTATIONS
Related Works
21.28 RELATED WORKS
21.28A Scope
2L28B General rule
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-3
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
Added Entries
21.29 GENERAL RULE
21.30 SPECIFIC RULES
21.30A Two or more persons or bodies involved
21.30B Collaborators
21.30C Writers
21.30D Editors and compilers
2 1 JOE Corporate bodies
2 1 .30F Other related persons or bodies
2 1 .30G Related works
2 1 .30H Other relationships
21.30J Titles
21.30K Special rules on added entries in certain cases
21.30K1 Translators
21.30K2 Illustrators
2L30L Series
2 1 .30M Analytical entries
Special Rules
Certain Legal Publications
21.31 LAWS, ETC,
21.31A Scope
2 1 .3 1 B Laws of modern jurisdictions
21.31B1 Laws governing one jurisdiction
2L31B2 Laws governing more than one jurisdiction
21.31B3 Bills and drafts of legislation
2L31C Ancient laws, certain medieval laws, customary laws, etc.
21.32 ADMINISTRATIVE REGULATIONS, ETC.
21 .32A Administrative regulations, etc., that are not laws
21.32B Administrative regulations, etc., that are laws
21.32C Collections of administrative regulations, etc.
21.33 CONSTITUTIONS, CHARTERS, AND OTHER FUNDAMENTAL LAWS
2L33C Drafts
21.34 COURT RULES
21.35 TREATIES, INTERGOVERNMENTAL AGREEMENTS, ETC.
2 1 .35 A International treaties, etc.
2I.35A1 Treaties, etc., between two or three governments
21.35A2 Treaties, etc, between four or more governments
21.35B Agreements contracted by international intergovernmental bodies
21.35C Agreements contracted by the Holy See
21.35D Other agreements involving jurisdictions
21-4
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.0B1
2 1 J5E Protocols, amendments, etc.
21.35F Collections
21.36 COURT DECISIONS, CASES, ETC.
21.36A Law reports
21.36A1 Reports of one court
2I.36A2 Reports of more than one court
21.36B Citations, digests, etc.
21.36C Particular cases
21.36C5 Proceedings in the first instance. Criminal proceedings
21.36C2 Proceedings in the first instance. Other proceedings
21.36C3 Appeal proceedings
21.36C4 Indictments
2 1 .36C5 Charges lo juries
21 .36C6 Judicial decisions
2L36C7 Judicial opinions
2 1 .36C8 Records of one party
21.36C9 Collections
Certain Religious Publications
21.37 SACRED SCRIPTURES
21.38 THEOLOGICAL CREEDS, CONFESSIONS OF FAITH, ETC.
21.39 LITURGICAL WORKS
21.39A General rule
21.39B Liturgical works of the Orthodox Eastern Church
21.39C Jewish liturgical works
21.0. INTRODUCTORY RULES
21.0A. Main and added entries
21.0A1. The rules in this chapter are rules for determining the choice of access points (head-
ings) under which a bibliographic description (see part I) is entered in a catalogue. The rules
give instructions on the choice of one of these access points as the main entry heading, the
others being added entry headings. In general, each rule only gives instructions on those
access points that are explicitly covered by the rule. Certain general points (e.g., series entries
and title added entries) are dealt with in the rules on added entries (see 21.29-21,30).
21.0B, Sources for determining access points
21.0B1. Determine the access points for the item being catalogued from the chief source of
information (see 1.0A) for the item or any part of the item that is being used as its substitute.
Take other statements prominently stated in the item into account (see 0.8). Use information
appearing only in the content of an item (e.g., the text of a book; the sound content of a
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-5
21.0C
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
sound recording) or appearing outside the item only when the statements appearing in the
chief source of information are ambiguous or insufficient.
21.0C. Form of examples
21.0C1. The access points to be made are indicated without showing their forms. Determine
the forms of these access points as instructed in chapters 22-25. When an example is fol-
lowed by Main (or Added) entry under title, use the title proper or, when appropriate, the
uniform title {see chapter 25).
Title added entries are indicated only when the rule involves consideration of the title as a
possible main entry heading. See 21.30J for general rales on making title added entries.
21.0D. Optional addition. Designations of function
21.0D1, In the cases noted below, add an abbreviated designation of function to an added
entry heading for a person.
FUNCTION PERFORMED DESIGNATION
compiler comp.
editor ed.
illustrator ill.
translator tr.
Add other designations to headings as instructed in particular rules.
In specialist or archival cataloguing, when desirable for identification or file arrangement,
add designations from standard lists appropriate to the material being catalogued.
21.1. GENERAL RULE
2L1A. Works of personal authorship
21.1A1. Definition. A personal author is the person chiefly responsible for the creation of the
intellectual or artistic content of a work. For particular applications of this definition, see sub-
sequent rules in this chapter. For persons who function solely as performers on sound record-
ings, see 21.23.
21.1A2. General rule. Enter a work by one or more persons under the heading for the per-
sonal author (see 21.4A), the principal personal author (see 21. 6B), or the probable personal
author (see 21.5B). In some cases of shared personal authorship (see 21.6) and mixed per-
sonal authorship {see 21.8-21.27), enter under the heading for the person named first. Make
added entries as instructed in 21.29-21.30.
21.1B. Entry under corporate body
21.1B1. Definition. A corporate body is an organization or a group of persons that is identi-
fied by a particular name and that acts, or may act, as an entity. Consider a corporate body to
have a name if the words referring to it are a specific appellation rather than a general
description. Consider a body to have a name if, in a script and language using capital letters
for proper names, the initial letters of the words referring to it are consistently capitalized,
and/or if, in a language using articles, the words are always associated with a definite article.
Typical examples of corporate bodies are associations, institutions, business firms, nonprofit
21-6
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.1B2
enterprises, governments, government agencies, projects and programmes, religious bodies,
local church groups identified by the name of the church, and conferences. 1
Some corporate bodies are subordinate to other bodies (e.g., the Peabody Museum of Nat-
ural History is subordinate to Yale University; the Annual General Meeting is subordinate to
the Canadian Library Association).
Consider ad hoc events (such as athletic contests, exhibitions, expeditions, fairs, and festi-
vals) and vessels (e.g., ships and spacecraft) to be corporate bodies.
21.1B2. Genera] rule. Enter a work emanating 2 from one or more corporate bodies under the
heading for the appropriate corporate body (see 21.4B, 21 ,5B) if it fails into one or more of
the following categories:
a) those of an administrative nature dealing with the corporate body itself
or its internal policies, procedures, finances, and/or operations
or its officers, staff, and/or membership (e.g., directories)
or its resources (e.g., catalogues, inventories)
b) some legal, governmental, and religious works of the following types: 3
laws (see 21.31)
decrees of the chief executive that have the force of law (see 21.31)
administrative regulations (see 21.32)
constitutions (see 21.33)
court rules (see 21.34)
treaties, etc. (see 21.35)
court decisions (see 21.36)
legislative hearings
religious laws (e.g., canon law)
liturgical works (see 21.39)
c) those that record the collective thought of the body (e.g., reports of commissions, com-
mittees, etc.; official statements of position on external policies)
d) those that report the collective activity of a conference (e.g., proceedings, collected
papers), of an expedition (e.g., results of exploration, investigation), or of an event
(e.g., an exhibition, fair, festival) falling within the definition of a corporate body (see
21.IB1), provided that the conference, expedition, or event is named in the item being
catalogued
e) those that result from the collective activity of a performing group as a whole where the
responsibility of the group goes beyond that of mere performance, execution, etc. Publi-
cations resulting from such activity include sound recordings, films, videorecordings, and
written records of performances. (For corporate bodies that function solely as performers
on sound recordings, see 21,23.)
f) cartographic materials emanating from a corporate body other than a body that is
merely responsible for their publication or distribution.
1 . Conferences are meetings of individuals or representatives of various bodies for the purpose of discussing and/or acting
on topics of common interest, or meetings of representatives of a corporate body that constitute its legislative or governing
body.
2. Consider a work to emanate from a corporate body if it is issued by that body or has been caused to be issued by that
body or if it originated with that body.
3. Some legal and governmental works are entered under headings for bodies other than the body from which they emanate.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
21-7
21.1B3
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
In case of doubt about whether a work falls into one or more of these categories, treat it as
if it does not.
In some cases of shared responsibility (see 21.6) and mixed responsibility (see 21.8-
21.27), enter such a work under the heading for the corporate body named first. Make added
entries as instructed in 21.29-21.30.
21.1B3. If a work emanates from one or more corporate bodies and falls outside the catego-
ries given in 21.1B2, treat it as if no corporate body were involved. Make added entries under
the headings for prominently named corporate bodies as instructed in 2L30E.
21.1C. Entry under title
21.1C1. Enter a work under its title proper or, when appropriate, uniform title (see chapter
25) if:
a) the personal authorship is unknown (see 21.5) or diffuse (see 21.6C2), and the
work does not emanate from a corporate body
or b) it is a collection of works by different persons or bodies (see 21.7)
or c) it emanates from a corporate body but does not fall into any of the categories
given in 2L1B2 and is not of personal authorship
or d) it is accepted as sacred scripture by a religious group (see 21.37).
Make added entries as instructed in 21.29-21.30.
21.2. CHANGES IN TITLES PROPER
21.2A. Multipart monographs
21.2A1, If a change occurs in the title proper of a multipart monograph between parts, give/
retain the title proper of the first or earliest part as the title proper of the whole monograph.
In general, give the later title proper in a note and make an added entry as instructed in
21.30J1.
21.2B. Integrating resources
21.2B1. If a change occurs in the title proper of the same integrating resource,, do not make a
new entry. Instead, replace the title proper with the new title and change the description to
reflect the latest iteration. In general, give the earlier title proper in a note (see 12.7B4.2) and
make an added entry as instructed in 2 1 . 30 J I .
21.2C. Serials
21.2C1. If a major change occurs in the title proper of a serial, make a new entry.
21.2C2, Definition of major and minor title changes for serials
a) Major changes. In general, consider as a major change in a title proper of a serial the
addition, deletion, change, or reordering of any of the first five words (the first six
words if the title begins with an article) unless the change belongs to one or more of
the categories listed in 21.2C2b.
21-8
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.2C2
Consider also as a major change the addition, deletion, or change of any word after
the first five words (the first six words if the title begins with an article) that changes
the meaning of the title or indicates a different subject matter.
Also consider as a major change in title proper a change in a corporate body name
given anywhere in the title if it is a different corporate body.
b) Minor changes. In general, consider the following to be a minor change in a title
proper of a serial:
i) a difference in the representation of a word or words anywhere in the title (e.g.,
one spelling vs. another; abbreviated word or sign or symbol vs. spelled-out
form; arabic numeral(s) vs. roman numeral(s); numbers or dates vs. spelled-out
form; hyphenated words vs. unhyphenated words; one-word compounds vs. two-
word compounds, whether hyphenated or not; an acronym or initialism vs, full
form; or a change in grammatical form {e.g., singular vs. plural))
ii) the addition, deletion, or change of articles, prepositions, or conjunctions
anywhere in the title
iii) a difference involving the name of the same corporate body and elements of its
hierarchy or their grammatical connection anywhere in the title (e.g., the
addition, deletion, or rearrangement of the name of the same corporate body or
the substitution of a variant form)
iv) the addition, deletion, or change of punctuation, including initialisms and letters
with separating punctuation vs, those without separating punctuation, anywhere
in the title
v) a different order of titles when the title is given in more than one language in the
chief source of information, provided that the title chosen as title proper still
appeal's as a parallel title
vi) the addition, deletion, or change of words anywhere in the title that link the title
to the numbering
vii) two or more titles proper used on different issues of a serial according to a
regular pattern
viii) the addition to, deletion from, or change in the order of words in a list anywhere
in the title, provided that there is no significant change in the subject matter
ix) the addition, deletion, or rearrangement anywhere in the title of words that
indicate the type of resource such as "magazine," "journal," or "newsletter" or
their equivalent in other languages.
In case of doubt, consider the change to be a minor change.
As appropriate, give, in the note area (see I2.7E4.2), those changes not considered
to constitute a major change in the title proper. Make added entries as instructed in
21.3011.
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
21-9
21.3
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.3. CHANGES OF PERSONS OR BODIES RESPONSIBLE FOR A WORK
21. 3A, Monographs
21.3A1. If a monographic work is modified by a person or corporate body other than the
person or body under which the work in its original edition was entered, enter it as instructed
in 21.9-21.23.
21.3A2. If a change in responsibility occurs between the parts of a multipart monograph,
enter the monograph under the heading appropriate to the first or earliest part. If a different
person or corporate body is responsible for a later part(s), make a note and an added entry
under the heading for any later person or body.
21.3B. Serials and integrating resources
21.3B1.
a) Serials. Make a new entry for a serial when any of the following conditions arises,
even if the title proper remains the same:
i) if the heading for a corporate body under which a serial is entered changes
or ii) if the main entry for a serial is under a personal or corporate heading and
the person or body named in that heading is no longer responsible for the
serial
or iii) if the main entry for a serial is under a uniform title (see 25.5B) with a cor-
porate heading as a qualifier and the corporate heading changes or the body
named in that heading is no longer responsible for the serial.
b) Integrating resources. If any of the conditions given in 2 1 .3B 1 a occurs, do not make a
new entry for the same integrating resource. Instead, change the entry to reflect the lat-
est information and give the earlier name or form of name in a note if considered to be
important (see 12.7B7.2).
21.4. WORKS FOR WHICH A SINGLE PERSON OR CORPORATE BODY IS
RESPONSD3LE
21.4A. Works of single personal authorship
21.4A1. Enter a work, a collection of works, or selections from a work or works by one per-
sonal author {or any reprint, reissue, etc, of such a work) under the heading for that person
whether named in the item being catalogued or not.
The sun also rises / by Ernest Hemingway
Main entry under the heading for Hemingway
The doom fulfilled / Sir Edward Burne-Jones
Main entry under the heading for Burne-Jones
I.F. Stone's newsletter
Main entry under the heading for Stone
21-10
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.4B1
De bello Germanico ... / 'written in 1918 by the Author of
Undertones of war
Main entry under the heading for the author of Undertones of war, known to be Edmund
Blunden
The poetic and dramatic works of Alfred, Lord Tennyson
Main entry under the heading for Tennyson
Virginia Woolf : selections from her essays
Main entry under the heading for Woolf
Symphony no. 4, E minor, for orchestra, op. 98 / by
Johannes Brahms
Main entry under the heading for Brahms
The ecological crisis / Richard Felger
(A film st rip )
Main entry under the heading for Felger
Diagnosis and management of abdominal emergencies / LeRoy H.
Stahlgren
(A set of slides )
Main entry under the heading for Stahlgren
A short title catalogue of French books, 1601-1700, in the
Library of the British Museum / by V.F. Goldsmith. —
Folkestone : Dawsons
(A catalogue not emanating from the library)
Main entry under the heading for Goldsmith
Fifty years of modern art, 1916-1966 / Edward B. Henning. —
[Cleveland] : Cleveland Museum of Art
(A catalogue of a loan exhibition held at the museum)
Main entry under the heading for Henning
The Tate Gallery / John Rothenstein. — New York : Abrarns
(A description of works from the gallery 's collections )
Main entry under the heading for Rothenstein
The indispensable Earl Hines
{A selection of recordings by the jazz pianist)
Main entry under the heading for Hines
A tale of a tub : written for the universal improvement of
mankind
(Published anonymously; known to be by Jonathan Swift)
Alain entry under the heading for Swift
21.4B. Works emanating from a single corporate body
21.4B1. Enter a work, a collection of works, or selections from a work or works emanating
from one corporate body (or any reprint, reissue, etc., of such a work) under the heading for
the body if the work or collection falls into one or more of the categories given in 21.1B2,
Board of Directors meeting, 1972, ALA Annual Conference /
Association of State Library Agencies
(Minutes of an unnamed meeting of the parent body)
Main entry under the heading for the association 's board
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-11
21.4B1
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
M-S tep today : interim report of project activities. —
Baltimore : Multi-State Teacher Education Project
Main entry under the heading for the project
The log of the Bon Homme Richard
Main entry under the heading for the ship
The book of discipline of the United Methodist Church,
1972
Main entry under the heading for the church
The book of common prayer, and administration of the
sacraments and other rites and ceremonies of the church,
according to the use of the Church of England
Main entry under the heading for (he church
Codex juris canonici / Pii X pontif icis maximi iussu
digestus Benedicti papae XV auctoritate
Main entry under the heading for the Catholic Church
Directory / American Bar Association, Section of Patent,
Trademark, and Copyright Lav;
Main entry under the heading for the association 's section
Constitution of the American Society of Zoologists
Main entry under the heading for the society
A room-to-room guide to the National Gallery / by Michael
Levey. — [London] : Publications Dept., the National Gallery
Main entry under the heading for the gallery
The art collection of the First National Bank of Chicago. -
Chicago : First National Bank of Chicago
(Catalogue of the collection)
Main entry under the heading for the bank
Roman and pre-Roman glass in the Royal Ontario Museum : a
catalogue / John W. Hayes. — Toronto : Royal Ontario Museum
Main entry under the heading for the museum
Rembrandt in the National Gallery of Art. — [Washington,
D.C. : National Gallery of Art]
(Catalogue of an exhibition of the gallery's holdings)
Main entry under the heading for the gallery
Author-title catalog / Library, University of California,
Berkeley. - Boston : G.K. Hall
Main entry under the heading for the library
Oversight hearings on the Service Contract Act of 1965, as
amended : hearings before the Subcommittee on Labor-
Management Relations of the Committee on Education and
Labor, House of Representatives, Ninety-fourth Congress,
second session
Main entry under the heading for the subcommittee
21-12
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.4B1
Courts organization : twelfth interim report of the
Committee on Court Practice and Procedure. — Dublin ;
Stationery Office
(Committee established to investigate the operations of the conns and to
recommend changes in practice, procedure, etc. )
Main entry under the heading for the committee
Firm action for a fair Britain : the Conservative
manifesto, 1974. — [Westminster : Conservative Central
Office]
Main entry under the heading for the Conservative Party
Hydrogen sulfide health effects and recommended air
quality standard / prepared for the Illinois Institute of
Environmental Quality by the Environmental Health Resource
Center
Main entry under the heading for the center
Northern communities consultation on local responsible
government : a consideration of the possible revision of the
Northern Affairs Act to allow thirty-six unincorporated
communities a larger role in local government responsi-
bilities : a report / prepared for the Honourable Minister
of Northern Affairs, Ron McBryde, by the Manitoba Human
Relations Centre
(Recommendations with supporting data )
Main entry under the heading for the c entre
General safety standard for installations using non-
medical X-ray and sealed gamma -ray sources, energies up to
10 MeV : approved May 24, 1974, American National Standards
Institute ... / American National Standards Subcommittee
N4 3-5
Main entry under the heading for the institute's subcommittee
Capital and equality : report of a Labour Party study
group
(The study group, which recommends policies to the party, is unnamed )
Main entry under the heading for the party
Institute on International Standards as Related to
Universal Bibliographic Control : [proceedings]
(A sound cassette )
Main entry under the heading for the institute
Proceedings of the Symposium on Talc, Washington, D.C.,
May 8, 1973
Main entry under the heading for the symposium
Ceramics for high-performance applications : proceedings
of the Second Army Materials Technology Conference, held at
Hyannis, Massachusetts, November 13-16, 1973
Main entry under the heading for the conference
Canones et decreta sacrosancti oecvmenici et generalis
Concilii Tridentini
Main entry under the heading for the council
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-13
21.4C
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
High tide and green grass / the Rolling Stones
(Songs written and performed by the group)
Main entry under the heading for the group
Paradise now / collective creation of the Living Theatre ;
written down by Judith Malina and Julian Beck
(Written record of a play created by the group)
Main entry under the heading for the group
Synchronicity concert / the Police ; executive producers,
Miles Copland, Derek Power, Kim Turner ; directed by Godley
and Creme
(Videorecording of a performance by the band the Police)
Main entry under the heading for the band
Halley Bay, Coats Land, Falkland Island Dependencies,
1955-1959 / The Royal Society International Geophysical Year
Antarctic Expedition
Main entry under the heading for the expedition
Offizielles Programm : 26 . VI 1-20 .VI I I / Salzburger
Festspiele, 1967
Main entry under the heading for the festival
Catalogo della 35" 1 esposizione biennale internazionale
d'arte, Venezia
Main entry under the heading for the exhibition
Watford : 2 L A inch map / Ordnance Survey
Main entry under the heading for the survey
South America / produced by the Cartographic Division,
National Geographic Society
(A map )
Main entry under the heading for the society's division
21.4C. Works erroneously or fictitiously attributed to a person or corporate body
21.4CL If responsibility for a work is known to be erroneously or fictitiously attributed to a
person, enter under the actual personal author or under title if the actual personal author is
not known. Make an added entry under the heading for the person to whom the authorship is
attributed, unless he or she is not a real person.
The autobiography of Alice B. Toklas
(The life of Gertrude Stein written by herself as though it were an autobiography
of her secretary, Alice B. Toklas )
Main entry under the heading for Stein
Added entiy under the heading for Toklas
The hums of Pooh / by Winnie the Pooh
(Written by A.A. Milne)
Main entry under the heading for Milne
The adventure of the peerless peer / by John H. Watson ;
edited by Philip Jose Farmer
{Written by Fanner as if by the fictitious Dr. Watson)
Main entiy under the heading for Farmer
21-14
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.4D1
21.4C2. If responsibility for a work is known to be erroneously or fictitiously attributed to a
corporate body, enter the work under the actual personal author, or under the actual corporate
body responsible if the work falls into one of the categories given in 21.1B2, or under title if
the actual author or responsible corporate body is unknown. Make an added entry under the
heading for the corporate body to which responsibility is attributed, unless it is not a real
body.
21.4D. Works by heads of state, other high government officials, popes, and other high
ecclesiastical officials
21.4D1. Official communications. Enter a work that falls into one of the following catego-
ries under the corporate heading for the official (see 24.20 and 24.27B):
a) an official communication from a head of state, head of government, or head of an
international body (e.g., a message to a legislature, a proclamation, an executive order
other than one covered by 21. 3t)
b) an official communication from a pope, patriarch, bishop, etc. (e.g., an order, decree,
pastoral letter, bull, encyclical, constitution, or an official message to a council, synod,
etc.).
Make an added entry under the personal heading for the person.
A proclamation of Queen Anne for settling and ascertaining
the current rates for foreign coins in America
Main entry under the corporate heading for Anne as sovereign
Added entry under the persona! heading for Anne
New York City at war : emergency services : report / by
F.H. La Guardia, mayor
Main entry under the corporate heading for La Guardia as mayor
Added entry under the personal heading for La Guardia
Proclamations and executive orders by the President,
under, and by virtue of, the Food Control Act of August 10,
1917 : November 25, 1918
{Communications of President Wilson )
Mam entry under the corporate heading for Wilson as president
Added entry under the personal heading for Wilson
Fulgens Corona : on the Marian Year and the dogma of the
Immaculate Conception : encyclical letter of His Holiness,
Pope Pius XII
Main entry under the corporate heading for Pius XII as Pope
Added entry under the personal heading for Pius XII
Carta pastoral sobre cursilhos de Cristandade / Antonio de
Castro Mayer, bispo de Campos
Main entry under the corporate heading for Mayer as Bishop
Added entry under the personal heading for Mayer
Our vocation as children of Saint Francis : being the
encyclical letter Divina Providentia of the Most Rev. Fr .
General Pacific M. Perantoni, O.F.M.
Main entry under the corporate heading for Perantoni as Minister General of the order
Added entry under the personal heading for Perantoni
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-15
21.4D2
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
Enter a communication that merely accompanies and transmits a document under the head-
ing for the document that it accompanies. Make an added entry under the corporate heading
for the transmitting official.
Explosives Regulation Act : message from the President of
the United States, transmitting to the Vice President a
letter from the Secretary of the Interior, recommending an
amendment to the Explosives Regulation Act
(Message of President Wilson)
Main entry under the heading for the hiierior Department
Added entry under the corporate heading for Wilson as president
Enter a collection of official communications of more than one holder of one of the offices
listed in a) and b) above under the heading for the office. Make an added entry under the
heading for a compiler named prominently in the item being catalogued.
Economic report of the President, transmitted to the
Congress
(An annua! )
Main entry under the heading for the office of president of the United States
Tutte le encicliche dei sornmi pontef ici / raccolte e
annotate da Eucardio Momigliano
Main entry under the heading for the office of Pope
Added entry under the heading for Momigliano
21.4D2. Other works. Enter all other works of such a person under the personal heading.
Make an explanatory reference from the corporate heading to the personal heading (see
26.3C1).
Address of President Roosevelt to the Deep Waterway
Convention at Memphis, Tennessee, October 4, 1907
Main entry under the personal heading for Roosevelt
The second inaugural address of Abraham Lincoln
Main entry under the personal heading for Lincoln
Non-citizen Americans in the war emergency / by
Fiorello H. La Guardia, mayor
(A radio address )
Main entry under the personal heading for La Guardia
Science and the existence of God ; and, Science and
philosophy : two addresses / Pope Pius XII
Main entry under the personal heading for Pius XII
2L4D3. Collections of official communications and other works. Enter a collection of offi-
cial communications and other works by one person under the personal heading. Make an
added entry under the corporate heading.
The King to his people : being the speeches and messages
of His Majesty King George the Fifth delivered between July
1911 and May 1935
Main entry under the personal heading for George V
Added entry under the corporate heading for George V as sovereign
21-16
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21. 5A
Discorsi, messaggi, colloqui del Santo Padre Giovanni
XXIII : 28 ottobre 1958-3 giugno 1963
Alain entry under the personal heading for John XXlll
Added entry under the corporate heading for John XXIII as Pope
Enter a collection of official communications and other works by more than one holder of
an office as a collection (see 21.7). Make an added entry under the heading for the office
held.
Papal thought on the state : excerpts from encyclicals and
other writings of recent popes / edited by Gerard F . Yates
(Includes texts of public addresses )
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for the office of Pope
A compilation of the messages and papers of the Presidents
... / by James D. Richardson
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for the office of president of the United States
21.5. WORKS OF UNKNOWN OR UNCERTAIN AUTHORSHIP OR BY UNNAMED
GROUPS
2I.5A. If a work is of unknown or uncertain personal audiorship or if it emanates from a
body that lacks a name, enter it under title.
The secret expedition ■- a farce (in two acts) as it has
been represented upon the political theatre of Europe
{Author unknown)
Main entry under title
A memorial to Congress against an increase of duties on
importations / by citizens of Boston and vicinity
Main entry under title
Orthogonal expansions and their continuous analogues :
proceedings of a conference held at Southern Illinois
University, Edwardsville, April 27-29, 1967 / edited by
Deborah Tepper Haimo
Main entry under title
If such a work has been attributed to one or more persons or corporate bodies, either in
editions of the work or in reference sources, make added entries under the headings for these
persons or corporate bodies.
The lav/ scrutiny, or, Attornies' guide
(Variously attributed to Andrew Carmichael and William Norcott)
Main entry under title
Added entries under the headings for Carmichael and Norcott
La capuciniere, ou, Le bijou enleve a la course : poSme
(Possibly by Pierre-Francois Tissot; erroneously attributed to Pierre- J ean-Baptiste
Nougaret)
Main entry under title
Added entries under the headings for Tissot and Nougaret
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
21-17
21.5B
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.5B. If reference sources indicate that a person is the probable author of such a work, enter
under the heading for that person. If a work falling into one or more of the categories given
in 21.1B2 probably emanates from a particular corporate body, enter under the heading for
that body. Make added entries under the headings for other persons or bodies to which the
work has been attributed, and under tide.
A true character of Mr. Pope
(Author uncertain; generally attributed to John Dennis)
Main entry under the heading for Dennis
Added entry under title
Portrait of Andrew Jackson
(A daguerreotype once attributed to Mathew Brady but generally thought to be by
Edward Anthony)
Main entry under the heading for Anthony
Added entries under the heading for Brady and under title
21.5C. If the name of a personal author is unknown and in the chief source of information of
the item being catalogued the only indication of authorship is the appearance of a characteriz-
ing word or phrase or of a phrase naming another work by the person, enter under the word
or phrase in the form given in 22.1 ID. Make an added entry under title.
Memoir of Bowman Hendry ... / by a Physician
(Name of author unknown)
Main entry under the characterizing word
The unveiled heart : a simple story / by the Author of
Early impressions
(Name of author unknown)
Main entry under the phrase
If the only indication of authorship is a nonalphabetic and nonnumerical device, enter
under title. Do not make an added entry under the device.
Angry thoughts / by *!*!*
(Name of author unknown)
Main entry under title
21.6. WORKS OF SHARED RESPONSIBILITY
21.6A. Scope
21.6A1. Apply this rule to:
a) works produced by the collaboration of two or more persons
b) works for which different persons have prepared separate contributions
c) works consisting of an exchange between two or more persons (e.g., correspondence,
debates)
d) works falling into one or more of the categories given in 21.1B2 that emanate from two
or more corporate bodies
e) works listed in a)-c) above that also contain contributions emanating from one or more
corporate bodies
f) works resulting from a collaboration or exchange between a person and a corporate
body.
21-18
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.6B2
Apply it also to cases of shared responsibility among adapters, arrangers, commentators,
reporters, etc., when rules 21.8-21.27 prescribe main entry under the headings for such
persons.
Do not apply this rule to:
a) multipart monographs if there is a change in responsibility between the parts (see
21.3A2)
b) works that are collections of previously existing works (see 21.7).
For special types of collaboration, see the rules on mixed responsibility (21. 8-21.27).
21.6B, Principal responsibility indicated
21.6B1. If, in a work of shared responsibility, principal responsibility is attributed (by the
wording or the layout of the chief source of information of the item being catalogued) to one
person or corporate body, enter under the heading for that person or body. If the name of
another person or corporate body appears first in the chief source of information, make an
added entry under the heading for that person or body. Make added entries under the head-
ings for other persons or bodies involved if there are not more than two.
The humanities and the library ... / by Lester Asheim and
associates
Main entry under the heading for Asheim
Lady sings the blues / Billie Holiday with William Dufty
Main entry under the heading for Holiday
Added entry under the heading for Dufty
Animal motivation ■. experimental studies on the albino rat
/ by C.J. Warden with the collaboration of T.N. Jenkins ...
[et al. ]
(Three additional collaborators named on title page)
Main entry under the heading for Warden
Faustus : a musical romance ... / composed by T. Cooke,
Charles E. Horn, and Henry R. Bishop
(Bishop's name is displayed more prominently than those of the others)
Main entry under the heading for Bishop
Added entries under the headings for Cooke and Horn
"Aaron, r.f." / by Henry Aaron as told to Furman Bisher
Main entry under the heading for Aaron
Added entry under the heading for Bisher
21.6B2. If principal responsibility is attributed to two or three persons or bodies, enter under
the heading for the first named of these. Make added entries under the headings for the oth-
ers. If a work is by two principal persons or corporate bodies and one collaborating person or
body, make an added entry also for the third person or body.
Calcium montmorillonite (fuller's earth) in the Lower
Greensand of the Baulking area, Berkshire / E.G. Poole and
B. Kelk with contributions from J. A. Bain ... [et al . ]
(Four additional contributors named on title page)
Main entry under the heading for Poole
Added entry under the heading for Kelk
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
21-19
21.6C
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
The United Nations and economic and social co-operation /
by Robert E. Asher, Walter M. Kotschnig, William Adams
Brown, Jr., and associates
Main entry under the heading for Asher
Added entries under the headings for Kotschnig and Brown
The geology of the southern part of the south
Staffordshire coalfield / by Talbot H. Whitehead &
T. Eastwood with contributions by T. Robertson
Main entry under the heading for Whitehead
Added entries under the headings for Eastwood and Robertson
21.6C. Principal responsibility not indicated
21.6C1. If responsibility is shared between two or three persons or bodies and principal
responsibility is not attributed to any of them by wording or layout, enter under the heading
for the one named first. Make added entries under the headings for the others.
Health for effective living : a basic health education
text for college students / Edward Johns, Wilfred C. Sutton,
Lloyd E. Webster
Main entry under the heading for Johns
Added entries under the headings for Sutton and Webster
Mrs. Wilson's diaries / Richard Ingrams and John Wells
Main entry under the heading for Ingrams
Added entry under the heading for Weils
The basement tapes / Bob Dylan & the Band
{Songs written and performed by Dylan and the rock group the Band)
Main entry under the heading for Dylan
Added entry under the heading for the Band
Mail order and trade-paper advertising / by Homer J.
Buckley, G.D. Crain, Jr., and Maxwell Droke
(Contains Mail order advertising by Homer J. Buckley, Industrial and trade-paper
advertising by G.D. Crain, Jr., Advertising letters by Maxwell Droke)
Main entry under the heading for Buckley
Added entries under the headings for Crain and Droke
The correspondence between Benjamin Harrison and James G.
Blaine, 1882-1893
Main entry under the heading for Harrison
Added entry under the heading for Blaine
Debate, subject, resolved that the United States continue
the policy of prohibition as defined in the Eighteenth
Amendment / Clarence Darrow, negative, versus John Haynes
Holmes, affirmative
Main entry under the heading for Darrow
Added entry under the heading for Holmes
21-20
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.6C2
If the names of the persons or bodies appear in a different order in the chief sources of
information of different editions of the work, enter each edition under the heading for the
person or body named first in that edition.
Decision systems for inventory management and production
planning / Rein Peterson, Edward A. Silver
Main entry under the heading for Peterson
Added entry under the heading for Silver
Decision systems for inventory management and production
planning. — 2nd ed . / Edward A. Silver, Rein Peterson
Main entry under the heading for Silver
Added entry under the heading for Peterson
If the persons or bodies are not named in the item, enter under the one named first in a
previous edition or, if there is no previous edition, under the one whose heading comes first
in English alphabetic order.
21.6C2. If responsibility is shared among more than three persons or corporate bodies and
principal responsibility is not attributed to any one, two, or three, enter under title. Make an
added entry under the heading for the first person or corporate body named prominently in
the item being catalogued. If editors are named prominently, make an added entry under the
heading for each if there are not more than three. If there are more than three named promi-
nently, make an added entry under the heading for the principal editor and/or for the one
named first.
Texas country / Willie Nelson ... [et al.]
(A sound recording; three additional performers named on labels )
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for Nelson
Reforma agraria / Antonio de Castro Mayer ... [et al.j
(Three additional authors named on title page)
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for Mayer
Melanges d'histoire du moyen age / offerts a M. Ferdinand
Lot par ses amis et ses sieves
Main entry under title
A dictionary of music and musicians (A.D. 1450-1889) / by
eminent writers ... ; edited by Sir George Grove
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for Grove
A dictionary of American English on historical principles /
compiled at the University of Chicago under the editorship
of Sir Wil liam A . Cra igie and James R. Hulber t
Main entry under title
Added entries under the headings for Craigie and Hulbert
Larousse de la musique / publie sous la direction de
Horbert Dufourcq avec la collaboration de Felix Raugel,
Armand Machabey
Main entry under title
Added entries under the headings for Dufourcq, Raugel, and Machabey
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-21
21.6D
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.6D. Shared pseudonyms
21.6D1. If two or more persons collaborate and use a single pseudonym, use the pseudonym
as the heading Tor a work produced by their collaboration. Refer to the pseudonym from their
names (see 26.2C1). If headings for one or more of the persons are also established in the
catalogue, refer also from the pseudonym to those headings.
Deadly weapon / Wade Miller
(Wade Miller is the joint pseudonym of Bill Miller and Bob Wade)
Main entry under the pseudonym
References to the pseudonym from the headings for Miller and Wade
The detective short story : a bibliography / by Ellery
Queen
(Ellery Queen is the joint pseudonym of Frederic Dannay and Manfred B. Lee )
Main entry under the pseudonym
References to the pseudonym from the headings for Dannay and Lee
Philip : the story of a boy violinist / by T.W.O-
(Initials are the joint pseudonym of Mary C. Hungerford and Virginia C. Young )
Main entry under the initials
References to the pseudonym from the headings for Hungerford and Young
Rowntree' s elect cocoa / Beggarstaff Brothers
(A poster)
(Beggarstaff Brothers is the joint pseudonym of the artists James Pryde and Sir
William Nicholson, who also did work under their own names)
Main entry under the pseudonym
References to the pseudonym from the headings for Pryde and Nicholson
Reference to the headings for Pryde and Nicholson from the pseudonym
21.7. COLLECTIONS OF WORKS BY DIFFERENT PERSONS OR BODIES
21.7A. Scope
21.7A1. Apply this rule to:
a) collections of independent works by different persons or bodies
b) collections consisting of extracts from independent works by different persons or
bodies
c) works consisting partly of independent works and partly of contributions by different
persons or bodies.
For collections of sound recordings, see 21.23C-21.23D.
21.7B. With collective title
21.7B1. Enter a work falling into one of the categories given in 21.7A under its title if it has
a collective title. Make added entries under the headings for the compilers/editors if there are
not more than three and if they are named prominently in the item being catalogued. If there
21-22
AACR2 Revision 2002
• CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.7B1
are more than three compilers/editors named prominently, make an added entry under the
heading for the principal compiler/editor and/or for the one named first.
Working-class stories of the 1890s / edited, with an
introduction, by P.J. Keating
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for Keating
The Hamish Hamilton book of giants / edited by William
Mayne
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for Mayne
Economics of the environment : selected readings / edited
by Robert Dorfman and fJancy S. Dorfman
Main entry under title
Added entries under the headings for R. Dorfman and N. Dorfman
The Oxford dictionary of quotations
(". . . under the general editorship of Miss Alice Mary Smyth, who worked, for
purposes of selection, with a small committee formed of members of the Press
itself" — P. xiii)
Main entry under title
Journal of research of the U.S. Geological Survey
(Contains research papers written by staff members )
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for the survey
Motor bus laws and regulations : a complete code of all
motor bus regulatory laws ... / compiled and edited by
John M. Meighan
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for Meighan
Constitutions of nations / [compiled by] Amos J. Peaslee
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for Peaslee
Treaty series : treaties and international agreements
registered or filed and recorded with the Secretariat of the
United Nations
Main entry under title
Conciliorum oecumenicorum decreta
(Contains decrees of councils from the 1st Council of Nicaea to the 1st Vatican
Council)
Main entry under title
Codex canonum ecclesiae universae = The canons of the
first four general councils of the church, and those of the
early local Greek synods : in Greek, with Latin and revised
English translations ... / with notes selected by William
Lambert
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for Lambert
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-23
2L7C
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
The Ethiopia Didascalia, or, The Ethiopic version of the
Apostolical constitutions received in the Church of
Abyssinia
Main entry under title
If such an item includes two or three works, make name-title added entries for each of
them.
Classic Irish drama / introduced by W. A. Armstrong
(Contains The Countess Cathleen by W.B. Yeats, The playboy of the western world
by J.M. Synge, Cock-a-doodle dandy by Sean O' Casey)
Main entiy under title
Added entries (name-title) under the headings for Yeats, Synge, and O' Casey
Added entry under the heading for Armstrong
If there are more than three works but only two or three persons or bodies responsible,
make an added entry (or name -title added entry when appropriate) under the heading for each
person or body.
Regency poets : Byron, Shelley, Keats / compiled by C.R.
Bull
Main entry under title
Added entries under the headings for Byron, Shelley, Keats, and Bull
A Cornish quintette : five original one-act plays from the
Cornwall Drama Festivals, 1970-2
(Contains A skeleton in the cupboard and The happening at Botathen by Donald
R. Rawe, Wheal Judas and The Christmas widow by Bumess Bunn, Shadows of
men by Gwen Powell Jones)
Main entry under title
Added entries under the headings for Rawe and Bunn
Added entry (name-title) under the heading for Jones
Traffic laws, city and state
(Contains ordinances of the city of Houston and laws of the state of Texas )
Main entry under title
Added entries under the headings for Houston and Texas with uniform titles for the
ordinances and laws
If more than three persons or bodies are named in the chief source of information, make an
added entry under the first person or body named there.
21.7C Without collective title
21.7C1. If a work falling into one of the categories given in 2I.7A1 lacks a collective title,
enter it under the heading appropriate to the first work named in the chief source of informa-
tion of the item being catalogued. If the item lacks a collective chief source of information,
enter it under the heading appropriate to the first work in the item. Make added entries for
editors/compilers and for the other works as instructed in 21.7B1, insofar as it applies to
works without a collective title.
In praise of older women / Stephen vizinczey. Feramontov /
Desmond Cory, The graveyard shift / Harry Patterson
Main entiy under the heading for Vizinczey
Added entries (name-title ) under the headings for Cory and Patterson
21-24
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.10A
History of the elementary school contest in England /
Francis Adams. Together with The struggle for national
education / John Mo r ley ; [both] edited, with an
introduction, by Asa Briggs
Main entry under the heading for Adams
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading for Morley
Added entry under the heading for Briggs
Works of Mixed Responsibility
21.8. WORKS OF MIXED RESPONSIBILITY
2I.SA. Scope
21.8A1, A work of mixed responsibility is one to which different persons or bodies make
intellectual or artistic contributions by performing different kinds of activity (e.g., writing,
adapting, illustrating, editing, arranging, translating) ,
The rules in this section are divided into the following two types of mixed responsibility;
a) previously existing works that have been modified (e.g., translations, musical arrange-
ments, adaptations, see 21.9-21.23)
b) new works to which different persons or bodies have made different kinds of contribu-
tions (e.g., collaborative works by a writer and an artist, works reporting interviews, see
21.24-21.27).
Works That Are Modifications of Other Works
21.9. GENERAL RULE
21.9A. Enter a work that is a modification of another under the heading appropriate to the
new work if the modification has substantially changed the nature and content of the original
or if the medium of expression has been changed. If, however, the modification is an abridge-
ment, rearrangement, etc., enter under the heading appropriate to the original. In some cases
the wording of the chief source of information is taken into account; in other cases the nature
of the work itself is the basis for the decision on entry.
For specific applications of this general rule, see 21.10-21.23.
Modifications of Texts
21.10. ADAPTATIONS OF TEXTS
21.10A. Enter a paraphrase, rewriting, adaptation for children, or version in a different liter-
ary form (e.g., noveiization, dramatization) under the heading for the adapter. If the name of
the adapter is unknown, enter under title. Make a name-title added entry for the original
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-25
21.11
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
work. In case of doubt about whether a work is an adaptation, enter under the heading for the
original work.
The science of education : a paraphrase of Dr. Karl
Rosenkranz' s Paedagogik als System / by Anna C. Brackett
Main entry under the heading for Brackett
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading for Rosenkranz
Sinclair Lewis's Dodsworth / dramatized by Sidney Howard
Main entry under the heading for Howard
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading for Lewis
The green goddess / by Louise Jordan Miln ... ; based on
the play The green goddess by William Archer
Main entry under the heading for Miln
Added entry (name-title) under the heading for Archer
Sam Weller, or, The Pickwickians : a farcical comedy ... /
arranged from Charles Dickens's work by W.T. Moncrieff
(Dramatization of scenes from The Pickwick papers)
Main entry under the heading for Moncrieff
Added entry (name- title) under the heading for Dickens
Adventures of Tom Sawyer / by Mark Twain ; rewritten for
young readers by Felix Sutton
Main entry under the heading for Sutton
Added entry (name-title) wider the heading for Twain
Harp and psaltery : a group of paraphrases of favorite
Psalms / by Frank P, Fletcher
Main entry under the heading for Fletcher
Added entiy under the heading for the Psalms
The pilgrim' s progress : for the young . , .
(Adapted by an unknown person from John Bunyan 's work)
Main entry under title
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading for Bunyan
Tristan / Gottfried von Strassburg ; translated . . . With
the surviving fragments of the Tristan of Thomas, newly
translated . . .
(Both works are versions of the Tristan story)
Main entry under the heading for Gottfried
Added entty (name-title ) under the heading for Thomas
Added entry under the heading for the Tristan story
21.11. ILLUSTRATED TEXTS
21.11A. General rule
21.11A1. Enter a work that consists of a text for which an artist has provided illustrations
under the heading appropriate to the text. Make an added entry under the heading for the
21-26
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.12A1
illustrator if appropriate under the provisions of 2I.30K2. For instructions on works of col-
laboration between a writer and an artist, see 21 .24.
The bedside manner, or, No more nightmares / by Robert
Benchley ; with drawings by Gluyas Williams
Main entry under the heading for Benchley
British butterflies / by E.B. Ford ; with ... colour
plates by Paxton Chadwick
(Illustrations occupy more than half the item)
Main entry under the heading for Ford
Added entry under the heading for Chadwick
Stories from the Arabian nights / retold by Laurence
Housman ; with drawings by Edmund Dulac
(Dulac is a famous book illustrator )
Main entry under (he heading for Housman
Added entry under the heading for Dulac
21.11B. Illustrations published separately
21.11B1. If the illustrations for a text, or for several texts, by one artist are published sepa-
rately, enter them under the heading for the artist. Make a name-title added entry for the
work(s) illustrated if there are not more than three. If, however, the illustrations are for more
than three works by one writer, make an added entry under the heading for the writer.
The Dore illustrations for Dante's Divine comedy : 136
plates / by Gustave Dore
Main entry under the heading for Dore
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading for Dante
21.12. REVISIONS OF TEXTS
2I.12A. Original author considered responsible
21.12A1. Enter an edition of a work that has been revised, enlarged, updated, etc., under the
heading for the original author if:
a) the original author is named in a statement of responsibility in the item being
catalogued
or b) the original author is named in the title proper and no other person is named in a
statement of responsibility or other title information.
Make an added entry under the heading for the reviser, etc.
Anatomy of the human body / by Henry Gray. — 25th ed. /
edited by Charles Mayo Goss
Main entry under the heading for Cray
Added entry under the heading for Goss
Guide to the study and use of reference books / by Alice
Bertha Kroeger. — 3rd ed. / revised throughout and much
enlarged by Isadore Gilbert Mudge
Main entry under the heading for Kroeger
Added entry under the heading for Mudge
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-27
21.12B
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
Leaves from our Tuscan kitchen ... / Janet Ross and
Michael Water field
(A revision by Waterfield of Ross ' book of the same tide )
Main entry under the heading for Ross
Added entry under the heading for Waterfield
A dictionary of modern English usage / by H.W. Fowler. —
2nd ed. / revised by Sir Ernest Gowers
Main entry under the heading for Fowler
Added entty under the heading for Gowers
Hart' s Rules for compositors and readers at the University
Press, Oxford. — 39th ed. r completely revised
Main entiy under the heading for Hart
Boi se ' s Manua 1 of gem cu tting . — 4 th rev. ed.
(Reviser, Gerhard Tucker, named only in the introduction )
Main entry under the heading for Boise
Added entty under the heading for Tucker
Enter an abridgement of a work under the heading for the original author. Make an added
entry tinder the heading for the abridger. For condensations that involve rewriting, see 21.10.
John Evelyn's diary : a selection from the diary / edited
by Phi lip Francis
Main entry under the heading for Evelyn
Added entry under the heading for Francis
The people's Marx. — Abridged popular ed. of the three
vols, of Capital / edited by Julian Borchardt ; translated
by Stephen L. Trask
Main entry under the heading for Marx
Added entry under the heading for Borchardt
21.12B. Original author no longer considered responsible
21.12B1. Enter under the heading for the reviser, etc., or under title, as appropriate, if the
wording of the chief source of information of the item being catalogued indicates that the
person or body responsible for the original is no longer considered to be responsible for the
work (e.g., when the original author is named only in the title proper and some other person
or body is named as being primarily responsible in the statement of responsibility or in the
statement of responsibility relating to the edition). Make a name-title added entry under the
heading for the original author using, if it can be readily ascertained, the title of the last
edition to have been entered under the heading for the person or body responsible for the
original. Always make a title added entry if the title begins with the name of the original
author and the main entry is under the name of the reviser, etc.
Salmond on the law of torts. - 12th ed. / by R.V. Heuston
Main entry under the heading for Heuston
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading for Salmond
Added entry under title
21-28
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.13C1
Roget's Thesaurus of English words and phrases. — New ed. /
completely rev. and modernized by Robert A. Dutch
Main entry' under the heading for Dutch
Added entry (name-title) under the heading for Roget
Added entry under title
Guide to reference books. — 7th ed. / by Constance M.
Winchell
(Based on Isadore Gilbert Mudge's sixth edition of the same work)
Main entry under the heading for Winchell
Added entry (name-title) under the heading for Mudge
21.13. TEXTS PUBLISHED WITH COMMENTARY
21.13A. Scope
2U3A1. Apply this rule to works consisting of a text, or of texts, by the same person or
body, and a commentary, interpretation, or exegesis by a different person or body.
21.13B. Commentary emphasized
21.13B1, If the chief source of information of the item being catalogued presents the item as
a commentary, enter it as such (see 21.1-21.7). Make an added entry under the heading
appropriate to the text.
Commentary on the Rule of St. Augustine / by Robertus
Richardinus
(Includes the text of the Regula)
Main entry under the heading for Richardinus
Added entry (name-title) under the heading for St. Augustine
Averrois Cordubensis Commentarium magnum in Aristotelis De
anima iibros
(Includes a Latin text o/De anima)
Main entry under the heading for Averroes
Added entry (name-title) under the heading for Aristotle
The Federal Expropriation Act : a commentary / by Eric
C.E. Todd
(Includes the text of the act )
Main entry under the heading for Todd
Added entry under the heading for the act
21.13C. Edition of the work emphasized
21.13C1. If the chief source of information presents the item as an edition of the original
work, enter it as such (see 21 .1-21,7). Make an added entry under the heading appropriate to
the commentary.
Demosthenes ; with an English commentary / by Robert
Whiston
Main entry under the heading for Demosthenes
Added entry under the heading for Whiston
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-29
21.13D
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
The interpreter's Bible ; the Holy Scriptures in the King
James and Revised Standard versions with general articles
and introduction, exegesis, exposition for each book of the
Bible
Main entry under the heading for the Bible
The Employment Protection Act, 1975 : with annotations /
by Brian Bercusson
Main entry under the heading for the act
Added entry under the heading for Bercusson
Bundesbaugeset2 : mi t Kommentar / H . Knaup, H . Ingens tau
Main entry under the heading for the law
Added entries under the headings for Knaup and Ingenstau
21.13D. Chief source of information ambiguous
21.13D1. If the information given in the chief source of information is ambiguous, enter the
work as a commentary or edition in accordance with the aspect emphasized by (in this order
of preference);
a) the prefatory material
b) the typographic presentation of the text and commentary
c) the relative extent of the text and the commentary.
In case of doubt, enter (he work as an edition and make an added entry under the heading
appropriate to the commentary.
21.14. TRANSLATIONS
21.14A. Enter a translation under the heading appropriate to the original. Make an added
entry under the heading for the translator if appropriate under the provisions of 21.30K1.
The philosopher in the kitchen / Jean-Anthelme Brillat-
Savarin ; translated by Anne Drayton
{Only English translation)
Main entry under the heading for Brillat-Savarin
A Christmas carol / Charles Dickens
{A Tamil translation by V,A. Venkatachari; only Tamil translation)
Main entry under the heading for Dickens
Fathers and sons / Ivan Turgenev ; trans la ted by Rosemary
Edmonds
{One of several English translations)
Main entry under the heading for Turgenev
Added entry under the heading for Edmonds
The Mabinogion / translated by Gwyn Jones and Thomas Jones
{An ancient collection )
Main entry under the heading for the Mabinogion
Added entries under the headings for G. Jones and T. Jones
If the translation involves adaptation or is described as a "free" translation, treat it as an
adaptation (see 21.10).
21-30
AACR2 Revision 2O02
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.16B
2I.14B. Enter a collection of translations of works by different authors as a collection
(see 21.7).
21.15. TEXTS PUBLISHED WITH BIOGRAPHICAL/CRITICAL MATERIAL
21.15A. If a work consisting of a work or works by a writer accompanied by (or interwoven
with) biographical or critical material by another person is presented in the chief source of
information of the item being catalogued as a biographical/critical work, enter it as such (see
21.1-21,7). Make an added entry under the heading appropriate to the work or works
included.
Life and letters of Mrs. Jason Lee ... / by Theressa Gay
Main entry under the heading for Gay
Added entry under the heading for Lee
21.15B. If the biographer/critic is represented as editor, compiler, etc., enter under the head-
ing appropriate to the work or works included. Make an added entry under the heading for
the biographer/critic.
Life and letters of Catharine M. Sedgwick / edited by
Mary E . Dewey
Main entry under The heading for Sedgwick
Added entry under the heading for Dewey
Art Works
21.16. ADAPTATIONS OF ART WORKS 4
21.16A. Enter an adaptation from one medium of the graphic arts to another under the head-
ing for the person responsible for the adaptation. If the name of the adapter is not known,
enter under title. Make a name-title added entry for the original work.
Children crying forfeits / engraved by C. Turner from an
original painting by Joshua Reynolds
Main entry under the heading for Turner
Added entry (name-tide ) under the heading for Reynolds
A summer night / by Albert Moore
(An anonymous lithograph of Moore's painting)
Main entry under title
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading for Moore
21.16B. Enter a reproduction of an art work (e.g., a photograph, a photomechanical reproduc-
tion, or a reproduction of sculpture) under the beading for the original work. Make an added
4. Art works include paintings, engravings, photographs, drawings, sculptures, etc., and any other creative work that can be
represented pictoriaily (e.g., ceramic designs, tapestries, fabrics).
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-31
21.17
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
entry under the heading for the person or body responsible for the reproduction, unless the
person or body is merely responsible for manufacture or publication.
Child with a straw hat / Mary Cassatt
(A photomechanical reproduction issued by the National Gallery of Art,
Washington )
Main entry under the heading for Cassatt
Added entry tinder the heading for the gallery-
Cat and butterfly : detail from a Japanese handscroll ... /
by Katsushika Hokusai
(A photomechanical reproduction)
Main entry under the heading for Hokusai
Michelangelo' s David
(A plaster reproduction )
Main entry under the heading for Michelangelo
21.17. REPRODUCTIONS OF TWO OR MORE ART WORKS
21.17A. Without text
21.17A1, Enter a work consisting of reproductions of the works of an artist without accompa-
nying text under the heading for the artist.
The paintings of Alma-Tadema
{Twelve coloured reproductions in a folder)
Main entry under the heading for Alma-Tadema
21.17B. With text
21.17B1. If a work consists of reproductions of the works of an artist and text about the artist
and/or the works reproduced, enter under the heading appropriate to the text if the person
who wrote it is represented as author in the chief source of information of the item being
catalogued. Make an added entry under the heading for the artist. Otherwise, enter under the
heading for the artist. In case of doubt, enter under the heading for the artist. If the work is
entered under the heading for the artist, make an added entry under the heading for the per-
son who wrote the text if his or her name appears in ihe chief source of information. For
works emanating from a corporate body that are catalogues of the holdings of that body, see
21.1B2a.
Mr. Lincoln's camera man, Mathew B. Brady / by Roy
Meredith
Main entry under the heading for Meredith
Added entry under the heading for Brady
Van Gogh / Palma Buccarelli
Main entry under the heading for Buccarelli
Added entry under the heading for Van Gogh
Van Gogh / par A.-M. Rosset
Main entry under the heading for Rosset
Added entry under the heading for Van Gogh
21-32
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
2U8B1
Renoir : paintings, drawings, lithographs, and etchings /
selected and introduced by Nigel Lambourne
Main entry under the heading for Renoir
Added entry under the heading for Lambourne
The landscapes of George Frederick Watts
{Author of text, Walter Bayes, named in contents list)
Main entry under the heading for Watts
Garden flowers : from plates by Jane Loudon / with an
introduction and notes on the plates by Robert Gathorne-
Hardy
Main entry under the heading for Loudon
Added entry under the heading for Gathorne-Hardy
Musical Works
21.18. GENERAL RULE
21.18A. Scope
2I.18AL Apply this rule to:
a) arrangements, transcriptions, versions, settings, etc., in which music for one medium of
performance has been rewritten for another
b) simplified versions
c) arrangements described as "freely transcribed," "based on . . . ," etc., and other arrange-
ments incorporating new material
d) arrangements in which the harmony or musical style of the original lias been changed.
21.18B. Arrangements, transcriptions, etc.
21.18B1. Enter an arrangement, transcription, etc., of one or more works of one composer (or
of parts of one composer's works) under the heading for that composer (see also 25.35C). If
the original composer is unknown, enter under title. Make an added entry under the heading
for the arranger or transcriber. Optionally, add an. to the added entry heading.
Divertimento, op. 12, no. 2 / L. van Beethoven ;
transcribed for woodwind by George J. Trinkaus
Main entry under the heading for Beethoven
Added entry under the heading for Trinkaus
Suite from The art of fugue / J.S. Bach ; arranged for
chamber orchestra by Anthony Lewis
Main entry under the heading for Bach
A dded entry under the heading for Lewis
Michael, row the boat ashore : traditional / arranged by
James Burt
(An anonymous spiritual)
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for Burt
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-33
2L18C
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.18C. Adaptations
21.18C1. Enter any of the following types of adaptations of music under the heading for the
adapter:
a) a distinct alteration of another work (e.g., a free transcription)
b) a paraphrase of various works or of the general style of another composer
c) a work merely based on other music (e.g., variations on a theme).
If the name of the adapter is not known, enter under title.
If the work is related to one other work or to a part of a work with its own title or designa-
tion (e.g., a movement, an aria), make a name-title added entry for that work or part of a
work. If the work is otherwise related to the music of another composer, make an added entry
under the heading for that composer.
In case of doubt about whether a work is an arrangement, etc., or an adaptation, treat it as
an arrangement, etc. (see 21.18B).
Grande fantaisie de bravoure sur La clochette de Paganini
: pour le piano-forte : ceuvre 2 / par Fr. Liszt
Main entry under the heading for Liszt
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading for Paganini
Du alter Stefansturm : Viennese folk tune : free
transcription for string orchestra / by J.M. Coopersmith
Main entry under the heading for Coopersmith
Nouvelles soirees de Vienne : valses-capr ices d'apres
J. Strauss / Ch. Tausig
Main entry under the heading for Tausig
Added entry under the heading for Strauss
Variationen tiber La ci darem la mano : fur das Pianoforte
mit Begleitung des Orchesters / von Friedrich Chopin
(Based on an aria from Mozart's Don Giovanni)
Main entry under the heading for Chopin
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading for Mozart
Rapsodie sur un theme de Paganini : pour piano et
orchestre, op. 43 / S. Rachmaninoff
Main entry under the heading for Rachmaninoff
Added entiy under the heading for Paganini
21.19. MUSICAL WORKS THAT INCLUDE WORDS
21.19A. General rule
21.19A1. Enter a musical work that includes words (e.g., a song, opera, musical comedy)
under the heading for the composer. For librettos, see 21.28. Make added entries under the
21-34
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.19B2
headings for the writers of the words if their work is fully represented in the item being cata-
logued (e.g., a fall score, a vocal score). If the words are based on another text, make a
name-title added entry under the heading for the original.
Dedication = Widmung : op, 25, no. 1 / Robert Schumann ;
original poem by Friedrich Rlickert
Main entry under the heading for Schumann
Added entry under the heading for Rlickert
Rigoletto : opera in three acts / libretto by Francesco
Maria Piave ; music by Giuseppe Verdi
(A vocal score; libretto based on Le roi s'amuse by Victor Hugo)
Main entry under the heading for Verdi
Added entry under the heading for Piave
Added entry (name-tide ) under the heading for Hugo
South Pacific : a musical play / music by Richard Rodger s
; lyrics by Oscar Hammers tein, 2nd ; book by Oscar
Hammers tein, 2nd, and Joshua Logan
(A meal score; libretto based on Tales of the South Pacific by James
A. Michener)
Main entry under the heading for Rodgers
Added entries under the headings for Hammerstein and Logan
Added entry (name-title) under the heading for Michener
21.19B. Pasticcios, ballad operas, etc.
21.19B1. If the music of a pasticcio, ballad opera, etc., consists of previously existing ballads,
songs, arias, etc., by various composers, enter the work under title. Make an added entry
under the heading for the person who adapted or arranged the music and under the heading
for the dramatist.
The beggar's opera / written by Mr. Gay ; to which is
prefix'd the musick to each song
(The music for this work was adapted by John Christopher Pepusch)
Main entry under title
Added entries under the headings for Gay and Pepusch
Enter a collection of musical excerpts from such a work under the title of the larger work.
Enter a single song under the heading for its own composer, or under its title if the composer
is unknown, and make a title added entry for the larger work.
Songs in the opera call'd The beggar's wedding, as it is
perform' d at the theatres
Main entry under the title of the opera
21.19B2. If the music of a pasticcio, ballad opera, etc., was especially composed for it, enter
the work as instructed in 21,6.
The most favourite songs in the opera of Muzio Scaevola /
composed by three famous masters
(The composers are Amadei, Bononcini, and Handel)
Main entry under the heading for Amadei
Added entries under the headings for Bononcini and Handel
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-35
21.19C
choice of access points
21.19C. Writer's works set by several composers
21.19C1. Enter a collection of musical settings of songs, etc., by one writer made by two or
more composers as a collection (see 21 .7). Make an added entry under the heading for the
writer.
Songs from Shakespeare's tragedies : a collection of songs
for concert or dramatic use / edited from contemporary
sources by Frederick Sternfeld
Main entiy under title
Added entry under the headings for Shakespeare and Sternfeld
Et voici mes chansons / Minou Drouet ; mises en musique
par Jean Francaix, Pierre Duclos, Paul Misraki, Bernard
Boesch, Marc Lanjean
{Drouet is the author of the words)
Main entry under title
Added entries under the headings for Drouet and Francaix
21.20. MUSICAL SETTINGS FOR BALLETS, ETC.
21.20A. Enter a musical setting for a ballet, pantomime, etc., under the heading for the com-
poser. Make added entries under the headings for choreographers and writers of scenarios,
librettos, etc., whose names appear in the chief source of information of the item being
catalogued.
Robot : ballet / choreography by Stanislaw Povitch ; music
by Walter L. Rosemont
Main entry under the heading for Rosemont
Added entry un.der the heading for Povitch
Coppelia r ou , La f ille auz yeux d f email / ballet en 2
actes et 3 tableaux, de Ch. Nuitter et Saint-Leon ; musique
de Leo Delibes
Main entry under the heading for Delibes
Added entries under the headings for Nuitter and Saint-Leon
La fete chez Therese : bal let-pan tomime / scenario de
Catul le Mendes ; musique de Reynaldo Hahn
Main entry under the heading for Hahn
Added entry under the heading for Mendes
21.21. ADDED ACCOMPANIMENTS, ETC,
21.21A, Enter a musical work to which an instrumental accompaniment or additional parts
have been added under the heading for the original work. Make an added entry under the
heading for the composer of the accompaniment or the additional parts.
Sechs Sonaten fur Violine solo / von Joh . Seb. Bach ;
herausgegeben von J. Hellmesberger ; Klavierbegleitung von
Robert Schumann
Main entry under the heading for Bach
Added entries under the headings for Hellmesberger and Schumann
21-36
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.23A1
O rosa bella
(By John Dunstable, with optional contratenors and 3 additional voices by John
Bedingham )
Main entry under the heading for Dunstable
Added entry under the heading for Bedingham
21.22. LITURGICAL MUSIC
21.22A. Enter an edition of mosic that is officially prescribed as part of a liturgy as instructed
in 21.39.
The liber usualis : with introduction and rubrics in
English / edited by the Benedictines of Solesmes
Main entry under the heading for the Catholic Church
The restored Holy Week liturgy ; practical arrangement of
the prescribed music for the average church choir / by Carlo
Rossini
Main entiy under the heading for the Catholic Church
Sound Recordings
21.23. SOUND RECORDINGS
21.23A. One work
2I.23A1. Enter a sound recording of one work (music, text, etc.) under the heading appropri-
ate to that work. Make added entries under the headings for the principal performers 5 (e.g.,
singers, readers, orchestras) unless there are more than three. If there are more than three
principal performers, make an added entry under the one named first.
How many miles to Babylon? / author, Alison Uttley
(Read by David Davis)
Main entry under the heading for Uttley
Added entry under the heading for Davis
The trout quintet : piano quintet in A major, op. 114 ... /
Schubert
(Performed by Smetana Quartet; Jan Panenka, piano; Frantisek Posta, double
bass)
Main entry under the heading for Schubert
Added entries under the headings for the quartet, Panenka, and Posta
Bury my heart at Wounded Knee / by Dee Brewn
(An abridgement of Brown 's book, dramatically presented by Henry Madden and
Manu Tupon)
Main entry under the heading for Brown
Added entries under the headings for Madden and Tupon
5. Principal performers are those given prominence (by wording or layout) in the chief source of information of the item
being catalogued.
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-37
21.23B
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.23B. Two or more works by the same person(s) or body (bodies)
21.23B1. Enter a sound recording of two or more works all by the same person(s) or body
(bodies) under the heading appropriate to those works. Make added entries under the head-
ings for the principal performers unless there are more than three. If there are more than three
principal performers, make an added entry under the one named first.
Piano rags / Scott Joplin
(Joshua Rifkin, piano )
Main entry under the heading for Joplin
Added entry under the heading for Rifkin
Any day now : songs of Bob Dylan
{Sung by Joan Baez )
Main entry under the heading for Dylan
Added entry under the heading for Baez
The best of Lennon and McCartney
{Songs by Lennon and McCartney sung by Tommy James)
Main entry under the heading for Lennon
Added entries under the headings for McCartney and James
The railway stories / W. Awdry
{Read by Johnny Morris )
Main entry under the heading for Awdry
Added entry under the heading for Morris
A tribute to Woody Guthrie
{Songs and prose by Woody Guthrie, performed by Arlo Guthrie and others)
Main entry under the heading for W. Guthrie
Added entry under the heading for A. Guthrie
21.23C. Works by different persons or bodies. Collective title
21.23C1. If a sound recording containing works by different persons or bodies has a collec-
tive title, enter it under the heading for the person or body represented as principal performer.
Pieces of the sky
(Songs by various composers performed by Emmylou Harris )
Main entry under the heading for Harris
All that jazz
(Various pieces by several composers performed by Fats Waller)
Main entry under the heading for Waller
Bonaparte' s retreat
(Folk tunes and songs by various composers performed by the band the
Chieftains )
Main entry under the heading for the band
Elisabeth Schumann
(Vocal music by various composers sung by Schumann accompanied by various
persons and bodies)
Main entry under the heading for Schumann
Adrian Ruiz plays Niels Gade and Christian Sinding
(Two works by Gade and six by Sinding performed by Ruiz)
Main entry under the heading for Ruiz
21-38
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.23D1
If there are two or three persons or bodies represented as principal performers, enter under
the heading for the first named and make added entries under the heading(s) for the other(s).
Grea t tenor arias
(Arias by various composers sung by Carlo Bergonzi with the orchestra of the
Accademia di Santa Cecilia, Rome)
Main entry under the heading for Bergonzi
Added entry under the heading for the orchestra
Dancer with bruised knees / Kate & Anna McGarrigle
(Songs by the McGarrigle sisters and others performed by them )
Main entry under the heading for K. McGarrigle
Added entry under the heading for A. McGarrigle
Irish rebel songs
(Sung by Mike Barrett and Joe Kiernan )
Main entry under the heading for Barrett
Added entry under the heading for Kiernan
Orchestral suites of the British Isles
(Works by various composers performed by the Edmonton Symphony Orchestra;
Uri Mayer, conductor)
Main entry under the heading for the orchestra
Added entry under the heading for Mayer
If there are four or more persons or bodies represented as principal performers or if there
is no principal performer, enter under title.
Music of nineteenth century England
(Several musical pieces performed by various persons and bodies )
Main entry under title
Five centuries of music in Reims
(Pieces by various composers performed by various persons and bodies)
Main entry under title
21.23D. Works by different persons or bodies. No collective title
21.23D1. If a sound recording containing works by different persons or bodies has no collec-
tive title and is to be catalogued as a unit (see 6.1G), follow one of the instructions below.
a) If the item being catalogued contains works that are of a type in which the participation
of the performer(s) goes beyond that of performance, execution, or interpretation (as is
commonly the case in "popular," rock, and jazz music), enter under the heading for the
person or body represented as principal performer.
I want to make you smile / Bill Medley ; [sung by] Kenny
Rogers. Coward of the county / R. Bowlings, B.E. Wheeler ;
[sung by] Kenny Rogers
Main entry under the heading for Rogers
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
21-39
21.2301
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
If there are two or three persons or bodies represented as principal performers, enter
under the heading for the first named and make added entries under the heading(s) for
the other(s).
All my love / Jolson, Akst, Chaplin ; Freddy Martin and
his orchestra ; vocal refrain by Clyde Rogers and the Martin
Men. When the white roses bloom in Red River Valley / Paul
Herrick, Ally Wrubel ; Freddy Martin and his orchestra ;
vocal refrain by Stuart Wade and the Martin Men
Main entry under the heading for Martin
If there are four or more persons or bodies represented as principal performers or if
there is no principal performer, enter under the heading appropriate to the first work
named.
Ko Ko Mo / Forest, Haven ; the Harmonaires with Bob Murray
Orchestra. Tweedle dee / Scott ; Joni Downs and the
Starliners. Ballad of Davy Crockett / Blackburn, Bruns ;
Heck Johns and the Pioneers. How important can it be? /
Benj amin, Weiss ; Joan Forres t wi th Jay Weston Orches tra
Main entry under the heading for Forest
b) If the works on the recording are of a type in which the participation of the
performer(s) does not go beyond that of performance, execution, and interpretation (as
is commonly the case in classical and other "serious" music), enter under the heading
appropriate to the first work and make added entries for the other works as appropriate
(see 21.7C). Make added entries under the headings for the principal performers of
each work as instructed in 21.23AI.
Sinfonia in G minor, op. 6, no. 6 / Johann Christian Bach.
Symphony in G / Michael Haydn. Cassation in D, K. 62a /
Wolfgang Arnadeus Mozart
(All performed by the Saint Paid Chamber Orchestra conducted by Dennis Russell
Da vies )
Main entry under the heading for Bach
Added entries (name-title) under the headings for Haydn and Mozart
Added entries under the headings for Davies and the orchestra
Concerto grosso no. 1 for string orchestra with piano
obbligato / Bloch . Spirituals : for s tring choir and
orchestra / Gould
(First work performed by Rafael Kubelik conducting the Chicago Symphony
Orchestra. Second work performed by Antal Dorati conducting the Minneapolis
Symphony Orchestra )
Main entry under the heading for Bloch
Added entry (name-title) under the heading for Gould
Added entries under the headings for Kubelik, Dorati, and the two orchestras
The Pied Piper / Robert Browning. The hunting of the
Snark / Lewis Carroll
(Both works read by Boris Karloff)
Main entry under the heading for Browning
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading for Carroll
Added entry under the heading for Karloff
21-40
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.24A
I look back ; Wistful ; Service of all the dead ; A
child's grace ; This glittering grief ; The ouselcock /
Herbert Elwell. String quartet no. 7 / John Verrall.
Spatials ; Sonata no. 2 ,- Spektra / George Walker
(Elwell works performed by Maxine Makas, soprano; Anthony Makas, piano.
Verrall work performed by the Berkshire Quartet. Walker works performed by the
composer, piano)
Main entry under the heading for Elwell
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading for Verrall
Added entries under the headings for M. Makas, A. Makas, the quartet, and Walker
Mixed Responsibility in New Works
21.24. COLLABORATION BETWEEN ARTIST AND WRITER
21.24A. Enter a work that is, or appears to be, a work of collaboration between an artist and
a writer under the heading for the one who is named first in the chief source of information
of the item being catalogued unless the other's name is given greater prominence by the
wording or the layout. Make an added entry under the heading for the other one. For instruc-
tions on illustrated texts, see 2 1.1 1 A.
A color guide to familiar garden and field birds, eggs,
and nests / by Jifi Felix ; illustrated by Kvetoslav Hisek
(A collaborative work)
Main entry under the heading for Felix
Added entry under the heading for Hfsek
A Carolina rice plantation of the fifties : 30 paintings
in water-colour / by Alice R. Huger Smith ; narrative by
Herbert Ravenel Sass ; with chapters from the unpublished
memoirs of D.E. Huger Smith
Main entry under the heading for A. Smith
Added entries under the headings for Sass and D. Smith
Say, is this the U.S.A.? / Erskine Caldwell and Margaret
Bourke-White
(Text by Caldwell, photographs by Bourke-White)
Main entry under the heading for Caldwell
Added entry under the heading for Bourke-White
Goodbye baby & amen : a saraband for the sixties / David
Bailey & Peter Evans
(Photographs by Bailey, text by Evans )
Main entry under the heading for Bailey
Added entry under the heading for Evans
Cartoons / by E.W. Kemble ; limericks by G. Mayo
Main entry under the heading for Kemble
Added entry under the heading for Mayo
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-41
21.25
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
Birds : a guide to the most familiar American birds / by
Herbert S. Zim and Ira K. Gabrielson ; illustrated by James
Gordon Irving
(A collaborative work )
Main entry under the heading for Zim
Added entries under the headings for Gabrielson and lr\ing
21.25. REPORTS OF INTERVIEWS OR EXCHANGES
21.25A. If a report is essentially confined to the words of the person(s) interviewed or of the
participants in an exchange (other than the reporter), enter under the principal participant,
participant named first in the chief source of information of the item being catalogued, or title
as instructed in 21.6. Make an added entry under the heading for the reporter if he or she is
named prominently in the item.
Discussion at Workshop between the Rev. R. P. Blakeney ...
and the Rev. J.B, Naghten ... / reported verbatim by Thomas
Whitehead
Main entry under the heading for Blakeney
Added entries under the headings for Naghten and Whitehead
My wartime experiences in Singapore / Mamoru Shinozaki ;
interviewed by Lim Yoon Lin
Main entry under the heading for Shinozaki
Added entry under the heading for Lim
21.25B, If a report is to a considerable extent in the words of the reporter, enter under the
heading for the reporter. Make added entries under the headings for the other person(s)
involved if they are named in the chief source of information and there are not more than
three. If there are more than three such persons named in the chief source of information,
make an added entry under the one named first.
Talks with Ralph Waldo Emerson / by Charles J. Woodbury
Main entry under the heading for Woodbury
Added entry under the heading for Emerson
Table-talk of G.B.S. : conversations on things in general
between George Bernard Shaw and his biographer / by
Archibald Henderson
Main entry under the heading for Henderson
Added entry under the heading for Shaw
Interviews impubliables / Gilbert Ganne
(Interviews with 23 persons; none named on the title page)
Main entry under the heading for Ganne
21-42
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.27A
21.26. SPIRIT COMMUNICATIONS
21.26A. Enter a communication presented as having been received from a spirit under the
heading for the spirit (see 22. 14). Make an added entry under the heading for the medium or
other person recording the communication.
Food for the million, or, Thoughts from beyond the borders
of the material / by Theodore Parker ; through the hand of
Sarah A. Ramsdell
Main entry under the heading for the spirit of Parker
Added entry under the heading for Ramsdell
21.27. ACADEMIC DISPUTATIONS
2I.27A. Enter a work written for defence in an academic disputation {according to the cus-
tom prevailing in universities before the nineteenth century and continued in some cases
thereafter) under the heading for the praeses (faculty moderator) unless the authorship of the
respondent, defender, etc., can be established. 6 Make an added entry under the heading for
whichever of the praeses, respondent, etc., is not chosen for the main entry. Optionally, add
the appropriate designation (e.g., praeses, respondent, defendant) to the added entry headings
Do not make an added entry under the name of a person designated as an opponent.
Principium Mosellae Ausonii, ad disputandum publice
propositum / praeside Conrado Samuels Schurzf leischio ;
respondente M. Godefrido Kupfender
Main entry under the heading for Schurzfteisch as praeses
Added entry under the heading for Kupfender as respondent
Observationes circa vermes intestinales ... / praeside ...
Ioanne Quistorp ; auctor Carolus Asmund Rudolphi
(Rudolphi's authorship established)
Main entry under the heading for Rudolphi
Added entry under the heading for Quistorp as praeses
If no one is named as praeses, enter under the heading for (in this order of preference) the
proponent; the defendant or respondent.
6. Do not accept the designation auctor on the title page as proof of authorship without further evidence. For works
dealing with this problem, see the following:
Eichler, Ferdinand. "Die Autorschaft der akademischen Disputationen," Sammhmg
bibliotheknvissenschtiftticfrerArbeiten, Heft 10 (1896), pp. 24-37; Heft 11 (1898), pp. 1-40.
Horn, Ewald. "Die Disputationen utid Promotionen an den deuischen Urt i vers ita ten, vornehmlich seit dem
16. Jahrhundert," Centralblatt fiir Bibliothekswesen, Bciheft XI (1893).
Kaufmann, Georg. "Zur Geschichte der academischen Grade und Disputationen," ibid., XI. Jahrg. (Mai
1894), pp. [201J-225.
Wheatley, B.R. "On the Question of Authorship in Academical Dissertations," pp. 105-121 in Wheatley,
H.B. How to Catalogue a Library. — (London : Slock, 1889).
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-43
21.28
CHOICE OF ACCESS POTNTS
Related Works
21.28. RELATED WORKS
21.28A. Scope
21.28A1. Apply this rule to a separately catalogued work (see also 1.1B9, 1.5Ela, and 1.9)
that has a relationship to another work. Such works include:
continuations and sequels
supplements
indexes
concordances
incidental music to dramatic works
cadenzas
scenarios, screenplays, etc,
choreographies
librettos and other texts set to music 7
subseries
special numbers of serials
collections of extracts from serials
Do not apply this rule to a work that has only a subject relationship to another work.
For particular types of relationship (e.g., adaptations, revisions, translations), see 21.8-
21.27.
7. Alternative rule. Enter a libretto under the heading appropriate to the musical work. Make an added entry under the
heading for the librettist. If the libretto is based on another text, make a name-title added entry under the heading for the
original.
Curlew River : a parable for church performance / by William
Piercer ; set to music by Benjamin Britten
(A libretto)
Main entry under the heading for Britten
Added entry under the heading for Plainer
□er Rosenkavalier : Komodie fiir Musi It in 3 Aufzugen / von Hugo von
Hof rcannsthal ; Musik von Richard Strauss
Main entry under the heading for Strauss
Added entry under the heading for Hofinannsthal
If, however, a libretto is published without reference to its musical setting, enter it under the heading for the author of the
libretto.
Der Rosenkavalier : Komodie fur Musik / von Hugo von Hof mannsthal
(Published as a literaiy work)
Main entry under the heading for Hofinannstlial
Enter a collection of librettos for works by one composer under the heading for the composer.
21-44
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21,2881
21.28B. General rule
21.28B1. Enter a related work under its own heading {personal author, corporate body, or
title) according to the appropriate rule in this chapter. Make an added entry 8 (name-title or
title, as appropriate) for the work to which it is related.
An index to the Columbia edition of The works of John
Milton / by Frank Allen Patterson ; assisted by French Rowe
Fogle
Main entry under the heading for Patterson
Added entry under the heading for Fogle
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading for Milton
Teacher's manual / by W.D. Lewis ... to accompany Topical
studies in United States history by A.B. Blodgett
Main entry under the heading for Lewis
Added entry (name- title ) under the heading for Blodgett
Supplement to The conquest of Peru and Mexico by the
Moguls, in the XIII century
(By John Ranking, who is also the author of the work to which the supplement is
related )
Main entry under the heading for Ranking
Added entry (name- title ) under the heading for Ranking as author of the related work
Supplement to Hain's Repertoriurn bibliographicum ... /by
W.A. Copinger
Main entry under the heading for Copinger
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading for Main
Erganzungshef te zu den Blattern fur Volksbibliotheken und
Lesehal len
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for the related work
Cumulative book index : a world list of books in the
English language ... supplementing The United States catalog
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for the related work
Histoire du peuple anglais au XIX" siecle. Epilogue (1895-
1914) / Elie Halevy
Main entry under the heading for Halevy
Added entry (name-title) for the related work not required
A complete concordance to the Iliad of Homer / by Guy
Lushing ton Prendergas t
Main entry under the heading for Prendergast
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading for Homer
A complete concordance to the Holy Scriptures of the Old
and New Testament ... /by Alexander Cruden
Main entry under the heading for Cruden
Added entry under the heading for the Bible
8. Do not make an adtied entry for the related work in the case of a sequel by the same author.
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-45
21.28B1
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
Astronomie topograph ique : complement au Trai te de
topographie gene rale : couis professe a 1 f Ecole nationale du
genie rural / par A. Carrier
Main entry under the heading for Carrier
Added entry (name-title) under the heading for Carrier as author of the related work
John Jasper's gatehouse : a sequel to the unfinished novel
The mystery of Edwin Drood by Charles Dickens / by Edwin
Harris
Main entry under the heading far Harris
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading far Dickens
Over the garden wall : Mrs. H. and Mrs. C. gossip, as
broadcast in Monday night at seven : a series of comedy
episodes / by Guy Fane
Main entry under the heading far Fane
Added entry under the heading for Monday night at seven (a radio programme)
United nations : six radio dramatizations presented on The
family hour
(Anonymous )
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for The family hour (a radio programme )
Hiroshima mon amour : scenario et dialogues / Marguerite
Duras
(A film scenario )
Main entry under the heading for Duras
Added entry under the heading for the motion picture
Conrack
(Filmstrip based on The water is wide by Pat Conroy)
Main entry under title
Added entry (name-title ) under the heading for Conroy
Art in photography : with selected examples of European
and American work / edited by Charles Holme
(Special number of the journal The studio)
Main entry under title
Added entries under the headings for Holme and the journal
Studien zur Musikwissenschaft : Beihefte der Denkmaler der
Tonkunst in Osterreich
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for the Denkmaler
Eli Terry pillar & scroll shelf clocks / by Lockwood Barr
(Supplement to the Bulletin of the National Association of Watch and Clock
Collectors)
Main entry under the heading for Barr
Added entry under the heading for the journal
Youth and the new world ,- essays from The Atlantic monthly
/ edited by Ralph Boas
Main entry under title
Added entries under the headings for Boas and the journal
21-46
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
2L29B
The Penguin book of Ximenes crosswords [from] The observer
Main entry under the heading for Ximenes
Added entry under the heading for the newspaper
Les CL Pseaumes de David escrites en diverses sortes de
lettres / par Esther Anglois
(A calligraphic work)
Main entry under the heading for Anghis
Added entry under the heading for the Psalms
Rosamunde : Drama / von H. v. Chezy ; rait Musik von Franz
Schubert
(A musical score)
Main entry under the heading for Schubert
Added entry (name- tide ) under the heading for Chezy
Cadenzas for the Flute concerto in G major (K. 313) by
Mozart / Georges Barrere
Main entry under the heading for Barrere
Added entry (name- title ) under the heading for Mozart
Walt Disney' s Alice in Wonderland
(A sound recording of songs by Oliver Wallace from the motion picture Alice in
Wonderland)
Main entry under the heading for Wallace
Added entry under the heading for the motion picture
Curlew River : a parable for church performance / by
William Plomer ; set to music by Benjamin Britten
(A libretto)
Main entry under the heading for Plomer
Added entry under the heading for Britten
Der Rosen kavalier : Komodie fur Musik in 3 Auf ztigen / von
Hugo von Hofmannsthal ; Musik von Richard Strauss
(A libretto)
Main entry under the heading for Hofmannstlial
Added entry under the heading for Strauss
Added Entries
21.29. GENERAL RULE
21.29A. Make added entries to provide access to bibliographic descriptions in addition to the
access provided by the main entry heading.
21.29B. Make added entries under headings for persons, corporate bodies, and titles as
instructed in 21.30.
If considered necessary for access, make added entries for persons and corporate bodies as
instructed in 21.30 in the following situations (for titles, see 21.30J):
1) for later parts of a multipart monograph
2) for earlier iterations of an integrating resource
3) for later issues or parts of a serial.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
21-47
21.29C
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.29C. In addition, make an added entry under the heading for a person or a corporate body
or under a title if some catalogue users might suppose that the description of an item would
be found under that heading or title rather than under the heading or title chosen for the main
entry.
21.29D. If, in the context of a given catalogue, an added entry is required under a heading or
title other than those prescribed in 21.30, make it.
21.29E. Construct a heading for an added entry according to the instructions in chapters 22-
25. For instructions on the construction of name-title added entries, see 21.30G.
21.29F. If the reason for an added entry is not apparent from the description (e.g., if a person
or body whose name is used as the basis for an added entry heading is not named in a state-
ment of responsibility or in the publication details), provide a note giving, as appropriate, the
name of the person or body (see I.7B6) and/or the title (see 1.7B4).
2L29G. Optionally, use explanatory references in place of added entries in certain cases (see
26.6).
21.30. SPECIFIC RULES
21.30A. Two or more persons or bodies involved
21.30AI, If the following subrules refer to only one person or corporate body and two or
three persons or bodies are involved in a particular instance, make added entries under the
headings for each. If four or more persons or bodies are involved in a particular instance,
make an added entry when appropriate under the heading for the one named first in the
source from which the names are taken,
21.30B. Collaborators
21.30BL If the main entry is under the heading for one of two or three collaborating persons
or bodies, make added entries under the headings for the others.
If the main entry is under the heading for a corporate body or under a title, make added
entries under the headings for collaborating persons if there are not more than three, or under
the heading for the first named of four or more.
21.30C. Writers
21.30C1. Make an added entry under the heading for a prominently named writer of a work
if the main entry is under the heading for another person or a corporate body or under title.
21.30D. Editors and compilers
21.30D1. Make an added entry under the heading for a prominently named editor or com-
piler. For serials and integrating resources, make an added entry under the heading for an
editor if considered to be important.
21-48
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.30J2
21.30E. Corporate bodies
21.30E1. Make an added entry under the heading for a prominently named corporate body,
unless it functions solely as distributor or manufacturer. Make an added entry under a promi-
nently named publisher if the responsibility for the work extends beyond that of merely pub-
lishing the item being catalogued. In case of doubt, make an added entry.
21.30F. Other related persons or bodies
21.30FI. Make an added entry under the heading for a person or corporate body having a
relationship to a work not treated in 21.1-21.28 if the heading provides an important access
point (e.g., the addressee of a collection of letters; a person honoured by a Festschrift; a
museum in which an exhibition is held).
21.30G. Related works
21.30G1. Make an added entry under the heading for a work to which the work being cata-
logued is closely related (see 21. 8-21.28 for guidance in specific cases).
In such a case, the heading is that of the person or corporate body or the title under which
the related work is, or would be, entered. If that heading is for a person or body, and the title
of the related work differs from that of the work being catalogued, add the title of the related
work to the heading to form a name-title added entry heading. When necessary, add the edi-
tion statement, date, etc., to the name-title or title added entry heading.
When appropriate, substitute a uniform title (see chapter 25) for a title proper in a name-
title or title added entry heading for a related work.
21.30H. Other relationships
2I.30H1, Make an added entry under the heading for any other name that would provide an
important access point unless the relationship between the name and the work is purely that
of a subject. For example, make added entries under the heading for the name of a collection
from which reproductions of art works have been taken or under the heading for a collection
of books upon which a bibliography is based.
When possible, formulate headings for such names by analogy with corporate name
headings.
21.30J. Titles
21.30J1. Title proper. Make an added entry under the title proper of every item entered
under a personal heading, a corporate heading, or a uniform title. Optionally, make such
added entries in accordance with the policy of the cataloguing agency.
If considered necessary for access, make an added entry in the following situations:
a) the later title proper of a multipart monograph (see 21.2A)
b) the title proper of an earlier iteration of an integrating resource (see 21.2B)
c) the changed title proper of a serial that is not a major change (see 2I.2C2).
21.30J2. Variant title. If considered necessary for access, make an added entry for any ver-
sion of the title (e.g., cover title, caption title, running title, panel title, title on container, title
bar title) that is significantly different from the title proper.
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
21-49
2L30K
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.30K. Special rules on added entries in certain cases
21.30K1. Translators. Make an added entry under the heading for a translator if the main
entry is under the heading for a corporate body or under tide.
If the main entry is under the heading for a person, make an added entry under the heading
for a translator if:
a)
the translation is in verse
or
b)
the translation is important in its own right
or
c)
the work has been translated into the same language more than once
or
d)
the wording of the chief source of information of the item being catalogued
implies that the translator is the author
or
e)
the main entry heading may be difficult for catalogue users to find (e.g., as with
many oriental and medieval works).
21.30K2. Illustrators. Make an added entry under the heading for an illustrator if:
a) the illustrator's name is given equal or greater prominence in the chief source of
information of the item being catalogued to that of the person or corporate body
named in the main entry heading
or b) the illustrations occupy half or more of the item
or c) the illustrations are considered to be an important feature of the work,
21.30L. Series
21.30L1. Make an added entry under the heading for a series for each separately catalogued
work in the series if it provides a useful collocation. Optionally, add the numeric or other
designation of each work in the series.
Do not make added entries under the heading for a series if:
a) the items in a series are related to each other only by common physical
characteristics
or b) the numbering suggests that the parts have been numbered primarily for stock
control or to benefit from lower postage rates.
In case of doubt, make a series added entry,
21.30M. Analytical entries
21.30M1. Make an analytical added entry under the heading for a work contained within the
item being catalogued (see 2l.7B-21.7C, 21.13B, and 2I.15A for guidance in specific cases).
Make additional analytical entries in accordance with the policy of the cataloguing agency.
See also chapter 13.
In such a case, the heading is that of the person or corporate body or the title under which
the work contained is, or would be, entered. If that heading is for a person or body, add the
title of the work contained to form a name-title added entry heading. When necessary, add the
edition statement, date, etc., to the name-title or title added entry heading.
21-50
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.31B1
When appropriate, substitute a uniform title {see chapter 25) for a title proper in a name-
title or title analytical entry heading.
Special Rules
Certain Legal Publications
21.31. LAWS, ETC.
21.31A. Scope
21.31A1. Apply this rule to legislative enactments and decrees of a political jurisdiction and
to decrees of a chief executive having the force of law {all hereinafter referred to as laws)
other than:
a) administrative regulations that are not laws (see 21.32A)
b) constitutions and charters (see 21.33)
c) court rules (see 21,34)
d) treaties and similar formal agreements (see 21.35).
For annotated editions of laws and commentaries, see 21.13.
21.31B. Laws of modern jurisdictions
21.31B1. Laws governing one jurisdiction. Enter laws governing one jurisdiction under the
heading for the jurisdiction governed by them. Add a uniform title as instructed in 25. 1 5 A.
Make added entries under the headings for persons and corporate bodies (other than legisla-
tive bodies) responsible for compiling and issuing the laws.
Canada Corporations Act : chap. 53, R.S.C, 1952, as
amended. - 2nd ed. - Don Mills, Ont. : CCH Canadian
Main entry under the heading for Canada with uniform title for the law
Added entry under the heading for CCH Canadian
Gesetz betreffend die Amortisation der Staatsschuld : auf
Befehl e. h. Senats der Freien und Hansestadt Hamburg
publicirt den 29. Mai 1865
Main entry under the heading for Hamburg with uniform tide for the law
The school law of Illinois ... / prepared by T.A.
Reynolds, assistant superintendent ; issued by John A,
Wieland, superintendent of public instruction ; amended by
the Fifty-ninth General Assembly
Main entry under the heading for Illinois with uniform title for the law
Added entries under the headings for Reynolds and the Department of Public Instruction
Building code of the city of Richmond, Virginia
Main entry under the heading for Richmond with uniform title for the code
Byelaws for the regulation of motor hackney carriages and
the drivers thereof in the city of Glasgow
Main entry under the heading for Glasgow with uniform title for the byelaws
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-51
21.31B2
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
The public health acts / annotated by William Golden
Lurnley and Edmund Lumley
Main entry under the heading for the United Kingdom with uniform title for the laws
Added entries under the headings for W.G. Lumley and E. Lumley
If the laws are enacted by a jurisdiction other than that governed by them, make an added
entry under the heading for the enacting jurisdiction. Add a uniform title as instructed in
25.15A to the heading for the jurisdiction.
Code of the public local laws of Worcester County :
article 24 of the Code of public local laws of Maryland :
comprising all the local laws of the state of Maryland in
force in Worcester County to and inclusive of the Acts of
the General Assembly of 1961 / edited by Carl N. Everstine
Main entry under the heading for Worcester County with uniform title for the laws
Added entry under the heading for Maryland with uniform title for the laws
Added entry under the heading for Everstine
If the laws are decrees of a head of state, chief executive, or ruling executive body (e.g., a
junta), make an added entry under the corporate heading for the official (see 24.20) or ruling
executive body.
Motverordnungen des Reichsprasidenten
Main entry under the heading for Germany with uniform title for the decrees
Added entry under the corporate heading for the Reichsprasident
Decretos-leyes de caracter electoral / dictados por la
Junta Militar de Gobierno
(Decrees of the ruling executive body of Bolivia)
Main entry under the heading for Bolivia with uniform title for the decree laws
Added entry under the heading for the junta
21.31B2. Laws governing more than one jurisdiction. Enter a compilation of laws govern-
ing more than one jurisdiction as a collection (see 21.7).
Make added entries under the headings for the jurisdictions governed if there are two or
three. If there are four or more jurisdictions and they are named in the chief source of infor-
mation of the item being catalogued, make an added entry under the heading for the one
named first. If all the laws are enacted by a single jurisdiction, make an added entry under the
heading for the enacting jurisdiction. Add a uniform title as instructed in 25.15A to each
added entry heading.
Motor bus laws and regulations : a complete code of all
motor bus regulatory la\is ... / compiled and edited by
John M. Meighan
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for Meighan
21.31B3. Bills and drafts of legislation. Enter legislative bills under the heading for the
appropriate legislative body (see 24.21). Enter other drafts of legislation as instructed in
21.1-21.7.
A bill to designate a building site for the National
Conservatory of Music of America, and for other purposes :
70th Congress, 1st session, S.2170
Main entry under the heading for the Senate of the United States
21-52
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.32A1
Draft of an act relating to the sale of goods / by Samuel
Williston
Main entry under the heading for Williston
Draft of proposed tenement house law / Commission of
Immigration and Housing of California
Main entry under the heading for the commission
21.31C. Ancient laws, certain medieval laws, customary laws, etc.
21.31C1. Enter the laws of ancient jurisdictions; laws of non-western jurisdictions before the
adoption of legislative institutions based on western models; and customary laws, tribal laws,
etc., under (in this order of preference):
a) a uniform title consisting of the title by which the law or early compilation of laws is
known (see 25.15B)
b) the title proper of the item being catalogued.
If there are one, two, or three compilers or enactors of such laws that are named promi-
nently in the item being catalogued or are associated with the work in reference sources,
make added entries under the heading(s) for the compiler(s), etc. If there are four or more
such persons, make an added entry under the heading for the first.
Lex Salica : the ten texts with the glosses and the Lex
Emendata
Main entry under the uniform title for the Lex Salica
Edictum Diocletiani de pretiis rerum venalium
Main entry under the uniform title for the Edictum
The oldest code of laws in the world : the code of laws
promulgated by Hammurabi, King of Babylon
Main entry under the uniform title for the laws
Die Gesetze des Merowingerreicb.es, 481-714 / herausgegeben
von Karl August Eckhardt
Main entry under the title proper
Added entry under the heading for Eckhardt
Fontes iuris romani antejustiniani / in usura scholarum
ediderunt S, Riccobono ... [et al.]
(Four additional editors named on title page )
Main entry under the title proper
Added entry under the heading for Riccobono
21.32. ADMINISTRATIVE REGULATIONS, ETC.
2132A. Administrative regulations, etc., that are not laws
21.32A1. If administrative regulations, rules, etc., are from jurisdictions in which such regula-
tions, etc., are promulgated by government agencies or agents under authority granted by one
or more laws (as is the case in the United States), enter them under the heading for the
agency or agent. If the regulations, etc., are issued by an agency other than the promulgating
agency, make an added entry under the heading for the issuing agency. If the regulations, etc.,
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-53
21.32A2
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
derive from a particular law, make an added entry under the heading and uniform title (see
25.15A) for that law.
Rules and regulations for recreational areas :
[Recreational Area Licensing Act rules and regulations] /
Department of Public Health, Bureau of Environmental Health,
Division of Swimming Pools and Recreation
(Promulgated by the Department of Public Health, State of Illinois )
Main entry under the heading for the department
Added entry under the heading for the division
Added entry under the heading for Illinois with uniform title for the law
21.32A2. If a law or laws and the regulations, etc., derived from it are published together,
enter the item under the heading appropriate to whichever is mentioned first in the chief
source of information of the item being catalogued. Make an added entry under the heading
for the other. However, if only the Iaw{s) or only the regulations, etc., are named in the title
proper, enter under the heading appropriate to the one mentioned and make an added entry
under the heading for the other. If the evidence of the chief source of information is ambigu-
ous or insufficient, enter under the heading for the law(s) and make an added entry under the
heading for the regulations, etc.
Regulations and principal statutes applicable to
contractors and subcontractors on public building and public
work and on building and work financed in whole or in part
by loans or grants from the United States / United States
Department of Labor
(Includes several statutes, in whole and in part)
Main entry under the heading for the department
Added entry under the heading for the United States with uniform title for the laws
Gewerbesteuer-Veranlagung 1966 ; Gewerbesteuergesetz und
Gewerbes teuer-Durchfiihrungsverordnung mit Gewerbesteuer-
Richtlinien . . .
(Regulations and guidelines included were promulgated by the Bundesministerium
der Finanzen of the Federal Republic of Germany)
Main entry under the heading for the Federal Republic of Germany with uniform title
for the law
Added entry under the heading for the ministry
21.32B. Administrative regulations, etc., that are laws
21.32B1. If administrative regulations, rules, etc., are from jurisdictions in which such regula-
tions, etc., are laws (as is the case in the United Kingdom and Canada), enter them as
instructed in 21.31. Make added entries under the headings for the government agencies or
agents promulgating and/or issuing them. If the regulations, etc., derive from a particular law,
make an added entry under the heading and uniform (see 25. 15 A) title for that law.
The Building Societies (Fee) Regulations, 1976
(Promulgated by the Chief Registrar of Friendly Societies under authority granted
by the Building Societies (Fee) Act)
Main entry under the heading for the United Kingdom with uniform title for the
regulations
Added entry under the heading for the chief registrar
Added entry under the heading for the United Kingdom with uniform title for the law
21-54
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.33A
Regulations under the Destructive Insect and Pest Act as
they apply to the importation of plants and plant products /
Department of Agriculture
(Promulgated by the Governor in Council)
Main entry under the heading for Canada with uniform title for the regulations
Added entries under the headings for the governor and the department
Added entry under the heading for Canada with uniform title for the law
21.32C. Collections of administrative regulations, etc.
21.32C1. Enter a collection of regulations that are not laws as a collection (see 2 1 .7). Enter a
collection of regulations that are laws according to the instructions in 21.32B.
21.33. CONSTITUTIONS, CHARTERS, AND OTHER FUNDAMENTAL LAWS
21.33A. Enter the constitution, charter, or other fundamental law of a jurisdiction or interna-
tional intergovernmental body 9 under the heading for that jurisdiction or body. Enter any
amendments to such a document under the same heading. If the document is issued by a
jurisdiction other than the one governed by it, make an added entry under the heading for the
issuing jurisdiction. If the document is a law, add the appropriate uniform title as instructed in
25.15A to the added entry heading.
The Constitution of the United States
Main entry under the heading for the United States
An Act for the Union of Canada, Nova Scotia, and Hew
Brunswick, and the Government Thereof ... at a Parliament
begun and holden at Westminster the first day of February
... 1866
Main entry under the heading for Canada
Added entry under the heading for the United Kingdom with uniform title for the law
Kongeriget Morges grundlov
Main entry under the heading for Norway
Charter of the United Nations
Main entry under the heading for the United Nations
The Constitution of the state of Michigan
Main entry under the heading for Michigan
Constitucion politica del estado libre y soberano de
Chihuahua
Main entry under the heading for Chihuahua
Constitution of the state of Connecticut, and historical
antecedents
Main entry under the heading for Connecticut
Charter of the city of Detroit : revised to April 3, 1933 /
adopted by the people of the city of Detroit
Main entry under the heading for Detroit
9. International intergovernmental body means an international body created by intergovernmental action.
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-55
21.33B
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
Charter of the city of Nashville, Tennessee : chapter no .
246, Private acts of the General Assembly of the state of
Tennessee for the year 1947, as amended through the
legislative session of 1949
Main entry under the heading for Nashville
Added entry under the heading for Tennessee with uniform title for the law
The charter granted by His Majesty King Charles II to the
Governour & Company of the English colony of Connecticut
Main entry under the heading for Connecticut
Added entry under the corporate heading for Charles II as sovereign
21.33B. Enter the constitution, charter, or other fundamental document of a body emanating
from a jurisdiction but applying to a body other than a jurisdiction as instructed in the rule
applying to the type of document (e.g., if the document is a law, see 21.31). Enter any
amendments to such a document under the same heading. Make an added entry under the
heading for the body governed by the constitution, etc., if the main entry is not under that
heading.
Charter of the Franklin Bank of Baltimore
(An act of the Maryland legislature)
Main entry under the heading for Maryland with uniform title for the law
Added entry under the heading for the bank
For constitutions, etc., that neither apply to, nor emanate from, a jurisdiction or an
intergovernmental body, see 2 LIB and 21.4B.
21.33C. Drafts
21.33C1. If a draft of a constitution, charter, etc., is a legislative bill, enter it under the head-
ing for the appropriate legislative body (see 24.21). Enter other drafts of such documents as
instructed in 21.1-21.7.
21.34. COURT RULES
21.34A. Enter court rules governing a single court (regardless of their official nature, e.g.,
laws, administrative regulations) under the heading for that court. If the rules are laws, make
an added entry under the heading for the jurisdiction enacting the law and add a uniform title
as instructed in 25.15A. Make an added entry under the heading for the agency or agent pro-
mulgating the court rules.
Rules of practice and procedure of United States Tax Court
Main entry under the heading for the court
The rules of the Supreme Court, 1965 ... / Lord
Chancel lor 's Office
{An administrative regulation promulgated by the Lord Chancellor's Office)
Main entry under the heading for the court
Added entiy under the heading for the office
Added entry under the heading for the United Kingdom with uniform title for the
regulation
21-56
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.35A1
21.34B. Enter a collection of rules governing more than one court of a single jurisdiction but
enacted as laws of that jurisdiction as instructed in 21.31. Enter all other such collections of
court rules under the heading for the agency or agent promulgating them.
If the rules govern two or three courts, make added entries under the headings for the
courts governed. If the rules govern four or more courts, make an added entry under the
heading for the one named first in the chief source of information of die item being
catalogued.
Code de procedure civile de la province de Quebec : 13-14
Elizabeth II chap. 80
Main entry under the heading for Quebec with uniform title for the law
21.34C. Enter a collection of court rules that are the laws of more than one jurisdiction, or
that are promulgated by more than one agency or agent, as a collection (see 21.7). Make an
added entry under the heading for any corporate body involved in the compilation and named
prominendy in the item being catalogued unless it functions solely as a publisher.
West's California rules of court, 1975, state and federal
: with amendments received for January 1, 1975. — St, Paul,
Minn. : West Pub. Co.
(The rules apply to numerous state and federal courts in California; the state rules
are promulgated by the California Judicial Council, which is named prominently)
Main enny under title
Added entries under the headings for the Judicial Council and for the publisher, which
initiated the compilation
21.35. TREATIES, INTERGOVERNMENTAL AGREEMENTS, ETC.
21.35A. International treaties, etc.
2L35A1. Treaties, etc., between two or three governments. Enter a treaty, or any other for-
mal agreement, between two or three national governments 10 under (in this order of
preference):
a) the heading for the government on one side if it is the only one on that side and there
are two governments on the other
b) the heading for the government whose catalogue entry heading (see 24.3E) is first in
English alphabetic order.
Make added entries under the headings for the other government(s). Add uniform titles as
instructed in 25.16B1 to the main and added entry headings.
Convention monetaire belgo-luxembourgeoise-n6erlandaise
(A convention between the government of the Netherlands, on the one side, and
the governments of Belgium and Luxembourg on the other side )
Main entry under the heading for the Netherlands with uniform title for the treaty
Added entries under the headings for Belgium and Luxembourg, each with uniform title
for the treaty
10, National governments includes bodies exercising treaty powers such as Native American nations and African tribal
governments.
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-57
21.35A2
CHOICE OF ACCESS POfNTS
Special Economic Assistance : agreement between the United
States of America and Burma, effected by exchange of notes
Main entry under the heading for Burma with uniform title for the treaty
Added entry under the heading for the United States with uniform title for the treaty
Traite de paix entre le Japon et la Russie
Main entry under the heading for Japan with uniform title for the treaty
Added entry under the heading for Russia with uniform, title for the treaty
Convention between the governments of the United Kingdom,
Belgium, and France regarding the supervision and preventive
control of the African migratory locust
Main entry under the heading for Belgium with uniform title for the treaty
Added entries under the headings for France and the United Kingdom, each with
uniform title for the treaty
21.35A2. Treaties, etc., between four or more governments. Enter a treaty, or any other
formal agreement, between four or more national governments under title (either the title
proper or a uniform title, see 25.16B2). Make an added entry under the heading for the home
government (i.e., the government of the cataloguing agency) if it is a signatory. Make an
added entry under the heading for any other government publishing the item being catalogued
if that government is a signatory. Make an added entry under the heading for the government
named first in the chief source of information if it is neither the home government nor the
publishing government. If the treaty, etc., is the product of an international conference, make
an added entry under the heading for the conference. Add uniform titles as instructed in
25.16B1 to the added entry headings for parties to the agreement.
The definitive treaty of peace and friendship between His
Britannick Majesty, the most Christian King, and the King of
Spain : concluded at Paris, the 10th day of February, 1763 :
to which the King of Portugal acceded on the same day
(The signatories are Great Britain, France, Spain, and Portugal)
Main entry under the uniform title for the treaty
Added entry under the heading for Great Britain with uniform title for the treaty
Universal Copyright Convention : with protocols 1 , 2, and
3 : Geneva, September 6, 1952. - London : H.M.S.O., 1952
(Drawn up by the Intergovernmental Conference on Copyright; the United States
and Canada are signatories)
Main entry under the uniform title for the treaty-
Added entry under the heading for the United Kingdom (as publisher) with uniform title
for the treaty
Added entry under the heading for Canada with uniform title for the treaty
(Cataloguing agency in Canada)
Added entry under the heading for the United States with uniform title for the treaty
(Cataloguing agency in the United States)
Added entry under the heading for the conference
21.35B. Agreements contracted by international intergovernmental bodies
21.35B1. Enter as instructed in 21.35A an agreement between an international intergovern-
mental body and one or more:
a) other international intergovernmental bodies
or b) national governments
21-58
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.35C1
or c) jurisdictions other than national governments
or d) other corporate bodies.
In the case of c) and d) do not add uniform titles to either main or added entry headings.
Guarantee agreement, Second Agricultural Project, between
Republic of Iceland and International Bank for
Reconstruction and Development
Main entry under the heading for Iceland with uniform title for the treaty
Added entry under the heading for the bank with uniform tide for the treaty
Agreement between the United Nations and the Food and
Agriculture Organisation of the United Nations and the
United Kingdom as administering power of the territories of
Cyrenaica and Tripolitania regarding technical assistance
for Cyrenaica and Tripolitania
Main entry under the heading for the Food and Agriculture Organisation with uniform
title for the treaty
Added entries under the headings for the United Kingdom and the United Nations, each
with uniform title for the treaty
Project agreement (First Urban Sewerage Project) between
International Bank for Reconstruction and Development and
District de Tunis
Main entry under the heading for the bank
Added entry under the heading for the district
Loan agreement, Paper and Pulp Project, between
International Bank for Reconstruction and Development and
Corporacion de Fomento de la Produccion and Compania
Manuf acturera de Papeles y Cartones
Main entry under the heading for the bank
Added entries under the headings for the corporation and the company
Enter an agreement contracted by the member governments of an international intergovern-
mental body acting as individual entities rather than collectively as instructed in 2 1 .35 A.
Agreement creating an association between the member
states of the European Free Trade Association and the
Republic of Finland .... - London : H.M.S.O., 1961
(The signatories are the seven members of EFT A acting individually and Finland)
Main entry under the uniform title for the treaty
Added entries under the headings for the United Kingdom (as publisher) and Finland,
each with uniform title for the treaty
21.35C, Agreements contracted by the Holy See
21.35C1. Enter a concordat, modus vivendi, convention, or other formal agreement between
the Holy See and a national government or other political jurisdiction under the party whose
catalogue entry heading (see 24. 3E) is first in English alphabetic order. Make an added entry
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-59
21.35D
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
under the heading for the other party. Add uniform titles as instructed in 25.16B1 to the main
and added entry headings.
Das Konkordat zwischen dem Heiligen Stuhle und dem
Freistaate Baden
Main entry under the heading for Baden with uniform title for the treaty
Added entry under the heading for the Catholic Church with uniform title for the treaty
Concordato celebrado entre su santidad Pio IX y el
gobierno de Ecuador
Main entry under the heading for the Catholic Church with uniform title for the treaty
Added entry under the heading for Ecuador with uniform title for the treaty
21.35D. Other agreements involving jurisdictions
2X.35D1. Enter an agreement between two or more jurisdictions below the national level, or
between a national government and one or more jurisdictions within its country, as instructed
in 21. 6C.
Memorandum of agreement between the government of the
province of Ontario and the government of Canada pursuant to
section 4(3) of the Anti-Inflation Act
Main entry under the heading for Ontario
Added entry under the heading for Canada
Joint agreement between the state of Maine and the
province of Mew Brunswick
Main entry under the heading for Maine
Added entry under the heading for New Brunswick
21.35D2. Enter an agreement involving jurisdictions below the national level and interna-
tional intergovernmental bodies as instructed in 21.35B.
21.35D3. Enter an agreement between a national government and one or more jurisdictions
below the national level outside its country as instructed in 21.35A, but do not add uniform
titles to either main or added entry headings.
Protocole relatif aux echanges entre le Quebec et la
France en matiere d' education physique, de sport et
d'education populaire : pris en application de 1' entente
f ranco-quebecoise du 27 f6vrier 1965 sur un programme
d'echange et de cooperation dans le domaine de 1' education
Main entry under the heading for France
Added entry under the heading for Que~bec
21.35D4. Enter an agreement between a government at any level and a nongovernmental cor-
porate body as instructed in 21 .6C. For agreements involving international intergovernmental
bodies, see 21.35B.
Master agreement (PIPSC) : agreement between the Treasury
Board and the Professional Institute of the Public Service
of Canada
Main entry under the heading for the board
Added entry under the heading for the institute
21-60
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.36A1
Concession agreement between the Government of the
Republic of Liberia and Liberia Iron and Steel Corporation
Main entry under the heading for the government
Added eniry under the heading for the corporation
2L35E. Protocols, amendments, etc.
21.35EI. Enter a separately published protocol, amendment, extension, or other agreement
ancillary to a treaty, etc., tinder the heading for the basic agreement. Add uniform titles as
instructed in 25.I6B3.
21.35E2. Treat a general revision of a treaty, etc., as an independent work. Make an added
entry under the heading for the revised treaty, etc., if the headings differ. Add uniform titles
as appropriate.
21.35F. Collections
21.35F1. If a collection of treaties, etc., consists of those contracted between two parties,
enter it under the heading for the one party in the same way as a single agreement between
those parties (see 21.35A1, 2i.35B-21.35E), Add uniform titles to the headings for the par-
ties as instructed in 25.16AI. If such a collection has become known by a collective name,
enter it under the uniform title for the name (see 25.16A1). Make an added entry under the
heading for a compiler named prominently in the item being catalogued.
21.35F2. If a collection of treaties, etc., consists of those contracted between one party and
two or more other parties, enter it under the heading for the one party. Make added entries
under the headings for the other parties if there are two of them. Add uniform titles as
instructed in 25. 16 A i to the main and added entry headings for the parties. If such a collec-
tion has become known by a collective name, enter it under the uniform title for the name
(see 25.16A1). Make an added entry under the heading for a compiler named prominently in
the item being catalogued.
Treaties and other international agreements of the United
States of America, 1776-1949 / compiled under the direction
of Charles I. Bevans
Main entry under the heading for the United States with uniform title for the treaties
Added entry under the heading for Bevans
2L35F3. Enter any other collection of treaties, etc., as a collection (see 21 .7).
21.36. COURT DECISIONS, CASES, ETC.
21.36A. Law reports
21.36A1. Reports of one court. Enter law reports of one court that are not ascribed to a
reporter or reporters by name under.
a) the heading for the court if the reports are issued by or under the authority of the
court
or b) title if they are not.
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-61
21.36A2
CHOICE OF ACCESS POrNTS
Make an added entry under the heading for an editor or compiler named prominently in the
item being catalogued. Make an added entry under the heading for the publisher if its respon-
sibility extends beyond that of publication. Make an added entry under the heading for the
court if it is not chosen as the main entry heading.
Canada Federal Court reports / editor, Florence Rosenfeld
(issued by the court )
Main entry under the heading for the court
Added entry under the heading for Rosenfeld
Reports of cases argued and determined in the Court of
Appeals of Arizona .... — St. Paul : West Pub. Co.
(Publisher acts in an editorial capacity)
Main entry under title
Added entries under the headings for the court and the publisher
Enter reports of one court that are ascribed to a reporter or to reporters by name under the
heading for the court or under the heading for the reporter or first named reporter according
to whichever is used as the basis for accepted legal citation practice in the country where the
court is located. If that practice cannot be determined readily, enter under:
a) the heading for the court if the reports are issued by or under the authority of the
court
or b) the heading for the reporter or first named reporter if they are not.
Make an added entry under the heading for the court or the reporter, whichever is not chosen
as the main entry heading. Make an added entry under the heading for an editor, compiler, or
additional reporter named prominently in the item being catalogued. Make an added entry
under the heading for the publisher if its responsibility extends beyond that of publication.
Reports of cases determined in the Supreme Court of the
state of California, October 23, 1969, to January 30, 1970 /
Robert E. Formichi, reporter of decisions. — San Francisco :
Bancroft-Whitney
(Cited as California reports)
Main entry under the heading for the court
Added entry under the heading for Formichi
Common bench reports : cases argued and determined in the
Court of Common Pleas / [reported] by James Manning, T.C.
Granger, and John Scott. — London : Benning
(Cited as Manning, Granger & Scott)
Main entry under the heading for Manning
Added entries under the headings for Granger, Scott, and the court
21.36A2. Reports of more than one court. Enter reports of more than one court under the
heading for the reporter if responsible for the reports of all the cases reported. If there is more
than one reporter, apply the instructions in 21.6. If the reporter(s) is not responsible for all the
reports, or if no reporter is named in the chief source of information of the item being cata-
logued, enter under title. Make an added entry under the heading for the reporter named first
in the chief source of information. Make added entries under the headings for the courts if
there are two or three. If there are four or more, make an added entry under the heading for
21-62
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.36C1
the court named first in the chief source of information. Make an added entry under the head-
ing for an editor or compiler or a corporate body involved in the publication named promi-
nently in the item being catalogued unless, in the latter case, it functions solely as the
publisher.
Reports of cases argued and determined in the Courts of
Common Pleas, and Exchequer Chamber, and in the House of
Lords ... /by John Bernard Bosanquet and Christopher Puller
Main entry under the heading for Bosanquet
Added entries under the headings for Puller and the courts {including the House of
Lords)
Austral ian law reports : being reports of j udgments of the
High Court of Australia and the Judicial Committee of the
Privy Council and of state supreme courts exercising federal
jurisdiction, other federal courts and tribunals, together
with selected cases from the Supreme Court of the Northern
Territory and reports of the Supreme Court of the Australian
Capital Territory (authorized by the judges) / editor,
Robert Hayes
(The report for each case signed by its reporter)
Main entry under title
Added entries under the headings for Hayes and the High Court
21.36B. Citations, digests, etc.
21.36B1. Enter citations to, and digests and indexes of, court reports under the heading for
the person responsible for them if that person is named prominently in the item being cata-
logued. Otherwise, enter under title. Make an added entry under the heading for a promi-
nently named corporate body involved in the publication unless it functions solely as the
publisher.
Connecticut digest, 1785 to date ... /by Richard
H. Phillips
Main entry under the heading for Phillips
Michie's digest of Virginia and West Virginia reports ... /
under the editorial supervision of A, Hewson Michie
Main entry under the heading for Michie
Atlantic reporter digest, 1764 to date . .. covering
Atlantic reporter and corresponding cases in the reports of
the Atlantic States .... — St. Paul, Minn. : West Pub. Co.,
1939-
(Publisher acts in an editorial capacity )
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for the publisher
21.36C, Particular cases
21.36C1. Proceedings in the first instance. Criminal proceedings. Enter the official pro-
ceedings and records of criminai trials, impeachments, courts-martial, etc., under the heading
for the person or body prosecuted. If more than one person or body is prosecuted, apply the
instructions in 21.6C. Optionally, add the appropriate legal designation (e.g., defendant, libel-
lee) to the heading for a person or body prosecuted. Make an added entry under the heading
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-63
21.36C2
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
for the court or other adjudicating body. Make an added entry under the heading for a
reporter named prominently in the item being catalogued. Do not make an added entry under
the heading for the jurisdiction bringing the prosecution.
Report of the trial of Leavitt Alley, indicted for the
murder of Abijah Ellis, in the Supreme Judicial Court of
Massachusetts / reported by Franklin Fiske Heard
Main entry under the heading for Alley ax defendant
Added entries under the headings for the court and Heard
Report of the trial of Brig. General William Hull,
commanding the North— western Army of the United States, by a
court martial held at Albany on Monday, 3rd January, 1814,
and succeeding days / taken by Lieut. Col. Forbes
Main entry under the heading for Hull as defendant
Added entries under the headings for the court-martial and for Forbes
Report of the case of the steamship Meteor, libelled for
alleged violation of the Neutrality Act ... / edited by F.V.
Balch
Main entry under the heading for the ship as lihellee
Added entries under the headings for the various courts whose actions are reported and
for Balch
21.36C2. Proceedings in the first instance. Other proceedings. Enter the official proceed-
ings and records of civil and other noncriminal proceedings in the first instance (including
election cases) under the heading for the person or body bringing the action. If more than one
person or body brings the action, apply the instructions in 21.6C. Make added entries under
the headings for the persons or bodies on the opposing side if there are one, two, or three. If
there are four or more persons or bodies on the opposing side, make an added entry under the
heading for the one named first in the item being catalogued. Optionally, add the appropriate
legal designation (e.g., plaintiff, complainant, contestant, defendant, respondent, contestee) to
the heading for a party to the action. Make an added entry under the heading for the court or
other adjudicating body. Make an added entry under the heading for a prominently named
reporter.
The case of William Brooks versus Ezekiel Byam and others,
in equity, in the Circuit Court of the United States, for
the First Circuit— Dis trict of Massachusetts
Main entry under the heading for Brooks as complainant
Added entry under the heading for Byam as respondent
Added entry under the heading for the court
Contested election case of John A. Smith, contestant,
v. Edwin Y. Webb, contestee, from the Ninth Congressional
District of Morth Carolina, before Committee on Elections
No. 2
Main entry under the heading for Smith as contestant
Added entry under the heading for Webb as contestee
Added entry under the heading for the committee
21-64
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.36C6
The Goodwin Film and Camera Company, complainant, vs.
Eastman Kodak Company, defendant
(Case heard before the United States Circuit Court, Western District of New York)
Main envy under the heading for the Goodwin Film and Camera Company as
complainant
Added entry under the heading for the Eastman Kodak Company as defendant
Added entry under the heading for the court
21.36C3. Appeal proceedings. Enter the official proceedings and records of appeal proceed-
ings in the same way as the proceedings in the first instance. Optionally, add the legal desig-
nation appropriate to the appeal to that appropriate in the first instance (e.g., defendant-
appellee, defendant-appellant).
The Goodwin Film and Camera Company, complainant-appel lee ,
vs. Eastman Kodak Company, defendant-appellant : transcript
of record
(Appeal heard before the United States Circuit Court of Appeals for the Second
Ciivuit)
Main entry under the heading for the Goodwin Film and Camera Company as
complainant-appellee
Added entry under the heading for the Eastman Kodak Company as defendant-appellant
Added entry under the heading for the court
21.36C4. Indictments. Enter an indictment as instructed in 2I.36C1.
Copy of an indictment (No. 1) in the Circuit Court of the
United States in and for the Pennsylvania District of the
Middle Circuit
(Indictment of William Duane )
Main entry under the heading for Duane as defendant
Added entry under the heading for the court
21.36C5. Charges to juries. Enter a charge to a jury under the heading for the court. Make
an added entry under the heading for the judge delivering the charge. Make added entries
under the headings for the first named party on each side, except for the jurisdiction in cases
prosecuted by the jurisdiction. Optionally, add legal designations {see 2I.36C1-21.36C3) to
the added entry headings.
The charge of Judge Patterson [i.e., Paterson] to the jury
in the case of Vanhorne' s lessee against Dorrance : tried at
a Circuit Court for the United States, held at Philadelphia,
April term, 1795
(The lessee is not named)
Main entry under the heading for the court
Added entry under the heading for Dorrance as defendant
Added entries under the headings for Paterson and Van Home
21.36C6. Judicial decisions. Enter a judgement or other decision of a court in a case under
the heading for the court. Make an added entry under the heading for the first named party on
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-65
2136C7
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
each side, except for the jurisdiction in cases prosecuted by the jurisdiction. Optionally, add
legal designations (see 2i.36Cl-21.36C3) to the added entry headings.
Freedom of the press : opinion of the Supreme Court of the
United States in the case of Alice Lee Grosjean f supervisor
of public accounts for the state of Louisiana, appellant,
v . American Press Company, Inc . , et al .
Main entry under the heading for the court
Added entries under the headings for the American Press Company as plaintiff-appellee
and Grosjean as defendant-appellant
21.36C7. Judicial opinions. Enter an opinion of a judge under the heading for the judge.
Make an added entry under the heading for the first named party on each side, except for the
jurisdiction in cases prosecuted by the jurisdiction. Optionally, add legal designations (see
21.36C1~21.36C3) to the added entry headings.
Dissenting opinion of Hon, Milton Sutliff, one of the
judges : ex parte Simeon Bushnell : ex parte Charles
Langston : on habeas corpus
(At head of title: Supreme Court of Ohio)
Main entry under the heading for Sutliff
Added entry under the heading for Bushnell as defendant
21.36C8. Records of one party. Enter a brief, plea, or other formal record of one party to a
case under the heading for that party. If that party is not the one under which the proceedings
of the trial would be entered (see 21.36C1-21.36C3), make an added entry under the heading
for the other party (parties). Optionally, add legal designations (see 21.36C1-21.36C3) to the
headings for the parties to the action. Make an added entry under the heading for the lawyer
concerned,
George B . Morewood, John R . Morewood, Frederic R . Routh,
respondents , appellants versus Lorenzo N . Enequis t,
libellant, appellee : brief for appellants on admiralty
jurisdiction / Robert Dodge, attorney for appellants
(At head of title: Supreme Court of the United States, no. 132)
Main entry under the heading for G. Morewood as respondent-appellant
Added entries under the headings for J. Morewood as respondent-appellant, Routh as
respondent-appellant, and Enequist as libellant-appellee
Added entry under the heading for Dodge
Enter a courtroom argument presented by a lawyer under the heading for the lawyer. Make
an added entry under the heading for the party represented. If that party is not the one under
which the proceedings of the trial would be entered (see 21.36Ct-21.36C3), make an added
entry under the heading for the other party (parties). Optionally, add legal designations (see
21.36C1-21.36C3) to the headings for the parties to the action.
Argument of Franklin B. Gowen, Esq., of counsel for the
Commonwealth in the case of the Commonwealth vs. Thomas
Munley, indicted in the Court of Oyer and Terminer of
Schuykill County, Pa., for the murder of Thomas Sanger ... /
stenographically reported by R.A. West
Main entiy under the heading for Gowen
Added entry under the heading for Muniey as defendant
21-66
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.38A
21.36C9. Collections. Enter a collection of the official proceedings or records of trials as a
collection (see 21,7). Make added entries under the headings for the persons or bodies who
are parties to all the trials if there are not more than three persons or bodies involved. Option-
ally, add legal designations (see 21 .36CI-21 .36C3) to the headings for the parties.
Certain Religious Publications
21.37, SACRED SCRIPTURES
21.37A. Enter a work that is accepted as sacred scripture by a religious group, or part of such
a work, under title. When appropriate, use a uniform title as instructed in 25.17-25.18. Make
an added entry under the heading for one, two, or three persons associated with the work and/
or the item being catalogued. If there are four or more such persons, do not make added
entries.
The Book of Mormon : an account written by the hand of
Mormon upon plates taken from the plates of Nephi /
translated by Joseph Smith, Jun.
Main entry under the uniform title for the work
Added entiy under the heading for Smith
The Koran / translated from the Arabic by J.M. Rodwell
Main entry under the uniform title for the work
Added entry under the heading for Rodwell
The book of Isaiah
Main entry under the uniform title for the work
Added entry under the heading for Isaiah
21.37B. Treat a harmony of different scriptural passages as an edition of the passages harmo-
nized. Make an added entry under the heading for the harmonizer. For harmonies accompa-
nied by commentary, see 21.13.
The life of Our Lord / compiled from the Gospels of the
four Evangelists and presented in the very words of the
Scriptures as one continuous narrative by Reginald G.
Ponsonby
Main entry under the uniform title for the Gospels
Added entry under the heading for Ponsonby
21.38. THEOLOGICAL CREEDS, CONFESSIONS OF FAITH, ETC.
21.38A. Enter a theological creed, confession of faith, etc., accepted by more than one
denominational body under title. When appropriate, use a uniform title as instructed in
25.19B. Make an added entry under the heading for one, two, or three persons or corporate
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-67
21.39
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
bodies associated with the work and/or item being catalogued. If there are four or more such
persons or bodies, do not make added entries.
The Assembly' s Shorter catechism as used in the
Presbyterian Church in the United States
(The catechism of the Westminster Assembly of Divines)
Main entry under the uniform title for the Shorter catechism
Added entries under the headings for the church and the Westminster Assembly of
Divines
The Augsburg Confession / translated ... by Richard Taverner
... edited for the use of the Joint Committee of the General
Council, the General Synod, and the United Synod of the
South ... by Henry E. Jacobs
Muin entry under the uniform title for the Augsburg Confession
Added entries under the headings for Taverner, the Joint Committee, and Jacobs
21.39. LITURGICAL WORKS
21.39A. General rule
21.39A1. Enter a liturgical work 1 1 under the heading for the church or denominational body
to which it pertains. When appropriate, add a uniform title as instructed in 25.19-25.23 to the
main entry heading. If the work is special to the use of a particular body within the church
(e.g., a diocese, cathedral, monastery, religious order), make an added entry under the head-
ing for that body.
The book of common worship as authorised by the Synod 1962
(Liturgical work of the Church of South India)
Main entry under the heading for the church with uniform title for the work
Horae diurnae Breviarii Romani ex decreto sacrosancti
Concilii Tridentini restituti
Main entry under the heading for the Catholic Church with uniform title for the work
Mis sale ad vsum sacri et canonici Ordinis
Praemons tratensis
Main entry under the heading for the Catholic Church with uniform title for the work
Added entry under the heading for the order
Common service book of the Lutheran church / authorized by
the United Lutheran Church in America
Main entry under the heading for the United Lutheran Church with uniform title for the
work
The coronation service of Her Majesty Queen Elizabeth II
Main entry under the heading for the Church of England with uniform title for the work
t 1 . Liturgical work includes officially sanctioned or traditionally accepted texts of religious observance, books of obliga-
tory prayers to be offered at stated times, calendars and manuals of performance of religious observances, and prayer books
known as "books of hours."
21-68
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.39BI
2L39A2. Enter an item consisting of readings from sacred scriptures intended for use in a
religious service as instructed in 21.39A1. However, enter a single passage from a sacred
scripture used in religious services as instructed in 21.37.
Epistles and Gospels for Sundays and holy days / prepared,
with the addition of brief exegetical notes, by the Catholic
Biblical Association of America
Main entry under the heading for the Catholic Church with uniform title for the work
Proper lessons for the Sundays and holy days throughout
the year
(Published with The book of common prayer . . . according to the use of the
Protestant Episcopal Church in the United States of America)
Main entry under the heading for the church with uniform title for the work
Miserere mei, Deus : Psalm LI : the morning prayer (Day
10) of the Church of England
Main entry under the uniform title for Psalm LI
Added entry under the heading for the church
21.39A3. Enter the following types of works as instructed in the genera] rules (21.1-21.7):
a) books intended for private devotions (but enter prayer books known as "books of
hours" as liturgical works)
b) hymnals for congregations and choirs
c) proposals for orders of worship not officially approved
d) unofficial manuals
e) programmes of religious services
f) lectionaries without scriptural texts.
21.39B, Liturgical works of the Orthodox Eastern Church
21.39B1. Enter a liturgical work in the original language of the liturgy published for the use
of a national Orthodox Church or another autocephalous body within the Orthodox Eastern
Church as instructed in 2J.39A1.
Trebnik. — Sofiia : Sv, Sinod na Bulgarskata tsQrkva
(Romanized title and publication details)
Main entry under the heading for the Bulgarian church with uniform title for the work
Enter any other Orthodox liturgical work under the heading for the church as a whole.
When appropriate, add a uniform title as instructed in 25.19-25.23 to the main entry heading.
The ferial Menaion, or, The book of services for the
twelve great festivals and the Hew-Year' s Day / translated
from a Slavonian edition
Main entry under the heading for the Orthodox Eastern Church with uniform title for
the work
AACR2 Revision 2002
21-69
21.39C
CHOICE OF ACCESS POINTS
21.39C. Jewish liturgical works
21.39C1. Enter a Jewish liturgical work under its title. When appropriate, use a uniform title
as instructed in 25.21-25.22. If the work is special to the use of a particular body (associa-
tion, congregation, synagogue, etc.), make an added entry under the heading for that body.
The Jewish marriage service . . .
Main entry under title
Services of the heart : weekday. Sabbath, and festival
services and prayers for home and synagogue / Union of
Liberal and Progressive Synagogues
Main entry under title
Added entry under the heading for the union
21-70
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHAPTER
Headings for Persons
Contents
Choice of Name
22.1 GENERAL RULE
22.1D Diacritical marks and hyphens
22.2 CHOICE AMONG DIFFERENT NAMES
22. 2A Predominant name
22. 2B Pseudonyms
22.2C Change of name
22.3 CHOICE AMONG DIFFERENT FORMS OF THE SAME NAME
22.3A Fullness
22. 3B Language
22. 3C Names written in a nonroman script
22.3D Spelling
Entry Element
22.4 GENERAL RULE
22.4B Order of elements
22.5 ENTRY UNDER SURNAME
22.5A General rule
22.5B Element other than the first treated as a surname
22.5C Compound surnames
22. 5D Surnames with separately written prefixes
22, 5E Prefixes hyphenated or combined with surnames
22. 5F Members of royal houses entered under surname, etc,
22.6 ENTRY UNDER TITLE OP NOBILITY
22. 6A General rule
22. 6B Special rules
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-1
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.7 ENTRY UNDER ROMANIAN PATRONYMIC
22.8 ENTRY UNDER GIVEN NAME, ETC.
22. 8A Genera] rule
22. 8B Names including a patronymic
22. 8C Names of royal persons
22.9 ENTRY OF OTHER NAMES
22. 9A Roman names
22. 9B Icelandic names
22.10 ENTRY UNDER INITIALS, LETTERS, OR NUMERALS
22. 1 1 ENTRY UNDER PHRASE
Additions to Names
General
22.12 TITLES OF NOBILITY
22.13 SAINTS
22.14 SPIRITS
22.15 ADDITIONS TO NAMES ENTERED UNDER SURNAME
22.15B Terms of address of married women
22.16 ADDITIONS TO NAMES ENTERED UNDER GIVEN NAME, ETC.
22.16A Royally
22.16B Popes
22.16C Bishops, etc.
22. 16D Other persons of religious vocation
Additions to Distinguish Identical Names
22.17 DATES
22.18 FULLER FORMS
22.19 DISTINGUISHING TERMS
22. 1 9A Names in which the entry element is a given name, etc.
22.19B Names in which the entry element is a surname
22.20 UNDIFFERENTIATED NAMES
Special Rules for Names in Certain Languages
22.2 i INTRODUCTORY RULE
22.22 NAMES IN THE ARABIC ALPHABET
22-2
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.1 A
22.22A Scope
22.22B Entry element
22.22C Essentia] elements
22.22D Order of elements
22.23 BURMESE AND KAREN NAMES
22.24 CHINESE NAMES CONTAINING A NON-CHINESE GIVEN NAME
22.25 IN DIC NAMES
22.25A Early names
22.25B Modern names
22.25B2 Kannada, Malayalam, Tamil, and Teiugu names
22.25B3 Sikh names
22.25B4 Religious names
22.26 INDONESIAN NAMES
22.26A Scope
22.26B Entry element
22.26C Names entered under ihe first element
22.26D Names consisting of given name(s) plus adat title
22.26E Names containing place names
22.26F Names of Chinese origin
22.26G Titles
22.27 MALAY NAMES
22.27A Scope
22.27B General rule
22.27C Filial indicators
22.27D Titles
22.28 THAI NAMES
22.28A General rule
22.28B Royalty
22.28C Nobility (Khunnang)
22.28D Buddhist monastics, ecclesiastics, and patriarchs
Choice of Name
22.1. GENERAL RULE
22.1 A. In general, choose, as the basis of the heading for a person, the name by which he or
she is commonly known. This may be the person's real name, pseudonym, title of nobility,
nickname, initials, or other appellation. Treat a roman numeral associated with a given name
(as, for example, in the case of some popes, royalty, and ecclesiastics) as part of the name.
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-3
22.1B
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
For the treatment of the names of authors using one or more pseudonyms or a real name and
one or more pseudonyms, see 22. 2B. For the form of name used in headings, see 22.4-22.16.
Caedmon
William Shakespeare
D.W. Griffith
not David Wark Griffith
Jimmy Carter
not James Earl Carter
Capability Brown
not Lancelot Brown
Anatole France
not Jacques-Anatole Thibault
Ouida
not Marie Louise de la Ramee
H. D.
not Hilda Doolittle
Giorgione
not Giorgio Barbarelli
Fra Angelica
not Giovanni da Fiesole
Guido da Siena
Maria Helena
not Maria Helena Vaquinhas de Carvalho
Duke of Wellington
not Arthur Wellesley
John Julius Norwich
not Viscount Norwich
Sister Mary Hilary
Sister Mary Joseph Cahill
Queen Elizabeth II
Pope John Paul II
Patriarch Maximos V
Duke Robert III
22.1B. Determine the name by which a person is commonly known from the chief sources of
information (see I .OA) of works by that person issued in his or her language. If the person
works in a nonverbal context (e.g., a painter, a sculptor) or is not known primarily as an
author, determine the name by which he or she is commonly known from reference sources 1
issued in his or her language or country of residence or activity.
1. Reference sources, as used in this chapter, includes books and articles written about a person.
22-4
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.1D2
22. K'. Include any titles of nobility or terms of honour (see also 22.12) or words or phrases
(see also 22.8 and 22. 16) that commonly appear either wholly or in part in association with
names that do not include a surname. Omit such titles, terms, words, or phrases from any
name that does include a surname (see also 22.5 and 22.15) unless the name consists only of
a surname (see 22. 15A) or the name is of a married woman identified only by her husband's
name and a term of address (see 22. 15B1 ). Include all terms of rank in headings for nobles
when the term commonly appears with the name in works by the person or in reference
sources (see 22.6 and 22.12). If an apparent addition to a name including a surname is in fact
an intrinsic part of the name, as determined from reference sources or from works by or
about that person, include the title. For the treatment of other terms appearing in association
with the name, see 22.19B.
Viscountess Astor
Richard, Duke of York
Fra Bartolommeo
Andrea del Castagno
Otto Ftirst von Bismarck
Richard Acland
Sir Richard Acland
Olga Maitland
Lady Olga Maitland
Miss Read
Mrs, Humphry Ward
22, 1 1). Diacritical marks and hyphens
22.1 Dl. Accents, etc. Include accents and other diacritical marks appearing in a name. Sup-
ply them if it is certain that they are integral to a name but have been omitted in the source(s)
from which the name is taken.
Jacques Lefevre d' Staples
Eliphas Levi
(Sometimes appears without diacritical marks )
22.1 D2. Hyphens. Retain hyphens between given names if they are used by the bearer of the
name.
Gian-Car lo Menotti
Jean-Leon Jaures
Include hyphens in romanized names if they are prescribed by the romanization system
adopted by the cataloguing agency.
Ch'oe Sin-d6k
Jung-lu
Li Fei-kan
Omit a hyphen that joins one of a person's forenames to the surname.
not
not
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-5
22.2
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
Lucien Graux
(Name appears as: Lucien- Graux)
22.2. CHOICE AMONG DIFFERENT NAMES
22.2 A. Predominant name
22.2A1, If a person (other than one using a pseudonym or pseudonyms, see 22.2B) is known
by more than one name, choose the name by which the person is clearly most commonly
known, if there is one. Otherwise, choose one name or form of name according to the follow-
ing order of preference:
a) the name that appears most frequently in the person's works
b) the name that appears most frequently in reference sources
c) the latest name.
22.2B. Pseudonyms
22.2B1. One pseudonym. If all the works by one person appear under one pseudonym,
choose the pseudonym. If the real name is known, make a reference from the real name to
the pseudonym.
Yukio Mishircia
not Kimitake Hiraoka
George Orwell
not Eric Arthur Blair
Martin Ross
not Violet Frances Martin
Nevil Shute
not Nevil Shute Norway
Woody Allen
not Allen Stewart Konigsberg
For the treatment of a pseudonym used jointly by two or more persons, see 2 1 .6D.
22.2B2. Separate bibliographic identities. If a person has established two or more biblio-
graphic identities, as indicated by the fact that works of one type appear under one pseudo-
nym and works of other types appear under other pseudonyms or the person's real name,
choose, as the basis for the heading for each group of works, the name by which works in
that group are identified. Make references to connect the names (see 26.2C and 26.2D). In
case of doubt, do not consider a person to have separate bibliographic identities (for contem-
porary authors see also 22.2B3).
J.I.M, Stewart
(Real name used in "serious " novels and critical works )
Michael Innes
(Pseudonym used in detective novels)
22-6
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.2B3
C. Day-Lewis
(Real name used in poetic and critical works)
Nicholas Blake
(Pseudonym used in detective novels)
Charles L. Dodgson
(Real name used in works on mathematics and logic)
Lewis Carroll
(Pseudonym used in literary works)
22.2B3. Contemporary authors. If a contemporary author uses more than one pseudonym or
his or her real name and one or more pseudonyms, use, as the basis for the heading for each
work, the name appearing in it. Make references to connect the names (see 26.2C and
26.2D).
Ed McBain
Evan Hunter
(Pseudonyms used by the same person )
Philippa Carr
Victoria Holt
Kathleen Kellow
Jean Plaidy
Ellalice Tate
(Pseudonyms used by the same person )
Howard Fast
(Real name used in some works)
E.V, Cunningham
(Pseudonym used in some works)
Molly Keane
(Real name used in some works)
M.J. Farrell
(Pseudonym used in some works)
Denys Watki ns-Pitchf ord
(Real name used in some works )
BB
(Pseudonym used in some works)
Kingsley Amis
(Real name used in most works)
Robert Markham
(Pseudonym used in one work)
If, in the works of contemporary authors, different names appear in different editions of
the same work or two or more names appear in one edition, choose, for all editions, the name
most frequently used in editions of the work. If that cannot be determined readily, choose the
name appearing in the latest available edition of the work. Make name-title references from
the other name or names (see 26.2B1).
The rising tide / M.J. Farrell
(Two editions known. The later published under the name Molly Keane)
Use Molly Keane as the basis for the heading
Make a name-title reference using M.J, Farrell as the basis for the reference
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-7
22.2B4
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
Cut thin to win / Erie Stanley Gardner as A. A, Fair
(Two editions known. One published under the name A. A. Fair, the later as
above )
Use Erie Stanley Gardner as the basis for the heading
Make a name-title reference using A. A. Fair as the basis for the reference
22.2B4. If a person using more than one pseudonym or his or her real name and one or more
pseudonyms
neither has established separate bibliographic identities (see 22.2B2)
nor is a contemporary author (see 22.2B3)
choose, as the basis for the heading, the name by which that person has come to be identified
in later editions of his or her works, in critical works, or in other reference sources 2 (in that
order of preference). Make references from other names.
Shimei Futabatei
not Tatsunosuke Hasegawa
R. S . Surtees
not Author of Mr. Sponge's sporting tour
22.2C. Change of name
22.2C1. If a person (other than one using a pseudonym or pseudonyms) has changed his or
her name, choose the latest name or form of name unless there is reason to believe that an
earlier name will persist as the name by which the person is better known. Follow the same
rule for a person who has acquired and become known by a title of nobility (see also 22,6).
Dorothy Belle Hughes
not Dorothy Belle Flanagan
(Name used in works before author's marriage)
Sister Mary Just
not Florence Didiez David
(Name used in works before author entered a religious order)
Eloi-Gerard Talbot
not Frere Eloi-Gerard
(Name without surname originally used in works)
Akiko Yosano
not Akiko Ho
(Name used in works before author's marriage)
Jacqueline Onassis
not Jacqueline Bouvier
Jacqueline Kennedy
(Names used before marriage and during first marriage )
Ford Madox Ford
not Ford Madox Huef f er
(Name changed from Hueffer to Ford)
2. Disregard reference sources thai always enter persons under their real names.
22-8
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.3B1
Muhammad Ali
not Cassius Clay
(Name changed from Cassius Clay to Muhammad Ali)
Earl of Longford
not Francis Aungier Pakenham
(Known successively by personal name, tide as baron, and title as earl; best
known by latest title )
Benjamin Disraeli
not Earl of Beaconsfield
(Title acquired late in life; better known by earlier name )
22.3. CHOICE AMONG DIFFERENT FORMS OF THE SAME NAME
22.3A. Fullness
22.3 Al. If the forms of a name vary in fullness, choose the form most commonly found. As
required, make references from the other form{s).
J. Barbey d'Aurevilly
(Most common form: J, Barbey d'Aurevilly)
(Occasional forms: Jules Barbey d'Aurevilly; Jules-Amcdee Barbey d'Aurevilly)
(Rare form: J. -A. Barbey d'Aurevilly)
Morris West
(Most common form; Morris West)
(Occasional form: Morris L. West)
Juan Valera
(Most common form: J uan Valera)
(Occasional form: Juan Valera y Alcala Galiano)
If no one form predominates, choose the latest form. In case of doubt about which is the
latest form, choose the fuller or fullest form.
22.3B. Language
22.3B1. Persons using more than one language. If the name of a person who has used more
than one language appears in different language forms in his or her works, choose the form
corresponding to the language of most of the works.
George Mikes
not GySrgy Mikes
Philippe Garigue
not Philip Garigue
If, however, one of the languages is Latin or Greek, apply 22.3B2.
In case of doubt, choose the form most commonly found in reference sources of the per-
son's country of residence or activity. For persons identified by a well-established English
form of name, see 22.3B3. If the name chosen is written in a nonroman script, see 22.3C.
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-9
22.3B2
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.3B2, Names in vernacular and Greek or Latin forms. If a name occurs in reference
sources and/or in the person's works in a Greek or Latin form as well as in a form in the
person's vernacular, choose the form most commonly found in reference sources.
Sixt Birck
not Xystus Betulius
Hugo Grotius
not Hugo de Groot
Philipp Melanchthon
not Philipp Schwarzerd
Friedrich Wilhelm Ritschl
not Fridericus Ritschelius
In case of doubt, choose the Latin or Greek form for persons who were active before, or
mostly before, A.D. 1400. For persons active after that date, choose the vernacular form.
Guilelmus Arvernus
not Guillaume d'Auvergne
{Died 1249)
Giovanni da Imola
not Joannes de Imola
{Died 1436)
22.3B3. Names written in the roman alphabet and established in an English form.
Choose the English form of name for a person entered under given name, etc. (see 22.8) or
for a Roman of classical times (see 22.9A) whose name has become well established in an
English form in English-language reference sources.
Saint Francis of Assisi
not San Francesco d'Assisi
Pope John XXIII
not Joannes Papa XXIII
Horace
not Quintus Horatius Flaccus
Pliny the Elder
not C. Plinius Secundus
Charles V
not Karl V
Carlos I
King Philip II
not Rey Felipe II
John Sobieski
not Jan III Sobieski
In case of doubt, use the vernacular or Latin form.
Sainte Therese de Lisieux
not Saint Theresa of Lisieux
22-10
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.3C1
22.3B4. Other names. In all cases of names found in different language forms and not cov-
ered by 22.3B1-22.3B3, choose the form most frequently found in reference sources of the
person's country of residence or activity,
Hildegard Knef
not Hildegarde Meff
22.3C. Names written in a nonroman script 3
22.3C1. Persons entered under given name, etc. Choose the form of name that has become
well-established in English-language reference sources for a person entered under given
name, etc, (see 22.8) whose name is in a language written in a nonroman script. If variant
English-language forms are found, choose the form that occurs most frequently. As required,
make references from other forms,
Alexander the Great
not Alexandros ho Megas
Avicenna
not al-Husayn ibn 'Abd Allah ibn Sina
Empress Catherine II
not Imperatritsa Ekaterina II
Confucius
not K'ung-tzu
Homer
not Homeros
Homerus
Isaiah the Prophet
not Yesha'yahu
Maimonides
not Moses ben Maimon
Mosheh ben Maimon
Theodore Metochites
not Theodoros Metochites
Omar Khayyam
not 'Umar Khayyam
King Paul I
not Vasileus Paulos I
If no English romanization is found, or if no one romanization predominates, romanize the
name according to the table for the language adopted by the cataloguing agency.
3. Systematic romani nations used in the examples in this chapter follow the tables {published by the Library of Congress
in Cataloging Service, bulletin 118- ) adopted jointly by the American Library Association, the Canadian Library
Association, and the Library of Congress.
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-11
22.3C2
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.3C2. Persons entered under surname. 4 If the name of a person entered under surname
(see 22.5) is written in a nonroman script, romanize the name according to the table for the
language adopted by the cataloguing agency. Add vowels to names that are not vocalized. As
required, make references from other romanized forms.
Lin Yu-t^ang
not Lin Yutang
Jamal 'Abd al-Nasir
not Gamal Abdel Nasser
P . S . Iramaccantiran
not P.S, Ramachandran
Yi Sung-man
not Syngman Rhee
A.N. Skriabin
not A.N. Scriabin
Evgenil Evtushenko
not Yevgeny Yevtushenko
Mosheh Dayan
not Moshe Dayan
Shelomit Kohen
not Shlomit Cohen
4. Alternative rule. This alternative rule may be applied selectively language by language.
Persons entered under surname. Choose the romanized form of name that has become well-established in English-
language reference sources for a person entered under surname {see 22.5) whose name is in a language written in a nonroman
script. For a person who uses Hebrew or Yiddish and whose name is not found to be well-established in English- language
reference sources, choose the romanized form appearing in his or her works.
If variant romanized forms are found in English-language reference sources, choose the form that occurs most frequently.
As required, make inferences from other romanized forms.
Lin Yutang
no! Lin YU-t'ang
Gamai Abdel flasser
not Jamal l Abd al-Nasir
P.S. Rama Chandrae!
not P.S. Iramaccantiran
Syngman Rhee
not Yi Sting -man
A.N. Scriabin
not A.N. Skriabin
Yevgeny Yevtushenko
not Evgenil Evtushenko
Moshe Dayan
not Mosheh Dayan
Shlomit Cohen
not Shelomit Kohen
22-12
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.4B1
If the name of a person is found only in a romanized form in his or her works, use it as
found.
Ghaoutsi Bouali
not Ghawthi 'Abu 'All
If such a person's name is found in more than one romanized form in his or her works,
choose the form that occurs most frequently.
If a name is written in more than one nonroman script, romanize it according to the table
for the original language of most of the works. As required, make references from other
romanized forms.
'All Muhammad IrtizS
not 'Mi Muhammad Irtida
{IVrofe primarily in Persian but also in Arabic)
Raghun&tha SQri
not Irakunatasuri
( Wrote primarily in Sanskrit but also in Tamil )
In case of doubt as to which of two or more languages written in the Arabic script should
be used for the romanization, base the choice on the nationality of the person or the language
of the area of residence or activity. If these criteria do not apply, choose (in this order of
preference): Urdu, Arabic, Persian, any other language.
22.3D. Spelling
22.3D1. If variant spellings of a person's name are found and these variations are not the
result of different romanizations, choose the form resulting from an official change in orthog-
raphy, or, if this does not apply, choose the predominant spelling. In case of doubt, choose
the spelling found in the first item catalogued. For spelling differences resulting from differ-
ent romanizations, see 22.3C.
Entry Element
22.4. GENERAL RULE
22.4A. If a person's name (chosen according to 22.1-22.3) consists of several parts, select as
the entry element that part of the name under which the person would normally be listed in
authoritative alphabetic lists 5 in his or her language or country of residence or activity. In
applying this general rule, follow the instructions in 22.5-22.9. If, however, a person's prefer-
ence is known to be different from the normal usage, follow that preference in selecting the
entry element.
22.4B. Order of elements
22.4B1. If the entry element is the first element of the name, enter the name in direct order.
Ram Gopal
5. Authoritative alphabetic lists means publications of the "who's who" type, not telephone directories or similar
compilations.
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-13
22.4B2
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.4B2. If the first element is a surname, follow it by a comma.
Chiang , Kai-shek
(Ncime: Chiang Kai-shek)
(Surname: Chiang)
Molnar, Ferenc
(Name: Molnar Ferenc)
(Surname: Molnar)
Trinh, Van Thanh
(Name: Trinh Van Thanh)
(Surname: Trinh)
22.4B3. If the entry element is not the first element of the name, transpose the elements of
the name preceding the entry element. Follow the entry element by a comma.
Cassatt, Mary
(Name: Mary C as salt)
22.4B4. If the entry element is the proper name in a title of nobility (see 22.6), follow it by
the personal name in direct order and then by the part of the title denoting rank. Precede the
personal name and the part of the title denoting rank by commas.
Leigh ton, Frederick Leighton, Baron
Caradon, Hugh Foot, Baron
22.5. ENTRY UNDER SURNAME
22.5A. General rule
22.5 Al. Enter a name containing a surname or consisting only of a surname under that sur-
name unless subsequent rules (e.g., 22.6, 22.10, 22.28) provide for entry under a different
element.
Bernhardt, Sarah
Fitzgerald, Ella
Byatt, A.S.
Ching, Francis K.W.
Mantovani
If the surname is represented by an initial, but at least one element of the name is given in
full, enter under the initial that represents the surname.
G. , Michael
22.5B. Element other than the first treated as a surname 6
22.5B1. If the name does not contain a surname but contains an element that identifies the
individual and functions as a surname, enter under this element followed by a comma and the
rest of the name.
6. For Islamic names, see 22.22, 22,26Cla. and 22.27.
22-14
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.5C3
Hus , Jan
Mahfuz, Husayn 'Ali
al-Basha, A Abd al-Rahman
Ali , Muhammad
(The American boxer)
X, Malcolm
Kurd 'Ali, Muhammad
22.5C. Compound surnames
22.5CI. Preliminary rule. The following rules deal with the entry of surnames consisting of
two or more proper names {referred to as "compound surnames") and names that may or may
not contain compound surnames. Apply the rules in the order given. Refer from elements of
compound surnames not chosen as the entry element,
22.5C2. Preferred or established tbrm known. Enter a name containing a compound sur-
name under the element by which the person bearing the name prefers to be entered, 7 If this
is unknown, enter the name under the element under which it is listed in reference sources 8 in
the person's language or country of residence or activity,
Fenelon, Francois de Salignac de La Mothe-
Lloyd George, David
(Paternal surname: George)
Machado de Assis, Joaquim Maria
(Paternal surname: de Assis)
22.5C3. Hyphenated surnames. If the elements of a compound surname are regularly or
occasionally hyphenated, enter under the first element (see also 22.5E1).
Day-Lewis, C.
Ena jarvi-Haavio , Elsa
Chaput-Rolland , Solange
Henry-Bordeaux , Paule
Lykke-Seest, Hans
Landova-Stychova , Luisa
7, Take regular or occasional initializing of an clement preceding a surname as an indication that that element is not used
as part of the surname.
Chavarri, Eduardo Lopez
(Name sometimes appears as: Eduardo L. Chavarri)
Szentpal, Maria Sz.
(Name appears us: Sz. SEentpal Maria)
(Husband's surname: Szilagi)
Campbell, Julia Moirilla de
(Name sometimes appears as: Julia M. dc Campbell)
8. Disregard reference sources that list compound surnames in a uniform style regardless of preference or customary usage.
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-15
22.5C4
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.5C4. Other compound surnames, except those of married women whose surname
consists of surname before marriage and husband's surname. Enter under the first ele-
ment of the compound surname unless the person's language is Portuguese. If the person's
language is Portuguese, enter under the last element.
Jankovic Mirijevski, Teodor
Friis Mjsller, Kai
Huber Noodt, Ulrich
Johnson Smith, Geoffrey
Hungry Wolf, Adolf
Castres Saint Martin, Gaston
Strauss und Torney, Lulu von
Halasy Nagy, Jozsef
Korosi Csoma, Sandor
Imbriani Poerio, Matteo Renato
Sraitt Ingebretsen, Herman
Budai Deleanu, Ion
Cotarelo y Mori, Emilio
but Silva, Ovidio Saraiva de Carvalho e
22.5CS. Other compound surnames. Married women whose surname consists of
surname before marriage and husband's surname. Enter under the first element of the
compound surname (regardless of its nature) if the person's language is Czech, French, Hun-
garian, Italian, or Spanish. In all other cases, enter under the husband's surname. For hyphen-
ated names, see 22.5C3.
Semetkayne Schwanda , Magda
(Language of person: Hungarian)
Bonacci Brunaraonti , Alinda
(Language of person: Italian)
Molina y Vedia de Bastianini, Delfina
(Language of person: Spanish)
but
Figueiredo, Adelpha Silva Rodrigues de
(Language of person: Portuguese)
Stowe, Harriet Beecher
(Language of person: English)
Wang Ma, Hsi-ch^un
(Language of person: Chinese)
22.5C6. Nature of surname uncertain. If a name has the appearance of a compound sur-
name but its nature is not certain, treat it as a compound surname unless the language of the
person is English, Danish, Faroese, Norwegian, or Swedish.
22-16
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.5D1
If the person's language is English, enter under the last part of the name and do not refer
from the preceding part unless the name has been treated as a compound surname in refer-
ence sources.
Adams , John Crawford
Robertson, E. Arnot
If the person's language is Danish, Faroese, Norwegian, or Swedish, enter under the last
part of the name and refer from the preceding part.
Mahrt, Haakon Bugge
x Bugge Mahrt, Haakon
Olsen, lb Spang
x Spang Olsen, lb
22.5C7. Place names added to surnames. Treat a place name added to a person's surname
and connected to it by a hyphen as part of the surname {see 22.5C3).
Miiller-Breslau , Heinrich
22.5C8. Words indicating relationship following surnames. Treat Filho, Junior, Neto,
Netto, or Sobrinho following a Portuguese surname as part of the surname.
Castro Sobrinho, Antonio Ribeiro de
Marques Junior , Henrique
Omit similar terms (e.g., Jr. , Sr. , fils, pere) occurring in languages other than Portuguese.
If such a term is required to distinguish between two or more identical names, add it as
instructed in 22.19B.
22.5D. Surnames with separately written prefixes
22.5D1. Articles and prepositions. If a surname includes an article or preposition or combi-
nation of the two, enter under the element most commonly used as entry element in alphabet-
ically arranged directories, etc., in the person's language or country of residence or activity.
The rules listed under languages and language groups below summarize entry element
practice.
If such a name is listed in a nonstandard fashion in reference sources in the person's lan-
guage or country of residence, enter under the entry element used in those sources.
If a person has used two or more languages, enter the name according to the language of
most of that person's works. In case of doubt, follow the rules for English if English is one of
the languages. Otherwise, if the person is known to have changed his or her country of resi-
dence, follow the rules for the language of the adopted country. As a last resort, follow the
rules for the language of the name.
Languages and language groups:
AFRIKAANS. Enter under the prefix.
De Villiers, Anna Johanna Dorothea
Du Toit, Stephanus Johannes
Van der Post, Christiaan Willem Hendrik
Von Wiellxgh, Gideon Retief
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-17
22.5D1
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
CZECH AND SLOVAK. If the surname consists of a place name in the genitive case
preceded by z, enter under the part following the prefix. Refer from the place name in the
nominative case. Omit the z from the reference.
Zerotina, Karel z
x Zerotin, Karel
DANISH. See Scandinavian languages.
DUTCH. If the surname is Dutch, enter under the part following the prefix unless the
prefix is ver. In that case, enter under the prefix.
Aa, Pieter van der
Beeck, Leo op de
Braak, Men no ter
Brink, Jan ten
Driessche, Albert van
Hertog, Ary den
Hof f , Jacobus Henricus van ' t
Wijngaert, Frank van den
Winter, Karel de
Ver Boven, Daisy
If the surname is not Dutch, enter the name of a Netherlander under the part following the
prefix and the name of a Belgian according to the rules for the language of the name.
Faille, Jacob Baart de la
(Netherlander)
Long, Isaac le
{Netherlander)
Du Jardin, Thomas
(Belgian; French name)
ENGLISH. Enter under the prefix.
A Beckett, Gilbert Abbott
D'Anvers, Knightley
De Morgan, Augustus
De la Mare, Walter
Du Maurier, Daphne
Le Gallienne, Richard
Van Buren, Martin
Von Braun, Wernher
FLEMISH. See Dutch.
22-18
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.5D1
FRENCH. If the prefix consists of an article or of a contraction of an article and a
preposition, enter under the prefix.
Le Rouge, Gustave
La Bruyere, Rene
Du Meril, Edelestand Pontas
Des Granges, Charles-Marc
Otherwise, enter under the part of the name following the preposition.
Aubigne, Theodore Agrippa d'
Musset, Alfred de
La Fontaine, Jean de
GERMAN. If the name is German and the prefix consists of an article or of a contraction
of an article and a preposition, enter under the prefix.
Am Thym, August
Aus'm Weerth, Ernst
Vom Ende, Erich
Zuin Busch, Josef Paul
Zur Linde, Otto
Follow the same rule for Dutch names with a prefix consisting of an article or of a
contraction of an article and a preposition.
De Boor, Hans Otto
(Name of Dutch origin)
Ten Bruggencate, Paul
(Name of Dutch origin)
Enter other German and Dutch names under the part of the name following the prefix.
Goethe, Johann Wolfgang von
Muhll, Peter von der
Urff , Georg Ludwig von und zu
Enter names that are neither German nor Dutch according to the rules for the language of
the name.
Du Bois-Reymond, Emil
Le Fort, Gertrud
ITALIAN. Enter modem names under the prefix.
A Prato, Giovanni
D'Arienzo, Nicola
Da Ponte, Lorenzo
De Amicis, Pietro Maria
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-19
22.5D1
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
Del Lungo, Isidoro
Delia Volpaia, Eufrosino
Di Costanzo, Angelo
Li Greci, Gioacchino
Lo Savio, Niecolo
For medieval and early modern names, consult reference sources about whether a prefix is
part of a name. If a preposition is sometimes omitted from the name, enter under the part
following the preposition. De, de', degii, dei, and de li occurring in names of the period are
rarely part of the surname.
Alberti, Antonio degli
Anghiera, Pietro Martire d'
Medici, Lorenzo de'
Do not treat the preposition in an Italian title of nobility used as an entry element (see
22.6A) as a prefix.
NORWEGIAN. See Scandinavian languages.
PORTUGUESE. Enter under the part of the name following the prefix.
Fortseca, Martinho Augusto da
Santos, Joao Adolpho dos
ROMANIAN. Enter under the prefix unless it is de. In that case, enter under the part of the
name following the prefix.
A Mariei , Vasile
Puscariu, Emil de
SCANDINAVIAN LANGUAGES. Enter under the part of the name following the prefix if
the prefix is of Scandinavian, German, or Dutch origin (except for the Dutch de). If the prefix
is the Dutch de or is of another origin, enter under the prefix.
Hallstrom, Gunnar Johannes af
Linne , Carl von
De Geer, Gerard
De la Gardie, Magnus Gabriel
La Cour , Jens Lassen
SLOVAK. See Czech and Slovak.
SPANISH. If the prefix consists of an article only, enter under it.
Las Heras, Manuel Antonio
Enter all other names under the part following the prefix.
Figueroa, Francisco de
22-20
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.5F1
Casas, Bartolome de las
Rio, Antonio del
SWEDISH. See Scandinavian languages.
22.5D2. Other prefixes. If the prefix is neither an article, nor a preposition, nor a combina-
tion of the two, enter under the prefix,
'Abd al-Hamid, Ahmad
Abu Zahrah, Muhammad
Al Yasln, Muhammad Hasan
Ap Rhys Price, Henry Edward
Ben Mayr, Berl
O Faolain, Sean
Mac Muireadach, Niall Mor
22.5E. Prefixes hyphenated or combined with surnames
22.5E1. If the prefix is regularly or occasionally hyphenated or combined with the surname,
enter the name under the prefix. As required, refer from the part of the name following the
prefix.
FitzGerald, David
MacDonald, William
Ter-P6ghosian, Petros
Debure, Guillaume
x Bure, Guillaume de
Fon-Lampe r A. A.
x Lampe, A. A. Fon-
22.5F. Members of royal houses entered under surname, etc.
22.5F1. Enter the name of a member of a royal house no longer reigning or of a royal house
that has lost or renounced its throne, and who is no longer identified as royalty, under sur-
name or the part of the name by which he or she is identified in his or her works or in refer-
ence sources (e.g., name of the house or dynasty, territorial title) if there is no surname. Add
titles that the person still uses as instructed in 22.12. Refer from the given name followed by
the title as instructed in 22.16A1-22.I6A4.
Bernadotte, Folke
x Bernadotte af Wisborg, Folke, greve
x Folke, Count Bernadotte of Wisborg
x Wisborg, Folke Bernadotte, greve af
Habsburg, Otto
x Otto, Archduke of Austria
Hohenzollern , Franz Joseph, Fiirst von
x Franz Joseph, Prince of Hohenzollern
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-21
22.6
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
Paris, Henri, comte de
x Henri, Count of Paris
Wied, Maximilian, Prinz von
x Maximilian, Prince of Wied
22.6. ENTRY UNDER TITLE OF NOBILITY
22.6A. General rule
22.6A1. Enter under the proper name in a title of nobility {including courtesy titles) if the
person is commonly known by that title. Apply this rule to those persons who:
a) use their titles rather than their surnames in their works
or b) are listed tinder their titles in reference sources. 9
Follow the proper name in the title by the personal name (excluding unused forenames) in
direct order and the term of rank 10 in the vernacular. Omit the surname and term of rank if
the person does not use a term of rank or a substitute for it. Refer from the surname (see
26.2A3) unless the proper name in the title is the same as the surname.
Byron, George Gordon Byron, Baron
Macaulay, Thomas Babington Macaulay, Baron
Nairne, Carolina Nairne, Baroness
Abrantes, Laure Junot, duchesse d'
x Junot, Laure, duchesse d' Abrantes
Bolingbroke, Henry St. John, Viscount
x St. John, Henry, Viscount Bolingbroke
Cavour, Camillo Benso, conte di
x Benso, Camillo, conte di Cavour
Willoughby de Broke, Richard Greville Verney, Baron
x Broke, Richard Greville Verney, Baron Willoughby de
x Verney, Richard Greville, Baron Willoughby de Broke
Winchilsea, Anne Finch, Countess of
x Finch, Anne, Countess of Winchilsea
Monluc, Blaise de
(Name appears as: Blaise de Monluc)
x Lasseran Massencome, Blaise de, seigneur de Monluc
x Massencome, Blaise de Lasseran, seigneur de Monluc
Norwich, John Julius
(Name appears as: John Julius Norwich)
x Cooper, John Julius, Viscount Norwich
9. Disregard reference sources that list members of the nobility cither all under title or all under surname.
10. The terms of rank in the United Kingdom peerage are duke, duchess, marquess (marquis), marchioness, earl, countess,
viscount, viscountess, baron, and baroness. The heir of a British peer above the rank of baron usually takes the next to highest
title of the peer during the peer's lifetime.
22-22
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.SA1
22.6B. Special rules
22.6B1. Some titles in the United Kingdom peerage include a territorial designation that may
or may not be an integral part of the title. If the territorial designation is an integral part of
the title, include it.
Russell of Liverpool, Edward Frederick Langley Russell,
Baron
If it is not an integral part of the title, or if there is doubt that it is, omit it.
Bracken, Brendan Bracken, Viscount
not Bracken of Chris tchurch , Brendan Bracken, Viscount
22.6B2. Apply 22.6 A 1 to judges of the Scottish Court of Session bearing a law title begin-
ning with Lord.
Karnes, Henry Home, Lord
x Home, Henry, Lord Karnes
22.6B3. If a person acquires a title of nobility, disclaims such a title, or acquires a new title
of nobility, follow the instructions in 22.2C in choosing the name to be used as the basis for
the heading.
Caradon, Hugh Foot, Baron
(Previously Hugh Foot)
George-Brown, George Brown, Baron
(Previously George Brown)
Grigg , John
(Previously Baron Altrincham; peerage disclaimed)
Hailsham of St. Marylebone, Quintin Hogg, Baron
(Originally Quintin Hogg; became Viscount Hailsham, 1950; peerage disclaimed,
1963; became Baron Hailsham of St. Marylebone, 1970)
22.7. ENTRY UNDER ROMANIAN PATRONYMIC
22.7A. If a name of a person whose language is Romanian contains a patronymic with the
suffix ade, enter under that patronymic.
Heliade Radulescu, Ion
22.8. ENTRY UNDER GIVEN NAME, ETC. 11
22.8A. General rule
22.8A1. Enter a name that does not include a surname and that is borne by a person who is
not identified by a title of nobility under the part of the name under which the person is listed
in reference sources. In case of doubt, enter under the last element, following the instructions
in 22.5B. Include in the name any words or phrases denoting place of origin, domicile, occu-
pation, or other characteristics that are commonly associated with the name in works by the
1 1. For Islamic names, see 22.22, 22.26C1, and 22.27.
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-23
22.8A2
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
person or in reference sources. Precede such words or phrases by a comma. Refer, as appro-
priate, from the associated words or phrases, from variant forms of the name, and from other
names by which the person is known,
John, the Baptist
Paulus, Diaconus
x Paulus, Casinensis
x Casinensis, Paulus
x Paulus, Levita
x Levita, Paulus
x Paulus, Warnefridus
x Warnefridus, Paulus
x Paul, the Deacon
x Paolo, Diacono
lolo, Goch
Joannes , Braidensis
x Braidensis, Joannes
x Joannes, de Brera
x Brera, Joannes de
Leonardo, da Vinci
x Vinci, Leonardo da
Alexander, of Aphrodisias
x Aphrodisias, Alexander of
x Alexander, Aphrodisiensis
x Alexander, von Aphrodisias
x Alexandre, d'Aphrodise
Judah, ha-Levi
x Halevi, Judah
Judas Iscariot
x Iscariot, Judas
22.SA2. If a person with such a name is listed in reference sources by a part of the name
other than the first, follow the instructions in 22. 5B,
Planudes , Maximus
Helena , Maria
22.8B. Names including a patronymic
22.8B1. If a name consists of one or more given names and a patronymic, enter it under the
first given name, followed by the rest of the name in direct order. If the patronymic precedes
the given name(s), transpose the elements to bring the first given name into first position.
Refer from the patronymic. For Icelandic names, see 22.9B.
'Abe Gubana
(Given name: 'Abe)
(Patronymic: Gubana)
x Gubana, 'Abe
22-24
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.8C1
Solomon Gebre Christos
{Given name: Solomon)
(Patronymic: Gebre Christos)
x Gebre Christos, Solomon
Kidana Maryam Getahun
(Given names: Kidana Maryam)
(Patronymic: Getahun)
x Getahun, Kidana Maryam
Gabra ' lyasus Hayla Maryam
(Given names: Gabra 'lyasus)
(Patronymic: Hayla Maryam)
x Hayla Maryam, Gabra ' lyasus
Isaac ben Aaron
(Given name: Isaac)
(Patronymic: ben Aaron)
x Aaron, Isaac ben
Shirendev, B.
(Name appears as: B. SIrirendev)
(Initial of patronymic: B.)
(Given name: Shirendev)
x B. Shirendev
Moses ben Jacob, of Coucy
(Given name: Moses)
(Patronymic: ben Jacob)
(Words denoting place: of Coucy)
x Jacob, Moses ben, of Coucy
x Jacob, of Coucy, Moses ben
(To be made only when warranted in a particular catalogue)
22.8C. Names of royal persons
22.8C1. If the name by which a royal person is known includes the name of a royal house,
dynasty, territorial designation, etc., or a surname, enter the name in direct order. Add titles as
instructed in 22.I6A.
John II Comnenus . . .
Louis Bonaparte . . .
Chandragupta Maurya . . .
Eleanor, of Aquitaine ... i2
Daulat Rao Sindhia . . .
Ming T'ai-tsu ...
Shuja-ud-daulah . . .
12. For additions to the names of consorts of royal persons, sec 22.16A3.
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-25
22.9
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.9. ENTRY OF OTHER NAMES
22.9A. Roman names
22.9A1. Enter a Roman active before, or mostly before, A.D, 476 under the part of the name
most commonly used as entry element in reference sources.
Caesar, Gaius Julius
Messalina, Valeria
Messala Corvinus , Marcus Valerius
Antoninus Pius
In case of doubt, enter the name in direct order.
Martianus Capella
22.9B. Icelandic names
22.9B1. Enter an Icelandic name under the first given name, followed by the other given
names (if present), by the patronymic, and by the family name, in direct order. If a phrase
naming a place follows the given name{s), patronymic, or family name, treat it as an integral
part of the name. Refer from the patronymic and from the family name.
Svava Jakobsdottir
(Given name: Svava)
(Patronymic: Jakobsdottir)
x Jakobsdotti r , Svava
Halldor Laxness
(Given name: Halldor)
(Family name: Laxness)
x Laxness, Halldor
Bjarni Benediktsson fra Hofteigi
(Given name: Bjarni)
( Pat ronym i c : B ene di ktsson)
(Words denoting place: fra Hofteigi)
x Benediktsson fra Hofteigi, Bjarni
x Benediktsson, Bjarni
(To be made only when warranted in a particular catalogue )
Johannes ur Kotlum
(Given name: Johannes)
(Words denoting place: ur Kotlum)
22.10. ENTRY UNDER INITIALS, LETTERS, OR NUMERALS
22.I0A. Enter a name consisting of initials, or separate letters, or numerals, or consisting pri-
marily of initials, under those initials, letters, or numerals in direct order. Include typographic
devices when they appear as part of multi-letter abbreviations of a name, but omit them when
they follow single-letter initials. Include any words or phrases associated with the initials, let-
ters, or numerals. In the case of initials or letters, make a name-title reference from an
inverted form beginning with the last letter for each item catalogued. Make a reference from
22-26
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.1 1A
any phrase associated with the initials as required. In the case of numerals, make a name-title
reference from the numbers as words for each item catalogued.
H.D.
x D . , H.
By Avon River
x D., H.
Flowering of the rod
[etc.]
J.W.
(Name appears as: J***
x W., J.
Narrative of a commuted pensioner
A. de O.
x 0 . , A . de
Indiscretions of Dr. Carstairs
E. B— s
x B-s, E.
Lettre sur la Grece
B. , abbe de
{Name appears as: <xbb€ de B ... )
D . S . , Master
x S . , D. , Master
x Master D. S .
i.e., Master
x e . , i . , Master
x Master i.e.
110908
x One Hundred and Ten Thousand, Nine Hundred and Eight
Per ardua ad astra
x One, One, Zero, Nine, Zero, Eight
Per ardua ad astra
22.11. ENTRY UNDER PHRASE
22,11 A. Enter in direct order a name that consists of a phrase or appellation that does not
contain a forename.
Dr. X
Father Time
Pan Painter
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-27
22.1 IB
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
Also enter in direct order a phrase that consists of a forename or forenames preceded by
words other than a term of address or a title of position or office. Make a reference from the
forename(s) followed by the initial word(s).
Poor Richard
x Richard, Poor
Buckskin Bill
x Bill, Buckskin
Calamity Jane
x Jane, Calamity
Boy George
x George , Boy
If, however, such a name has the appearance of a forename, forenames, or initials, and a
surname, enter under the pseudosurname. Refer from the name in direct order.
Other, A.N.
x A.N. Other
If such a name does not convey the idea of a person, add in parentheses a suitable designa-
tion in English.
River ( fflri t er )
Taj Mahal {Musician)
22.11B. If a phrase consists of a forename preceded by a term of address {e.g., a word indi-
cating relationship) or a title of position or office (e.g., a professional appellation), enter
under the forename. Treat other word(s) as additions to the forename(s) (see 22.8AI). Refer
from the name in direct order.
Fannie, Cousin
x Cousin Fannie
Jemima, Aunt
x Aunt Jemima
Marcelle, Tante
x Tante Marcelle
Pierre, Chef
x Chef Pierre
22.11C. If a phrase by which a person is commonly identified contains the name of another
person, enter it in direct order. Make references to link the phrase and the heading for the
other person if works by the person identified by the phrase have been ascribed to the other
person (see 26.2C2 and 26.2D1).
Pseudo -Brutus
see also Brutus, Marcus Junius
Brutus , Marcus Junius
For the Greek letters erroneously attributed to this
person, see
Pseudo-Brutus
22-28
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.12A
22.11D. Enter a characterizing word or phrase, or a phrase naming another work by a person,
in direct order. Omit an initial article (see Initial Articles, appendix E). Consider such a word
or phrase to be the heading for a person if that person is commonly identified by it in the
chief sources of information of his or her works and in reference sources. Refer, when appro-
priate, from the title of the other work in the form [Title], Author of.
Physician
Memoir of Bowman Hendry ... / by a Physician
Author of Early impressions
The unveiled heart : a simple story / by the Author of
Early impressions
x Early impressions, Author of
If a person is commonly identified by a real name or another name (see 22.2A), and a
word or phrase characterizing that person or including the title of another work has appeared
in the chief source of information of any of his or her works, refer from the word or phrase.
Also refer, when appropriate, from the title of the other work in the form [Title], Author of.
Bagnold, Enid
Serena Blandish, or, The difficulty of getting married /
by a Lady of Quality
x Lady of Quality
Sassoon, Siegfried
Memoirs of an infantry officer / by the Author of
Memoirs of a fox-hunting man
x Author of Memoirs of a fox-hunting man
x Memoirs of a fox-hunting man/ Author of
Additions to Names
General
22.12. TITLES OF NOBILITY
22.12A. Add, to the name of a nobleman or noblewoman not entered under title (see 22.6),
the title of nobility in the vernacular if the title or part of the title or a substitute for the title 13
commonly appears with the name in works by the person or in reference sources. 14 In case of
doubt, add the title.
Bismarck, Otto, Furst von
Nagy, Pal, felsobiiki
Sevigne, Marie Rabutin-Chantal , marquise de
Johan, de Middelste r Graaf van Nassau-Siegen
but
13. United Kingdom peers (other than dukes and duchesses) usually use the terms of address Lord or Lady in place of their
titles. For example, George Gordon, Baron Byron, is almost invariably referred to as Lord Byron.
14. Disregard, in this context, reference sources dealing with the nobility.
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-29
22.13
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
Buchan , John
(Title Baron Twcedsmuir not used in the majority of his works)
Campbell , Patrick
(Title Baron Glenavy not used in his works)
Visconti, Luchino
(Title conte di Modrone not used in his works)
22.13. SAINTS
22.13A. Add Saint after the name of a Christian saint, unless the person was a pope, emperor,
empress, king, or queen, in which case follow 22.16A-22.16B.
Alban, Saint
Teresa, of Avila, Saint
Francis, of Assisi, Saint
John, Climacus , Saint
Francis Xavier, Saint
More , Thomas , Saint
Seton, Elizabeth Ann, Saint
Arundel, Philip Howard, Earl of, Saint
Chantal, Jeanne -Francoise de, Saint
(Not identified by title baronne)
22.13B. Add any other suitable word or phrase necessary to distinguish between two saints.
Augustine, Saint, Archbishop of Canterbury
Augustine, Saint, Bishop of Hippo
22.14. SPIRITS
22.14A. Add (Spirit) to a heading established tor a spirit communication (see 21.26).
Parker, Theodore (Spirit)
Beethoven, Ludwig van (Spirit)
Espirito Universal (Spirit)
22.15. ADDITIONS TO NAMES ENTERED UNDER SURNAME
22.15A. If the name by Which a person is known consists only of a surname, add the word or
phrase associated with the name in works by the person or in reference sources. As required,
refer from the name in direct order.
Deidier, abbe
22-30
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.16A1
Moses , Grandma
x Grandma Moses
Read, Miss
x Miss Read
Seuss, Dr.
x Dr. Seuss
If no such word or phrase exists, make additions to surnames alone only when they are
needed to distinguish two or more persons with the same name (see 22.19B).
22.15B. Terms of address of married women
22.15BL Add the term of address of a married woman if she is identified only by her hus-
band's name. Add the term after the last element of the husband's name.
Ward, Humphry, Mrs.
22.15B2. Include the enclitic ne attached to the names of some Hungarian married women.
Magyary, Zoltanne
Beniczkyne Bajza, Lenke
22.15C. Do not add other titles or terms associated with names entered under surname unless
they are required to distinguish between two or more persons with the same name and neither
dates nor fuller forms of name are available (see 22.19B).
22.16- ADDITIONS TO NAMES ENTERED UNDER GIVEN NAME, ETC.
22.16A. Royalty
22.16A1, Add, to the name of the person with the highest royal status within a state or peo-
ple, 15 a phrase consisting of a person's title (in English if there is a satisfactory English
equivalent) and the name of the state or people in English,
Clovis, King of the Franks
Anne, Queen of Great Britain
Elizabeth I, Queen of England
Ferdinand I, Holy Roman Emperor
Feisal II, King of Iraq
Maximilian, Emperor of Mexico
Victor Emmanuel II, King of Italy
Gustaf I Vasa, King of Sweden
John II Comnenus, Emperor of the East
Robert III, Duke of Burgundy
15. Persons with such highest status arc kings and queens, persons of imperiai rank (emperors and empresses), and persons
with other titles which denote such a status within a stale or people (grand-dukes, grand-duchesses, princes, princesses, etc.).
Rank is the only determining factor in applying these rules, not the degree of authority or power wielded by the person.
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-31
22.I6A2 HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
Ming T'ai-tsu, Emperor of China
Shuja~ud-daulah, Nawab Wazir of Oudh
22.16A2, Do not add other epithets associated with the name of such a person. Refer from
the name with the epithet(s),
Catherine II, Empress of Russia
x Catherine, the Great
Consfcantine I , Emperor of Rome
x Constantine, Saint
Edward, King of the English
x Edward, the Confessor, Saint
Charles IV, King of France
y. Charles, the Fair
Suleiman I, Sultan of the Turks
x Suleiman , the Magni fi cen t
Frederick I, Holy Roman Emperor
x Frederick, Barbarossa
22.16A3. Consorts of royal persons. Add, to the name of a consort of a person with the
highest royal status within a state or people, his or her title (in English if there is a satisfac-
tory English equivalent) followed by consort of [the name of the royal person as prescribed in
22.16A1].
Philip, Prince, consort of Elizabeth II, Queen of the
United Kingdom
Anne , Queen , consort of Louis XIII , King of France
Albert, Prince Consort, consort of Victoria , Queen of the
United Kingdom
(Mis title was Prince Consort)
Eleanor, of Aqui taine , Queen , consort of Henry II , King of
England
x Eleanor, Queen, consort of Henry II, King of England
22.16A4. Children and grandchildren of royal persons. Add, to the name of a child or
grandchild of a person with the highest royal status within a state or people, the title (in
English if there is a satisfactory English equivalent) borne by him or her.
Carlos, Prince of Asturias
Eulalia , Infanta of Spain
If such a child or grandchild is known only as Prince or Princess (or a similar title in English
or another language) without a territorial designation, add that title (in English if there is a
satisfactory equivalent) followed by:
a) another title associated with the name
or b) daughter of . , ., son of , . ., granddaughter of . or grandson of , . . [the
name and title of the parent or grandparent as prescribed in 22.16A1],
Mary, Princess Royal, Countess of Harewood
22-32
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.16C1
Arthur, Prince, son of Victoria , Queen of the United
Kingdom
Alexis Petrovich, Prince, son of Peter I, Emperor of
Russia
Alexandra, Princess , granddaughter of George V, King of
the Uni ted Kingdom
Anne, Princess Royal, daughter of Elizabeth II, Queen of
the United Kingdom
22.16B. Popes
22.16B1. Add Pope to a name identifying a pope.
Pius XII, Pope
Gregory I , Pope
not Gregory, Saint, Pope Gregory I
Gregory, the Great, Pope
Add Antipope to a name identifying an antipope.
Clement VI I , Antipope
22.16C. Bishops, etc.
22.16C1. If a bishop, cardinal, archbishop, metropolitan, abbot, abbess, or other high ecclesi-
astical official is identified by a given name, add the title (in English if there is a satisfactory
English equivalent). If the person has borne more than one such title, give the one of highest
rank.
Use Archbishop for all archbishops other than cardinals. Use Bishop for all bishops other
than cardinals. Use Chorepiscopus for persons so designated. Use Cardinal for cardinal-
bishops, cardinal-priests, and cardinal-deacons. Add to the title of a diocesan bishop or arch-
bishop or of a patriarch the name of the latest see, in English if there is an English form.
Bessarion, Cardinal
Dositheos , Patri arch of Jerusalem
Joannes, Bishop of Ephesus
Platon, Metropolitan of Moscow
John, Abbot of Ford
Arnaldus, Abbot of Bonneval
Ruricius I, Bishop of Limoges
Maximos V, Ecumenical Patriarch of Constantinople
If the name is of an ecclesiastical prince of the Holy Roman Empire, add Prince-Bishop,
Prince-Archbishop, Archbishop and Elector, etc., as appropriate, and the name of the see.
Add Cardinal also if appropriate.
Neithard, Prince-Bishop of Bamberg
Albert, of Brandenburg, Archbishop and Elector of Mainz,
Cardinal
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-33
22.16D
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.16D. Other persons of religious vocation
22.161)1. Add the title, term of address, etc.. in the vernacular to all other names of persons
of religious vocation entered under given name, etc. If there is more than one such term, use
the one that is most often associated with the name or is considered to be more important.
Use spellings found in English-language dictionaries. For Thai names in religion, see also
22.28D.
Maha vi j i t a vi , Thera
Angelico, fra
Nyana, Ledi Sayadaw
Claude, d' Abbeville , pere
Ta thagata , Bh i ksh u
Mary Loyola, Mother
Vi ve kananda, Swami
Dhammatinna , Ash in
If such a title, etc.. has become an integral part of the name, treat it as such.
KaJcushin-ni
not Kakushin, Ni
Podok Hwasang
not Poddk, Hwasang
Add also the initials of a Christian religious order if they are regularly used by the person.
Anselm, Brother, F.S.C.
Anselm, Brother, O.F.M.Cap.
Cuthbert, Father, O.S.F.C.
Mary Jeremy, Sister, O.P.
Additions to Distinguish Identical Names
22.17. DATES
22.17A. Add a person's dates (birth, death, etc. ) in the form given below as the last element
of a heading if the heading is otherwise identical to another.
Give dates in terms of the Christian era. Add B.C. when appropriate. Give dates from 1582
on in terms of the Gregorian calendar. 16
16. The Gregorian calendar was adopted in France, Italy, Portugal, and Spain in 1 5S2; by the Catholic states of Germany
in 1583; by the United Kingdom in 1752; by Sweden in 1753; by Prussia in 1774; and by the Russian Republic in 1918.
Convert dates from 1582 on from the Julian calendar to the Gregorian as set out in the following tables.
22-34
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.17A
Optionally, add date(s) to any personal name, even if there is no need to distinguish
between headings.
Smith ,
John,
1924-
Living person
Smith ,
John,
1900 Jan . 10- 1
nfwip vfivnt? vpnv
Smith,
John,
1900 Mar. 2- j
Smith ,
John,
1837-1396
Both years known
Smith,
John,
1836 or 7-1896
Year of birth uncertain; known to be one
Mo years
Smith ,
John,
1837?-1896
Probable year of birth
Smith,
John,
ca. 1837-1896
Year of birth uncertain by several years
Smith,
John,
1837-ca. 1896
Approximate year of death
Smith,
John,
ca. 1837-ca. 1896
Both years approximate
Smith,
John,
h. 1825
Year of death unknown
Smith ,
John,
d. 1859
Year of birth unknown
Johnson, Carl F . , fl. 1893-1940 \
Joannes, Diaconus , fl. 1226- J Years of birth and death unknown. Some
12 4Q years of activity known. Do not use ft.
dates within the twentieth century.
Joannes , Diaconus, 12 th cent. Years of birth and death unknown, years of
activity unknown, century known. Do not
use for the twentieth century.
Joannes, Actvarius , 13th/14th Years of birth and death unknown. Years of
cent • activity unknown, but active in both
centuries. Do not use for the twentieth
century.
Lin, Li, chin shin 1152 Date at which a Chinese literary degree was
conferred
Table I. The following days in December under the Julian calendar fail in January of the next year under the Gregorian
calendar:
YEAR (JULIAN)
1582-1699
1700-1799
1800-1899
1900-1999
DAYS (JULIAN)
Dec. 22-31
Dec. 21-31
Dec. 20-31
Dec. 19-31
Table II. The following days in the "old style" calendar used in the British Isles fall in the next later year tinder the
Gregorian calendar:
British Isles (except Scotland) and Colonies
Scotland
year (old style)
1582-1699
1700-1750
1751
DAYS (OLD STYLE)
Jan. 1-31
Feb. 1-28 [29]
Mar. 1-24
Dec. 22-31
Jan. 1-31
Feb. 1-28 [29]
Mar. 1-24
Dec. 22-31
Dec. 21-31
year (old style)
1582-1599
1600-1699
1700-1751
DAYS {OLD STYLE)
Jan. 1-31
Feb. 1-28 [29]
Mar. 1-24
Dec. 22-31
Dec. 22-31
Dec. 21-3}
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-35
22.18
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.18. FULLER FORMS
22.18A, If a fuller form of a person's name is known and if the heading as prescribed by the
preceding rules does not include all of that fuller form, add the fuller form to distinguish
between headings that are otherwise identical. Add all the fuller form of the inverted part of
the heading and/or the fuller form of the entry element, as appropriate. Enclose the addition
in parentheses.
The most common instances of such additions occur when the heading as prescribed by
the preceding rules contains initials and the spelled out form is known. Less common
instances occur when known forenames, surnames, or initials are not part of the heading as
prescribed.
Refer from the fuller form of the name when appropriate.
Smith, Russell E. (Russell Edgar)
x Smith, Russell Edgar
Smith, Russell E. (Russell Eugene)
x Smith, Russell Eugene
Johnson, A.H. (Allison Heartz)
x Johnson, Allison Heartz
Johnson, A.H. (Arthus Henry)
x Johnson, Arthus Henry
Murray, Gilbert (Gilbert George Aime)
x Murray, Gilbert George Aims
Murray, Gilbert (Gilbert John)
x Murray, Gilbert John
Allen, Richard (Alexander Richard)
x Allen, Alexander Richard
Allen, Richard (Richard Hugh Sedley)
x Allen, Richard Hugh Sedley
Johnson, Barbara (Barbara A.)
Johnson, Barbara (Barbara E.)
Miller, J. , Mrs. (Anna)
x Miller, Anna
Miller, J- , Mrs. (Dorothea)
x Miller, Dorothea
Optionally, make the additions specified above even if they are not needed to distinguish
between headings. However, when following this option, do not add:
unused forenames to headings that contain forenames
initials of names that are not part of the heading
unused parts of surnames to headings that contain surnames.
Lawrence, D.H. (David Herbert)
x Lawrence, David Herbert
H.D. (Hilda Doolittle)
x Doolittle, Hilda
22-36
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.19B1
Rodriguez H. , Guadalupe (Rodriguez Hernandez)
x Rodriguez Hernandez, Guadalupe
Gonzalez R, , Pedro F, (Pedro Felipe Gonzalez Rodriguez)
x Gonzalez Rodriguez, Pedro Felipe
Wanner, Joh. (Johann)
Beeton, Mrs. (Isabella Mary)
x Beeton, Isabella Mary
but
Welch, Denton
not Welch, Denton (Maurice Denton)
Dickens, Charles
not Dickens, Charles (Charles John Huffam)
Morgan , Percival
not Morgan, Percival (C. Percival)
Wilson, Angus
not Wilson, Angus (Angus Frank Johnstone-Wilson)
22.19. DISTINGUISHING TERMS
22.19A. Names in which the entry element is a given name, etc.
22.19A1, If neither a fuller form of name nor dates are available to distinguish between iden-
tical headings of which the entry element is a given name, etc., devise a suitable brief term
and add it in parentheses.
Johannes (Notary)
Thomas (Anglo-Norman poet)
22.19B. Names in which the entry element is a surname
22.19B1. If neither a fuller form of name nor dates are available to distinguish between iden-
tical headings of which the entry element is a surname, add a qualifier (e.g., term of honour,
term of address, title of position or office, initials of an academic degree, initials denoting
membership in an organization) that appears with the name in works by the person or in ref-
erence sources. Add the qualifier after the last element of the name.
Smith, John, Sir
Brown, George, Captain
Brown, George, F.l.p.s.
Brown, George, Rev.
Valmer, capitaine
Saur , Karl-Otto
Saur , Karl-Otto , Jr .
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-37
22.20
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
Do not use such a term if dates are available for one person and it seems likely that dates
will eventually be available for the other(s).
Mudge, Lewis Seymour, 1868-1945
Mudge, Lewis Seymour
{Name appears as: Lewis Seymour Mudge, Jr.)
22.20. UNDIFFERENTIATED NAMES
22.20A. If no suitable addition (fuller form of name, dates, or distinguishing term) is avail-
able, use the same heading for all persons with the same name.
Muller, Heinrich
80 Fotos unci eine kurze Einfuhrung in die Lage,
Geschichte, und Sehenswurdigkei ten der Stadt Giessen
Muller, Heinrich
Der Diebstahl im Urheberrecht
Muller, Heinrich
Die Fussballregeln und ihre richtige Auslegung
Muller, Heinrich
Historische Waf Fen
Muller, Heinrich
Die Repser Burg
Special Rules for Names in Certain Languages
22.21. INTRODUCTORY RULE
22.21A. The preceding rules in this chapter give general guidance for personal names not
written in the roman alphabet and for names in a non-European language written in the
roman alphabet. For more detailed treatment of names in certain of these languages, follow
the special rules given below. For more detailed treatment of names in other languages, see
the IFLA UBCIM Programme's survey of personal names. 17
17. Names of Persons ; National Usages for Entry in Catalogues I IFLA Universal Bibliographic Control and Internationa!
MARC Programme. — 4th rev. anii enl. ed. — MQnchen : K.G. Saur, 1996.
22-38
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.22C1
22.22. NAMES IN THE ARABIC ALPHABET 18
22.22A. Scope
22.22A1. Apply this rule only to names (regardless of their origin) originally written in the
Arabic alphabet that do not contain a surname or a name performing the function of a sur-
name. In case of doubt, assume that a name of a person active in the twentieth century
includes a surname (see 22.5) and that other names do not.
22.22B. Entry clement
22.22B1, Enter a name made up of a number of elements under the element or combination
of elements by which the person is best known. Determine this from reference sources. When
there is insufficient evidence available, enter under the first element. Refer from any part of
the name not used as entry element if there is reason to believe that the person's name may
be sought under that part. Refer as necessary from variant romanizations (see 22.3C).
22.22C. Essential elements
22.22C1. If the entry element is not the given name (ism) or a patronymic derived from the
name of the father (a name usually following the given name and compounded with ibn),
include these names unless they are not customarily used in the name by which the person is
known. Include an additional name, descriptive epithet, or term of honour that is treated as
part of the name if it aids in identifying the individual. Generally omit other elements of the
name, particularly patronymics derived from anyone other than the father.
18. Major reference sources for names wriLtert in the Arabic alphabet and their treatment (note that romanizatton practices
in these sources differ):
Babinger, Franz. Die Geschichtsschreiber der Osmanen und Hire Werke I mit einem Anhang, Osmanische
Zeitrechnungen von Joachim Mayr. — Leipzig : Harrassowitz, 1927.
Brockelmann, Carl. Geschichte der arabischen Literamr. — 2, den Supplementbanden angepasste
Aufl. — Leiden : Brill, 1943-1949. — 1.-3. Supple mentband: Leiden : Brill, 1937-1942.
Caetani, Leone. Onomasticon Arabicttm I compilato per cura tii Leone Caetani e Giuseppe
Gabrieli. — Roma : Casa editrice italiana, 1915.
The Encyclopaedia of Islam . . . I prepared by a number of leading orientalists ; edited by M, Th.
Houtsma ... [et al.]. — Leyden : Brili, 1913-1934. — Supplement: Leiden : Brill, 1938.
The Encyclopaedia of Islam I prepared by a number of leading orientalists. — New ed. / edited by an
editorial committee consisting of H. A. R. Gibb ... [et al.]. — Leiden : Brill, 1960-
islam ansiklopedisi : Islam atemi cografya, etnografya ve biyografya lugati / Beynelmilel Akadcmiler
Birliginin yardimi ve tamnmis miistesriklerin istiraki ile nesredenler M. Th. Houtsma ... [et al.J,
— Istanbul ; Maarif Matbaasi, 1940-
Philologiae Turcicae Fundamenta . . . I una cum praestantibus Turcologis ediderunt Jean Deny ...
[et al.]. — Aquis Mattiacis : Steiner, 1959-
Sezgin, Puat, Geschichte des arabischen Schrifttums. — Leiden : Brill, 1967-
Storey, Charles Ambrose. Persian Literature : A Bio-bibliographical Suwey. — London : Luzac, 1927-
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-39
22.22D HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.22D. Order of elements
22.22D1. When the elements of the name have been determined, place the best-known ele-
ment or combination of elements first. Give the other elements in the following order: khitab,
kunyah, ism, patronymic, any other name. Insert a comma after the entry element unless it is
the first part of the name.
KHITAB (honorific compound of which the last part is typically al-DTn)
Rashid al-DIn Tablb
Sadr al-DIn al-QunawS, Muhammad ibn Ishaq
x Muhammad ibn Ishaq al-Qunawi, Sadr al-Din
x al-Qunawi, Sadr al-Din Muhammad ibn Ishaq
KUNYAH (typically a compound with Abu as the first word)
Abu al-Barakat Hibat Allah ibn 'All
x Hibat Allah ibn 'All, Abu al-Barakat
Abu Hayyan al-Tawhidi, 'All ibn Muhammad
x al-Tawhidi, Abu Hayyan 'All ibn Muhammad
x 'All ibn Muhammad, Abu Hayyan al-Tawhidi
Abu Hu ray rah
ISM (given name)
'All ibn Abi Talib, Caliph
Sashshar ibn Burd
Malik ibn Anas
Nashwan ibn Sa'ld al-Himyari
x al-Himyari, Nashwan ibn Sa'id
Tana Husayn
x Husayn, Taha
Muhammad Isma^il Panipati
x Panipati, Muhammad Isma'il
Ghulam Hasan Khuyihami
x Khuyihami, Ghulam Hasan
Nadirah Khatun
x Khatun, Nadirah
PATRONYMIC (typically a compound with Ibn as the first word)
Ibn Hisham, 'Abd al-Malik
x 'Abd al-Malik ibn Hisham
Ibn Hazm, 'All ibn Ahmad
x 'All ibn Ahmad ibn Hazm
Ibn Sana' al~Mulk, Hibat Allah ibn Ja'far
x Hibat Allah ibn Ja'far ibn Sana' al-Mulk
22-40
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.23A
Ibn al-Mu'tazz, 'Abd Allah
x 'Abd Allah ibn al-Mu'tazz
Ibn al-Muqaffa\ 'Abd Allah
x 'Abd Allah ibn al-Muqaffa'
OTHER NAMES
Laqab (descriptive epithet)
al-Jahiz, 'Amr ibn Bahr
x 'Mir ibn Bahr al-Jahiz
Abu Shamah, 'Abd al-Rahman ibn Isma'il
x *Abd al-Rahman ibn Isrna'il Abu Shamah
al~Katib al-Isfahani, 'Imad al-Din Muhammad ibn Muhammad
x Muhammad ibn Muhammad al-Katib al-Isfahani, 'Imad al-Din
x al-Isfahani, v Imad al-Din Muhammad ibn Muhammad al-Katib
al-Qadi al-Fadil, *Abd al-Rahim ibn 'Ali
x 'Abd al-Rahim, ibn 'All al-Qadi al-Fadil
Mirza Khan Ansari
x Ansari, Mirza Khan
Nisbah (proper adjective ending in T, indicating origin, residence, or other
circumstances)
al-Bukhari, Muhammad ibn Isma'il
x Muhammad ibn Isma'Il al-Bukhari
Mazandarani, *Abd Allah ibn Muhammad
.v 'Abd Allah ibn Muhammad Mazandarani
v Abbasi, 'Ali Ahmad
x 'All Ahmad 'Abbasi
Hilali, Muhammad Khan Mir
x Muhammad Khan Mir Hilali
Takhallus (pen name)
Qa'ani, Habib Allah shirazi
x Habib Allah Shirazi Qa'ani
'Ibrat, Zafar Hasan
x Zafar Hasan l Ibrat
22.23. BURMESE AND KAREN NAMES
22.23A. Enter a Burmese or Karen name that includes a Western given name preceding the
vernacular name(s) under the vernacular name(s). Transpose the Western name to the end.
Hla Gyaw, James
(Name: James Hla Gyaw)
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-41
22.23B
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.23B. Add the term of address that usually accompanies a Burmese or Karen name. Add
also any other distinguishing terms generally associated with the name. If the name of the
same person is found with different terms of address, use the term of highest honour. Distin-
guish terms of address from the same words used as names.
Ba U, U
Chit Mating, Saw
Mya Sein, Daw
Saw, U
U Shan Mating, Maung
Kaing, Katie, Naw
HI a, Ludu U
Ba Yin, Hanthawaddy U
22.24. CHINESE NAMES CONTAINING A NON-CHINESE GIVEN NAME
22.24A. If a name of Chinese origin contains a non-Chinese given name and the name is
found in the order [non-Chinese given name] [surname'] [Chinese given names], enter the
name as [surname], [non-Chinese given name] [Chinese given names]. Enter all other names
as instructed in 22.5.
Loh, Philip Fook Seng
(Nome appears as: Philip Loh Fook Seng)
22.25. INDIC NAMES
22.25A. Early names
22.25A1. Enter an Tndic name borne by a person who flourished before the middle of the
nineteenth century under the first element of the personal name, ignoring honorifics and reli-
gious terms of address that may precede it {e.g., Shri (Sri), Swami, Acharya, Muni, Bhikkhu).
For such terms as integral parts of names, see below. Do not include the enclitic -ji (or -jee)
sometimes added to the personal element of the name.
Kali das a
Panini
Isvara Kaula
Na rmada s hank ar La 1 s ha nka r
Enter the name of an ancient or medieva! Sanskrit author or an author (usually Jain) of a
Prakrit text under the Sanskrit form of the name. Refer from any significantly different form.
Aryabhata
x Arya Bhata
22-42
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.25B2
Asvaghosa
x Assaghosa
x Ashwa Ghoshu
x Agvaghosha
Bhattoji Diksita
Karnapura
Include a title (e.g., Shri (Sri), Swami, Sastri, Acharya, Bhatta, Saraswati, Muni, Gani) as
an integral part of the name if it usually appears with the name in reference sources.
Narain Swami
S ank ar aca r y a
Srlharsa
Sridharasvamin
but Raroanu j a
(Sometimes appears as: RamanujacSrya)
Enter the name of a Buddhist author of a Pali text under the Pali form of the name. Refer
from any significantly different form.
Dhammakitti
x Dharmakirti
Nanamoli, Bhikkhu
22.25B. Modern names
22.25B1. With the exceptions specified in 22.25B2-22.25B3, enter an Indie name of a person
flourishing after the middle of the nineteenth century under the surname or the name that the
person is known to have used as a surname. If diere is no surname, enter under the last name.
Dutt, Romesh Chunder
Krishna Menon, V.K.
Singh, Indrajit
(For Sikh names ending in Singh, see 22.25B3)
Das Gupta, Hemendra Nath
Shastri, 19 Lai Bahadur
22.25B2. Kannada, Malayalam, Tamil, and Telugu names. If a name in one of these lan-
guages does not contain a surname or a name known to have been used by the person who
bears the name as a surname, enter under the given name. Given names in these languages
are normally preceded by a place name and occasionally by the father's given name and may
be followed by a caste name.
Kirusna Ayyankar, Tittai
(Given name: Kirusna)
(Caste name: Ayyankar)
(Place name: Tittai)
19. Sastri (Shastri) is sometimes used as a surname, sometimes as a religious title, sometimes as an appendage to a
personal name, and sometimes as a reinforcement to another surname.
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-43
22.25B3
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
Sankaran Nair, C.
(Given name: Sankaran)
(Caste naive: Nair)
(House name: C. (Chettur))
Josaph , O . P .
(Given name: Josaph)
(Initials of place name and of father's given name: O.P. (Oorakath Paul))
Radhakrishnan, S.
(Given name: Radhakrishnan)
(initial of place name: S. (Sarvepalli))
22.25B3. Sikh names. Enter the Sikh name of a person who does not use Singh or Kaur as a
surname under the first of his or her names (the given name).
Amrit Kaur
Mehtab Singh
22.25B4. Religious names. Enter a modern person of religious vocation (whether Hindu,
Buddhist, or Jain) under the religious name. Add the religious title.
Chinmayananda , Swami
Ramana, Maharshi
Punyavi jaya, Muni
Sangharakshita, Bhikshu
22.26. INDONESIAN NAMES
22.26A. Scope
22.26A1. Apply this rule to names of Arabic, Chinese, Dutch, Indie, Javanese, Malayan,
Sumatran, or other origin.
22.26B. Entry element
22.26B1. With the exceptions specified in 22.26C-22.26F, enter an Indonesian name consist-
ing of more than one element under the last element of the name. Refer from the name in
direct order unless the first element is a European name.
Hatta , Mohammad
(Compound given name )
x Mohammad Hatta
Djajadiningrat , Idrus Nasir
(Given name plus surname)
x Idrus Nasir Djajadiningrat
Pu r ba t j a r ak a , Purnadi
(Given name plus father's name)
x Purnadi Purbat j araka
22-44
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.26C1
Nasution, Amir Hamzah
(Given name plus clan name )
x Amir Hamzah Nasution
Ginarsa, Ktut
(Balinese name containing an element indicating seniority of children )
x Ktut Ginarsa
Djelantik, I Gusti Ketiat
(Balinese name)
x I Gusti Ketut Djelantik
x Gusti Ketut Djelantik, I
x Ketut Djelantik, I Gusti
Sani, Sitti Nuraini
(Married woman's name; last element may be the husband's or the father's name)
x Sitti Nuraini Sani
22.26C. Names entered under the first element
22.26C1. Enter the following categories of names under the first element of the name. Refer
from the last element. If that element is an initial, refer also from the next to the last element.
a) A name consisting of a given name followed by an element denoting filial relationship
(e.g., bin, binti, ibni) plus the father's name.
Abdullah bin Nuh
x Nuh, Abdullah bin
S . bin Umar
x Umar, S. bin
b) A name that may be written as one word or as separate words and that begins with one
of the following elements; Adi, Budi (Boedi), Joko (Djoko), Karta, Kusuma
(Koesoema), Mangku (Mangkoe), Nolo, Prawira, Pura (Poera), Sastra, Sri, Surya
(Soerya, Surja, Suria), and Tri. (If the name of a particular person sometimes appears
as one word and sometimes as separate words, use the one-word form.)
Adi Waskifco
x Waskito, Adi
Adisendja ja
Sri Muljono
x Muljono, Sri
c) A name containing an initial or abbreviation as the last element.
Djakaria N.E.
x E . , Djakaria H.
AACR2 Revision 2002
22-45
22.26D
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.26D. Names consisting of given name(s) plus adat title
22.26DL Enter a name that inciudes one or more of the terms gelar (sometimes abbreviated
as gl. or gir.), Daeng, Datuk, or Sutan under the element introduced by such words. Refer
from the name in direct order.
Palindih, Rustam Sutan
x Rustam Sutan Palindih
Batuah, Ahmad gelar Datuk
x Ahmad gelar Datuk Batuah
Radjo Endah, Sjamsuddin Sutan
x Sjamsuddin Sutan Radjo Endah
x Endah, Sjamsuddin Sutan Radjo
22.26E. Names containing place names
22.26E1. Enter a name consisting of personal names followed by a place name under the
element preceding the place name. Treat the place name as an integral part of the name.
Abdullah Udjong Buloh
Daud Beureuh, Muhammad
22.26F. Names of Chinese origin
22.26F1. Enter a name of Chinese origin that follows the normal Chinese order (surname
first) under the first element of the name. Refer from the last element of the name.
Lim, Yauw Tjin
(Name appears as: Lim Yauw Tjin)
.v Tjin, Lim Yauw
Oei, Tjong Bo
(Name appears as: Oei Tjong Bo)
x Bo, Oei Tjong
22.26G. Titles 20
22.26G1. Add titles and honorific words to an Indonesian name as instructed in 22.12A.
Refer from the direct form of title plus name.
Purbat j araka , Raden Mas Ngabei
x Raden Mas Ngabei Purbatjaraka
20. The following list of Indonesian titles and honorific words is incomplete as only some of the more commonly used
titles are listed, A few variant spellings are also noted.
adipati
anak agung (or agoeng) gde
anak agung (or agoeng) isiri
andi
aria (arja, arya, arjo, aryo,
ardjueh, arjueh)
damk (datoek, dato, datok)
desak
dewa gde (or gede)
gusti (goesti)
gusti aju (gusti ayu, goesti
ajoe)
gusti gde (goesti gede)
hadji (haji)
ide (ida)
ide aju (ide ayu, ide ajoe)
ide bagus (ide bagoes)
imam
marah
mas
ngabei (ngabehi, rtgabeui)
nganten
pangeran
pedanda
22-46
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.27A1
Refer from the direct form of title plus name even when the title is not used in the
heading.
Amrullah, Abdul Malik Karim
x Hadji Abdul Malik Karim Amrullah
x Abdul Malik Karim Amrullah
Distinguish titles used as such from the same words adopted by a person as elements of his
or her name. When in doubt, treat the words as a title.
Rusli, Marah
(Title Marah used as a personal name )
x Marah Rusli
Djuanda, H.
(Name and title hadji Djuanda appears as: Dr. H. Djuanda)
x Djuanda, Hadji
x Hadji Djuanda
22.27. MALAY NAMES
22.27A. Scope
22.27AL Apply this rule to Malay names, including names of Arabic origin beginning with
the element al-, borne by persons living in Malaysia, Singapore, or Brunei, Apply this rule
also to names from other ethnic groups native to Malaysia such as Ibans, Kadazans, etc.
Enter a name from an ethnic group of non-Malay origin (e.g., Indian, Chinese) borne by a
person living in one of these countries according to the rules for the language of the name.
raden
radcn adjeng (or ajeng)
radcn aju (or ayu)
raden aria (or urya)
raden mas
raden nganten
raden pandji (or panji)
raden roro
radja {raja)
ratu (ratoe, ratoh)
sidi
siti
sultan (soeltan)
su suli u nan (socsoehoenan)
sutan (soetan)
tengku {tungku, teuku,
teungku)
tjokorde (cokorde)
tjokorde (or cokorde) gde
tjokorde (or cokorde) istri
tubagus (or toebagoes)
tumenggung (toemenggoeng)
tunku (toenkoe)
Gelar, meaning "titled," often precedes an Indonesian title. Do not use the following terms of address in headings:
bung (boeng) — brother, when used as a term of respect
empu (mpu) — mister
engku (ungku)— mister
entjik (encik che, cntje, inche, tje) — mister or mistress
ibu (boe, bu T iboe) — mother, when used as a term of respect
njonja ( yon ya)— mistress
nona — miss
pak (pa') — father, when used as a term of respect
tuan (toean) — mister
wan — mister
AACR2 Revision 2002-. 2004 Update
22-47
22.27B
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.27B. General rule
22.27B1, Enter a Malay name under the first element of the name and refer from the last
element unless it is known that the bearer of the name treats another element of the name as a
surname. In that case, enter under the surname and refer from the first element.
A. Samad Said
y. Said, A. Samad
Re jab F.I.
x I. , Re jab F.
Shahnon Ahmad
x Ahmad, Shahnon
Luat anak Jabu
x Jabu , Luat anak
A. L. Bunggan
x Bunggan, A.L.
William Duncan
(Full name: William Duncan anak Ngadan)
x Duncan, William
x Ngadan, William Duncan anak
but
Merican, JTaridah
(Surname: Merican)
x Far idah Merican
Nichol , Linda
(Surname: Nichol)
x Linda Nichol
22.27C. Filial indicators
22.27C1. Omit words or abbreviations denoting filial relationship 2 ! unless consistently used
by the person.
Adibah Amin
(Sometimes appears as: Khalidah Adibah binti Haji Amin)
but
Abdullah Sanusi bin Ahmad
Siti Norma bte. Ahmad
21. Words denoting filial relationship are:
anak (a., ak, or ak.>— child of
bin (b.) — son of
binfe (bte.)— daughter of
binti (bt.)— daughter of
ibni— son of (royalty)
22-48
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.27D1
22.27C2. If the filial relationship is shown beyond one generation, include only the first
unless more are required to distinguish between names that are otherwise identical.
Ali bin Ahmad
{Name appears as: Ali bin Ahmad bin Hussein)
x Ahmad, Ali bin
x Ali bin Ahmad bin Hussein
x Hussein, Ali bin Ahmad bin
22.27D. Titles 32
22.27D1. Add after the name titles of honour, rank, or position that are commonly associated
with the name. Refer from the direct form of title plus name.
Abdul Majid bin Zainuddin, Haji
x Haji Abdul Majid bin Zainuddin
x Zainuddin, Haji Abdul Kajid bin
Hamzah Sendut, Tan Sri Datuk
x Tan Sri Datuk Hamzah Sendut
x Sendut, Tan Sri Datuk Hamzah
Iskandar bin Raja Muhammad Zahid, Raja
x Raja Iskandar bin Raja Muhammad Zahid
x Zahid, Raja Iskandar bin Raja Muhammad
22. Conferred titles commonly used are:
I8AN TITLES:
TITLES OF HONOUR
Tuai Serang
Tuai Kayau
Kepala Manok Sabong
Manok Sabong
Kepala Pugu Menoa
Tuai Menoa
Orang Kaya
Orang Kaya Panglima
Orang Kaya Pemanca
Orang Kaya Temenggong
Patinggi
Temenggong
Radin/Raden
Pateh/Patih
TITLES OF OFFICE
Penghulu Dal am
Pengarah
Penghulu
Mandal
Tuai ru mail
RELIGIOUS TITLES
Kepala Lemambang
Saw Lemambang
Lemambang
Manang Bali
Manang Mansau
Manang Mcngeris
MALAY TITLES;
TITLES OF HONOUR
Dato'/Datin
Da£o' Adika Raja/Datin
Dato' Amar Diraja/Datin
Dato' Wira Jaya/Datin
Dato' Sen Utama/Datin
Datuk/Datin
Datuk Scri/Datin Sen
Pehin Orang Kaya Ratna Diraja
Pengiran Bint
Tan Sri/Puan Sri
Tun/Toh Puan
TITLES OF OFFICE
Batin
RELIGIOUS TITLES
Bilal
Cikgu
Haji/Hajjah
Datuk Mendika Menteri Akhirulzaman
Datuk Seria Mahkota Lela Pahlawan
Penggawa
Penghulu
Sultan/Suntanah
Tengku Bcsar Tampin
Undang Luak
Yang di Pertuan Agong/Raja Permaisuri Agung
Imam
Khatib
Lebai
Mufti
Siak
Ustaz/Ustazah
AACR2 Revision 2002". 2004 Update
22-49
22.28
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.28. THAI NAMES
22.28A. General rule
22.28A1. Enter a Thai name under the first element. Refer from the last element, which is
normally a surname. 23 Omit a term of address (e.g., Khun, Nai, Nang, Nangsao) unless it is a
title of nobility. In case of doubt, include it.
Dhanit Yupho
x Yupho, Dhanit
Prayut Sitthiphan
x Sitthiphan, Prayut
S. Bannakit
x Bannakit, S.
Maenmas Chavalit
x Chaval it, Maenmas
22.28B. Royalty
22.28B1. Make additions to the name of a king or queen of Thailand (and of a consort of a
king or queen) as instructed in 22.16A.
Bhuitiibol Adulyade j , King of Thailand
Chulalongkorn, King of Siam
Saowapha, Queen, consort of Chulalongkorn, King of Siam
Thapthim, Chaochgrnmanda , consort of Chulalongkorn, King of
Siam
22.28B2. Enter the name of a person of royal descent under the first element of the name, or
latest name, that he or she uses. Add Prince or Princess for those of the ranks Chaofd and
Phra'ong Chao. Use M.C., M.R., and M.L. for Mgm Chao, Mgm Ratchawong, and Mgm
Luuang, respectively. If the person also bears a krom rank, do not add it. Refer from any
earlier names, together with associated ranks and tides, borne by the person.
Damrongrachamiphap , Prince
x DitsawQnkuman, Prince
Seni Pramo j , M.R.
x Pramoj, Seni, M.R.
x Pramot, Seni, M.R.
22.28C. Nobility (Khunnang)
22.28C1. Enter a name containing a title of nobility under that title in the vernacular (ratch-
athinanam). If a person has more than one title, enter under the latest. Add the given name,
when ascertainable, in parentheses. Add the vernacular rank (yot bandasak) associated with
the title. Refer from the given name, from the surname, and from any earlier titles borne by
the person.
23. Surnames became a legal requirement for most persons in 1915.
22-50
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
22.28D3
Prachakitkprachak (Cham) , Phraya
x ChSm Bunnak
x Bunnak, Cham
PrachakitkQrachak (Chup) , Phraya
x Chup ^Osathanon
x 'Osathanon, Chup
Thammasakmontrl {Sanan) , Chaophraya
x Sanan Thephatsadin Na ^Ayutthaya
22.28C2. Enter the name of the wife of a man beat ing a title of nobility under her own name,
followed by the husband's title and the wife's conferred rank, if any.
Sangxam PhrasadetsurentharathibQdl , Thanphuying
22.28D. Buddhist monastics, ecclesiastics, and patriarchs
22.28D1. Monastics. Enter the name of a Buddhist monastic under the Pali name in religion
unless the monastic is better known under the given name. Add Phikkhu to a Pali name in
religion. If the monastic is better known under the given name, enter under the given name
and add the rank (samanctsak) Phra Maha or Phra Khrii. In the latter case, refer from the
Pali name in religion if known.
Thammasaro , Phikkhu
Khleo, Phra Maha
x Thammathinno, Phikkhu
22.28D2. Ecclesiastics. Enter the name of a Buddhist ecclesiastic under the latest title. Add
the given name in parentheses. Add also any word indicating rank. Refer from the distinctive
word in the title, from the given name, and from the surname.
Phra Thamroathatsanathgn (Thpngsuk)
x ThammathatsanathQn (ThQngsuk) , Phra
x ThQngsuk Suthatso
x Suthatso, ThQngsuk
x Thgmgsuk Chantharakhachon
x Chantharakhachgn, Thpngsuk
x Sutsasa, Thera
22.28D3. Supreme patriarchs. Enter the name of a supreme patriarch who is a commoner
under the given name. Add Supreme Patriarch to the name. Refer from the surname and from
any earlier names or titles by which the person is identified.
Plot, Supreme Patriarch
x Phra Wannarat (Plot) , Somdet
x Phra PhrommunI (Plot)
x Phra *Ariyawongsakhatayan (Plot) , Somdet
x Plot Kittisophon
x Kittisophon, Plot
x Kittisophano, Mahathera
x Wannarat (Plot) , Somdet Phra
x PhrommunI (Plot), Phra
x 'Ariyawongsakhatayan (Plot), Somdet Phra
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
22-51
22.28D3
HEADINGS FOR PERSONS
Enter the name of a supreme patriarch of royal descent under the conferred name. Add the
secular and ecclesiastical titles in that order. Refer from any earlier names or titles by which
the person is identified.
Wachirayanawong , Prince, Supreme Patriarch
x Chu'n Nopphawong, M.R.
x Nopphawong, Chu'n, M.R.
x Phra Sukhunkhanaphcjn (Chu'n, M.R.)
x Phra Yanwaraphpn (Chu'n, M.R.)
x SukhunkhanaphQn (Chu'n, M.R.) , Phra
x Yanwaraphgn (Chu'n, M.R.) , Phra
22-52
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
CHAPTER
Geographic Names
Contents
23.1 INTRODUCTORY NOTE
23.2 GENERAL RULES
23. 2A English form
23.2B Vernacular Form
23.3 CHANGES OF NAME
23.4 ADDITIONS
2 3. 4 A Punctuation
23.4B Genera] rule
23. 4C Places in Australia, Canada, Malaysia, United States, U.S.S.R., or Yugoslavia
23.4D Places in the British Isles
23.4E Other places
23.4F Further additions
23.5 PLACE NAMES INCLUDING OR REQUIRING A TERM INDICATING A TYPE OF
JURISDICTION
23.1. INTRODUCTORY NOTE
23JA. The names of geographic entities (referred to throughout this chapter as "places") are
used to distinguish between corporate bodies with the same name (see 24.4C); as additions to
other corporate names (e.g., conference names, see 24.7B4); and, commonly, as the names of
governments (see 24.3E) and communities that are not governments.
AACR2 Revision 2002
23-1
23.2
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES
23.2. GENERAL RULES
23.2A. English form
23.2A1. Use the English form of the name of a place if there is one in general use. Determine
this from gazetteers and other reference sources published in English-speaking countries. In
case of doubt, use the vernacular form (see 23. 2B).
Austria
not Osterreich
Copenhagen
not K0benhavn
Florence
not Firenze
Ghent
not Gent
Gand
Sweden
not Sverige
If the English form of the name of a place is the English name of the government that has
jurisdiction over the place, use that form.
Onion of Soviet Socialist Republics
not Soiuz Sovetskikh Sotsialisticheskikh Respublik
Russia
23.2B. Vernacular form
23.281. Use the form in the official language of the country if there is no English form in
genera! use.
Buenos Aires
Gorlovka
Tallinn
Livorno
not Leghorn
(English form no longer in general use)
If the country has more than one official language, use the form most commonly found in
English-language sources.
Louvain
not Leuven
Helsinki
not Helsingfors
23-2
AACR2 Revision 2O02
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES
23.4C2
23.3. CHANGES OF NAME
23.3A. If the name of a place changes, use as many of the names as are required by:
I) the rules on government names (24 .3E) (e.g., use Nyasaland or Malawi, as
appropriate)
or 2) the rules on additions to corporate names (24.4C4) and conference names
(24.7B4) (e.g., use Leopoldville or Kinshasa, as appropriate)
or 3} other relevant rules in chapter 24.
23.4. ADDITIONS
23.4A. Punctuation
23.4A1. Make all additions to place names used as entry elements (see 24.3E) in parentheses.
Budapest (Hungary)
If the place name is being used as an addition, precede the name of a larger place by a
comma.
Magyar Nemzeti Galeria (Budapest, Hungary)^
23.4B. General rule
23.4B1. Add to the name of a place (other than a country or a state, etc., listed in 23.4C1 or
23.4D1) the name of a larger place as instructed in 23.4C-23.4R For additional instructions
on distinguishing between place names used as the headings for governments, see 24.6. For
instructions on abbreviating some place names used as additions, see B.14.
23.4C. Piaces in Australia, Canada, Malaysia, United States, U.S.S.R., or Yugoslavia
23.4C1. States, etc. Do not make any addition to the name of a state, province, territory, etc.,
of Australia, Canada, Malaysia, the United States, the U.S.S.R., or Yugoslavia.
Northern Territory
Prince Edward Island
District of Columbia
23.4C2. Other places. If the place is in a state, province, territory, etc., of one of the coun-
tries listed above, add the name of the state, etc., in which it is located.
Darwin (N.T.)
Jasper (Alta . )
George Town (Penang)
Cook County (111. )
Alexandria (Va . )
1. This example and the one above are included solely to show the punctuation patterns. For the construction of the head-
ing, see the later rules in this chapter and those in chapter 24.
AACR2 Revision 2002
23-3
23.4D
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES
Washington (D.C.)
Kiev (Ukraine)
Split (Croatia)
23.4D. Places in the British Isles
23.4D1. Do not make any addition to the names of the following parts of the British Isles:
England, the Republic of Ireland, Northern Ireland, Scotland, Wales, the Isle of Man, the
Channel Islands,
23-4D2. If a place is located in England, the Republic of Ireland, Northern Ireland, Scotland,
Wales, the Isle of Man, or the Channel Islands, add England, Ireland, Northern Ireland, Scot-
land, Wales, Isle of Man, or Channel Islands, as appropriate.
Dorset (England)
Pinner (England)
Clare (Ireland)
Waterville ( Ireland)
Bangor (Northern Ireland)
Strathclyde (Scotland)
Melrose (Scotland)
Powys (Wales )
Bangor (Wales)
Ramsey (Isle of Man)
Jersey (Channel Islands)
23.4E. Other places
23.4E1. Add to the name of a place not covered by 23.4C-23.4D the name of the country in
which the place is located.
Formosa ( Argen tina)
Luanda (Angola)
Lucca (Italy)
Madras (India)
Monrovia (Liberia)
Nsesby (Denmark)
Paris (France)
Toledo (Spain)
23-4
AACR2 Revision 2002
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES
23.5A
23.4F. Further additions
23.4F1. Distinguishing between otherwise identical place names. If the addition of a larger
place as instructed in 23.4C-23.4E is insufficient to distinguish between two or more places
with the same name, include a word or phrase commonly used to distinguish them.
Villaviciosa de Asturias (Spain)
Villaviciosa de Cordoba (Spain)
If there is no such word or phrase, give the name of an appropriate smaller place before
the name of the larger place.
Friedberg (Bavaria , Germany)
Friedberg (Hesse , Germany)
Tarbert (Strathclyde, Scotland)
Tarbert (Western Isles, Scotland)
Basildon (Essex, England)
Basildon (Berkshire, England)
Saint Anthony (Hennepin County, Minn.)
Saint Anthony (Stearns County, Minn,)
23.4F2. Identifying places. If considered necessary to identify the place (as in the case of a
community within a city), give the name of an appropriate smaller place before the name of
the larger place specified as an addition by the preceding rules.
Hyde Park (Chicago, 111.)
Chelsea (London, England)
Everton (Liverpool, England)
St. Peter Port (Guernsey, Channel Islands)
Hataitai (Wellington, N.Z.)
Palermo (Sicily, Italy)
Swansea (Toronto, Ont.)
11" Arrondis semen t (Paris, France)
Minato-ku (Tokyo, Japan)
23.5. PLACE NAMES INCLUDING OR REQUIRING A TERM INDICATING A TYPE
OF JURISDICTION
23.5A. If the first part of a place name is a term indicating a type of jurisdiction and the place
is commonly listed under another element of its name in lists published in the language of the
country in which it is located, omit the term indicating the type of jurisdiction,
Kerry (Ireland)
not County Kerry (Ireland)
AACR2 Revision 2002
23-5
23.5B
GEOGRAPHIC NAMES
Ostholstein (Germany)
not Kreis Ostholstein (Germany)
In all other cases, include the term indicating the type of jurisdiction.
Citta di Castello (Italy)
Ciudad Juarez (Mexico)
District of Columbia
Distrito Federal (Brazil)
Mexico City (Mexico)
23,5B. If a place name does not include a term indicating a type of jurisdiction and such a
term is required to distinguish that place from another of the same name, follow the instruc-
tions in 24.6.
23-6
AACR2 Revision 2002
CHAPTER
d
BfflWBB
w
Headings for Corporate Bodies
Contents
24. 1 GENERAL RULE
24. IB Rom animation
24. 1C Changes of name
24.2 VARIANT NAMES. GENERAL RULES
24.3 VARIANT NAMES. SPECIAL RULES
24. 3 A Language
24. 3 B Language. International bodies
24.3C Conventional name
24.3Ci General rule
24.3C2 Ancient and international bodies
24.3C3 Autocephaious patriarchates, archdioceses, etc.
24.3D Religious orders and societies
24. 3E Governments
24. 3F Conferences, congresses, meetings, etc.
24.3G Local churches, etc.
Additions, Omissions, and Modifications
24.4 ADDITIONS
24. 4 A General rule
24.4B Names not conveying the idea of a corporate body
24. 4C Two or more bodies with the same or similar names
24.4C1
24.4C2
24.4C3
24.4C4
24.4C5
24.4C6
24.4C7
Genera! rule
Names of countries, states, provinces, etc.
Local place names
Change of name of jurisdiction or locality
Institutions
Year(s)
Other additions
24.5
OMISSIONS
24.5A
Initial articles
AACR2 Revision 2002
24-1
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24. SB Citations of honours
24. 5C Terms indicating incorporation and certain other terms
24.6 GOVERNMENTS. ADDITIONS
24.7 CONFERENCES, CONGRESSES, MEETINGS, ETC.
24. 7A Omissions
24.7B Additions
24.7B1 General rule
24.7B2 Number
24.7B3 Date
24.7B4 Location
24.8 EXHIBITIONS, FAIRS, FESTIVALS, ETC.
24. 8A Omissions
24. 8B Additions
24.9 CHAPTERS, BRANCHES, ETC.
24.10 LOCAL CHURCHES, ETC.
24. 1 1 RADIO AND TELEVISION STATIONS
Subordinate and Related Bodies
24.12 GENERAL RULE
24.13 SUBORDINATE AND RELATED BODIES ENTERED SUB ORD IN ATELY
24.14 DIRECT OR INDIRECT SUBHEADING
Special Rules
24.15 JOINT COMMITTEES, COMMISSIONS, ETC.
24. 16 CONVENTIONALIZED SUBHEADINGS FOR STATE AND LOCAL ELEMENTS
OF UNITED STATES POLITICAL PARTIES
Government Bodies and Officials
24.17 GENERAL RULE
24.18 GOVERNMENT AGENCIES ENTERED SUB ORDIN ATELY
24.19 DIRECT OR INDIRECT SUBHEADING
Special Rules
24.20 GOVERNMENT OFFICIALS
24.20A Scope
24.20B Heads of state, etc.
24-2
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.1A
24.20C Heads of governments and of international intergovernmental bodies
24.20D Governors of dependent or occupied territories
24.20E Other officials
24.21 LEGISLATIVE BODIES
24.22 CONSTITUTIONAL CONVENTIONS
24.23 COURTS
24.23A Civil and criminal courts
24.23B Ad hoc military courts
24.24 ARMED FORCES
24.24A Armed forces at the national level
24.24B Armed forces below the national level
24.25 EMBASSIES, CONSULATES, ETC.
24.26 DELEGATIONS TO INTERNATIONAL AND INTERGOVERNMENTAL BODIES
Religious Bodies and Officials
24.27 RELIGIOUS BODIES AND OFFICIALS
24.27A Councils, etc., of a single religious body
24.27B Religious officials
24.27C Subordinate bodies
24.27C1 General rule
24.27C2 Provinces, dioceses, synods, etc.
24.27C3 Catholic dioceses, etc.
24.27C4 Central administrative organs of the Catholic Church (Roman Curia)
24.27D Papal diplomatic missions, etc.
24.1. GENERAL RULE
24.1 A, Enter a corporate body 1 directly under the name by which it is commonly identified,
except when the rules that follow provide for entering it under the name of a higher or related
body (see 24.13) or under the name of a government (see 24.18).
Determine the name by which a corporate body is commonly identified from items issued
by that body in its language (see also 24, 3 A), or, when this condition does not apply, from
reference sources. 2
If the name of a corporate body consists of or contains initials, omit or include full stops
and other marks of punctuation according to the predominant usage of the body. In case of
doubt, omit the full stops, etc. Do not leave a space between a full stop, etc., and an initial
1. For definition, see 21 .IB 1 .
2. Reference sources, as used in this chapter, includes books and articles written about a corporate body.
AACR2 Revision 2002
24-3
24.1A
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
following it. Do not leave spaces between the letters of an initialism written without full
stops, etc.
Make references from other forms of the name of a corporate body as instructed in 26.3.
3 October -Vereeniging
Aerodromo de Puerto Juarez
As lib
Breitkopf & Hartel
British Museum
Carnegie Library of Pittsburgh
Challenger Expedition ... 3
Chartered Insurance Institute
Colin Buchanan and Partners
Ecole centrale lyonnaise
G. Mendel Memorial Symposium, 1865-1965 ...
Help the Aged (Canada)
Lambeth Conference . . .
Light Fantastic Players
M. Robert Goraberg Memorial Committee
MED COM
Museum of American Folk Art
Padding ton Chamber of Commerce
Radio Society of Great Britain
Real Academia de Bellas Artes de San Jorge
Royal Aeronautical Society
St , An nen -Museum
Symposium on Cognition . . .
United States Catholic Conference
University of Oxford
W.H. Ross Foundation for the Study of Prevention of
Blindness
World Methodist Conference . . .
Yale University
3. For additions to the name of a conference, congress, expedition, etc., see 24. 7B.
24-4
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.2A
24.1B. Romanization 4
24.1B1. If the name of the body is in a language written in a nonroman script, romanize the
name according to the table for that language adopted by the cataioguing agency. Refer from
other romanizations as necessary.
Chung-kuo wen tzu kai ko wei yuan hui s
x Zhongguo wenzi gaige weiyuanhui
Institut mezhdunarodnykh otnoshenii
Keihanshin Kyuko Dentetsu Rodo Kumiai
24.1C. Changes of name
24.1CI. If the name of a corporate body has changed (including change from one language to
another), establish a new heading under the new name for items appearing under that name.
Refer from the old heading to the new and from the new heading to the old (see 26.3C).
Pennsylvania State University
The name of the Farmers' High School was changed in 1862
to Agricultural College of Pennsylvania; in 1874 to
Pennsylvania State College; in 1953 to Pennsylvania State
University .
Works by this body are entered under the name used at
the time of publication ,
Make the same explanatory reference under the other names
National Association for the Study and Prevention of
Tuberculosis
For works by this body, see also the later heading:
National Tuberculosis Association
National Tuberculosis Association
For vforks by this body, see also the earlier heading:
National Association for the Study and Prevention of
Tuberculosis
24.2. VARIANT NAMES. GENERAL RULES
24.2A. Apply this rule if a body uses variant names in items issued by it. Apply the special
rules in 24.3 as well when they are appropriate.
4. Alternative ride. Romanization. If the name of the body is in a language written in a nonroman script and a romanized
form appears in items issued by the body, use that romanized form. Refer as necessary from other romanizations. If more than
one romanized form is found, use the form resulting from romanization according to the tabic adopted by the cataloguing
agency for the language.
Zhongguo wenzi gaige weiyuanhui
x Chung-k-jo wen tzu kai ko wei yiian hvii
5. Systematic romanizations used in the examples in this chapter follow the tables (published by the Library of Congress
in Cataloging Service, bulletin 118- ) adopted jointly by the American Library Association, the Canadian Library
Association, and the Library of Congress.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
24-5
24.2B
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.2B. If variant forms 6 of the name are found in items issued by the body, use the name as it
appears in the chief sources of information (see I. OA) as opposed to forms found elsewhere
in the items.
24.2C. If variant spellings of the name appear in items issued by the body, use the form
resulting from an official change in orthography or, if this does not apply, use the predomi-
nant spelling. In case of doubt, use the spelling found in the first item catalogued.
24.2D. If variant names appear in the chief source of information, use the name that is pre-
sented formally. If no name is presented formally, or if all names are presented formally, use
the predominant form of name.
If there is no predominant form, use a brief form (including an initialism or an acronym)
that would differentiate the body from others with the same or similar brief names.
AFL-CIO
not American Federation of Labor and Congress of Industrial
Organizations
American Philosophical Society
not American Philosophical Society Held at Philadelphia for
Promoting Useful Knowledge
Eur a torn
not European Atomic Energy Community
Kung ch'ing t'uan
not Chung-kuo kung ch'an chu i ending nien t'uan
Mary knoll Sisters
not Congregation of the Maryknoll Sisters
Rateksa
not Radiobranchens tekniske og kommercielle sammenslutning
Unesco
not United Nations Educational, Scientific, and Cultural
Organization
If the variant forms do not include a brief form that would differentiate two or more bodies
with the same or similar brief names, use the form found in reference sources or the official
form, in that order of preference.
Metropolitan Applied Research Center
(Official name. Brief form sometimes used by the center, MARC Corporation, is
the same as the name of another body located in Me^v York)
6. Variant forms do not include names that the body has abandoned in the past or adopted in the future. For these, see
24.1C.
24-6 AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.3B1
24.3. VARIANT NAMES. SPECIAL RULES
24.3A. Language 7
24.3AL If the name appears in different languages, use the form in the official language of
the body.
Societe historique franco-americaine
not Franco-American Historical Society
If there is more than one official language and one of these is English, use the English
form.
Canadian Committee on Cataloguing
not Cornite canadien de catalogage
If English is not one of the official languages or if the official language is not known, use
the form in the language used predominantly in items issued by the body.
Schweizerische Landesbibliothek
not Biblioteca nazionale svizzera
Bibliotheque nationale suisse
(German is the language used predominantly by the body in its publications)
In case of doubt, use the English, French, German, Spanish, or Russian form, in this order
of preference. If there is no form in any of these languages, use the form in the language that
comes first in English alphabetic order. Refer from form(s) in other languages.
24.3B. Language. International bodies
24.3B1. If the name of an international body appears in English on items issued by it, use the
English form. In other cases, follow the instructions in 24.3A,
Arab League
not Union des etats arabes
Jami^at al-Duwal al- "Arablyah
European Economic Community
not Communaute economique europeenne
Europese Economische Gemeenschap
[etc. ]
7. Alternative rule. Language. Use a form of name in a language suitable to the users of the catalogue if the body's name
is in a ianguage that is not familiar to those users.
Japan Productivity Center
if not Ninon Seiaansei Hombu
Onion of Chambers of Commerce, Industry, and Commodity Exchanges o£
Turkey
if no! Tiirkiye Ticaret Odalazri, Sanayi Odalari ve Ticaret Boraalan Birli§i
AACR2 Revision 2002
24-7
24.3C
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
International Federation of Library Associations and
Institutions
not Federation internationale des associations de
bibliothecaires et des bibliotheques
Internationale^ Verband der Bibliothekarischen Vereine und
Institutionen
Mezhdunarodnaia federatsiia bibliotechnykh assotsiatsii i
Nordisk husholdningsh0jskole
{Name appears in Danish, Finnish, Icelandic, Nowegian, and Swedish)
not Nordisk husholdsh0gskole
Nordiska hushallshogskolan
Norraenn busysluh&skdli
Pohjoismainen kotitalouskorkeakoulu
24.3C. Conventional name
24.3C1. General rule. If a body is frequently identified by a conventional form of name in
reference sources in its own language, use this conventional name.
Westminster Abbey
not Collegiate Church of St. Peter in Westminster
Kun s t akademi e t
not Kongelige Akademi for de skanne kunster
Kongelige Danske kunst akademi
24.3C2. Ancient and international bodies. 8 If the name of a body of ancient origin or of
one that is international in character has become firmly established in an English form in
English language usage, use this English form.
Benedictines
Casablanca Conference . . .
Cluniacs
Coptic Church
Council of Nicaea . . .
Franciscans
Freemasons
Knights of Malta
8. Apply this rule, for example, to religious bodies, fraternal and knightly orders, church councils, and diplomatic
conferences, if it is necessary to establish a heading for a diplomatic conference that has no formal name and has not yet
acquired a conventional name, use the name found most commonly in periodica] articles and newspaper accounts in English.
If another name becomes established later, change the heading to that name.
uchrezhdenii
[etc.]
not
Nordic Association for American Studies
Nordisk selskap for Amerikastudier
Nordiska sallskapet for Amerikastudier
[etc.]
24-8
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.3D1
Nestorian Church
Paris Peace Conference . . .
Poor Clares
Royal and Select Masters
Royal Arch Masons
Vatican Council . . .
24.3C3. Autocephaious patriarchates, archdioceses, etc. Enter an ancient autocephalous
patriarchate, archdiocese, etc., of the Eastern Church under the place by which it is identified.
Add a word or phrase designating the type of ecclesiastical jurisdiction.
Antioch (Jacobite patriarchate)
Antioch (Orthodox patriarchate)
Constantinople (Ecumenical patriarchate)
Cyprus (Archdiocese )
24.3D. Religious orders and societies
24.3D1. Use the best-known form of name, in English, if possible, for a religious order or
society. In case of doubt, follow this order of preference:
a) the conventional name by which its members are known in English
b) the English form of name used by units of the order or society located in English-
speaking countries
c) the name of the order or society in the language of the country of its origin.
Franciscans
not Ordo Fratrum Minorum
Order of St. Francis
Minorites
[etc.]
Jesuits
not Societas Jesu
Compafiia de Jesus
Society of Jesus
[etc.]
Poor Clares
not Order of St.
Clarisses
Second Order
Franciscans .
Minoresses
[etc.]
Brothers of Our Lady of the Fields
Community of the Resurrection
Dominican Nuns of the Second Order of Perpetual Adoration
not Dominicans. Second Order of Perpetual Adoration
Clare
of St . Francis
Second Order
AACR2 Revision 20O2
24-9
24.3E
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
Dominican Sisters of the Perpetual Rosary
Sisters of Divine Providence
not Sceurs de la divine providence
Society of Christ the King
Third Order Regular of St. Francis
not Franciscans. Third Order Regular
Third Order Secular of St. Francis
not Franciscans. Third Order Secular
Divine Consciousness Light Society
not Hare Krishna Society
Zgromadzenie Sluzebnic Najswi^tszej Maryi Panny
24.3E. Governments
24.3E1. Use the conventional name of a government, 9 unless the official name is in common
use. The conventional name of a government is the geographic name (see chapter 23) of the
area (e.g., country, province, state, county, municipality) over which the government exercises
jurisdiction. See also 24.6.
France
not Republique francaise
Yugoslavia
not Socijalisticka Federativna Republika Jugoslavija
[etc.]
Massachusetts
not Commonwealth of Massachusetts
Nottinghamshire ( England )
not County of Nottingham
Arlington (Mass. )
not Town of Arlington
If the official name of the government is in common use, use it.
Greater Anchorage Borough (Alaska)
24.3F. Conferences, congresses, meetings, etc.
24.3F1. If, among the variant forms of a conference name appearing in the chief source of
information, there is a form that includes the name or abbreviation of the name of a body
associated with the meeting to which the meeting is not subordinate, use this form.
FAO Hybrid Maize Meeting . . .
If, however, the name is of a body to which the meeting is subordinate (e.g., the annual
meeting of an association), see 24.I3A, type 6.
9. Government is used here to mean the totality of corporate bodies (executive, legislative, and judicial) exercising the
powers of a jurisdiction. Treat as a government agency a corporate body known as government, or its equivalent in other
languages, or a term with similar meaning, that is an executive element of a particular jurisdiction (see 24.18),
24-10
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.3G1
24.3F2. If a conference has both a specific name of its own and a more general name as one
of a series of conferences, use the specific name.
Symposium on Protein Metabolism . . .
not Nutrition Symposium ...
Symposium on Endocrines and Nutrition . . .
not Nutrition Symposium . . .
24.3G. Local churches, etc.
24.3G1. If variant forms of the name of a local church, cathedral, monastery, convent, abbey,
temple, mosque, synagogue, etc., appear in the chief source of information of items issued by
the body, use the predominant form. If there is no predominant form, follow this order of
preference:
a) a name containing the name of the person(s), object(s), place{s), or event(s) to which
the local church, etc., is dedicated or after which it is named
All Saints Church . . .
Chapelle Saint-Louis . . .
Church of the Holy Sepulchre . . .
Duomo di Santa Maria Matricolars . . .
Jami 1 , Amr ibn al- v As . . .
Horyuji . . .
St. Clement's Church ...
St. Paul's Cathedral ...
Temple Emanu-El . . .
Visitation Monastery . . .
b) a name beginning with a word or phrase descriptive of a type of local church, etc,
Abtei Reichenau
Great Synagogue . . .
Jiidische Reformgemeinde in Berlin
Monasterio de Clarisas . . .
Parish Church of Limpsfield
Unitarian Universalist Church . . .
c) a name beginning with the name of the piace in which the local church, etc., is situated.
Anerley Society of the New Church
Beechen Grove Baptist Church . . .
English River Congregation of the Church of the Brethren
Kolner Dom
Tenafly Presbyterian Church
AACR2 Revision 2002
24-11
24.4
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
Westover Church . . .
Winchester Cathedral
For additions to the name of a local church, etc., see 24.10.
Additions, Omissions, and Modifications
24.4. ADDITIONS
24.4A. General rule
24.4A1. Make additions to the name of a corporate body as instructed in 24.4B-24.4C.
For additions to special types of corporate bodies (e.g., governments, conferences), see
24.6-24.1 1. Enclose in parentheses all additions required by rules in this chapter.
24.4B. Names not conveying the idea of a corporate body
24.4B1. If the name alone does not convey the idea of a corporate body, add a general desig-
nation in English.
Apollo 11 {Spacecraft)
Bounty (Ship)
Elks (Fraternal order)
Friedrich Witte (Firm)
24.4C. Two or more bodies with the same or simitar names
24.4C1. General rule. If two or more bodies have the same name, or names so similar that
they may be confused, add a word or phrase to each name as instructed in 24.4C2-24.4C7.
Add such a word or phrase to any other name if the addition assists in the understanding of
the nature or purpose of the body.
Do not include the additions to names of places prescribed in 24.6 when the names of
these places are used to indicate the location of corporate bodies.
24.4C2. Names of countries, states, provinces, etc. If a body has a character that is national,
state, provincial, etc., add the name of the country, state, province, etc., in which it is located.
Republican Party (II J.)
Republican Party (Mo. )
Sociedad Nacional de Mineria {Chile)
Sociedad Nacional de Mineria ( Peru )
Governor's Highway Safety Program (N.C.)
Governor's Highway Safety Program {Vt.)
National Measurement Laboratory {U.S. )
Midlands Museum {Zimbabwe )
If such an addition does not provide sufficient identification or is inappropriate (as in the
case of national, state, provincial, etc., universities of the same name serving the same coun-
try, state, province, etc.), follow the instructions in 24.4C3-24.4C7.
24-12
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.4C5
24.4C3. Local place names. In the case of any other body, add the name of the local place,
whether it is a jurisdiction or not, that is most commonly associated with the name of the
body, unless the name of an institution, the date(s) of the body, or other designation {see
24.4C5-24.4C7) provides better identification.
Salem College (Salem, W. Va . )
Salem College {Winston-Salem, N.C.)
Washington County Historical Society {Washington County,
Ark. )
Washington County Historical Society [Washington County,
Md. )
Ecole francaise de papeterie (Grenoble, France)
(School is located in St. Martin d'Heres, an incorporated suburb of Grenoble, but
more closely associated with Grenoble )
St. Barnabas Church of England School {Bradwell, England)
St. Peter's Church {Hook Norton, England)
St. Peter's Church (Sudbury, England)
Red Lion Hotel {Newport , Wales)
Red Lion Hotel (Newport, Isle of Wight, England)
Red Lion Hotel (Newport, Shropshire , England)
If further distinction is necessary, give the name of a particular area within the local place
before the name of the local place.
St . John' s Church ( George town , Washington , D . C . )
St. John's Church {Lafayette Square, Washington, D.C.)
24.4C4. Change of name of jurisdiction or locality. If the name of the local jurisdiction or
geographic locality changes during the lifetime of the body, add the latest name in use in the
lifetime of the body.
St. Paul Lutheran Church (Skokie, 111.)
not St. Paul Lutheran Church (Niies Center, 111.)
{Church founded in 188}. Place name changed in 1940)
but Historisk samfund (Christiania , Norway)
{Ceased to exist before Christiania became Oslo)
24.4C5. Institutions. Add the name of an institution instead of the local place name if the
institution's name is commonly associated with the name of the body. Give the name of the
institution in the form and language used for it as a heading.
Newman Club {Brooklyn College)
not Newman Club {Brooklyn, New York, N.Y.)
Newman Club (University of Maryland)
not Newman Club {College Park, Md. )
Center for Radiation Research {National Measurement
Laboratory {U.S. ) )
AACR2 Revision 2002
24-13
24.4C6
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
Institut geologii {Akademiia nauk SSSR. Komi filial)
Institut geologii {Akademiia nauk SSSR. Karel'skii filial)
24.4C6. Year(s). If the name has been used by two or more bodies that cannot be distin-
guished by place, add the year of founding or the inclusive years of existence.
Scientific Society of San Antonio (1892-1894 )
Scientific Society of San Antonio (1904- )
24.4C7. Other additions. If none of the place name, name of institution, or date(s) is suffi-
cient or appropriate for distinguishing between two or more bodies, add an appropriate gen-
eral designation in English.
Church of God (Adventist)
Church of God {Apostolic)
24.5. OMISSIONS
24.5A. Initial articles
24.5A1, Omit an initial article (see Initial Articles, appendix E) unless the heading is to file
under the article (e.g., a corporate name that begins with an article that is the first part of the
name of a person or place),
Frangais de Grande-Bretagne (Association)
not Les Frangais de Grande-Bretagne {Association)
Library Association
not The Library Association
Blaue Adler (Association)
not Der Blaue Adler (Association)
Norske Nobel ins titutt
not Det Norske Nobelinstitutt
but
Le Corbusier Sketchbook Publication Committee
Los Angeles Symphony (Orchestra)
24.5B. Citations of honours
24.5B1. Omit a phrase citing an honour or order awarded to the body.
Moskovskaia gosudarstvennaia konservatoriia imeni P.I.
Chaikovskogo
not Moskovskaia gosudarstvennaia ordena Lenina konservatoriia
imeni P.I. Chaikovskogo
Moskovskii khudozhestvennyi akademicheskii teatr
not Moskovskii khudoshestvennyi ordena Lenina i Trudovogo
krasnogo znaineni akademicheskii teatr
24-14
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.5C4
24.5C. Terms indicating incorporation and certain other terms
24.5C1. Omit an adjectival term or abbreviation indicating incorporation (e.g., Incorporated,
E.V., Ltd.) or state ownership of a corporate body, and a word or phrase, abbreviated or
in full, designating the type of incorporated entity (e.g., Aktiebolaget, Gesellschaft mix
beschrankter Haftung, Kabushiki Kaisha, Societa per azione), unless it is an integral part of
the name or is needed to make it clear that the name is that of a corporate body.
American Ethnological Society
{Without Inc.)
Automobiltechnische Gesellschaft
{Without E.V.)
Daiwa Gink o
(Without Kabushiki Kaisha)
Thiiringisches Kunstf aserwerk "Hilhelm Pieck"
(Without VEB)
but
Compania Internacional Editora
(Without S.a.)
Films Incorporated
Nihon Genshiryoku Hatsuden Kabushiki Kaisha
Peter Davies Limited
Vickers (Aviation) Limited
24.5C2. If such a term is needed to make it clear that the name is that of a corporate body
and it occurs at the beginning of the name, transpose it to the end.
Elektrometall , Aktiebolaget
not Aktiebolaget Elektrometall
Hochbaupro j ektierung Karl-Marx-Stadt, VEB
not VEB Hochbauprojektierung Karl-Marx-Stadt
24.5C3, Omit an initial word or phrase in an oriental language indicating the private charac-
ter of a corporate body (e.g., Shiritsu, Ssu li), unless the word or phrase is an integral part of
the name.
Tan-chiang Ying yii chuan k'o hsiieh hsiao
not Ssu li Tan-chiang Ying yii chuan k v o hsiieh hsiao
but Shiritsu Daigakti Toshokan Ky6kai
24.5C4. Omit abbreviations (e.g., U.S.S., H.M.S.) occurring before the name of a ship.
Ark Royal {Ship)
not H.M.S . Ark Royal
AACR2 Revision 2002
24-15
24.6
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.6. GOVERNMENTS. ADDITIONS
24.6A. Scope
24.6A1. Apply this rule to the names of governments that are not differentiated by the appli-
cation of 23.4. Make the further additions prescribed here following a space, colon, space,
and within the same parentheses that enclose the additions prescribed by 23.4.
24.6B, Add the type of jurisdiction in English if other than a city or a town. If there is no
English equivalent for the vernacular term, or in case of doubt, use the vernacular term.
Cork (Ireland)
Cork (Ireland : County)
Darmstadt ( Germany )
Darmstadt (Germany ; Landkreis)
Darmstadt {Germany : Regierungsbezirk)
Guadalajara (Mexico )
Guadalajara (Spain )
Guadalajara (Spain : Province)
Lublin (Poland)
Lublin (Poland : Voivodeship)
New York (N. l r . )
New York (State)
Quebec (Province)
Quebec (Quebec)
Quebec (Quebec : County)
Resifca (Romania )
Resi^a (Romania : Raion)
24.6C. If the type of jurisdiction does not provide a satisfactory distinction, add an appropri-
ate word or phrase.
Germany (Democratic Republic)
Germany (Federal Republic)
Berlin (Germany ; East)
Berlin (Germany ; West )
24.6D. If two or more governments lay claim to jurisdiction over the same area (e.g., as with
occupying powers and insurgent governments), add a suitable designation to one or each of
the governments, followed by the inclusive years of its existence,
France
France (Territory under German occupation , 1940-1944)
24-16
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.7B4
Algeria
Algeria (Provisional government, 1958-1962)
24.7. CONFERENCES, CONGRESSES, MEETINGS, ETC.
24. 7A. Omissions
24.7A1. Omit from the name of a conference, etc. (including that of a conference entered
subordinately, see 24.13), indications of its number, frequency, or year(s) of convocation.
Conference on Co-ordination of Galactic Research . , .
not Second Conference on Co-ordination of Galactic
Research . . .
Louisiana Cancer Conference . . .
not Biennial Louisiana Cancer Conference . . .
Analogies Symposium . . .
not 1986 Analogies Symposium ...
24.7B. Additions
24.7B1. General rule. Add to the name of a conference, etc. (including that of a conference
entered subordinately, see 24.13), the number of the conference, etc, (if appropriate), the
year(s), and the place(s) in which it was held. Separate these elements by a space, colon,
space.
24.7B2. Number. If a conference, etc., is stated or inferred to be one of a series of numbered
meetings of the same name, add the ordinal numeral in its English form (see C.8A).
Conference of British Teachers of Marketing at Advanced
Level ( 3rd ; . . . )
If the numbering is irregular, do not add it. Optionally, provide an explanation of the irreg-
ularities in a note or an explanatory reference.
24.7B3. Date. If the heading is for a single meeting, add the year or years in which the con-
ference, etc., was held.
Conference on Library Surveys (1965 : ..-)
Conference on Technical Information Center Administration
(3rd ; 1966 : . . . )
Study Institute on Special Education {1969-1970 : ...}
Add specific dates if necessary to distinguish between two or more meetings held in the
same year.
Conference agricole interallied (1st : 1919 Feb. 11-15 :
. - . )
Conference agricole interalliee (2nd : 1919 Mar. 17-19 :
...)
24.7B4. Location. Add the name of the local place or other location (institution, etc) in
which the conference, etc., was held. Give a local place name in the form prescribed in
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
24-17
24.7B4
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
chapter 23. Give any other location in the nominative case in the language and form in which
it is found in the item being catalogued.
Symposium on Glaucoma (1966 : New Orleans, La.)
Konferentsiia po pochvovedeniiu i fiziologii kul'turnykh
rastenii (1937 : Saratovskii universitet)
Workshop Conference on the Role of the Director of Medical
Education in the Hospital (1959 : Chicago, 111.)
Regional Conference on Mental Measurements of the Blind
(1st : 1951 : Perkins Institution)
Louisiana Cancer Conference (2nd : 1958 : New Orleans,
La. )
International Conference on Atmospheric Emissions from
Sulphate Pulping {1966 : Sanibel Island, Fla. )
International Conference on the Biology of Whales (1971 :
Shenandoah National Park)
Conference "Systematica of the Old World Monkeys" {1969 :
Burg Wartenstein)
Conference on Cancer Public Education (1973 : Dulles
Airport )
If the heading is for a series of conferences, etc, do not add the location unless all were
held in the same place.
Hybrid Corn Industry Research Conference
If the location is part of the name of the conference, etc., do not repeat it.
Arden House Conference on Medicine and Anthropology
(1961)
Paris Symposium on Radio Astronomy (1958)
If the sessions of a conference, etc., were held in two locations, add both names.
World Peace Congress (1st : 1949 : Paris, France, and
Prague, Czechoslovakia )
Institute on Diagnostic Problems in Mental Retardation
{1957 : Long Beach State College and San Francisco State
College )
If the sessions of a conference, etc., were held in three or more locations, add the first
named place followed by etc.
International Conference on Alternatives to War {1982 :
San Francisco, Calif., etc.)
24-18
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.10B
24.8. EXHIBITIONS, FAIRS, FESTIVALS, ETC.
24.8A. Omissions
24.8A1. As instructed in 24.7A1, omit from the name of an exhibition, fair, festival, etc.,
word(s) that denote its number.
24.8B. Additions
24.8B1. As instructed in 24.7B, add to the name of an exhibition, fair, festival, etc., its num-
ber, date, and location. Do not add the date and/or location if they are integral parts of the
name,
Biennale di Venezia (36th : 1972)
World's Columbian Exposition (1893 : Chicago, 111.)
Expo 67 (Montreal, Quebec)
24.9. CHAPTERS, BRANCHES, ETC.
24.9A. If a chapter, branch, etc., entered subordinate^ (see 24.13), carries out the activities of
a corporate body in a particular locality or within a particular institution, add the name of the
locality or institution, unless it is part of the name of the chapter, branch, etc.
Freemasons. Concordia Lodge, No, 13 (Baltimore, Md.)
Freemasons. United Grand Lodge (England)
Knights Templar (Masonic order) . Grand Commandery (Me- )
Scottish Rite (Masonic order) . Oriental Consistory
(Chicago, 111 . )
Psi Upsilon (Fraternity). Gamma Chapter (Amherst College)
Society of St. Vincent de Paul. Conference 10 {Cathedral of
St. John the Baptist : Savannah , Ga . )
but
American Heart Association. Illinois Affiliate
American Red Cross. Champaign County Chapter
24.10. LOCAL CHURCHES, ETC.
24.I0A. If the name of a local church, etc., does not convey the idea of a church, etc., add a
general designation in English.
Monte Cassino (Monastery )
24.10B. Add to the name of a local church, etc., the name of the place or local ecclesiastical
jurisdiction (e.g., parish, Pfarrei) in which it is located (see 24.4C3-24.4C4), unless the loca-
tion is clear from the name itself.
All Saints Church (Birchington , England)
10. Conference is used by this body as the generic word for its local units.
AACR2 Revision 2002
24-19
24.11
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
St. Mary (Church : Aylesbury Vale, England)
Visitation Monastery (Waldron , England)
Westover Church (Charles City County, Va . )
St. James' Church (Bronx, New York, N.Y.)
Twin City Bible Church {Urbana, 111.)
Finnish Lutheran Church of Canberra
If there are two or more local churches, etc., with the same name in the same locality, add
a further suitable designation.
St. James ' Church (Manhattan, New York, N. Y. : Catholic)
St. James' Church (Manhattan, New York, N. Y. : Episcopal )
24.11. RADIO AND TELEVISION STATIONS
24.11A. If the name of a radio or television station consists solely or principally of its call
letters or if its name does not convey the idea of a radio or television station, add Radio
station or Television station and the name of the place in which the station is located.
HVJ (Radio station : Vatican City)
MCIA (Television station ; Champaign, 111. )
24.11B. Add to the name of any other radio or television station the place in which it is
located unless the name of the place is an integral part of the name of the station.
Radio Maroc (Rabat, Morocco)
but Radio London
Subordinate and Related Bodies
24.12. GENERAL RULE
24.12A. Enter a subordinate body (other than a government agency entered under jurisdic-
tion, see 24.18) or a related body directly under its own name (see 24.1-24.3) unless its name
belongs to one or more of the types listed in 24,13. Refer to the name of a subordinate body
entered directly from its name in the form of a subheading of the higher body (see 26.3A7).
An sco
x General Aniline and Film Corporation . Artsco
Association of College and Research Libraries
x American Library Association. Association of College
and Research Libraries
BBC Symphony Orchestra
x British Broadcasting Corporation. Symphony Orchestra
Bodleian Library
x University of Oxford. Bodleian Library
24-20
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.13A
Congregation of the Most Holy Name of Jesus
x Dominican Sisters. Congregation of the Most Holy Name
of Jesus
Crane Theological School
x Tufts University. Crane Theological School
Faculdade de Teologia de Lisboa
x Universidade Cat61ica Portuguese. Faculdade de
Teologia de Lisboa
Friends of IBBY
x International Board on Books for Young People. Friends
Harvard Law School
x Harvard University. Law School
24.13. SUBORDINATE AND RELATED BODIES ENTERED SUBORDINATELY
24.13A. Enter a subordinate or related body as a subheading of the name of the body to
which it is subordinate or related if its name belongs to one or more of the following types. 1 1
Make it a direct or indirect subheading as instructed in 24.14. Omit from the subheading the
name or abbreviation of the name of the higher or related body in noun form unless the omis-
sion would result in a heading that does not make sense.
TYPE I. A name containing a term that by definition implies that the body is part of
another (e.g.. Department. Division, Section, Branch).
British Broadcasting Corporation. Engineering Division
International Federation of Library Associations and
Institutions. Section on Cataloguing
Stanford University. Department of Civil Engineering
TYPE 2. A name containing a word that normally implies administrative subordination
(e.g., Committee, Commission) provided that the name of the higher body is required for the
identification of the subordinate body.
Association of State Universities and Land-Grant Colleges .
Committee on Traffic Safety Research and Education
International Council on Social Welfare. Canadian
Committee
Timber Trade Federation of the United Kingdom. Statistical
Co-ordinating Committee
National Association of Insurance Commissioners .
Securities Valuation Office
University of Hales. University Commission
(Name: University Commission)
but National Commission on United Methodist Higher Education
1 1. Distinguish cases in which the subordinate body's name includes the names of higher bodies from cases in which the
names of higher bodies appear only in association with the subordinate body's name.
AACR2 Revision 2002
24-21
24.13A
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
TYPE 3. A name that is general in nature or that does no more than indicate a geographic,
chronological, or numbered or lettered subdivision of a parent body.
American Dental Association, Research Institute
(Name: Research Institute)
Bell Telephone Laboratories. Technical Information Library
(Name: Technical Information Library)
Sondley Reference Library. Friends of the Library
(Name: Friends of the Library)
American Institute of Architects. Utah Society
(Name: Utah Society)
Canadian Jewish Congress. Central Region
(Nome: Central Region)
California Home Economics Association. Orange District
(Name: Orange District)
International Labour Organisation. European Regional
Conference (2nd : 1968 : Geneva, Switzerland)
(Name: Second European Regional Conference)
Dartmouth College. Class of 1980
(Name: Class of 1980)
Knights of Labor. District Assembly 99
(Name: District Assembly 99)
U.S. Customs Service. Region IX
(Name: Region IX)
In case of doubt, enter the body directly.
Human Resources Centre (London, England)
x Tavistock Institute of Human Relations. Human
Resources Centre
Research and Training Institute
a- Human Resources Center {Albertson, N.Y.). Research
and Training Institute
TYPE 4. A name that does not convey the idea of a corporate body.
British Library. Collection Development
(Name: Collection Development)
Bell Canada, Corporate Public Relations
(Name: Corporate Public Relations)
TYPE 5. A name of a university faculty, school, college, institute, laboratory, etc., that
simply indicates a particular field of study.
Princeton University. Bureau of Urban Research
Syracuse University, College of Medicine
24-22
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.14A
University College London. Communication Research Centre
University of London, School of Pharmacy
TYPE 6. A name that includes the entire name of the higher or related body.
American Legion. Auxi 1 iary
(Name: American Legion Auxiliary)
Auburn University. Agricultural Experiment Station
(Name: Agricultural Experiment Station of Auburn University)
Friends of the Earth. Camden Friends of the Earth
(Name: Camden Friends of the Earth)
Labour Party (Great Britain). Conference (72nd ; 1972 :
Blackpool , England)
(Name: 72nd" Annual Conference of the Labour Party)
(Activity of the Labour Party limited to Great Britain )
United Methodist Church (U.S. ) . General Conference
(Name: General Conference of the United Methodist Church)
University of Southampton. Mathematical Society
(Name: Mathematical Society of the University of Southampton)
University of Vermont. Choral Union
(Name: University of Vermont Choral Union)
Yale University. Library
(Name: Yale University Library)
but BBC Symphony Orchestra
not British Broadcasting Corporation, Symphony Orchestra
24.14. DIRECT OR INDIRECT SUBHEADING
24.14A. Enter a body belonging to one or more of the types listed in 24.13 as a subheading
of the lowest element in the hierarchy that is entered under its own name. Omit intervening
elements in the hierarchy unless the name of the subordinate or related body has been, or is
likely to be, used by another body entered under die name of the same higher or related body.
In that case, interpose the name of the lowest element in the hierarchy that will distinguish
between the bodies.
Public Library Association . Audiovisual Commi ttee
Hierarchy: American Library Association
Public Library Association
Audiovisual Committee
American Library Association. Cataloging and
Classification Section . Policy and Research Committee
Hierarchy: American Library Association
Resources and Technical Services Division
Cataloging and Classification Section
Policy and Research Committee
AACR2 Revision 2002
24-23
24.15
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
American Library Association, .Resources and Technical
Services Division . Board of Directors
Hierarchy: American Library Association
Resources and Technical Services Division
Board of Directors
Refer from the name in the form of a subheading of the name of its immediately superior
body when the heading does not include the name of that superior body (see 26.3A7).
American Library Association. Committee on Outreach
Programs for Young Adults (Ad Hoc)
Hierarchy: American Library Association
Young Adult Services Division
Committee on Outreach Programs for Young Adults (Ad Hoc)
x American Library Association. Young Adult Services
Division. Committee on Outreach Programs for Young
Adults (Ad Hoc)
American Library Association. Cataloging and
Classification Section
Hierarchy: American Library Association
Resources and Technical Services Division
Cataloging and Classification Section
x American Library Association. Resources and Technical
Services Division . Cataloging and Classification
Section
Special Rules
24.15. JOINT COMMITTEES, COMMISSIONS, ETC.
24.15A. Enter a body made up of representatives of two or more other bodies directly under
its own name.
Joint Committee on Individual Efficiency in Industry
(A joint committee of the Department of Scientific and Industrial Research and the
Medical Research Council)
Canadian Committee on MARC
(A joint committee of the Association pour Vavuncement des sciences et des
techniques de la documentation, the Canadian Library Association, and the
National Library of Canada )
Omit the names of the parent bodies when these occur within or at the end of the name
and if the name of the joint unit is distinctive without them.
Joint Committee on Bathing Places
(Name: Joint Committee on Bathing Places of the Conference of State Sanitary
Engineers and the Engineering Section of the American Public Health
Association)
but Joint Commission of the Council for Education in World
Citizenship and the London International Assembly
24-24
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.1 7A
24.158. If the parent bodies are entered us subheadings of a common higher body, enter the
joint unit as a subordinate body as instructed in 24.12-24.14.
American Library Association. Joint Committee to Compile a
List of International Subscription Agents
(A joint commit we of the Acquisitions and Serials sections of the American
Library Association 'x Resources and Technical Services Division )
24.16. CONVENTIONALIZED SUBHEADINGS FOR STATE AND LOCAL
ELEMENTS OF UNITED STATES POLITICAL PARTIES
24. 16 A. Enter a state or local unit of a political party in the United States under the name of
the party followed by the state or local name in parentheses and then the name of the unit.
Omit from the name of the unit any indication of the name of the party or the state or
locality.
Republican Party (Mo. ) . State Committee
(Name: Missouri Republican Stale Committee)
Republican Party (Ohio). State Executive Committee
(Name: Ohio State Republican Executive Committee)
Democratic Party (Tex.). State Convention (1857 : Naco,
Tex. )
(Name: State Convention of the Democratic Party of the State of Texas)
Government Bodies and Officials
24.17. GENERAL RULE
24.17A. Enter a body created or controlled by a government directly under its own name (see
24.1-24.3) unless it belongs to one or more of the types listed in 24.18. However, if a body is
subordinate to a higher body that is entered under its own name, formulate the heading for
the subordinate body according to 24. 12-24.14. Refer to the name of a government agency
entered directly from its name in the form of a subheading of the name of the government
(see 26.3A7).
American Battle Monuments Commission
x United States. American Battle Monuments Commission
Arts Council of Great Britain
x United Kingdom. Arts Council
Boundary Commission for England
x United Kingdom. Boundary Commission for England
Canada Institute for Scientific and Technical Information
x Canada. Institute for Scientific and Technical
Information
Canadian National Railways
x Canada. Canadian National Railways
AACR2 Revision 2002
24-25
24,18
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
Consejo Superior de Investigaciones Cientificas
x Spain . Consejo Superior de Invest iga clones Cientificas
Council on International Economic Policy
x United States. Council on International Economic
Pol i cy
Dundee Harbour Trust
x United Kingdom. Dundee Harbour Trust
University of British Columbia
x British Columbia. University
24.18. GOVERNMENT AGENCIES ENTERED SUBORDINATELY
24.18A. Enter a government agency subordinately to the name of the government if it
belongs to one or more of the following types. Make it a direct or indirect subheading of the
heading for the government as instructed in 24.19. Omit from the subheading the name or
abbreviation of the name of the government in noun form unless such an omission would
result in a heading that does not make sense,
Canada. Agriculture Canada
not Canada. Agriculture
TYPE 1 . An agency with a name containing a term that by definition implies that the body
is part of another (e.g., Department. Division, Section, Branch, and their equivalents in other
languages).
Vermont. Department of Water Resources
Ottawa {Ont. ) , Department of Community Development
United States. Division of Wildlife Services
TYPE 2. An agency with a name containing a word that normally implies administrative
subordination in the terminology of the government concerned (e.g., Committee, Commis-
sion), provided that the name of the government is required for the identification of the
agency.
Australia. Bureau of Agricultural Economics
Canada. Royal Commission on Banking and Einance
United Kingdom. Royal Commission on the Press
United Kingdom. Central Office of Information
United States. Commission on Civil Rights
United States. Committee on Retirement Policy for Federal
Personnel
but Royal Commission on Higher Education in New Brunswick
24-26
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.18A
TYPE 3. An agency with a name that is general in nature or that does no more than
indicate a geographic, chronological, or numbered or lettered subdivision of the government
or of one of its agencies entered subordinately.
United States. National Labor Relations Board. Library
(Name: Library)
Niger. Commissariat general au developpement . Centre de
documen tat ion
(Name: Centre de documentation)
Malaysia. Royal Customs and Excise Department . Sabah
Region
Name: Sabah Region)
United States. General Services Administration . Region 5
(Name: Region 5)
United States, Public Health Service. Region XI
(Name: Region XI)
In case of doubt, enter the body directly.
Governor's Internship Program
not Minnesota. Governor's Internship Program
National Portrait Gallery (U.K.)
not United Kingdom. National Portrait Gallery
Musee des beaux-arts (Beziers , France )
not Beziers ( France ) . Musee des beaux-arts
TYPE 4. An agency with a name that does not convey the idea of a corporate body and
does not contain the name of the government.
Illinois. Bureau of Employment Security . Research and
Analysis
(Name: Research and Analysis)
Lower Saxony (Germany) . Landesvermessung
(Name: Landesvermessung)
United States. Naval Oceanography and Meteorology
(Name: Naval Oceanography and Meteorology)
Canada, Ocean and Aquatic Sciences
(Name: Ocean and Aquatic Sciences)
TYPE 5. An agency that is a ministry or similar major executive agency (i.e., one that has
no other agency above it) as defined by official publications of the government in question.
United Kingdom, Home Office
United Kingdom. Ministry of Defence
Italy. Ministero del bilancio e del la programmazione
economi ca
AACR2 Revision 2002
24-27
24.19
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
United States. National Aeronautics and Space
Administra tion
TYPE 6. A legislative body (see also 24.21).
Chicago {111.) . City Council
France. Assemblee nationale
United Kingdom. Parliament
United States . Congress
TYPE 7. A court (see also 24.23).
Ontario. High Court of Justice
United States. Supreme Court
TYPE 8. A principal service of the armed forces of a government (see also 24.24).
Canada. Canadian Armed Forces
Germany, fleer
New York (State). Militia
United Kingdom. Army
TYPE 9. A head of state or head of government (see also 24.20).
United Kingdom. Sovereign
Montreal (Quebec) . Mayor
United States. President
Virginia . Governor
TYPE 10, An embassy, consulate, etc. (see also 24.25).
Canada. Embassy (U.S.)
United Kingdom. Consulate (New York, N.Y.)
TYPE 11. A delegation to an international or intergovernmental body (see also 24,26).
United Kingdom. Delegation (United Nations)
24.19. DIRECT OR INDIRECT SUBHEADING
24.19A. Enter an agency belonging to one or more of the types listed in 24.18 as a direct
subheading of the heading for the government unless the name of the agency has been, or is
likely to be, used by another agency entered under the name of the same government. In that
case, interpose the name of the lowest element in the hierarchy that will distinguish between
the agencies.
United States. Office of Human Development Services
Hierarchy: United States
Department of Health, Education, and Welfare
Office of Human Development Services
24-28
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.19A
but
Quebec ( Province ) . Servi ce de 1 ' explora tion geol ogique
Hierarchy: Quebec
Ministere des richesses naturelles
Direction generate des mines
Direction de la geologie
Service de Pexploration geologsque
United States. Aviation Forecast Branch
Hierarchy: United Slates
Department of Transportation
Federal Aviation Administration
Office of Aviation Policy
Aviation Forecast Branch
United Kingdom. Nationality and Treaty Department
Hierarchy: United Kingdom
Foreign and Commonwealth Office
Nationality and Treaty Department
France - Commission central e des marches
Hierarchy: France
Ministere de 1'economie et des finances
Commission centrale des marches
United Kingdom. Department of Employment . Solicitors
Office
Hierarchy: United Kingdom
Department of Employment
Solicitors Office
(Other ministries and departments have had subordinate units called Solicitors
Office)
France. Direction generale des impots. Service de
1 ' administration generale
Hierarchy: France
Ministere de 1'economie et des finances
Direction generale des impots
Service de 1' administration generale
(Other units within the same ministry are called Service de 1' administration
generale)
Refer from the name in the form of a subheading of the name of its immediately superior
body when the heading does not include the name of that superior body (see 26.3A7).
California. Employment Data and Research Division
Hierarchy: California
Health and Welfare Agency
Employment Development Department
Employment Data and Research Division
x California. Employment Development Department .
Employment Data and Research Division
AACR2 Revision 2002
24-29
24.20
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
France . Ministere du travail , de 1 ' emploi et de la
population . Division de la s tatistique et des etudes
Hierarchy: France
Ministere du travail, de l'emploi et de la population
Service des etudes el provisions
Division de la slaiistique et des etudes
x France. Ministere du travail , de 1' emploi et de la
popul at ion . Service des etudes et previsi ons .
Division de la statistique et des etudes
Special Rules
24.20. GOVERNMENT OFFICIALS
24.20A. Scope
24.20A1. Apply this rule only to officials of countries and other states that have existed in
postmedieval times and to officials of international intergovernmental organizations.
24.20B. Heads of state, etc.
24.20B1. Enter a sovereign, president, other head of state, or governor acting in an official
capacity (see 21.4D1) under the heading for the jurisdiction, followed by the title of the offi-
cial in English (unless there is no equivalent English term). Add the inclusive years of the
reign or incumbency and the name of the person in a brief form and in the language of the
heading for that person.
United States . President (1953-1961 : Eisenhower)
Illinois . Governor (1973-1977 : Walker)
Iran. Shah {1941-1979 : Mohammed Reza Pahlavi)
Papal States. Sovereign (1846-1370 : Pius IX)
If the title varies with the gender of the incumbent, use a general term (e.g., Sovereign
rather than King or Queen).
United Kingdom. Sovereign (1837-1901 : Victoria)
Russia. Sovereign ( 1894-1 91 7 ; Nicholas II )
Spain. Sovereign (1886-1931 : Alfonso XIII)
If there are two or more nonconsecutive periods of incumbency, use separate headings.
United States . President (1885-1889 : Cleveland)
United States. President (1893-1897 : Cleveland)
If the heading applies to more than one incumbent (see 21.4D1), do not add the dates and
names.
United States. Preside/it
24.20B2. If a heading is established for an incumbent head of state, etc., as a person in addi-
tion to the heading as a head of state, etc., make an explanatory reference under the heading
for the head of state, etc. (see 26.3C1).
24-30
AACR2 Revision 2002
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.20D1
24.20C. Heads of governments and of international intergovernmental bodies
24.20C1. Enter a head of government acting in an official capacity (see 21.4D1) who is not
also a head of state under the heading for the jurisdiction, followed by the title of the official
in the vernacular. Add the inclusive years of the incumbency and the name of the person in a
brief form and in the language of the heading for that person.
United Kingdom. Prime Minister (1979-1990 : Thatcher)
Philadelphia (Pa.). Mayor (1972-1980 : Rizzo)
France, Premier ministre (1993-1995 : Balladur)
Italy. Preside/] te del Consiglio del ministri (1993-1994 .-
Ciampi)
New Zealand. Prime Minister (1999- : Clark)
If there are two or more nonconsecutive periods of incumbency, use separate headings.
Canada. Prime Minister (1968-1979 : Trudeau)
Canada. Prime Minister (1980-1984 : Trudeau)
If the heading applies to more than one incumbent (see 2L4D1), do not add the dates and
names.
24.20C2. Enter a head of an international intergovernmental organization acting in an official
capacity under the heading for the organization, followed by the title of the official in the
language of the heading for the organization. Add the inclusive years of the incumbency and
the name of the person in a brief form and in the language of the heading for thai person.
United Nations. Secretary-General (1972-1981 : Waldheim)
If the heading applies to more than one incumbent (see 21.4D1), do not add the dates and
names.
24.20C3. If a heading is established for an incumbent head of government, etc., as a person
in addition to the heading as a head of government, etc., make an explanatory reference under
the heading for the head of government, etc. (see 26.3C1).
24.20D- Governors of dependent or occupied territories
24.20D1. Enter a governor of a dependent territory (e.g., a colony, protectorate) or of an
occupied territory (see 24.6D) acting in an official capacity under the heading for the colony,
territory, etc, followed by the title of the governor in the language of the governing power.
Hong Kong. Governor
Jersey (Channel Islands) (Territory under German
occupation, 1940-1945) . Militarischer Befehlshaber
Netherlands (Territory under German occupation , 1940-
1945) . Reichskommissar fur die Besetzten
Niederlandischen Gebiete
Germany (Territory under Allied occupation , 1945-1955 :
U.S. Zone). Military Governor
AACR2 Revision 2002-. 2003 Update
24-31
24.20E
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.20E. Other officials
24.20E1. Enter any other official under the heading for the ministry or agency that the official
represents.
United States. General Accounting Office
not United States. Comptroller General
24.29E2. Enter an official who is not part of a ministry, etc., or who is part of a ministry, etc.,
that is identified only by the title of the official, under the heading for the jurisdiction, fol-
lowed by the title of the official.
United Kingdom, Lord Privy Seal
24.21. LEGISLATIVE BODIES
24.21A. Enter a legislature under the name of the jurisdiction for which it legislates.
Iceland. Alpingi
If a legislature has more than one chamber, enter each as a subheading of the heading for
the legislature. Refer from the name of the chamber as a direct subheading of the jurisdiction.
United Kingdom. Parliament . House of Commons
x United Kingdom. House of Commons
United Kingdom. Parliament . House of Lords
x United Kingdom. House of Lords
24.21B. Enter a committee or other subordinate unit (other than a legislative subcommittee of
the United States Congress, see 24,2 IC) as a subheading of the legislature or of a particular
chamber, as appropriate.
United States. Congress . Joint Committee on the Library
United States. Congress . House of Representatives . Select
Committee on Government Organization
24.21G Enter a legislative subcommittee of the United States Congress as a subheading of
the committee to which it is subordinate.
United States, Congress , Senate. Committee on Foreign
Relations . Subcommittee on Canadian Affairs
not United States. Congress. Senate. Subcommittee on Canadian
Affairs
24.21D. If successive legislatures are numbered consecutively, add the ordinal numeral and
the year or years to the heading for the particular legislature or one of its chambers.
United States. Congress (87th : 1961-1962)
United States-. Congress (87th : 1961-1962) . House of
Representati ves
If, in such a case, numbered sessions are involved, add the session and its number and the
year or years of the session to the number of the legislature.
24-32
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2003 Update
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.23A1
United States. Congress (87th, 2nd session : 1962). House
of Representatives
24.22. CONSTITUTIONAL CONVENTIONS
24.22A. Enter a constitutional convention under the heading for the government that con-
vened it, followed by the name of the convention. Add the year or years in which it was held,
Germany , Ma tional versamml ung ( 1 91 9-1 920)
Portugal, Assembleia Nacional Constituinte (1911)
24.22B. If there is variation in the forms of name of constitutional conventions convened by
a jurisdiction using English as an official language, use Constitutional Convention as the sub-
heading for each of the conventions.
New Hampshire. Constitutions! Convention (1781)
not New Hampshire. Convention for Framing a New Constitution
or Form of Government (1781)
New Hampshire. Constitutional Convention (1889)
New Hampshire. Constitutional Convention (1912)
not New Hampshire. Convention to Revise the Constitution
(1912)
If English is not an official language of the jurisdiction, follow the instructions in 24.2 and
24.3.
24.23. COURTS
24.23A. Civil and criminal courts
24.23A1. Enter a civil or criminal court under the heading for the jurisdiction whose author-
ity it exercises, followed by the name of the court.
Vermont. Court of Chancery
Omit the name (or abbreviation of the name) of the place in which the court sits or the
area which it serves unless the omission would result in objectionable distortion. If the name
of the place or the area served is required to distinguish a court from others of the same
name, add it in a conventionalized form.
France. Cour d'appel (Caen)
(Name: Cour d'appel de Caen)
United Kingdom. Crown Court (Manchester)
(Name: Manchester Crown Court)
United States. Court of Appeals (2nd Circuit)
(Name: United States Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit)
United States. Court of Appeals {District of Columbia
Circuit )
(Name: United States Court of Appeals for the District of Columbia Circuit)
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2003 Update
24-33
24.23B
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
United States. District Court {Delaware)
(Name: United States District Court for the District of Delaware)
United States. District Court (North Carolina : Eastern
District )
(Name: United States District Court for the Eastern District of North Carolina)
United States. District Court {Illinois : Northern
District : Eastern Division)
(Name: United States District Court for the Eastern Division of the Northern
District of Illinois)
California. Municipal Court (Los Angeles Judicial
District )
{Name: Municipal Court, Los Angeles Judicial District)
California. Superior Court (San Bernardino County)
(Name: Superior Court of the State of California in and for San Bernardino
County)
24.23B. Ad hoc military courts
24.23B1. Enter an ad hoc military court (e.g., court-martial, court of inquiry) under the head-
ing for the particular military service (see 24.24), followed by the name of the court. Add the
surname of the defendant and the year of the trial.
United States. Army, Court of Inquiry {Hall : 1863)
Virginia. Militia. Court-martial (Yancey : 1806)
24.24. ARMED FORCES
24.24A. Armed forces at the national level
24.24A1. Enter a principal service of the armed forces of a national government under the
heading for the government, followed fay the name of the service. Omit the name (or abbrevi-
ation of the name) of the government in noun form unless the omission would result in objec-
tionable distortion.
Canada. Canadian Armed Forces
United Kingdom. Royal Navy
United States. Marine Corps 12
United Kingdom. Royal Marines 12
Enter a component branch, command district, or military unit, large or small, as a direct
subheading of the heading for the principal service of which it is a part.
United Kingdom. Army, Royal Gloucestershire Hussars
United Kingdom. Royal Air Force. Central Interpretation
Unit
12. Treat the U.S. Marine Corps as a principal service.
13. Treat the Royal Marines as a principal service.
24-34
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2003 Update
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.24B1
United Kingdom. Royal Navy. Sea Cadet Corps
United States. Army. General Staff
United States. Army. Corps of Engineers
United States. Army. District of Mindanao
If the component branch, etc., is identified by a number, follow the style of numbering
found in the name (spelled out, roman numerals, or arabic numerals) and place the numbering
after the name.
United
Kingdom .
. Army .
Infantry Regiment ,
57th
United
States .
Army.
Infantry Division r
27th
United
States .
Na vy .
Fleet, 6th
United
States .
Army .
Army, First
United
States .
Army.
Corps, IV
United
States .
Army .
Engineer Combat Battalion, 2nd
United
States .
Army .
Volunteer Cavalry,
1st
United
States .
Navy .
Torpedo Squadron 8
Confederate States of America. Army. Tennessee Regiment ,
1st
France , Armee . Regimen t de dragons , 1 5"
Germany. Heer. Panserdi vision , 11.
Germany, Luftwaffe . Jagdgeschwader 26
Germany. Luftwaffe . Luftgaukommando VII
Union of Soviet Socialist Republics. Armiia. Vozdushnaia
armiia , 16.
If the name of such a component branch, etc., begins with the name, or an indication of
the name, of the principal service, enter it as a direct subheading of the heading for the
government.
United States. Army Map Service
United States. Naval Air Transport Service
If the name of such a component branch, etc., contains, but does not begin with, the name
or an indication of the name of the principal service, enter it as a direct subheading of the
heading for the service and omit the name or indication of the name unless objectionable
distortion would result,
Canada. Canadian Army. Royal Canadian Army Medical Corps
24.24B. Armed forces below the national level
24.24B1. Enter an armed force of a government below the national level under the heading
for the government, followed by the name of the force.
New York (State). Militia
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2003 Update
24-35
24.24B2
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
New York (State) . National Guard
24.24B2. Enter a component branch of an armed force of a government below the national
level as a subheading of the heading for the force as instructed in 24.24A.
New York (State). Militia. Regiment of Artillery, 9th
(Name: 9th Regiment of Artillery, N.Y.S.M.)
New York (State). National Guard. Coast Defense Command,
9th
24.24B3. Enter a component branch, etc., of a force below the national level that has been
absorbed into the national military forces as a component branch of the national force (see
24. 24 A).
United States . Army. Net-/ York Vol un teers, 83 rd
United States, Army. Regiment Infantry , Nev? York
Volunteers, 9th
24.25. EMBASSIES, CONSULATES, ETC.
24.25A. Enter an embassy, consulate, legation, or other continuing office representing one
country in another under the heading for the country represented, followed by the name of
the embassy, etc. Give the subheading in the language (see 24.3A) of the country represented,
and omit from it the name of the country.
If the heading is for an embassy or legation, add the name of the country to which it is
accredited.
Germany. Gesandschaft (Switzerland)
United Kingdom. Embassy (U.S. )
United States. Legation (Bulgaria)
Yugoslavia. Poslanstvo (U.S. )
Canada. Embassy {Belgium)
If the heading is for a consulate or other local office, add the name of the city in which it
is located.
France. Consulat {Buenos Aires, Argentina)
United Kingdom. Consulate (Cairo, Egypt )
24.26. DELEGATIONS TO INTERNATIONAL AND INTERGOVERNMENTAL
BODIES
24.26A. Enter a delegation, commission, etc., representing a country in an international or
intergovernmental body, conference, undertaking, etc., under the heading for the country rep-
resented, followed by the name of the delegation, etc. Give the subheading in the language
(see 24.3A) of the country represented. Omit from the subheading the name or abbreviation
of the name of the government in noun form unless such an omission would result in objec-
tionable distortion. If the name of the delegation, etc., is uncertain, give Delegation [Mission,
24-36
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2003 Upciate
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.27A1
etc.] (or equivalent terms in the language of the country represented). If considered necessary
to distinguish the delegation, etc., from others of the same name, add the name, in the form
arid language used for U as a heading, of the international or intergovernmental body,
conference, undertaking, etc., to which the delegation, etc., is accredited. Make explanatory
references as necessary from the heading for the international body, etc., followed by an
appropriate subheading (see 26.3C1).
Mexico. Delegacion (Inter-American Conference for the
Maintenance of Peace (1936 : Buenos Aires, Argentina))
Germany. Reichskommission ftir die Neltausstel lung in
Chicago
United States. Delegation (International Conference on
Maritime Lav; {3rd ; 1909 : Brussels, Belgium)}
United States. Mission (United Nations)
Explanatory reference:
United Nations. Missions
Delegations , missions, etc., from member nations to
the United Nations and to its subordinate units are
entered under the name of the nation followed by the
name of the delegation, mission, etc.; e.g.,
United States. Mission (United Nations)
United States. Delegation (United Nations. General
Assembly)
Uruguay. Delegacion (United Nations)
Make the same explanatory reference under United Nations. Delegations, and
under United Nations. General Assembly. Delegations, and under other
appropriate headings
If it is uncertain that a delegation represents the government of a country, enter it under its
own name.
Religious Bodies and Officials
24.27. RELIGIOUS BODIES AND OFFICIALS
24.27A. Councils, etc., of a single religious body
24.27A1. Enter a council, etc., of the clergy and/or membership (international, national,
regional, provincial, state, or local) of a single religious body under the heading for the reli-
gious body, followed by the name of the council, etc. When appropriate, make additions to
the heading as instructed in 24.7B.
Catholic Church. Antilles Episcopal Conference
Society of Friends. Philadelphia Yearly Meeting 14
United Methodist Church {U.S.} . Northern Illinois
Conference
14. Yearly Meeting is used by the Society of Friends to denote a particular level in its structure.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2003 Update
24-37
24.27A2
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.27A2. If the name of a council, etc., of the Catholic Church is given in more than one
language, use (in this order of preference) the English, Latin, French, German, or Spanish
name, and make appropriate references.
Catholic Church. Canadian Conference of Catholic Bishops
Catholic Church. Plenary Council of Baltimore {2nd :
1866)
Catholic Church. Concilium Plenarium Americae Latinae
(1399 : Rome, Italy)
24.27 A3. If a council, etc., is subordinate to a particular district of the religious body, enter it
under the heading for that district (see 24.27C2-24.27C3), followed by the name of the coun-
cil, etc. If the name appears in more than one language, use the name in the vernacular of the
district.
Catholic Church. Province of Baltimore . Provincial Council
(10th : 1869)
Catholic Church. Province of Mexico City. Concilio
Provincial (3rd : 1585)
24.27B. Religious officials
24.27B1. Enter a religious official (e.g., bishop, abbot, rabbi, moderator, mullah, patriarch)
acting in an official capacity (see 21.4D1) under the heading for the religious jurisdiction
(e.g., diocese, order, rabbinate, synod, denomination, see 24.27C2-24.27C3), followed by the
title of the official in English (unless there is no equivalent English term). Add the inclusive
years of incumbency and the name of the person in a brief form and in the language of the
heading for that person.
Catholic Church. Diocese of Campos. Bishop {1949-1981 :
Mayer )
Franciscans. Minister General {1947-1951 : Perantoni)
Catholic Church, Diocese of Winchester . Bishop (1367-1404
: Nilliam, of Mykeham)
If the heading applies to more than one incumbent (see 21.4D1), do not add the dates and
names.
Church of England. Diocese of Winchester . Bishop
If a heading is established for the incumbent as a person in addition to the heading as a
religious official, make an explanatory reference under the heading for the officiat (see
26.3C1).
24.27B2. Popes. Enter a pope acting in an official capacity (see 21.4D1) under Catholic
Church, followed by Pope. Add the year or inclusive years of the reign, and the pontifical
name in its catalogue entry form.
Catholic Church. Pope (1878-1903 : Leo Kill)
Catholic Church, Pope (1978 : John Paul I)
24-38
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2003 Update
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.27C3
If the heading applies to more than one pope {see 21.4DI), do not add the dates and
names.
Catholic Church. Pope
If a heading is established for a pope as a person in addition to the heading as a religious
official, make an explanatory reference under the heading for the official (see 26.3C1).
24.27C. Subordinate bodies
24.27C1. General rule. Except as provided in 24.27C2-24.27C4, enter subordinate religious
bodies according to the instructions in 24J2-24.13. For religious orders and societies, see
24.3 D.
24.27C2. Provinces, dioceses, synods, etc. Enter a province, diocese, synod, or other subor-
dinate unit of a religious body having jurisdiction over a geographic area under the heading
for the religious body, followed by the name of the province, etc.
Church of England. Diocese of Ely
Evangelical and Reformed Church, Reading Synod
Evangelische Kirche der Altpreussischen Union.
Kirchenprovinz Sachsen
Church of England. Archdeaconry of Surrey
Nederlandse Hervormde Kerk. Classis Rotterdam
Protestant Episcopal Church in the U.S.A. Diocese of
Southern Virginia
Russkaia pravoslavnaia tserkov'. Moskovskaia patriarkhiia
Svenska kyrkan. Arkestiftet Uppsala
Church of England. Woking Deanery
24.27C3. Catholic dioceses, etc. Use an English form of name for a patriarchate, diocese,
province, etc., of the Catholic Church.
Catholic Church. Archdiocese of Santiago de Cuba
Catholic Church. Diocese of Uppsala
Catholic Church. Diocese of Ely
Catholic Church. Diocese of Hexham and Newcastle
Catholic Church. Patriarchate of Alexandria of the Copts
Catholic Church. Province of Quebec
Catholic Church. Ukrainian Catholic Archeparchy of
Philadelphia
Catholic Church. Vicariate Apostolic of Zamora
Do not apply this rule to an ecclesiastical principality (often called Bistum) of the Holy
Roman Empire bearing the same name as a Catholic diocese and ruled by the same bishop.
Catholic Church. Diocese of Fulda
but Fulda (Ecclesiastical principality)
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2003 Update
24-39
24.27C4
HEADINGS FOR CORPORATE BODIES
24.27C4. Central administrative organs of the Catholic Church (Roman Curia). Enter a
congregation, tribunal, or other central administrative organ (i.e., one that is part of the
Roman Curia) of the Catholic Church under Catholic Church, followed by the Latin form of
the name of the congregation, etc. Omit any form of the word sacer when it is the first word
of the name and make an explanatory reference (see 26.3CI) from the form of the name
beginning with it.
Catholic Church. Congregatio Sacrorum Rituum
Catholic Church. Congregatio de Propaganda Fide
Catholic Church. Rota Romans
24.27D. Papai diplomatic missions, etc.
24.27D1. Enter a diplomatic mission from the pope to a secular power under Catholic
Church, followed by Apostolic Nunciature or Apostolic Intemunciature, as appropriate. Add
the heading for the government to which the mission is accredited.
Catholic Church. Apostolic Intemunciature (India)
Catholic Church. Apostolic Nunciature (Flanders)
Enter a nondiplomatic apostolic delegation under Catholic Church followed by Apostolic
Delegation. Add the name of the country or other jurisdiction in which the delegation
functions.
Catholic Church. Apostolic Delegation (France)
Enter an emissary of the pope acting in an official capacity (other than a nuncio, internun-
cio, or apostolic delegate) under Catholic Church, followed by the title of the emissary (in
English if there is an equivalent term; otherwise in Latin). Add the name of the country or
region in which the emissary functions.
Catholic Church. Legate (Colombia)
If the country or region cannot be ascertained, add the name of the emissary in brief form.
Catholic Church. Commissary Apostolic (Robertus
Castellensis )
24-40
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2003 Update
APPENDIX A
CAPITALIZATION
Contents
General Rules
A.l INITIALS AND ACRONYMS
A.2 HEADINGS FOR PERSONS, PLACES, AND CORPORATE BODIES
A.3 UNIFORM TITLES
A.4 TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
A.5 EDITION AREA
A.6 MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
A.7 PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
A. 8 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
A.9 SERIES AREA
A.10 NOTE AREA
A.l 1 STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
English Language
A.12 GENERAL RULE
A. 13 PERSONAL NAMES
A.14 NAMES OF PEOPLES, ETC.
A. 15 PLACE NAMES
A.16 NAMES OF STRUCTURES, STREETS, ETC.
A.!7 DERIVATIVES OF PROPER NAMES
A.I8 NAMES OF CORPORATE BODIES
A.I9 RELIGIOUS NAMES AND TERMS
A.20 NAMES OF DOCUMENTS
AACR2 Revision 2002: 20O5 Update
Appendix A-l
CAPITALIZATION
A.21 NAMES OF HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL EVENTS AND PERIODS
A.22 DECORATIONS, MEDALS, ETC.
A.23 NAMES OF CALENDAR DIVISIONS
A.24 NAMES OF HOLIDAYS
A.25 SCIENTIFIC NAMES OF PLANTS AND ANIMALS
A.26 GEOLOGIC TERMS
A.27 ASTRONOMICAL TERMS
A.28 SOIL NAMES
A.29 TRADENAMES
A.30 SINGLE AND MULTIPLE LETTERS USED AS WORDS OR PARTS OF
COMPOUNDS
A.31 HYPHENATED COMPOUNDS
A.32 HYPHENATED PREFIXES
Foreign Languages
A.33 GENERAL RULE
A.34 CAPITALIZATION OF ROMANIZED HEADINGS AND TITLES
A.35 BULGARIAN
A.36 CZECH (BOHEMIAN)
A.37 DUTCH
A.38 FINNISH
A.39 FRENCH
A.40 GERMAN
A.4I HUNGARIAN
A.42 ITALIAN
A.43 LATIN
A.44 POLISH
A.45 PORTUGUESE
A.46 RUSSIAN
A.47 SCANDINAVIAN LANGUAGES
A.48 SERBO-CROATIAN (ROMAN AND CYRILLIC ALPHABETS)
A.49 SLOVAK
A.50 SLOVENIAN
A.51 SPANISH
A.52 UKRAINIAN
Appendix A-2
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.2A1
General Rules
A.l. INITIALS AND ACRONYMS
A.1A. Capitalize the letters of an initialism or acronym used by a corporate body according to the
predominant usage of the body.
AFL-CIO
Unesco
A. IB. Capitalize words in a personal, place, or corporate name as instructed in the rules for the lan-
guage involved {see A.12-A.52). For such names used in headings, see also A. 2.
A.2. HEADINGS FOR PERSONS, PLACES, AND CORPORATE BODIES
A.2A. General ruJe
A.2A1. In genera], capitalize the first word of each heading and subheading. 1 For corporate names
with unusual capitalization, such as names spelled without an initial capital letter, or with a capital
letter or letters following a lower case letter or letters, follow the capitalization practice of the body.
Capitalize other words in personal, place, and corporate names used as headings and corporate names
used as subheadings as instructed in the rules for the language involved.
Alexander, of Aphrodisias
De la Mare, Halter
Musset, Alfred de
Cavour, Camillo Benso, conte dl
Third Order Regular of St. Francis
Societe de chimia physique
Ontario, High Court of Justice
Norske Nobelinstitutt
El Greco Society
eBay (Firm)
netViz Corporation
hHead (Musical group)
hEARd ( Organisation )
drJcoop . com, Inc ,
1. If a personal name begins with the Arabic article al in any of its various orthographic forms (e.g., al, el, es) or with the
Hebrew article ha (ke), do not capitalize it, whether written separately or hyphenated with the following word.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A- 3
A.2B
CAPITALIZATION
A.2B. Words or phrases characterizing persons
A.2B1. Capitalize a word, or the substantive words in a phrase, characterizing a person and used as a
heading (see also 22. UD and A.13H). Capitalize proper names contained in such a phrase as instructed
in the rules for the language involved. Capitalize a quoted title within a personal name heading as
instructed in A.4A.
Physician
Lady of Quality
Citizen of Albany
Author of Early impressions
A.2C. Additions to certain headings for persons
A.2C1. Capitalize additions to headings for persons made according to the instructions in certain rules
(e.g., 22.1 1, 22.12, 22.15A, 22.19) as instructed in the rules for the language involved. If the addition
is given in parentheses (see 22.1 1A and 22.19A), capitalize the first word of the addition and any
proper name,
Moses , Grandma John, Abbot of Ford
Deidier , abbe Thomas {Anglo-Norman poet)
Alfonso XIII, King of Spain Brown, George, Rev.
A.2D. Additions to names of corporate bodies
A.2D1. Capitalize the first word of each addition to the name of a corporate body. Capitalize other
words in the addition as instructed in the rules for the language involved.
Bounty {Ship)
Knights Templar {Masonic order)
Regional Conference on Mental Measurement of the Blind (1st :
1951 : Perkins Institution)
A.3. UNIFORM TITLES
A.3A. Individual uniform titles
A.3A1. Capitalize an individual uniform title as instructed in A. 4.
[ Hard times ]
Bava kamma
Nicene Creed
[De bello Gallico]
A.3B. Collective uniform titles
A.3B1. Capitalize only the first word of a collective uniform title (see 25.8-25.10 and 25.34).
[Works]
[Short stories]
Appendix A-4
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.4A1
[Instrumental music]
[ Polonaises, piano]
A.3C. Additions to uniform titles
A.3C1. Capitalize the first word of each addition to an individual uniform title or a collective uniform
title. Capitalize other words in the addition as instructed in the rules for the language involved.
Seven sages of Rome {Southern version)
Guillaume ( Chanson de geste)
Genesis [Middle High German poem)
[Sketches by Boz. German. Selections]
[ Poems . Selections]
[Goyescas (Opera) ]
[Iliad. Book 1. Selections]
In additions to uniform titles for music, do not capitalize words (including abbreviations) indicating
medium of performance (see 25.30B), words (including abbreviations) accompanying serial numbers
and opus or thematic index numbers (see 25.30C), or words accompanying statements of key (see
25.30D), unless the word is, or the abbreviation stands for, a proper name. Do not capitalize arr,
[Trios, piano, strings, no. 2, op. 66, C minor]
[Sonatas, piano, K. 457, C minor]
A.4. TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA
A.4A, Title elements (general rule)
A.4A1. In general, capitalize the first word of a title (title proper, alternative title, parallel title, quoted
title, etc.). 2 If the first word of a title is a compound term beginning with a lower case letter or letters
(e.g., "e" for electronic) followed by one or more letters in upper case, capitalize only the secondary
element of the compound term immediately following the introductory letter(s), whether or not the ele-
ments are separated by a hyphen. For a title that begins with an Internet address (or part of an Internet
address), do not capitalize the first element if it is not capitalized on the resource. If the title includes a
corporate name with unusual capitalization, follow the capitalization practice of the body. Capitalize
other words as instructed in the rules for the language involved. See A. 20 for the capitalization of
names of documents.
The materials of architecture
The 1919/1920 Breasted Expedition to the Far East
Les mis^rables
IV informe del gobierno
2. If a romanized title (title proper, alternative title, parallel title, quoted title, etc.) begins with the Arabic article al in any
of its various orthographic forms (e.g., al, el, es) or with the Hebrew article ha (he), do not capitalize the article, whether
written separately or hyphenated with the following word.
ha-Milon he-hadash : Ivri-Angli, Angli-Ivri
(Milon is considered the first word and is therefore capitalized)
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A-5
A.4B
CAPITALIZATION
Eileen Ford's a more beautiful you in 21 days
Journal of polymer science
Sechs Partiten fur Flbte
Still life with bottle and grapes
The Edinburgh world atlas, or, Advanced atlas of modern
geography
Coppelia, ou, La fille aux yeux d' email
Strassenkarte der Schweiz = Carte routiere de la Suisse = Carta
stradale della Svizzera = Road map of Switzerland
The greenwood tree : newsletter of the Somerset and Dorset
Family History Society
Quo vadis? : a narrative from the time of Nero
King Henry the Eighth ; and. The tempest
An interpretation of The ring and the book
Selections from the Idylls of the king
... /by the Author of Memoirs of a fox-hunting man
A dictionary of American English on historical principles
Les cahiers du cinema
The anatomical record
"Reprinted from The anatomical record, vol . S8, Jan . -Mar . 194 4"
A supplement to The journal of physics and chemistry of solids
Separate from La revista de derecho, jurisprudencia y
administracibn
eWell being
e-Commerce security
iTV games and gambling
re:Organize
robgray . com
U-boat operations of the Second World War
www .jurisdiction. com
www . advertising
A.4B. Titles preceded by dashes indicating incompleteness
A.4B1. Do not capitalize the first word of a title if it is preceded by a dash indicating that the begin-
ning of the phrase from which the title was derived has been omitted.
—and master of none
Appendix A-6
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.4F1
A.4C. Certain titles of bibliographic resources that have merged or been absorbed
A.4C1. When one resource absorbs or merges with another and incorporates that resource's title with
its own, do not capitalize the first word of the incorporated title unless the rules for the language
involved require its capitalization for another reason.
Farm chemicals and crop life not Farm chemicals and. Crop life
A.4D. Grammatically independent titles of supplements and sections of an item
A.4D1. If the title proper of an item that is supplementary to, or a section of, another item consists of
two or more parts that are not grammatically linked (see 1.1 B9, 12.1B4, and 12.1B5), capitalize the
first word of the title of the second and subsequent parts.
Faust. Part one
Advanced calculus. Student handbook
Journal of biosocial science. Supplement
Acta Universitatis Carolinae. Philologies
If the title of the part is introduced by an alphabetic or a numeric designation beginning with a
word, capitalize also that word.
Progress in nuclear energy. Series 2, Reactors
A.4E. General materia! designation
A.4E1. Do not capitalize the word(s) in a general material designation,
[music]
[cartographic material (braille) ]
[electronic resource]
A.4F. Statement of responsibility
A.4F1. In the statement of responsibility element, capitalize as instructed in the rules for the language
involved all personal and corporate names; titles of nobility; terms of address, honour, and distinction;
and initials of societies, etc., accompanying personal names. In general, do not capitalize other words.
. / by Mrs. Charles H. Gibson
. / by Walter de la Mare
• / by Alfred, Lord Tennyson
. / by a Lady of Quality
- / International Symposium on the Cataloguing, Coding, and
Statistics of Audio-Visual Materials ; organised by ISO/TC 46
Documentation in collaboration with I FLA and IFTC, 7-9 January
1976 in Strasbourg
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A-7
A.S
CAPITALIZATION
A.5. EDITION AREA
A.5A. If an edition statement (or a statement relating to a named revision of an edition) begins with a
word or an abbreviation of a word, capitalize it. Capitalize other words as instructed in the rules for the
language involved.
Household, ed.
Facsim. ed.
1st standard ed.
Neue Aufl.
Rev. et corr.
Wyd. 2-gie
World's classics ed., New ed. rev.
A.6. MATERIAL (OR TYPE OF PUBLICATION) SPECIFIC DETAILS AREA
A.6A. If the material (or type of publication) specific details area begins with a word or an abbrevia-
tion of a word, capitalize it. Capitalize other elements as instructed in the rules for the language
involved.
Scale 1 : 500, 000
Vol. 1, no. 1 (Jan. /Mar. 1974)-
No 1 [juil. 1970)-
A.7. PUBLICATION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA
A.7A. General rule
A.7A1. Capitalize the names of places, publishers, distributors, and manufacturers as instructed in the
rules for the language involved.
Montreal
Coloniae Agrippinae
The Hague
Den Haag but ' s-Gravenhage
T. Wall and Sons
Presses universitaires de France
A.7B. Initial words or abbreviations not part of a name
A.7B1. In general, if an element begins with a word or abbreviation not an integral part of the name
of the place, publisher, distributor, manufacturer, etc., capitalize the word or abbreviation. Do not capi-
talize other words or abbreviations not part of a name unless the rules for the language involved
require their capitalization. Capitalize only the s of s.l. Do not capitalize s.n,
V Praze
Londini : Apud B. Fellowes
Appendix A-8
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.9B1
Lipsiae : Sumptibus et typis B . G. Teubneri
New York : Released by Beaux Arts
Wiesbaden ; In Kommission bei 0. Harrassowitz
Toronto : Published in association with the Pulp and Paper
institute of Canada by university of Toronto Press
[S.l. : s.n.]
A.8. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AREA
A.8A. Capitalize proper nouns and certain technical terms appearing in this area as instructed in the
rules For the language involved. Do not capitalize other words, including those appearing first in the
area.
leaves 81-144
100D p, in various pagings
310 leaves of braille
... : ill . , col , maps , ports . (some col . )
on 1 side of 1 sound disc (13 min.)
1 videoreel (ca. 75 min.)
12 slides : sd. , col .
205 leaves of braille and Nemeth code
A.9. SERIES AREA
A.9A. General rule
A.9A1. Capitalize the title proper, parallel titles, other title information, and statements of responsibil-
ity of a series as instructed in A. 4.
Great newspapers reprinted
Master choruses for Lent and Easter
JeuM visuels = Visual games
Concertino : Merke fur Schul- und Liebhaber Orchester
Golden guides . Nature
Standard radio supersound effects. Trains
Acta Universitatis Stockholmiensis . Stockholm studies in history
of literature
Publicacidn / Universidad de Chile, Departamento de Geologia
A.9B. Terms used in conjunction with series numbering
A.9B1. Do not capitalize a term such as v., no., reel, t., that is part of the series numbering unless the
rules for a particular language require capitalization (e.g., noun capitalization in German), Capitalize
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A-9
A.1G
CAPITALIZATION
other words and alphabetic devices used as part of a numbering system according to the usage of the
item.
Deutscher Planungsatlas ; Bd. 8
Exploring careers ; group S
Music for today . Series 2 ; no . 8
Typewriting. Unit 2, Skill development ; program 1
National standard reference data series ; NSRDS-NBS 5
A.10. NOTE AREA
A.10A. Capitalize the first word in each note or an abbreviation beginning a note. If a note consists of
more than one sentence, capitalise the first word of each subsequent sentence. See A.4A-A.4D for the
capitalization of titles. Capitalize other words as instructed in the rules for the language involved.
Title from container
Facsim. reprint . Originally published : London : I . Walsh, ca ,
1734
A.11. STANDARD NUMBER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA
A.11A, Capitalize letters that are part of a standard number.
ISSN 0305-3741
Do not capitalize qualifiers added to a standard number or to a price.
ISBN 0-435-91660-2 (cased)
$1.00 (pbfc.)
£4.40 (complete collection) . — £0.55 (individual sheets)
Capitalize the first word of the statement giving the terms on which the item is available if the state-
ment appeal's without a price.
ISBN 0-902573-45-4 : Subscribers only
Free to high school students
English Language
A.12. GENERAL RULE
A.12A. The rules for English- language capitalization basically follow those of the Chicago Manual of
Style. Certain rules that differ have been modified to conform to the requirements of bibliographic
records and long-standing cataloguing practice,
A.12B. Where a rule prescribes the capitalization of the name of a person, corporate body, or place, or
of a title of nobility, term of honour, appellation, epithet, etc., understand this to mean that each sepa-
rate word or initial is to be capitalized excepting articles, prepositions, and conjunctions. However, in a
place name, capitalize an article that forms an accepted part of the name according to gazetteers.
Appendix A-10
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.13D1
A.I2C. Capitalize a plural generic term when it precedes the distinctive nouns in two or more proper
names. Do not capitalize the generic term when it follows the nouns.
Saints Constantine and Helen
Secretaries of Defense and State
Lakes Erie and Ontario
but
Industry and Trade departments
Authorized and Revised versions
A.12D. For the capitalization of roman numerals, see C.2B3.
A.13. PERSONAL NAMES
A.13A. General rule
A.13A1. Capitalize the name of a person (including initials).
D . H . Lawrence Benjamin Franklin
H.D. C. Day-Lewis
John the Baptist
A.13B. Names with prefixes
A.13B1. If a name includes a prefix from a language other than English (e.g., de, des, la, V, della,
von, von der), follow the usage of the person with regard to capitalization of the prefix. In case of
doubt, capitalize it.
Daphne du Maurier; du Maurier
Eva Le Gallienne; Le Gallienne
Mark Van Doren; Van Doren
Mazo de la Roche; de la Roche
A.13C. Titles preceding the name
A.13C1. Capitalize any title or term of honour or address that immediately precedes a personal name.
Dame Judi Dench President Carter
Field Marshal Sir Michael Carver Prime Minister Pierre Trudeau
Gen, Fred C. Weyand Queen Elizabeth II
Grandma Moses Rabbi Stephen Wise
John Henry Cardinal Newman Senator Hubert H. Humphrey
Mrs. Humphry Ward Sir Gordon Richards
Pope Paul VI Sister Mary Joseph
A.13D. Ordinal numerals following names of sovereigns and popes
A.13D1. Capitalize an ordinal number expressed as a word(s) used after the name of a sovereign or
pope to denote order of succession.
King George the Sixth
John the Twenty-third
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A-ll
A.13E
CAPITALIZATION
A.13E. Titles following a name or used alone in place of a name
A.13E1. Royalty, nobility, baronets. Capitalize a title of royalty or nobility.
Elizabeth II, Queen of the United Kingdom; the Queen
Charles, Prince of Wales; the Prince of Wales; the Prince
Frank Pakenham, Earl of Longford; the Earl of Longford; the Earl
Do not capitalize bart.
Sir Thomas Beecham, bart.
(A baronet is not a member of the nobility)
A.13E2. Religious titles. Capitalize a religious title.
His Holiness Paul VI, Pope; the Pope
Most Rev. and Rt. Hon. Frederick Donald Coggan, Archbishop of
Canterbury; the Archbishop of Canterbury
the Reverend Michael 0' Sullivan, Pastor of Saint Peter's Church;
the Pastor
the Dalai Lama
A.13E3. Civil and military titles. Do not capitalize a civil or military title. 3
Jimmy Carter, president of the United States; the president of
the United States; the president
James Callaghan, prime minister; the prime minister
the Hon. Walter Stewart Owen, lieutenant-governor of British
Columbia; the lieutenant-governor of British Columbia; the
lieutenant-governor
Warren Earl Burger, chief justice of the United States; the
chief justice of the United States; the chief justice
Gen. Bernard A. Rogers, chief of staff, U.S. Army; the general
James F. Calvert, rear admiral, USN
Hubert H . Humphrey, senator from Minnesota, the senator from
Minnesota; the senator
Kingman Brewster, ambassador to the United Kingdom; the
ambassador to the United Kingdom; the ambassador
A.13E4. Professional and academic titles. Capitalize the title of a named professorship. In gen-
eral, do not capitalize other professional and academic titles.
W. Carson Ryan, Kenan Professor of Education; the professor
Robert Paul Bergman, associate professor of fine arts; the
professor
3, Capitalize such words as president, prime minister, and governor as instructed in A.I8B when they designate the office
rather than a particular person occupying the office.
Appendix A-12
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.mi
R.F. Bennett, president of the Ford Motor Company of Canada; the
president
Olga Porotnikof f , secretary, I FLA Committee on Cataloguing
A.13F. Certain other terms following names
A-13F1- Capitalize the name or abbreviation of an academic degree, honour, religious order, etc.
CD. Needham, Fellow of the Library Association
R.C. Strong, Ph.D., F.S.A.
Father Joseph Anthony Barrett, S.J.
Ralph Damian Goggens, Order of Preachers
Capitalize esquire, junior, or senior (and their abbreviations) following a name.
John Mytton, Esq.
John D. Rockefeller, Jr.
A.13G. Terms of honour and respect
A.13G1. Capitalize a term of honour or respect.
A.13H. Epithets
A.13H1. Capitalize an epithet occurring with, or used in place of, a personal name.
the Iron Chancellor
Old Hickory
Bonnie Prince Charlie
Elroy "Crazy Legs" Hirsch
Jerome H . ( Dizzy) Dean
Abraham Lincoln, the Great Emancipator
Her Majesty
His Royal Highness
His Holiness
Your Excellency
Your Grace
Your Honour
A.13J. Personifications
A.13J1. Capitalize a personification.
A dialogue between Death and a beautiful lady
Let Fame sound the trumpet
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A-13
A.14
CAPITALIZATION
A.14. NAMES OF PEOPLES, ETC.
A.14A. Capitalize the name of a people, race, tribe, or ethnic or linguistic group.
Africans
Celts
Germans
Hottentots
Mongols
Capitalize an adjective derived from such a name.
African
Capitalize the name of a language.
English
Polynesians
Scandinavians
Slavs
Teutons
Yoruba
Scandinavian
Estonian
A.15. PLACE NAMES
A.15A. Geographic features, regions, etc.
A.15A1. Capitalize the name of a geographic feature, region, etc. Do not capitalize a descriptive
adjective not part of an accepted name.
Arctic Circle
Arctic Ocean
Asia; Asian continent
Atlantic; South Atlantic; southern Atlantic
Central America; central European [but Central Europe when referring to the
geopolitical entity)
Cheviot Hills
the Continent (i.e., Europe) ; continental Europe; the European
continent; Continental customs
East; the Orient; Far East(ern); Rear East(ern); Middle
East (ern) ; Eastern customs ; oriental (adj ective) ; eastern Europe
{but Eastern Europe when referring to the geopolitical entity) ; the East (U.S.)
Great Lakes
Great Slave Lake
Isthmus of Sue2
Mississippi Delta
North Temperate Zone
Sea of Marmara
South America; South American continent
Southeast Asia; southern Asia
Strait of Dover
Appendix A-14
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.16A
Tropic of Capricorn; the tropics
the West, Far West, Middle West, Midwest (U.S.); western, far
western, midwestern
A.15B. Political divisions
A.15B1, Capitalize the name of a political division (e.g., a country, state, province, city). Capitalize a
word such as empire, kingdom, state, country, and city following a proper name if it is a commonly
accepted pail of the name. Do not capitalize such a word when used alone to indicate a political
division.
Austrian Empire; the empire
Eleventh Congressional District; the congressional district
Kew York City; the city of New York
Simcoe County; the county
Sixth Precinct; the precinct
Washington State; the state of Washington
A.15C. Popular names
A.15C1. Capitalize a popular name of a place, or the name of a legendary place.
Atlantis New World
Bay Area Old World
Benelux the Nutmeg State
the Channel (English Channel) Old Dominion
City of Brotherly Love Panhandle
Erin the Potteries
Eternal City South Seas
Latin Quarter the Village
Middle Earth the West End
A.16. NAMES OF STRUCTURES, STREETS, ETC.
A,16A. Capitalize the name of a building, monument, or other structure; and the name of a road or
street. Do not capitalize words such as avenue, bridge, hotel, and park when they are used aione. See
A.l 8E for the capitalization of names of buildings in which religious bodies meet,
the Capitol
Central Park; the park
Cleopatra's Needle
Drury Lane Theatre; the theatre
Forty-second Street
Hoover Dam; the dam
Iroquois Lock
Jacques Car tier Bridge; the bridge
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A-J 5
A.17
CAPITALIZATION
Oxford Circus; the circus
Pyramid of the Sun; the pyramid
Royal Air Force Memorial
A.17. DERIVATIVES OF PROPER NAMES
A.17A. Do not capitalize a word derived from a personal or place name when it is used with a spe-
cialized meaning.
angstrom unit
arable numbers
bikini
bourbon whiskey
burnt sienna
cologne
diesel engine
hamburger
italicize
malapropism
melba toast
nile green
raglan sleeves
roman type
timothy grass
vernier telescope
A.18. NAMES OF CORPORATE BODIES
A.18A. International organizations and alliances
A.18A1. Capitalize the name of an international organization or alliance.
Central Treaty Organization
Common Market
Hanseatic League; Hansa
Holy Alliance
International Monetary Fund
Little Entente
Organization of African Unity
Triple Alliance, 1882
United Nations; United Nations Security Council; the Security
Council; the council
World Health Organization
A.1SB. Government bodies
A.1SB1. Capitalize the full name of a legislative or judicial body; administrative department, bureau,
or office; armed force (or component part of an armed force); or an accepted shortened form of its
name. Do not capitalize other incomplete designations (except abbreviations) or adjectives derived
from such a name.
Agency for International Development
Atlantic Fleet
Canadian Armed Forces
Appendix A-16
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.18C1
Canadian Citizenship Branch
Central Office of Information
Circuit Court of the United States; the federal Circuit Court
Commission on Post-Secondary Education in Ontario
Congress; the Hinety-f if th Congress; congressional
Court of Appeals of the State of Colorado
Department of State; State Department
District Court for the Southern District of New York; district
court
Division of Education for the Disadvantaged
Domestic Council Committee on Illegal Aliens
First Army; the First
First Infantry Division
House of Commons
House of Representatives; the House; the lower house of Congress
Juvenile and Domestic Relations Court; juvenile court; domestic
relations court
Middlesex Regiment; the Diehards ; the regiment
Ministry of Agriculture, Fisheries, and Food
Pari iament; parliamentary
Peace Corps
President of the United States (i.e., the office}
Prime Minister (i.e., the office)
Queen's Bench Division of the High Court of Justice
Royal Air Force
Royal Gloucestershire Hussars
Twenty-first Regiment of U.S. Infantry
United States Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit; court of
appeals
United States Navy
A.18C. Political parties
A.18C1. Capitalize the name of a political party and of its members.
Communist Party of Great Britain; Communis t (s )
Democratic Party; Democrat (s)
Liberal Party; Liberal (s)
Nazi Party; Nazi (s)
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A-l 7
A.18D
CAPITALIZATION
A.18D. Political and economic systems
A.18D1. Do not capitalize the name of a political or economic system or school of thought or its
proponents unless derived from proper nouns. In general, do not capitalize names of political groups
other than parties.
A.18E. Other corporate bodies
A.18EL Capitalize the name of an institution, association, conference, company, religious denomina-
tion or order, local church, etc. (see A.19D for the names of religions), or of a department or division.
Do not capitalize an article preceding the name, even when a part of the official name. Do not capital-
ize a generic word (e.g., society, company, conference) when used alone or with an article.
Abbey of Mont Saint-Michel
American Library Association
the Board of Regents of the University of California
Boy Scouts of America; a Boy Scout; a Scout
Canadian National Railways
Chris tian Brothers
Church of England
Church of the Redeemer
Conference, 1980 Advances in Reactor Physics and Shielding
Congregation Anshe Mizrach
Fifty-second Annual Meeting of the American Historical
Association
First Baptist Church
Garrick Club
General Council of the United Church of Canada
General Foods Corporation
Green Bay Packers; the Packers; the team
Independent Order of Odd Fellows; IOOF; an Odd Fellow
Iowa Falls High School
League of Women Voters
Midwest Baptist Conference
Mosque of Sidi Okba
anarchism
capitalism
egalitarianisra
farm bloc
fascism
independent ( s )
mercantilism
monarchism
but
mugwumps
nationalism
right wing
socialist bloc
Benthamism
Marxism
Thatcherism
Appendix A-18
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.19A2
National Bank of New Zealand, Ltd.
National Dance Theatre Company of Jamaica
Order of Preachers
Presbyterian Church in Canada
Printed Circuit World Expo '81 West
Reference Section of the Canadian Library Association
Second Vatican Council; Vatican II
Society of Jesus; Jesuits; a Jesuit
Special Session on Ordered Fields and Real Algebraic Geometry
Synod of Whitby
Temple Israel
Textile Workers Union of America; the union
Toronto Symphony Orchestra
Young Men's Christian Association
A.19. RELIGIOUS NAMES AND TERMS
A.19A. Deities
A.19A1. Capitalize the name of a deity and any term referring to the Christian Trinity.
Adonai
Mars
Allah
Messiah (Jesus Christ)
the Almighty
Minerva
As tar te
the Omnipotent
Brahma
Prince of Peace
Christ
Providence
the Father
Son of God
the First Cause
Son of Man
Hera
the Supreme Being
Holy Ghost
Vishnu
Holy Spirit
the Word
Jehovah
Yahweh
King of Kings
Zeus
Lamb of God
A.19A2, Do not capitalize a pronoun referring to the name of a deity unless capitalization is necessary
to avoid ambiguity.
God as I understand him
The appearance of Christ after his resurrection
but
God gives man what He wills
Trust Him who doeth all things well
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A-19
A.19A3
CAPITALIZATION
A.19A3. Do not capitalize words derived from the names of deities.
God' s fatherhood, kingship, omnipotence
Jesus' sonship
godlike
messianic hope
christological but Christ-like
A.19B. Names of Satan
A.19B1. Capitalize a word specifically denoting Satan,
the Devil
His Satanic Majesty
Lord of the Flies
Lucifer
but
a devil; the devils
devilled eggs
the devil's advocate
A.19C. Revered persons
A.19C1. Capitalize an appellation of a revered person such as a prophet, guru, saint, or other religious
leader.
the Apostle to the Gentiles Mother of God
the Baptist Our Lady
the Beloved Apostle Panchen Lama
the Blessed Virgin the Prophet [i.e., Mohammed)
Buddha the Twelve
the Fathers; church fathers the Virgin (i.e., Mary)
the Mahatma
A.19D. Religions
A.19D1. Capitalize the name of a religion, sect, or specific religious movement. Capitalize also a
name describing its members and any adjective derived from such a name. See A.1SE for the names of
denominations, orders, local churches, etc.
Anglicanism; an Anglican; Anglican communion
Arianism; Arian heresy
Buddhism; a Buddhist; Buddhis t ideas
Catholicism; a Catholic
Christian Science; a Christian Scientist
Dissenter
Islam; Islamic; Muslim
Judaism; Orthodox Judaism; Reform Judaism; an Orthodox Jew
Appendix A-20
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.19H1
Lutherani sm; a Lutheran
Protestantism; a Protestant
Shinto
Theosophy ; Theosophist
Vedanta
Zen; Zen Buddhism
Zoroas trianism
A.19E. Religious events and concepts
A.19E1. Capitalize the name of a major Biblical or religious event or concept.
Armageddon
the Assumption of the Virgin
the Captivity (Babylonian)
the Crucifixion
the Enlightenment (Buddhism)
A.19F. Creeds and confessions
A.19F1. Capitalize the name of a creed or confession.
Augsburg Confession
Nicene Creed
the Thirty-nine Articles
A.19G. The Eucharist
A.19G1. Capitalize a term referring to the Eucharist.
Communion
the Divine Liturgy
Holy Communion
the Hegira
Judgement Day
the Last Supper
Redemption
the Second Advent
the Lord' s Supper
the Mass
A.19H. Sacred Scriptures
A.19H1. Capitalize the title of a sacred scripture, one of its divisions, a group of books, or an individ-
ual book.
Holy Bible
Holy Scriptures
Sacred Scriptures
r-3ew Testament
Old Testament
New Covenant
Gospels
Acts of the Apostles
Apocalypse of John
Epistles of Paul
Apocrypha
Five Scrolls
Historical Books
Minor Prophets
Pentateuch
History of Susanna
Song of Songs
Koran
Qu' ran
Zend-Avesta
Talmud Yerushalmi
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A~21
A.19H2
CAPITALIZATION
A.19H2. Capitalize book when it refers to the entire Bible; otherwise, do not capitalize it.
the Book
but
the book of Proverbs
the book of the Prophet Isaiah
the second book of Kings
A.19J. Special selections from the Bible
A.19J1. Capitalize the first word of the name of a special selection from the Bible that is commonly
referred to by a specific name.
the Beatitudes the Nunc dimittis
the Decalogue the Shema
the Lord' s prayer the Sermon on the mount
the Miserere the Ten commandments
A.19K. Versions of the Bible
A.19K1, Capitalize the name of a version of the Bible (see 25. 18 All).
Authorized Version New English Bible
Confraternity Version Septuagint
Jerusalem Bible Vulgate
New American Standard Bible
A.20. NAMES OF DOCUMENTS
A.20A. Capitalize the formal, or conventional, name of a document such as a charter, constitution,
legislative act, pact, plan, statement of policy, or treaty.
Articles of Confederation
Atlantic Charter
Bill of Rights
British North America Act
Civil Rights Act of 1964
Constitution of Virginia; the constitution
Declaration of Independence
Fourteenth Amendment (U.S. Constitution)
Magna Charta
Marshall Plan; the plan
Reform Bill
Third Five Year Plan (India)
Treaty of Versailles; the treaty
Universal Copyright Convention; the convention
Appendix A-22
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A* 24 A.
In case of doubt whether the title of a document is its formal or conventional name, capitalize the
title according to other rules in this appendix.
An act to amend the constitution and to prohibit taxes on
property . . .
A.21. NAMES OF HISTORICAL AND CULTURAL EVENTS AND PERIODS
A.21A. Capitalize the name of an historical or cultural event and of a major historical or cultural
period.
Age of Discovery Norman Conquest
Battle of Dunkirk Operation Deep Freeze
Boxer Rebellion Reformation
Dark Ages Second Battle of the Marne
Elizabethan Age Second World War
French Revolution Siege of Leningrad
Grand National Steeplechase Thirty Years' War
AJ2. DECORATIONS, MEDALS, ETC.
A.22A. Capitalize the name of a particular decoration, medal, or award.
Bronze Star Medal
Congressional Medal of Honor
Iron Cross
Victoria Cross
A.23. NAMES OF CALENDAR DIVISIONS
A.23A. Capitalize the name of a month of the year or day of the week.
January
Monday
Do not capitalize the name of a season.
winter
A.24. NAMES OF HOLIDAYS
A.24A. Capitalize the name of a secular or religious holiday and of a religious season.
Advent Fourth of July
Boxing Day Lent
Christmas Day Ramadan
Epiphany Saint Patrick' s Day
Feast of the Annunciation Thanksgiving
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A-23
A.25
CAPITALIZATION
A.25. SCIENTIFIC NAMES OF PLANTS AND ANIMALS
A.25A. Capitalize the Latin name of a phylum, class, order, family, or genus, and names of intermedi-
ate groupings (e.g., subclasses). Do not capitalize the name of a species or subspecies even if it is
derived from a proper name. Do not capitalize English derivatives of scientific names.
Arthropods (phylum)
Insecta (class)
but arthropod (from Arthropods)
A.26, GEOLOGIC TERMS
A.26A. Capitalize the distinctive word{s) in the name of a geologic era, period, etc. Do not capitalize
words such as era and period and modifiers such as early, middle, or late when used only
descriptively.
Eocene epoch
Jurassic period
Lower Triassic period
Mesozoic period
but
the early Miocene
the late Eocene
A.27. ASTRONOMICAL TERMS
A.27A. Capitalize the name of a planet, satellite, star, constellation, asteroid, etc. Do not capitalize the
words sun and moon. Capitalize Earth when it is used to refer to the planet.
Alpha Centauri Mercury
Canis Major the Milky Way
Little Dipper North Star
A.28. SOIL NAMES
A.2SA, Capitalize the name of a soil classification.
Alpine Meadow Half Bog
Chernozem Prairie
A.29. TRADE NAMES
A.29A. Capitalize a trade name, variety name, or market grade. Do not capitalize a common noun
following such a name.
Choice lamb (market grade)
Formica (trade name)
Orion {trade name)
Appendix A-24
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.32A
Polaroid film [tradename)
Red Radiance rose {variety)
Yellow Stained cotton [market grade)
A.30. SINGLE AND MULTIPLE LETTERS USED AS WORDS OR PARTS OF
COMPOUNDS
A.30A. Capitalize the pronoun / and the interjection 0 (Oh). Capitalize a letter that refers to a letter of
the alphabet as such.
For corporate names with compound terms, see A.2A. For titles beginning with a compound term,
see A.4A. If a compound term appears elsewhere in the resource with a single letter or multiple letters
capitalized, follow the capitalization as found.
A major U-boat
e-commerce vitamin B
H-bomb X-ray
iTV Y is for yellow
pcAnywhere
A.3L HYPHENATED COMPOUNDS
A.31A. If the rules require the capitalization of a hyphenated compound, capitalize the first part, and
capitalize the second, etc., part if it is a noun or a proper adjective or if it has the same force as the
first part.
Twentieth-century Blue-Black
Basket-Maker Secretary-Treasurer
A.31B. Do not capitalize the second part if it modifies the first part or if the two parts constitute a
single word.
French-speaking
Twenty- five
Co-ordinate
A.32. HYPHENATED PREFIXES
A.32A. Do not capitalize a prefix joined by a hyphen to a capitalized word unless other rules require
its capitalization.
ex-President Roosevelt trans-Siberian
pre-Cambrian un-American
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A-25
A.33
CAPITALIZATION
Foreign Languages
A.33.
GENERAL RULE
A.33A. Apply the rules for the capitalization of English (A.12-A.32) to the capitalization of a foreign
tanguage unless a contrary rule is provided in a section below treating that language or unless the
romanization table for the language adopted by the cataloguing agency provides otherwise.
A.34. CAPITALIZATION OF ROMANIZED HEADINGS AND TITLES
A.34A. Capitalize words in romartized headings and titles as instructed in A.33. If the language has no
system of capitalization, capitalize the first word of a title or a sentence and the first word of the name
of a corporate body or a subdivision of a corporate body. Capitalize proper names according to English
usage.
A.35A. Proper names and their derivatives
A.35A1. Do not capitalize names of peoples, races, and residents of specific localities: 6T>JirapnH;
cocpMHeu; ceMHT.
A.35A2. Do not capitalize names of religions and their adherents: 6y,HH3'bM; xpHCTiuiHCTBo;
jiioTepaueiT.
A.35A3. Do not capitalize proper adjectives: co{Dhhckh yjiiimi.
A.35B. Names of regions, localities, and geographic features, including streets, parks,
etc.
A.35B1. Capitalize the first word unless it is a common noun. Capitalize other words only if they are
proper nouns: OpJioso raeaflo; Epar Ha cnoHOBaTa koct; Crapa 3aropa; OxpH^CKo e3epo; ceno
Eejiima; HepBeHHiiT njiomajt; yji. IIIanKa.
A.35C. Names of countries and administrative divisions
A.35C1. Capitalize the first word and proper nouns in names of countries and administrative subdivi-
sions: OSeaHHeHa apaScKa penySjiHKa; Hapo/ma penySjiHKa E~bnrapHii; CodrafiCKa oSjiacT;
MuHiicrepcTso Ha cencKocronaHCKOTo np oh3boactb o .
A.35D. Names of corporate bodies
A.35D1. Capitalize only the first word and proper nouns in the names of corporate bodies:
EtjirapcKa KOMyHHCTiraecKa napTiui; OpraHH3aan>i Ha oSeflHHeHHTe Hapoflii; ZfepxcaBHa
6ii6jiHOTeKa "Bacmi KoJiapoB"; B-hJirapcKH nepBeH Kpi>CT.
A.35E. Titles of persons
A.35E1. Capitalize csera and titles of royalty, high government officials, and high ecclesiastical offi-
cials if they are followed by a name: MHHHCTbp ^IacKaJiOB; Cbcth KniiMeHT.
A.35E2. Capitalize any title occurring in conjunction with the name of a weil-known personage:
Oreu riaiicHft; XaascH flHMHTbp; Eaw Knpo.
A.35.
BULGARIAN
Appendix A-26
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.36E1
A.35E3. In general, do not capitalize other titles: mhhhctt>p; Kpaji; OTeq; npotpecop; oxeu Eopiic,
A.35F. Personal pronouns
A.35F1. Do not capitalize a3.
A.35F2. Capitalize Bae (Butt), Bh, Bac, and BaM when used in formal address.
A.35G. Names of calendar divisions
A.35G1. Do not capitalize the names of days of the week and of months.
A.35H. Names of historic events, etc.
A.35H1. Capitalize the first word and proper nouns in the names of historic events, etc.: ribpBaTa
CBCTOBHa BOHHa; BejiHKara OKTOMBpHHCKa coytiajiHCTtwecica peBOJiiomw; Bi>3pa^maHeTo;
BHTKaTa npii Kocobo nojie.
A.36. CZECH (BOHEMIAN)
A.36A, Proper names and their derivatives
A.36A1. Capitalize only the distinctive word in geographic names consisting of a distinctive word and
a generic word: Tichy ocean.
A.36A2. Capitalize the first word and any other word that is a derivative of a proper name in names
of streets: V invalidovny; Na ruzkit; Na Smetance.
A.36B. Names of corporate bodies
A.36B1. In general, capitalize only the first word in names of corporate bodies: Ceskoslovenskd
republika; Ceskd akademie ved a urneni; Bratncestf, Milosrdnibratn.
A.36B2. Do not capitalize names of branches of schools, conservatories, universities, ministries, and
departments of government: ministerstvo skolstvf; zdvodm rada.
A.36C. Titles of persons
A.36C1. Do not capitalize titles of persons: doktor; krdl; ministr, svaty.
A.36D. PersonaJ pronouns
A.36D1. Do not capitalize jd,
A.36D2. Capitalize the pronouns of formal address: Ty, Tvuj, Tobe\ Vy, Vdm; Vds, VdS.
A.36E. Names of calendar divisions
A.36E1. Do not capitalize the names of days of the week and of months.
DANISH. See Scandinavian languages.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A-27
A.37
CAPITALIZATION
A.37. DUTCH
A.37A. Single letter as the first word
A.37A1. Capitalize the first word of a sentence if it is the interjection O, the pronoun U, or a letter
referring to a letter of the alphabet as such (e.g., A is een aapje).
A.37A2. Do not capitalize any other single letter that is the first word of a sentence or the first word
of a proper name. Capitalize the next word: 's Avonds is hex koud; 'k Weet met wat hij zegt; 's
Gravenhage.
A.37B. Prefixes in personal names
A.37B1. Capitalize the prefixes de, ten, van, if not preceded by the Christian name.
A.37C. Personal pronouns
A.37C1. Do not capitalize ik.
A.37C2. In general, capitalize U, Uw, and Gij in personal correspondence.
A.37D. Names of calendar divisions
A.37D1. Do not capitalize the names of days of the week and of months.
A.38. FINNISH
A.38A. Names of corporate bodies
A.38A1. Capitalize only the first word and proper nouns in names of state and local government agen-
cies, courts, and church bodies: Erillinen komppania Kontula; Hels'tngin kaupunginkirjasto; Kauppa-ja
teollisuusministerio; Kirkon ulkomaanasiain toimtkunta; Korkein oikeus; Suomen Unesco-toimikunta.
A.38A2. In general, capitalize only the first word and proper nouns in names of scientific and eco-
nomic institutions of the state: Kansallismuseon esihistoriallinen osasto; Geodeettinen laitos; Helsingin
yliopisto. Exceptions: Suomen Akatemia; Suomen Pankki.
A.38A3. In the names of other institutions, societies, and firms, follow the usage of the body. If the
usage is not known, capitalize all words.
A.38B. Names of buildings
A.38B1. Capitalize proper nouns in the names of buildings: kaupungintalo; Helsingin kulttuwitcdo.
A.39. FRENCH
A.39A. Proper names and their derivatives
A.39A1. Do not capitalize names of members of religious groups, sects, religious orders, politicai and
other organizations, names of religions, and names of languages: les jesuites; les democrates; le
bouddhisme; I 'anglais (the English language).
A.39A2. Do not capitalize adjectives derived from names of members of religious groups, sects, reli-
gious orders, political and omer organizations, names of religions, names of languages, geographic
names, and adjectives denoting nationality: la religion catholique; la region alpine; le peuple francais.
Appendix A-28
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.40A1
A.39A3. Capitalize nouns denoting nationality: les Frangais.
A.39A4. Do not capitalize a common noun used as a generic word in a geographic name: la mer du
Nord; Vile aux Oiseaux.
A.39B. Names of corporate bodies
A.39B1. In general, capitalize the first word, any adjectives preceding the first noun, the first noun,
and all proper nouns in the names of corporate bodies: Societe de chimie physique; Grand Orchestre
symphonique de la R.T.B; Eglise reformee de France. Notable exceptions: Societe des Nations; Nations
Unies.
A.39B2. Capitalize the nouns and adjectives in hyphenated corporate names: le Theatre-Francais.
A.39C. Prefixes in names of persons
A.39C1. Capitalize prefixes consisting of an article or a contraction of an article and a preposition: La
Fontaine; Du Cange,
A.39D, Titles of persons
A.39D1. Do not capitalize titles designating rank or office: le mi; le mimstre; le pape Leon X.
A.39D2. Capitalize titles of address and titles of respectful address or reference: Monsieur, Mme de
Lafayette; Son Eminence; Sa Majeste le roi de France.
A.39D3. Do not capitalize saint (sainte, etc.) when it refers exclusively to a person; otherwise capital-
ize it: saint Thomas More; but la cathedrale Saint-Lambert; Vete de la Saint-Martin.
A.39E. Personal pronouns
A.39E1. Do not capitalize a personal pronoun.
A.39F. Names of calendar divisions
A.39F1. Do not capitalize the names of days of the week and of months.
A.39G. Miscellaneous
A.39G1. Do not capitalize rue and its synonyms: rue de la Nation; avenue de I'Opera.
A.39G2. Do not capitalize eglise when it indicates a building: I' eglise Notre-Dame. Capitalize it when
it refers to the Church as an institution.
A.39G3, Capitalize etat when denoting the nation: le Conseil d'Etat.
A.40. GERMAN 4
A.40A. Nouns
A.40A1. Capitalize all nouns and words used as nouns: das Buck; das Geben; die Armen; das
intime Du (reference to the word du); Not tun; ausser Acht lassen; aufs Neue; fiirs Erste; im Voraus;
4. Authoritative guidance on German capitalization can be found in the current volume of Duden : die deutsche
Rechtschreibung. The 22nd edition, published in 2000, incorporates the changes mandated by the spelling reform officially
introduced on August 1, 1998.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A-29
A.40B
CAPITALIZATION
die Ubrigen; heute Mittag; im Grossen und Ganzen; das Hundert; das Tausend (but hundert or tausend
when used as cardinal numbers; see A.40Dlb).
A.40B, Proper names and their derivatives
A.40B1. In general, do not capitalize proper adjectives: die deutsche Sprache.
A.40B2. Capitalize adjectives that consist of a personal name followed by an apostrophe and the end-
ing -sche (including its inflected forms): die Danvin'sche Evolutionstheorie; das Wackernagel'sche
Gesetz; die Goethe' schen Dramen, Do not capitalize other adjectives containing a personal name: die
platonische Liebe; sine kafkaeske Stimmung,
A.40B3. Capitalize indeclinable adjectives derived from geographic names: Schweizer Ware; die
Ziircher Burger.
A.40B4. Capitalize adjectives, pronouns, and numerals used as parts of a name or title: Alexander der
Grosse; das Schweizerische Konsulat; Seine Excellent, Friedrich der Zweite; Bund der Technischen
Angesteilten und Beamten; der Ersle der Klasse (expressing rank). See also A.40Dlb.
A.40C. Pronouns
A.40C1. Do not capitalize ich.
A.40C2. Capitalize Sie and Ihr and their inflected forms when used in formal address.
A.40D. Miscellaneous
A.40D1, Do not capitalize the following:
a) pronouns (see also A.40C): jemand, ein jeder, der eine . . . der andere, die beiden, die meisten
b) cardinal numbers under one million: hundert, tausend, an die zwanzig, wir zwei, alle drei, bis
drei zdhlen
c) adverbs: mittags, anfangs, morgen, montags
d) verbal phrases: preisgeben, teilhaben, wundernehmen, zuteil werden, zumute seiti (but zu Mute
sein), schuld sein (words such as schuld or leid are considered to be adjectives when used in
conjunction with the verbs sein, werden, or bleiberi)
e) adjectives modifying nouns that are implied if the noun has been expressed elsewhere in the
same sentence: Hier ist die teste Arbeit, dort die schlechteste
f) fractions, when they directly precede a noun or a cardinal number: ein viertel Kilogramm (but
urn ein Viertel vor acht).
AA1. HUNGARIAN
A.41A. Proper names and their derivatives
A.41A1, Do not capitalize nouns denoting nationality: az oroszok.
A.41A2. Do not capitalize adjectives derived from proper names: budapesti.
A.41B. Titles of persons
A.41B1. Capitalize titles used in direct address: Felseges Uram.
A.41B2. Do not capitalize titles of nobility, including those consisting of an adjectival term derived
from place of origin, etc.: grqfTeleki Pal; kormendi Frim Jakab.
Appendix A-30
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.42F1
A.41C. Personal pronouns
A.41C1. Do not capitalize in.
A.41C2. Capitalize pronouns used in formal address: Maga.
A.41D. Names of calendar divisions
A.41D1. Do not capitalize the names of days of the week and of months.
A.42. ITALIAN
A.42A. Proper names and their derivatives
A*42A1. Do not capitalize names of members of religious groups, sects, religious orders, political
and other organizations, names of religions, and names of languages: / protestanti; i benedettini; un
democratico; il buddhismo; ilfrancese (the French language).
A.42A2. Do not capitalize adjectives derived from names of members of religious groups, sects, reli-
gious orders, political and other organizations, names of religions, names of languages, geographic and
personal names, and adjectives denoting nationality: la religione cattolica; la flora alpina; il popolo
italiano; iconografia dantesca.
A.42A3. Capitalize nouns denoting nationality: gl'Italtani.
A.42B. Names of corporate bodies
A.42B1. In general, capitalize only the first word, proper nouns, religious terms, and the word
following an adjective denoting royal or pontifical privilege in the names of corporate bodies: Istituto
nazionale di fisica nucleare; Accademia nationals de Santa Cecilia; Universita cattolica del Sacro
Cuore; Pontificio Seminario francese; Chiesa evangelica italiana. Notable exceptions: Societa delle
Nazioni; Nazioni Unite; Croce Rossa.
A.42C. Titles of persons
A.42C1. Do not capitalize titles of persons except for ceremonial titles consisting of a possessive pro-
noun and a noun expressing an abstract quality: signora; il signor Donati; il duca d'Aosta; Umberto I,
re d'ltalia; but Sua Santita; Sua Altezza Reale il principe Umberto; le LL MM. il re e la regina.
A.42C2. Do not capitalize san (santo, etc.) when referring exclusively to a person; capitalize it when
it is abbreviated and when it is an integral part of the name of a place, a building, etc.: san Francesco
d'Assisi; but S. Girolama; Castel Sant'Angelo.
A.42D. Personal pronouns
A.42D1. Do not capitalize io.
A.42D2. Capitalize the pronouns of formal address: Ella; Lei; Low.
A.42E. Names of calendar divisions
A.42E1. Do not capitalize the names of days of the week and of months.
A.42F. Names of centuries
A.42F1. Capitalize the proper names of centuries: il Cinquecento; il Selcento; but il sedicesimo secolo.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A-31
A.42G
CAPITALIZATION
A.42G. Miscellaneous
A.42G1. Do not capitalize via and its synonyms: via Vittorio Veneto; corso Umberto I.
A.42G2. Do not capitalize chiesa when it indicates a building: la chiesa di S. Maria degli Angeli.
Capitalize it when it refers to the Church as an institution.
A.42G3. Capitalize stato when denoting the nation: Consiglio di Stato.
A.43. LATIN
A.43A. Follow the instructions in AJ2-A.32.
NORWEGIAN. See Scandinavian languages.
A.44. POLISH
A.44A. Proper names and their derivatives
A.44A1. Do not capitalize names of residents of cities and towns: warszawianin.
A.44A2. Do not capitalize adjectives derived from proper names: mickiewiczowski.
A.44A3. Do not capitalize names of religions and their adherents and names of members of religious
orders: katolicyzm; katolik; mahametanin; jezuici.
A.44A4. Capitalize each part of a compound geographic name unless the distinctive word is in nomi-
native case and can stand aione; in that case, capitalize only the distinctive word: Morze Battyckie; but
jezioro Narocz.
A.44A5. Do not capitalize geographic names applied to wines, dances, etc.: tokaj; krakowiak.
A.44A6. Do not capitalize names of administrative districts and geographic adjectives: wojewodztwo
poznanskie; diecezja lomiynska.
A.44B. Names of corporate bodies
A.44BL Capitalize all words except conjunctions and prepositions in the names of corporate bodies:
Towarzystwo Naukowe w Toruniu; Ewangelicko-Augsburski Koscidi.
A.44C. Titles of persons
A.44C1. Do not capitalize titles of persons except in direct address: papiei; krdl; swigty.
A.44D. Personal pronouns
A.44D1. Do not capitalize ja.
A.44D2. Capitalize the pronouns of formal address; Ty, Tobie, Tw6j; On, Ona, Jego, Jej, Jemu; Wy,
Warn, Was.
A.44E. Names of calendar divisions
A.44EL Do not capitalize the names of days of the week and of months.
Appendix A~32
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.46B3
A.44F, Names of historic events, etc.
A.44F1. Do not capitalize names of historic events and wars: pokoj wersalski; wojna siedmioletma.
A.45. PORTUGUESE
A.45A. Derivatives of proper names
A.45A1. Do not capitalize derivatives of proper names: os homens alemaes; os franceses.
A.45B. Titles of persons
A.45B1. Capitalize names of positions or posts of dignitaries and words [hat designate titles:
o Arcebispo de Braga; o Duque de Caxias; o Presidente da Republica; Senhor Professor.
A.45C. Personal pronouns
A.45C1. Do not capitalize eu.
A.45D. Religious terms
A.45D1. Capitalize igreja when referring to the Church as an institution.
A.45E, Names of calendar divisions
A.45E1. Do not capitalize the names of days of the week and of months.
A.46. RUSSIAN
A.46A. Proper names and their derivatives
A.46A1. Do not capitalize prefixes, prepositions, and conjunctions forming part of a proper name,
except when they are connected to the following part of the name by a hyphen: (pOH Kjiay3ennii; Baa
BexxoBeH; BaH-ror.
A.46A2. Do not capitalize names of peoples, races, and residents of specific localities: apa6; tszukhk;
MOCKBHHH.
A.46A3. Do not capitalize the names of religions and their adherents: KaTOJinmoM; KaxoJiHK.
A.46A4. Do not capitalize proper nouns that are parts of adverbs: no-nyiUKHHCKH.
A.46B. Names of regions, localities, and geographic features, including streets, parks,
etc.
A.46E1. Do not capitalize a common noun forming part of a geographic name: Mbic TopH; ocrpoB
Pynojibdpa; KaHan MocKBa-Bojira.
A.46B2. Capitalize a common noun forming an integral part of a name: KptfBOH Por; EeJiaJi
UepKOBL; BoreMCKHH Hec.
A.46B3. Capitalize the common noun if it is a foreign word that has not become a part of the Russian
language: Pio-Ae-na-Ile (Pro — meaning street, lie— meaning peace); Cbip-JJapbH (J^api.^— meaning
river).
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A-33
A.46B4
CAPITALIZATION
A.46B4, Do not capitalize the title or rank of the person in whose honour a place is named: oCTpos
KopojieBbi BiiKTopiiH; Mbic KaiiHTana WK.Qpaia.m-
A.46B5. Do not capitalize adjectives derived from geographic names: MOCKOBCiaie vjihuh.
A.46B6. Do not capitalize geographic names applied to wines, species of animals, birds, etc.:
Maxtepa; xepec; ceHSepHap.
A.46C. Names of countries and administrative divisions
A.46C1. Capitalize the first word in the commonly accepted names of groups of countries:
EajiKaHCKne cTpaHM.
A.46C2. Capitalize unofficial but commonly accepted names of countries, cities, and territorial divi-
sions: CoseTCKHH C0103; CTpaHa Cobctob; LTpHypanbe; BejtoxaMeHHas (for Moscow).
A.46C3. Capitalize administrative divisions of the USSR as follows:
a) Capitalize every word in the names of republics and autonomous republics: EamKHpCKafl
Ab TOHOMHa.fi CoBeTCKaa ComiajiHCTiiHCCKaH PecnyoViHKa.
b) Capitalize only the first word in the names of provinces, autonomous provinces, territories,
regions, and village Soviets: AriMa-ATHHCKafl o0JiacTb; ITpHMopcKH ii Kpafl; Komh-
nepMAUKHH HauHOHajibHbift OKpyr; Eropm hhckhh pafioH; KpacHHHCKitfi cejibco3eT.
c) Capitalize every word in the names of the highest Soviet and non-Russian governmental units
and Communist Party organizations except those in parentheses and napTiia ; BepxosHbiH
CoBeT CCCP (also of the Union republics and autonomous republics); Cobct Coio3a, Cobct
HattHOHajiLHOCTeS; Bcecoi03Has Kom My h hct m&CKZH napTKLH (SojibuieuHKOs); PefixCTar;
Konrpecc CHIA; npaBHTejibCTByiomHS CeHaT.
d) Capitalize only the first word and proper nouns in the names of other governmental units:
TocyflapcTBeHHa^ njiaHosafi komhccha CCCP; HapoxtHbift KOMwccapiiaT HHOCTpaHHbix
aeji; BoeHHtifi coBex 3aKaBKa3CKoro BoeHHoro OKpyra.
e) Do not capitalize the names of bureaus when used in the plural and when used in a general
sense: coseTbi HapoflHbix KOMiiccapOB; HapoflHMH KOMHccapHa-r.
f) Capitalize CoseT in CoBer flenyraxoB TpynmuHXcs : 3aropCKHH pafioKHbiB Cobct
jienyTaTOB TpysninHXCfi.
A.46D. Names of corporate bodies
A.46D1. Capitalize only the first word and proper nouns in names of corporate bodies: AicaneMmi
HayK CCCP; KHjuKHaa nanaTa; npocpeccHOnajibHuit cok)3 p sSoth hkob BbicmeS hikojim h
fiaytHHX ynpejKHeHiiH; /Jom KHiirH.
A.46D2. If part of the name of a corporate body is in quotation marks, capitalize only the first word
and proper nouns within the quotation marks: 3asoa "<I>pe3ep"; cobx03 O'TIyTb k couHajiii3My".
A.46D3. If a corporate body is also known by a part of its name, capitalize the first word of the part
when it appears in conjunction with the full name: rocyjapCTBeHHbiS opneHa JleHtma
aKa£eMHHecKHii Eojibmofl TeaTp (SojTbiiiOM xeaTp).
A.46D4. Do not capitalize the following words in the names of congresses, conferences, etc.: Cbeza;
KOHdjepeHHHJi; cecciia; njienyM.
A.46D5. Do not capitalize coseT when used to refer to the council of a society or institution.
A.46E. Titles of persons
A.46E1. Capitalize the titles of the highest government officials: ITpesceflaTejib CoBeTa HapoflHbix
KoMHecapoB; Mapnian Cobctckoto Coio3a.
Appendix A-34
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.47E3
A.46F. Pronouns
A.46F1. Do not capitalize a,
A.46F2. Capitalize pronouns of formal address: Bbi; BaM; Bac.
A.46G. Names of calendar divisions
A.46G1. Do not capitalize the names of days of the week and of months.
A.46H. Names of historic events, etc.
A.46H1. Capitalize the first word, the distinctive word, and proper nouns in the names of historic
periods and events: BejiHK&a OKTJi6pi.CK£Ui comianHCTmecitaji peBomomia; Bo3poa:-fleHHe;
TpeTbfl pecnySjiHKa; napHaccKaa KOMMvna; Kposasoe BocicpeceHbe; JTchckhh paccTpeji;
EopOflHHCKHH 60K.
A.46H2. Do not capitalize the names of the five-year plans: TpeTtn CTajiHHCKasi naTHJiexKa; but
copeBHOBaHHe hmchh TpeTbefi CTanHHCKoS ITht uneTKH .
A,46H3, Do not capitalize Bofina in the names of wars: ^paHKO-ITpyccKaa BOiiHa; PyccKo-
^InoHCKafl BOHHa; BejiHKas OreHecTBeHHas Boima; OreHecTseHHaii BOHHa.
A.47. SCANDINAVIAN LANGUAGES
A.47A. Derivatives of proper names
A.47A1. Do not capitalize adjectives derived from proper names: europeisk; kfibenhavnsk; luthersk;
svenxk.
A.47B. Names of corporate bodies
A.47B1, In general, capitalize the first word and the word following an adjective denoting royal privi-
lege in the names of corporate bodies. Capitalize other words, such as proper nouns, according to the
appropriate rule: Kungl Biblioteket; Ministeriet for kulturelle anliggender, Selskabet for dansk
skolehistorie.
A.47C. Compound names
A.47C1. In general, capitalize only the first word of a compound name, other than a compound per-
sonal name: Forenta staterna; Kronborg slot; Norske kirke.
A.47D. Titles of persons
A.47D1. In general, do not capitalize titles of persons: fru Larsen; kong Haakon VII; Gustav, prins av
Vasa.
A.47E. Personal pronouns
A.47E1. Danish. Do not capitalize jeg. Capitalize De; Dem; Deres. Capitalize the familiar form /
(you) to distinguish it from t (in).
A.47E2. Norwegian. Do not capitalize jeg. Capitalize De; Dem ; Deres; Dykk; Dykkar,
A.47E3. Swedish. Do not capitalize jag. Capitalize Ni, Eder, and Er in correspondence.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix ASS
A.47F
CAPITALIZATION
A.47F. Names of calendar divisions
A.47F1. Do not capitalize the names of days of the week, of months, and of holidays: Jul; ny&r.
A.48. SERBO-CROATIAN (ROMAN AND CYRILLIC ALPHABETS)
A.48A. Proper names and their derivatives
A.48A1. Do not capitalize names of peoples and races: bijelac; crnac; semit.
A.48A2. Do not capitalize proper adjectives: srpskohrvatski jezik.
A.48A3. Do not capitalize names of religions and their adherents: katoliSanstvo; katolik.
A.48B. Names of regions, localities, and geographic features, including streets, parks,
etc.
A.48B1. Capitalize only the first word and proper nouns: Tetovska koilina; Velika Morava; Btiski istok;
Uiica bosanska; Ulica Branka Radicevica; Trg zrtava fasizma; Park bratstva i jedinstva.
A.48C. Names of administrative divisions of countries
A.48C1. Do not capitalize names of administrative divisions of countries: primorsko-krajiska oblast\
zagrebacki kotar.
A.48D. Names of corporate bodies
A.4801, Capitalize only the first word and proper nouns in the names of corporate bodies:
Jugoslovenska akademija znanosti i umjetnosti; Udruzenje knjizevnika Srbije; Hrvatsko narodno
kazaliSte u Zagrebu; Savez komunista Jugoslavije; Centralni komitet Saveza komunista Jugoslavije.
A.48E. Titles of persons
A.48E1. Do not capitalize titles of persons: predsednik Tito; kralj Georg; ministar; sveti Petar. How-
ever, capitalize sveti when it appears in the name of a holiday (see A.48H2),
A.48F. Personal pronouns
A.48F1. Do not capitalize ja.
A.48F2. Capitalize the pronouns of formal address: Ti, Tvoj, 77; Vi, Vam, Vds, Vas.
A.48G. Names of calendar divisions
A.48G1. Do not capitalize names of days of the week and of months.
A.48H, Names of historic events, holidays, etc.
A.48H1. Capitalize proper nouns in the names of historic periods and events: kameno doba; srednji
vijek; oktobarska revolucija; boj na Misaru; prvi srpski ustanak.
A.48H2. Capitalize the first word and proper nouns in the names of holidays: Bogie; Veliki Setvrtak;
Nova godina; Sveti Petar.
Appendix A-36
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
CAPITALIZATION
A.50H1
A,49, SLOVAK
A. 49 A. Follow the instructions in A.36.
A.50. SLOVENIAN
A.50A. Proper names and their derivatives
A.50A1. Do not capitalize names of peoples and races: arijec; semit; cmec.
A.50A2. Capitalize only the distinctive words in the names of nationalities that consist of more than
one word: severni Korejec; zahodni Nemec.
A.50A3. Do not capitalize proper adjectives: slovenski jezik.
A.50A4. Do not capitalize the names of religions and their adherents: katolicizem; katolican.
A.50B. Names of regions, localities, and geographic features, including streets, parks,
etc.
A.50B1. Capitalize only the first word and proper nouns: Ziljska dolina; Novo mesto; Skofja Loka;
Daljni vzhod; Otok kraljice Viktorije; Rtic dobrega upanja; Ulica stare pravde.
A.50C. Names of countries and administrative divisions
A.50C1. Capitalize the first word and proper nouns in the names of countries and administrative sub-
divisions: Federativna socialisticna republika Jugoslavia; Zdruzene drfave Amerike.
A.50D. Names of corporate bodies
A.50D1. Capitalize the first word and proper nouns in the names of corporate bodies: DruStvo
slovenskih knjizevnikov; Drzavna zalozba Slovenije.
A.50E. TiHes of persons
A.50E1. Do not capitalize titles of persons: predsednik; sekretar, doktor; martial Tito; kralj Matjaz;
sveti Peter. However, capitalize sveti when it appears in the name of a holiday (see A.50H).
A.50F. Personal pronouns
A.50F1. Do not capitalize jaz-
A.50F2. Capitalize the pronouns of formal address: 71, Tebe, Tebi, s Teboj; Vidva, Vidve, Vaju, Varna;
Vi, Vas, Vam, z Vami.
A.50G. Names of calendar divisions
A,50G1. Do not capitalize the names of days of the week and of months.
A.50H. Names of historic events, holidays, etc.
A.S0H1. Capitalize proper nouns in the names of historic events, holidays, etc: ledena doba;
renesansa; francoska revolucija; boj na MiSaru; prva srbska vstaja; boziZ; velika no£\ Sveti Peter.
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix A~37
A.51
CAPITALIZATION
A.51. SPANISH
A.51A. Derivatives of proper names
A.51A1. Do not capitalize derivatives of proper names: las mujeres colombianas.
A.51A2. Do not capitalize adjectives used substantively; los franceses.
A.51B. Titles of persons
A.51B1. Capitalize titles of honour and address only when they are abbreviated: senor, Sr.; doctor,
Dr.; general, Gral.
A.51B2. Capitalize Su Excelencia, Su Majestad, etc., when used alone, whether written out or abbre-
viated. Do not capitalize these words when they are used with a name or another title: su majestad
Juan Carlos; su majestad el Rey.
A.51C. Personal pronouns
A.51C1. Do not capitalize yo.
A.51C2. Capitalize the pronouns of formal address: Vd., Vds. (Ud., Uds.).
A.51D. Religious terms
A.51D1, Capitalize igtesia when it refers to the Church as an institution.
A.51E. Names of calendar divisions
A.51E1, Do not capitalize the names of days of the week and of months.
A.S1F. Questions within a sentence
A.51F1. In general, do not capitalize the first word of a question occurring within a sentence: Cuando
viene la noche icomo se puede ver?
SWEDISH. See Scandinavian languages.
A.52. UKRAINIAN
A. 5 2 A. Follow the instructions in A. 46.
Appendix A-38
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
APPENDIX B
ABBREVIATIONS
Contents
B,
,5
GENERAL RULE
B.
.2
HEADINGS
B.
,3
UNIFORM TITLES
B.
.4
TITLES AND STATEMENTS OF RESPONSIBILITY
B.
.5
OTHER PARTS OF THE CATALOGUE ENTRY
B.
.6
CORRESPONDING WORDS IN ANOTHER LANGUAGE
B.
.7
COMPOUND WORDS
B.
.8
INFLECTED LANGUAGES
B
.9
ROMAN ALPHABET ABBREVIATIONS
B.
.10
CYRILLIC ALPHABET ABBREVIATIONS
B
.11
GREEK ALAPHABET ABBREVIATIONS
B
.12
HEBREW ALPHABET ABBREVIATIONS
B
.13
ABBREVIATIONS USED IN CITING BIBLIOGRAPHIC SOURCES
B
.14
NAMES OF CERTAIN COUNTRIES, STATES, PROVINCES, TERRITORIES, ETC.
B
.15
NAMES OF THE MONTHS
BX GENERAL RULE
B.1A. Use abbreviations in catalogue entries as instructed in B.2-B.8. Use the abbreviations pre-
scribed in B.9-BJ5.
B.2. HEADINGS
B.2A. Use only the following categories of abbreviations in headings:
1) those that are integral parts of the heading (e.g., St. (Saint)), if the person or corporate body uses
the abbreviation
AACR2 Revision 2002
Appendix B-l
B.3
ABBREVIATIONS
2) designations of function (e.g., comp.) (see 21.0D)
3) certain names of larger places added to the name of another place (see 23.4) or to the name of a
corporate body (see 24.4C2)
4) certain terms used with dates (e.g., b.,fl.) {see 22.17)
5) distinguishing terms added to names of persons, if they are abbreviated in the source from which
they are taken {see 22.15B, 22.I9B).
B.3. UNIFORM TITLES
B.3A. Use oniy the following categories of abbreviations in uniform titles:
1) those that are integral parts of the title
2) designations of parts of a work as instructed in a particular rule (e.g., N.T. {New Testament))
(see25.18A2)
3) the ampersand (&) in listing languages.
B.4. TITLES AND STATEMENTS OF RESPONSIBILITY
B.4A. Use only the following categories of abbreviations in the title and statement of responsibility
area, any statement of responsibility in the edition area, and titles and statements of responsibility in
the series area and contents notes:
1) those found in the prescribed sources of information for the particular area
2) i.e., et ai, and their equivalents in nonroman scripts (see 1.0F, 1.1F5).
B.5. OTHER PARTS OF THE CATALOGUE ENTRY
B.5A. Edition statement
B.5AL Abbreviate words, or substitute one form of abbreviation with the prescribed abbreviation, in
the edition statement, according to B.9-B.12, B.14-B.15.
B.5B. Terms used with numbering in the series statement
B.5B1. Abbreviate words, or substitute one form of abbreviation with the prescribed abbreviation, for
terms used with numbering in the series statement, according to B.9-B.12.
B.5C. Other areas
B.SC1. Abbreviate words in the catalogue entry which are not covered by B.2-B.5B, subject to the
limitations specified in footnotes to B.9. However, do not do so if the brevity of the statement makes
abbreviations unnecessary or if the resulting statement might not be clear. Do not use a single-letter
abbreviation to begin a note. Do not abbreviate words in quoted notes.
B.6. CORRESPONDING WORDS IN ANOTHER LANGUAGE
B.6A, Use an abbreviation for the corresponding word in another language if the abbreviation com-
monly used in tiiat language has the same spelling. In case of doubt, do not use the abbreviation.
Appendix B-2
AACR2 Revision 2002
ABBREVIATIONS
B.9
B.7. COMPOUND WORDS
B.7A. Use a prescribed abbreviation for the last part of a compound word (e.g., Textausg. for
Textausgabe).
B.8. INFLECTED LANGUAGES
B.8A. In inflected languages, use the abbreviation of a word listed in B.9-B.15 in the nominative case
for an inflected form of that word. If, however, the abbreviation includes the final letterfs) of the word,
modify the abbreviation to show the final letter(s) of the inflected form (e.g., jiHTepaTypa, JiHT-pa;
JiHTepaTypbi, jizT-pbi).
B.9. ROMAN ALPHABET ABBREVIATIONS
(Footnotes for this listing appear on page B-6.)
TERM
ABBREVIATION
TERM
ABBREVIATION
aastafcaik
aastak
black and white
b&w
Abdruck
Abdr.
bogtrykkeri
bogtr.
abgedruckt
abgedr.
boktrykkeri
boktr.
Abteilung, Abtheilung
Abt.
book
bk.
accompaniment
acc.
bom
b.
afdeling
afd.
bSvftett
bGv.
aflevering
afl.
broj
br.
altitude
alt. 1
Brother, -s
Bro., Bros. 4
alto
A 2
Buchdrucker, -ei
Buchdr.
and
& 3
Buchhandlung
Buchh.
and others
et al.
bulletin
bull.
Anno Domini
A.D.
bytes per inch
bpi
approximately
approx.
capitolo
cap.
argang
arg.
cast
c.
argraffiad
arg.
centimetre, -s
cm.
arranged
arr.
century
cent. 5
arranger
arr.
cetakan
cet.
atdolgozott
atdolg.
chapter
ch.
Auflage
Aufl.
circa
ca.
augmente, -e
augm.
ci'slo
as.
augmented
augm.
colored, coloured
col.
aumentada
aum.
Compagnia
Cia.
aumentato
aum.
Compagnie
Cie
Ausgabe
Ausg.
Companfa
Ci'a.
avdeling
avd.
Company
Co.
Band
Bd.
compare
cf.
band
bd.
compiler
comp. 6
Bandchen
Bdchn.
confer
cf.
Bande
Bde,
copyright
c
baritone
Bar 2
Corporation
Corp.
bass
B 2
corrected
corr.
Before Christ
B.C.
corregido
corr.
bilangan
bil.
corretto, -a
corr.
binary coded decimal
BCD
corrige, -e
corr.
bind
bd.
czeSc
cz.
AACR2 Revision 2002
Appendix B-3
B.9
ABBREVIATIONS
TERM
TERM
r\.L) U iVI_i lr J A I
declination
dec!. 1
imprenta
impr.
deel
d.
smprimerie
impr.
del (Danish, Norwegian,
inch, -es
in.
Swedish)
d.
inches per second
ips
departement
dep.
including
incl.
Department
Dept.
Incorporated
Inc.
diameter
diam.
introduction
in trod.
died
d.
izdSja
izd.
diena
d.
izmenjeno
izm.
djilid
djil.
jaargang
jaarg.
document
doc.
Jahrgang
Jahrg.
dopunjeno
dop.
javftott
jav.
drukarnia
druk.
jilid
j'l-
edici6n
cd.
Kalendae
Kal.
edition, -s
ed., eds.
kiadas
kiad.
edition
cd.
kilometre, -s
km.
editor
cd. 6
kniha
kn.
edizione
ed.
knjiga
knj.
enlarged
enl.
kdtet
kot.
equinox
eq. 1
ksiegarnia
ksieg.
erganzt
erg.
leto
1.
erweitert
erw.
librairic
libr.
establecimiento tipogr&fico
estab. tip.
Lieferung
Lfg.
ct alii
et al.
Limited
Ltd. 4
et cetera
etc.
livraison
iivr.
e\folyam
evf.
maatschappij
mij.
facsimile, -s
facsim., facsims.
manuscript, -s
ms., mss.
fascicle
fasc.
menuo
men.
fascicule
fasc.
mctai
m.
flourished
fl.
metre, -s
m.
folio
fol.
mezzo-soprano
Mz 2
following
ff.
miesiecznik
mies.
foot, feet
ft.
millimetre, -s
mm.
frame, -s
fr.
minute, -s
min.
frames per second
fps
miscellaneous
misc.
fratelli
f.lSi 4
monophonic
mono.
Gebriider
Gebr*
Nachfolger
Nachf. 4
gedruckt
gedr.
nakiad
nakl.
genealogical
geneal.
nakladatelstvf
naki.
godina
g-
naukowy
nauk.
government
govt.
neue Folgc
n.F.
Government Printing Office
G.P.O.
new series
new ser.
Handschrift, -en
Hs., Hss.
New Testament
N.T.
Her (His) Majesty's Stationery
no name (of publisher)
s.n.
Office
H.M.S.O.
no place (of publication)
s.l.
Hermanos
Hnos. 4
nombor
no.
hour, -s
hr.
nomor
no.
id est
i.e.
Nonae
Non.
Idus
Id.
nouveau, nouvelle
nouv.
illustration, -s
ill.
number, -s
no.
illustrator
ill. 6
numbered
numb.
imienia
im.
numer
nr.
Appendix B-4
AACR2 Revision 2002
ABBREVIATIONS
B.9
TERM
ABBREVIATION
TERM
ABBREVIATION
nutnero (Finnish)
n;o
rf >^ti He
roc.
numero (French)
no
vdc7 n i V
rocz.
numero (Italian)
n.
rok
numero (Spanish)
no.
ro zsz .
Nurnmer
Nr.
second
sec
nummer
nr.
scrie
ser.
nuovamente
nuov.
series
sen
odbitka
odb.
sesit
oddzial
oddz.
signature
Old Testament
O.T.
silent
si.
omarbeidet
omarb.
sine Joco
s.l.
oplag
opi.
sine nomine
s.n.
opplae
oppl.
rr
sklad gt6wny
ski s\
opracowanc
oprac.
soprano
s 2
opus
op.
sound
sd. 8
otisk
ot.
stabilimento tipogr^fico
stab. tip.
page, -s
p.
stereophonic
stereo.
paperback
pbk.
stevilka
St.
part, -s
pt., pts. 7
stronica
str.
parte
pt.
s uperintendent
supt.
partie, -s
ptie, pties 7
Superintendent of
phonogram (copyright)
p
Documents
Sunt nF Oof*!
photograph, -s
photo., photos. ^
supplement
suppL
plate number, -s
pi. no.
svazek
sv*
poprawione
poor.
r r
szam
sz.
portrait, -s
port., ports.
tahun
til.
posthumous
posth.
talleres graficos
talk graf.
predelan
pred.
r
Teil, Theil
T.
preface
pref.
tenor
T 2
preliminary
prelim.
tipograffa, tipografica
tlD
printing
print. '
tiskarna
tisk +
privately printed
1 J r
priv. print.
title page
projection
proj. 1
tjetakan
tjeL
prosiren
pros.
torne
t h
przeklad
przekf.
tomo
t.
przerobione
przerob.
towarzystwo
tow t
pseudonym
pseud.
translator
publishing
pub.
typographical
tVTXISI
quadraphonic
quad.
typographic, typographique
tVT>
vr
redakeja
red.
tidarbejdet
udarb.
refondu, -e
ref.
tidgave
re i mpres s ion
reimpr.
udgivtit
report
rcpt*
uit&aaf
1 1 i r (y
reprinted
rcpr.
uitgegeven
uittr
reproduced
rep rod.
reviderade
revid.
Limgearbeitet
umgearb.
revise, -e
rev.
unaccompanied
unacc.
revised
rev.
Universitats-
revolutions per minute
rpm
Buchdrucker, ~ei
Univ.-Buchdr.
revu, -e
rev.
upplaga
uppl +
right ascension
RA 1
utarbeidet
utadx
riveduto
riv.
utgave
utg.
AACR2 Revision 2002
Appendix B-5
B.10 ABBREVIATIONS
TERM
ABBREVIATION
TERM
ABBREVIATION
utgiven
Utg.
wydanie
wyd.
uzupetnione
uzup.
wydawnictwo
wydawn.
verbesserte
verb.
wydziai
Wydz.
vermehrte
verm.
zalozba
Zd.1
volume, -s
v.
zeszyt
zesz.
volume, -s
vol., vols. 10
zvazok
zv.
vuosikerta
vuosik.
zvezek
zv.
vydani
vyci.
B.10. CYRILLIC ALPHABET ABBREVIATIONS
TERM
ABBREVIATION
TERM
ABBREVIATION
OCj HMCria
U.H.
M d Hp JK u y H oJ
UCj rllvicrtll
TT H P rt*TS tt it tr
/^jflL-^t JJ 1 aU,ri n
ZIHCC
Gc3 IMC HH
O.l.
Av IlU JIM C HH bl «
Hon,
TT nw'i n^it
O.M.
tTT TT-iTi*'! *n ►Zk If
AopHCdBcri
HTbpjK.
Cm,
0e3 MJICTO
6.M,
ejieKTpJTOHHH
ejieicrp.
BHflaHHJ!
BHfl.
euepreTHHHHH
enepr.
BHXtaBHHITTBO
BHXl-BO
acejie 3 HOBoposcHbi h
sceji-sop.
BianoBiflanbHHH
BiflH.
3aniaBHe
3 am.
BOeHHMH
BOeH,
h xtpyrae
Hflp.
8CepOCCHHCKHH
Bcepoc.
k T3K jjajiee
H T. ffl-
BCeCOH33HblH
scec.
h TOMy nofloSnoe
h t. n.
BCTyiuieHHe,
inn, arose
BCTynHTCJlLEiLlfi
BCTyn.
H3flaTeiibCTBO
H3fl-BO
BbiflaseitTsa
Bbia-Ba
HMeHH
IIM.
BbinycK
Bbin.
HMneparopcKHH
Hivin.
reorp a idhhcckhh
reorp.
HUCTHTyr
HH-T
reojiorHHeiiKHfi
re on.
HcnpaBJieHHbiii
Hcnp.
rjiaBHHM
nnaB.
Hccne«oB a reni>CKH 8
HCCJI.
ron.
r.
lHCTHTJT
1H-T
rOJIOBHHH
roji.
Kitiira
KHj.
rOpOflCKOH
rop.
KHHrOH3naTejibCTBO
KH-BO
rocyaapcTBeHH mh
roc.
KHHra
KH.
ryGepHCKHH
ryS.
KOMHTCT
KOM-T
flepacaBHHH
flepiK.
JiHTCparypa
JIHT-pa
1. Use only in recording mathematical data in entries for cartographic materials.
2. Use only in notes to indicate voice range of vocal works,
3. Use only in uniform titles in listing languages.
4. Use only in names of firms and other corporate bodies,
5. Use in headings and in indicating the period when a manuscript was probably written.
6. Use only in a heading as a designation of function (see 21. OD).
7. Do not use in recording the extent of the item in the case of music.
8. Do not use in general or specific material designations.
9. Do not use in recording the date of printing in the publication, distribution, etc., area (see 1.4F6, 1.4G4, and 2.4G2).
10. Use at the beginning of a statement and before a roman numeral.
Appendix B-6 AACR2 Revision 2002
ABBREVIATIONS
B.ll
TERM
ABBREVIATION
TERM
ABBEIEVIATION
Jin cpdrypd
JllT-pd
COBCTCKilH
COB.
M Cil.HlI.tlHCKK H
COKpaiUeHHblH
COKp.
My 3bl KtLJIbHbl if
My3.
COUHaJlIlCTiTHeCKHii
counajiHCT.
HEipO^HLIH
Hap.
coutHajitHbiii
con.
HayKOBIIH
HayK,
CT aTHCTKHCCKHtf
CT£1T.
H£lY l iHblH
HaV4*
CTpaHHUJi
CTp.
CTpU HTc JI bHHH
CTpOHT.
OS OpOKH bIH
TeKCTIUlbHblM
TCKCTHJ1.
IrS /"'iT n trtr t_ttj
UUUilU.
TGup CT fri4CL KH H
TeopeT.
oCmCCTBO
06-BO
TeXHHMGCKHH
TexH,
KJ 1 JJt 1 \* 1 BC-TI Qj 11
1 HllUl pdt^JM>I
Tun,
I"*!" 1 TT/* TT P-H Hf*
n t n -r T-TTj f*
■t-i t i" tt _ rf tJt T'rtT'ri q fniw rr
TtlllU Jl« 1 U dUJ Jrl-M,
TiTf Tin TTTJ-T*
TKUU-JIHT*
TT 'J |~> 1 T-T TTTTTT T
TOo apiiCTBO
T - BO
ri rt- tt *i i~v^ i -1
HL>LJ,al Ul .
mnn fl nil TTT &
TO p apt! IIICLTBO
T~BO
n * a T i l^ i rVi R.f'lT T3 T-J TJ T_ T IX
IJtjJCU.
TOM
T-
n P-Tl/^^Tl .-f T" r -1 * T_T TJ T_ TTJ
1 i C JJt viVHJ 1 Utrt H, til 11
TT ftTl/>/ , l -T
llCp^iwiVl.
Tpantl 1 0 pTH bin
Tp&Hcn.
lHJJliil JJtl IJJ Jfl 4 C(^J\>1 H
TT/T. TTTJ m
11UJ1J41 U .
yKpaM rlLKilH
y K P-
TT ft TT W THlf f f*Tf H IT
II0-J1HT
T FTJ IT Fl f^-Tlf^WT-firpfTn JTJ
yiliiiJT^jj^n 1 1_ ± Lrtfiii,
yHHB.
TT fX TT i Tinru IT T.I
11UJ11 1 *1 l J fl>l 11
nojiix
y lipaJJ J ICti lit;
ynp.
TT n-P TTT If 1 TT-T^ TJ T T £1
T~|"t"l.tl TTTJ TT
Jipc/1,HtJl.
yMCUElbiM
npe paSoTe h
npep.
{|}HHaHCOBbIK
(J»HH.
TTTl-TH. X LTTTT TTfkT-JTT, C\ f*TL
il Prl □ J 1JJJ J C rt Jrt (JL L t>
nnnii t tt r tt
I J UUIVl bl LuJ J «
XHM,
IT-n TT CTTJ r'T-xTfLTTT
l_Jcl/l 1 >lrl L.J3I\.H ft
VT>jf1TJTJTxVU
X1M.
pe^aicimE
XyZlO>KCCTBCHHijIH
piK
P"
ueHTpajibfibiii
IlCHTp.
pa^aKqhijf
p3£.
H.
cejicKocxonaHCKH
ceji.-cTon,
BKOHOMH'ieCKHH
3KOH.
CCJl LCKOX035I HCTBeH HfcJH
c.-x.
3JieKTpHMeClCHH
3JieKTp.
ciji lclko rocnonapcbKHH
c.-r.
anepreTHHecKiiH
3Hepr.
CKGpCWeHHH
cicop.
KIpHHHHeCKHfi
topiifl.
B.ll. GREEK ALPHABET ABBREVIATIONS
TERM
ABBREVIATION
TERM
'ASeA^oi'
'A^oi
avad.
kclI dXXot
avev ovoiiaTos
a.6.
fie pas
aveu tottov
a.r.
TiaV£TTL(JTr)fJLlQt>
apiOfxo;
a.p.
fleXr.
revxos
SeArlov
8s At.
St}X.
HkSogis
e«rS,
"EkSotikos OtKOf
'EjcSot. OlKQS
ABBREVIATION
K-O.
riov.
EuAA.
TfJ..
T.
Tvnoyp.
AACR2 Revision 2002
Appendix B-7
B.12
ABBREVIATIONS
B.12. HEBREW ALPHABET ABBREVIATIONS
JDKID'IK
jnjnjH ]m
din i«
moist nxr
main
ABBREVIATION
.^D'lN
K"N
tt"K
1"S«
'ain
TERM
unV trxie ion
oipo ion
dish mj?u
rniTio
1DDD
JJE3~IJJDJ):nKS
ABBREVIATION
D"n
>»
"1*0
'-irra
'CD
.013
.DINS
B.13. ABBREVIATIONS USED IN CITING BIBLIOGRAPHIC SOURCES
B.13A. Use common, self-explanatory abbreviations of the type listed below in citing the source of
data used in the catalogue entry, provided the use of abbreviations does not obscure the language of the
source cited.
TERM
ABBREVIATION
TERM
ABBREVIATION
American
Amer.
directory
direct.
annuaire
ann.
encyclopedia
encycl.
annuario
ann.
English
Engl.
anuario
an.
history
hist.
bibliography
bibl.
Katalog
Kat.
biography
biog.
literature
lit.
British
Brit.
litterature
litt.
catalog (ue)
cat.
museum
mus.
cyclopedia
cycl.
national
nat.
diccionario
dice.
report
rept.
dictionary
diet.
B.14. NAMES OF CERTAIN COUNTRIES, STATES, PROVINCES, TERRITORIES,
ETC.
B.14A, Use the following abbreviations of the names of certain countries and of states, provinces,
territories, etc., of Australia, Canada, and the United States when used:
1) as additions to certain other place names (see 23.4)
2) as additions to names of certain corporate bodies (see 24. 4C and 24.9)
3) as additions to the name of the place of publication or distribution in the publication, distribu-
tion, etc., area (see 1.4C3)
4) in notes.
Do not abbreviate the name of a city or town even if it has the same name as a state, etc., listed
below (e.g., Washington, D.C. not Wash., D.C.). Do not abbreviate any place name that is not in the
list.
NAME ABBREVIATION NAME ABBREVIATION
Alabama Ala. Arizona Ariz.
Alberta Alta. Arkansas Ait.
Appendix B-8
AACR2 Revision 2002
ABBREVIATIONS
B.14A
NAME
ABBREVIATION
NAME
ABBREVIATION
Australian Capital Territory
A.C.T.
North Dakota
N.D.
British Columbia
B.C.
Northern Territory
NX
California
Calif.
Northwest Territories
N.W.T.
Colorado
Colo.
Nova Scotia
N.S.
Connecticut
Conn.
Oklahoma
Okla.
Delaware
Del.
Ontario
Ont.
District of Columbia
D.C.
Oregon
Or.
Distrito Federal
D.F.
Pennsylvania
Pa.
Florida
Ha.
Prince Edward Island
P.E.I.
Georgia
Ga.
Puerto Rico
P.R.
Illinois
111.
Queensland
Old-
Indiana
Ind.
Rhode Island
R.I.
Kansas
Kan.
Russian Soviet Federated
Kentucky
Ky.
Socialist Republic
R.S.F.S.R.
Louisiana
La.
Saskatchewan
Sask.
Maine
Me.
South Australia
S. Aust.
Manitoba
Man.
South Carolina
S.C.
Mary] and
Md.
South Dakota
S.D.
Massachusetts
Mass.
Tasmania
Tas.
Michigan
Mich.
Tennessee
Tenn.
Minnesota
Minn.
Territory of Hawaii
T.H.
Mississippi
Miss.
Texas
Tex.
Missouri
Mo.
Union of Soviet Socialist
Montana
Mont.
Republics
U.S.S.R.
Nebraska
Neb.
United Kingdom
U.K.
Nevada
Nev.
United States
U.S.
New Brunswick
N.B.
Vermont
Vt.
New Hampshire
N.H.
Victoria
Vic,
New lersey
N.J.
Virgin Islands
V.I.
New Mexico
N.M.
Virginia
Va.
New South Wales
N.S.W.
Washington
Wash.
New York
N.Y.
West Virginia
W. Va.
New Zealand
N.Z.
Western Australia
W.A.
Newfoundland
Nfld.
Wisconsin
Wis.
Newfoundland and
Wyoming
Wyo.
Labrador
N.L.
Yukon Territory
Yukon
North Carolina N.C.
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2003 Update
Appendix B-9
B.15
ABBREVIATIONS
B.15. NAMES OF THE MONTHS
Use abbreviations of the names of the months in languages not listed below if they appear in style
manuals for the language concerned.
BELORUSS1AN
BULGARIAN
CZECH
DANISH
CTVA3.
«H.
led.
jan.
J1K)T.
(JieBp.
tin.
febr.
CaK.
MapT
brez.
marts
Kpac.
anpmi
dub.
april
Mail
Man
kvet.
maj
M3pB.
K5HK
cerv.
juni
Jiin.
lOJltl
cerven.
juli
JKHlBefib
aBr.
srp.
aug.
Bepac.
cenr.
zSn
sept.
KacTp.
OKT.
ffj.
okt.
JliCT.
noeM.
list.
nov.
aeK.
pros.
dec.
DUTCH
ENGLISH
ESTONIAN
FRENCH
jan.
Jan,
jaan.
jan v.
let).
Feb.
veebr.
fevr.
maart
Mar.
marts
mars
apr.
Apr.
apr.
avrit
mei
May
mai
mai
juni
June
juuni
juin
juli
July
juuii
juil.
aug.
Aug.
aug.
aout
sept.
Sept.
sept.
sept.
oct.
Oct.
okt.
oct.
nov.
Nov.
nov.
nov.
dec.
Dec.
dets.
dec.
GERMAN
GREEK, MODERN
HUNGARIAN
INDONESIAN
Jan. (Jan.)
lav.
jan.
Jan. (Djan.)
Feb.
<J><#0.
fob.
Peb.
Marz
Mapr.
marc.
Mrt.
Apr.
apr.
Apr.
Mai
maj.
Mei (Mai)
Juni
lovv.
jim.
Juni (Djuni)
Juli
*lov\.
jul.
Juli (Djuli)
Aug.
Auy.
aug.
Ag.
Sept.
Ze7TT.
szept.
Sept.
Okt.
*Okt.
okt.
Okt.
Nov.
nov.
Nop.
Dez.
A€K.
dec.
Des.
Appendix B-10
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2003 Update
ABBREVIATIONS
B.15
ITALIAN
LATIN
LATVIAN
LITHUANIAN
genu.
Ian.
jan.
saus.
feobr.
Febr,
teb.
vas.
mar.
Mart.
marts
kovas
apr.
Apr.
apr.
bal.
raagg.
Mai
maijs
geg-
Inn.
iuniis
biri.
luglio
Iul.
juiijs
liepa
ag.
Aug.
aug.
rugp.
sett.
Sept.
sept.
rugs.
OIL
Oct.
okt.
spalis
nov.
Nov.
nov.
lapkr.
die.
Dec.
dec.
gr-
MAI AYSTAN
NORWEGIAN
POLISH
PORTUGUESE
Jan.
jan.
stycz.
jan.
Feb.
Febr.
luty
rev.
Mac
mars
mar.
marco
Apr.
april
kwicc.
aonl
Mei
mai
maj
maio
Suvt
juni
czerw.
junho
Juki
juli
iip.
julho
Og.
aug.
sjerp.
ago s to
Sept.
sept.
wrzes.
set.
Okt.
okt.
pazdz.
out.
Nov.
nov.
lis top.
nov.
Dis.
des.
grudz.
dez.
ROMANIAN
RUSSIAN
SERBO-CROATIAN
SLOVAK
Ian.
HHB.
jaH. syec.
1'ad.
jan.
Feb.
(pesp.
(be6p. veij.
tin.
feb.
Mar.
wapT (ruapn.)
MapT ozuj.
brez.
mar.
Apr.
anp.
anpan trav.
dub.
apr.
Mai
Mafl
Maj svib.
kvet.
maj
lunie
HJOHb (iionb)
Jvhk lip.
Serv.
jun
In lie
HlOJIb (ilOJlb)
jyJiH srp.
c erven.
Jul
Aug.
anr.
ayr. kol.
srp.
aug.
Sept.
ceHT.
ccnT. ruj.
zari.
sept.
Oct.
OKT,
okt. list.
ruj.
okt.
Noem.
HoaSpb
hob. stud.
list.
nov.
Dec.
fleK,
H3U. pros.
pros.
dec.
AACR2 Revision 2002
Appendix B-ll
B.15
ABBREVIATIONS
SLOVENIAN
SPANISH
SWEDISH
UKRAINIAN
WELSH
jan+
cnero
jan.
CJ 1 !.
ion.
ffh
ieo.
J1IOT.
IT] £11*.
mars
6ep.
Maw+
spr.
abr.
april
KBIT.
maj
mayo
maj
Tpau.
Mai
jun.
jun.
jiini
|V I C 1 1 +
iul.
)Ui.
juli
Jinn.
Gorff.
avg.
agosto
aug.
cepn.
Awst
sept.
sept, (set.)
sept.
eep.
Medi
Okt.
oct.
okt.
>kobt.
Hyd.
nov.
nov.
nov.
JIHCT.
Tach.
dec.
die.
dec.
rpya.
Rhag.
Appendix B~12 AACR2 Revision 2002
APPENDIX C
NUMERALS
Contents
CJ
GENERAL RULE
C.2
ARABIC VS. ROMAN
C.3
ARABIC NUMERALS VS. NUMBERS EXPRESSED AS WORDS
C.4
NUMERALS BEGINNING NOTES
C.5
ORIENTAL NUMERALS
C.6
INCLUSIVE NUMBERS
C.7
ALTERNATIVE DATES
C.8
ORDINAL NUMERALS
C.l. GENERAL RULE
C.1A. Appiy the following rules to all items published in the nineteenth century or later. Apply them
also to items published before the nineteenth century unless rules 2.12-2.18 instruct otherwise.
C.2. ARABIC VS. ROMAN
C.2A. Headings
C.2A1. Use roman numerals in headings for persons (e.g., rulers, popes) and for corporate bodies
identified by names including roman numerals uniess, in the case of a corporate body, a particular rule
instructs otherwise {see 24.7B2).
John XXIII, Pope
XXth Century Heating & Ventilating Co.
C.2A2. In uniform titles, use roman numerals that are integral parts of the name of the work.
Sancho II y el cerco de Zamora
In the case of numerals used to identify particular parts of a work, follow the instructions in the
appropriate rule (see 25.6A2 and 25.18A3).
AACR2 Revision 2002
Appendix C-l
C.2B
NUMERALS
C.2B. Description
C.2B1. Substitute arabic numerals for roman in the following areas and elements of the bibliographic
description:
a) in an edition statement
b) in the material (or type of publication) specific details area unless a particular rule directs other-
wise (see 3.3B2) or unless C.2B2 applies
c) in the date of publication, distribution, etc., element
d) in the other physical details element of the physical description area
e) in the series numbering in the series area unless C.2B2 applies.
C.2B2. Use roman numerals in the areas and elements listed in C.2B1 if the substitution of arabic
numerals makes the statement less clear (e.g., when roman and arabic numerals are used in conjunction
to distinguish the volume, section, series, or other group from the number, part, or other division of
mat group).
(The Washington papers ; vol. IV, 36)
C.2B3. When using roman numerals, give them in capitals except those used in paging or page refer-
ences and those appearing in lowercase in the chief source of information or in quoted notes. Use low-
ercase roman numerals in paging or page references even when capitals appear in the item.
xliii, 289 p.
C.3. ARABIC NUMERALS VS. NUMBERS EXPRESSED AS WORDS
C.3A. Headings
C.3A1. Retain numbers expressed as words in the names of corporate bodies unless a particular rule
instructs otherwise (see 24.7 B 2).
Four Corners Geological Society
C.3A2. Retain numbers expressed as words in uniform titles if they are an integral part of the name of
the work. In the case of numbers used to identify particular parts of a work, follow the instructions in
the appropriate rule (see 25.6A2 and 25.18A3).
Quinze joies de mariage
C.3B. Description
C.3B3L Substitute arabic numerals for numbers expressed as words in the following areas and ele-
ments of the bibliographic description:
a) in an edition statement
b) in the material (or type of publication) specific details area unless a particular rule directs other-
wise {see 3.3B2)
c) in the date of publication, distribution, etc., element
d) in the physical description area
e) in the series numbering.
Appendix C-2
AACR2 Revision 2002
NUMERALS
C.6A
C.4. NUMERALS BEGINNING NOTES
C.4A. Express a numeral that is the first word of a note in words unless the note is a quotation. In the
latter case, give the numeral as it appears in the source.
First f;d. published in 1954
"5 th anniversary print ing"-T . p . verso
Four no. a year, 1931; 5 no, a year, 1932-1934
C.5. ORIENTAL NUMERALS
C.5A. In cataloguing Arabic alphabet, Far Eastern, Greek, Hebrew, Indie, etc, materials, substitute
roman numerals or Western-style arable numerals for numerals in the vernacular as instructed in the
following rules.
C.5B. Use roman numerals in romanized headings for persons identified by numerals (e.g., rulers).
C.5C. Use Western -style arabic numerals in romanized headings for corporate bodies and in uniform
titles.
Thawrat 25 Mayu, 1969
Lajnah al- ^Ulya li-Ihtifalat 14 Tammuz
C.5D. Use Western-style arabic numerals in the following areas and elements of the bibliographic
description:
1) in an edition statement
2) in the material (or type of publication) specific details area unless a particular rule directs other-
wise (see 3.3B2)
3) in the date of publication, distribution, etc., element
4) in the physical description area
5) in the series numbering.
C.5E. Consider inclusive dates and other numbers to be a single unit in ianguages that are read from
right to left.
1960-1965 not 1965-1960
Add punctuation to the left of the inclusive dates or numbers,
.1973-1976
C.6. INCLUSIVE NUMBERS
C.6A. Give inclusive dates and other inclusive numbers in full.
1967-1972
p. 117-128
AACR2 Revision 2002
Appendix C-3
C.7
NUMERALS
C.7. ALTERNATIVE DATES
C.7A. When alternative dates of birth or death are given in headings for persons (see 22.17), give the
second of the alternatives as it is spoken.
d. 1506 or 7
d. 1819 or 20
b. 1895 or 1900
In all other eases, give the numbers in full.
C.8. ORDINAL NUMERALS
C.8A. In the case of English- language items, record ordinal numerals in the form 1 st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th,
etc.
C.8B. In the case of other languages, follow the usage of the language if ascertainable. 1
I'- 1 , I"', 2", 3% etc.
{French}
1 . , 2 . , 3 . , etc.
(German)
1" , 1', 2', 2 ,L , 3'-', 3 1 ', etc.
{Italian)
C.8C. For Chinese, Japanese, and Korean items, accompany the arabic numeral by the character indi-
cating that the numeral is ordinal.
C.8D. If the usage of a language cannot be ascertained, use the form 1„ 2„ 3., etc.
1 . A useful source for the form of ordinal numerals in European languages is: Allen, C.G. A Manual of European Lan-
guages for Librarians. — London ; New York : Bowker, 1975.
Appendix C-4
AACR2 Revision 2002
APPENDIX D
GLOSSARY
This glossary contains definitions of most of the technical bibliographic and cat-
aloguing terms (for both print and nonprint materials) used in these rules. The
terms have been defined only within the context of the rules. For definitions of
other terms, consult the standard glossaries of bibliographic and library terms or
technical dictionaries.
Access point. A name, term, code, etc., under which a bib-
liographic record may be searched and identified. See
also Heading.
Accompanying material. Material issued with, and
intended to be used with, the item being catalogued.
Activity card. A card printed with words, numerals, and/or
pictures to be used by an individual or a group as a basis
for performing a specific activity. Usually issued in sets.
See also Game, Kit.
Adaptation (Music), A musical work that represents a dis-
tinct alteration of another work (e.g., a free transcrip-
tion); a work that paraphrases parts of various works or
the general style of another composer; a work that is
merely based on other music (e.g., variations on a
theme). See also Arrangement (Music).
Added entry. An entry, addidonal to the main entry, by
which an item is represented in a catalogue; a secondary
entry. See also Main entry.
Added title page. A title page preceding or following the
title page chosen as the basis for the description of the
item. It may be more general (e.g., a series title page), or
equally general (e.g., a title page in another language).
See also Series title page.
Alternative title. The second part of a title proper that con-
sists of two parts, each of which is a title; the parts are
joined by or or its equivalent in another language (e.g.,
TJte tempest, or, The enchanted island).
Analytical entry. An entry for a part of an item for which a
comprehensive entry is also made.
Analytical note. The statement in an analytical entry relat-
ing the part being analyzed to the item of which it is a
part.
Anonymous. Of unknown authorship.
Architectural rendering. A pictorial representation of a
building intended to show, before it has been built, how
the building will look when completed.
Area. A major section of the bibliographic description,
comprising data of a particular category or set of catego-
ries. See also Element.
Arrangement (Music). A musical work, or a portion
thereof, rewritten for a medium of performance different
from that for which the work was originally intended; a
simplified version of a work for the same medium of
performance. See also Adaptation (Music).
Art original. An original two- or three-dimensional work of
art (other than an art print (q.v.) or a photograph) created
by the artist (e.g., a painting, drawing, or sculpture, as
contrasted to a reproduction of a painting, drawing, or
sculpture).
Art print. An engraving, etching, lithograph, woodcut, etc.,
printed from the plate prepared by the artist.
Art reproduction, A mechanically reproduced copy of a
work of art, generally as one of a commercial edition.
Artefact. Any object made or modified by one or more
persons.
Atlas. A volume of maps, plates, engravings, tables, etc.,
with or without descriptive text. It may be an indepen-
dent publication or it may have been issued as accompa-
nying material (q.v.).
Audiorecording. See Sound recording.
Author. See Personal author.
Author-title added entry. See Name-title added entry.
Author-title reference. See Name-title reference.
Bibliographic resource. An expression or manifestation of
a work or an item that forms the basis for bibliographic
description. A bibliographic resource may be tangible or
intangible.
Binder's title, A title lettered on the cover of an item by a
binder, as distinguished from a title on the publisher's
original cover. See also Cover title, Spine title.
Braille. Material intended for the visually impaired and
using embossed characters formed by raised dots in six-
dot cells. Ncrneth code is a form of braille used in
mathematics.
Broadsheet See Broadside,
Broadside, A separately published item consisting of a
piece of paper, printed on one side only and intended to
be read unfolded; usually intended to be posted or pub-
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix D-l
GLOSSARY
Sicly distributed. Examples of broadsides are proclama-
tions, handbills, ball ad- sheets, news-sheets. See also
Sheet.
Caption title. A title given at the beginning of the first page
of the text or, in the case of a musical score, immediately
above the opening bars of the music.
Carrier. See Physical carrier.
Cartographic material. Any material representing the
whole or part of the Earth or any celestial body at any
scale. Cartographic materials include two- and three-
dimensional maps and plans (including maps of imagi-
nary places); aeronautical, nautical, and celestial charts;
atlases; globes; block diagrams; sections; aerial photo-
graphs with a cartographic purpose; bird's-eye views
(map views), etc.
Case binding. A method of binding in which a hard cover
is made separately from the book and later attached to it.
Cased. See Case binding.
Catalogue. 1 . A list of library materials contained in a col-
lection, a library, or a group of libraries, arranged accord-
ing to some definite plan, 2. In a wider sense, a list of
materials prepared for a particular purpose (e.g., an exhi-
bition catalogue, a sales catalogue).
Chart. An opaque sheet that exhibits data in graphic or tab-
ular form (e.g., a wall chart).
Chart (Cartography). A map designed primarily for navi-
gation through water, air, or space. See also Map.
Ciiief source of information. The source of bibliographic
data to be given preference as the source from which a
bibliographic description (or portion thereof) is prepared.
Chinese style. See Traditional format (Oriental books).
Chorus score. A score of a vocal work showing only the
chorus parts, with accompaniment, if any, arranged for
keyboard instrument. See also Vocal score.
CinefUm. See Motion picture.
Close score. A musical score giving all the parts on a mini-
mum number of staves, normally two, as with hymns.
CoJiaborator. One who works with one or more associates
to produce a work; all may make the same kind of con-
tribution, as in the case of shared responsibility (see
2 ! .6), or they may make different kinds of contributions,
as in the case of collaboration between an artist and a
writer (see 2 1 .24). See also Joint author, Mixed responsi-
bility, Shared responsibility.
Collection, 1 , Three or more independent works or parts of
works by one author published together. 2. Two or more
independent works or parts of works by more than one
author published together and not written for the same
occasion or for the publication in hand.
Collective title. A title proper that is an inclusive title for an
item containing several works. See also Uniform title 3.
Colophon. A statement at the end of an item giving infor-
mation about one or more of the following: the tide,
author(s), publisher, printer, date of publication or print-
ing. It may include other information.
Coloured illustration. An illustration containing any col-
our; black, white, and shades of grey are not to be con-
sidered colours.
Compiler. 1 . One who produces a collection by selecting
and putting together matter from the works of various
persons or bodies. 2. One who selects and puts together
in one publication matter from the works of one person
or body. See also Editor.
Compound surname. A surname consisting of two or more
proper names, sometimes connected by a hyphen, or con-
junction, and/or preposition.
Computer file. See Electronic resource.
Condensed score. A musical score giving only the principal
musical parts on a minimum number of staves, and gen-
erally organized by instrumental sections.
Conference. 1 . A meeting of individuals or representatives
of various bodies for the purpose of discussing and/or
acting on topics of common interest. 2. A meeting of
representatives of a corporate body that constitutes its
legislative or governing body.
Container. Housing for an item, a group of items, or part of
any item, that is readily physically separable from the
material being housed (e.g., a box for a disk or videocas-
sette, a sleeve for a sound or videodisc). See also Physi-
cal carrier.
Continuation. 1. A supplement (q.v,), 2. A part issued in
continuance of a monograph, a serial, or a series.
Continuing resource. A bibliographic resource that is
issued over time with no predetermined conclusion. Con-
tinuing resources include serials and ongoing integrating
resources.
Conventional name. A name, other than the real or official
name, by which a corporate body, place, or thing has
come to be known.
Conventional title. See Uniform title.
Corporate body. An organization or group of persons that
is identified by a particular name and that acts, or may
act, as an entity. Typical examples of corporate bodies
are associations, institutions, business firms, nonprofit
enterprises, governments, government agencies, religious
bodies, local churches, and conferences.
Cover title. A title printed on the cover of an item as
issued. See also Binder's title, Spine title.
Cross-reference. See Reference.
Appendix D-2
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
GLOSSARY
Diorama. A three-dimensional representation of a scene
created by placing objects, figures, etc., in front of a two-
dimensional painted background.
Direct access (Electroaic resources). The use of electronic
resources via carriers (e.g., discs/disks, cassettes, car-
tridges) designed to be inserted into a computerized
device or its auxiliary equipment. See also Remote
access (Electronic resources).
Disc (Electronic resources). See Optical disc (Electronic
resources).
Disk (Electronic resources). A magnetic disk, usually
encased in a protective plastic jacket or rigid case, used
by computerized devices for storing and retrieving elec-
tronic resources. Disks can cither be fixed or removable.
See also Optical disc (Electronic resources).
Distributor. An agent or agency that has exclusive or shared
marketing rights for an item.
Double leaf. A leaf of double size with a fold at the fore
edge or at the top edge of the item. See also Traditional
format (Oriental books).
Edition: Books, pamphlets, fascicles, single sheets, etc.
All copies produced from essentially the same type
image (whether by direct contact or by photographic or
other methods) and issued by the same entity. See also
Facsimile reproduction, Impression, Issue, Reprint,
Edition: Electronic resources. All copies embodying
essentially the same content and issued by the same
entity.
Edition: Other materials. All copies produced from essen-
tially the same master copy and issued by the same
entity. A change in the identity of the distributor does
not mean a change of edition. See also Facsimile repro-
duction. Issue.
Edition: Unpublished items. All copies made from essen-
tially the same original production (e.g., the original and
carbon copies of a typescript).
Editor. One who prepares for publication an item not his or
her own. The editorial work may be limited to the prepa-
ration of the item for the manufacturer, or it may include
supervision of the manufacturing, revision (restitution),
or elucidation of the content of the item, and the addition
of an introduction, notes, and other critical matter. In
some cases, it may involve the technical direction of a
staff of persons engaged in creating or compiling the
content of the item. See also Compiler.
Electronic resource. Material (data and/or program(s))
encoded for manipulation by a computerized device. This
material may require the use of a peripheral directly con-
nected to a computerized device (e.g., CD-ROM drive)
or a connection to a computer network (e.g., the Inter-
net). See also File (Electronic resources).
Element. A word, phrase, or group of characters represent-
ing a distinct unit of bibliographic information and form-
ing part of an area (q.v.) of the description.
Engineering drawing. See Technical drawing.
Entry. A record of an item in a catalogue. See also
Heading.
Entry word. The word by which an entry is arranged in the
catalogue, usually the first word (other than an article) of
the heading. See also Heading.
Explanatory reference. An elaborated see or see also refer-
ence that explains the circumstances under which the
headings involved should be consulted.
Explicit. A statement at the end of the text of a manuscript
or early printed book, or at the end of one of its divi-
sions, indicating its conclusion and sometimes giving the
author's name and the title of the work.
Extent of item. The first element of the physical description
area. It gives the number and the specific materia! desig-
nation of the units of the item being described and, in
some cases, other indications of the extent (e.g., dura-
tion). See also Specific material designation.
Facsimile reproduction. A reproduction simulating the
physical appearance of the original in addition to repro-
ducing its content exactly. See also Reprint.
Fascicle. One of the temporary divisions of a printed item
that, for convenience in printing or publication, is issued
in small installments, usually incomplete in themselves;
they do not necessarily coincide with any formal division
of the work into parts, etc. Usually the fascicle is pro-
tected by temporary paper wrappers, it may or may not
be numbered. A fascicle is distinguished from a part
(q.v.) by being a temporary division of a work rather
than a formal component unit.
File (Electronic resources). A basic unit in which elec-
tronic resources arc organized and stored. Electronic
resources can contain one or more files. See also Elec-
tronic resource.
Filing title. See Uniform title.
Filmstrip. A length of film containing a succession of
images intended for projection one at a time, with or
without recorded sound.
Flash card. A card or other opaque material printed with
words, numerals, or pictures and designed for rapid
display.
Format. In its widest sense, a particular physical presenta-
tion of an item.
Format (Texts). The number of times the printed sheet has
been folded to make the leaves of a book (e.g., folio (one
fold giving two leaves), quarto (two folds giving four
leaves)).
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix D-3
GLOSSARY
Full score. See Score.
Game. An item or set of materials designed for play accord-
ing to prescribed or implicit rules and intended for recre-
ation or instruction. See also Activity card. Kit, Toy.
General material designation. A term indicating the broad
class of material to which an item belongs (e.g., sound
recording). See also Specific material designation.
Globe. A model of the Earth or other celestial body,
depicted on the surface of a sphere.
Graphic. A two-dimensional representation whether opaque
(e.g., art originals and reproductions, (lash cards, photo-
graphs, technical drawings) or intended to be viewed, or
projected without motion, by means of an optical device
(e.g., filmstrips, stereographs, slides).
Half title. A title of a publication appearing on a leaf pre-
ceding the title page.
Harmony (Bible). 1 . An arrangement of passages of the
Bible on the same topic into parallel columns so that
similarities and differences may be compared readily. 2.
An interweaving of such passages into a continuous text.
Heading. A name, word, or phrase placed at the head of a
catalogue entry to provide an access point. See also
Access point.
Impression. All copies of an edition of a book, pamphlet,
etc., printed at one time. See also Issue, Reprint.
Incipit. The opening words of a manuscript or early printed
book, or of one of its divisions. It frequently includes the
word "incipit" or its equivalent in another language. An
incipit at the beginning of a work often contains the
name of the author and the title of the work.
Initial title element. The word or words selected from the
title of a musical work and placed first in the uniform
tide for that work, if no additions to the initial title ele-
ment are required by the rules, it becomes the uniform
title for the work.
Integrating resource, A bibliographic resource that is
added to or changed by means of updates that do not
remain discrete and arc integrated into the whole. Inte-
grating resources can be finite or continuing. Examples
of integrating resources include updating loose-leafs and
updating Web sites.
International intergovernmental body. An international
body created by intergovernmental action.
International Standard Book Number (ISBN). See Stan-
dard number.
International Standard Serial Number (ISSN). See Stan-
dard number.
Issue. Copies of an edition forming a distinct group that are
distinguished from other copies of that edition by minor
but well-defined variations (e.g., a new impression of a
book for which minor revisions have been incorporated
into the original type image). See also Impression,
Reprint.
Item. A document or set of documents in any physical
form, published, issued, or treated as an entity, and as
such forming the basis for a single bibliographic
description.
Iteration. An instance of an integrating resource, either as
first published or after it has been updated.
Jacket (Disc). See Sleeve.
Japanese style. See Traditional format (Oriental books).
Joint author. A person who collaborates with one or more
other persons to produce a work in relation to which the
collaborators perform the same function. See also Shared
responsibility.
Key-title. The unique name assigned to a bibliographic
resource by centres of the ISSN Network.
Kit. 1. An item containing two or more categories of mate-
rial, no one of which is identifiable as the predominant
constituent of the item; also designated "multimedia
item" (q.v,), 2. A single-medium package of textual
material (e.g., a "press kit," a set of printed test materi-
als, an assemblage of printed materials published under
the name "Jackdaw"). See also Activity card, Game.
Leaf. One of the units into which the original sheet or half
sheet of paper, parchment, etc., is folded to form part of
a book, pamphlet, journal, etc.; each leaf consists of two
pages, one on each side, either or both of which may be
blank.
Local access (Electronic resources). See Direct access
(Electronic resources).
Loose-leaf publication. See Updating loose-leaf.
Machine- readable data file. See Electronic resource.
Macrotorm. A generic term for any medium, transparent or
opaque, bearing images large enough to be read easily by
the naked eye. See also Microform.
Main entry. The complete catalogue record of an item, pre-
sented in the form by which the entity is to be uniformly
identified and cited. The main entry may include the
tracing(s) (q.v.). See also Added entry.
Main heading. The first part of a heading that includes a
subheading (q.v.).
Manuscript. Writings (including musical scores, maps, etc.)
made by hand, typescripts, and inscriptions on clay tab-
lets, stone, etc.
Map. A representation, normally to scale and on a fiat
medium, of a selection of material or abstract features
on, or in relation to, the surface of the Earth or of
another celestial body. See also Chart (Cartography),
Appendix D-4
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
GLOSSARY
Map section. See Section (Cartography).
Masthead. A statement of title, ownership, editors, etc., of a
newspaper or periodical. In the case of newspapers it is
commonly found on the editorial page or at the top of
page one, and, in the case of periodicals, on the contents
page.
Mechanical drawing. See Technical drawing.
Microfiche. A sheet of film bearing a number of micro-
images in a two-dimensional array.
Microfilm. A length of film bearing a number of micro-
images in linear array.
Microform. A generic term for any medium, transparent or
opaque, bearing microimages. See also Macroform.
Microopaquc. A sheet of opaque material bearing a number
of microimages in a two-dimensional array.
Microscope slide. A slide designed for holding a minute
object to be viewed through a microscope or by a
microprojector.
Miniature score. A musical score not primarily intended for
performance use, with the notation and/or text reduced in
size.
Mixed authorship. See Mixed responsibility.
Mixed responsibility. A work of mixed responsibility is one
in which different persons or bodies contribute to its
intellectual or artistic content by performing different
kinds of activities (e.g., adapting or illustrating a work
written by anotiier person). See also Joint author. Shared
responsibility.
Mock-up. A representation of a device or process that may
be modified for training or analysis to emphasize a par-
ticular part or function; it usually has movable parts that
can be manipulated.
Model. A three-dimensional representation of a real thing.
See also Toy.
Monograph. A bibliographic resource that is complete in
one part or intended to be completed within a finite num-
ber of parts.
Monographic series. See Series 1.
Motion picture. A length of film, with or without recorded
sound, bearing a sequence of images that create the illu-
sion of movement when projected in rapid succession.
Multimedia item. An item containing two or more catego-
ries of material, no one of which is identifiable as the
predominant constituent of the item; also designated
"kit" (q.v.).
Multipart item. A monograph complete, or intended to be
completed, in a finite number of separate parts. The sepa-
rate parts may or may not be numbered.
Multivolume monograph. See Multipart item.
Music (large print). A term used as a general material des-
ignation for printed music intended for use by the visu-
ally impaired.
Musical presentation statement. A term or phrase found in
the chief source of information of a publication of
printed music or a music manuscript that indicates the
physical presentation of the music (e.g., score, miniature
score, score and parts). This type of statement should be
distinguished from one that indicates an arrangement or
edition of a musical work (e.g., vocal score, 2-piano edi-
tion, version with orchestra accompaniment, chorus
score).
Name-title added entry. An added entry consisting of the
name of a person or corporate body and the title of an
item.
Name-title reference. A reference made from the name of a
person or a corporate body and the title of an item.
Numbering. The identification of each of the successive
items of a publication. It can include a numeral, a letter,
any other character, or the combination of these with or
without an accompanying word (volume, number, etc.)
and/or a chronological designation.
Object. A three-dimensional artefact (or replica of an arte-
fact) or a naturally occurring entity. See also Realia.
Optical disc (Electronic resources). Any of several specific
carriers delivering optically read data (e.g., CD-I, CD-
ROM, Photo CD). See also Disk (Electronic resources).
Other title information. A title bome by an item other than
the titie proper or parallel or series title(s); also any
phrase appearing in conjunction with the title proper,
etc., indicative of the character, contents, etc., of the item
or the motives for, or occasion of, its production or pub-
lication. The term includes subtitles, avant-titres, etc., but
does not include variations on the title proper (e.g., spine
titles, sleeve titles).
Overhead projectual. See Transparency.
Overlay. A transparent sheet containing matter that, when
superimposed on another sheet, modifies the data on the
latter.
Parallel title. The title proper in another language and/or
script.
Part. 1. One of the subordinate units into which an item has
been divided by the author, publisher, or manufacturer. In
the case of printed monographs, generally synonymous
with volume (q.v.); it is distinguished from a fascicle
(q.v.) by being a component unit rather than a temporary
division of a work. 2, As used in the physical description
area, "part" designates bibliographic units intended to be
bound several to a volume. See also Part (Music).
Part (Music). 1 , The music for one of the participating
voices or instruments in a musical work. 2. The written
or printed copy of one or more (but not all) such parts
for the use of one or more performers, designated in the
physical description area as part.
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2005 Update
Appendix D-5
GLOSSARY
Patronymic. A name derived from the given name of a
father.
Personal author. The person chiefly responsible for the
creation of the intellectual or artistic content of a work,
Phonorecord. See Sound recording.
Photocopy. A macroform photoreproduction produced
directly on opaque material by radiant energy through
contact or projection.
Physical carrier. A physical medium in which data, sound,
images, etc., are stored. For certain categories of male-
rial, the physical carrier consists of a storage medium
(e.g., tape, film) sometimes encased in a plastic, meial,
etc., housing (e.g., cassette, cartridge) that is an integral
part of the item. See also Container.
Piano [violin, etc.] conductor part. A performance part for
a particular instrument of an ensemble work to which
cues have been added for the other instruments to permit
the performer of the part also to conduct the
performance.
Piano score. A reduction of an orchestral score to a version
for piano, on two staves.
Picture. A two-dimensional visual representation accessible
to the naked eye and generally on an opaque backing.
Used when a more specific term (e.g., art original, photo-
graph, study print) is not appropriate.
Plan. A drawing showing relative positions on a horizontal
plane (e.g., relative positions of parts of a building; a
landscape design; the arrangement of furniture in a room
or building; a graphic presentation of a military or naval
plan).
Plan (Cartography). See Map.
Plate. A leaf containing illustrative matter, with or without
explanatory text, that does not form part of either the
preliminary or the main sequence of pages or leaves.
Plate number (Music). A numbering designation assigned
to an item by a music publisher, usually printed at the
bottom of each page, and sometimes appearing also on
the title page. It may include initials, abbreviations, or
words identifying a publisher and is sometimes followed
by a number corresponding to the number of pages or
plates. See also Publisher's number (Music).
Portfolio. A container for holding loose materials (e.g.,
paintings, drawings, papers, unbound sections of a book,
and similar materials) consisting of two covers joined
together at the back,
Praeses. A faculty moderator of an academic disputation,
normally proposing a thesis and participating in the ensu-
ing disputation.
Predominant name. The name or form of name of a person
or corporate body that appears most frequently (1) in the
person's works or works issued by the corporate body, or
(2) in reference sources, in that order of preference.
Preliminaries. The title page(s) of an item, the verso of the
title page(s), any pages preceding the title page(s), and
the cover.
Printing, See Facsimile reproduction, Impression, Issue,
Reprint.
Producer. 1. A person or corporate body that has artistic
and/or intellectual responsibility for the form and content
of an item. 2. An individual or organization that has
responsibility for the technical aspect(s) (e.g., mixing of
sound), manufacture, or production of an item.
Profile (Cartography). A scale representation of the inter-
section of a vertical surface (which may or may not be a
plane) with the surface of the ground, or of the intersec-
tion of such a vertical surface with that of a conceptual
three-dimensional model representing phenomena having
a continuous distribution (e.g., rainfall).
Pseudonym. A name assumed by an author to conceal or
obscure his or her identity.
Publisher's number (Music). A numbering designation
assigned to an item by a music publisher, appearing nor-
mally only on the tide page, the cover, and/or the first
page of music. It may include initials, abbreviations, or
words identifying the publisher. See also Plate number
(Music).
Radiograph. A photograph produced by the passage of
radiation, such as X rays, gamma rays, or neutrons,
through an opaque object.
Realia. An artefact or naturally occurring entity, as opposed
to a replica. See also Object, Toy.
Recto. 1 . The right-hand page of a book, usually bearing an
odd page number. 2. The side of a printed sheet intended
to be read first.
Reference. A direction from one heading or entry to
another.
Reference source. Any publication from which authoritative
information may be obtained. Not limited to reference
works.
Reissue. See Issue, Reprint.
Related body. A corporate body that has a relation to
another body other than a hierarchical relation (e.g., one
that is founded but not controlled by another body; one
that only receives financial support from another body;
one that provides financial and/or other types of assis-
tance to another body, such as "friends" groups; one
whose members have also membership in or an associa-
tion with another body, such as employees' associations
and alumni associations).
Related music. See Adaptation (Music),
Appendix D~6
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
GLOSSARY
Releasing agent. An agent or agency responsible for the
initial distribution of a motion picture.
Remote access (Electronic resources). The use of elec-
tronic resources via computer networks. See also Direct
access (Electronic resources).
Reprint. 1 . A new printing of an item made from the origi-
nal type image, commonly by photographic methods.
The reprint may reproduce the original exactly (an
impression (q.v.)) or it may contain minor but well-
defined variations (an issue (q.v.)), 2. A new edition with
substantially unchanged text. See also Facsimile
reproduction.
Resource, Electronic. See Electronic resource.
Respondent (Academic disputations). A candidate for a
degree who, in an academic disputation, defends or
opposes a thesis proposed by the praeses (q.v.); also
called the "defendant."
Romanization. Conversion of names or text not written in
the roman alphabet to rom an- alphabet form.
Running title. A title, or abbreviated title, that is repeated at
the head or foot of each page or leaf.
Score. A series of staves on which all the different instru-
mental and/or vocal parts of a musical work are written,
one under the other in vertical alignment, so that the
parts may be read simultaneously. See also Chorus score.
Close score. Condensed score. Miniature score. Part
(Music), Piano [violin, etc.] conductor part. Piano score,
Short score. Vocal score.
Secondary entry. See Added entry.
Section. A separately published part of a bibliographic
resource, usually representing a particular subject cate-
gory within the larger resource and identified by a desig-
nation that may be a topic, or an alphabetic or numeric
designation, or a combination of these. See also
Subseries,
Section (Cartography). A scale representation of a vertical
surface (commonly a plane) displaying both the profile
where it intersects the surface of the ground, or some
conceptual model, and the underlying structures along
the plane of intersection (e.g., a geological section).
Sequel. A literary or other imaginative work that is com-
plete in itself but continues an earlier work.
Serial. A continuing resource issued in a succession of
discrete parts, usually bearing numbering, that has no
predetermined conclusion. Examples of serials include
journals, magazines, electronic journals, continuing
directories, annual reports, newspapers, and monographic
series.
Series. 1 . A group of separate items related to one another
by the fact that each item bears, in addition to its own
title proper, a collective title applying to the group as a
whole. The individual items may or may not be num-
bered. 2. Each of two or more volumes of essays, lec-
tures, articles, or other writings, similar in character and
issued in sequence (e.g., Lowell's Among my books, sec-
ond scries), 3. A separately numbered sequence of vol-
umes within a series or serial (e.g., Notes and queries,
1st series, 2nd series, etc.).
Series title page. An added title page bearing the series title
proper and usually, though not necessarily, other infor-
mation about the series (e.g., statement of responsibility,
numeric designation, data relating to publication, title of
the item within the series).
Shared authorship. See Shared responsibility.
Shared responsibility. Collaboration between two or more
persons or bodies performing the same kind of activity in
the creation of the content of an item. The contribution
of each may form a separate and distinct part of the item,
or the contribution of each may not be separable from
that of the other(s). See also Joint author, Mixed
responsibility.
Sheet. As used in the physical description area, a single
piece of paper other than a broadside (q.v,) with manu-
script or printed matter on one or both sides.
Short score. A sketch made by a composer for an ensemble
work, with the main features of the composition set out
on a few staves. See also Close score, Condensed score.
Sine loco (s.l.). Without place {i.e.. the name of the place of
publication, distribution, etc., is unknown).
Sine nomine (s.n.). Without name {i.e., the name of the
publisher, distributor, etc., is unknown).
Sleeve. A protective envelope for bibliographic resource
(e.g., disc).
Slide. Transparent material on which there is a two-
dimensional image, usually held in a mount, and
designed for use in a projector or viewer.
Sound recording. A recording on which sound vibrations
have been registered by mechanical or electrical means
so that the sound may be reproduced.
Specific material designation. A term indicating the special
class of material (usually the class of physical object) to
which an item belongs (e.g., sound disc). See also Gen-
eral material designation.
Spine title. A title appearing on the spine of an item. See
also Binder's title, Cover title.
Standard number. The International Standard Number
(ISN), (e.g.. International Standard Book Number
(ISBN), International Standard Serial Number (ISSN)) or
any other internationally agreed upon standard number
that identifies an item uniquely.
AACR2 Revision 2002
Appendix D-7
GLOSSARY
Standard title. See Uniform title.
Statement of responsibility. A statement, transcribed from
the item being described, relating to persons responsible
for the intellectual or artistic content of the item, to cor-
porate bodies from which the content emanates, or to
persons or corporate bodies responsible for the perfor-
mance of the content of the item.
Subheading. Part of a corporate heading other than the
main heading (q.v.).
Subordinate body. A corporate body that forms an integral
part of a larger body in relation to which it holds an infe-
rior hierarchical rank.
Subseries. A series within a series (i.e., a series that always
appears in conjunction with another, usually more com-
prehensive, series; of which it forms a section). Its title
may or may not be dependent on the title of the main
series. See also Section.
Supplement. An item, usually issued separately, that com-
plements one already published by bringing up-to-date or
otherwise continuing the original or by containing a spe-
cial feature not included in the original. The supplement
has a formal relationship with the original as expressed
by common authorship, a common title or subtitle, and/
or a stated intention to continue or supplement the origi-
nal. See also Sequel.
Supplied title. A title provided by the cataloguer for an
item that has no title proper on the chief source of infor-
mation or its substitute. It may be taken from elsewhere
in the item itself or from a reference source, or it may be
composed by the cataloguer.
Surname. Any name used as a family name (other than
those used as family names by Romans of classical
times).
Tactile materials. Materials with raised symbols and/or dif-
ferently textured surfaces that are intended for use by the
visually impaired.
Technical drawing. A cross section, detail, diagram, eleva-
tion, perspective, plan, working plan, etc., made for use
in an engineering or other technical context. See also
Architectural rendering.
Text. I. A term used as a general material designation to
designate printed material accessible to the naked eye
(e.g., a book, a pamphlet, a broadside), 2. The words of a
song, song cycle, or, in the plural, a collection of songs.
Text (large print). A term used as a general material desig-
nation for a printed text intended for use by the visually
impaired.
Text (tactile). A term used as a general material designation
for material intended for the visually impaired and pre-
sented as embossed textual information composed by use
of any system of touch reading and writing, excluding
braille systems. Examples include Moon type and New
York point.
Thematic index. A list of a composer's works, usually
arranged in chronological order or by categories, with the
theme given for each composition or for each section of
large compositions.
Title. A word, phrase, character, or group of characters, nor-
mally appearing in an item, that names the item or the
work contained in it. See also Alternative title, Binder's
title, Caption title, Cover title. Half title, Parallel title.
Running title, Spine title, Supplied title. Title proper,
Uniform title.
Title frame. A frame containing written or printed material
not part of the subject content of the item.
Title page. A page at the beginning of an item bearing the
title proper and usually, though not necessarily, the state-
ment of responsibility and the data relating to publica-
tion. The leaf bearing the title page is commonly called
the "tide page" although properly called the "title leaf."
See also Added title page.
Title proper. The chief name of an item, including any
alternative title but excluding parallel titles and other title
information.
Title screen (Electronic resources). In the case of an elec-
tronic resource, a display of data that includes the title
proper and usually, though not necessarily, the statement
of responsibility and the data relating to publication.
Toy. An object designed for imaginative play or one from
which to derive amusement. See also Game, Model,
Rcalia.
Tracing. 1. A record of the headings under which an item is
represented in the catalogue. 2. A record of the refer-
ences that have been made to a name or to the title of an
item that is represented in the catalogue.
Traditional format (Oriental books). A format consisting
of double leaves with folds at the fore edge and with free
edges sewn together to make a fascicle. Usually several
fascicles are contained in a cloth-covered case.
Trailer. A short motion picture film consisting of selected
scenes from a film to be shown at a future date, used to
advertise that film.
Transcription (Music). See Adaptation (Music), Arrange-
ment (Music).
Translator. One who renders from one language into
another, or from an older form of a language into the
modern form, more or less closely following the original.
Transliteration. See Romanization.
Transparency. A sheet of transparent material bearing an
Appendix D-8
AACR2 Revision 2002
GLOSSARY
image and designed for use with an overhead projector
or a light hox. It may be mounted in a frame.
Uniform title. 1. The particular title by which a work is to
be identified for eataloguing purposes. 2, The particular
title used to distinguish the heading for a work from the
heading for a different work. 3. A conventional collective
title used to collocate publications of an author, com-
poser, or corporate body containing several works or
extracts, etc., from several works (e.g., complete works,
several works in a particular literary or musical form).
Updating loose-leaf. An integrating resource that consists
of one or more base volumes updated by separate pages
that are inserted, removed, and/or substituted.
Version (Bible). A particular translation of the Bible or any
of its parts. For the broader use of version for other
works, to designate a type of adaptation, see 21.10.
Verso. 1. The left-hand page of a book, usually bearing an
even page number, 2. The side of a printed sheet
intended to be read second.
Videorecording. A recording on which visual images, usu-
ally in motion and accompanied by sound, have been
registered; designed for playback by means of a televi-
sion set.
View (Cartography). A perspective representation of the
landscape in which detail is shown as if projected on an
oblique plane (e.g., a bird's-eye view, panorama, pano-
ramic drawing, worm's -eye view).
Vocal score. A score showing all vocal parts, with accom-
paniment, if any, arranged for keyboard instrument. See
also Chorus score.
Volume. 1 . In the bibliographic sense, a major division of a
work, regardless of its designation by the publisher, dis-
tinguished from other major divisions of the same work
by having its own inclusive title page, 1 half title, cover
title, or portfolio title, and usually independent pagina-
tion, foliation, or signatures. This major bibliographic
unit may include various title pages and/or paginations.
2. In the material sense, all that is contained in one bind-
ing, portfolio, etc., whether as originally issued or as
bound after issue. 2 The volume as a material unit may
not coincide with the volume as a bibliographic unit.
1 , The most general title page, half tide, or cover title is the determining factor it) deciding what constitutes a bibliographic
volume (e.g., a reissue in one binding, with a general title page, of a work previously issued in two or more bibliographic
volumes is considered to be one bibliographic volume even though the reissue includes the title pages of the original
volumes).
2. Such a composite volume may contain either two or more bibliographic volumes of the same work or two or more
works published independently.
AACR2 Revision 2002
Appendix D-9
APPENDIX E
INITIAL ARTICLES
E.l. GENERAL RULE
E.1A. Omit the initial article(s) listed below as instructed in 22.1 ID, 24.5A, 25.2C, and 26.1 A.
Consider only those definite and indefinite articles for headings in the languages included in the list.
The list does not cover articles in all languages; it covers only those in the languages most frequently
encountered by cataloguers. An asterisk (*) before an indefinite article indicates that the same form is
also used for the cardinal numeral one; therefore, care must be taken to distinguish the meaning.
ARTICLES ) LANGUAGE
a English, Galician, Hungarian, Portuguese, Romanian, Scots, Yiddish
a' Scottish Gaelic
al Romanian
al- Arabic, Baluchi, Brahui, Panjabi (Perso-Arabic script), Persian, Turkish, Urdu
(N.B. "al-" is meant to cover at! the spellings in romanization, e.g., "as" in "as-sijill")
am Scottish Gaelic
an English, Irish, Scots, Scottish Gaelic, Yiddish
an t- Irish, Scottish Gaelic
a ne Scots
ang Tagalog
ang mga Tagalog
us Galician, Portuguese
az Hungarian
*bat Basque
d' English
da Shetland English
das German
de Danish, Dutch, English, Frisian, Norwegian, Swedish
dei Norwegian
dem German
den Danish, German, Norwegian, Swedish
der German, Yiddish
des German, Walloon
det Danish, Norwegian. Swedish
di Yiddish
die Afrikaans, German, Yiddish
dos Yiddish
e Norwegian
'e Frisian
*cen Dutch
*cene Dutch
*egy Hungarian
*ei Norwegian
*ein German. Norwegian, Walloon
*eine German
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
Appendix E-l
E.1A INITIAL ARTICLES
article(s) language
einem German
einen German
einer German
eines German
*eit Norwegian
el Catalan, Spanish
el- Arabic
els Catalan
*en Catalan, Danish, Norwegian, Swedish
enne Walloon
*et Danish, Norwegian
*ett Swedish
eyn Yiddish
eyne Yiddish
gl' Italian
gli Italian
ha- Hebrew
hai Classical Greek, Greek
he Hawaiian
he Classical Greek, Greek
he- Hebrew
*heis Greek
*hen Greek
*hena Greek
*henas Greek
hot Dutch
hin Icelandic
hina Icelandic
hinar Icelandic
hinir Icelandic
hinn Icelandic
hinna Icelandic
hinnar Icelandic
hinni Icelandic
hins Icelandic
hinu Icelandic
hinum Icelandic
hifl Icelandic
ho Classical Greek, Greek
hoi Classical Greek, Greek
i Italian
in' Provencal
il Italian, Provencal/Occitan
il- Maltese
in Frisian
it Frisian
ka Hawaiian
ke Hawaiian
Appendix E-2
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2005 Update
INITIAL ARTICLES
E.1A
ARTtCLE(S) LANGUAGE
I' Catalan, French, Italian, Provencal/Occitan, Walloon
1- Maltese
la Catalan, Esperanto, French, Italian, Provencal/Occitan, Spanish
las Proven 9a l/Occil an, Spanish
le French, Italian, Provencal/Occitan
les Catalan, French, Provencal/Occitan. Walloon
lh Provencal/Occitan
Ihi Provencal/Occitan
li Provencal/Occitan, Walloon
lis Provencal/Occitan
lo Italian, Provencal/Occitan, Spanish
los Provencal/Occitan, Spanish
lou Provencal/Occitan
iu Provencal/Occitan
mga Tagalog
niga Tagalog
*mia Greek
*'n Afrikaans, Dutch, Frisian
na Hawaiian, Irish, Scottish Gaelic
na h- Irish, Scottish Gaelic
*nje Alhanian
ny Malagasy
'o Neapolitan Italian
*o Gaiiciun, Hawaiian, Portuguese, Romanian
OS Portuguese
'r Icelandic
's German
't Dutch, Frisian
ta Classical Greek, Greek
tais Classical Greek
tas Classical Greek
te Classical Greek
ten Classical Greek, Greek
tes Classical Greek, Greek
the English
to Classical Greek, Greek
tQ Classical Greek
tois Classical Greek
ton Classical Greek, Greek
ton Classical Greek, Greek
ton Classical Greek, Greek
*um Portuguese
*uma Portuguese
*un Catalan, French, Italian, Provencal/Occitan, Romanian, Spanish
aacr2 Revision 2002 Appendix E-3
E.1B
INITIAL ARTICLES
ARTtCI.F.fS) LANGUAGE
u n' Italian
*una Catalan, Italian, Provengal/Occitan, Spanish
*une French
unei Romanian
unha Gahcian
*uno 3talian, Prove ncal/Occitan
ims Prove n^al/Occi tan
unui Romanian
us Proven$al/Occitan
y Welsh
ye English
yr Welsh
E.1B. For languages not included in the above list, consult reference sources to determine if the
language uses definite or indefinite articles.
Appendix E-4
AACR2 Revision 2002
INDEX
The index covers the rules {including introductions to the rales) and appendices, but not exam-
ples under the rules or works cited in any of the rules or appendices. "App. D" indicates that a
term is defined in Appendix D (Glossary).
Rules for description have been indexed only to the general chapter (chapter 1) unless there
is an amplification, amendment, or examples specific to a particular format in a later chapter.
The index is alphabetized word-by-word, with numerals preceding letters. Numbers, sym-
bols, and punctuation marks at the beginning of index entries are filed as if spelled out. They
are also filed at the beginning of the alphabet, before the A's. Hyphens and other punctuation
and prepositions preceding subentries are ignored in filing. Thus "author-title" is filed as if
spelled "aufhortitle."
Since the locators are arranged hierarchically, index entry terms with shorter (higher) loca-
tors can be assumed to include all the subrules under it. For example, "Physical description
area, 1.5" covers the range of rules from i.5A to 1.5E.
Abbreviations used in the index:
App. Appendix
n Footnote
& (ampersand) in uniform titles, B.3, B.9n3
* (asterisk) in names, see Typographical devices in names
: (colon), use of, see Punctuation of description
, (comma), use of, see Punctuation of description
— (dash), see Dashes
/ (diagonal slash), use of, see Punctuation of description
. . . (ellipsis marks), see Omission, marks of
= (equals sign), use of, see Punctuation of description
! (exclamation point) in names, see Typographical devices
in names
. (full stop or period), see Full stops
? (question mark), 1.0C
; (semicolon), use of, see Punctuation of description
[ ] (square brackets), see Square brackets
A
AACR2
alternative rules and options, 0.7-0.9
appendices, explanation, 0.10
examples in, 0.14, 1.IC1 nl, 20.4, 21.0C
purpose of, 0.1
structure of, 0.3-0.4, 0.23
style of, 0.2
Abbreviations, App. B, see also Acronyms and InitiaJisms;
Initials
corporate names, explanatory references, 26.3C2
Abbreviations com.
Indonesian names, 22.26C1
in place of publication, 1.4C3-1.4C4. B.14
references and filing policy, 26.3A6
before ships' names, 24.5C4
voices (music), 5.7B1
Abridgement of information, see also Omissions
in early printed monographs, 2.I4B-2.14C, 2.14F
other title information, 1.1 E3
publisher, distributor, etc., 1.4D2-1.4D3
title proper, 1.1B4
Abridgements of works, entry, 21.9, 21.12A
Absorbed resources
capitalization of titles, A.4C
notes, 12.7B8
in title proper of successor resource, 12.1B1
Academic degrees, honours, etc.
added to personal names, 22.19B
in statement of responsibility, 1 . 1 F7
Academic disputations, entry, 21.27
Academic dissertations, see Dissertations, notes on
Academic titles, capitalization, A.13E4
Accents, see Diacritical marks
Access, mode of, see Mode of access of electronic
resources, notes on
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-1
INDEX
Access points, see also Headings; Uniform titles
choice of, 21
definition, App. D
introduction, 20.1
Access, restrictions on, see also Library's holdings, notes on
genera! rule, 1.7B20
manuscripts, 4.7B 14
Accession, year of, see Date of accession or ownership
Accompaniments (music)
added accompaniments, entry, 21.21
in uniform title, 25.30B10
Accompanying material, see also Related works
definition, App, D
described dependent iy, 1.9B
notes on, 1.7B 1 1
physical description, 1.5E
as separate items, 1.9A
with specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.5E, 3.7B 1 1
continuing resources, 12. 5E, 12.7B13
electronic resources, 9.2B5, 9.5E, 9.7B i 1
graphic materials, 8.5E, 8.7B11
manuscripts, 4.7B 1 1
microforms, 1 1.5E, 1 L7Bi 1
motion pictures, 7.5E, 7.7B 1 1
music, 5.5E, 5.7B11
printed monographs, 2.5E, 2.7B11
sound recordings, 6.5E, 6.7B1 1
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.5E, 10.7B1I
standard numbers for, 1.8B2
Acronyms and initialisms
capitalization, A.l
corporate names, 24. 2D
presentation and spacing, 24. 1A
references, 26.3A3-26.3A4
place names
references, 26.3A3-26.3A4
references and filing policy, 26.3C2
as titles of continuing resources, 12.1B2-12.1B3, 12.1E1
Activity cards, see also Games; Kits
definition, App. D
general material designation, 1.1C1
specific material designation, 8.5B1
Actors and actresses, see Performers
Acts, legislative, see Laws
Adaptations, see also Adaptations (music)
art works, entry, 21.16
literary forms, entry, 21.10
notes on language, 1.7B2
printed monographs, notes on, 2.7B2
Adaptations (music), see also Arrangements (music)
definition, App. D
entry, 21. ISC
musico- dramatic works, 25.3IC
Adapter, entry, 21,10
Added entries, 21.29-21.30, see also Main entries; Name-
title added entries
analytical added entries, 13.2, 21.30M
definition, App. D
vs. explanatory references, 2L29G, 26.6
for title proper, 25.2E, 26.4B1 n2
Added title page, definition, App. D, see also Series title
page, definition; Variant titles
Additional titles, see Other title information
Additions to headings, see also Corporate names, headings;
Geographic names; Personal names; type of addition,
e.g., Date of . . .
general rule, 20.3
references, 26. 1J
Additions to titles, I.1E6
cartographic materials, 3.1E2
early printed monographs, 2.14D
manuscripts, 4.1E2
motion pictures, 7. IE2
Additions to uniform titles, 25,5
capitalization, A.3C
music, 25,25, 25.30-25.31
references, 26. 1J
Address, terms of, see Terms of address
Addresses (speeches), see Speeches
Administrative divisions, see Departments (subordinate
body)
Administrative regulations, entry, 21.1B2, 21.32, see also
Court rules, entry
Administrative subordinate bodies, see Committees
Advertisements (motion picture) without title proper, 7.1B2
Advertising matter in pagination, 2.5B3
African tribal governments, entry, 21.35A nlO
Afrikaans language, initial articles, E.1A
Afrikaans surnames with prefixes, 22.5DI
Agama (Jain canon), see Jaina Agama
Agencies, government, see Government agencies, entry
Air forces, see Armed forces
Albanian language, initial articles, E.1A
Alphabetic designation (serials), see Numbering area
(serials)
Alphabets, nonroman, see Arabic script, names in; Cyrillic
alphabet abbreviations; Hebrew language; Nonroman
scripts
Alternative formats, see Formats, alternative
Alternative heading entry, 0.5
Alternative titles
definition, App. D
early printed monographs, 2.14B
general rule, 1.1B1
Ambiguous names, see Names not conveying the idea of . . .
Amendments, entry
constitutions, charters, etc., 21.33A, 21.33B
treaties, 21.35E1, 25.16B3
Ampersand (&) in uniform titles, B.3
Index~2
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Analog recordings, see also Type of recording (sound
recordings)
groove characteristics, 6.5C1, 6.5C4
notes, 6.7B10
playing speed, 6.5C3
Analysis, 13
added entries, 13.2
"in" analytics, 13.5
multilevel description, 13.6
of multipart monographs, 13,3
in note area, 13.4
Analytical added entries, see also Analysis
definition, App, D
selection of, 13.2, 21.30M
Analytical notes, definition, App. D
Analytical title page as source of information, 1 2.0B2a
Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules, see AACR2
Animals, scientific names, capitalization. A. 25
Annuals, period covered by, I2.7B10.1
Anonymous works
created before 1501, uniform titles, 25.4C
definition, App. D
entry, 21.5
titie entry, 21.1C
Antipopes, additions to names, 22.16B
Aperture cards
chief source of information, 11.0B1
dimensions, 11.5D2
specific material designation, 1 1.5B1
Apocrypha, uniform titles, 25.18A5
Apocryphal books, uniform title, 25. 1 8A 14
Appeal proceedings, entry, 21.36C3
Appellations of known persons, see Given names
(forenames); Surnames
Appellations of unknown persons, see Fictitious attribution
to name
Arabic language, initial articles, A.2A nl, A.4A n2, E. 1A
Arabic numerals
vs. roman numerals in description, C.2B 1
vs. spelled-out numerals, C.3B
substitution of Western -style arable numerals for oriental
numerals, C.5A, C.5C-C.5D
Arabic script, names in, 22.3C2, 22.22, sec also
Romanization
Aranyakas
references, 25.18L
uniform titles, 25.18H
Archbishops, see Bishops; Religious leaders and officials
Archdioceses, see Jurisdiction, type of: religious and
ecclesiastical
Architectural renderings
definition, App. D
general material designation for, 1.1C1 n2
Archival cataloguing, designations in heading, 21.0D
Area of description, definition, App. D, see also Edition
area; Material specific details area; Note area; Physical
description area; Publication, distribution, etc., area;
Standard number and terms of availability area; Title
and statement of responsibility area
Armed forces, see also Military courts, ad hoc, entry
capitalization, A, 18B
headings, 24.18
below national level, 24.24B
national level, 24.24A
Arrangements (music), see also Adaptations (music)
definition, App. D
entry, 21.18B
uniform titles, 25.35C
Arrangers, designation in heading, 21.1 SB
Art originals and art works, see also Graphic materials;
Three-dimensional artefacts and realia
adaptations, entry, 21.16, .vee also Art reproductions
date of creation, 8.4F2
definition, 21.16A n4, App. D
dimensions, 8.5D4
general material designation, 1.1CI
medium and base, 8.5C1
notes in record of art reproduction, 8.7B22
specific material designation
graphic materials. 8.5B1
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.5B1
Art prints
definition, App. D
dimensions, 8.5D4
process, 8.5C1
specific material designation, 8.5B1
Art reproductions, see also Graphic materials; Three-
dimensionai artefacts and realia
definition, App. D
dimensions, 8.5D4
entry of one work, 21.16B
entry of two or more works, 21.17
general material designation, 1.1C1
notes on originals, 8.7B22
reproduction method, 8.5C1
specific material designation
graphic materials, 8.5B1
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.5B1
Artefacts, definition, App. D, see also Three-dimensional
artefacts and realia
Artefacts not intended primarily for communication
date of manufacture, 10.4F2
place of publication, 10.4C2
publisher, distributor, etc., I0.4D2
Articles (part of speech)
initial, see Initial articles
in surnames with prefixes, 22.5DI
Artistic form of item, see Nature, scope, or artistic form of
item, notes on
Artists in collaborations with writers, 21.24
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-3
INDEX
Aspect ratio, motion pictures, 7. SCI, 7.5C2
Asterisk in names, see Typographical devices in names
Astronomical terms, capitalization, A. 27
Atlases
declination zones, 3.3D2
definition, App. D
dimensions, 3.5D2
number of maps in, 3.5C1, 3.5C4
pagination, 3.5B3
specific material designation, 3.5BI
Auctor in academic disputations, 21.27A n6
Audience of item, notes on, L7B14
cartographic materials, 3.7B 14
continuing resources, I2.7B15
electronic resources, 9.7B14
graphic materials, 8.7BI4
microforms, 1L7B14
motion pictures, 7.7B14
music, 5.7B14
printed monographs, 2.7B14
sound recordings, 6.7B14
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.7B14
Australian place names
abbreviations, B.14
additions, 23.4C
"Author of ... , by," see Characterizing words or phrases
Author, original, entry
not responsible for revisions, 21.12B
responsible for revisions, 21.12A
Author statement, see Statements of responsibility
Authors, probable, entry, 2I.5B
Authorship, sec Corporate bodies, names; Personal authors,
entry; Statements of responsibility
of mixed character, see Mixed responsibility, works of
shared, see Shared responsibility, works of
unknown, see Anonymous works
Author-title added entries, see Name-title added entries
Author-title references, see Namc-tiElc references-
Availability, terms of, see Terms of availability
Avant-titres, see Other title information
Avesta
references, 25. 1 KL
uniform title, 25.18K
B
Ballad operas, entry. 21.19B
Ballets, musical settings for, entry, 21.20
Baluchi language, initial articles, E.1A
Band (music), uniform title, 25.30B6
b&w, use of
graphic materials, 8.5C2
motion pictures, 7.5C4
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.5C2
Baronet, capitalization, A.13E1
Barons and baronesses, see Titles of nobility
Basque language, initial articles, E.1A
Belorussian language, abbreviations, B. 15
Bible, uniform title, 25.18A, see also Apocryphal books,
uniform title
Apocrypha, 25.18A5
capitalization, A.19H-A.19K
groups of books in, 25.18A4
language in uniform titles, 25.18A10
Midrashim on, 25.18E3
references, 25.18A6
Biblical events and concepts, capitalization, A.19E
Bibliographic citations, see also Reference sources
abbreviations, B. 13
in notes
early printed monographs, 2. !8C
general rule, 1.7A3, 1.7A4. 1.7B15
Bibliographic history of item, see History of item, notes on
Bibliographic identities, see Pseudonyms
Bibliographic resources, definition, App. D
Bibliographic volumes different from physical volumes,
2.5B18
Bibliographies, notes on, see Contents notes
Bilingual materials, see Multilingual materials
Bills, legislative, entry, 21.31B3
Binder's title, definition, App. D, see also Cover title,
definition; Spine title, definition
Binding, notes on, .vet? also Physical description area
ancient manuscripts, 4.7B23
qualifying ISBN, 1.8E1, 2.8D
Biographical/critical material, texts with, entry, 21.15
Birth, date of, added to personal names, 22.17, C.7
Bishops, see also Religious leaders and officials
entry of official communications, 21.4DI
official works by, 24.27B1
title and see in heading, 22.16C
Bistum (Holy Roman Empire). 24.27C3
Black and white, see b&w, use of
Blank leaves
ancient manuscripts, 4.7B23
early printed monographs, 2.17A
Bohemian language, see Czech language
Books, see Printed monographs
Books of hours, see Liturgical works
Booksellers, early printed monographs, 2.16A
Bound manuscripts, extent, 4.5B1
"Bound with" notes, see "With" notes
Brahman as
references, 25. 1 SL.
uniform titles, 25.18H
Brahui language, initial articles, E.1A
Braille cassettes, specific material designation, 10.5B1
Braille works, see also Tactile materials
continuing resources, 12.5B3
definition, App, D
general material designation, 1.1C1
manuscripts, 4.5B3
music, 5.5B3
Index-4
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Braille works cont.
pagination, 2.5B22
physical description, notes, 2.7B10
Branches
armed forces, 24.24A, 24.24B2-24.24B3
corporate bodies, 24.9, 24.13
government agencies, 24.18
Brand names on sound recordings, 6.7B19, see also Trade
names
Brass instruments in uniform titles, 25.30B5
Brief titles (music), uniform titics, 25.27C
Briefs (court cases), entry, 21.36C8
British Isles, place names, 23.4D
British peerage, see Titles of nobility: United Kingdom
Broadsides (broadsheets), see also Sheets
definition, App. D
description, 2.5B1
early printed monographs, 2. i7A
Brunei names, 22.27
Buddhist names
ecclesiastics, 22.28D2
Indie, 22.25A, 22.25B
monastics, 22.28D1
religious names, 22. 25 B 4
supreme patriarchs, 22.28D3
Buddhist scriptures, uniform titles, 25.18F
Bulgarian language
abbreviations, B.15
capitalization, A. 3 5
Burmese names, 22.23
"By the author of . . . ," see Characterizing words or phrases
Bynames, see Given names (forenames); Words or phrases
Bytes (eiectronic resources), physical description, 9.5B4
Byzantine Greek works, uniform titles, 25.4B
C
Cadenzas, see Related works
Calendar divisions, capitalization, A.23, see also Months of
the year
Calendars, Gregorian and Julian, see Gregorian calendar
Calendars, liturgical, see Liturgical works
Canada, place names
abbreviations, B.14
additions to, 23.4C
Canon law, see Religious laws, entry
Capital letters, transcription of, early printed monographs,
2.14E
Capitalization, App. A
definition, A.12B
Caption title, see also Variant titles
definition, App. D
as source of information
continuing resources, 12.0B2a
early printed monographs, 2.13A
manuscripts, 4.0B1
music, 5. OBI
printed monographs, 2.0B1
Captioning and subtitles in motion pictures
notes on, 7.7B2
in uniform title, 25. 5C
Carbon copies (manuscripts), 4.7B E
Cardinals, see Bishops; Religious leaders and officials
Carriers, see Containers; Physical carriers (electronic
resources)
Cartographic materials, 3
from corporate bodies, entry, 21.1B2
definition, App. D
digital graphic representation, 3.3A3, 3.7B8
edition area, 3.2, 3.7B7
general material designation, 1.1C1, 3.1C
and ISBD(G), 0.25
mathematical data area, 3.3, 3.7B8
note area, 3.7
physical description area, 3.5, 3.7B10
publication, distribution, etc., area, 3.4, 3.7 B 9
scries area, 3.6, 3.7B12
sources of information, 3.0B
specific material designation, 3.5B1
standard number and terms of availability area, 3.8
statement of responsibility area, 3. IF, 3.7B6
title, 3.IA-3.1E, 3.7B3-3.7B5
Cartridges, computer chip
dimensions, 9.5D1
specific material designation, 9.5B1
Cartridges, computer tape
dimensions, 9.5D1
specific material designation, 9.5B1
Cartridges, film, specific material designation, 7.5B1
Cartridges, filmstrip, specific material designation, 8.5B1
Cartridges, microfilm, specific material designation, 1 1.5B1
Cartridges, sound, see Sound cartridges
Cartridges, stereograph, specific material designation, 8.5B1
Case binding
definition, App. D
description, 2.5B1, 2.5B17
Cassettes, computer tape
dimensions, 9.5 Dl
specific material designation, 9.5B1
Cassettes, film, specific material designation, 7.5B1
Cassettes, microfiche, specific material designation, ] 1.5B1
Cassettes, microfilm, specific materia! designation, i 1,581
Cassettes, sound, see Sound cassettes
Cast (motion pictures, sound recordings), see Performers
Catalan language, initial articles, E.1A
Catalogues (exhibits), definition, App. D
Catalogues (library)
definition, App. D
and filing policies
abbreviations, 26.3A6
acronyms, 26.3 C2
explanatory references, 26.3C1
full stops, 26.3A4, 26.3C2
numbers, 26.3A5
and level of description, 1 .0D
Cathedrals, see Churches, local
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-S
INDEX
Catholic Church, see also Holy See, treaties of; Liturgical
works; Popes; Religious orders
councils, 24. 27 A
dioceses, 24.27C3
diplomatic missions, 24.27D
Roman Curia, 24.27C4, 25.24B
CD-ROMs, see Optical discs
CDs, see Optical discs; Sound discs
Ceased continuing resources
ending dates, 1.4F8, 12.4F2, J2.7BIU
numbering area, I2.3F
specific material designation, 12.5B2
Celestial charts
coordinates, 3.3D2
magnitude, 3.7B8
Chamber music combinations in uniform titles, 25.30B3
Channel Islands, place names, 23. 4D
Channeled communications, see Spirit communications
Channels, sound, number of, 6.5C1, 6.5C7
Chapters of corporate bodies, headings, 24.9, see also
Subordinate bodies
Characterizing words or phrases, see also Epithets; Words
or phrases
as authors, 21.5C
capitalization, A.2B
in entries for persons, 22.11D
references, 26.2A1
Charges to juries, entry, 21.36C5
Charters, entry, 21.33, see also Documents, capitalization
Charts (cartographic materials), see also Maps
celestial, see Celestial charts
definition, App. D
general material designation, 1.1C1 n2
Charts (graphic materials)
definition, App. D
double-sided, 8.5C1
general material designation, 1.1C1
specific material designation, 8.5B1
Chief source of information, see also Sources of information
choices of, 1.0A3
definition, App. D
items lacking title proper, 1.1B7
Children of royal persons, 22.16A4
Chinese language, ordinal numerals, C.8C, see also Oriental
languages
Chinese names
containing a non-Chinese given name, 22.24
Indonesian names of Chinese origin, 22.26F
Malaysian residents, 22.27A
Chinese-style printing, see Traditional format (oriental
books)
Chip cartridge, computer, specific material designation,
9.5BI
Choral music, uniform titles. 25.30B9, 25.34C1 nl4, see
also Vocal music
Choreographers, entry, 21.20
Choreographies, see Related works
Chorepiscopus, 22. 16C, see also Bishops; Religious leaders
and officials
Chorus scores, see also Musical works that include words,
entry
definition, App. D
specific material designation, 5.5B1
uniform titles, 25.35D
Christian names, see Given names (forenames)
Church councils
conventional names, 24.3C2 n8
headings for, 24.27
Churches, local, see also Religious bodies
additions to names, 24. 10
headings for, 24, 3 G
Citation title in uniform titles, 25. 1 5A 1 , 25. 1 5A2
Citations of honours in corporate names, 24, 5B
Citations to court reports, entry, 21.36B
Cities and towns, see also Place names, local, added to
corporate names
abbreviations, B.14
added to place names, 23.4F2
capitalization, A. 15B
Civil courts
entry of proceedings, 21.36C2
headings, 24. 23 A
Civil titles, see Titles of position or office
Close scores
definition, App. D
specific material designation, 5.5B1
Closed captions, see Captioning and subtitles in motion
pictures
Clothing, see Artefacts not intended primarily for
communication
Coins, see Artefacts not intended primarily for
communication
Collaborations between artist and writer, entry, 21.24, see
also Shared responsibility, works of
Collaborators, see also Joint authors, definition; Mixed
responsibility, works of; Shared responsibility,
works of
added entries, 21. 30B
definition, App. D
Collation of manuscripts, 4.7B23, see also Extent of item
Collections, see also Collections, manuscript; Selections as
uniform title; "With" notes
with collective title, entry, 21. 7B
without collective title, see Collective title, items without
definition, App. D
of specific materials
administrative regulations, 21.32C
court proceedings, 2I.36C9
court rules, 21.34B-21.34C
graphic materials, 8.1B3, 8.4F3
laws, 21.31B2, 25.15A1
maps, 3.0 J
lndex-6
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Collections coot.
Midrashim, 25.18E2
music, 21.19BI, 21.19C, 25.34
official communications, 21.4D3
official communications by more than one holder,
21.4D1
translations, 21.14B
treaties, 21. 35F, 25. 16 A
works by different persons, 21. IC, 21.7
sound recordings, 21.23B-2L23D
works by the same person, uniform title, 25.8-25.11
Collections, assembled
basis of description, 1.0A2
source of information, J .OA t
Collections, incomplete, see Selections as uniform title
Collections, manuscript, see also Manuscripts
accompanying materia!, 4.7B11
dimensions, 4.5 D2
extent of item, 4.5B2
lacking title, 4.1B2
notes, 4.7B I
source of information, 4.0B 1
Collections, unpublished, date, 1.4F10
Collective title, items without, see also Collective titles
description of, 1. !G
edition statement, 1.2B6
entry, 21.7C
general materia! designation, 1.1C2
with no predominating unit, 1.1G2-1.1G3
notes of separately published items, see "With" notes
with predominating unit, 1.1G4
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.1G, 3.2B5
electronic resources, 9.1G, 9.2B7, 9.5B2
graphic materials, 8.1B2-8.1B3, 8.1G2, 8.2B5
manuscripts, 4.1G
microforms, 11. IG, M.2B5, 11.5B3
motion pictures, 7.1G, 7.2B5, 7.5B3
multimedia items, 1.10C1
music, 5.1G, 5.2B5
printed monographs, 2.1G2, 2.2B5
sound recordings, 6.1G, 6.2B5, 6.5B3, 6.7B30,
21.23D
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.1G, 10.2B5
statement of responsibility, 1.1G3
Collective titles, see also Collective title, items without
capita! izati on, uniform titles, A.3B-A.3C
collections with, entry, 21.7B
cycles, 25.12
definition, App. D
explanatory references, 26.4D3
music, 25.34
references, 26.4B4
as title proper, 1.1B10
uniform titles, 25.8-25.11
Colon, use of, see Punctuation of description
Colonies, see Dependent territories, governors of
Colophon
definition, App. D
as source of information
continuing resources, 12.0B2a
early printed monographs, 2,t3A
manuscripts, 4. OBI
music, 5.0B1
oriental resources, 2.0B 1, 12.0B2a
printed monographs, 2.0B1
Colour, nee also Coloured illustrations
cartographic materials, 3.5C1, 3.5C5
electronic resources, 9.5C1
graphic materials, 8.5C2
microforms, U.5C3
motion pictures, 7.5C1, 7.5C4
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.5C2
Colour printing, early printed monographs, 2. 18E
Colour process or recording system, notes on,
7.7B10
Coloured illustrations
definition, App. D
early printed monographs, 2.17B, 2.18F
printed monographs, 2.5C3
Columns, number of, see also Pagination
ancient, medieval, and Renaissance manuscripts, 4.5B1
early printed monographs, 2.17A, 2.18E
printed monographs, 2.5B1, 2.5B2
Comma, use of, see Punctuation of description
Command districts (armed forces), 24.24A
Commentaries on texts, entry, 21.13
Commissions (corporate body), see Committees;
Delegations
Committees, see also Joint commissions and committees
government agencies, 24.18
of legislative bodies, 24.21B
as subordinate corporate bodies, 24.13
Compact discs, see Optical discs; Sound discs
Companies (military services), see Armed forces
Companies (performance group), see Performance groups
Compilations, see Collections
Compilers, see also Editors; Function, designations of
added entries, 21. 30D
collections, 21. 7B, 21.7C
definition, App. D
designation in added entry, 2L0D
law reports, 21.36A1, 21.36A2
taws, 21.31B1
taws, ancient, 21.31C
treaties, 21.35F2
Complete works as uniform title
genera! rule, 25.8
music, 25.34A
Components, extent of, 1.5B3, see also Extent of item
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index~7
INDEX
Composers (musical works), entry
accompaniments, 21.21
arrangements, 21.18B
ballets, 21.20A
musical works that include words, 21.19A
settings of songs, 21.19C
Composers (sound recordings), entry, 21.23
Composition (music)
notes on, 5.7B1
in title proper, 5.1B1
uniform titles, 25.27D, 25.29-25.30
collections of, 25.34C2
date or place of, 25.30E
type of, 25.27A nlO
Compound surnames, see Surnames, compound
Compound words
abbreviations, B.7
capitalization, A. 30, A.31-A.32
Computer chip cartridge, specific material designation,
9.5B1
Computer disks, see Disks (electronic resources)
Computer files, see Electronic resources
Computer makes and models, notes on, 9.7B1
Computer optical discs, see Optical discs
Computer peripherals, notes on, 9.7B 1
Computer tape cartridges, see Cartridges, computer tape
Computer tape cassettes, see Cassettes, computer tape
Computer tape reels
dimensions, 9.5D1
specific material designation, 9.5B1
Concordances, see Related works
Condensed scores
definition, App. D
specific material designation, 5.5B1
Conductor parts (music)
definition, App. D
specific material designation, 5.5BI
Conferences
additions to names, 24 .7 B
ancient and international bodies, 24.3C2 n8
changes in place name of, 23.3
definition, 21.1B1 nl, App. D
delegations to, 24.26
entry, 21.1B2
explanatory references, 26.3C1
headings for, 24. 3F
omissions from names, 24.7A
references, 26.3A2
treaties from, 21.35A2
Confessions of faith, see Creeds, theological
Conflict resolution, see also Identical names, distinguishing
music, 25.31B
uniform titles, 25. 5B
Congress (U.S.), legislative subcommittees, 24.21C
Congresses, see Conferences; Legislative bodies
Conjectural information, see Uncertain information
Consorts of royal persons, 22.16A3
Constitutional conventions, headings for, 24.22
Constitutions, entry, 21.1B2, 21.33, see also Documents,
capitalization
Consulates, see Embassies, headings for
Containers, see also Physical carriers (electronic resources)
definition, App. D
in physical description, 1.5D2
cartographic materials, 3.5D5
manuscript collections, 4.5B2
multimedia items, I.10C2
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.5D2-10.5D3
as source of information
cartographic materials, 3.0B2
electronic resources, 9 .OB 1
graphic materials, 8. OB
microforms, i 1.0B
motion pictures, 7. OB
sound recordings, 6.0B
three-dimensional artefacts, 10. OBI, 10.0H1
title on, see Variant titles
Content, summary of, see Summary of content, notes on
Contents notes, 1.7B18
as analysis, 1 3.4
items lacking collective title, 1.1G1, 1.1G4
items with collective titles, 1 . IB 30
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.7B18
continuing resources, 12.7B19
electronic resources, 9.7B18
graphic materials, 8.7B18
manuscripts, 4.7B18
microforms, 11.7B18
motion pictures, 7.7B6, 7.7B18
music, 5.7B18
printed monographs, 2.7B18
sound recordings, 6.7B18
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.7B18
Continuations, see also Related works
definition, App. D
notes on related resources, 12.7B8
Continuing resources, 12. see also Integrating resources;
Serials
definition, App. D
edition area, 12.2, 12.7B9
general material designation, 12. IC
and ISBD(G), 0.25
key-title, 1.8C, 12.8C
merged or absorbed, see Absorbed resources; Mergers of
continuing resources
note area, 12.7
other title information, 12.1E, 12.1E1, 12.7B6
physical description area, 12.5, 12.7B12
publication, distribution, etc., area, 12.4, 12.7B11
relationship with other resources, 12.7B8
sections, see Sections (continuing resources)
series area, 12.6, 12.7B14
IndeX'8
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Continuing resources cont,
sources of information, 12. OB, I2.7B3
standard number and terms of availability area, 12.8
statement of responsibility area, 12. IF, 12.7B7
title, 12.1A-12.1E, I2.7B4-12.7B6
Continuo, see also Medium of performance (music)
in medium of performance, 25.30B1
as part of orchestra, 25.30B6
Conventional names
corporate bodies, 24. 3 C
definition, App. D
governments, 24. 3E
Conventional titles, see Uniform titles
Conventions, sec Conferences; Treaties
Conversations, see Exchanges, reports of, entry
Coordinates of cartographic materials, 3.3DI, 3.7B8
Copies, see Facsimile reproductions, definition; Photocopies;
Reproductions
Copy being described, early printed monographs, 2. 18F, see
also Item described note; Library's holdings, notes on
Copyright date, 1.4F5-L4F6
electronic resources, 9.4F4
music, 5.4F1
Corporate bodies, see also Corporate names, headings
added entries, 21.30E
agreements with governments, entry, 21.35D4
changes in body responsible for a work, 21.3
definition, 21.1B1, App. D
entry under, 21. IB
notes on, see Statements of responsibility: notes on
publication, simultaneous, in different titles, 25.3C2
records of, without title, 4.1B2
as titles of continuing resources, 12.1B3, 12.1 E i
works emanating from, entered under title, 21. 1C
works erroneously or fictitiously attributed to, 21.4C2
works of single authorship, 21. 4B
Corporate names, headings, 24, see also Corporate bodies;
Subordinate bodies
abbreviations, B.9 n4
additions to names, 24.4
additions to names, capitalization, A. 2D
capitalization, A. 2, A. 18
changes of name, 24. 1C
conventional names, 24.3 C
identical names, distinguishing, 24.4C
initials and acronyms, see Initials: corporate bodies
language, 24.3A-24.3B
names not conveying the idea of a corporate body, 24. 4B
numerals in names, C.3AI, C.5C
place names in, 20.2, 24.4C2-24.4C4, B.14
place names in, changes in, 23.3
references, 26.3
roman numerals in names, C.2A1
variant names, 24.2-24.3
Corrections, see Inaccuracies in item
Correspondence, see also Letters (correspondence),
manuscript; Shared responsibility, works of
collections without title, 4.1 B2
as uniform title, 25.10
Councils, religious, see Church councils
Countesses, see Titles of nobility
Countries, see also Geographic names
abbreviations, B.14
capitalization, A. 15B
corporate names, added to, 24.4C2, B.14
place names, added to, 23.4E
as place of publication, 1.4C6
place of publication, added to, 1.4C3, B.14
Country of original release of motion pictures, notes on,
7.7B9
Counts, see Titles of nobility
Court decisions, entry, 2L1B2, 21.36, see also Judicial
decisions, entry
Court proceedings, entry
civil and noncriminal, 21.36C2
criminal, 2L36C1
Court rules, entry, 21.1B2, 21,34
Courtroom arguments, entry, 21.36C8
Courts, see also Criminal courts
capitalization, A.18B
headings, 24.18, 24.23
Courts, military, see Military courts, ad hoc, entry
Courts of inquiry (military), see Military courts, ad hoc,
entry
Courts- martial, see Military courts, ad hoc, entry
Cover as source of information
continuing resources, 12.0B2a
early printed monographs, 2.13A
music, 5.0B1
printed monographs, 2. OB 1
Cover title, definition, App. D, see also Binder's title,
definition; Spine title, definition; Variant titles
Cradle and stand (globes) as source of information, 3.0B2
Credits for motion pictures, notes on, 7.7B6
Creeds, theoiogicai
capitalization, A.19F
entry, 21.38
uniform titles, 25.19B
Criminal courts
entry of proceedings, 21.36C1
headings, 24, 23 A
Critical material, texts published with, entry, 21.15
Cross-references, see References
Curia, Roman, see Catholic Church
Customary law, see Laws, ancient
Cycles, uniform titles, 25.12A
Cyrillic alphabet abbreviations, B.10
Czech language
abbreviations, B.15
capitalization, A. 3 6
compound surnames, 22.5C5
surnames with prefixes, 22.5D5
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-9
INDEX
D
Dame, see Terms of honour and respect
Danish language, see also Scandinavian languages
abbreviations, B.I5
compound surname uncertain, 22.5C6
initial articles, E.iA
pronouns, capitalization, A.47E1
Dashes, see also Punctuation of description
at beginning of titles, capitalization of words following,
A.4B
in names, 21.5C, 22.10
Data set name, see File names (electronic resources)
Data type of cartographic materials, 3.3E1
Date of accession or ownership
graphic materials, 8.7B6
manuscripts, 4.7B7
Date of birth, death, etc.
added to personal names, 22.17
numerals in, C.7
Date of composition (music)
in title statement, 5. IB]
in uniform title, 25.30E
Date of conference in corporate headings, 24. 7A, 24.7B3
Date of constitutional conventions, 24. 22 A
Date of creation
electronic resources, 9.4F2
graphic materials, 8.4F2
microforms, 1 1.4F2
motion pictures, 7.4F3
Date of data collection (electronic resources), 9.7B7
Date of delivery for manuscript speeches, 4.4B2
Date of distribution, 1 .4F4, see also Date of publication
Date of exhibitions, 24.8B
Date of founding (corporate bodies)
in heading, 24.4C6
in statement of responsibility, 1.1F7
Date of jurisdiction (governments), 24.6D
Date of manufacture, 1.4F6, 1.4G3-1.4G4, see also Date of
printing
artefacts not intended primarily for communication,
10.4F2
continuing resources, 12.4G3
electronic resources, 9.4G2
graphic materials, 8.4G
motion pictures, 7.4G
sound recordings, 6.4G2
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.4G
Date of manuscript, 4.4
Date of military courts, 24.23B
Date of printing, 1 ,4F6, see also Date of manufacture
cartographic materials, 3.4G2
early printed monographs, 2. IGF
music, 5.4G2
printed monographs, 2.4G2
Date of production (motion pictures), 7.4F2, 7.7B9
Date of publication, 1.4F
arabic numerals used, C.2B1
Bible, 25.18A13
named revisions, L4F3
notes on, see Publication, distribution, etc., area
numerals in, C.3B, C.5D
reproductions, l.UC
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.4F
continuing resources, 12.4F, 12.7B11.1
cariy printed monographs, 2.16F— 2.16G
electronic resources, 9.4F
graphic materials, 8.4F
microforms, 1 1 ,4F
motion pictures, 7.4F, 7.7B9
music, 5.4F
printed monographs, 2.4F
sound recordings, 6.4F
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.4F
Date of publication, beginning, 1.4F8
continuing resources, 12.4F1, 12.7B11.1
Date of publication, ending, 1.4F8
integrating resources, 12.4F2b, 12.7B11.1
serials, 12.4F2a, 12.7B11.1
Date of recording (sound recordings), 6.4F2-6.4F3
Date of release (motion pictures), 7.4F1
Date of viewing (remote access resources), 1.7B23, 9.7B22,
J2.7B23
Date, varying, in serial title, 12.1B7
Dates
abbreviations of terms used with, B.2
in manuscript titles, 4.1B2
in personal names, 22.17, 22.19B
Dates, inclusive, 1.4F8
format of. C.5E, C.6
graphic materials, collections of, 8.4F3
manuscript collections, 4.4B1
Dates of coverage (electronic resources), 9.7B7
Dates of incumbency
heads of government, 24.20C1
heads of international and intergovernmental
organizations, 24.20C2
heads of state, 24.20B1
religious officials, 24.27BI
Dates of reign
popes, 24.27B2
sovereigns, 24.20B1
Days of the week, see Calendar divisions, capitalization
Deaf, signing for the, in motion pictures, 7.7B2
Death, date of, added to personal names, 22,17, C.7
Debates, see Shared responsibility, works of
Declination in cartographic materials, 3.3D2
Decorations (awards), capitalization, A. 22
Decrees, see Laws
Defective copies, see Library's holdings, notes on
Index-10
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Defendants, entry
academic disputations, 21.27
courts-martial, 24.23B
Degrees, see Academic degrees, honours, etc.
Deities, capitalization, A.19A
Dekgations
apostolic (Catholic Church), 24.27D
to international bodies, 24.18, 24.26
Departments (subordinate body)
corporate bodies, 24.13
government agencies, 24.18, A. 18B
Dependent territories, governors of, 24.20D
Depth, see Dimensions
Derivatives of proper names, capitalization, A. 17
deities, A.19A3
religions, A.19D
Description, level of, see Level of description
Description, multilevel, see Multilevel description
Description of item, see also specific types of material
basis of, 1.0A2
vs. entry terms, 0.6
genera! rules, 1, see also names of specific areas, e.g.,
Edition area
introduction, 0.21-0.29
numerals in, C.2B, C.3B, C.5D
organization of, 1.0B
Designations, see also General material designation;
Identical names, distinguishing; Specific material
designation; Words or phrases
corporate names, additions to, 24 .4B, 24.4C7
of function, see Function, designations of
government names, added to, 24. 6C
local church names, 24.10
personal names, see Persona! names; additions to
radio and television stations, 24.11
serials, see Numbering area (serials)
uniform titles, 25. 5B
Detail, levels of, see Level of description
Devices indicating authorship, 21.5C
Devil (Satan), A.19B
Diacritical marks
in description of item, LOG
in personal names, 22. ID!
in transcription of title, L1B1
Diagonal slash, use of, see Punctuation of description
Diagrams (cartographic materials), 3.5B1
Diameter
computer disks, 9.5D1
globes, 3.5D4
sound discs, 6.5D2
sound tape reels, 6.5D6
videodiscs, 7.5D4
Diffuse authorship, see Mixed responsibility, works of;
Shared Responsibility, works of
Digests of court reports, entry, 2L36B
Digital graphic representation of cartographic materials,
3.3A3, 3.3E, 3.7B8
Digital recordings, playing speed, 6.5C3, see also Type of
recording (sound recordings)
Dimensions, 1.5D, see also Dimensions, standard; specific
formats, e.g., Film strips
cartographic materials, 3.5D
continuing resources, 12.5D
early printed monographs, 2.17C
electronic resources, 9.5D
graphic materials, 8.5D
manuscripts, 4.5D
microforms, 1 1.5D
motion pictures, 7.5D, 7.7B 10
music, 5.5D
printed monographs, 2.5D
sound recordings, 6.5D
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.5D
Dimensions, standard
microfiches, 1 1.5D3
slides, 8.5D5
sound cartridges, 6.5D4
sound cassettes, 6.5 D5
width of tape, 6.5D4, 6.5D5, 6.5D6
Dioceses, see Jurisdiction, type of: religious and
ecclesiastical
Dioramas
definition, App. D
general material designation, 1.1C1
specific material designation, 10.5B1
Direct access electronic resources, see also Remote access
resources
definition, 9.0A, App. D
notes on, 9.7B1
source of information, 12.0B2b
Discs (electronic resources), see DVDs, specific material
designation; Optical discs
Discs (sound recordings), see Sound discs
Discs (videorecordings), see DVDs, specific material
designation; Videodiscs
Disks (electronic resources)
definition, App. D
dimensions, 9.5D1
physical characteristics, 9.5C2
specific material designation, 9.5B1
Disputations, academic, entry, 21.27
Dissertations, notes on, 1.7B13
electronic resources, 9.7B13
as manuscript, 4.7B13, see also Manuscripts
microforms, 1L7B13
music, 5.7B13
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.7B13
Distinction, titles of, see Terms of honour and respect
Distribution area, see Publication, distribution, etc., area
Distribution date, see Date of distribution
Distributors, see also Publishers, distributors, etc.
added to name of publisher, 1.4D5
definition, App. D
Divisions, see Departments (subordinate body)
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
IndeX'll
INDEX
Documentation (electronic resources) as source of
information, 9.0B I , see also Accompanying material
Documents, capitalization, A. 20
Donors, notes on
graphic materials, 8.7B6
manu scripts, 4.7B7
Double leaves, see also Traditional format (oriental books)
definition, App. D
printed monographs, 2.5B 1 1
Doubtful information, see Uncertain information
Drafts
constitutions, entry, 2L33C
legislation, entry, 21.31B3
manuscript, 4.2A I
Dramatic works, incidental music to, see Related works
Dramatizations, see Adaptations
Drawings, technical, see Technical drawings
Dabbed motion pictures, uniform title, 25. 5C, see also
Captioning and subtitles in motion pictures
Duchesses, see Titles of nobility
Duets, uniform titles, 25.29B
Dukes, see Titles of nobility
Duration (playing time), 1.5B4
motion pictures, 7.5B2
music, 5.7B10
sound recordings, 6.5B2-6.5B3, 6.7B10, 6.7B18
videodiscs, 7.5B2, 7.7B30
Dutch language
abbreviations, B.15
capi tali rati on, A. 37
initial articles, E.1A
surnames with prefixes, 22.5D1, A.37B
DVDs, see Optical discs; Videodiscs
E
Earlier titles (continuing resources) in title proper, 12. IB 1
Earls, see Titles of nobility
Early cartographic materials, dimensions, 3.5D1
Early printed monographs, 2. 1 2-2. 1 7, see also Incunabula;
Works created before 1501, uniform titles
chief source of information, 2. 1 3
edition statement, 2.15
note area, 2. 1 8
physical description area, 2.17
publication area, 2.16
title proper, 2. 14A
Early printed music, publication details, 5.4B2
Earth, capitalization, A. 27
Eastern Church, autocephalous patriarchates of, 24.3C3, see
also Orthodox Eastern Church, liturgical works, entry
Ecclesiastical jurisdiction, see Jurisdiction, type of: religious
and ecclesiastical
Ecclesiastical officials, see Religious leaders and officials
Ecclesiastical principalities of the Holy Roman Empire,
24.27C3
Ecclesiastics, Buddhist, 22.28D2
Economic systems, capitalization, A. 1 8D
Edition area, see also Edition statement doubtful or lacking
abbreviations in, B.5A
capitalization, A. 5
general rules, 1.2
facsimiles, 1.1 1C
notes on, 1.7B7
selection of, 1.2B3
supplied edition statement, 1.2B4
symbols in, L2B2
transcription of, 1.2B1
numerals in, C.2B, C.3B, C.5D
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.2, 3.7B7
continuing resources, 12.2, 12.7B9
early printed monographs, 2,15
electronic resources, 9.2, 9.7B7, 12.7B9
graphic materials, 8.2, 8.7B7
manuscripts, 4.2
microforms, 11.2, 11.7B7
motion pictures, 7.2, 7.7B7
music, 5.2, 5.7B7
printed monographs, 2.2, 2.7B7
sound recordings, 6.2, 6.7B7
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.2, 10.7B7
Edition (books), definition, App. D
Edition, date of, see Date of publication
Edition (electronic resources), definition, App. D
Edition (other materials), definition, App. D
Edition statement, see Edition area
Edition statement doubtful or lacking, 1.2B3
cartographic materials, 3.2B3
electronic resources, 9.2B3
graphic materials, 8.2B3
manuscripts, 4.2B3
microforms, 1 1 .2B3
motion pictures, 7.2B3
music, 5.2B3
printed monographs, 2.2B3
sound recordings, 6.2B2-6.2B3
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.2B3
Edition (unpublished items), definition, App. D
Editions, see also Edition area; Facsimile reproductions,
definition; Impressions; Issues, definition; Reprints
changes in responsibility for, 21.6C1
citation in notes, 1.7A4
with commentaries, entry, 21.13C
definitions, App. D
Editorial page as source of information, 12.0B2a
Editors, see also Compilers; Function, designations of
added entries, 2L30D
collections, entries for, 21. 7B, 21. 7C
definition, App. D
designation in added entry, 21. OD
integrating resources, 12. lF3b, 21.30D
Index-12
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Editors cons.
law reports, entries for, 2I.36A1, 21.36A2
serials, 12.1F3a, I2.7B7.1, 21.30D
works of shared responsibility, 21.6C2
Election cases, entry, 21.36C2
Electronic journals (direct access scriais), l2.0B2b, see also
Continuing resources; Electronic resources
Electronic resources, 9
cartographic materials, 3.3B1, 3.3E
definition, App. D
edition area, 9.2, 9JB7
edition statement, source of, 9.7B7, 12.7B9.1
general material designation, 1.1C1, 9.1C
multipart items, dimensions, 9.5D2
note area, 9.7
physical description area, 9.5, 9.7B10
publication, distribution, etc., area, 9.4, 9.7B9
series area, 9.6, 9.7B12
sources of information, 9.0B
specific material designation, 9.5B1
standard number and terms of availability area, 9.8
statement of responsibility area, 9.1F, 9.7B6
title, 9.1A-9.1E, 9.7B3-9.7B5
type and extent of resource notes, 9.7B8
Element, definition, App. D, see also Initial title element
(music)
Ellipsis marks, see Omission, marks of
Ellipsoids in description, 3.3C2, 3.7B8
"Emanating from," definition, 21.1 B2 n2
Embassies, headings for, 24.18, 24.25
Emissaries, papal, headings for, 24.27D
Emperors and empresses, see Royalty, headings; Sovereigns
Engineering drawings, see Technical drawings
England, place names, 23.4D
English form of names added to place of publication,
3.4C2-1.4C3
English language
capitalization, A.12-A.32
compound surname uncertain, 22.5C6
initial articles, E.!A
surnames with prefixes, 22.5D1
Ensembles (musical), uniform titles, 25.30B5, 25.30B7
Ensembles (performance group), see Performance groups
Entries, see also Headings
definition, App. D
structure of, 0.6
Entry word, definition, App. D, see also Headings
Epithets, see also Given names (forenames); Words or
phrases
capitalization, A. 13H
names in Arabic alphabet, 22.22C, 22.22D
in names of royalty, 22.16A1
references, 26. 2 A3
Epoch, statement of, description, 3.3D2
Eponyms, see Derivatives of proper names, capitalization
Equals sign, use of, see Punctuation of description
Equinox in description, 3.3D2
Equipment requirements, notes on
electronic resources, 9.7B1
microform readers, I1.7B10
motion picture projection requirements, 7.5C2, 7.7B10
Erroneous attribution to name, see also Fictitious attribution
to name, entry
entry, 22.1 1C
references, 26.2C2, 26.2D1
Errors in item, see Inaccuracies in item
Esperanto language, initial articles, E.1A
Esquire, capitalization, A.13F
Essays as uniform title, 25.10
Estonian language, abbreviations, B. 15
Ethnic groups, see Peoples, names of, capitalization
Eucharist, capitalization, A.19G, see also Mass, uniform
title
Events as corporate bodies, see also Historic events and
periods, capitalization; Religious events and concepts,
capitalization
entry, 21.1B1, 21.1B2
modifications to headings, 24.8
Excerpts, see Parts of works; Selections as uniform title
Exchanges, reports of, entry, 21.25, see also Reporters,
entry: as authors
Exclamation points in names, see Typographical devices in
names
Executive agencies of government, headings for, 24. J 8
Executive orders, entry, 2I.1B2, see also Laws
Exhibitions, 24.8, see also Events as corporate bodies
Exhibits (three-dimensional artefacts), specific material
designation, 10.5B1
Expeditions, entry, 2 1 . 1 B2
Explanatory references, 26. IE
vs. added entries, 21.29G, 26.6
Bible, 25.18A6
Bible, Apocryphal books, 25.18A14
Catholic Mass, 25.23B-25.23C
corporate names and place names, 26. 3C
definition, App. D
delegations to international bodies, 24.26
for dictionary catalogs, 26.3CI
heads of government, 24.20C3
heads of state, 24.20B2
personal names, 26.2D
in place of added entries, 21.29G
Talmud, Mishnah, and Tosefta, 25.18D
uniform titles, 26.4D
Explanatory words or phrases, see Words or phrases
Explicit
definition, App. D
as source of information, early printed monographs,
2.13A
Extensions to treaties, entry, 21.35E
Extent of item, I.5B, see also Pagination; Specific material
designation
ancient manuscripts, 4.7 B 23
definition, App. D
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
IndeX'13
INDEX
Extent of item cant.
incomplete items, 1.5B5, 2.5B21
multimedia items, 1.10C2
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.5B
continuing resources, 12.5B
early printed monographs, 2.17A
electronic resources, 9.5B, 9.8B8
graphic materials, 8,5B
manuscripts, 4.5B
microforms, 1 1.5B
motion pictures, 7.5B
music, 5.5B
printed monographs, see Pagination
sound recordings, 6.5B
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.5B
Extracts, see Collections; Parts of works; Selections as
uniform title
F
Facsimile reproductions, definition, App. D, see also
Reprints; Reproductions
Family names, see Surnames
Farocse language, see Scandinavian languages
Faroese names, compound surname uncertain, 22.5C6
Fascicles, definition, App. D
Fiches, see Microfiches
Fictitious attribution to name, entry, 21.4C, see also
Erroneous attribution to name
Fictitious publication, distribution, etc., 1.4B6
Figures, see Numerals
File {electronic resources)
definition, App. D
physical description, 9.5B4
File names (electronic resources)
locally assigned, 9.7B20
and titie proper, 9.1B3
as title proper, 9.7B4
Files, computer, see Electronic resources
Filial indicators, see also Patronymics; Relationship, words
indicating
Indonesian names, 22.26C
Malay names, 22.27C, 22.27C n21
Filing titles, see Uniform titles
Film base (motion pictures), notes on, 7.7B10
Film cartridges, specific material designation, 7.5Bi
Film cassettes, specific material designation, 7.5B1
Film length (motion pictures), notes on, 7.7B10
Film loops, specific material designation, 7.5B1
Film masters, notes on, 7.7B10
Film, microform, notes on, 11.7B10
Film reels, specific material designation, 7.5B1
Film, sound recordings on, 6.0B1
Film trailers, see Trailers, film
Films, see Microforms; Motion pictures
Films, sound track, see Sound track films (sound recordings)
Fiimslips
frames, 8.5B2
gauge, 8.5D2
multipart, 8.5B5
sound, 8.5C1
specific material designation, 8.5B1
Filmstrips
definition, App, D
frames, 8.5B2
gauge, 8.5D2
general material designation, 1.1C1
multipart, 8,585
sound, 8.5C1
specific materia! designation, 8.5B1
Finding aids, see Guides, unpublished, to manuscript
collections
Finnish language, capitalization, A. 38
Flash cards
definition, App, D
general material designation, 1.1C1
sound, 8.5C1
specific material designation, 8.5B1
Flemish names, surnames with prefixes, see Dutch language;
surnames with prefixes
Flip charts
double-sided, 8.5C1
extent, 8.5B3
multipart, 8.5B5
specific material designation, 8.5B1
Floppy disks, see Disks (electronic resources)
Folded leaves, printed monographs, 2.5B10
Folded manuscripts, dimensions, 4.5D1
Foliation, see also Leaves
ancient, medieval, and Renaissance manuscripts, 4.7B23
in uniform titles, 25.13B
Foreign languages, capitalization, A.33-A.52, see also
specific language
Forenames, see Given names (forenames)
Form, artistic, see Literary form; Nature, scope, or artistic
form of item, notes on
Form, literary, see Literary form
Form of composition (music), see Composition (music)
Form of print (motion pictures), notes on, 7.7B10
Formal notes, I.7A3
Format (generic term), definition, App. D, see also Physical
presentation statement
Format name (cartographic materials), 3.3E
Format (texts)
definition, App. D
early printed monographs, 2.17C
Formats, alternative, 1.7B16
cartographic materials, 3.7B16
continuing resources, 12.7B16
electronic resources, 9.7B16
graphic materials, 8.7B16
microforms, 11.7B16
Itidex-14
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
INDEX
Formats, alternative com.
motion pictures, 7.7B16
music;, 5.7B16
physical description of, 1 .5A3
printed monographs, 2.7B16
sound recordings, 6.7B16
Forms of name, see Variant names
Frames (graphic materials)
number of, 8.5B2
as sources of information, 8.0B 1
Frames (videodiscs)
number of, 7.7BI0
of still images, duration, 7.5B2
Fraternal orders, 24.3C2 n8
Free transcriptions of music, entry, 21 . ISC, see also
Adaptations (music); Arrangements (music)
French language
abbreviations, B.15
capitalization, A. 3 9
compound surnames, 22.5C5
initial articles, E.1A
surnames with prefixes, 22.5D1, A.39C
Frequency of continuing resources
accompanying material, 12. 5E
in edition area, 12.2B2
notes, 12.7B1
in other title information, 12. 1EL
Frisian language, initial articles, E, LA
Full stops
in description, see Punctuation of description
filing of, and references, 26.3A4, 26.3C2
in names of corporate bodies, 24,1 A
in title proper, 1.1B6
Fullness of names
corporate and place names, references, 26.3A3
persona! names
choice among, 22. 3A, 22.18
references, 26.2A2
Function, designations of
abbreviations, B.2, B.9 n6
arrangers, 21.1 8B
in entry of academic disputations, 21.27
in headings, 21. OD
legal designations, 2I.36C1, 21.36C2, 2L36C3, 21.36C8
publishers, distributors, etc., see Publishers, distributors,
etc.: function
in statements of responsibility, 1.1 F8
cartographic materials, 3.1F2
electronic resources, 9.1F2
graphic materials, 6.IF2
microforms. 1 L1F2
motion pictures, 7. i F2
music, 5.1F2, 5.1G2
printed monographs, 2.IF2, 2.1G2
sound recordings, 6.1F3
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.1F2
Galician language, initial articles, E.1A
Games, see also Activity cards; Kits; Toys
definition, App. D
general material designation, 1.1C1
specific material designation, 10.5B3
Gatherings in manuscripts, 4.7B23
Gauge
filmslips and filmstrips, 8.5D2
motion pictures, 7.5D2
sound track films, 6.5D3
videolapcs/videoreels, 7.5D3
General material designation, 1.1 C, see also Extent of item;
Specific material designation
Braille manuscripts, 4.5B3
capitalization, A.4E
definition, App. D
multimedia items, 1.10C1
punctuation of, 1.0C
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.1C
graphic materials, 8.1C
manuscripts, 4.1C, 4.5B3
microforms, 1I.1C, 11.5B1
motion pictures, 7.1C, 7.5B3
music, 5.1C, 5.5B3
printed monographs, 2.1C
sound recordings, 6.1C, 6.5B1
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.1C
in uniform titles, 25.5D
Generation of copy of videotapes, 7.7B10
Generic terms
capitalization, A. 12C
parts of a work, 25.6A2
Generically named subordinate bodies
corporate bodies, 24.13
government agencies, 24.18
Geographic area
cartographic description of, 3.3D1
in other title information, 3.1E2
Geographic features, capitalization, A.15A
Geographic names, 23, see also entries beginning Place of
abbreviations, B,2A, B.14
additions to, 23.4, B.14
capitalization, A.2, A. 1 5
capitalization of articles, A.12B
changes of name, 23.3
chapters of corporate bodies, 24.9
civil and criminal courts, 24.23A
in corporate names, 20.2, 24.4C1, 24.4C2-24.4C4, B.14
embassies, 24.25
as government names, 24.3E
in Icelandic names, 22. 9B
in Indie names, 22.25B2
jurisdiction, type of, 23.5, 24.6B
language, 23.2A-23.2B
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-15
INDEX
Geographic names com.
liturgical works, 25.22A
local church names, 24.1 OB
in personal names
Arabic: names (Nisbah), 22.22D
in entry under given name, 22.8A1
Indonesian, 22.26E
in surnames, 22.5C7, see also Territorial designations
popular names for, capitalization, A.15C
with radio and television stations, 24. 1 1
references, 26.3
in titles of religious leaders, 22. 16C
Geologic terms, capitalization, A. 26
German language
abbreviations, B. 1 5
capitalization, A.40
initial articles, E.1A
surnames with prefixes, 22.5D1
Given names (forenames)
additions to, 22. 1 6, 22. 1 9A
Arabic names (ism names), 22.22C, 22.22D
Buddhist monastics, 22.28D1
entry under, 22.8
hyphenated, 22.1D2
Indonesian names, 22.26D
language of name, 22.3B3
nonroman scripts, 22.3C1
as part of phrases, 22.11B
references, 26.2A2, 26.2A3
Globes
definition, App. D
dimensions, 3.5D4
specific material designation, 3.5B I
Glossaries, notes on, see Contents notes
Glosses, see Additions to titles; Identical names,
distinguishing
GMD, see General material designation
God, capitalization, see Deities, capitalization
Government agencies, entry
administrative regulations, 2L32A1
entered subordinate^, 24.18-24.19
Government bodies, 24.17-24.26, see also Government
agencies, entry
aimed forces, see Armed forces
capitalization, A.18B
constitutional conventions, 24.22
courts, see Courts
direct or indirect subheading, 24.19
embassies, 24.25
legislatures, see Legislative bodies
officials, see Government officials, capitalization of
titles; Heads of State
subordinate agencies, 24.18-24.19
Government officials, capitalization of titles, A.13E3, see
also Heads of state
Governments, see also Government agencies, entry;
Government bodies
agreements with intergovernmental organizations, 2L35B
agreements with other jurisdictions, 21.35D
conventional, 24.3E
definition, 24. 3E n9
heads of, see Heads of government; Heads of state
legislative bodies, see Legislative bodies
names
additions to, 24.6
changes in place names in, 23.3
treaties, see Treaties
Governors
capitalization, A.13E3 n3
of dependent or occupied territories, 24.20D
as head of state, 24.20B
Grandchildren of roya! persons, 22.16A4
Graphic materials, 8, see also Art originals and art works
definition, App, D
edition area, 8.2, 8.7B7
general material designation, 1.1C1, 8.1C
note area, 8.7
physical description area, 8.5, 8.7B10
"picture" as GMD, 1.1C1 n2
publication, distribution, etc., area, 8.4, 8.7B9
series area, 8.6, 8.7B 1 2
sources of information, 8. OB
specific material designation, 8.5B
standard number and terms of availability area, 8.8
statement of responsibility area, 8. IF, 8.7B6
title, 8.1A-8.IE, 8.7B3-8.7B5
Great Britain, place names, see British Isles, piace names
Greek language
abbreviations, B.ll, B.15
initial articles, E.1A
Greek vs. vernacular form of personal names, 22.3B2
Greek works (classical), uniform title, 25.4B
Gregorian calendar
conversion to, 22.17 nl6
in date statement, I.4F1
dates in serials, 12.3C2
Groove characteristics, sound discs, 6.5C1, 6.5C4
Groups, performance, see Performance groups
Groups, unnamed, works by, see Anonymous works
Guides, unpublished, to manuscript collections, 4.7B 1 1
H
Half title, definition, App. D
Harmony of scriptures
Bible, 25.18AI2 n7
definition, App. D
entry, 2I.37B
Hawaiian language, initial articles, E.1A
Index- J 6
AACR2 Revision 2002: 20O4 Update
INDEX
Headings, see also Access points; Added entries; Corporate
names, headings; Geographic names; Main entries;
Persona] names; Uniform titles
abbreviations, use of, B.2
definition, App. D
vs. description of item, 0.6
numerals in, C.2A, C.3A
Heads of government
explanatory references, 24.20C3
headings, 24.18, 24.20C
Heads of state, see also Royalty, headings
added entries, 2 1.3 IB 1
entry of official communications, 21.4D1
explanatory references, 24.20B2
headings for, 24.18, 24.20B
nonofficia! com muni cations, 21 .4D2
as persons, explanatory references, 24.20B2
Hebrew language
abbreviations, B.12
initial articles, A.2A nl, A.4A n2, E.1A
numerals, C.5
Hebrew names, 22.3C2 n4, see also Romanization
Height, see also Dimensions
cartographic materials, 3.5D1
printed monographs, 2.5D1, 2.5D5
Hindu religious names, 22.25B4
Hindu scriptures, see Aranyakas; Brahmanas; Jaina Agama;
Upanishads; Vedas
Hire terms, see Terms of availability
Historic events and periods, capitalization, A. 21, see also
Religious events and concepts, capitalization
History of item, notes on, 1.7B7
cartographic materials, 3.7B7
continuing resources, 12.7B8
electronic resources, 9.7B7
graphic materials, 8.7B7
microforms, 11.7B7
motion pictures, 7.7B7
music, 5.7 B 7
printed monographs, 2.7B7
sound recordings, 6.7B7
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.7B7
Holdings, see Library's holdings, notes on
Holidays, capitalization, A.24
Holographs, notes on, 4.7B1
Holy Roman Empire ecclesiastical principalities, 22.16C,
24.27C3
Holy See, treaties of, 21.35C, 25.16B1, see also Catholic
Church
Honorific words or phrases in corporate names, 24,58, see
also Religious titles and terms of address; Terms of
address; Terms of honour and respect
Honour, terms of, see Terms of honour and respect
Honours, see Academic degrees, honours, etc-
Hours, books of, see Liturgical works
Hungarian language
abbreviations, B.15
capitalization, A. 41
compound surnames, 22.5C5
initial articles, E.1A
women with ne in name, 22.15B2
Hymnals, entry, 21.39A3
Hyphenated compound words, capitalization, A.31
Hyphenated personal names, see Personal names:
hyphenated names
Hyphenated prefixes, capitalization, A. 32
I
I (letter of alphabet) in early monographs, transcription of,
2.14E
I (personal pronoun), capitalization, A.30
Iban names, 22 .27 A
Iban titles, 22.27D n22
Icelandic language, initial articles, E.1A
Icelandic names, 22.9B
Identical items, extent of, 1.5B1
Identical names, distinguishing, see also Conflict resolution
abbreviations, B.2
corporate bodies, 24.4C
governments, 24.6
no distinguishing characteristics, 22.20
personal names, 22.17-22.20
place names, 23.5B, 23.4F1
Identifiers, see Additions to titles
if appropriate and if necessary in AACR2, 0.9
Illumination of ancient manuscripts, 4.7B23
Illustrated texts, entry, 21.1 1
Illustrations
ancient manuscripts, 4.7B23
early printed monographs, 2.17B, 2.18E
manuscripts, 4.5C2, see also Graphic materials
microforms, 1 1.5C2
music, 5. 5C
printed monographs, 2.5C
Illustrators
designation in added entry, 21.0D
entries, 21.11, 21. 30K2
Images, see Photographs; Still images on videodiscs
Imaginary places, see Legendary and imaginary places
Imperfections, see Library's holdings, notes on
important in AACR2, 0.9
Impressions, see also Issues, definition; Reprints
definition, App. D
printed monographs, 2. 2D
Imprimatur as source of information, early printed
monographs, 2.13A
Imprint, see Publication, distribution, etc., area
"In" analytics, 13.5, see also Multilevel description
Inaccuracies in item
cartographic materials, scale information, 3.3B2
continuing resources, 12.1B1
date of publication, 1.4F2
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index- 1 7
INDEX
Inaccuracies in item cant.
erroneous attribution of authorship, 21. 4C, see also
Fictitious attribution to name
printed monographs, pagination, 2.5B4
series numbering, 1.6GI
standard numbers, 1.8B4
transcription, 1.0F
Incidental music to dramatic works, see Related works
Incipit, see also Opening words of text
definition, App. D
as source of information, early printed monographs,
2.13A
Inclusive dates, see Dates, inclusive
Incomplete collections, see Selections as uniform title
Incomplete items, see also Library's holdings, notes on
ancient manuscripts, 4.7B23
date of publication, 1.4F8
extent, 1.5B5
printed monographs, 2.5B15, 2.5B21
printed monographs, pagination, 2.5B6
Incomplete statements of responsibility, manuscripts,
4.1F2-4.1F3
Incorporation, terms indicating (corporate names), 24.5C
Incumbency, years of, see Dates of incumbency
Incunabula, see also Eariy printed monographs; Works
created before 1501, uniform titles
notes on, 2.18
uniform titles, 25.14
Indexes, see also Related works
to continuing resources. 12.7B17
of court reports, entry, 2 1 .36B
notes on, see Contents notes
Indie names, 22.25
before mid-nineteenth century, 22.25A
modern names, 22.25B
Indictments, entry, 21.36C4
Indirect subheading, see Subheadings: direct or indirect
Indonesian language, abbreviations, B, 15
Indonesian names, 22.26
Inflected languages, abbreviations, B,8
Informal notes, L7A3
Initial articles, App. E
in Arabic or Hebrew, A.2A nl, A. 4A1 n2
characterizing words or phrases, 22.1 ID
in corporate names, 24. 5A
in place names, capitalization, A.12B
in references, 26. 1A
in uniform titles, 25. 2C
Initial title element (music)
additions to, 25.30-25.32, 25.35
definition, App. D
formulation of, 25.25-25.29
isolation of, 25.28
Initial words not part of a name, publication, distribution,
etc., area, capitalization, A.7B
Initialisms, see Acronyms and initialisms
Initials
academic honours or societies in statement of
responsibility, 1.1F7
corporate bodies
capitalization, A.1A
punctuation and spacing, 24. 1 A
personal names
of academic degrees added to identical names,
22.19B
of Christian religious orders, 22.16D
in compound surnames, 22.5C2 n7
entry under, 22.10
and fuller form of name, 22. 1 8
Indonesian names, 22.26C 1
as surnames, 2 2. 5 A
references
initials as heading, 26.2A2, 26.2A3
name-title references, 26.2B2, 26.2B4
references and filing policy, 26.3C2
in title proper, 1.1B6
Inserts, serials, notes on, 12.7B19
Institution names
added to chapters of corporate bodies, 24.9
added to corporate names instead of place names, 24.4C5
Instrumental ensembles, uniform titles, 25.30B5
Instrumental music in medium of performance, 25.30B2
Instruments, musical, see Musical instruments
Insurgencies, see Jurisdiction in disputed areas
Integrating resources, 12, see also Continuing resources;
Integrating resources, changes in
basis of description, 1.0A2, 12.0Blb, I2.7B23b
dates of publication, 1.4F8
definition, App. D
editors, 12.1F3b, 21.30D
frequency notes, 12.7B1
note on item described, 1.7B23, 12.7B23b
Integrating resources, changes in
edition information, 12.2Flb, 12.7B9.2b
entries for, 21.3B lb, 21.29B
manufacturer or place of manufacture, 12.4G2b
other physical details, 12.5C2b
other title information, 12.1E2b, 12.7B6.2b
parallel titles, 12.ID3b, 12.7B5.2b
physical description, 12.7B12.2b
place of publication, 12.4C2b
publication, distribution, etc. area, 12.7B 1 1.2b
publishers, distributors, etc., 12.4D2b
series, 12.7B14.2b
statements of responsibility, 12.1F5b, I2.7B7.2b
title proper, I2.1B8b, 12.7B4.2b, 21.2B, 21.30J1
Intellectual level of item, see Audience of item, notes on
Intergovernmental bodies, see International and
intergovernmental bodies
Interjections, capitalization, A.30
Index-lS
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Internationa! and intergovernmental bodies
capitalization, A.18A
conventional names, 24.3C2
definition, 2I.33A n9, App. D
delegations to. 24,18, 24.26
heads of, 24.20C2
language of names, 24. 3B
treaties and agreements, 21.35B, 25. !6B i
International Standard Bibliographic Description (General),
0.22, 0.25, 0.26
International Standard Book Number, see ISBN, printed
monographs; Standard numbers
International Standard Serial Number, see ISSN, series;
Standard numbers
Internet, see Remote access resources
Interpolations in description
language and script, I.OE
punctuation of, 1.0C
Interviews, reports of, entry, 21.25, see also Reporters,
entry: as authors
Introductory phrases omitted from uniform titles, 25. 3B
Ireland, place names, 23 .4D
Irish language, initial articles, E. 1 A
ISBD(G), 0.22, 0.25, 0.26
ISBN, printed monographs, 2.8B, 2.8D, see also Standard
numbers
Isle of Man, place names, 23. 4D
ISSN, series, 1 ,6F, 1 .6H7, see also Standard numbers
"Issued with" notes (continuing resources), 12.7B22, see
also "With" notes
Issues, definition, App. D, see also Impressions; Reprints
Issuing agents, see Publication, distribution, etc, area
Italian language
abbreviations, B.15
capitalization, A. 42
compound surnames, 22.5C5
initial articles, E. 1 A
surnames with prefixes, 22.5D1
Item described note, see also Copy being described, early
printed monographs; Library's holdings, notes on
continuing resources, 12.7B23
electronic resources, 9.7B22
general rule, 1.7B23
remote access electronic resources, 9.7B22
Item (generic), definition, App. D
Item (manuscript)
definition, 4.5B2 n2
number of, 4.5B2
Item numbers, see Numbers associated with item
Items made up of several types of material, see Kits;
Multimedia items
Iteration, definition, App. D
J (letter of alphabet) in early monographs, transcription of,
2.I4E
Jackets (disc), see Sleeves, definition
Jain canon, see Jaina Agama
Jain religious names, 22.25B4
Jaina Agama
references, 25. 18L
uniform titles, 25.18J
Japanese language, ordinal numerals, C.8C, see also
Oriental languages
Japanese-style printing, see Traditional format (oriental
books)
Jazz music, see Popular music
Jewish liturgical works
entry, 21.39C
uniform titles, 25.21
Joint authors, definition, App. D, sec also Collaborators;
Mixed responsibility, works of; Shared responsibility,
works of
Joint commissions and committees, 24.15
Journals (diary), see Manuscripts
Journals (periodicals), see Continuing resources; Serials
Judgements, legal, entry, 21.36C6
Judges
opinions, entry, 2I.36C7
of Scottish Court of Session, 226B2
Judicial bodies, see Courts
Judicial decisions, entry, 21.36C6, see also Court decisions,
entry
Judicial opinions, entry, 21.36C7
Julian calendar, see Gregorian calendar
Junior, see also Relationship, words indicating
capitalization, A.13F
following surnames, 2 2.5 C 8
Juntas, see Heads of state
Juries, charges to, entry, 21.36C5
Jurisdiction in disputed areas, 24. 6D
Jurisdiction, type of
added to government names, 24. 6B
in place names, 23.5
political, capitalization, A. 15B, see also Governments
religious and ecclesiastical
added to names of local churches, 24.10B
autocephalous archdioceses, 24.3C3
in headings for religious officials, 24.7B1
K
Kadazan names, 2 2. 27 A
Kannada names, 22.25B2
Karen names, 22.23
Key (music)
in parallel titles, 5. ID
post-nineteenth century works, 25.30D2
prc-twentieth century works, 25.30D1
in title proper, 5.1B1
Keyboard instruments, terms for, 25.30B4-25.30B5
Key-titles of continuing resources, 1.8C, 12.8C
definition, App. D
facsimiles, LI IE
Kings, see Royalty, headings; Sovereigns
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-19
INDEX
Kits, see also Activity cards; Games; Multimedia items
definition, App. D
genera! material designation, 1.1C1, 1.1C1 n2, 1.1C4,
see also rule X.1C2 under specific formats, e.g.,
Printed monographs, 2.1C2
Knightly orders, 24.3C2 nS
Koran, uniform titles, 25.18M
Korean language, ordinal numerals, C.8C, see also Oriental
languages
L
Labels (electronic resources)
definition, 9.0B1 nl
as sources of information, 9. OB 1
Labels (sound recordings)
definition, 6. OBI nl
as source of information, 6.0B1
Lack of title, see Collective title, items without
Lady, see Terms of honour and respect
"Lady of Quality, A,"' see Characterizing words or phrases
Language, see also Multilingual materials
of adaptations, notes on, 1.7B2
capitalization of names of, A.14A
of description, 1.0B
edition statement, 1.2B5, see also Multilingual
edition statements
other title information, 1.1E5
title proper, 1.1B8
of edition statement, L2C3-J.2C5
serials, I2.2B la
of headings
Catholic dioceses, 24.27C3
corporate names, 24.3A
corporate names, references, 26.3A3
international bodies, 24. 3 B
personal names, 22.3B1
personal names, references, 26.2A2
place names, 23.2A-23.2B
place names, references, 26.3A3
notes on
cartographic materials, 3.7B2
continuing resources, 12.7B2
electronic resources, 9.7B2
graphic materials, 8.7B2
manuscripts, 4.7B2
microforms, 11.7B2
motion pictures, 7.7B2
music, 5.7B2
printed monographs, 2.7B2
sound recordings, 6.7B2
of place of publication, 1.4C1, 1.4C2
preferences in AACR2, 0.12-0.13
publishers, distributors, etc., 1.4D2
revised editions, 1.2D2
statements of responsibility, 1.1F10, 1.1F11
subseries, 1.6H2
in uniform titles, 25. 5C
ampersand, use of, B.3
Language cont,
Bible, 25.18A10
collections, 25.1 1
music, 25.35F
Talmud, 25.18B1
of uniform titles
music, 25.27A-25.27B
works created after 1500, 25.3C2-25.3C3
works created before 1501, 25.4
Languages, inflected, abbreviations, B.8
Large print materials, see also Music (large print)
general material designation, 1.1C1
pagination, 2.5B23
Latin language, see also Roman names
abbreviations, B. 15
capitalization, A. 4 3
Latin vs. vernacular form of personal names, 22.3B2
Latitude (cartographic materials), 3.3D1
Latvian language, abbreviations, B.15
Law reports, entry, 21.36A, see also Records (court cases)
of one party, entry
Laws, see also Constitutions, entry; Court rules, entry
annotated editions, see Commentaries on texts, entry
with associated regulations, 21.32A2
entry, 2L.1B2, 21.31
governing more than one jurisdiction, 2L31B2
uniform titles, 25. 15A
Laws, ancient
entry, 2I.31C
uniform title, 25.15B
Laws, customary, see Laws, ancient
Laws, tribal, see Laws, ancient
Lawyers, courtroom arguments, entry, 21.36C8
Layout of cartographic materials, 3.5C1, 3.5C2
Leaf, see Leaves
Leaves, see also Foliation; Pagination
ancient manuscripts, 4.7B23
definition, App. D
manuscripts, 4.5B1
printed monographs, 2.5B1, 2.5B9
Lcctionaries without scriptural texts, entry, 21.39A3, see
also Liturgical works
Lectures, see Speeches
Legal documents, manuscript
accompanying material, 4.7B 1 1
lack of title, 4.1B2
other title information, 4.1E2
Legal materials, see Administrative regulations, entry;
Charters, entry; Constitutions, entry; Court decisions,
entry; Court rules, entry; Laws; Treaties
Legendary and imaginary places
capitalization, A. 15C
maps of, 3.3B6
Legislation, drafts of, entry, 21.31B3
Legislative bodies
capitalization, A.18B
headings, 24.18, 24.21
Index-20
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Legislative enactments, see Laws
Legislative hearings, entry, 21.1B2
Length (dimensions), see Dimensions
Length (of performance), see Duration (playing time)
Lettered sequences as pagination, printed monographs,
2.5B2
Letters (alphabetic) as names, 22.10
Letters (alphabetic) as words or parts of compounds,
capitalization, A. 30
Letters (alphabetic), initial, see Initials
Letters (alphabetic), modified, see Diacritical marks
Letters (correspondence), manuscript, see also
Correspondence; Manuscripts
accompanying material, 4.7B1 1
lack of title, 4.1B2
other title information, 4.1E2
Level of description, 0.29, 1.0D
Level of description, first, 1.0D1
cartographic materials, 3.0D
parallel titles, 1.1B5
Level of description, second, L0D2
cartographic materials, 3.0D
parallel titles, 1.1 D2
Level of description, third, 1.0D3
parallel titles, 1.1 D2
Library catalogues, see Catalogues (library)
Library's holdings, notes on, 1.7B20, see also Copy being
described, early printed monographs; Item described
note; Repository designation added to uniform titles
cartographic materials, 3.7B20
continuing resources, 12.7B21
electronic resources, 9.7B20
graphic materials, 8.7B20
microforms, 11.7B20
motion pictures, 7.7B20
music, 5.7B20
printed monographs, 2.7B20
sound recordings, 6.7B20
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.7B20
Librettists, added entries, 21.20
Librettos, see also Musical works that include words, entry;
Related works
entry, 2I.28A! n7
uniform titles, 25.35E
Lines, number of
ancient, medieval, and Renaissance manuscripts, 4.5BI
early printed monographs, 2.18E
Linguistic groups, capitalization, A. 14
Literary form
adaptations of, see Adaptations
as uniform title, 25,10
Literary manuscripts without title, 4.1B2
Literary rights to manuscripts, 4.7B14
Lithuanian language, abbreviations, B.15
Liturgical music, entry, 21.22
Liturgical works, see also Mass, uniform title
Catholic tridentine works, 25.20A
Catholic works since Vatican II, 25.20B
definition, 2L39A1 nil
entry, 21.1B2, 21.39
uniform titles, 25.19-25.23
Local access electronic resources, see Direct access
electronic resources
Local churches and church groups, see Churches, local
Local edition statements, serials, 12.2Bla
Long titles
abridgement of, 1.1 B4
in music, 25.27C
odier title information, 1.1E3
Longitude in description, 3.3D1
Loops, film, specific material designation, 7.5B1
Loose-leaf publications, see also Integrating resources
date of publication, 1.4F8
definition, App. D
qualification of ISBN, 12.8E2
specific material designation, 12.5B1
Lord, see Terms of honour and respect
M
Machine -readable data files, see Electronic resources
Macroforms, definition, App. D, see also Microforms
Magnitude in celestial charts, 3.7B8
Main entries, see also Access points; Added entries
and access points, 21.0B
choice of, 21. OA
concept of, 0.5
definition, App. D
Main heading, definition, App. D, see also Headings
Malagasy language, initial articles, E.1A
Malay names, 22.27
Malayalam names, 22.25B2
Malaysia, place names, additions to, 23.4C
Malaysian language, abbreviations, B.15
Maltese language, initial articles, E.1A
Manuals
electronic resources, see Documentation (electronic
resources) as source of information
of religious observance, see Liturgical works
Manufacturer, 1.4B2, 1.4G, see also Printer (manufacturer)
continuing resources, 12.4G
electronic resources, 9.4G
graphic materials, 8.4G
motion pictures, 7.4G
sound recordings, 6.4G
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.4G1-10.4G2
Manuscript cartographic items, see also Cartographic
materials; Manuscripts
description, 3.5B1
dimensions, 3.5D1
Manuscript music, see Manuscripts
Manuscript volumes without title, 4.1B2
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-21
INDEX
Manuscripts, 4
Bible, 25.18A12
date area, 4.4
definition, App. D
general material designation, 1.1C1, 4.1C
lack of title, 4.1B2
liturgical works, 25.22B
music, 5.5B1
note area, 4.7
physical description area, 4.5, 4.7B 10
published versions of, 4.1B2, 4.7B9
sources of information, 4, OB
statement of responsibility area, 4. 1 F
title, 4.1A-4.IE, 4.7B3-4.7B5
uniform titles, 25. 13
Manuscripts, ancient, medieval, and Renaissance
lack of title, 4.1B2
notes, 4.7B23
pagination, 4.5B1
Map sections, see Sections (cartographic materials)
Maps, see also Charts (cartographic materials)
collections of maps, 3.0J
definition, App, D
dimensions, 3.5D1
manuscripts, see Manuscript cartographic items
specific material designation, 3.5B1
Marchionesses, see Titles of nobility
Marines, see Armed forces
Marks of omission, see Omission, marks of
Marquesses, see Titles of nobility
Married women
compound surnames, 22.5C5
Hungarian women with enclitic ni, 22.15B2
terms of address in name, 22.1C, 22.15B
Thai names, 22.28C2
Mass, uniform title, see also Eucharist, capitalisation;
Liturgical works
ordinary, 25.23C
proper, 25.23B
Master copy of videotapes, 7.7B 10
Masthead
definition, App. D
as source of information, 12,0B2a
Material designations, see Extent of item; General material
designation; Specific material designation
Material of item, see also Medium of item
cartographic materials, 3.5C1, 3.5C7
manuscripts, 4.5C1
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.5C1
Material specific details area
capitalization, A. 6
and 3SBD(G), 0.25
notes on, 1.7B8
numerals in, C.2B, C.3B, C.5D
punctuation, 1,3, see also rule X.3AI for specific
materials, e.g., Cartographic materials, 3.3A1
specific formats
Material specific details area emit.
cartographic materials, see Digital graphic
representation of cartographic materials;
Mathematical data area (cartographic materials)
electronic resources, see Type and extent of resource
area
microform serials, 1 1 .3C, see also Numbering area
(serials)
music, see Musical presentation statement
serials, see Numbering area (serials)
Mathematical data area (cartographic materials), 3.3
abbreviations, B.9 nl
notes on, 3.7B8
Measurements, metric, 0.28
Medals, capitalization, A. 22
Medieval laws, see Laws, ancient
Medieval manuscripts, see Manuscripts, ancient, medieval,
and Renaissance
Medium of item, see also Material of item
art originals, 8.5C1
cartographic materials, 3.5C1, 3.5C6
Medium of performance (music)
collections, 25.34C
in conflict resolution, 25.31B
definition, 25.30B1 nil
notes on, 5.7B 1
in parallel titles, 5.1D
in title proper, 5.1B1
in uniform titles, 25.30B
Medium of performance (sound recordings), notes on,
6.7B1, 6.7B6
Mediums, entry, 21,26
Memory requirements of electronic resources, notes on,
9.7B1
Mergers of continuing resources
capitalization of titles, A.4C
notes on, 12.7B8
in title proper of successor resource, 12.1B1
Mergers of corporate bodies, explanatory references, 26.3C1
Meridians in description, 3.3C2, 3.3D1
Microfiches
chief source of information, 1 1 .OB 1
definition, App, D
dimensions, 1 1 .5D3
specific material designation, 1 1.5B I
Microfilms
delinition, App. D
dimensions, 1 1.5D4
specific material designation, 1 1 .5B1
Microform reader, notes on, 1 1.7B10
Microforms, i I
definition, App. D
edition area, 1 1.2, 11.7B7
general material designation, I.1C1, 11. 1C, 11.5B1
and ISBD(G), 0.25
note area, 1 1.7
physical description area, 11.5, 11.7B10
Index-22
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Microforms com.
publication, distribution, etc., area, 1 1 .4, 11 .7B9
serials numbering, 1 1 .3C, see also Numbering area (serials)
series area, 11.6, U.7B12
sources of information, 11. OB
specific material designation, 11. 5B
standard number and terms of availability area, 1 1.8
statement of responsibility area, 11. IF, 11.7B6
title, 11.1A-11.1E, 1I.7B3-11.7B5
Microopaques
chief source of information, 11. OBI
definition, App, D
dimensions, 1 1 .5D5
specific material designation, 1 1.5B1
Microscope slides
definition, App. D
genera! material designation, 1.1C1
physical details, 10.5C1, 10.5C2, 10.5C3
specific material designation, 10.5B1
Midrashim, uniform titles, 25. 1 8E
Military courts, ad hoc, entry, 24.23B
Military forces, see Armed forces
Military titles and offices, see Titles of position or office
Miniature scores
definition, App. D
specific material designation, 5.5B1 nl
Ministries, government, 24.18, see also Departments
(subordinate body)
Mishnah, uniform titles, 25.18C-25.18D
Misprints, see Inaccuracies in item
Missals, see Liturgical works
Missing parts, see Incomplete items
Missions
to international bodies, see Delegations
papal diplomatic, 24.27D
Misspelled words, see Inaccuracies in item
Mixed authorship, see Mixed responsibility, works of
Mixed material items, see Kits; Multimedia items
Mixed responsibility, works of, see also Joint authors,
definition; Shared responsibility, works of
corporate entries for, 21.1B2, 23.1B3
definition, App. D
entry, 21. 1A2, 21.8
types of works
academic disputations, 21.27
adaptations, 21.10, 21.16
art works, 21.16-21.17, see also Art reproductions
collaborations, 21.24
illustrated texts, 21.1 1
interviews, 21.25
modification of other works, 21.9-21.23
musical works, 21.18-21 .22
new works, 21.24-21.27
revisions of texts, 21.12
sound recordings, 21.23
spirit communications, 21.26
translations, 21.14
Mock-ups
definition, App. D
specific material designation, 10.5B1
Mode of access of electronic resources, notes on, 9.7B1, see
also Direct access electronic resources; Remote access
resources
Models (cartographic materials)
dimensions, 3.5D3
scale, 3.3B7
specific material designation, 3.5BI
Models (three-dimensional artefacts), see also Toys
definition, App, D
general material designation, 1.1C1
specific material designation, 10.5B1
Modifications of works, entry, 21.9
adaptations, see Adaptations
art works, see Art reproductions
biographical/critical editions, 21.15
changes in responsibility for, 21.3
with commentary, 21.13
illustrated texts, 21.11
musical works, 21.18-21.22
revisions of texts, 21.12
sound recordings, 21.23
translations, 21,14
Modified letters, see Diacritical marks
Modulation frequency of videotapes, notes on, 7.7B 10
Monastic orders, see Religious orders
Monastics, Buddhist, 22.28D1
Monographic series, see Series
Monographs, see Early printed monographs; Printed
monographs
Months of the year
abbreviations, B.15
capitalization, see Calendar divisions, capitalization
Mosques, see Churches, local
Motion pictures, 7
definition, App. D
edition area, 7.2, 7.7B7
entry under corporate body, 21.1B2
general material designation, 1.1C1, 7.1C
note area, 7.7
physical description area, 7.5, 7.7B10
publication, distribution, etc., area, 7.4, 7.7B9
series area, 7.6, 7.7B12
sources of information, 7,0B
specific material designation, 7.5B1
standard number and terms of availability area, 7.8
statement of responsibility area, 7. IF, 7.7B6
title, 7.1A-7.1E, 7.7B3-7.7B5
uniform titles, 25. 5C
Motion pictures, unedited
date of creation, 7.4F3
notes, 7.7B18
title proper, 7.1B2
Mounting of cartographic materials, 3.5C1, 3.5C8
Moving images on videodiscs, duration, 7.5B2
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-23
INDEX
Mrs., see Married women; Terms of address
ms. and mss., use of, in manuscripts, 4.781
Mullahs, see Religious leaders and officials
Multilevel description, 13.6, see also "In" analytics
multimedia items, 1.10D
supplementary items, 1.9B1
Multilingual edition statements, 1.2B5
cartographic materials, 3.2B4
continuing resources, 12.2B3
electronic resources, 9.2B6
graphic materials, 8.2B4
microforms, 11.2B4
motion pictures, 7.2B4
music, 5.2B4
named revisions, 1.2E3
printed monographs, 2.2B4
revisions, 1.2D2
sound recordings, 6.2B4
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.2B4
Multilingual materials, see also Language
chronological designations, serials, 12.3C3
musical presentation statement, 5.3B1
other title information, 1.1 E5
pagination in opposite directions, 2.5B14
serial numbering area, J2.3B2
title proper, 1 .IBS, see aha Parallel titles
Multimedia items, 1.10, see also Kits
definition, App. D
general material designation, 1.1C1, 1.1C4, see also rule
X.1C2 under specific formats, e.g., Printed
monographs, 2.1C2
multilevel description, l.IOD
with no predominating component, LIOC
physical description area, 1.10C2
with predominating component, 1.10B
Multipart items, see also Kits; Multimedia items; Series
analysis, 13.3
basis of description, 1.0A2
changes
in responsibility for, 21. 3A, 21.29B
in title proper, 21.2A, 21.30J1
chief source of information, 1 .0A3
dates of publication, 1.4F8
definition, App. D
incomplete, 1.5B5
item described note, I.7B23
numbering within scries, 1.6G2
playing time, 1.5B4
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.5B, 3.5D1
electronic resources, 9.2B5, 9.5B1, 9.5D2
graphic materials, 8.5B1, 8.5B5, 8.5DI
microforms, 11.5B1, 11.5D1
motion pictures, 7.5B1, 7.5D1
music, 5.5B, 5.5D
printed monographs, 2.5B16-2.5B21, 2.5D3
sound recordings, 6.5B1, 6.5D1
Multipart items coat.
sound recordings without collective title, notes,
6.7B10
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.0H, 10.5B, 10.5D3
uniform titles, see Parts of works
Multipart monographs, see Multipart items
Multiscript materials, see Multilingual materials
Multivolumcd printed monographs, see Multipart items:
specific formats; printed monographs
Music, sec also entries beginning Musical
accompaniments, see Accompaniments (music)
adaptations, see Adaptations (music)
arrangements, see Arrangements (music)
compositions, see Composition (music)
description, 5
edition area, 5.2, 5.7B7
general material designation, 1.1C1, 5.1C, 5.5B3
musical presentation statement area, 5.3
note area, 5.7
physical description area, 5.5, 5.7B 10
publication, distribution, etc., area, 5.4, 5.7B9
series area, 5.6, 5.7B12
sources of information, 5.0B
specific material designation, 5.5B
standard number and terms of availability area, 5.8
statement of responsibility area, 5. IF, 5.7B6
title, 5. 1 A-5. 1 E, 5.7B3-5.7B5
entry, 21.18-21.22
incidental music to dramatic works, see Related works
and 1SBD(G), 0.25
manuscript, 5.5B1, see also Manuscripts
medium of performance, see Medium of performance
(music)
recorded music, see Sound recordings
selections, see Selections as uniform title
uniform titles, 25.25-25.33
Music (large print)
definition, App. D
description, 5.5B3
Musical comedies, see Musical works that include words,
entry
Musical instruments, see also Medium of performance
(music)
as accompaniment for songs, 25.30B 10
in medium of performance, 25.30B1
standard combinations, 25.30B3
terms for, 25.30B4-25.30B5
Musical presentation statement
definition, App. D
description, 5.3
Musical settings, entry, 21.20
Musical works
additions to initial title clement, 25.30-25.32, 25.35
capitalization in uniform titles, A.3C
collective titles, 25.34
definition, 25.25A n9
Index-24
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Musical works cant.
entry, 21.18-21.22
initial title clement, 25.27-25.29
two works issued together, 25.33
Musical works that include words, entry, 21.19
Musico-dramatic works, alterations to, 25.31C
N
Name, change of, see also Pseudonyms; Variant names
corporate bodies, 24, 1 C
corporate bodies, localities of, 24.4C4
explanatory references, 26.3C1
personal names, 22.2C
place names, 23.3
references, 26.2A1
Names, see Corporate names, headings; Geographic names;
Personal names; Statements of responsibility
change of, see Name, change of
with particles, see Prefixes, surnames with
of peoples, see Races, capitalization
Names, derivatives of, see Derivatives of proper names,
capitalization
Names in religion
Buddhist names, 22.28D
headings for, 22.16D
Indie names, 22.25B4
references, 26.2A1
Names not conveying the idea of ... , see also Designations
church, 24.10
corporate body, 24. 4B
government agency, 24.18
person, 22.11A
radio or television station, 24.1 1
subordinate corporate body, 24.13
Name-title added entries
collections, 21.7
definition, App. D
related works, 21.30G
title added entries with, 20.4
two works issued together, 25.7
Name-title references
definition, App. D
general rule, 26.1D
personal names, 26. 2B
uniform titles, 25.2E2, 26.4
Narrators of motion pictures, notes on, 7.7B6
Native American nations, entry, 21.35A nlO
Naturally occurring objects, see also Unpublished items
dates for, 1.4F9, 10.4F2
place of publication, 10.4C2
publisher, distributor, etc., I0.4D2
Nature, scope, or artistic form of item, notes on, 1 .7B 1
cartographic materials, 3.7B1
electronic resources, 9.7B1
graphic materials, 8.7B I
manuscripts, 4.7B1
Nature, scope, or artistic form or item, notes on amt.
microforms, 1 1.7B I
motion pictures, 7.7B 1
printed monographs, 2.7B1
sound recordings, 6.7B I
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.7B1
Navies, see Armed forces
Negatives
microforms, 1 1.5C1
photographs, 8.5C1
new series, use of
in serials numbering, 12. 3G
in scries statement, L6GI, 1.6H3
New Testament, uniform titles, 25.18A2
Newsfilm
notes, 7.7B18
title proper, 7.1B2
Newspapers, see Serials
Nicknames, see also Epithets; Given names (forenames);
Words or phrases
place names as, capitalization, A.15C
No designation on first issue of serial, 12. 3D
"No more published" note, 2.5B21, see also Ceased
continuing resources; Suspended publications
Nobility, titles of, see Titles of nobility
Nonarabic and nonroman numerals in pagination of printed
monographs, 2.5B2
Nonprocessed sound recordings
date of recording, 6.4F3
definition, 6.4C2 n2
notes on, 6.7B7
place of publication, distribution, etc., 6.4C2
publisher, distributor, etc., 6.4D4
Nonroman scripts, see also Romanization
anonymous works created before 1501, 25.4C
names in, 22. 3C, see also Arabic script, names in;
Oriental languages
in notes, 1.7A3
Northern Ireland, place names, 23.4D
Norwegian language, see also Scandinavian languages
abbreviations, B.15
compound surname uncertain, 22.5C6
initial articles, E.1A
pronouns, capitalization, A.47E2
Notation, musical, notes on, 5.7B8
Note area, 1.7
abbreviations in, B.5C
added entries, justification for, 21.29F
analysis in, 13.4
capitalization, A. 10
dates, errors in, 1.4F2
facsimiles, 1 . 1 1 A, 1.1 1 F
items available in different formats, 1.5A3
multimedia items, 1.10C3
numerals beginning, C.4
optional nature, 0.27
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-25
INDEX
Note area cont,
order of information, 1.7A3, 1.7B
on other editions, 1.7A4
other title information, 1 . 1 E3
parallel titles, 1.ID3, 1.1D4
punctuation, see Punctuation of description: note area
sources of information for, 1.7A2
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.7B
continuing resources, 12. 7B
early printed monographs, 2.18
electronic resources, 9.7B
graphic materials, 8.7B
manuscripts, 4.7B
microforms, 11. 7B
motion pictures, 7,7B
music, 5.7B
printed monographs, 2,7B
sound recordings, 6.7B
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.7B
on symbols in statements of responsibility, 1.1F9
Notes, see Contents notes; Note area
Novelizations, see Adaptations
Numbering, see also Numbers; Series numbering
definition, App. D
as part of title proper, 12. IBS
Numbering area {serials), 12.3
alternative numbering systems, 12.3E
cartographic materials, 3.3A3, 3.3F
ceased serials, 12.3F
changes in numbering, 12. 3G
chronological designation, 12.3C
in microform, I1.3C
notes on, 12JB10
numbering lacking, 12.3D
numeric and/or alphabetic designation, 1 2.3B
priority in, 12.3C4
serial facsimiles, 1.1 1 A
Numbers, see also Numerals
in headings for armed forces, 24.24A
in headings for conferences, 24. 7A, 24.7B2
in headings for exhibitions, 24.8A-24.8B
of legislatures, 24.21D
references and filing policy, 26.3A5
Numbers associated with item, see also Publisher's
numbers; Standard numbers
non-standard numbers, notes on, 1.7B19, 1.8B3
within series, see Series numbering
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.7B19
continuing resources, 12.7B20, see also Numbering
area (serials)
electronic resources, 9.7B19
graphic materials, 8.7B19
microforms, 11.7B19
motion pictures, 7.7B19
Numbers associated with item cont.
music, 5.7B19
printed monographs, 2.7B19
sound recordings, 6.7B19
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.7BI9
Numbers, varying, in serial title, 12.1B7
Numerals, App. C, see also Arabic numerals; Numbers;
Roman numerals
books of the Bible, 25.18A3
as personal names, 22.10
references and filing policy, 26.3A5
Numerals, spelled -out, C.3A
vs. arabic numerals in description, C.3B
capitalization, A.13D
in corporate names, C.3A1
in notes, C.4
references and filing policy, 26.3A5
in uniform titles, C3A2
O
O (interjection), capitalization, A. 30
Object type for cartographic materials, 3.3E
Objects, see also Realia
definition, App. D
genera! materia! designation, 1.1 CI
Objects, naturally occurring, see Naturally occurring objects
Occupations in entry under given name, 22. 8A, see also
Words or phrases
Occupied territories, governors, 24.20D, see also
Jurisdiction in disputed areas
Office (liturgical works), uniform titles, 25.23B
Office, title of, see Titles of position or office
Official communications, entry
collections, 21.4D1, 21.4D3
by heads of state or religious officials, 21.4D1
Oh (interjection), capitalization, A, 30
Oid Testament, uniform titles, 25.I8A2
Omission, marks of
examples of, 0.14
long title proper, 1,1 B4
other title information, 1.1E3
title of early printed monographs, 2.14B
in title proper, 1.1B1
Omissions, see also Abridgement of information
from chief source of information, 1.1F15
from name of publisher, 1.4D2
from publisher statement, early printed monographs,
2.16D-2.16E
punctuation of, 1.0C
serial titles, !2.1B7
from statements of responsibility, 1.1F5, 1.IF7
from title proper of early printed monographs,
2.14B-2.14C
from uniform titles, introductory words, 25.3B
Opaques (microforms), see Microopaqucs
Index~26
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Opening words of text, see also Incipit
ancient manuscripts, 4.7B23
early printed monographs, 2. 14A
Operas, see Musical works that include words, entry
Operating system, notes on, 9.7B1
Opinions, judicial, entry, 21.36C7
Optical discs
definition, App, D
dimensions, 9.5D1
specific material designation, terms for, 9.5B1
Opus numbers (music)
contents notes, 5.7B18
in parallel titles, 5. ID
in title proper, 5.IB1
uniform titles, 25.30C1, 25.30C3
Orchestral music, uniform titles, 25.30B6, see also
Performers
Orders (commands) of heads of state or religious officials,
see Official com muni cat ions, entry
Orders' of worship, proposals for, entry, 21.39A3
Orders, religious, see Religious orders
Ordinal numerals, format of, C.8
Oriental languages
colophon as chief source of information, 2.0B1, 12.0B2a
corporate names in, 24.5C3
numerals, C.5
Oriental manuscripts lacking title, 4.1B2
Originals, notes on, 1.7A4, L7B22, 1.1 1A, 1.1 IF
graphic materials, 8.7B22
location of, 4.7B1
microforms, U.7B22
Orthodox Eastern Church, liturgical works, entry, 2L39B,
see also Eastern Church, autoccphalous patriarchates of
Other physical details, 1.5C, see also specific formats, e.g.,
Fiimstrips
cartographic materials, 3.5C
continuing resources, 12.5C
electronic resources, 9.5C
graphic materials, 8.5C
manuscripts, 4.5C
microforms, 1 1.5C
motion pictures, 7.5C
music, see Illustrations: music
printed monographs, see Illustrations: printed
monographs
sound recordings, 6.5C
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.5C
Other title information, 1.1E
definition, App. D
notes on, 1.7B5
order of transcription, 1.LE2
and parallel titles, L1D3
series, 1.6D
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3. IE, 3.7B5
continuing resources, 12.7B6
Other title information cont.
early printed monographs, 2.14D, 2.14F
electronic resources, 9. IE, 9.7B5
graphic materials, 8, ID, 8.7B5
manuscripts, 4, 1 E. 4.7B5
microforms, 11. IE, I1.7B5
motion pictures, 7. IE, 7.7B5
music, 5.1E, 5.7B5
printed monographs, 2. IE, 2.7B5
sound recordings, 6. IE, 6.7B5
three-dimensional artefacts, 10. IE, 10.7B5
and statement of responsibility, 1JF12-1.1F13
subseries, 1.6W6
Overhead projeciuals, .tec Transparencies
Overlays, definition, App. D, see also Transparencies
Owners, previous
ancient manuscripts, 4.7B23
graphic materials, 8.7B6
manuscripts, 4.7B7
P
Pagination, see also Extent of item
atlases, 3.5B3
early printed monographs, 2. 1 7 A
printed monographs, 1 .5B2, 2.5B
blank pages, 2.5B3
changes in, 2.5B5
complicated or irregular, 2.5B8
duplicated, 2.5B12
errors in, 2.5B4
inclusive pagination, 2.5B6
incomplete works, 2.5B6. 2.5B15, 2.5B21
m u It i volume printed monographs,
2.5B16-2.5B21
in opposite directions, 2.5B14
unnumbered sequences, 2.5B3, 2.5B7
sequence of pages, definition. 2.5B1 n2
Pali canon, Buddhist scriptures, 25.18F1
Pali names in religion, 22.28D1
Pali texts, Buddhist authors of, 22.25A
Pamphlets as multipart items, 2.5B17
Panel titles, see Variant titles
Panjabi language, initial articles, E.1A
Pantomimes, musical settings for, entry, 21.20
Papers (manuscript), without title, 4. 1 B2
Paragraphs in description, 1.0C
Parallel edition statements
multilingual materials, 1.2B5
named revisions, 1.2E2
statements of responsibility, 1.2C3-1.2C5
Parallel titles, 1.1D
definition, App. D
for multilingual texts, 1.1B8
notes on, 1.1D3, UD4, 1.7B5
series, i.6C
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-27
INDEX
Parallel titles com.
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.1B3, 3. ID, 3.7B5
continuing resources, 1 2. ID, 12.7B5
electronic resources, 9. ID, 9.7B5
graphic materials, 8, !D, 8.7B5
manuscripts, 4.7B5
microforms, 1HD, 11.7S5
motion pictures, 7. ID, 7.7B5
music, 5.1D, 5.7B5
printed monographs, 2. ID, 2.7B5
sound recordings, 6. ID, 6.7B5
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.1D, 10.7B5
and statements of responsibility, 1.1F10
sub series, L6H6
transcription of, 1.1B5, 1.1D1
Parallels (cartographic materials) in description, 3.3C2
Paraphrases, sec Adaptations
Paraphrases, musical, entry, 21.18C
Parish, see Jurisdiction, type of: religious and ecclesiastical
Part (music), see also Voice parts (music)
definition, App. D
notes on, 5.7B1
specific material designation, 5.5B1
Partial contents, see Contents notes
Particles, names with, see Prefixes, surnames with
Parts of works
analytical added entries, 13.2
capitalization of titles, A.4D
definition, App. D
explanatory references, 26.4D2
references, 26.4B2-26.4B3
uniform titles, 25.6, B.3
liturgical works, 25.23
music, 25.32
numbered consecutively, 25.6B1
numbered nonconsecutively, 25.6B2-25.6B3
sacred scriptures, 25.18
unnumbered parts, 25.6B2-25.6B3
Pasticcios, entry, 2 1 . 1 9B
Patriarchates, autocephalous, 24.3C3
Patriarchs, Buddhist, 22.28D3, see also Religious leaders
and officials
Patronymics, 22.8B, see also Filial indicators; Relationship,
words indicating
Arabic names, 22.22C, 22.22D
definition, App, D
Icelandic names, 22.9B
Romanian names, 22.7
Peerage, United Kingdom, explanation of, 22.12A1 nl3
Peers and peeresses, see Titles of nobility
Pen names in Arabic alphabet, 22.22D
Peoples, names of, capitalization, A. 14
Percussion instruments in uniform titles, 25.30B5
Performance, duration of, see Duration (playing time)
Performance groups, see also Performers
entries for, 21.1B2
sound recordings, 6.1F2
Performance, medium of, see Medium of performance
(music)
Performers, see also Performance groups
motion pictures, notes on, 7.7B6
sound recordings
added entries, 21.23
notes on, 6.7B6
statements of responsibility, 6, 1F1
Period (historical), see Historic events and periods,
capitalization
Period (punctuation), see Full stops
Periodicals, see Serials
Persian language, initial articles, E.IA
Personal authors, entry, 21.1A2, see also Personal names;
Statements of responsibility
added entries, 2 1 .30C
collaborations with artists, 21.24
definition, 2 1 . 1 A 1 , App. D
erroneous or fictitious attribution, see Erroneous
attribution to name
works of single authorship, 21.4A
Personal names, 22, see also Given names (forenames);
Pseudonyms; Surnames
additions to, 22.12-22.22
identical names, distinguishing, 22.17-22.20
initials, expansion of, 22.18
in references, 26.1 J
saints, 22.13
spirits, 22.14
titles of nobility, 22.12
capitalization, A.2, A. 1 3
choice of name
designations added, 22. 1C
different forms of the same name, 22.3
different names, 22.2
language, 22. 3B
nonroman scripts, 22. 3C
spelling, 22. 3D
entry element, 2 2. 4 A
initials, letters, or numerals as, 22.10
titles of nobility, 22.6
words or phrases as names, 22.11
hyphenated names, 22.1D2
with place names, 22.5C7
with prefixes, 22. 5E
surnames, 22.5C3
order of elements, 22.4B
in other languages, see specific language
with patronymics, see Patronymics
references, 26.2
roman numerals in, C.2A1, C5B
Personifications, capitalization, A.13J
lndex-28
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
INDEX
Persons, headings for, see Personal names
Photocopies, see also Facsimile reproductions, definition;
Reproductions
cartographic materials. 3.5C3, 3.7B10
definition, App. D
manuscripts, 4.7B 1
Photographs
aerial, see Cartographic materials
date of creation, 8.4F2
of other art works, entry, 21.16B, see also Art originals
and art works;
physical details, 8.5C1
specific material designation, 8.5B1
Phrases, see Words or phrases
Physical carriers (electronic resources), see also Containers;
Direct access electronic resources
definition, App. D
dimensions, 9.5D1
direct access electronic serials, 12.0B2b
as sources of information, 9. OBI
terminology for, 9.5B1
Physical description area, 1 .5
capitalization, A. 8
facsimiles, 1.1 ID
items available in different formats, 1.5A3
multimedia items, 1.10C2
notes on, 1.7B10
numerals in, C.2B, C.3B, C.5D
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.5, 3.7B10
continuing resources, 12.5, 12.7B12
early printed monographs, 2.17, 2.18E
electronic resources, 9.5, 9.7B10
graphic materials, 8.5, 8.7BiO
manuscripts, 4.5, 4.7B10
microforms, 11.5, U.7B10
motion pictures, 7.5, 7.7B10
music, 5.5, 5.7B10
printed monographs, 2.5, 2.7B 10
sound recordings, 6.5, 6.7B10
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.5, I0.7B 10
Physical details, other, see Other physical details
Physical presentation statement, see also Format (generic
term), definition
music, see Musical presentation statement
serials, 12.2Bla
Physical volumes different from bibliographic volumes,
2.5Bi8
"Physician, A," see Characterizing words or phrases
Piano conductor part, definition, App. D
Piano scores
definition, App. D
specific material designation, 5.5B1
Pictures
definition, App. D
general material designation, 1.1C1, 1.1C1 n2
specific material designation, 8.5B1
Pieces of multipart items, 2.5B17
Place names, see Geographic names
Place names, local, added to corporate names, 24.4C3, B,14,
see also Cities and towns
Place of composition (music), 25.30E
Place of conferences, 24.784
Place of exhibitions, 23.3, 24.8B
Place of manufacture
continuing resources, 12.4G
electronic resources, 9.4G
graphic materials, 8.4G
motion pictures, 7.4G
sound recordings, 6.4G
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.4G
Place of printing
cartographic materials, 3.4G2
music, 5.4G
printed monographs, 2.4G
Place of publication, distribution, etc, 1.4C
abbreviations, 1.4C3-1.4C4, B.14
address of publisher, 1.4C7
early printed monographs, 2.16B-2.16C, 2.16H
multiple, 1.4C5
place of distribution, 1.4D5
Place of writing of manuscripts, 4.7B8
Plans (cartographic materials), 3.5D1, see also Maps
Plans (illustrative matter), definition. App. D
Plants, scientific names, capitalization, A. 25
Plate numbers (music), see also Publisher's numbers
definition, App. D
notes, 5.7B19
Plates (printed monographs)
definition, App. D
pagination, 2.5B9
Playing speed (sound recordings), 6.5C1, 6.5C3
Playing time, see Duration (playing time)
Pleas (court cases), entry, 21.36C8
Plucked instruments in uniform titles, 25.30B5
Pockets (printed monographs)
with accompanying material, 2.5E2
containing illustrative matter, 2.5C6
Poems, early, in uniform titles, 25.12A
Policy statements, entry, 21.1B2, see also Documents,
capitalization
Polish language
abbreviations, B.15
capitalization, A. 44
Political jurisdictions, capitalization, A.15B, see also
Governments
Political parties
American state and local units, 24.16
capitalization, A. 18C
Political systems, capitalization, A.18D
Popes, see also Catholic Church; Heads of state; Holy See,
treaties of; Religious leaders and officials
additions to names, 22. 16B
capitalization of numerals following names, A.13D
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-29
INDEX
Popes coat.
diplomatic missions, 24.27D
explanatory references, 24. 27 B 2
nonofficial communications, 21.4D2
official communications, 21.4D1. 24.27B2, 25.24A
Popuiar music
arrangements, 25.35C2
sound recordings
collective title, items without, 21.23D
statements of responsibility, 6.1F1
Portfolios
definition, App. D
multipart items, 2.5B17
single volumes, 2.5B1
Portuguese language
abbreviations, B,15
capita! izati on, A. 45
initial articles, E.1A
Portuguese names
surnames, compound, 22.5C4
surnames followed by words indicating relationship,
22.5C8
surnames with prefixes, 22.5D1
Position, title of, see Titles of position or office
Postcards, specific material designation, 8.5B1, see also
Graphic materials; Letters (correspondence), manuscript
Posters, specific material designation, 8.5B1
Praeses (academic disputations)
definition, App. D
entry, 21.27A
Prakrit texts, authors of, 22.25A
Prayer books, entry, 21.39A3, see also Liturgical works
Predominant name
corporate names, 24.2D
definition, App. D
personal names, 22 .2 A
Prefixes, hyphenated, capitalization, A. 3 2
Prefixes, surnames with
capitalization, A.13B
explanatory references, 26.2D2
headings for, 22.5D-22.5E
prefixes hyphenated or combined with surnames, 22. 5E
references, 26 .2 A3
Preliminaries, definition, App. D
Prepositions in surnames with prefixes, 22.5D1
Prescribed sources of information, 1 .0A4, see also Sources
of information
Presenters in motion pictures, notes on, 7.7B6
Presidents, capitalization, A.13E3 n3, see also Heads of
state
Previous owners, see Owners, previous
Price, see Terms of availability
Prime Ministers, capitalization, A.13E3 n3
Prince- Bishops and Prince-Archbishops, 22.16C
Princes and princesses, see also Royalty, headings
children and grandchildren of royal persons, 22.16A4
Thai, 22.28B2
Princes, ecclesiastical (Holy Roman Empire), 22.16C
Principalities, ecclesiastical (Holy Roman Empire), 24.27C3
Printed monographs, 2, see also Early printed monographs
accompanying material, 2.5E, 2.7B1 1
edition area, 2.2, 2.7B7
general material designation, 2.1C
multivolumed, see Multipart items: specific formats:
printed monographs
note area, 2.7
other physical details, see Illustrations
physical description area, 2.5, 2.7B10
publication, distribution, etc., area, 2.4, 2,7 B 9
series area, 2.6, 2.7B12
sources of information, 2.0B
standard number and terms of availability, 2.8
title, 2.1A-2.1E, 2.7B3-2.7B5
Printer (manufacturer), see also Manufacturer
cartographic materials, 3.4G
early printed monographs, 2.16A, 2.16D, 2.16H
music, 5.4G
printed monographs, 2.4G
Printings (printed monographs), 2.2D, see also Facsimile
reproductions, definition; Impressions; Issues,
definition; Reprints
Printouts of manuscripts, 4.7B1
Prints (art), see Art prints
Prints (motion picture films), notes on, 7.7B 10
Prints, study, specific material designation, 8.5B1
Privilege, as source of information, early printed
monographs, 2.13A
Probable information, see Uncertain information
Proceedings (conferences), see Conferences
Proceedings (court cases), entry, 21.36CI-21.36C2
Producers (graphic materials), definition, App. D
Producers (motion pictures)
definition, App. D
statement of responsibility, 7.1F1
Production dates (motion pictures), 7.4F2, 7.7B9
Production method of cartographic materials, 3.5C1, 3.5C3
Professional titles, capitalization, A.13E4
Professorships, capitalization, A.13E4
Profile in cartographic materials
definition, App. D
specific material designation, 3.5B1
Programmes of religious services, entry, 2 1 .39A3
Programming language, notes on, 9.7B1
Projection (cartographic materials), 3.3C, 3.7B8
Projection characteristics (motion pictures), 7.5C1, 7.5C2
Projection requirements (motion pictures), 7.5C2, 7.7B10
Projection speed (motion pictures), 7.5C1, 7.5C5
prominently in AACR2, 0.8
Pronouns for deities, capitalization, A.19A2
Proponents in academic disputations, entry, 21,27
Prosecutions, court, see Law reports, entry
Protocols to treaties
entry, 21.35E
uniform titles, 25.16B3
Index~30
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Provencal language, initial articles, E,1A
Provinces (administrative units of certain countries), see
States, names of
Provinces (regional units of certain reiigious bodies), see
Jurisdiction, type of: religious and ecclesiastical
Pseudonyms, 22.2B, see also Words or phrases as names
choice among several, 22.2B3-22.2B4
definition, App. D
name-title references, 26.2B3-26.2B4
one pseudonym, 22.2B1
references, 26.2A1, 26.2C1
shared, entry, 21. 6D
Pscudosurnames, entry under, 22.1 1A
Publication date, see Date of publication
Publication, distribution, etc., area, 1 .4, see also Date of
publication; Place of publication, distribution, etc.;
Publishers, distributors, etc.
capitalization, A. 7
facsimiles, 1.1 1C
more than one, 1.4B3
notes on, I.7B9
numerals in, C.2B
reproductions, 1.4B5
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.4, 3.7B9
continuing resources, 12.4, 12.7B11
early printed monographs, 2.16
electronic resources, 9.4, 9.7B9
graphic materials, 8.4, 8.7B9
microforms, 11.4, 11.7B9
motion pictures, 7.4, 7.7B9
music, 5.4, 5.7B9
printed monographs, 2.4, 2.7B9
sound recordings, 6.4, 6.7B9
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.4, 10.7B9
Publication, simultaneous
continuing resources, 12.7B8
under different titles, 25. 3C
Published versions of manuscripts
notes on, 4.7B9
titles from, 4.1B2
Publishers, distributors, etc., 1 ,4D
added entry for, 21.30E
address of publisher, 1.4C7
function, L4D3, 1.4E, see also rule x.4E for specific
materials, e.g., Cartographic materials, 3.4E
more than one, 1.4D4
in other title information, 1.1E4
as part of title proper, 1. 1B2
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.4D, 3.4E
continuing resources, 12.4D
early printed monographs, 2.16A-2.16B, 2.16D-
2.16E
electronic resources, 9.4D, 9.4E
graphic materials, 8.4D, 8.4E
Publishers, distributors, etc. cont.
law reports, 2 1 .36A1 , 21 .36A2
microforms, U.4D, 11. 4E
motion pictures, 7.4D
music, 5.4D, 25.30E
printed monographs, 2.4D, 2.4E
sound recordings, 6.4D, 6.4E
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.4D
subsidiaries of, 1 .4D3
Publishers' numbers, see also Numbers associated with item
music, 5.7B19, App. D, see also Opus numbers (music);
Plate numbers (music)
sound recordings, 6.7B19
Punctuation of description, 1.0C
edition area, 1.2A1, see also rule X.2A1 for specific
formats, e.g., Printed monographs, 2.2A1
inclusive dates, C.5E
material specific details area, 1.3
cartographic materials, 3.3AI
music, 5.3A
serials, 12.3A2
note area, 1.7A1, 1.7A3, see also rule X.7AI for specific
formats, e.g., Cartographic materials, 3.7A1
physical description area, 1.5A1, see also rule x.SAl for
specific formats, e.g., Electronic resources, 9.5AI
publication, distribution, etc., area, 1.4A1, see also rule
X.4AI for specific formats, e.g., Microforms, 11.4A1
scries area, 1.6A1, see also rule X.6AI for specific
formats, e.g., Sound Recordings, 6.6A1
standard number and terms of availability area, 1 ,8A1,
sec also rule x.SAl for specific formats, e.g., Motion
pictures, 7.8A1
title and statement of responsibility area, 1.1A1, see also
rule x.lAl for specific formats, e.g., Manuscripts,
4.1A1
title proper, LIB 1
Punctuation of heading, additions to place name, 23.4A
Q
Qualifiers to names, see Given names (forenames): additions
to; Identical names, distinguishing; Personal names:
additions to; Surnames: additions to
Quartets in uniform titles, 25.30B3
Queens, see Royalty, headings; Sovereigns
Question mark, use of, 1.0C
Quintets in uniform lilies, 25.30B3
Quotations in notes, 1.7A3
R
Rabbis, see Religious leaders and officials
Races, capitalization, A.14
Radio stations, 24.1 !
Radiographs
definition, App. D
specific material designation, 8.5B1
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-31
INDEX
Raised-type books, see Braille works; Tactile materials;
Text (tactile), definition
Rank of royalty and nobility, 22, 16A1 nl5
Rank, titles of, see Terms of honour and respect; Titles of
nobility
Realia, see also Objects; Three-dimensional artefacts and
realia; Toys
definition, App. D
general material designation, 1.1C1
Recording characteristics (sound recordings), 6.5C1, 6.5C8
Recording, type of (sound recordings), 6.5CI-6.5C2
Recordings, sound, see Sound recordings
Records (corporate papers) without title, 4, 1 B2
Records (court cases) of one party, entry, 21.36C8, see also
Law reports, entry
Records (electronic resources), physical description, 9.5B4
Records (sound recording), see Sound discs
Recto, definition, App. D
Reduction ratio for microforms, 1 1.7B10
Reels, electronic resources, see Computer tape reels
Reels, fiimsirip. specific material designation, 8.5B1
Reels, microfilm, specific material designation, 11.5BI
Reels, motion picture, specific materia! designation, 7.5B1
Reels, sound tape, see Sound tape reels
Reels, stereograph, specific material designation, 1
Reel-to-reel tapes
chief sources of information, 6.0B1
number of tracks, 6.5C6
Reference sources
AACR2 style, 0.2
Arabic alphabet, names in, 22.22 nl8
auctor, 21.27A n6
choice of name, 22.2B4 n2
corporate bodies, 24. 1A n2
definition, App. D
liturgical works, 25.19A n8
manuscripts, published descriptions of, 4.7B15
names in other languages, 22.21A nl7
ordinal numbers, C.8B nl
personal names, 22. IB nl
style of entries, 0.1 1
thematic index numbers, 25.30C4 nl2-25.30C4 nl3
titles of nobility, 22.6A n9
References, 26, see also Explanatory references; Name-title
references
Avesta, 25.18L
Bible, 25.18A6
Buddhist scriptures, 25.18F3
corporate names, 26.3
definition, App. D
form of, 26.1F-26.1G
geographic names, 26.3
Hindu scriptures, 25.18L
personal names, 26.2
different entry elements, 26.2A3
different forms of name, 26.2A2
different names, 26.2A1
References cont.
series and serials, added entries to, 26,5
Talmud, Mishnah, and Tosefta, 25.18D
uniform titles, 26.4
References (bibliographic), see Bibliographic citations;
Reference sources
Regulations, administrative, see Administrative regulations,
entry
Reign, dates of, see Dates of reign
Reissues, see also Issues, definition; Reprints
edition statements, 1.2D3
statements of, serials, 12.2Bla
Related corporate bodies, definition, App. D, see also
Subordinate bodies
Related works, see also Accompanying material;
Adaptations; Revisions; Translations
added entries, 21.30G
entry, 21.28
music, see Adaptations (music)
references, 26. 4C
as separate items, 1.9 A
Relationship, words indicating, see also Filial indicators;
Patronymics; Terms of address
following surnames, 22.5C8
with given names, 22.11B
Relator terms, see Function, designations of
Release date, motion pictures, 7.4F1
Release, country of, motion pictures, 7.7B9
Releasing agents, see also Publication, distribution, etc.,
area
definition, App. D
motion pictures, 7.4D1, 7.4E
Relief models, see Models (cartographic materials)
Religion, names in, see Names in religion
Religious bodies, see also Religious orders
capitalization, A.19D
conventional names, 24.3C2 n8
headings, 24.27
Religious events and concepts, capitalization, A.19E, see
also Historic events and periods, capitalization
Religious holidays, see Holidays, capitalization
Religious jurisdictions, see Jurisdiction, type of; religious
and ecclesiastical
Religious laws, entry, 21.1B2
Religious leaders and officials, see also Popes
Buddhist patriarchs, 22.28D3
capitalization, A. 19C
headings for, 22.16C, 24.27B
nonofficial communications, 21.4D2
official communications, 21.4D1
Religious observances, manuals of, see Liturgical works
Religious orders
conventional names, 24, 3D
liturgical works, 2 5. 22 A
personal names, additions to, 22.16D
Religious publications, entry, 21.37-21.39
Religious seasons, capitalization, A. 24
Index-32
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Religious services, programmes of, entry, 21.39A3
Religious titles and terms of address, see also Popes;
Religious leaders and officials
capitalization, A.13E2, A.19C
Iban names, 22.27D n22
Indie names, 22.25A, 22.25B4
Malay names:, 22.27D n22
Remote access resources, see also Direct access electronic
resources; Integrating resources
date of viewing, 1.7B23, 9JB22, 12.7B23
definition, 9.0A, App. D
notes on, 9.7B1
physical description, 9.5A ! , 9.5B3, 9.5C3, 9.7B !
publication, distribution, etc., area, 9.4B2
Remote-sensing image in cartographic materials
notes on, 3.7B8
specific material designation, 3.5B1
Renderings, architectural, see Architectural renderings
Rental terms, see Terms of availability
Reporters, entry
as authors, 21.25
court cases, 21.36C1, 2L36C2
law reports', 21.36A1, 21.36A2
Repository designation added to uniform titles
Bible, 25.18AJ2
general rule, 25.13B
liturgical works, 25.22B
Reprints
definition, App, D
music, 5.7B19
serial numbering area, 12.3B1
serials, 12.2Bla
Reproduction characteristics, sound recordings, 6.5C1,
6.5C8
Reproductions, 1.11, see also Art reproductions;
Facsimile reproductions, definition; Photocopies;
Reprints
Bible, 25.18A13
cartographic materials, 3.5C3, 3.7B !0
general material designation, 1.1C3
notes on original, 1.7A4, 1.7B22
graphic materials, 8.7B22
microform, 1 L7B22
publication details covered by label, 1.4B5
serials numbering area, 12.3B 1
Republic of Ireland, place names, 23. 4D
Requiems, see Liturgical music, entry
Respect, terms of, see Terms of honour and respect
Respondents (academic disputations)
definition, App. D
entry, 21.27
Responsibility, statements of, see Statements of
responsibility
Restrictions on access or use, see Access, restrictions on
Revision frequency of continuing resources, see Frequency
of continuing resources
Revisions
date of publication, 1.4F3
edition statements, 1.2D, see also rule x.2Djor specific
formats, e.g., Cartographic materials, 3. 2D
entry for, 21.12
serials, 12.2Bla
to treaties, entry, 2 1 .35E2
uniform titles not used for, 25. 2B
Right ascension in description, 3.3D2
Riles of liturgical works, uniform titles, 25.22A
Rituals, see Liturgical works
Roads, see Street names, capitalization
Rock music, see Popular music
Rolls (sound recordings)
chief source of information, 6.0B1
dimensions, 6.5D7
notes on physical description, 6.7B 10
specific material designation, 6.5B1
Roman alphabet, abbreviations, B.9
Roman Catholic Church, see Catholic Church
Roman Curia, see Catholic Church
Roman names
entry, 22. 9A
language of name, 22.3B3
Roman numerals
arabic numerals used for, early printed monographs,
2.16F
capitals or lower-case, C.2B3
in description, C.2B
headings for persons and corporate bodies, C.2A1
in pagination of printed monographs, 2.5B2
in romanized headings, C.5B-C.5C
in uniform titles, C.2A2
Romances (medieval tales), uniform titles, 25.12A
Romanian language
abbreviations, B.15
initial articles, E.1A
Romanian names
patronymics, 22.7
surnames with prefixes, 22.5DI
Romanizatiou, see also Nonroman scripts
capitalization of romanized headings and titles, A.34
Corporate names, 24. IB, 24. IB n4
corporate names and place names, references, 26.3A3
definition, App. D
in description of item, 1.0E
numerals in, C.5B-C.5C
persona! names
choice of, 22.3C
hyphens in, 22.1D2
references, 26 .2 A3
title proper, see Variant titles
of uniform titles, 25, 2D
Romanization tables, 0.13 n3. 22.3C n3, 24.1B1 n5
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
Index-33
INDEX
Royalty, headings, 22. 8C, see also Heads of state; Titles of
nobility
additions to names, 22.16A
capitalization of titles, A.I3E1
entry under surname, 22.5F
official communications, 24.20B
Thai, 22.28B
Rulers, see Heads of state; Royalty, headings
Rules, see Administrative regulations, entry
Running time, see Duration (playing time)
Running titles, see also Variant titles
delinition, App. D
as source of information
early printed monographs, 2. 13A
printed monographs, 2.0B 1
Russian language, see also Cyrillic alphabet abbreviations
abbreviations, B.15
capitalization, A. 46
S
Sacred scriptures, see also names of scriptures, e.g., Koran
capitalization, A.19H
entry, 21.37
readings for services, 21.39A2, see also Liturgical works
title entry, 21. 1C
uniform titles, 25.17-25.18
Saints
entry, 22.13
observances for, 25.23B
references, 26.2A3
Sanskrit authors, 22.25A
Sanskrit canon, uniform titles, 25.18F2
Satan, capitalization, A.I9B
Scale of cartographic materials, 3.3B
notes on, 3.7B8
in title proper, 3.1B2
Scandinavian languages, see also specific languages, e.g.,
Norwegian language
capitalization, A. 47
surnames with prefixes, 22.5D1
Scenarios (drama), see Related works
Scenarios (musical settings), 21.20, see also Related works
Scientific names of plants and animals, capitalization, A.25
Scope notes in explanatory references, 26.3C1
Scope of item, notes on, see Nature, scope, or artistic form
of item, notes on
Scores, see also Chorus scores; Close scores; Condensed
scores; Conductor parts (music); Miniature scores; Part
(music); Piano scores; Short scores, definition; Vocal
scores
definition, App. D
specific material designation, 5.5B1
Scotland, place names, 23. 4D
Scots language, initial articles, E.1A
Scottish Court of Session, judges of, 22.6B2
Scottish Gaelic language, initial articles, E.1A
Screenplays, see Related works
Script (writing system), see also Language; Multilingual
materials; Nonroman scripts
ancient manuscripts, 4.7B23
of description, 1 .0E
Scriptures, see Sacred scriptures
Seasons, capitalization, A. 23
Secondary entries, see Added entries
Sections (bibliographic materials), definition,
App. D
Sections (cartographic materials)
definition, App. D
specific material designation, 3.5B1
Sections (continuing resources), see also Subseries
description of, 12.10
parallel titles, 12.ID2
statements of responsibility, 12.1F4
title proper, 12.1B3-12.1B6
Sections (subordinate body), see Departments (subordinate
body)
Secular names, references, 26.2A1, see also Names in
religion
Seder, see Talmud
"See also" references, see also References
corporate headings, 26. 3B
general rule, 26. 1 C
personal names, 26. 2C
uniform titles, 26. 4C
"Sec" references, see also References
corporate headings, 26.3A
general rule, 26. IB
personal names, 26.2A
uniform titles, 26. 4B
Sees, see Holy See, treaties of; Jurisdiction, type of;
religious and ecclesiastical
Selections as uniform title, 25.6B3, 25.9
Bible, 25.18A7-25.18A9
music, 25.34B, 25.35A
Talmud, 25.18B1
and translations, 25.6B3, 25.1 1
works in a single form, 25.10
Semicolon, use of, see Punctuation of description
Senior, see also Relationship, words indicating
capitalization, A.13F
following surnames, 22.5C8
Sepia
in graphic materials, 8.5C2
in motion pictures, 7.5C4, 7.7B10
Sequels
definition, App. D
entry, 21.28B1 n8, see also History of item, notes on;
Related works
Serbo-Croatian language
abbreviations, B.15
capitalization, A.48
Serial numbers (music) in uniform titles, 25.30CJ-25.30C2
lndex-34
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Serials, 12, see also Continuing resources; Serials,
changes in
basis of description, I.0A2, 12.0B!a, !2,7B23a
dates of publication, 1.4F8
definition, App. D
editors, 12,lF3a, 12.7B7.1, 2L30D
facsimiles or other reprint, 12.3B I
frequency notes, 12.7B1
indexes, see Related works
inserts, notes on, 12.7B19
note on item described, 1.7B23, 12.7B23a
numbering, sec Numbering area {serials)
references to added entries, 26.5B
special numbers, see Related works
Serials, changes in
edition information, 12.2Fla, 12.7B9.2a
entries for, 21.3Bla, 21.29B
manufacturer or place of manufacture, 12.4G2a
numbering, 12.3G, 12.7B10.2
other physical details, 12.5C2a
other title information, 12.1E2a, 12.7B6.2a
parallel titles, 12.1D3a, 12.7B5.2a
physical description, 12.7BI2.2a
place of publication, 12.4C2a
publication, distribution, etc., area, 12.7B11.2a
publishers, distributors, etc, 12.4D2a
scries, 12.7Bl4.2a
series statement, 12.6B2a
statements of responsibility, 12.1F5a, I2.7B7.2a
title proper, 12.1B8a, 12.7B4.2a, 21.2C, 21.30J1
Series, see also Multipart items
added entries, 21.30L
analysis, 13.3
contents notes, 12.7B19
definitions, App. D
references to added entries, 26. 5 A
Scries area
capitalization, A. 9
genera! rules, 1.6
facsimiles, 1.1 1C
ISSN, 1.6F
multiple series statements, 1.6J
notes on, 1.7B12
numbering within series, 1.6G
other title information, 1.6D
parallel titles, 1.6C
statements of responsibility, 1.6E
subseries, 1.6H
title proper, 1.6B
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.6, 3.7B12
continuing resources, 12.6, 12.7B14
electronic resources, 9.6, 9.7B 1 2
graphic materials, 8.6, 8.7B12
microforms, 11.6, 11.7B12
motion pictures, 7.6, 7.7B12
Series area com,
music, 5.6, 5.7B12
printed monographs, 2.6, 2.7B12
sound recordings, 6.6, 6.7B12
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.6, 10.7B12
Series numbering, L6G
abbreviations in, B.5B
capitalization of terms used with, A.9B
multiple series, 1.6H3
nonnumeric, 1.6G3
numerals in, C.2B, C.3B, C.5D
and serials, 12.6B1
subseries, 1.6H3, L6H8
in title proper, 1.6B1
Scries title page, definition, App. D
Series title, trade names as (sound recordings), 6.4D3
Sermons, see Speeches
Service books, see Liturgical works
Sessions of legislatures, 24.21D
Settings, musical, see Arrangements (music)
Shared authorship, see Shared responsibility, works of
Shared pseudonyms, entry, 21. 6D
Shared responsibility, works of, see also Joint authors,
definition; Mixed responsibility, works of
corporate entries for, 2 1 . 1 B2, 2 1 . 1 B3
definition, App, D
entry, 21.1A2, 21.6
principal responsibility indicated, 21. 6B
principal responsibility not indicated, 21.6C
Sheets
cartographic materials, 3.5B1, 3.5D1
definition, App. D
dimensions, 2.5D4
early printed monographs, 2.I7A
printed monographs, 2.5B1
Sheets, folded
cartographic materials, 3.5D1
printed monographs, 2.5D4
Shetland English, initial articles, E.1A
Ships, abbreviations before names, 24.5C4
Short scores, definition, App. D, see also Close scores;
Condensed scores
Short titles, see Brief titles (music), uniform titles
Show copy (videotapes), 7.7B10
Signatures (autograph) in manuscripts
incomplete or lacking signature, 4.1F2-4.1F3
notes on, 4.7B1
Signatures (book) in early printed monographs, 2.18D
Signing for the deaf in motion pictures, 7.7B2
Sikh names, 22.25B3
Silent films, speed of, 7.5C3
Simultaneous editions, see Publication, simultaneous
Sine loco, 1.4C6
capitalization of S.I., A.7B
definition, App. D
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-35
INDEX
Sine nomine, 1.4D6
capitalization of s.n., A.7B
definition, App. D
Singapore names, 22.27
Sir, see Terms of honour and respect
Size, see Dimensions
Sketches, musical, uniform tides, 25.35B
S.I., see Sine loco
Slash, diagonal, use of, see Punctuation of description
Sleeves, definition, App. D
Slides
definition, App. D
dimensions, 8.5D5
general material designation, 1.1C1
sound, 8.5C1
specific material designation, 8.5B1
Slides, microscope, see Microscope slides
Slovak language
abbreviations, B.15
capitalization, A.49
surnames with prefixes, 22.5D1
Slovenian language
abbreviations, B.15
capitalization, A. 50
S.n„ see Sine nomine
Sobriquets, see Given names (forenames); Words or phrases
Societies, initials of, see Initials: corporate bodies
Software requirements, notes on, 9.7B1
Soil names, capitalization, A. 2 8
Solo instruments) and accompanying ensemble in uniform
titles, 25.30B7
Solo voices
collections, 25.34C1 nl5
terms for, 25.30B8
Sonatas, trio, uniform titles, 25.29C
Song texts, see Text (song)
Songs, see also Musical works that include words, entry
accompaniment for, 25.30B10
Sound
electronic resources, 9.5C1
graphic materials, 8.5CJ
Sound cartridges
chief source of information, 6. OBI
dimensions, 6.5D4
number of tracks, 6.5C1, 6.5C6
specific material designation, 6.5B1
Sound cassettes
chief source of information, 6. OBI
dimensions, 6.5D5
number of tracks, 6.5C1, 6.5C6
specific material designation, 6.5B1
Sound channels, number of, 6.5C1, 6.5C7
Sound characteristics (motion pictures), notes on, 7.7B10,
see also Sound tracks (motion pictures)
Sound discs
diameter, 6.5 D 2
groove characteristics, 6.5C1
notes on physical description, 6.7B10
playing speed, 6.5C3
sources of information, 6.0B1
specific material designation, terms for, 6.5B1
Sound recordings, 6
definition, App. D
edition area, 6.2, 6.7B7
entry, 21.1B2, 21.23
on film, chief source of information, 6.0B1
general material designation, 1.1C1, 6.1C
note area, 6.7
other physical details, 6.5C1
physical description area, 6.5, 6.7B10
publication, distribution, etc., area, 6.4, 6.7B9
publisher's numbers, 6.7B19
series area, 6,6, 6.7B 1 2
specific material designation, 6.5B
standard number and terms of availability area, 6.8
statement of responsibility area, 6. 1 F, 6.7B6, 6.7B 1 8
title, 6.1A-6.1E, 6.7B3-6.7B5
Sound recordings, nonproccsscd, see Nonprocessed sound
recordings
Sound tape reels
dimensions, 6.5D6
number of tracks, 6.5C6
specific material designation, 6.5B1
Sound tapes, see also Sound cassettes
chief sources of information, 6. OB 1
notes on physical description, 6.7B10
number of tracks, 6.5C1, 6.5C6
playing speed, 6.5C3
width, 6.5D4
Sound track films (sound recordings)
gauge of film, 6.5D3
playing speed, 6.5C3
specific material designation, 6.5B1
track configuration, 6.5C1, 6.5C5
type of recording, 6.5C1-6.5C2
Sound tracks (motion pictures)
integrated with item, 7.1C2
silent or sound films, 7.5C1, 7.5C3
Source of item, notes on
graphic materials, 8.7B6
manuscripts, 4.7B7
Sources of information, I. OA
access points, 2 1 .OB
for choice of name, 22. IB, 24.1
general rules
edition area, 1.2A2
note area, 1.7A2
physical description area, L5A2
publication, distribution, etc., area, 1.4A2
series area, 1.6A2
Index-36
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Sources of information com.
standard number and terms of availability, 1 .8A2
title and statement of responsibility area, 1.1A2
title proper, 1.7B3
interpolations to, 1 ,0C
omissions: from, 1.1FI5
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3. OB
continuing resources, 12. OB
continuing resources, nonprint, 12.0B2b, 12,0B3b
continuing resources, printed, 12.0B2a, l2.0B3a
early printed monographs, 2.13
electronic resources, 9. OB
graphic materials, 8.0B
integrating resources, 12.0Blb
manuscripts, 4. OB
microforms, 1 1.0B
motion pictures, 7. OB
music, 5. OB
printed monographs, 2. OB
reproductions, 1,1 1A
serials, 12.0Bla
sound recordings, 6. OB
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.0B, 10. OH
Sovereigns, see also Heads of state; Royalty, headings
capitalization of numerals following names, A.13D
as term for King or Queen, 24.20B1
Space, use of, see Punctuation of description
Spanish language
abbreviations, B. 15
capitalization, A. 5 i
initial articles, E.1A
Spanish names
surnames, compound, 22.5C5
surnames with prefixes, 22.5D1
Special format statements, serials, 12,2Bla
Special interest statements, serials, 12.2Bla
Specialist cataloguing, designations in headings, 21.0D
Specific material designation, see also Extent of item;
General material designation
cartographic materials, 3.5B1
continuing resources, 12.5B1
definition, App, D
electronic resources, 9.5B1, 9.5B3
graphic materials, 8.5B1
microforms, 11.5B)
motion pictures, 7.5B1
music, 5.5B 1
sound recordings, 6.5B1
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.5B1
Specimens, see Three-dimensional artefacts and realia
Speeches
of chiefs of state, see Heads of state
of ecclesiastical officials, see Popes; Religious leaders
and officials
manuscript, 4.1B2, 4.1E2, 4.4B2
Speed, playing, see Playing speed (sound recordings)
Speed, projection (motion pictures), 7.5C1, 7.5C5
Spellings, variant, see Variant spellings
Spine title, definition, App, D, see also Binder's title,
definition; Cover title, definition
Spirit communications
additions to heading, 22.I4A
entry, 21.26
Split resources, notes on, I2.7B8
Square brackets
in title proper, t, IB1
use of, see Punctuation of description
Standard dimensions, see Dimensions, standard
Standard number and terms of availability area, 1.8
capitalization. A, 1 1
Cartographic materials, 3.8
continuing resources, 12.8
electronic resources, 9.8
graphic materials, 8.8
microforms, 1 1.8
motion pictures, 7.8
music, 5.8
printed monographs, 2.8
sound recordings, 6.8
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.8
Standard numbers, 1.8B, see also ISBN, printed
monographs; ISSN, series
definition, App. D
facsimiles, 1.11E
multiple, 1.8B2, 1.8EI
qualifications of, 1.8E
Standard titles, see Uniform titles
Statements (electronic resources), physical description,
9.5B4
Statements of responsibility, 1.1F, see also Statements of
responsibility relating to edition; Statements of
responsibility relating to scries
absence of, 1.1F2
additions, explanatory, 1.1F8
capitalization, A.4F
definition, App. D
edition area vs. title area, 1.2C2
facsimiles, 1.11B
items lacking collective title, 1.1G3
more than one, 1.IF6
with more than one name, 1.1F4-1.1F5
notes on, 1.7B6
other title information and, 1.1E4
as part of title proper, 1.1B2-1.1B3, 1.1F13, 25.3B
position of, L1F3
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3. IF, 3.7B6
continuing resources, 12.1F, 12.7B7
early printed monographs, 2.14F
electronic resources, 9. IF, 9.7B6
graphic materials, 8. IF, 8.7B6
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-3 7
INDEX
Statements of responsibility cont.
manuscripts, 4. IF, 4.7B6
microforms, II. IF, 11.7B6
motion pictures, 7. IF, 7.7B6
music, 5. IF, 5.1G2, 5.7B6
printed monographs, 2. IF, 2.7B6
serials, 12.1Ela
sound recordings, 6. IF, 6.7B6, 6.7B18
three -dimensional artefacts, 10.1F, 10.7B6
transcription of, 1.1F1
Statements of responsibility relating to edition
cartographic materials, 3.2C-3.2E
continuing resources, 12.2C-12.2E
electronic resources, 9.2C-9.2E
genera! rule, 1.2C
graphic materials, 8.2C-8.2E
manuscripts, 4.2C
microforms, 1 1.2C-1 1.2E
motion pictures, 7.2C-7.2E
music, 5.2C-5.2E
printed monographs, 2.2C-2.2E
revised editions, 1.2E
sound recordings, 6.2C-6.3E
three-dimensional artefacts, I0.2C-1G.2E
Statements of responsibility relating to series, 1.6E, 1.6H6
States, names of
abbreviations, B. 14
capitalization, A.15B
corporate names, added to, 24.4C2, B.14
place names, added to, 23.4C
place of publication, added to, 1.4C3, B. 14
Statutes, see Laws
Stereographs
dimensions, 8.5D3
multipart, 8.5B5
number of frames, 8.5B2
specific material designation, 8.5B1
Still images on videodiscs
extent of item, 7.5B2
physical description, 7.7B10
Stock shots {motion pictures)
date of creation, 7.4F3
notes, 7.7B18
title proper, 7.1B2
Street names, capitalization, A. 16
String instruments in uniform titles, 25.30B5
Study prints, 8.5B1
Subcommittees of U.S. Congress, 24.21C
Subdivisions of publishers (sound recordings), 6.4D2, see
also Subsidiaries of publishers
Subheadings
definition, A pp. D
direct or indirect
government agencies entered subordinate^, 24,19
subordinate corporate bodies, 24.14
Subordinate bodies
church councils as, 24. 27 A3
definition, 21.1B1, App, D
entered directly, 24.12
entered subordinately, 24.13-24.14
government bodies, 24.17-24.19
joint committees, 24.15B
legislative bodies, 24.21B
political parties, 24.16
references, 24.14, 24. 19, 26.3A7
religious bodies, 24.27C
Subseries, 1 .6H, see also Sections (continuing resources);
Series
definition, App. D
entry, see Related works
vs. multiple series, L6H4
Subsidiaries of publishers, 1.4D3, see also Subdivisions of
publishers (sound recordings)
Subtitles (motion pictures), see Captioning and subtitles in
motion pictures
Subtitles (texts), see Other title information
SuDocs number, see Numbers associated with item
Suites (musical works), uniform titles, 25.32B2
Summary of content, notes on, 1.7B 17, see also Contents
notes
continuing resources, 12.7BI8
electronic resources, 9.7B 1 7
graphic materials, 8.7B17
manuscripts, 4.7B17
microforms, 1 1.7B17
motion pictures, 7.7B17
printed monographs, 2.7B17
sound recordings, 6.7B17
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.7B17
Superintendent of Documents number, see Numbers
associated with item
Supplements, see also Accompanying material; Related
works; Sequels
continuing resources
notes, 12.7B8
statements of responsibility, 12.1F4
title proper, 12.lB3-12.iB6
definition, App. D
described dependency, 1.9B
described independently, 1.9A
in notes, 1.7B11
title, capitalization of, A.4D
title proper for, 1.3B9
Supplied titles, fee also Uniform titles; music
cartographic materials, 3.1B4, 3.1G5
definition, App. D
graphic materials, 8.1B2-8JB3
manuscripts, 4.1B2, 4. IE2
motion pictures, 7.1B2
music, 5.1B2
as title proper, 1.1B7
Index-38
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Support of item, see Material of item
Surnames, see also Surnames, compound
additions to, 22.15
additions to identical names, 22.19B
Arabic names, 22. 22 A
compound, see Surnames, compound
definition, App. D
elements functioning as, 22. 5B
entry under, 22.5
in entry under title of nobility, 22. 6A
Indie names, 22.25B
nonroman script, 22.3C2
order of elements, 22.4B2-22.4B3
with prefixes, see Prefixes, surnames with
romanization, 22.3C2 n4
of royalty, 22.5F, 22.8C, 26.2A3
words indicating relationship following surnames,
22.5C8
Surnames, compound
definition, App. D
entry under, 22. 5C
hyphenated, 22.1D2, 22.5C3
married women, 22.5C5
nature uncertain, 22.5C6
place names following surnames, 22.5C7
preferred form known, 22.5C2
references, 26. 2 A3
Surnames, names without, 22.IC
Suspended publications, 12.7B 1 1.1, see also "No more
published" note
Swedish language, see also Scandinavian languages
abbreviations, B. 15
compound surname uncertain, 22.5C6
initial articles, E.l A
pronouns, capitalization, A.47E3
Symbols, transcription of, 1.0E
in edition statement, 1.2B2
indicating authorship, 21 .5C
in personal names, 22.10
in statements of responsibility, 1.1F9
in titles, 1.1B1
Synagogues, see Churches, local
Synods, see Jurisdiction, type of: religious and ecclesiastical
System requirements for electronic resources, notes on,
9.7B1
Tactile materials, see also Braille wocks; Text (tactile),
definition
cartographic materials, 3.5B4
definition, App. D
general material designation, 1.1C1
graphic materials, 8.5 B 6
Tagalog language, initial articles, E.l A
Talmud
references, 2S.18D
uniform titles, 25.1 SB
Tamil names, 22.25B2
Tape cartridges, see Cartridges, computer tape; Sound
cartridges
Tape cassettes, see Cassettes, computer tape; Sound
cassettes
Tape reels, see Computer tape reels; Sound tape reels
Tapes, sound, see Sound tapes
Technical drawings, see also Architectural renderings
definition, App. D
dimensions, 8.5D6
general material designation, 1.1C1, 1.1C1 n2
reproduction method, 8.5C1J
specific material designation, 8.5B1
Television stations, 24. 1 1
Telugu names, 22.25B2
Temples, see Churches, local
Terms of address, see also Relationship, words indicating;
Terms of honour and respect; Titles of nobility; Titles
of position or office
added to identical names, 22.19B
Burmese and Karen names, 22.23B
capitalisation, A.13C
Indonesian names, 22.260, 22.26G n20
married women, 22. 1C, 22.15B
as part of name, 22,1 IB
references, 26.2A3
religious titles, see Religious titles and terms of address
in statement of responsibility, 1.1F7
Thai names, 22.28A
Terms of address as personal names
Burmese and Karen names, 22.23B
Indonesian names, 22.26G
references, 26.2A3
Terms of availability, 1.8D
capitalization, A.l 1
cartographic materials, 3.8D
continuing resources, 12, 8D
electronic resources, 9.8D
facsimiles, 1.1 IE
graphic materials, 8.8D
motion pictures, 7.8D
music, 5.8D
printed monographs, 2.8C
qualifications of, 1 .8E, 2.8D, 5.8E, 9.8E, 1 2.8E1
sound recordings, 6.8D
tlirec-di mens ion al artefacts, 10.8D
Terms of honour and respect, see also Religious titles and
terms of address; Terms of address; Titles of nobility;
Titles of position or office
added to identical names, 22. 19B
Arabic names, 22.22C. 22.22D
capitalization, A.13C, A.13G
Iban names, 22.27D n22
Indonesian names, 22.26G, 22.26G n20
Malay names, 22.27D, 22.27D n22
in names without surnames, 22. 1C
in statement of responsibility, 1.1 F7
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-39
INDEX
Territorial designations, see also Countries; Geographic
names
in royal names, 22. 8C
in titles of nobility, 22.6B1, see also Geographic names:
in personal names
Territories, occupied, see Occupied territories, governors
Text (large print), definition, App. D
Text (music), notes, 5.7B2
Text (printed materials)
with art reproductions, entry, 2I.17B
definition, App. D
general material designation, 1.1C1
illustrated, entry, 21.11
modifications of, see Adaptations; Revisions;
Translations
Text (song)
definition, App. D
uniform title, 25.35E
Text (tactile), definition, App, D, see also Tactile materials
Thai names, 22.28
Thematic index numbers (music)
definition, App. D
uniform titles, 25.30C1, 25.30C4
Thermoform (specific materia! designation)
cartographic materials, 3.5B4
graphic materials, 8.5B6
music, 5.5 B 3
printed monographs, 2.5B22
Theses, see Dissertations, notes on
Three-dimensional artefacts and rcalia, 10
cartographic materials, see Giobes; Models (cartographic
materials)
dimensions, 10.5D
edition area, 10.2, 10.7B7
general material designation, 10.1C
multipart items, 10.5D3
note area, 10.7
physical description area, 10,5, 1O.7BI0
physical details, 10.5C
publication, distribution, etc., area, 10.4, 10.7B9
series area, 10.6, 10.7B12
sources of information, 10.0B
specific materia! designation, 10. 5B
standard number and terms of availability area, 10,8
statement of responsibility area, 10. IF, 10.7B6
title, 10.1A-10.1E, 10.7B3-10.7B5
Tipitaka (Buddhist scriptures), uniform titles, 25.18F1
Title, see also Alternative titles; Caption title; Collective
titles; Half title, definition; Other title information;
Parallel tities; Running titles; Supplied titles; Title
proper; Uniform titles; Variant titles
changes in, see Title proper: changes in
definition, App. D
entry under, see Title entry
preceded by dashes, capitalization, A.4B
Title added entries, see Title entry; Title proper; changes in
Title and statement of responsibility area, 1.1, see also
Collective title, items without; General material
designation; Other title information; Parallel titles;
Statements of responsibility; Title proper
abbreviations, use of, B.4
capitalization, A.4
cartographic materials, 3.1
continuing resources, 12.1
early printed monographs, 2.14
electronic resources, 9.1
graphic materials, 8.1
manuscripts, 4. 1
microforms, i 1 .1
motion pictures, 7.1
music, 5.1
printed monographs, 2.1
sound recordings, 6.1
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.1
Title bar titles, see Variant titles
Title elements (music), see Initial title element (music)
Title entry
added entries, 21.30J
and description of item, 0.6
main entry, 21. 1C
uniform tities, 25.2EI
works of shared responsibility, 21.6C2
works of unknown or uncertain authorship, 21. 5A
Title frames (graphic materials)
definition, App. D
description, 8.5 B 2
Title page, see also Added title page, definition
definition, App. D
lack of
continuing printed resources, 32.0B2a
printed monographs, 2.0B1, 2.14A
printed monographs, 2.0B2 nl
serials, 12,0B2nl
substitutes for, 2.0B1, 2.7B3, 12.0B2a, 12.7B3
Title proper, 1. IB, see also Title proper note
added entries, 21.30J1
capitalization, A.4 A
changes in
added entries for, 21.30J1
entries for, 21.2
choice of language, 1.1 B8, see also Parallel titles
definition, App. D
explanatory additions, 1.1E6
lack of chief source of information, 3 .1B7
reproductions, 1.I1B
scries, 1.6B, see also Series area
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3. IB
continuing resources, 12. IB
early printed monographs, 2.14
electronic resources, 9. IB
graphic materials, 8. IB
Index-40
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Title proper cont.
manuscripts, 4. IB
microforms, 1 LIB
motion pictures, 7.1B
music, 5. IB
printed monographs, 2, IB
sound recordings, 6. IB
three- dimensional artefacts, 10.1B
for supplements to other items, 1.1B9
transcription of, LIB
and uniform titles, 25.2E1
variations in, see Variant titles
works entered under, see Title entry
Title proper, lack of, see Collective title, items without
Title proper note, 1.7B3
cartographic materials, 3.7B3
continuing resources, 12.7B3
early printed monographs, 2.18B
electronic resources, 9.7B3
graphic materials, 8.7B3
manuscripts, 4.7B3
microforms, 11.7B3
motion pictures, 7.7B3
music, 5.7B3
printed monographs, 2.7B3
sound recordings, 6.7B3
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.7B3
Title screen (electronic resources), definition, App. D
Titles of nobility, see also Royalty, headings
additions to names, 22.12
capitalization, A. 1 3E
change of personal name, 22. 2C
entry under, 22.6
in Italian names, 22.5D1
in names of persons, 22. 1 C
not used by person, 22.6B3
order of elements, 22.4B4
in statement of responsibility, 1.1F7
Thai, 22.28A, 22.28C
United Kingdom, 22.6A nlO, 22.12A rt!3
Titles of position or office, see also Religious titles and
terms of address; Terms of address; Terms of honour
and respect
added to identical names, 22.19B
capitalization, A. 13E3
Iban names, 22.27D n22
Malay names, 22.27D n22
as personal name, 22. i IB
Tosefta, uniform titles, 25.18C-25.18D
Towns, see Cities and towns
Toys, see also Games; Models (three-dimensional artefacts);
Realia
definition, App. D
general material designation, 1.1C1
Tracings, definition, App. D
Track configuration (sound track films), 6.5C1
Tracks (sound track films), 6.5C5-6.5C6
Tracks, number of (sound recordings), 6.5C1, 6.5C6
Tractates (Talmud), uniform titles, 25.I8B2
Trade names
capitalization, A. 29
electronic resources, 9.5B1
sound recordings, 6.4D2-6.4D3, 6.7B19
Traditional format (oriental books)
definition, App. D
pagination, 2.5BI I
Trailers, film
definition, App. D
other title information, 7. IE2
Transcription
of capitals in early monographs, 2.14E
of nonroman scripts, 1.0E, see also Romanization
Transcriptions, musical, see Adaptations (music);
Arrangements (music)
Transcripts of manuscripts, notes on, 4.7BI
Translations
continuing resources, 12.7B8
entry for, 21.14
notes on, 1.7B2, see also Language: notes on
printed monographs, 2.7B2
uniform titles, 25.5C, 25.11
Midrashim, 25.18E1
references, 26.4B1
selections, 25.6B3
Talmud, 25.1 8B I
vocal works, 25.35F
Translators
added entries, 2 1 . 14A, 2 1 .30K1
Bible, as version names, 25.18A1 1
definition, App. D
designation in added entry, 21. OD
Transliteration, see Romanization
Transmittal documents, entry, 21.4D1
Transparencies, see also Overlays, definition
definition, App. D
dimensions, 8.5D4
general material designation, 1.1C1
multipart, 8.5B5
number of, 8.5B4
specific material designation, 8.5B1
Treaties, see also Documents, capitalization
entry, 21. 1B2, 21.35
protocols, etc., 25.16B3
uniform titles, 25.16
Tribal governments, African, entry, 21.35A nlO
Tribes, capitalization, A. 14
Trio sonatas in uniform titles, 25.29C
Trios in uniform titles, 25.30B3
Tripitaka (Buddhist scriptures), uniform titles, 25.18F2
Turkish language, initial articles, E.1A
Two works issued together
music, uniform titles, 25.33
uniform titles, 25.7
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-41
INDEX
Two-way paging, 2.5B14
Type and extent of electronic resource notes, 9.7B8
Type measurements, early printed monographs, 2. 1 8E
Type of publication specific details area, see Materia!
specific details area
Type of recording (sound recordings), 6.5C1-6.5C2
Typescripts, notes on, 4.7B1, see also Manuscripts
Typographical devices in names, 21. 5C, 22.10
U
U (letter of alphabet) in early monographs, transcription of,
2.14E
U.K., place names, see British Isles, place names
Ukrainian language
abbreviations, B.15
capitalization, A, 5 2
Uncertain information, see also entries beginning Unknown
authorship, 21.5, see also Anonymous works
date of publication, 1 .4F7
place of publication, distribution, etc, 1.4C6
publisher, distributor, etc., 1.4D7
and use of question mark, 1 .0C
Undated items, see Unknown date of publication,
distribution, etc.
Undifferentiated names, headings for, 22.20, see also
Identical names, distinguishing
Uniform titles, 25
abbreviations, use of, B.3, B.9 n3
additions to, 25.5, see also type of addition (e.g.,
Language) and type of work (e.g., Music)
capitalization, A. 3
definition, App. D
and description of item, 0.6
general rule, 25.2
general terms for parts in, 25.6A2
and main entry concept, 0.5
numerals in, C.2A2, C.3A2
parts of a work, 25.6
references, 26.4
rorrian numerals in, C.5C
translations, 25.5C, 25.11
type of work
complete works, 25.8
cycles, 25.12
incunabula, 25.14
laws, 25.15
liturgical works, 25.19-25.23
manuscripts, 25.13
music, 25.25-25.35
papal communications, etc., 25.24
sacred scriptures, 25.17-25.18
selections, 25.6B3, 25.9
treaties, 25.16
two works issued together, 25.7, 25.33
works created after 1500, 25.3
works created before 1501, 25.4
works in a single form, 25.10
United Kingdom, place names, see British Isles, place
names
United States
Congress, legislative subcommittees, 24.21C
place names, 23.4C, B.14
political parties, state and local elements, 24.16
Universities
place names in, 24.4C2
subordinate bodies of, 24.13
Unknown authorship, see Anonymous works
Unknown date of publication, distribution, etc., 1.4F6-1.4F7
early printed monographs, 2.16G
Unknown place of publication, I.4C6
Unknown publisher, distributor, etc., 1.4D6
Unnamed groups, works by, see Anonymous works
Unnumbered frames, graphic materials, 8.5B2
Unnumbered sequences, pagination of, 2.5B3, 2.5B7
Unnumbered serials, notes on item described, 12.7B23a
Unpublished items, see also Artefacts not intended primarily
for communication; Manuscripts; Naturally occurring
objects; Nonprocessed sound recordings
date of production, 1.4F9-1.4F10
publication details, 1.4C8, 1.4D8
cartographic materials, 3.4C2, 3.4D2
electronic resources, 9.4C2, 9.4D2, 9.4F2
graphic materials, 8.4C2, 8.4D2, 8.4F2
microforms, 1 1.4C2, 1 1.4D2, 1 1.4F2
motion pictures, 7.4C2, 7.4D2, 7.4F3
music, 5.4C2, 5.4D2
Upanishads
references, 25.18L
uniform titics, 25.18H
Updating loose-leaf publications, see Loose-leaf publications
Urdu language, initial articles, E.IA
U.S.A., see United States
Use, restrictions on, see Access, restrictions on
User guides (electronic resources), see Accompanying
material
U.S.S.R., additions to place names, 23.4C
V
V (letter of alphabet) in early monographs, transcription of,
2.14E
Variant formats, see Formats, alternative
Variant forms of personal name, see also Variant names
headings, 22.3
references, 26.2A2
Variant forms of title, see Variant titles
Variant names, see also Name, change of; Variant forms of
persona! name
autocephalous patri archates, 24.3C3
churches, 24. 3 G
conferences,24.3Fl
constitutional conventions, 24.22B
corporate bodies, 24.2-24.3
governments, 24. 3 E
Index-42
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
INDEX
Variant names com.
references
corporate bodies and places, 26.3A3
persons, 26.2AL
religious Orders, 24. 3D
Variant spellings
corporate names, 24, 2C
personal Barnes, 22.3D
references
corporate names and place names, 26.3A3
personal names, 26.2A2
Variant texts, liturgical works, 25.22
Variant titles, see also Uniform titles
added entries, 2L30J2
Bible, books of, 25.I8A6
notes on, 1.7B4
references, 26. 4B 1
series, 1.6B2
specific formats
cartographic materials, 3.7B4
continuing resources, 12.7B4, 1
electronic resources, 9.7B4
graphic materials, 8.7B4
manuscripts, 4.7 B 4
microforms, U.7B4
motion pictures, 7.7B4
music, 5.7B4
printed monographs, 2.7B4
sound recordings, 6.7B4
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.7B4
Variations, musical, entry, 2I.18C
Vedas
references, 25.18L
uniform titles, 25.18G
Vernacular vs. Greek or Latin forms of personal names,
22.3B2
Versions (Bible)
capitalization, A.19K
definition, App. D
uniform titles, 25.18A11
Versions (drafts) as manuscripts, 4.2A1
Versions (music), see Arrangements (music)
Versions, published, of manuscripts, see Published versions
of manuscripts
Versions (stories and legends), uniform titles, 25.12B, see
also Adaptations
Verso, definition, App. D
Videocartridges, specific material designation, 7.5B1
Videocasselles, specific material designation, 7.5B1
Videodiscs, see also Optical discs
diameter, 7.5D4
duration, 7.5B2
duration and number of frames, 7.7B 10
specific material designation, terms for, 7.5B1
Videorecordings, see also Motion pictures
definition, App. D
general material designation, 1.1C1
vidcorecording system, 7.7B10
Videoreels, specific material designation, 7.5B1
Videotapes
gauge, 7.5D3
generation of copy, 7.7B10
length, 7.7B1D
number of lines and fields, 7.7B10
Views (cartographic materials)
definition, App. D
specific material designation, 3.5B1
Viscounts and viscountesses, see Titles of nobility
Visually impaired users, works for, see Braille works;
Tactile materials
Vocal music
abbreviations for, B.9 n2
collections, 25.34C1 nl5
medium of performance, see Medium of performance
(music)
notes on, 5.7B1
terms for, 25.30B9, 25.30B10
translations, 25.35F
Vocal scores, see also Musical works that include words,
entry
definition, App. D
specific material designation, 5.5B1
uniform titles, 25.35D
Voice parts (music), see also Part (music)
abbreviations, B.9 n2
terms for, 25.30B8
and works with same title, 25.30B 1 1
Voices (music) in uniform titles, 25.30B1, see also Medium
of performance (music)
Volumes
definition, App. D
multiple, see Multipart items
number of, see Pagination
VV (letters of alphabet) in early monographs, transcription
of, 2.14E
Wales, place names, 23. 4 D
Wall charts (graphic materials)
dimensions, 8.5D6
specific material designation, 8.5B1
Walloon language, initial articles, E.1A
Web sites, see Integrating resources; Remote access
resources
Welsh language
abbreviations, B.15
initial articles, E.l A
Width, see also Dimensions; Gauge
cartographic materials, 3.5D1, 3.5D3
printed monographs, 2.5D2
single sheets, 2.5 D4
AACR2 Revision 2002: 2004 Update
Index-43
INDEX
Width cont,
sound cassettes, 6.5D5
sound tape reels, 6.5D6
Wind instruments in uniform titles, 25.30B5
"With" notes, 1.7B21
cartographic materials, 3.7B21
continuing resources, 12.7B22
electronic resources, 9.7B21
graphic materials, 8.7B21
microforms, U.7B21
motion pictures, 7.7B21
music, 5.7B21
printed monographs, 2.7B21
sound recordings, 6.7B21
three-dimensional artefacts, 10.7B21
Wives, see Married women
Woodwind instruments in uniform titles, 25.30B5
Words or phrases, see also Designations; Function,
designations of; Interpolations in description
in entry under given name, 22. 1C, 22.8A1
given name, added to, 22.19A
government names, added to, 24. 6C
indicating authorship, 21. 5C, 22.1 ID
with statements of responsibility, 1.1F12, 1.3F14
titles, added to, see Additions to titles
Words or phrases as names, see also Pseudonyms
entry, 21.5C
headings, 22.11
references, 26.2A1, 26.2A3
Works
definition, 25.1 nl
as uniform title, 25.8
Works created after 1500, uniform titles, 25.3
Works created before 1501, uniform titles, 25.4, see abo
Early printed monographs; Incunabula
World Wide Web, see Remote access resources
Writers, see Personal authors, entry
X
x, indicating "see" reference, 20.4
xx, indicating "see also" reference, 20.4
Y
Yiddish language, initial articles, E.1A
Yiddish names, 22.3C2 n4, see also Romanization
Yugoslavia, place names, 23.4C
Z
Zoroastrian scriptures, see Avesta
Index-44
AACR2 Revision 2002; 2004 Update
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11